JP2019150180A - Reel type game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a highly amusing reel type game machine.SOLUTION: A reel type game machine is configured so as to successively execute clear processing of a difference number counter, extinction processing of an advantageous section indicator, and processing for turning off an advantageous section flag when shifting to a normal section from an advantageous section.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a spinning machine.

  In a spinning machine (slot machine), one game is started when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of game medals, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. As a result of the rotation of the plurality of rows of reels (reel), the reels are stopped using the rotary stop device (stop button) for stopping the rotation, and the predetermined pattern on the effective line When a combination of (for example, a winning combination such as “777”) is lined up, a special gaming state in which a profit state is higher for the player than in the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of a small role or the like is higher than in a normal state) ) Is a common type. Here, in a spinning-reel type gaming machine, when an image for production to enhance the fun of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a form synchronized with the rotating and stopping operations of the reel There is a structure to predict and enjoy the outcome of the game while comparing the design displayed on the spinning cylinder with the effect image displayed on the display. There are many things.

JP2015-116444

  It is desirable to provide a revolving game machine with high interest.

The spinning machine according to this aspect is
Main processing to control the progress of the game,
Interrupt processing to be executed by interruption every predetermined time during the execution of the main processing,
Multiple reels,
Multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means,
An information display section capable of displaying information;
With
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch, an instruction game for displaying information that can identify the advantageous operation mode on the information display unit,
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indicated game can be executed;
An advantageous section indicator that can take at least a notification mode that is an advantageous section and a notification mode that is a normal section;
An advantageous section flag that is turned on when the advantageous section is,
A differential counter that can measure the number of game values acquired in the advantageous section after a new transition to the advantageous section,
When the counter value of the difference sheet counter satisfies a predetermined end condition, it is configured to shift to a normal section,
As the main process,
Processing A for clearing the counter value of the difference sheet counter;
Process B for making the advantageous section indicator a notification mode that is the normal section;
And at least the process C for turning off the advantageous section flag from on to off can be executed,
In the case of shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section, the spinning machine is configured to execute the process C after executing the process A and the process B.

  According to the rotary type gaming machine according to this aspect, there is an effect that a highly interesting gaming machine can be provided.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a state in which the door of the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal slot in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications in the swivel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 shows a list 3 of symbol combinations in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the swivel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of a small combination, a re-playing combination, and a bonus lottery probability in the spinning game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the non-recoverable error processing on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the timer interruption process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotation drive control process on the main control board side in the rotation type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the rotation drive control process on the main control board side in the rotation type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram relating to the rotating operation of the reel in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a push order display image diagram in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of sub-side power-off processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the effect determination processing at the time of start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a battle effect execution feasibility determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of an AT effect determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the restoration possibility determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of processing at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of processing during AT at the time of start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the special warning process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the specialization process when the start lever is operated on the side of the sub-control board in the swivel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the internal BB advantageous processing at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the process at the time of the first cylinder stop acceptance on the sub-control board side in the cylinder-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the process at the time of accepting the second torso stop on the sub-control board side in the torso type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the third related-related effect determination process at the time of stopping on the sub control board in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the process at the time of the third cylinder stop acceptance on the sub-control board side in the rotary game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of standby screen display control processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 60 is an operation diagram in a winning game of replay applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 61 is an operation diagram in a re-winning game applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 62 is an operation diagram in a winning game of replay applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 63 is an operation diagram in a winning game of replay applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a sectional side view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the structure inside a hopper. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows arrangement | positioning with the medal auxiliary tank HS and the full detection electrode DE. It is the schematic which shows the magnitude | size and position of a full detection electrode and screw BS. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel belt | band | zone. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel belt | band | zone. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the rotation start freezing execution determination process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the freeze execution determination process at the time of stop on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an AT start effect execution image diagram in the rotary gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is a lamp unit lighting configuration image that can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode that can be applied to the rotating game machine according to the present example. FIG. 79 is an example of a configuration relating to payout that can be applied to the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present example. FIG. 80 is an example 1 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp that can be applied to the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 81 is an example 2 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp that can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 82 is an example 3 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present example. FIG. 83 is an example 4 of the lighting mode of the Max bet lamp, which can be applied to the rotating type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 84 is an example 1 of an operation at the time of adjusting a checkout button, which can be applied to the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 85 is an example 2 of the action at the time of the adjustment button operation, which can be applied to the rotary type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 86 is an example 3 of the action at the time of the adjustment button operation, which can be applied to the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 87 is an example 4 of the action at the time of operating the adjustment button, which can be applied to the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing a first mode of timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off, and FIG. 88 (b) shows a second timing of power-supply of the gaming machine and power-off. It is a timing chart which shows the aspect of. FIG. 89 (a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89 (b) is the state of the setting key switch in the second mode. It is a table | surface which shows the relationship between an electric power feeding state and a condition. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a process for adding the number of credits, a process for paying out game medals, and a process for outputting a game medium giving sound. FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on main control board M. FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of an AT state transition control process on the main control board side, which can be applied to the spinning cylinder game machine according to this example. FIG. 94 is a winning information generation table in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 95 is an effect group number determination table 1 in the spinning reel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 96 is the production group number determination table 2 in the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 97 is an effect group number determination table 3 in the spinning reel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 98 is an example of the configuration of the lottery table in the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 99 is an AT execution effect image diagram 1 in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present example. FIG. 100 is an effect execution image diagram 2 during an AT in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present example. FIG. 101 is an effect execution image diagram 3 during an AT in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 102 is an effect execution execution image diagram 4 during AT in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 103 is a symbol combination list 4 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 104 is a list of condition devices in the rotating type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 105 is a list of a small combination, a re-playing combination, and a bonus lottery probability in the rotary type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 106 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of a rotating type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 107 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the non-recoverable error process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing (fourth sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 118 is an example table of state transitions related to the AT in the swivel game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of AT lottery execution processing on the main control board side in the spinning-rotor game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of freeze lottery execution processing on the main control board side in the spinning-rotor game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the remaining number-of-games management process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 126 is an RT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the in-AT state start control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 128 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 129 is a flowchart of a game section transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 130 is a flowchart of a timer interruption process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 131 is a flowchart of a power-off process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of sub-side program start processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 133 is a flowchart of sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 134 is a flowchart of a sub-side power-off process on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 135 is a flowchart of one-command processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 136 is a table showing the relationship between the type of effect and the operation (reproduction) start timing of the effect. FIG. 137 is a flowchart of processing at the time of operating a start lever on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of processing during AT at the time of operating the start lever on the sub control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the special indication process at the time of start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the rotating type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 140 is a flowchart of the specialization process when adding a start lever on the sub-control board side in the swivel type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 141 is a flowchart of an internal BB advantageous process at the time of operating the start lever on the sub control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 142 is a flowchart of processing at the time of acceptance of the first rotation stop on the sub-control board side in the rotation type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 143 is a flowchart of processing at the time of accepting the second torso stop on the sub control board side in the torsional gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 144 is a flowchart of the third cylinder stop acceptance process on the sub-control board side in the rotary gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of the effect content determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 146 is a subroutine showing a scenario lottery table determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 147 is a table showing a scenario lottery table (A) and an effect lottery table distribution table (B) in the spinning reel game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 148 is a table showing an effect lottery table in the rotary type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect that progresses through an effect content determination process in the spinning-reel game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 150 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the spinning-reel game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 151 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the rotating type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 152 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the spinning-reel game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 153 is an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the rotating type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 154 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the rotating type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 155 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the rotating type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing effects in the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 157 is an image diagram showing effects in the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 158 is an image diagram showing effects in the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 159 is an AT state transition diagram in the spinning game machine according to Modification 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 160 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to Modification 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a part of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating type gaming machine according to Modification 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 162 is an example table of state transitions related to AT in the spinning-reel game machine according to Modification 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing scenario lottery table determination processing in the spinning-reel game machine according to Modification 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 164 shows an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the rotating type gaming machine according to Modification 1-1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 165 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to Modification 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing a part of the AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the rotating type gaming machine according to Modification 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 167 is an example table of state transitions related to AT in the spinning-reel game machine according to Modification 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing a scenario lottery table determination process in the rotating type gaming machine according to Modification 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 169 is an effect selection probability table (A) and a scenario selection probability table (B) in the spinning type gaming machine according to the modified example 1-2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 170 is a block diagram (A) showing an RT state transition diagram and a block diagram (B) showing an AT state transition diagram, in the swivel game machine according to Modification 1-3 from the third embodiment. is there. FIG. 171 is a block diagram illustrating an AT state transition diagram according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 172 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 173 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating effects performed in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 175 is an execution image diagram of the rare role suggesting effect applicable to this example. FIG. 176 is an execution image diagram of the rare role suggestion effect applicable to this example. FIG. 177 is an execution image diagram of the rare role suggestion effect applicable to this example. FIG. 178 is an example of a selection mode of a rare role suggesting effect applicable to this example. FIG. 179 is a flowchart of freeze lottery execution processing on the main control board side in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 180 is a button effect execution image diagram according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 181 is a selection candidate character determination image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 182 is a selection candidate character determination image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 183 is a selection candidate character determination image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 184 is a selection candidate character determination image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 185 is a back lamp effect execution image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 186 is a back lamp effect execution image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 187 is a back lamp effect execution image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 188 is a push order navigation execution image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 189 is a push order navigation execution image diagram applicable to this example. FIG. 190 is an example of a configuration of volume and BGM tempo applicable to this example. FIG. 191 is a list of basic specifications in the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 192 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotary type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 193 is a list 1 of symbol combinations in the rotary type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 194 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 195 is a symbol combination list 3 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 196 is a list of condition devices in the rotating type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 197 is a list of a small combination, a re-playing combination, and a bonus lottery probability in the spinning type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 198 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 199 is a flowchart of setting change device control processing on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the non-recoverable error process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 201 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 202 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 203 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 204 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 205 is a flowchart of an AT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 206 is a diagram showing a low-accuracy advantageous section table (left) and a high-probability advantageous section table (right). FIG. 207 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 208 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 209 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 210 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 211 is an RT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 212 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 213 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 214 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 215 is a flowchart of processing at the time of timer interruption on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the rotation drive control process on the main control board side in the rotation type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 217 is a flowchart of the rotation drive control process on the main control board side in the rotation type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 218 is an image diagram relating to the rotation operation of the reels in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power-off process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing an outline of an advantageous section remaining game number counter, a difference number counter, a lighting flag, and an advantageous section flag stored in a fixed storage area of the built-in RAMC 120. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the order of the advantageous section end processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 7 segment display, and the storage area for making 8 LED light or extinguish. It shows a state in which lighting control is performed on four 7-segment displays by dynamic control. FIG. 223 (a) shows a state where the lighting control is performed on the 7-segment display D, FIG. 223 (b) shows a state where the lighting control is performed on the 7-segment display A, and FIG. FIG. 223 (d) shows a state where the 7-segment display C is turned on, and FIG. 223 (e) shows a state where the 7-segment display D is turned on. Indicates the state. FIG. 224 (a) is a diagram illustrating processing of the difference number counter for each game (for each unit game). FIG. 224 (b) is a diagram showing processing of the advantageous section remaining game number counter for each game (for each unit game). FIG. 225 is a diagram showing how the difference number counter value changes as the game progresses. FIG. 226 is a diagram showing how the difference number counter value changes as the game progresses. FIG. 227 is a diagram showing how the difference number counter value changes as the game progresses. FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating how the difference number counter value changes as the game progresses. FIG. 229 (a) is a diagram illustrating processing of the difference number counter for each game (for each unit game). FIG. 229 (b) is a diagram illustrating processing of the advantageous section remaining game number counter for each game (for each unit game). FIG. 230 is a table showing the number of values for determining the winning probability of each condition device in each of a plurality of gaming states. FIG. 231 is an RT state transition diagram (upper stage) and an AT state transition diagram (lower stage) realized by the table shown in FIG. 230. FIG. 232 (a-1) is a table showing the advantageous section shift lottery in general, and FIG. 232 (a-2) is a table comparing the advantageous section shift lottery (a-2) in the BB. Yes, FIG. 232 (b-1) is a table showing an advantageous section transition lottery in general, FIG. 232 (b-2) is a table showing an advantageous section transition lottery in BB, and FIG. c-1) is a table showing the relationship between advantageous section transition lottery and AT winning in general, and FIG. 232 (c-2) is a table showing the relationship between advantageous section transition lottery and AT winning in BB. is there. FIG. 233 is a list of basic specifications in the rotating game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 234 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotary type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 235 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 236 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 237 is a symbol combination list 3 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 238 is a symbol combination list 4 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 239 is a symbol combination list 5 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 240 is a list of condition devices in the rotating game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 241 is a list of a small combination, a re-playing combination, and a bonus lottery probability in the spinning type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 242 is a list of a small combination, a re-playing combination, and a bonus lottery probability in the spinning type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 243 is an RT transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 244 shows the winning rate of winning 01 when the RB is not operating and when the RB is operating, in the rotary gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 245 is a list of basic specifications in the rotating game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 246 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotary type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 247 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 248 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 249 is a symbol combination list 3 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 250 is a symbol combination list 4 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 251 is a list of condition devices in the rotary type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 252 is a list of a small combination, a re-playing combination and a bonus lottery probability in the spinning type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 253 is an RT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 254 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIGS. 255A and 255B are diagrams showing changes in the RT state and the AT state. FIG. 256 is a list of basic specifications in the rotary type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 257 is a list of reel arrangements in the rotary type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 258 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 259 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 260 is a symbol combination list 3 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 261 is a symbol combination list 4 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 262 is a symbol combination list 5 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 263 is a symbol combination list 6 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 264 is a list of condition devices in the rotating type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 265 is a list of a small combination, a re-playing combination, and a bonus lottery probability in the spinning type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 266 is an RT transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 267 is an image view of the bonus winning game in the spinning-reel game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 268 is an RT transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to Modification 1 from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 269 is a table relating to the state ratio in the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 270 is an AT state transition diagram in the spinning game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 271 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to Modification 1 from the ninth embodiment. FIG. 272 is an operation diagram according to another configuration applicable to the rotating game machine according to the present example. FIG. 273 is a diagram relating to a state ratio applicable to the rotating game machine according to the present example.

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer, sometimes referred to as a lottery) to determine some game content in a revolving game machine. It also includes pseudo random numbers (for example, hard random numbers as random numbers, built-in random numbers generated by a main control chip including a CPU, and soft random numbers as pseudo random numbers). For example, a so-called “basic random number” that affects the outcome of the game, specifically, a “winning random number” related to a special role or a winning combination (small role, replaying role) for shifting to a special game, etc. Can be mentioned. “CPU” is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) used, processing performance, or the like. “Power interruption (power interruption)” means that the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine falls below a certain level regardless of whether the power switch provided on the gaming machine is operated or not. This also includes shutting down the power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as unit damage or power outages. “ROM” is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and physically retains information (for example, “1” for a device configuration that conducts when a current for reading data is applied, It will be “0” if the device configuration is not.) RAM is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and electrically holds information (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, “1” is stored if it is stored, and it is not stored. It is generally “0.” In general, backup power is supplied to some or all of the data stored in the RAM when the power is interrupted). The “game state” is, for example, a special game state in which a game medal can be easily acquired and advantageous to the player (so-called jackpot game, such as a bonus game, a type 1 BB, a type 2 BB, or the like) ), The re-game probability variation game state (RT state) in which the re-game player win rate is higher (or lower) than the normal game state in which the re-game player win rate is a predetermined value, and the winning role Order of the reels for winning a prize, an AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined, and the like. Also in the normal gaming state, the lottery probability of transition to the RT state, AT state, ART state is different, high probability normal gaming state, low probability normal gaming state, etc. (in this example, referred to as lottery state) ). Also, there is no problem even if the game states are combined {in addition, these game states and functions (for example, a lottery transition to the AT state, output of a notification instruction related to the reel stop order, etc.) control the game progress. There is no problem even if all are mounted on the main control board side}. In this example, the state related to the AT and the RT state are individually described. The RT state is referred to as “RT1” and the state related to the AT is referred to as “normal game state”. As a state relating to ART, the state relating to ART may be referred to as “normal gaming state” or the like. The “winning role” is the type (or condition device number) of the condition device won by internal lottery (sometimes referred to as an internal lottery). The “notification state” is a state related to an AT capable of executing push order navigation described later, and even if a game is won by a condition device that does not execute push order navigation because the winning combination is not different depending on the reel stop order. If the state related to the AT is a state in which the push order navigation can be performed, the “notification state” is set. The “counter value” is also referred to as “notification game executable number”, and is the AT remaining game number or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when “the number of notification games that can be executed” is 1 or more (the game that has become “0” may be included), the push order navigation described later can be executed. In addition, as the “notification game executable number”, the number of game media obtained based on the winning of the small role (mainly the push order bell role) (the number obtained by subtracting the inserted number from the paid-out number) The number of wins for the order bell may be adopted. In addition, the “special notification state” is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and is referred to as “addition special state” in this example. The “specific condition” is a condition under which the AT counter value can be subtracted. For example, the specific condition is that, for example, one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, push order bell combination) is won. “Type 1 special character” is a character that increases the number of symbol combinations related to winnings per prescribed number or increases the probability that the conditional device related to winnings per prescribed number will operate. The operation can be continued until a game result is obtained that does not exceed 12 times, and is sometimes referred to as RB (regular bonus). "Type 1 special combination continuous operation device" is a device that can operate the first type special combination continuously, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed. The operation is terminated and may be referred to as a BB (Big Bonus) or a first type BB. “Type 2 special combination” is a combination that activates the condition device related to winning regardless of the result of the combination lottery. The combination is activated when a predetermined game result is obtained. In such a case, the operation is terminated and may be referred to as CB (challenge bonus). "Type 2 special feature continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate type 2 special features, and is activated when a combination of specific symbols is displayed. The operation ends and is sometimes referred to as MB (middle bonus) or second type BB. The “ordinary accessory” is an accessory that increases the number of symbol combinations related to winning for each specified number or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number will operate. It operates when a combination is displayed and ends when the result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as SB (single bonus). The “all JACIN type” is a configuration in which, when the first type BB combination wins, it is regarded as having been JACIN and is always in the RB during the execution of the first type BB. The “JACIN lottery type” is a configuration that repeatedly executes non-RB and RB during execution of the first type BB. In addition, the “non-control reel” is a reel in which the pull-in control that can be executed after performing the stop operation is not executed, and is stopped at the nearest reel position where the stop operation can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation is accepted. It is a reel. The “all CB type” is a configuration that is always in the CB when the second type BB is executed. The “CB transfer lottery type” is a configuration that repeatedly executes non-CB and CB during execution of the second type BB.

  Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described.

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the feature (outline) of the spinning-rotor type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the configuration), a basic structure on the front side of the rotary type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. The rotating type gaming machine P mainly includes a front door (also referred to as a front door), a back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a base body), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, a main control. A substrate M (a substrate on which the main control chip C including the CPUMC is mounted) and a sub control substrate S (a substrate on which the sub control chip SC including the CPUSC is mounted) are configured. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for enabling visual recognition of a gaming state, a mechanism for enabling input of game media, a mechanism for operating a reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, the reel window D160, the insertion number display lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the re-gaming lamp D290, the insertion possible lamp D300, the special gaming state display device D250, the number of credits, as a mechanism for making the gaming state visible. A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section indicator YH, and the like are attached. Further, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of game media and inputting the number of bets (the number of bets), a medal insertion slot D170, a bet button D220, and a mechanism for enabling the payout of the inserted game media are settled. Button D60 is attached. As a mechanism for operating the reel, a start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached. Note that the spinning-reel game machine in the present embodiment is a player to which a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2, and the like are attached. It has a console that protrudes to the side. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

<Mechanism to make game state visible>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible is described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member formed of a synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured such that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be seen through the reel window D160. Also, the insertion number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (to insert a game medal necessary to start one game) are lit. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the insertion number display lamp D210 is constituted by three LEDs (lamps) of a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and one game medal is bet. 1 bet lamp D211: lit, 2 bet lamp D212: off, 3 bet lamp D213: off, 1 bet lamp D211: lit, 2 bet lamp D212 when two game medals are bet : Lights up, 3 bet lamp D213: Turns off, and when there are three game medals bet, 1 bet lamp D211: Lights up, 2 bet lamp D212: Lights up, 3 bet lamp D213: Lights up (re-game) However, this is not the case in the next game that is stopped and displayed, and details will be described later). Further, the start lamp D180 is configured by an LED and is lit when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is accepted), and the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (no operation is accepted). It is configured to turn off in some cases. Further, the re-game lamp D290 is configured by an LED, and is lit up when the re-game is stopped and displayed, and is turned off when the next game where the re-game is stopped is completed. The insertion possible lamp D300 is lit (may be blinked) when the insertion of a game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is effective, or when the operation of the bet button D220 is effective, and the insertion of a game medal is possible. It is configured to turn off when it is invalid or the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. The special game state display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. The special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a case, the total number of payouts in the effect display device S40 (also referred to as a second information display unit) to be described later. By displaying so that the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, a user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained. The credit amount display device D200 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (credit number) stored in the gaming machine as medals held by the player. The payout amount display device (push order display device) D270 is configured by a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button) The condition device (the so-called push order (sometimes referred to as a role with a push order), which may differ depending on the winning combination depending on the stop order of D43). Is a reel that is most advantageous to the player in a game in which a profit rate (the number of payouts, the subsequent RT state, etc., which can be different) is generally established. The stop order can be notified (the notification may be referred to as push order navigation). Thus, the payout amount display device (push order display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays of the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order that provides the highest profit to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 plays games according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as a first information display unit) among the states related to AT (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games that can stay in a state relating to AT that is advantageous for the player to be guaranteed when progressing (in this example, it is also referred to as a push order navigation state or a notification game and will be described in detail later). It is configured as follows. Note that the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided. In such a configuration, the player can be configured to display the number of games that can stay in the AT state on the effect display device S40. Can recognize the number of games in which the state related to the advantageous AT is guaranteed and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices: a payout number display device and a push order display device.

  Further, the advantageous section indicator YH is constituted by an LED, and is configured to turn on when it is an “advantageous section” and to be turned off when it is not an “advantageous section” (for lighting and extinguishing timings). Will be described later). Here, in the case of the spinning type gaming machine according to the present example, a special gaming state (so-called big hit game, which is a bonus game, in which a game medal can be easily obtained and which is advantageous to the player, like the conventional spinning type gaming machine. Or the first type BB, the second type BB, etc.), and the winning rate of the re-gamer is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the re-gamer is a predetermined value. The re-play probability variation game state (RT state), the reel stop order for winning the winning combination, the AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, the RT state and the AT state Combined ART (assist replay time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these “gaming state”, one of three “game sections” of “normal section”, “standby section” and “advantage section” Can be set Going on. In this example, the “standby section” is not set, and any one of the “normal section” and “advantage section” is set. Among these, the “advantageous section” is positioned as being relatively advantageous to the player over the other “game sections”. For example, the “gaming state” is an AT state or an ART state. “Advantageous section” is associated. That is, when the “gaming state” is in the AT state or ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH is lit, but as will be described later, the setting control for the “game section” is also the setting control for the “gaming state”. Similarly, since it is performed on the main control board side that controls the progress of the game, whether or not the game progress status is relatively advantageous for the player by the lighting / extinction status of the advantageous section indicator YH, It can be communicated to players without lies. As will be described later, if the “advantageous section” continues until a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the “normal section” is forcibly set. Since the state related to the AT is also forcibly terminated (information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), the change of the set “game section” also affects the transition of the “game state” As a result, it is possible to automatically suppress a significant increase in gambling due to a “game state” such as an AT state or an ART state with a relatively high degree of design freedom. It is. As described above, when the “advantageous section” continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the “normal section” is forcibly set, that is, the “advantageous section” ends. However, the termination condition of the “advantageous section” is not limited to this. The end condition of the “advantageous section” in the spinning-reel game machine according to this example is “the push that can acquire the small combination with the largest number of payouts among the small combinations that make up the push combination (the combination with push order)” One execution of sequential navigation (for example, when there are seven, three, and one small combination as the small combination constituting the push forward combination, the push navigation in which the largest number of payouts can be acquired is seven. If there is a push order that can be acquired 7 or 1 by the push order, and a push order that can be obtained 3 by the push order, the push order navigation that can be obtained by 3 is referred to here. Does not apply to push order navigation) or “Wins any of BB, RB, MB” and satisfies “arbitrary end condition (40G1 set loop lottery not selected (AT), fixed 32G Elapsed (gaseous signs, etc.)) or “Advantageous zone 1500G” is the end condition To have. In the case of a specification in which there is no push order bell combination (eg, a specification in which there is a replay push order for transitioning to the RT state, but there is no small combination in which the number of payouts varies depending on the push order) The condition for ending the advantageous section of “one push order navigation that can acquire the small combination with the largest number of payouts” is excluded. Further, in the present embodiment, since the small combination constituting the push combination is composed of the small combination corresponding to the 11-sheet combination and the small combination corresponding to the 1-sheet combination, “the number of payouts is the largest. The “execution of one push order navigation capable of acquiring a small combination” refers to notifying the push order in which eleven medals can be acquired (11 winning combinations can be won).

<Mechanism to enable input of game media>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for enabling input of game media will be described. The medal slot D170 is a slot for game medals, and the game medal inserted into the slot is guided to the inside of the gaming machine in a situation where medals can be received. Also, an insertion acceptance sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided in the gaming machine as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, and are guided into the gaming machine. When it is determined that a game medal has been inserted normally, the inserted medal can be detected as a bet. The bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to bet a stored medal (credit medal) by the operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and the stored medal (credit medal) and / or bet medal can be paid back to the player by the operation. Yes. Note that the game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the reel operation by the operation. The stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and the operation of the reels can be stopped in sequence by operating the respective stop buttons. Has been.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, the main part of the other mechanism provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to a perspective view showing the internal configuration of the rotating game machine P by opening the front door DU of FIG. The front door DU has an effect display device S40 for displaying effects such as a notice effect and a background effect as a mechanism for enhancing the fun of the game, and a game effect lamp D26 that can be turned on in various lighting modes. Middle panel (medium decorative panel) which is a member formed by a signal relay door substrate D, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, a speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, a synthetic resin, and the like. An upper panel D130, a lower panel D140, and the like are provided. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part on the back side of the front door DU so that a display unit that displays the effect or the like can be visually recognized through a perspective region formed on the upper panel. In addition, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have light emission sources that emit light according to the progress of the game of the rotating game machine P. The decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have decorative lamps on the right and left sides of the lower panel D140, respectively. Unit D150 is provided, and LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right side and the left side across upper panel D130 (decorative lamp unit D150 and LED lamp unit S10 may be collectively referred to as a lamp unit. ). In addition, a door substrate D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU. Input signals from the stop button D40, the start lever D50, the checkout button D60, etc. described above are attached to the door substrate D. Is input, and has a function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to a main control board M described later. Further, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided in the vicinity of the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU, corresponding to the medal insertion slot D170, and the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 is detected and simplified. It has a function of performing authenticity, guiding an appropriate medal to a hopper H40 described later, and returning an inappropriate medal to a medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door substrate D. The middle panel is the upper part of the console, the lower part of the upper panel D130, and the panel part including the reel window described above. Further, the sub input button SB and the cross key SB2 attached to the above-described console D190 are an operation on a menu screen to be described later or a button repeated striking effect on the side of the sub control board S (operating the sub input button SB repeatedly. This is a member used for the progress of a bonus game or a mini game (for example, an effect of success or failure of entering the “AT state”). The front door DU of the swivel type gaming machine P can detect the open / close state of the medal tray D230 and the front door DU that receive a game medal (or may be simply referred to as a medal) discharged from the discharge port D240. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a key hole D260, and a key (door key) that matches the shape of the key hole D260 is inserted into the key hole D260 {in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)} The front door DU can be opened. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the door key is inserted into the keyhole D260 {and in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}, so that an error state (door opening error or the like) can be canceled. Yes. Further, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220. The bet button lamp S50 is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 is lit (or flashes). ), The player can perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is effective. Further, a stop button lamp S60 is provided in the stop button D40 (provided for each of the three stop buttons of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43), and the stop button lamp S60. Is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and the player confirms that the operation of the stop button D40 is effective depending on whether or not the stop button lamp S60 is lit (or blinking) and / or the lighting color. Can be perceived. It should be noted that since it is configured that only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the valid stop button D40 is lit in the lighting color corresponding to the valid stop button D40, for example, the left stop button D41 is invalid. When the middle stop button D42 is valid and the right stop button D43 is valid, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is turned on, and the right stop is stopped. Like the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the button D43, the lighting modes of the three stop button lamps S60 can be different from each other. Further, by changing the lighting color and lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (may be different such as lighting / flashing, or may be different such as low-speed flashing / high-speed flashing), push order navigation is executed. In the game, it may be configured so that the player can easily determine the stop button to be stopped at present, for example, all reels are rotating and the order of pushing “left → middle → right” is correct ( When the push order bell that is the maximum payout number) is selected, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button flashes in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop corresponding to the right stop button When the button lamp is lit blue and the player then operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off and the player presses the middle stop button. Blink white stop button lamp may be configured so as to light the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button blue.

  Next, a back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a base) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to substantially the center of the back box so that a part of the back box can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (stepping motor or the like) for the reel M50. The reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel part is formed of synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel part (on the reel band MO). And based on operation of each stop button in the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, it is comprised so that rotation operation and stop operation | movement of each reel part are enabled. Although not shown, an LED (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a reel backlight or a spinning cylinder backlight) is provided inside the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LED lights up The light is transmitted through the outer periphery of the reel portion so that the outer periphery of the reel portion can be visually recognized (the details of the back lamp effect, which is an effect using the rotating drum backlight, will be described later). In addition, above the reel M50, a winding substrate K, which will be described later, for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is stored.

  Further, a main control board M, which will be described later, which controls the entire game is stored above the reel M50, and on the left side of the reel M50 is an effect display device S40, an LED lamp unit S10, and a speaker S20 shown in FIG. A sub-control board S, which will be described later, that controls various effects performed using the above-described information is stored. The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting / reset capable of executing a setting value change, error cancellation, and the like. Button M30 is connected. In FIG. 2, the setting key switch M20 and the setting / reset button M30 are not shown, but they may be provided at appropriate positions on the main control board M (that is, the front door DU is opened). Otherwise, it may be in a location where it is difficult to access artificially).

  Below the reel M50, there are provided a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire revolving game machine P E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through the coin shooter D90 and are paid out from the discharge port D240. In addition, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the rotating game machine P is also provided on the front surface of the power supply board E (also referred to as a power supply unit E). Details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the spinning cylinder type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion acceptance sensor D10s serving as a passage for game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 in the vicinity of the door substrate D, and below the insertion reception sensor D10s, a game medal is discharged to the discharge opening D240. For example, a coin shooter D90 is provided. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on dimensions, and accepting only game medals that conform to the standard dimensions. The selected medal (or other foreign matter) is returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. If the player inserts a game medal before operating the start lever D50 (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medal is selected by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and only those satisfying the standard are selected. A medal that does not satisfy the standard and is inserted into the hopper H40 is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, when a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is not valid), regardless of whether the standard is satisfied, the inserted game medal Is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. In addition, a sensor for medal insertion, which will be described in detail later, is provided inside the insertion acceptance sensor D10s (the back of the flow path), and when a game medal that has been received satisfying the dimensional standard passes, the first insertion sensor D20s. The signal is detected by the second input sensor D30s, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M described later.

  Next, a sensor related to medal insertion will be described in detail. A game medal inserted into the medal slot D170 first passes through the slot acceptance sensor D10s. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, it turns on when the two protruding mechanisms are pressed, and the game medal can normally pass through the passage. . Also, with this configuration, when a foreign object that is not a game medal (a foreign object that does not satisfy the standard, for example, a diameter smaller than the game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed down. Not. Such medals cannot be maintained in the standing state, and thus cannot pass through the passage (the medals fall down), and are paid back to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine that there is an error even when the on-time continues for a predetermined time or longer (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off). .

  When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, it passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s immediately after passing. The throwing sensors (first throwing sensor D20s and second throwing sensor D30s) are composed of two sensors (adjacently arranged at an interval smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off-state (the order of transition of the on / off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on / off time. It is configured.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to a front view and a top view of the medal payout device H in FIG. The medal payout device H is operated with the checkout button in the state where credits (game medals stored electronically inside the gaming machine) or bets (medals inserted to start the game) exist. It is activated when a game medal is paid out by winning or winning. In operation, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 about the disk rotation axis H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H are displaced from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240 by displacing the discharge urging means H70. The payout sensors (the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s) are composed of two sensors, and the ON / OFF status of each sensor (the ON / OFF state of the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s). It is configured to detect various errors by monitoring the order of transition of the combination of off, etc.) and the time of on / off. More specifically, for example, when the game medal outlet H60 normally passes, the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off due to the displacement of the discharge biasing means H70. 1 payout sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout Sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = off, so that when a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected It is possible to exemplify the configuration of an error.

  Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the swivel type gaming machine in the present embodiment. The spinning-reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a prescribed number (the maximum number of game medals that can be bet in one game) of 3, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames. The effective line for which a winning determination is made is one line of “upper left reel M51, middle middle M52, lower right M53”. The maximum payout number is 11 and the minimum payout number is 1 (correspondence between the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). In addition, the order of priority winning (in order of drawing-in priority) is “re-playing role → small role (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus”. For example, when the re-playing role and bonus are established at the same time The symbol combination which becomes the re-game player is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. Also, when the bell and watermelon are established, if a stop button is pressed at a position where both can be retracted (positions within 4 frames to the winning stop position), priority is given to a small part with a large number of payouts. It is configured to retract. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and the number of frames of each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of the effective line is changed (for example, 5 lines of 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to a line and changed to one line of the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. In addition, as a pull-in control when a push order small role that gives different profits to the player depending on the push order is won, a small role with a large number of payouts is operated when operated in a predetermined correct push order. Is given priority (number priority control), and can be displayed in a stop position (within 4 frames from the stop operation) when operated in an incorrect answer push order different from the correct answer push order. Among the symbols arranged), control (number priority control) is performed to increase the possibility of winning (the number of winning combinations among the plurality of winning symbol combinations is the highest).

  Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the swivel type gaming machine in the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames (0 to 19), and the symbols are “Black Seven”, “White Seven”, “ There are 10 types: “Sheep”, “Blank”, “Bell”, “Replay A”, “Replay B”, “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B”, and “Cherry”. Here, “blank” is a symbol included in the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute the winning combination, but a symbol that constitutes the winning combination including “blank” As a combination, for example, “watermelon B / replay A / blank” is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type of design is increased / decreased / changed.

  Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device. As will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, This one symbol combination is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (one line described above). In addition, even if the same type of symbols is not available on the active line, the same symbols are easily arranged in a line on the lines other than the active line when viewed from the player. It is configured so that three watermelon symbols are aligned on one line on the reel, such as aligned on a horizontal line). Further, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols that will be a first type BB combination (a so-called first type special combination, which is hereinafter referred to simply as a BB combination), 1 type BB-A (continuous operation of RB-A and finished with payout exceeding 264 sheets) and 1 type of BB-B (continuous operation of RB-B, 132 sheets) "Black Seven / Black Seven / Black Seven" and "Type 7 BB-C (continuous operation of RB-B and finished with more than 132 payouts)" It has three symbol combinations with “White Seven”. In the present embodiment, when the first type BB combination wins and the BB is executed (the combination is activated), one BB is executed in all the games in the BB during the execution of the BB. Refers to the lottery table, and is configured to draw a winning combination (small role, replaying combination) other than the winning combination (a method that does not switch the table referred to in the case of lottery during one BB execution) Hereinafter, it may be referred to as an all-JACIN type). Note that the format of the first type BB combination is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the table referred to in the combination lottery can be switched during the execution of one BB. Further, when the RT state is “RT1”, when the symbol combination corresponding to No. 14 to No. 16 corresponding to the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, it is configured to shift to RT0 (for details of the RT state) Will be described later). Note that “RT0” is more disadvantageous to the player than “RT1”, and thus transition from “RT1” to “RT0” may be referred to as falling. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to No. 17 which is replay 05 is stopped and displayed, “Black Seven” can be stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. When the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding replay 05 is stopped and displayed, “white seven” can be stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, when the pushing order bell which is a condition device of “winning-A1” to “winning-A6” to be described later is won, if the reels are stopped in the pushing order most advantageous for the player, the 21st to 27th When the combination of symbols “Wind 01” to “Win 03” corresponding to is stopped and 11 game medals are paid out, the reels are stopped in a pressing order different from the pressing order most advantageous to the player. Symbol combinations corresponding to “No. 08” to “No. 11” corresponding to Nos. 39 to 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In the figure, “-” indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, “bell-bell” corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed, 11 game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line of the middle reel M52.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the present embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may also be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the present embodiment, re-playing roles are provided from re-playing-A to re-playing-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53 are provided. Correspondingly, the replaying combination to be stopped and displayed can be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the item of “conditional device breakdown” in the rightmost column, according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. The “conditional device” item that is the third column from the right is a combination of symbol combinations that have the same winning number among the symbol combinations of a plurality of symbols that can be stopped and displayed. It is shown in Specifically, for example, in the “re-game-A” that is a condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, “re-game” is selected according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three symbol combinations of “01”, “replay 02”, and “replay 03” can be stopped and displayed. “Replay 01” and the like are names of symbol combinations, and there are a plurality of symbol combinations that can be “replay 01”. In addition, a name such as “replay 01” or a condition device such as “replay-A” may be referred to as a replay player, and a name such as “winning 01” or a condition device such as “winning-A1” may be used. A combination having a symbol combination that allows game medals to be paid out by stop display is sometimes referred to as a small role, and a condition that BB starts when stop display such as “1 type BB-A” is displayed. The device may be referred to as a BB role. In addition, when winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB role and the small role will be won, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the selected small role will stop. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the small role is not displayed without stopping, and the symbol corresponding to the small role is stopped and displayed. When the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42 and right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop display (cannot be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small role does not stop and is displayed. Is configured to stop display. Specifically, for example, in the case where “1 type BB-B + winning-C”, which is the condition device of the winning number 21, is won, cherry that is “winning 12” or “winning 13” and “1 type BB” Any of the black sevens that are “−B” can be stopped. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of the left reel M51 → the middle reel M52 → the right reel M53, (1) symbol numbers 0 to 4 on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop (FIG. 6). When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which the reel is positioned), the symbol number 4 corresponding to “winning 12” stops on the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52 Regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, “winning 12” is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are positioned on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, “winning 13” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to is stopped, and “winning 13” is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are positioned on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, “1” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to the “species BB-B” stops. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, “1” is placed in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to the “type BB-B” is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located in the lower stage of the right reel M53 in the third stop. In this case, symbol number 17 corresponding to “1 type BB-B” is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, “1” is placed in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to the “type BB-B” cannot be stopped, and neither of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

  Next, in the “Role” item, “Condition device” or what role the symbol combination that can be stopped is displayed is illustrated. “Normal replay” corresponding to the winning number 1 is stopped. Regardless of the order in which the buttons are pressed, this is a condition device related to replay where the replaying player whose RT state does not transition is stopped and displayed, and “reverse pressed white 7 replay” corresponding to winning number 2 Regardless, it is a condition device related to re-game where a re-gamer whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, but by reverse pressing (stopping the reel in the order of right reel M53 → middle reel M52 → left reel M51) An operation in which the range of symbol numbers 18 to 2 on the right reel M53, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 on the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 on the left reel M51 are located at the lower stage of each reel. timing By operating the stop button, “white seven” is stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the right reel M53, the middle reel M52 and the left reel M51, and when viewed from the player, the white seven appears to be aligned on the lower stage. Has been. In addition, in the game that was won by Re-Game-B and won the AT extra lottery, the player was elected to the AT extra lottery by performing an effect (details will be described later) to instruct to aim at “White Seven” by pressing it in reverse. It is comprised so that it can alert | report to a player. “Forward-pressed black 7-match replay” corresponding to the winning number 3 is a conditional device related to a replay in which a re-gamer whose RT state does not shift is stopped regardless of the press order of the stop button. The reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, the right reel By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is positioned at the lower stage of each reel, “Black Seven” is displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Is displayed in a stopped state, and when viewed from the player, the black sevens appear to be aligned at the bottom. In addition, in the game that was won by Re-Game-C and won the AT extra lottery, the player was elected to the AT extra lottery by performing an effect (details will be described later) instructing to aim for “Black Seven” by pushing forward. It is comprised so that it can alert | report to a player.

  In addition, “RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 4 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated). )), The re-game player whose stop display is different may be different, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the re-game 01, the re-game 02 or the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift. Is stopped and the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from “RT1” to “RT0” is stopped and displayed. In addition, “RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 5 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated). If the first stop reel is the middle reel M52, the replay 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from “RT1” to “RT0” is stopped and displayed. In addition, “RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 6 determines which of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 the first stop reel (operates which stop button is operated). If the first reel is the right reel M53, the replay 01 or the replay 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. If the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from “RT1” to “RT0” is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, “push order bell 123” to “push order bell 321” corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are condition devices in which the winning combination depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected may be different. For example, “left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3”, and in the case of “123”, “left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53” is stopped in the pressing order. For example, in the case of “winning A-1” (winning number 7), “123” = “Left → Middle → Right” is stopped in order (correct answer in the push order), which is the maximum number obtained. The symbol combination of “winning 01” from which eleven game medals can be acquired is stopped and displayed. Note that “123” in the “push order bell 123” indicates the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of sheets obtained for the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in the pressing order other than the pressing order in which the maximum number of acquired sheets can be acquired, that is, if the correct answer cannot be made in the pressing order, one sheet is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as “AT in progress state”, the push order of the re-game player and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states with different profit margins of the player not navigating the pushing order to the states relating to AT. The state related to AT will be described later.

  In addition, the “common bell” corresponding to the winning number 13 can acquire 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of winnings, even if any of winning prizes 04 to 07 stops, that is, the maximum profit is obtained regardless of the pushing order. It is a condition device that can be acquired, and is sometimes called a push order unquestioned bell. In addition, “Watermelon A” corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the parallel line. For example, the 60th prize in FIG. No. 14 has three watermelons A in the middle of each reel. In addition, “Watermelon B” corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily arranged in an oblique line. For example, the 66th prize in FIG. In the case of No. 16, three watermelons are aligned obliquely downward, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, “BB medium and weak rare role (diagonal bell alignment)” corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device that can align three bells on the active line, which will be described later, but won during BB. This is a condition device in which an AT addition lottery is executed. Also, “BB medium-rare small role (V-shaped bells)” corresponding to the winning number 18 is a conditional device that can stop and display the bell on the upper stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. As will be described in detail later, this is a condition device in which an AT addition lottery is executed by winning during BB.

  Next, in the item of “bonus winning information”, a numerical value from 0 to 3 is assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number that includes 1 type BB-A as the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role) (19) Bonus winning information of 1, winning type number (20-23) including 1 type BB-B, 2 winning winning information including 1 type BB-C, winning information (24-27) including 1 type BB-C It is said. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which BB is established and which BB combination is won. Details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item “winning / replay winning information”, numerical values from 0 to 18 are assigned to each winning number. In this embodiment, winning numbers that do not include re-playing roles and small roles (winning numbers 0 corresponding to loses and winning numbers 19, 20, 24 corresponding to bonuses) are set to 0 for winning / replaying winning information. The 1-18 winning / replay winning information is distributed for each condition device for the winning numbers including the replaying role or the small role. By storing the winning / replay winning information by the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which replaying combination or small combination has been won. Details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item “production group number”, numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned for each winning number. By transmitting the production group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the production executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. Details of the production group number will be described later.

  Next, a numerical value from 0 to 13 is assigned to each winning number in the item “departure group number”. The main control board M stores the outgoing ball group number, and the stored outgoing ball group number is used when executing a lottery related to the AT (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery), and the lottery processing related to the AT is executed. Program and data capacity can be reduced. Note that even if a condition device with a payout group number of 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT extra lottery are not executed. On the other hand, when a conditional device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, AT lottery or AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the outgoing ball group number will be described later. In addition, even when a condition device with a payout group number of 0 is won, an AT lottery or AT lottery may be executed. In such a case, the payout group number is It is preferable that the lottery result is always lost (non-winning) when the condition device that becomes 0 is won and the AT lottery or the AT lottery is executed.

  Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery probability in which a winning number (condition device number, also referred to as a winning combination) and bonus (also referred to as a winning combination BB) and a bonus (respectively referred to as a winning combination) are determined by the winning lottery means in the present embodiment. It is a list which shows (it is also called a win rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

  First, the lottery probability in “RT0”, “RT1” and “RT2” when the BB is not operated will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the lottery probability of the winning combination (particularly the replaying combination) may be different depending on the RT state, and the “replaying combination” (the lottery probability that is the sum of all the replaying combinations) is “ In the case of “RT1”, the lottery probability is higher than in other RT states. In addition, “re-game 04” (a so-called falling re-game player, “RT1” and a bonus corresponding to the re-game player in a situation where a bonus is not won can be displayed with winning numbers 4-6. When the combination is displayed in a stopped state, “RT0” will be elected mainly at “RT1” and hardly appear at “RT0”. In “RT2”, “re-game 04” that can be stopped and displayed in the winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but the RT state does not shift even if “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed. If “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed in “RT1”, the transition to “RT0”, that is, the fall effect (eg, the effect display device S40) that informs that the RT state has fallen. If “replay 04” is stopped and displayed at “RT0”, the fall effect may not be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that BB has been won because the fall effect has not been executed even though “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed. Can increase the sex. In such a configuration, the sound effect output when “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed, and a re-game player other than “re-game 04” (for example, “re-game” in which the RT state does not shift) 01 ”) may be configured to differ from the sound effect that is output due to the stop display, and by doing so, the player recognizes that“ re-game 04 ”is stopped and displayed. It can be configured easily. In addition, a state related to AT in which push order navigation does not occur (for example, “normal gaming state”, sometimes referred to as non-AT gaming state) and a state related to AT in which push order navigation can occur (for example, “ “RT1” may be stayed in both cases of “AT state” and sometimes referred to as AT gaming state). At this time, when a winning number that may shift (fall) from “RT1” to “RT0” is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall in a non-AT gaming state is generated. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. Thereby, in the non-AT gaming state, it is possible to shift the gaming state without making the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to “RT0”. On the other hand, in the AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-game player who does not fall the RT state is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). Thus, the player can take care that the RT state does not fall, and can operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified. In addition, “RT1” is mainly used for “RE GAME 05” that can be stopped and displayed with the winning number 2 or 3 (RE GAME who can be notified that the lottery has been won by adding the AT when stopped in the AT state). It appears at almost no other RT state. In addition, the transition of the state regarding the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination serving as the re-gamer will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 can execute push order navigation that notifies the player of the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player. . It should be noted that there is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the bonus is configured to be able to overlap with the small role, and overlaps with a part of watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are condition devices in which bonuses and small roles overlap.

  Also, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB is won and the BB is not activated, the BB role of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (a single role that does not overlap with the small role) In the case of winning a BB combination, which may be referred to as a single BB combination or a single BB), a new winning combination for the BB combination is invalid and only a small combination is effective. Specifically, for example, in the case of “RT2” and winning 1 type BB-A (carrying over), when winning “1 type BB-C” of winning number 24 1 type BB-C related to the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as in the case where the winning number 0 “losing” is won. Note that the one-type BB-A carried over continues to be in a winning state. In the situation of “RT2”, since BB has been won and BB has not been activated, the winning combination of winning numbers 21 to 23 and winning numbers 25 to 27 and the winning combination BB If the overlapping condition device is won, the new winning combination of BB is invalid and only winning of the small combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in the situation of “RT2” and winning 1 type BB-A (carrying over), winning number 21 “1 type BB-B + winning-C” was won. In this case, the type 1 BB-B related to the winning number 21 is invalid, and only the winning-C is valid. That is, the situation is the same as in the case where the winning number 14 “winning-C” is won. Note that the one-type BB-A carried over continues to be in a winning state. Note that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small combination, and may overlap with a part of the re-playing combination. For example, a part of the re-game combination with the winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus combination. As described above, the bonus is won even when the conditional device including the RT transition replay is won by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device including the RT transition replay (replaying player who can transition to the RT state). There is a possibility, and even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so that the player can be expected. In such a configuration, control is performed so that the RT state does not shift even when the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have transitioned to the RT state (transition to a RT state with a relatively low replay probability), but the replay probability has not become low (frequently replayed), etc. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the fun related to the game, such that the possibility of winning the bonus is high.

  Next, the lottery probability at the time of “type 1 BB-A, B, C operation” that is during BB operation will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, during the BB operation, the “common bell” with the winning number 13, the “BB medium weak rare combination (diagonal bell alignment)” with the winning number 17 and the “BB medium strong rare small combination with the winning number 18”. (V-shaped bell alignment) "is configured to be elected, and during operation of the BB elected in the" AT state "," BB medium-rare rare role (diagonal bell alignment) " Or, when “BB medium strong rare small role (V-shaped bell set)” is won, AT is added and lottery is executed (details will be described later).

  Further, in the upper part of the figure, the small role lottery probability when the set value is 1 is illustrated. In the common bell (winning number 13), the lottery probability is uniform regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the lottery probability of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (six levels in this example). Specifically, the number in the setting 1 is 3204, the number in the setting 2 is 3404, the number in the setting 3 is 3604, the number in the setting 4 is 3904, the number in the setting 5 is 4204, and the number in the setting 6 is 4504, and the lottery probability increases as the set value increases. By configuring in this way, for example, when a player progresses a game while measuring the number of appearances (winning number) of the common bell, it is related to the gaming machine that is being played by frequently winning the common bell. The game can proceed while expecting that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate. The lottery probability of the common bell is configured to be different depending on the set value. However, depending on the winning of the common bell, the AT lottery, the AT extra lottery, and the high probability state transition lottery described later are not executed. It is configured so as not to affect the state transition lottery (also referred to as AT lottery).

  The middle part of the figure shows a list of expected values when there is a push order navigation. In the figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as “AT state”, the reels are stopped according to the navigation. The average number of payouts per game (the average number of medals paid out by the winning small role, also referred to as the expected number of game media obtained in one game) and the expected increase or decrease in medals per game ( The ratio of the number of paid-out medals to the number of inserted medals when a game is played with 3 bets. If it is greater than 1, the expected value will be positive and the number of medals will increase. The value will be negative and medals will decrease). In addition, the average number of payouts per game is “total number of re-games (total of numbers for winning numbers 1 to 6) × number of pay-outs in re-games (3) + small role (11” Sum of the number of positions (small part lottery probability) (total number of places for winning numbers 7 to 16) × the number of payouts (11 sheets) in the small part (11 sheets) / sum of all the positions (65536) ) ". Also, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game can be calculated as “average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3)”. The number of medals inserted per game (the number of inserted game media when playing one game) is 3, and when the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, expected to increase or decrease medals per game The value is configured to be larger than 1. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, “RT1” has the largest medal increase / decrease expectation value per game. The numbers in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease in medals due to bonuses. In other words, when the game progresses in a situation where the push order navigation occurs (when operated in the optimum operation mode, also referred to as the advantageous operation mode), medals increase in “RT1”. Although “RT0” and “RT2” are not shown, the expected increase / decrease value per game is a value smaller than 1 in a situation where no push order navigation occurs. Will decrease. In the present embodiment, the expected increase / decrease value per game is greater than 1 when there is push order navigation even in “RT0” or “RT2”, but the present invention is not limited to this. ”Or“ RT2 ”may be configured so that the expected medal increase / decrease value per game when there is push order navigation is smaller than 1. Note that when the combination of symbols to be replayed is stopped and displayed, the bet number (three) in the previous game is actually automatically bet. However, in calculating the expected increase or decrease in medals in this embodiment, The calculation is based on the assumption that three sheets are paid out. One game may be referred to as one game.

  In each RT state, the average number of payouts per game is 3.511129504 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 4.737915039 when the RT state is “RT1”. Is “RT2”, it is 3.671337146. Further, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 1.579305013 when the RT state is “RT1”. When “RT2” is “1.22790487”, when there is push order navigation, the RT state “RT1” is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The numerical value is a value in the case of setting 1. Note that the winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities relating to the above small role and re-playing role are merely examples. For example, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in “RT2” where BB is internally established (when there is push order navigation) The expected medal increase / decrease value) may be less than 1. With such a configuration, when a push order navigation occurs and when it is “RT2” (when BB is currently established), when a bonus can not be aligned in a game where the bonus can be aligned However, if the number of held medals gradually decreases and push navigation is generated and “RT2” (when BB is currently established), it is intentional in a game in which bonuses can be aligned. By not arranging the bonuses, it is possible to prevent a strategy of increasing the number of medals. Specifically, it is preferable to design such that the probability of losing in “RT2” is higher than the winning probabilities of all small roles (winning-A1 to winning-I) winning in “RT2”. It is preferable that the winning probability of the re-gamer is determined so that the winning probability of the re-gamer will be low. It is preferable to design so that it does not become too much). In addition, in “RT2” in this example, the winning probability of adding all the small roles is 18784/65536, the winning probability of adding all the replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of being lost is It is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and it is designed so that the probability of losing is higher than the winning probability of adding all the small roles.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the lottery probability of type 1 BB-A is assigned 40, which is the same number for all of settings 1 to 6. Moreover, 160 which is the same number is assigned to all the settings 1 to 6 as the type 1 BB-C lottery probability. On the other hand, for the type 1 BB-B lottery probability, 160 is assigned to setting 1, 180 is assigned to setting 2, 200 is assigned to setting 3, and 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, the number assigned to the lottery probability of type 1 BB-B differs depending on the set value. In this way, the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-C have no setting difference (the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-C may be referred to as no setting difference BB and no setting difference bonus). The type 1 BB-B functions as a BB having a setting difference (the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a setting difference BB or a setting difference bonus). In addition, all of the type 1 BB-A, type 1 BB-B, and type 1 BB-C are in the RT state (“RT0” and “RT1”), and the lottery probability is uniform. Note that the lottery probabilities of type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C (total) are the same regardless of the set value, but the type 1 BB-B (total) lottery probability differs depending on the set value. In addition, although the lottery probability added up as the type 1 BB-B lottery probability is the same even if the set value is different, the lottery probability for each winning number may be different depending on the set value. Even when configured, the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a BB with a setting difference.

  Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12, an electrical schematic configuration of the rotating type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. First, in the spinning-type game machine according to the present embodiment, a sub-control board S, a door board D, a spinning board K, a power board E, a relay board IN, centering on a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, A setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, and the like are connected to be able to exchange data. The solid line portion in the figure shows the movement related to the exchange of data, and the broken line portion in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN and the door board D without going through the main control board.

  The main control board (may be referred to as main control means, main board, main control means, main board, and main game unit) M is a board that governs the progress of the entire game performed in the revolving game machine P. A main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and the main control chip C is connected to the CPUC 100 (also referred to as CPUMC), the built-in ROMC 110, the built-in RAMC 120, and the like so as to exchange data with each other via a bus. Has been installed. The main control board M receives a signal indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub-control board S, the door board D, and the rotating board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) toward K etc. {For example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information toward the sub-control board S) The sub-control board S can execute the push order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

  Also, the sub control chip SC is mounted on the sub control board (sometimes referred to as sub control means, sub board, sub control means, sub board, sub game unit) S, as with the above-described main control board M. The sub control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC 100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is connected to be exchanged with each other via a bus. The sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a rotating backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Is connected. Here, the spinning backlight S30 is a light that is provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control command received from the main control board M, and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the effect display device S40, the rotary backlight S30, etc. The production of. In the case of the spinning-reel game machine according to this example, the player has nine ranges of the upper, middle, lower, upper middle, upper, middle, lower, upper right, upper, middle, and lower reels of the left reel. A plurality of LEDs are provided as the rotating backlight S30 so that they can be individually identified. As an example, when the LED corresponding to the upper stage of the left reel is turned on and all other LEDs are turned off, the player can identify that the upper stage of the left reel is turned on. In addition, the spinning type gaming machine according to the present example indicates that when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the player is informed that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by changing the lighting mode of the rotating back light S30. A back lamp effect (sometimes referred to as a backlight effect) suggested to the above is executed (details will be described later).

  On the door substrate D, the above-described insertion acceptance sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, second insertion sensor D30s, stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. The lever D50, the stored game medals (credits) and the inserted game medals are paid out, the settlement button D60 for ending the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying the state of the game (not shown but described above) The insertion number display lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the replay lamp D290, the insertion possible lamp D300, the special game state display device D250, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270, the credit number display device D200, and the advantageous section Display device assembly such as display YH}, front door opening / closing judgment, error cancellation, and setting value Door switch for performing further D80, is determined to be incompatible after being turned a medal (or other foreign) blocker D100 like to reimburse the outlet D240 and are connected. The door substrate D is connected to the main control substrate M described above so as to exchange data. For this reason, when a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, a signal that the insertion acceptance sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M through the door board D.

  In addition, a rotating motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating substrate K. The spinning board K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the spinning motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 by the spinning sensor K20. Yes. In the spinning cylinder type gaming machine of this embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used for the spinning motor K10. In the step motor, 480 steps are set as the number of steps that the reel M50 rotates once. Each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) has a predetermined number of symbols (for example, 20 symbols) having a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set. 24 steps (= 480/20) are set. There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel are changed.

  The medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the action The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s for determining whether or not a medal has been paid out normally and measuring the number of game medals paid out, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

  These various control boards and the power consumed by the boards are supplied from a power supply board E (a board for controlling the presence or absence of power supply by the power switch E10). In FIG. 12, a state in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by a dashed arrow. As shown in the figure, power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub-control board S, and various boards (door board D, rotor board K, relay board IN) Electric power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and this electric power is converted into a DC voltage of a specified voltage and then supplied to each control board and board.

  In addition, the main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting / reset that can execute setting value change, error cancellation, and the like. Button M30 is connected. In addition, the main control board M has a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stop of the reel M50 (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53), and an “AT state” which is a state relating to AT that is advantageous to the player. AT lottery means for executing AT transition lottery for shifting to AT, and AT extra lottery for increasing the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the “AT state” And AT addition lottery means to be executed.

  Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in this embodiment.

  The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (illustrated by rectangles), judgments (illustrated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start / end / return, etc. (illustrated by rounded rectangles). ing. Moreover, when the details are illustrated in another flowchart among the processing steps, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are also developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraudulent actions is prevented from being executed.

  First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M after turning on the power of the spinning-reel game machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, after turning on the power of the revolving game machine P in step 1000, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of timer interrupt in step 1002 (here, timer interrupt is started). Instead, only the type of timer interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, a flowchart relating to processing at the time of timer interrupt described later is executed periodically). Next, in step 1004, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area, power-off / power-off recovery) To check whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held), and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

  In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completion flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). Whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer stored in the process at power-off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M reads the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off process completion flag and returns to the process at the time of power-off according to the returned stack pointer.

  If NO in step 1016, in step 1024, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If NO in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). To set). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If NO in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step The check result at 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines and sets the RAM initialization range to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM ( For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to Step 1034. The range not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area for storing the set value (set value data). As a result of calculating the number of games, the number of games, the staying rate of the “advantageous section”, and the like are also not included in the RAM initialization range. By configuring in this way, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the “favorable section” in the game (advantageous section ratio). The advantageous section ratio calculation process is configured to calculate at the timing when the unit game ends. The advantageous section ratio is displayed when the gaming machine is turned on (for example, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at intervals of 5 seconds in the order of “advantageous section ratio → continuous character ratio per 6000 games → characteristic ratio per 6000 games → cumulative continuous character ratio → cumulative character ratio”. Is displayed. The continuous character ratio is “the number of payouts when the RB is in operation / the total number of payouts”. / Total number of payouts ”. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1028, in step 1032 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM as a specific range including a storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM. Set (for example, set in the register area), and go to Step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

  Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area or the like) mounted on the main control board M is not a value at which a special game is executed. (In order to prevent a special game from being erroneously executed when a process for determining whether or not to execute a special game is executed due to noise or fraud immediately after the program processing is started). Although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured, and the byte storing information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to configure to store only the information related to the random number (not to store other information such as various timer values) (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise etc. To prevent rewriting of information related to random numbers).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initialized with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting value (setting value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed from 1 to 6, initialization of the RAM is executed, and when the set value becomes “0”, it is necessary to return to “1”. Therefore, in this example, the normal range of the setting value (setting value data) is managed as 0 to 5, thereby correcting the setting value (setting value data) after executing the initialization of the RAM (step 1106 and The processing in step 1108) can be eliminated, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = a value that is most disadvantageous for the player) in the setting value (setting value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the number-of-payout display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, “88” for lighting all the segments). Then, a setting value is displayed on a setting display LED (not shown) (the display relating to the setting value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) held in the RAM), and Step 1112 Migrate to As described above, the number-of-payout display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure occurs in a part of a 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be lit), an incorrect information can be notified when the push order is notified. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, it is possible to confirm whether or not 7 segments have failed by causing the payout number display device D270 to turn on all the “7” segments during operation of the setting change device. Providing profits can be prevented. Further, as a configuration relating to the display of the set value (set value data), a RAM for setting value display that stores data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value is stored. It may be configured to have an area and display the set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the processing of step 1110, processing for transmitting a command indicating that the mode is changed to the setting change mode is executed to the sub-control board S side.

  Next, in step 1112, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current setting value (setting value data) (when the added setting value (setting value data) exceeds 5) In this case, the set value (set value data) is 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. Note that if the result of Step 1112 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processing in steps 1112 to 1116 is looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process in step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, if Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and the setting display LED (not shown) The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating the end of the setting change mode to the sub-control board S is executed.

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing relating to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 13 (and called in another flowchart). First, in step 1302, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits interruption (hereinafter, a flowchart relating to timer interruption processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (in this example, 0 to 6, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not output to each output port has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays a set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process Is repeated, and the reset signal is input when the power supply voltage decreases, and the process ends. (That is, since an infinite loop is entered, any operation that prompts a return is not accepted). In the case of No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processing from step 1306 to step 1310 is processing for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information about the error, game progress status at the time of the error, etc. are displayed on the hall computer side. It is possible to output to

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initialized with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the upper limit of bets, the effective line for winning, etc.). In step 1203, data for clearing the data used in the previous game {eg, condition device number (winning number), production group number, instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address). (Data) is also included in the RAM. In addition, you may make it comprise so that the number selected when the next game was performed may be overwritten, without clearing a condition apparatus number, production group number, instruction information, etc. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 in FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the RT state set in step 1204 (command to the sub side). The process for setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 in FIG. In step 1704, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub-side, it is not always necessary to transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub-side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a state relating to AT in the game (for example, “AT state”) (steps 1420 and 1429 in FIG. 21, step 1435 in FIG. 22). Step 1439, Step 1443, and the state regarding AT determined in Step 1444-3 and Step 1444-4 in FIG. 23 are set). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the state set in step 1206 (command to the sub side). Further, the process for setting the state relating to the AT may be executed in Step 1416, Step 1428 in FIG. 21, Step 1438 in FIG. 22, and Step 1444-1 in FIG. In addition, when the state related to the AT is transmitted to the sub-side, it is not always necessary to transmit the state, and the state related to the AT may be transmitted to the sub-side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, “advantage section”) in the game (the game section determined in step 3510, step 3516, and step 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H, and two full detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can enter the medal auxiliary tank HS. Is determined based on current conduction / non-conduction (when the current is conducted through the medal, it is determined that the current is full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error with a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, the currents by the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS are non-conductive and the setting / It is determined whether or not the reset button M30 has been pressed. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), The process proceeds to 1218. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M permits the medal insertion acceptance (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the re-gamer), and the next process (step 1220). The process proceeds to (1). Here, in Step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process formed by the medal flow path). Specifically, when a re-game player is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current storage number (credit) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Run. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the ON process of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, when the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on uniformly. With this configuration, even when a re-game player is established, if the number of stored credits does not reach a predetermined value, a game medal can be inserted, such as “RT1”. When you are staying in an RT state (for example, “RT1”) with a higher probability of winning a re-gamer than in the RT state, or re-playing role that is difficult to understand as a re-playing player Even if the bell-bell-bell on the invalid line or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped, the player can play the game with a good rhythm (without a sense of incongruity). A straight line different from the effective line is referred to as an invalid line.

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a game medal is not betted or stored (no credit is present). In the case of Yes in Step 1220, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display conditions in Step 1221 (for example, the conditions are satisfied when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M is set to a setting display LED (not shown, but may be a payout number display device D 270, a credit number display device D 200, or an insertion number display light D 210). The value is displayed (transition to the setting confirmation mode), and the process proceeds to step 1221 on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition condition for the setting change mode is satisfied, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode is started to the sub-control board S, and when the setting change mode end condition is satisfied, the setting change mode is set. A process for transmitting a command indicating that the process is to be terminated is executed. In the case of No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes management related to game medal insertion and settlement. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in this embodiment, the medal is inserted). There are two insertion sensors for detection, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received). In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (the first input sensor D20s or the second input). When the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been accepted. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the credit is the upper limit number (50 in this example) and the bet number is the maximum number (3 in this example). If the determination is Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state where no medal flow path is formed). If No in step 1230, the process in step 1230 is repeated, and if no in step 1226 or step 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

  Next, in step 1232, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there are remaining credits or bet gaming medals. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and the game The payout of one medal is executed. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in this embodiment, for detecting the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not explicitly shown in the flowchart, only the remaining number of credits is to be settled when the previous game was a re-game player.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing timing of step 1234). . Specifically, whether or not a situation in which it is determined that a medal has not been paid out has continued for a predetermined period of time despite transmission of a hopper drive signal to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). Determine whether or not. If YES in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF). The process proceeds to 1247. On the other hand, if No at step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

  Next, in step 1247, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal on which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If step 1241 or step 1247 is No, the process proceeds to step 1236.

  On the other hand, if No in Step 1232 or Step 1233, the CPU C100 of the main control board M has a valid start lever D50 in Step 1251 (for example, a specified number of game medals for starting a game have been inserted, etc.) ) And whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within a normal range (0 to 5 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M performs processing for acquiring random numbers and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. If the result is No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a state in which the AT can be added and lottery is possible. Here, in this example, the states related to the AT that can execute the AT addition lottery are “AT in-progress state”, “Additional special state”, “Specialization precursor state”, “Advantageous BB state”, The “advantageous BB inside game” is configured such that the AT counter value can be greater than 0, but the AT lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from making it difficult for the player not to make the symbol combination of the BB intentional in the “advantageous BB inside game”. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a lottery by adding AT in “advantageous BB inside game”. In such a case, the AT addition lottery is won in “advantageous BB inside game”. Alternatively, it may be configured not to notify immediately but to notify that the BT is completed and that the AT is added and the lottery is won, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games is added.

  In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game number addition execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1259, the process proceeds to step 1400. In this game number addition execution process, it is possible to execute a lottery using a different lottery table depending on the state related to the AT, but the lottery probability does not vary depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). It is preferable to execute a lottery. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a conditional device number management process, which will be described later.

  Here, states related to the AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 30). (1) The “low probability state” is a state in which an AT has not been won (a right to shift to an “AT state” has not been acquired) and a bonus combination has not been won. Note that the “low probability state” is a so-called “normal state” and may be referred to as a “normal state”. (2) “Normal BB inside game” is a state where the BB combination is won in the “low probability state”, the BB combination is not won, and the AT lottery is not selected. (3) “Normal BB state” means that when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the situation where the BB role is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery is not won, Or it is a state executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “normal BB inside game”. (4) The “high probability state” is a state where the AT lottery is not won (the right to move to the “AT state” is not acquired) and the bonus combination is not won. In this state, it is easier to win the AT than the “low probability state” described above. As will be described later, when the state is newly shifted to the “high probability state”, the state is configured such that the state does not shift to the “low probability state” until the number of highly secured games has elapsed (5) “AT state” "Is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of AT remaining games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if the winning lottery described later is won, a predetermined value is set in the AT counter and the “AT in-progress state” continues (6) “specialized sign state” Is a state in which the right to shift to the “additional special state”, which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily added, is acquired rather than the “AT state”. (7) “Additional special state” is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily increased compared to the “AT state”. (8) “Advantageous BB inside game” means winning in the BB role in the “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specializing sign state” or “additional special state”, and the BB role You have not won a prize. (9) “Standby BB inside game” is a state in which the BB role is won in the “low probability state”, the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not won. . (10) The “advantageous BB state” is a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role that is won by the BB role in the “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, or “addition special state”. When the display is stopped, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “advantageous BB inside game”, or the BB combination is won in the “low probability state”, and When the AT lottery is won by the BB role and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the “standby BB inside game” It is a state that is sometimes executed. (12) “Restorable / prohibiting effect state” is a state related to AT that shifts when the AT counter value is 0 and the continuous lottery described later is not won. In the “Restorability Produce State”, a resurrection lottery described later is executed, and when the resurrection lottery is won, the state shifts to “AT state” (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and the resurrection lottery is not performed. If you win, you will move to a “low probability state”.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is requested to create a pull-in point (required for determining the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the stop order). And the other reels are appropriately requested according to the stop position of the other reels). In the case of Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1262, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point, and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the “BB inside game”, in the game won in the push order bell, the stop button is not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1) Even when the stop buttons are not stopped in the order of “left → middle → right” (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing the wrong answer), there are 11 symbol combinations to be paid out by the reel stop control. It is configured to win. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance check. Next, in step 1264, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether any stop button (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). . On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the displayed symbol combination is normal (if it does not coincide with the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal. Is determined). Whether or not the displayed symbol combination is normal in step 1269 is determined by determining whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been normally completed. When the stop button is operated in an operation mode in which the winning combination can be won in the game being played, the actually stopped reel position was not normal (the winning determined by the internal lottery becomes possible) Even if the winning combination is not displayed by the player, if the reel stop control is normally completed by processing inside the gaming machine, the game medal based on the winning combination of the winning combination The payout is configured to be executed. If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261-1.

  Next, in step 1274, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out game medals {the game medals earned by winning the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, game medals are paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and pays out one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing timing in step 1276). . In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display with a 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in Step 1282, in Step 1283, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF). Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

  Next, in step 1286, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal on which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning that becomes Yes in step 1275) is completed. If Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. If No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

  Next, in step 3400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes RT state transition control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game section transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, a game state transition process, etc.), and proceeds to the next process (step 1202 process).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery in which a winning number, a numerical value for comparison with the obtained random number, and the like are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires a winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. The winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if a bonus and a small role are both won, or a bonus and a re-playing role are won, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are determined from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. Specific generation processing will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same appearance group number and the same number for comparison with the obtained random number, and stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board M. It is remembered. For example, the winning group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the same number is set for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 that are push-order re-game players. Since the above-mentioned number is the same for the six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12 that are the push order bell combination, the number of repetitions related to the push order replay game combination is 3, and the push order bell The number of repetitions related to the combination is 6. In addition, the lottery table used when winning numbers 4-6, which are push order re-games, and the lottery table used when winning numbers 7-12, which are push order bells, are acquired as a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

  Next, in step 3610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery is won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the subsequent internal lottery table address is not determined (lottery) and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1259). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processing of step 3610 to step 3618 is repeatedly executed until there is no remaining number of repetitions or internal lottery is won. If NO in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address related to the next payout group number), proceeds to step 3604, and proceeds to step 3604. The subsequent processing is executed. The specific process of the internal lottery will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of Step 1500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT is “AT in-progress state”, “specialization precursor state”, or “addition special state”. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the game group number related to the game is an additional role during AT (a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games in the “AT state”). In this example, it is determined whether or not it is a payout group number (1, 3 in this example) relating to replay-B, replay-C, and winning-D. If Yes in step 1504, the process proceeds to step 1514. Further, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, if the state relating to AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the outgoing group number relating to the game is the upper part of the BB (" In the “favorable BB state”, it is a winning number that can increase the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether or not it is a winning group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I) Determine. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. In the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is “additional special state”. In the case of Yes in Step 1506, in Step 1508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M can add the number of AT games remaining in the special role group number for the game (in the “Specialization state for addition”) and In “AT state”, it is a winning number that does not increase the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a replay-A, a replay-D1-D3, and a winning-A1-A6). It is determined whether or not (2, 13 in this example). If Yes in step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1514. If the answer is No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1518.

  Next, in step 1514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the extra game number lottery table at the time of winning, and determines the AT extra game number based on the game group number related to the game (for example, in the margin) In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether or not the latched random value falls within the range). Note that determining the number of AT extra games is also referred to as executing an AT extra lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the determined AT added game number to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the added AT counter value in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M receives a command related to the determined AT added game number (a command to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S receives the command, It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games have been added), and the process proceeds to step 1518. It should be noted that a lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT extra lottery) can also be executed in the case of a payout group number 7 to 11 which is a payout group number related to a win number (winning numbers 19 to 27) including a bonus. .

  Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of the extra game number lottery table at the time of winning, and in this embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT in which push order navigation is executed (in this example, “ In the case of the winning combination in the winning state in the “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, “addition special state”, “advantageous BB state”), based on the appearance group number related to the game, As the number of AT added games, “0” to “300” are determined by lottery, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. When “0” is determined, the AT remaining game number does not increase (when “0” is determined, the AT addition lottery may be referred to as non-winning).

  Further, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT added games when winning the winning combination at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure. As a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In this case, {place number (600) × AT additional game number (0) + placement number (100) × AT additional game number (10) + placement number (300) × AT additional game number (30) + placement number ( 24) × AT addition number of games (100)} / total number of entries (1024) = 12.1 (game).

  Next, when the winning combination is re-game-B or re-game-C, {number (500) × AT additional game number (0) + number (200) × AT additional game number (50) + Number (300) × AT additional game number (100) + Number (24) × AT additional game number (300)} / total number of positions (1024) = 46.1 (game) be able to.

  Next, when the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1-D3, winnings-A1-A6, {number (300) × AT extra game number (10) + number (600) × The number of AT extra games (30) + the number of places (124) × the number of AT extra games (50)} / the total number of places (1024) = 26.61 (game). In addition, when the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1 to D3, winnings-A1 to A6, the number of AT games is added only when the state related to AT is "additional special state". It has become.

  Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium rare role, {number (800) × AT added game number (0) + place number (100) × AT added game number (10) + place number (100 ) × AT additional game number (30) + placement number (24) × AT additional game number (100)} / total number of placement numbers (1024) = 6.3 (game).

  Next, in the case where the winning combination is a BB medium rare role, {number (300) × AT added game number (0) + number (300) × AT added game number (30) + number (400) ) × AT additional game number (50) + placement number (24) × AT additional game number (300)} / total number of placement numbers (1024) = 35.4 (game).

  In this embodiment, when the AT extra lottery is executed, the average value of the AT extra game number may be different depending on the type of the winning combination, but depending on the set value, the AT extra game number may be different. The average value is configured not to be different. Here, in the case where the AT addition lottery is executed based on the winning number, for example, when the same processing is executed as the AT extra lottery with the winning number 7 and the winning number 8, the winning number is 7. However, as shown in the present embodiment, the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are configured by performing the AT lottery based on the appearance group number as in the present embodiment. When the same process is executed as an AT extra lottery, the process related to the AT extra lottery of the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 is executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2 or not. Will be able to.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M may make a determination based on a winning number (or winning / replaying winning information, a winning group number, etc.) related to the game. ) Determines whether or not it is a winning number related to re-game-B (reverse-play white 7 replay, which is a re-game in which white seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by reverse-press). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an additional number of AT games due to replay-B, in other words, the number of additional AT games due to winning of replay-B is It is determined whether it was not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M makes an invalid line by reverse pressing instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and reverse pressing ("right → middle → left")). To perform the effect of instructing to align white seven), and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command other than the reverse push (“right → middle → left”) which is a reverse push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect that prevents white seven from being aligned on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to step 1526. In the case of No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the winning number related to the game (or may be determined by winning / replay winning information, a paying group number, etc.) re-game-C ( It is determined whether or not it is a forward-pressed black 7 replay, which is a re-game where the black seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by forward-pressing. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an additional number of AT games due to replay-C, in other words, the number of additional AT games due to winning of replay-C is It is determined whether it was not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M makes an invalid line by a forward press instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and forward press ("left → middle → right")). To perform the effect of instructing to align the black seven), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command other than the forward press avoidance command (command to the sub control board S side, forward press (“left → middle → right”)). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect to prevent the black seven from being aligned on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). Even in the case of No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1400). In this embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoid command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoid command are transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives these commands, thereby Although it is configured to be able to execute effects related to push order navigation on the control board S side, the present invention is not limited to this, and when winning an AT extra lottery, the fact that the AT extra lottery is won and the number of AT extra games is affected. When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT additional games related to the processing in step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side receives the command, push-sequence navigation on the sub-control board S side You may comprise so that the execution timing and production aspect of production may be determined. As an example, a game in which Re-Game-B has been won is selected, and an effect mode in which reverse pressing is instructed in a game that has received the command on the side of the sub-control board S (a game with an additional number of AT games) is selected. In the game that receives the command on the side of the sub-control board S, an effect that instructs reverse pressing is not executed, and a predetermined condition (for example, a specific re-game player (for example, replay) You may comprise so that the effect which instruct | indicates the pushing order in which 7 alignment can be performed in an invalid line in the game which satisfied game-B or C) was performed may be performed. Alternatively, in the game where the re-game-B is won and the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S (a game with an additional number of AT games), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and thereafter (For example, display on the effect display device S40) in a game satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, after a predetermined number of games (a continuous effect may be executed simultaneously, in this case, the final game of the continuous effect). (For example, “+ 30G” is displayed.) In this example, the number of AT remaining games is also displayed in the effect display device S40. Such a display can be displayed, and the display and the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different from each other. B won In a game where the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S (a game with an additional number of AT games), an effect of instructing reverse pressing is not executed, and a game satisfying a predetermined condition thereafter As an example of the case where an AT game number addition effect is executed, a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) that wins a bonus win on the sub-control board S side is being executed (replay game inside the bonus- Since the winning probability of B is low (including 0%), the sub-control board S side will be special, for example, if a player is notified of the push order in which 7 matches are possible, the bonus will not be won) Information that the sub-control board S side determines that the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery and the AT remaining game number is added, is as follows. (1) AT remaining game The information on the number is added to the AT and sent after the lottery from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and then the sub control board S side sends the information on the number of AT remaining games sent last time and the AT remaining game sent this time. The difference with the number information is calculated, and the number of AT added games won in the AT added lottery is grasped. (2) The command related to the number of AT added games obtained as a result of the AT added lottery on the main control board M side is added. In addition, when the AT extra lottery is not won, a command indicating that the AT extra lottery is not won is sent to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side When receiving the command, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation, for example, a game in which Re-Game-B is won. Then, in the game that received the command on the side of the sub-control board S (the game in which the number of AT games was not added), the middle press (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop, and the push order to avoid the seven matches) You may comprise so that the production | generation aspect which instruct | indicates may be selected and performed. In addition, although the AT addition lottery was executed on the main control board M side, as information for the sub control board S side to determine that the AT remaining game number was not added, (1) information on the AT remaining game number After the AT addition lottery, the data is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Thereafter, the sub-control board S calculates the difference between the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time and the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time, and grasps the number of AT additional games won in the AT addition lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information related to the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time from the information related to the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery was not won), (2) the main control board As a result of the M-side AT extra lottery, a command related to the fact that the number of AT extra games is 0 is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first sheet) of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of Step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is a state relating to the AT capable of performing AT lottery. In the present embodiment, the state related to the AT that can execute the AT lottery is only the “high probability state”. By winning the BB in the “high probability state”, the “advantageous BB internal game” Then, when the BB combination wins, it shifts to the “advantageous BB state”, and when the executed BB ends, it shifts to the “AT state” and the AT counter shows the initial number of AT games. The value 50 times will be set. In addition, even if BB is won in the “low probability state”, the game shifts to “normal BB inside game”, and then does not shift to “AT state”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the BB is won in the “normal game state”, the AT lottery may be won by using the BB combination as a trigger. In such a configuration, when BB is won in the “normal game state”, if the AT lottery is won with the BB role as an opportunity, the game shifts to “advantageous BB inside game” and then BB By aligning, it shifts to the “advantageous BB state”. In addition, in a state in which the BB is won in the “normal game state” and the BB is not aligned, the game section may be an “advantageous section” or a “standby section”. In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination (in this example, the first type BB-A or the first type BB combination with no setting difference). It is determined whether the seed BB-C). In the present embodiment, the winning number of the BB with no setting difference (winning numbers 19, 24) and the winning number with the same setting number as the BB with no setting difference (winning numbers, 25, 26, 27). Both are AT lotteries. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “advantageous BB inside game”, and proceeds to step 1410. Also in the case of No in step 1402 or step 1404, the process proceeds to step 1410. In the present embodiment, the AT winning rate related to AT lottery (whether or not it can be won or not) is different when the state related to AT is different, but when the state related to AT is the same. Even if the set values are different, the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same (if the BB is won in the “high probability state”, the AT is always won regardless of the set value = It shifts to “AT state”).

  Next, in step 1410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a state related to the AT after the next game has not been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a state promotion role (by winning, a small state that can shift from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state”). It is determined whether or not it is a hand and is a cherry) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is elected with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is ½ and there is no problem if it is changed if it is not different depending on the set value). Execute a high probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1418, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

  In the case of No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the high securement fault counter KHc to the 10th game after the counter value of the high securement fault counter KHc is 1 (the high securement fault final game is “high probability state”). ). In the case of Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in this embodiment, when the state related to the AT is “high probability state”, the game section is “advantageous section”, and when the game section is “advantageous section”, the push order is The “advantageous section” is configured not to end unless the navigation is executed one or more times or a predetermined number of games (in this example, 1500 games) “advantageous section” is not satisfied. Even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, the “high-probability state” is configured not to end if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because, for example, the push order navigation has not been executed more than once. ). If the BB role is elected during the “advantageous section” and the BB is executed, the “advantageous section” can be selected at any timing even if the push order navigation is not executed once in the “advantageous section”. You may be comprised so that it may complete | finish. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to AT after the next game as “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low probability transition condition is satisfied when the push order navigation is executed once. In addition, as a push order (a winning number where the winning combination differs depending on the reel stop order and the player's profit rate is different), a combination with a maximum payout number of 8 and a combination with a maximum payout number of 11 is provided. In such a case, the low-probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation with the maximum payout number of 11 having the maximum payout number is executed once. Note that the process proceeds to step 1430 even when the result of step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426, or step 1428 is No. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new transition is made to the “high probability state”, 10 games that are highly secured obstacle games are set in the highly secured obstacle counter KHc, and the counter value becomes zero. Is configured not to enter the “low probability state”. Note that such a lottery method is merely an example. For example, after shifting to the “high probability state”, the low probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games (staying in the “high probability state” is guaranteed). ), A lottery that shifts from a “high probability state” to a “low probability state” with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the 10 games have elapsed may be executed. It should be noted that the AT lottery (low-accuracy AT lottery, high-accuracy AT lottery) and the state promotion combination have the same winning probability in all set values.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second sheet) of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of Step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is an “AT in-progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is a predetermined value (4 in this example) or more. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state relating to AT is “AT state”, the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 4 or more, the watermelon B In the case where the right to shift to the “specialized state of specialization” can be acquired with a probability of 1/2 when winning, and the state related to the AT is “at-AT state” When the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, even if winning the watermelon B, a lottery (specializing) (Which may also be referred to as state transition lottery), and is not configured to shift to the “specialization sign state” and “additional special state”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery to win the watermelon B and acquire the right to transfer to the “additional special state” (also referred to as a special state transfer lottery) May be configured so that the watermelon B is won in the situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less and the right to transition to the “additional specialization state” is granted. When winning the lottery to be won, it may be configured so that the next game winning the lottery can be (specialized sign state) or “additional special state” (can move to), or the AT counter value It may be configured to be able to enter (or move to) a “specialized sign state” or “additional special state” when the game becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or a game won in the lottery After the execution of a predetermined number of games, Place may be configured as capable of becoming a specialized state "(which can migrate to). In addition, it is not always necessary to go through the “specialization sign state” when shifting to the “additional special state”. For example, the configuration is such that it can directly shift from the “AT special state” to the “additional special state” May be. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a lottery that acquires the right to transfer to the special transition role ("addition special state") for the condition device related to the game. It is determined whether it is a watermelon B) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a special state transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2). Next, in step 1434, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialized state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game as “specialized sign state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in Step 1431, in Step 1436, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (when the AT counter value is 1, the AT final game is set). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (2/3 in this example). Next, in step 1438, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “AT in-process state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1 (the AT state transition enable condition is changed). In order to satisfy, the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as the “restoration effect state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. In addition, also in the case of No in Step 1430, Step 1432, Step 1434, or Step 1436, the process proceeds to Step 1444-1. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game and the continuous lottery is won, 50 games as initial values are set again in the AT counter M60. In other words, if the addition of the number of AT games is not taken into consideration, the gameability is such that the AT of 50 games per set continues to loop at 2/3. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the AT final game. For example, after the initial value is set in the first game of the AT (the first game that is newly in “AT state” or the AT counter M60). A continuous lottery may be executed in the first game). With such a configuration, it is already determined whether or not the next set (AT related to the winning of the continuous lottery) is executed (whether or not the AT continues) in the “AT state”. The effect during the AT can be made different between the case where the continuous lottery is won and the case where the continuous lottery is not won. For example, when the continuous lottery is won, the counter value of the AT counter M60 However, it is possible to change the BGM (songs are played, etc.) in a situation of 1 or more (while the AT is running) or to perform an effect that makes it definite that the player has won the continuous lottery.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third sheet) of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of Step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is a state for reproducibility effect. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is the next game by winning in the reviving role ("Restorability Producing State"). It is determined whether or not it is a role that can shift to the “AT state”, in other words, a role that can return the AT. Here, in the present embodiment, the reviving role includes any of watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry, and bonus combination (only the BB role with no setting difference and does not include the BB role with setting difference). In the case where the condition device relating to the game becomes a revival role, it is said that the revival lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 1444-2, in step 1444-3, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “AT in-process state”, and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter in order to satisfy the AT state transition enabling condition. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1444-2, in Step 1444-4, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “low probability state”, and proceeds to Step 1445. In addition, also when No in step 1441-1, it transfers to step 1445. As described above, in this embodiment, even when the game is an AT final game and the continuous lottery is not won, the state transitions to the “Restorability Prompt State” and is revived in the “Restorability Prompt State”. If a lottery can be won, the game is shifted to the “AT state” from the next game. Note that the “Restorability Produce State” is “Advantageous Section”, but the lottery related to the AT in the “AT state” (AT addition lottery, continuous lottery, etc.) is not executed, and the resurrection lottery can be executed. In the “AT state” and “Restorability effect state”, the lottery execution mode regarding the AT is different.

  Next, in step 1445, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a state related to the AT after the next game has not been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state transition condition regarding the AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. Satisfies when 10 games, which are the number of precursor games, are consumed in the “state”). In the case of Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. If the number of precursor games is exhausted in the “precursor state”, it will be determined as “specialized state”. Note that if the answer is No in step 1445 or step 1446, the process proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M guarantees a high reservation fault counter value command (in this example, a command to the sub-side, in other words, the current high reservation fault counter value, in other words, a high probability state is guaranteed. The command relating to the number of remaining games) is set, and the flow proceeds to Step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT after the next game is determined as “advantageous BB internal game”. In the case of Yes in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high securing fault counter KHc to zero, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1450). Even in the case of No in step 1499-1, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1450).

  In the present embodiment, the AT winning rate is different depending on the lottery status. If the BB role (BB role without setting difference) is won in the “low probability state”, the AT transition lottery is won. No (after that, it does not shift to the “AT state”) On the other hand, if the BB role (BB role without setting difference) is won in the “high probability state”, the AT transition lottery is won (then it is changed to the “AT state”) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery role, and “high probability state A” and “high probability” are states related to the AT that is an “advantageous section”. When the condition device A is won in the “high probability state A”, the AT transition lottery is won at 1/10, and the condition device in the “high probability state B”. If you win A, you will be placed in the AT transfer lottery by 1/2. It may be configured so as to be selected. If the AT transfer lottery is won, the state relating to AT shifts to “AT ready state” which is a preparation state until the state shifts to “AT in-progress state”, and then a predetermined end condition (for example, “AT ready state”). It may be configured to transition to the “AT state” when 10 games have passed since the transition to the “state”.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of conditional device number management processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replaying winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, winning / replaying winning related to the game) Set commands related to information. Next, in step 1454, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a condition device related to the game in a pushing order (a condition device having a different winning combination depending on the pushing order, for example, winning-A1 or the like). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a pressing order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, The number is stored in a RAM address (an address different from the RAM address for displaying push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the order of pressing, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. Note that the instruction number is determined (not shown, but the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number) even when the push order navigation is not executed. In addition, when a pushing order hitting game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the pushing order hitting game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). (See Figure 34 for image). Next, in step 1466, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side). In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels that is most profitable to the player in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as push order navigation, push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of “left → middle → right” is displayed as “= 1” on the push order display device D270. In both of the push order bell and the push order replay, “= 1” is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the game related to the push order bell, the case where the push order navigation “left → middle → right” is displayed on the push order display device D270 and in the game related to the push order replay game, “ You may comprise so that it may become a display mode different from the case where the push order navigation of "left-> middle-> right" is displayed on the push order display apparatus D270. That is, the number of types of display of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

  If NO in step 1451 or 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a mask process on the winning / replaying winning information of the game, and the masked information is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM. To remember. Here, when the winning / replaying winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replaying winning information is recognized by an illegal act, the high profit related to the game is increased. That is, the pushing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after executing the mask process {the process for concealing the winning / replay winning information (especially the information relating to the pressing order)) to the winning / replaying winning information related to the game. It is configured so that a highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. As a mask processing method in this embodiment, a plurality of winning / replaying winning information (winning / replaying winning information having the same role is preferable. For example, the RT state shifts depending on the pressing order. A plurality of winning / replaying winning information that can be stopped and displayed as a combination of symbols to be replayed as a single effect group number (for example, winning / replay winning information 4 to 6 is set as a directing group 4) The group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The mask processing method is not limited to this. For example, after the winning / replay winning information provided (0 to 18 in this example), a new winning / replaying after mask processing is performed. You may comprise so that winning information may be provided. Also in such a case, a plurality of winning / replaying winning information among the existing winning / replaying winning information like the production group number is used as a single winning / replaying winning information after winning / replaying after masking. It is desirable to provide game winning information (for example, winning / replaying winning information 4 to 6 is changed to winning / replaying winning information 19 which is winning / replaying winning information after mask processing)・ Replay winning information)). If it is determined that the game is a game for notifying operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to the AT on the main control board M, the winning / replaying winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, In a game in which the operation information is not notified, the production group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In such a configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side or may not be transmitted.

  Next, in step 1470, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, sets in the register area). 1472 is entered. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus has been won can be recognized on the sub side) (for example, Set in the register area) and proceed to the next process (the process of step 1550). In this embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number. The derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, examples of the display of the push order navigation include: (1) When a fall re-playing role is included → Push where a fall re-playing role is not stopped and displayed In the case of navigation in order, (2) in the case of a bell (one-piece combination / 11-piece combination) → the navigation order in which the number of payouts becomes the largest is navigated. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the game section is an “advantageous section”, winning / re-game winning information (the type of winning combination and the pushing order most advantageous for the player) In the case where the game section is a “normal section”, the sub control board S is configured to transmit the instruction number (the number that can specify the pushing order most advantageous for the player). The production group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the side. That is, in the “advantageous section”, the winning / replaying winning information related to the game including the winning / replaying winning information in which the game result and the player's profit differ depending on the pushing order is directly used as the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an “advantageous section”, the winning / replaying information for the game is not transmitted, and the winning / replaying in which the result of the game and the player's profit differ depending on the pressing order. In the case of winning information, the production group number in which the information related to the order is concealed is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  When the game section is not an “advantageous section”, the effect group number is determined by executing the mask process when the winning / replay winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S. The production group number is transmitted to the sub control board S. The production group number refers to winning / replaying winning information, winning / replaying winning information related to a winning role having a similar role (for example, a replaying role including a falling replaying role, a push order bell, etc.). Are grouped and assigned numbers. A mask process {process for concealing winning / replay winning information (especially information relating to the pressing order)} is performed on the winning / replaying winning information related to the game, and then transmitted to the sub-control board S. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the information related to the winning / replaying winning information is recognized due to an illegal act and the pushing order (reel stop order) which is a high profit related to the game is recognized. The transmission mode of the production group number is not limited to the configuration shown in the figure, and the production group number can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side only in the “normal section”. May be configured not to transmit the production group number.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of reel rotation start preparation processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is zero. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer that measures. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M newly sets a minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 and starts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears information related to the reel stop order related to the finished game and information related to the press order. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M initializes symbol stop position data relating to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an output request at the start of reel rotation related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1260). In other words, a command for indicating that the reel starts to rotate can be transmitted to the sub-control board S by the processing of Step 1562 and Step 1564.

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the “advantageous section” is one of the game sections, and the situation of the game that is advantageous to the player, such as when the state related to the AT is “at-AT state” It is a game section that is easy to set at. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts with an advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc−1 (a decrement counter, 1500 which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the “favorable section” as the initial value. 1 is subtracted from the counter value which is set as a value and can be subtracted every game during the period of “advantageous section”.

  Next, in step 3408, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is the “AT in-progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M decrements the AT counter value by 1. Next, in step 3412, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high securing fault counter KHc, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1700). It should be noted that if the result is No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT-related state that can be displayed by the push order navigation is the “AT state”, the game AT counter value is subtracted, but the “advantageous BB state”, “ In the case of “advantageous BB inside game”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. In other words, when the AT counter value remains (1 or more remain) and the state shifts from the “AT in-progress state” to the “specialized precursor state”, the AT counter value is maintained and the “AT in-progress state” is maintained. It is configured to be able to transition (transition) from “state” → “specialized sign state” → “addition special state”. Even if the state relating to AT is “AT state”, it is possible not to decrement the AT counter value by 1 when a winning number including a bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is subtracted. You may control. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “30” and the remaining AT remaining game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is “30”, the AT counter value is “30”. Or “30 + α”, which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT addition lottery relating to the game, is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. “29” may be displayed as the number of remaining AT games, or “29 + α”, which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT extra lottery (note that “α” obtained by the extra lottery is , In a specific game after the game (a game satisfying a predetermined condition at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the bonus game ends) without notifying the game. And “α” may be notified.) Then, the number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is also subtracted by 1 for each game even in the “advantageous BB inside game”, and an effect (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) suggesting the bonus confirmation is output. The number of remaining AT games can be subtracted for each game. With this configuration, when a bonus is won in a state in which push order navigation such as “AT state” can be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping the bonus winning. In other words, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games can be executed using the effect display device S40 or the like to inquire whether or not the bonus has been won, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Note that the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is ended is "30" or a value of "30" or more when notifying the result of adding and adding the result of the AT extra lottery. Can be controlled to display. If the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “1” and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1”, the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games is “0”, but while maintaining this state, a continuous effect over a plurality of games is performed to determine whether or not the bonus is won, and the AT counter value is “1”. The winning number (or winning / replay winning information, or the winning group number) where the game is executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1” and the AT addition lottery can be executed. Is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games is “0” and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “0”. Further, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the probability of executing a continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of AT remaining games is large.

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of RT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition enabling condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transition enabling conditions are RAM clear execution (RAM initialization), replay stop display (in this example, replay 04 stop display), BB win / start・ It is configured to be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not to transition to the RT state and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state transition enabling condition (RT state transition in FIG. 28). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1750). Note that if the answer is No in Step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 1750). In this embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped. However, when transitioning to “RT1”, the transition timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for transitioning to the RT state (stores the RT number in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

  Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are four RT states of “RT0” to “RT2” and “at the time of one type BB-A, B, C operation”, and by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure The RT state will shift. As a specific transition example of the RT state, when the RT state is “RT1”, RAM initialization is executed, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the state transitions to “RT0”. The replay 04 is a stop display, specifically, when the left stop button is operated as the first stop when the “replay-D1” is won in the situation where the RT state is “RT1”. The replays 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and “RT1” is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, when the “re-game-D1” is won in the situation where the RT state is “RT 1”, if the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed. The RT state shifts from “RT1” to “RT0”.

  In addition, when the RT state is “RT0” or “RT1”, the BB role is won, and the BB role is not won in the selected game (the condition device relating to type 1 BB-A, B, C is activated). The RT state shifts to “RT2”. In addition, when the BB combination is won in “RT2” (one of the types BB-A, B, and C is activated), the process proceeds to “when the type 1 BB-A, B, and C is activated”. In addition, when BB is completed at the time of “1 type BB-A, B, C operation” (the operation of any of 1 type BB-A, B, C is completed), the process shifts to “RT1”. If the state related to the AT is “low probability state”, the BB is won, and when the BB is ended, the RT state shifts to “RT1” which is highly profitable for the player. Since the state is a state in which the push order navigation does not occur, when the “re-game-D1 to D3” is won, the wrong answer push order (the first stop is the left button, the middle button, the right button three choices, 1 of 3 choices is correct push order and replays other than replay 04 are stopped and 2 of 3 choices are incorrect push order and replay 04 is stopped)) By stopping, the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, and “RT1” is shifted to “RT0”. In addition, when the state related to AT is “high probability state”, “AT in-progress state”, “specialization precursor state” or “additional specialization state”, BB is won, and when BB ends, RT state Will shift to “RT1”, which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to AT is a state in which push navigation occurs, and even when “Regame-D1 to D3” is won, Since it navigates the order of pushing correct answers that are not stopped, “RT1” can be maintained.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transition enabling condition is satisfied in the game. Note that the AT state transition enable conditions are, for example, (1) when the BB with no setting difference that was won in the “high probability state” is finished, (2) when winning the continuous lottery, and (3) winning the reviving lottery. Satisfies if In the case of Yes in step 1752, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M in step 1754 triggers the new transition to the “AT precursor state”, and the number of AT initial games (in this example, 50, The number of games for which subtraction is started after shifting to the “state” is set in the AT counter M60, and the flow proceeds to step 1756. In the case of No in step 1752, the process proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the next game is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the number of high secure fault games (10 in this example) to the high secure fault counter and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3500). Transition. Note that if the answer is No in step 1756 or 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the “high probability state” and moving to “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB is awarded to shift to the “advantageous BB state”, and in the “advantageous BB state”, the AT game When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the BB ends and shifts from the “advantageous BB state” to the “AT state”. Specifically, when the number of AT games is increased by 30 games in the “advantageous BB state” and then shifts to the “AT state”, 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30) is set in the AT counter. become. At this time, if an effect is given to notify the player that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”, at the start of the “AT state”, the player is informed that the number of AT initial games is 80 games. It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, the initial value is set at the start of the “AT state” without performing the effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”. After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is notified that 30 games have been added during the AT (for example, immediately after the start of the “AT state” or the state where the number of AT remaining games in the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method for performing a notification effect is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly know how many games have been added or how many games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”. It is possible to enhance the interest in the extra effect that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur). In this example, the AT initial game number is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754. However, the execution timing of the process for setting the AT initial game number is not limited to this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the above-described AT state transition control process in Step 1400. Further, the number of games (AT initial number of games) set in the AT counter M60 is configured to be subtracted from when the game after the BB is finished (the state relating to AT is “AT state”). (No subtraction starts during BB). The counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board M.

  Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialized precursor state”, “addition special state” ”,“ Advantageous BB Inside Game ”,“ Advantageous BB State ”, and“ Restorability Produce State ”, there are 10 AT-related states. The state will transition. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the “AT state” and the special state transition lottery in which the player wins 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the “specialized sign state”. In addition, when 10 games have elapsed (digested) since the transition to the “specialization sign state”, the transition is made to the “specialized state of addition”. In addition, as a game section, three states relating to ATs of “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, and “normal BB state” are set as “normal section”, “high probability state”, “AT in progress” The states related to the seven ATs of “state”, “specialized sign state”, “addition special state”, “advantageous BB inside game”, “advantageous BB state”, and “revival effect state” are “advantageous sections” Is set. In other words, even if the states related to the seven ATs that are “advantageous sections” have been transitioned (transitioned), if 1500 games have elapsed without being set as “normal sections”, the “advantageous sections” are forcibly terminated. Set to “Normal section”. Also, when the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed in the “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, which is a notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed, However, the gaming state is maintained.

  As described above, when the “AT state” is set, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0, and when the continuous lottery is not selected, the “recovery / prohibition effect state” is set. When the revival lottery is won in the “Restorability Produce State”, it is possible to return to the “AT State” again. On the other hand, if the revival lottery is not won in the “Restorability Produce State”, the state shifts to the “Low Probability State” and changes from “Advantaged Section” to “Normal Section”.

  When the BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-C) is won in the “high probability state”, the BB without setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends, ”. In addition, when “no setting difference BB” (1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-C) is won in the “AT state”, the BB without setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends. Transition to “AT state”. In the “Restorability Produce State”, when the BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-C) is won, the BB without setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends. Shifts to the “AT state” (to win the resurrection lottery). In addition, when the BB with the setting difference (1 type BB-B) is won in the “Restorability Producing State”, the BB with the setting difference is activated, and the “Advantageous BB State” is finished, the BB with the setting difference is alone. If the winning number related to the BB role (winning number 20) is “low probability state” after the end of the BB (because there is a setting difference, the BB role will not win the revival lottery), and there is a setting difference BB is rare If the winning number overlaps with the winning combination (winning numbers 21 to 23), it becomes “AT state” after the end of the BB (in order to win the revival lottery with the rare role).

  In addition, when it is “advantageous section” and “high probability state”, BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) is won, BB with setting difference is activated, and “advantageous BB state” ends. Transition to the “high probability state”.

  In addition, the state related to the AT that is shifted after the “advantageous BB state” is ended is the state after the end of the BB that has been elected during the AT (“AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “addition special state”). (Both with BB and no setting difference BB) shift to a state related to AT at the time of BB winning among “AT state”, “specialized sign state” or “addition special state” and non-AT state ( After the BB with no setting difference won in the “high probability state”), the state shifts to the “AT state”. In addition, when there is a setting difference that is won during non-AT (“high probability state”) and BB ends, the state shifts to “high probability state”.

  It should be noted that the state related to the AT is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, the AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in the “low probability state” or “high probability state”, and the AT lottery. May be configured to shift to the “predictor state” by winning and then to “AT state” after the lapse of 16 to 32 games. In such a configuration, the predetermined condition device may be If the AT lottery is executed by winning, and if the AT lottery is not won, the state shifts to the “gasse sign state”, and after 16 to 32 games, the state shifts to the “low probability state” or “high probability state” You may comprise. In addition, a “standby section” that is different from the “advantage section” and the “normal section” may be provided as a game section. For example, in the case of a game where AT lottery is executed by winning “Cherry”, BB If “BB + Cherry” with a duplicate of cherry and cherries is won, and the AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until “BB” of “BB + Cherry” wins is set as “standby section”. May be. In this way, by providing a “standby section”, when the BB is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery is not won, the BB is won in the “low probability state”, and the AT In the period when the lottery is won and until the BB symbol combination is complete (until the advantageous section indicator YH is lit), the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off, so that the AT lottery is won. Whether or not the player is playing can be told to the player. Further, when the BB is elected in the “additional special state”, the “additional special state” may be resumed after the end of the BB. In such a case, during the BB, Execute the AT addition lottery that is different from the BB won in the “AT state” as the BB won in the “specialized state” (for example, win the AT extra lottery over the BB won in the “AT state”) The number of AT games may be increased and the number of games per game is relatively large). In addition, when the BB is elected in the “specialization sign state”, it may be configured to shift to the “additional special state” after the end of the BB. In such a configuration, during the BB, It may be configured such that the AT extra lottery is executed in the same manner as the BB won in the “extra specialization state”.

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, there is a game section as a section related to the state of the game. As the game section, a “normal section” which is relatively low profit for the player and a relatively high section for the player. It has two game sections, an “advantageous section” which is a profitable section. As an explanation of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the game section corresponding to the current AT state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is an “advantageous section”, in step 3514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has a counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc−1 being zero. In other words, it is determined whether or not the “favorable section” has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears all information related to the AT (therefore, the AT counter value becomes 0 and the number of staying games in the “specialized sign state”). Things are also 0). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an “advantageous section” end condition other than the case where the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc−1 becomes 0. For example, the AT counter value is 0. Or when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the routine proceeds to step 3515. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the “advantageous section” ends and the “normal section” is set after the next game, information related to AT (number of AT continuing games, number of AT remaining games, etc.) All the information relating to (3) is cleared, so that the conditions for becoming an “advantageous section” again in the subsequent “normal section” are not relaxed. Note that information related to the AT cleared by the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1, a flag indicating a gaming state, and the like. The information is also cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed. However, depending on the clearing of the RAM when the setting is changed, the “conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)” or “RT state” In addition, the information related to “number of stored items” is also cleared, but depending on the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section), “condition device related to the continuous accessory operating device (BB)” or “RT state” , Information related to “stored number” is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the setting is different from the clear range at the end of the “advantageous section” (for example, when the process of step 3515 is executed). In addition, you may comprise so that "condition apparatus which concerns on an accessory continuous action | operation apparatus (BB)" and "RT state" may be hold | maintained by RAM clear at the time of a setting change. The addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantageous section” are continuous. In this way, by making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantageous section” continuous, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the top address to be cleared in the clear process and the range of addresses to be cleared. When the “advantageous section” ends, a command indicating that the “advantageous section” has ended is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to erase the game history such as information indicating that the game was “advantageous section” and how many games “AT state” was executed. ing. However, when the RAM clear at the time of setting change is executed, game history such as information on the “advantageous section” on the side of the sub-control board S and information on how many games “AT state” is executed Will also be deleted.

  When the “favorable section” is ended because the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc−1 is 0, (1) when the current AT state is the “high probability state”. If the state related to the AT is “low probability state” in the next game, and (2) the state related to the current AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the state related to the AT in the next game is “ (3) If the current AT state is “Advantageous BB state”, the AT state will be “Normal BB state” in the next game. (4) Current If the AT state is “AT in progress state”, “specialization sign state”, “addition special state” or “restoration effect state”, the AT state in the next game is “low probability” State "(AT For relevant information is cleared).

  Next, in step 3516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game as the “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “favorable section” has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. The advantageous section indicator YH is turned off when the “favorable section” is finished and set to the “normal section”, but the detailed timing of turning off the light is not limited to the timing of this embodiment. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal related to a game that becomes the “normal section” after the “advantage section” ends. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be configured to be turned off before the start lever D50 capable of starting the next game is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3528.

  Next, in step 3528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has decided to newly set the “advantageous section” in the next game (decided to set the “advantageous section” from the “normal section”). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. Note that the predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed numerical value (1500 in this example) that is common to all set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1293). Even in the case of No in step 3528, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1293). In this embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534. However, the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. The timing is from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the “advantageous section” (game in the “regular section”) to the timing when a game medal can be inserted in the new “advantageous section” game ( If the game before the “advantageous section” is a game related to replay, it is set as appropriate during the period of time until the start lever operation in the new “advantageous section” becomes effective) Also good.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the present embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104. Thereafter, a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example) To be periodically executed.

  First, in step 1602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of interruption (for example, saving of data held in a register in the CPUC100, input port check of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt process). In the case of No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power-off detection signal, the input acceptance sensor D10s, and the first input sensor. D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, the presence / absence of the operation of these operation members and the sensor detection state are sampled at the interrupt interval T). )

  Next, in step 1610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. (For example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously ON over a plurality of samplings, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise by turning on the door switch flag. Can also be detected). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a process related to the rotation driving control process (control of driving of the reel M50) of all reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53). Is executed later). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If YES in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays the AT remaining game number (AT game number) on the AT counter value display device D 280, and proceeds to step 1614. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1612, the process proceeds to Step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing in step 1612 and step 1613 is not necessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (not shown, inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormality error flag, It is determined whether all flags relating to errors such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, a door switch flag, and the like are off. In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side and a command indicating that no error is detected) (for example, register Set in the area), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command that an error is detected) (for example, Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub-side. The error not detected command may be set only when the error is released from the state where the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off). The information setting process may not be executed (the step 1618 may not be provided). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or from the state where a first error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error has changed, such as a second error (for example, a payout medal retention error).

  Next, in step 1622, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set). Control command). Here, as a command to be transmitted to the sub control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop) A command related to the second reel stop reception timing (transmitted immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop reception timing (the stop button as the third stop) Sent immediately after operation), sent immediately after all reels stop), commands related to stop timing of stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button as a display symbol stop), winning / replaying Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after start lever operation (limited to advantageous sections)), bonus winning Commands related to information (sent immediately after the start lever operation), commands related to the RT state (transmitted after all reels stop until the next game starts), commands related to the state related to AT (Sent from the time all reels stop until the next game is started), high fault counter value command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), command related to the number of AT remaining games (all Commands from the time the reels stop until the next game starts, or immediately after the start lever is operated), commands related to the game section (from when all reels stop until the next game starts Sent in between), etc. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the revolving game machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, information relating to an error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on. Is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LEDs (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among a plurality of 7-segment LED units). Output a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 may not be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a soft random number management process (such as a process for updating a random value managed by software). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains internal information register data (the internal information register has a region where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not an abnormal flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). More specifically, the abnormality flag bit is set when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not an abnormal flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt end process and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-described non-recoverable error processing.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotating drum drive control process according to the subroutine of Step 6100 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. In addition, in this process, although the process about one reel is illustrated, it supplements performing the process corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after execution of the processing of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. If YES in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6102, the process proceeds to step 6106.

  Next, in step 6106, the CPU MC of the main control board M starts the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing at which the reel rotation start standby state ends and the execution of the reel acceleration process starts. For example, in step 1260 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the processing execution timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel acceleration processing, and proceeds to step 6112. When the reel is stopped, the reel starts to be rotated by this process. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6106, the process proceeds to step 6112.

  Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel acceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M has executed all the interrupt processing for the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, “interrupt execution count” in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described later). It is determined whether or not (timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel constant speed maintaining process, and proceeds to step 6120. Note that if the answer is No in step 6112 or step 6114, the process proceeds to step 6120.

  Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel constant speed state. In the case of Yes in step 6120, the CPU MC of the main control board M becomes the reel constant speed state in step 6122 (after executing the processing of step 6116), and the reel sensor corresponds to the reel (processing of this subroutine). It is determined whether or not an index provided on the reel is detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel, and is used when detecting whether the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one rotation, or the like. Each index is detected by a reel sensor. The reel sensor signal is electrically connected to the main control board M. When the reel sensor detects (cuts) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is detected that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPU MC of the main control board M has passed a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. Determine whether or not. In the case of No in step 6124, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. As described above, in this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state, thereby making it possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed is normally constant. It is configured. In this example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times (configured to be able to rotate 400 steps by the interrupt processing 400 times), and when the reel rotation speed is constant. The time is longer than the time for which the reel makes one revolution (one revolution) (for example, the time for one revolution of the reel is 336 steps and the interrupt processing is executed 336 times). With this configuration, the distance between the index and the reel sensor at the timing when the reel driving state becomes the constant speed state (the distance from when the reel rotates and the index is detected by the reel sensor) is far apart. However, if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. Configured to be able to.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 6124, in step 6126, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel reacceleration process, and proceeds to the process of step 6130. As described above, in this example, when the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. The reel driving state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. Note that if the answer is No in Step 6120, the process moves to Step 6130. Note that the reel re-acceleration process does not have to be the same process as the reel acceleration process described above. The reel re-acceleration process and the reel acceleration process are used to interrupt the combination of phases excited by the stepping motor and the interrupt process for each combination of phases to be excited. The number of executions may be different.

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of reel rotation stop processing according to the subroutine of Step 6200 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPU MC of the main control board M starts the reel deceleration standby state start timing (the timing when the reel constant speed state ends, for example, the reel deceleration standby state start timing when the stop button is operated. It is determined whether or not it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6130, in step 6132, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel deceleration standby state, and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6130, the process proceeds to step 6134.

  Next, in step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel deceleration standby state. In the case of Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing to start executing the reel deceleration processing) has been reached. If Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts reel deceleration (reel deceleration processing). Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel deceleration state, and proceeds to the processing of step 6142. In addition, also when it is No at step 6134 or step 6136, it transfers to the process of step 6142.

  Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel deceleration state. If Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing to end the reel deceleration process) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel stop state, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1612). In addition, also when it is No in step 6142 or step 6144, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1612).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a detailed description will be given of the rotation operation of the reel M50 of the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. The rotating type gaming machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained (reel) When the driving state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed, but the rotational speed may not actually reach the constant speed). When any one of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a four-phase stepping motor having four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (no problem if it is not a four-phase stepping motor). Rotation control is performed by phase excitation. That is, the stepping motor can be rotated in the positive direction by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of phases to be excited). In the figure, among the Φ0 to Φ3, ones indicating which phase is to be excited are shown in the “Excited Phase” column (details will be described later).

  Also, as shown in the “reel rotation speed image” in the upper part of the figure, the driving state from the start of rotation of the stepping motor to the stop is divided into six, and the stepping motor is arranged according to the driving pattern corresponding to each driving state. Drive control. Here, the driving state includes “reel stop state”, “reel rotation start standby state”, “reel acceleration state”, “reel constant speed state”, “reel deceleration standby state”, and “reel deceleration state”. In the “reel rotation speed image”, the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed and the speed increases upward, the horizontal axis is the time and the time passes in the right direction. Yes. In addition, the example shown in the figure illustrates a case in which a rotation failure of the reel does not occur, and this is the case when a rotation failure of the reel occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or causing a step-out. (If a reel rotation failure occurs, it will be described later).

  “Reel stop state” indicates a state where the reel is stopped. When the reel is in the “reel stop state”, the reel is in a stationary state, and all phases of the stepping motor are in a stationary state. Is not excited.

  Next, in the situation of “reel stop state”, the reel drive state is updated to “reel rotation start standby state” based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing (1) in the figure. . Here, the “reel rotation start standby state” indicates a state of waiting until the acceleration process (reel acceleration process) of the stepping motor is started after the start lever D50 is operated. This standby period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the “reel stop state” to the “reel acceleration state”. For example, the time from the time when the reel driving state became “reel acceleration state” in the previous game is counted, and the start lever D50 related to the current game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses. If it is, the “reel rotation start standby state” is entered.

  Next, at the timing (2) in the figure, the reel driving state is updated from the “reel rotation start standby state” to the “reel acceleration state”. Here, the “reel acceleration state” is a state in which the reel is accelerated in order to reach a constant speed from a state where the reel is stationary. In this example, when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times (“100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220”, refer to the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state at the lower left in the figure), the acceleration state ends (reel driving state is “reel constant speed”). Update to "status"). Next, the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed at the timing of (3) in the drawing, in other words, at the timing when the “reel acceleration state” is completed by executing another timer interrupt process. At this timing, the reel drive state remains “reel acceleration state”. Next, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the reel driving state is updated from the “reel rotation start standby state” to the “reel acceleration state”, and then the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times. The state is updated to “reel constant speed state”. As described above, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed, the reel driving state remains in the “reel acceleration state” for one timer interruption process, in other words, in the final state in the “reel acceleration state”. “Φ3, φ0”, which is a combination of phases to be excited, is configured to execute interrupt processing only once, similar to “reel constant speed state” in which interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of phases to be excited. (When no reel rotation abnormality has occurred). With this configuration, it is possible to stably execute the acceleration process until the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed.

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a “step motor excitation image”. In the figure, a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is “reel acceleration state” and a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is “reel constant speed state” are illustrated. First, a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel acceleration state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of FIG. Note that “excited phase” is a combination of phases to be excited, and “interrupt execution count” indicates the number of times interrupt processing that is excited by the combination of phases to be excited is executed. In this example, when executing the reel acceleration process, the step motor (stepping motor) is configured to be excited for 220 times of the timer interrupt process, and (KA) "φ0" interrupt process 100 times → ( KB) Interrupt processing 60 times at “φ0, φ1” → 30 times interrupt processing at (KC) “φ1” → 15 times interrupt processing at (KD) “φ1, φ2” → (KE) “φ2 ”Interrupt processing 8 times → (KF)“ φ2, φ3 ”interrupt processing 4 times → (KG)“ φ3 ”interrupt processing 2 times → (KH)“ φ3, φ0 ”interrupt It is configured to excite the step motor (stepping motor) by executing the interrupt process once as in the process (the number of executions of the interrupt process is merely an example and there is no problem even if it is changed). Thus, in this example, at the time of executing the reel acceleration process, the number of times of executing the interrupt process is gradually reduced with a combination of one exciting phase.

  Next, a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel constant speed state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of FIG. In this example, when the reel is in the constant speed state (when the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed), interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) “φ0” → (TB) at “φ0, φ1”. Interrupt processing once → (TC) “φ1” interrupt processing once → (TD) “φ1, φ2” interrupt processing once → (TE) “φ2” interrupt processing once → (TF) Interrupt processing once at “φ2, φ3” → Interrupt processing once at (TG) “φ3” → Interrupt processing once at (TH) “φ3, φ0” → (TA) “ Interrupt processing once at “φ0” → (TB) Interrupt processing once at “φ0, φ1” →... (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed once every interrupt processing. The step motor (stepping motor) is excited. Thus, in this example, at the time of executing the reel constant speed maintaining process, the number of times of executing the interrupt process with one combination of exciting phases is configured to be one.

  Next, in the situation where the reel driving state is “reel constant speed state”, the stop button corresponding to any of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the figure, and the reel driving state is set to “reel deceleration standby state”. Is updated. Here, the “reel constant speed state” is a state in which the rotation speed of the reel is a constant speed (a state in which the combination of phases to be excited is switched for each interrupt process). "" Indicates a state from when the stop button is operated by the player to when the stop control is started (in the reel deceleration standby state, a slip of the reel corresponding to the number of slip frames has occurred). . The period of this driving state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

  Next, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the reel driving state is updated from the “reel deceleration standby state” to the “reel deceleration state”, and the reel deceleration is started. When the reel drive state is updated from the “reel deceleration standby state” to the “reel deceleration state”, a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel. Perform 4-phase excitation to excite all. When excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel drive state is updated from the “reel deceleration state” to the “reel stop state” at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel is stopped.

  As described above, in the spinning machine according to this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. When the reel driving state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed during the reel acceleration process. Whether the reel has been normally accelerated, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether a defective rotation of the reel has occurred) is determined in step 6124 (reel driving state is changed to the reel constant speed state). (It is determined after a predetermined time has elapsed since the update). However, in the process of step 6124, the reel sensor does not detect the index, so the reel is not at a constant speed (reel rotation failure is detected). If it is determined that the reel has occurred), the reel re-acceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. As described above, the reel acceleration process is performed so that it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally performed. Even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the reel acceleration process, If the reel rotation speed has reached the constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel rotation processing is completed and the reel rotation processing is completed, the reel drive state is the reel constant speed state. When the reel sensor detects the index until a predetermined time elapses after the update, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed without executing the reacceleration process. By executing the reel reacceleration process, the player However, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to proceed with the game (cannot operate the stop button). In addition, during the execution of the reel acceleration process, by configuring so as not to execute the process for determining whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed, the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reel can be reduced. In addition, since it is comprised in this way, when a reel rotation defect generate | occur | produces in the middle of the reel type game machine which concerns on this example performing the reel acceleration process, it acts as follows. It becomes.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel acceleration process is finished → Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → Reel constant A reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the speed maintaining process → reel rotation failure detection → reel reacceleration process is executed.
The reel rotation failure means that the reel rotation such as the reel window D160 is hindered by rotation of the reel (such as rubbing the reel against the reel window D160) or out of step. Refers to the case where was not successfully executed. As described above, even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the reel reacceleration process is executed, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of reel acceleration process → Reel acceleration process is continuously executed → Reel acceleration process is completed → Update the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state → Execute the reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect the reel rotation failure → Execute the reel reacceleration process. As described above, even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel re-acceleration process is executed when the reel rotation failure is detected thereafter, so that the game can proceed smoothly. Will be able to. In addition, as described above, even if a rotating rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the same interruption as in the case where the rotating reel rotation process is continued and the rotating rotation failure does not occur When the reel acceleration process is executed for the number of times, the execution of the reel acceleration process is terminated. With this configuration, the reel rotation speed can easily reach a constant speed without executing the reel re-acceleration process when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of the reel acceleration process. it can.

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel acceleration process is performed during power off → Return from power off → Reel acceleration process is continued (unprocessed) Reel acceleration process) → Reel rotation failure occurred during reel acceleration process → Reel acceleration process continued (unprocessed reel acceleration process executed) → Reel acceleration process completed → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed → the reel rotation failure is detected → the reel reacceleration process is executed. As described above, even if the power is cut off during the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state within a predetermined time. If the reel sensor does not detect the index, the reel reacceleration process is executed, so that the game can proceed smoothly. In addition, if the power interruption occurs during the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel sensor is updated within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state. Is configured not to execute the reel re-acceleration process when the index is detected, and this configuration prevents the player from proceeding with the reel re-acceleration process (the stop button cannot be operated). It can be made difficult to occur.

<< Action after final stop button operation >>
In the rotating type gaming machine according to the present example, after the operation of the final stop button (third stop button), the final reel (which is a reel that has been rotated to the end, also referred to as the third reel) is stopped, and the winning combination The game medal payout can be executed when the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed. However, the operation relating to the game medal payout may be configured as follows.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Perform constant speed state maintenance process → Accept stop button → Stop first as first reel stop operation Operate the button → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Operate the third stop button as the stop operation of the third reel (third stop button → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power failure occurs → The third reel moves (rotates) to the stop display position → Detects power failure → Executes power failure processing → Power recovery → Reel In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination may be configured to perform the process related to the stop display → payout of the game medal as described above. By configuring in this way, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in a game won by a small role that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop button such as the common bell described above. Even if a power failure occurs due to a power failure at a game hall immediately after the start, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of sliding frames is maximum), The movement (rotation) to the planned stop position can be completed. In addition, when the symbol combination (for example, common bell) constituting the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the game medals can be normally paid out, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Perform constant speed state maintenance process → Accept stop button → Stop first as first reel stop operation Operate the button → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Operate the third stop button as the stop operation of the third reel (third stop button → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Wins the reels as seen from the player Although the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 (the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is correct). For example, in the game in which the bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role that is the winning role is not displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the game) → The processing relating to the game medal payout is performed as described above You may comprise. With this configuration, even when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped on the reel as viewed from the player, In the internal processing of the gaming machine, winning the winning combination and accepting the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medal can be paid out and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. can do. The timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and the reel rotation failure occurs during the period from when the second reel is stopped and displayed until the processing related to the game medal payout is executed. All the cases where the reel corresponding to the 3 stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position can be applied (can also be applied to the action related to the reel rotation failure exemplified below). Note that, in the above-described action 2, the action in the game won for the winning combination is illustrated. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (the same operation is performed when the rotation failure and the power interruption do not occur in other operations). Also good).
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Perform constant speed state maintenance process → Accept stop button → Stop first as first reel stop operation Operate the button → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Operate the third stop button as the stop operation of the third reel (third stop button → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player In step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal. → Processing for paying out game medals is executed. It may be a winning combination (for example, a common bell) that can be won regardless of the stop button operation timing in the played game, and may or may not win according to the stop button operation timing in the winning game. It is good also as a combination (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry). In addition, in a game where a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, when the reel rotation failure or power interruption does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( In a case where a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect of blinking (sometimes referred to as a back lamp) (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect), the predetermined gaming state is set. Even if a reel rotation failure occurs in the game won for the predetermined winning combination and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. You may comprise so that a lamp production may be performed. In this operation, the reel corresponding to the third stop has been illustrated as being unable to stop at the planned stop position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is scheduled to stop due to defective reel rotation. It may be applied when the reel cannot be stopped at the position, or may be applied when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position due to the reel rotation failure (the same applies to other actions). Applicable).

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Perform constant speed state maintenance process → Accept stop button → Stop first as first reel stop operation Operate the button → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button)-> update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state-> detect power-off-> execute power-off processing-> third reel is player The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269. (In this case, it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which the bell role is won, the bell that wins the reel as viewed from the player) Although the symbol combination corresponding to the role did not stop display, the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role was normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. Case) → Execute processing relating to payout of game medals. It may be configured to operate as described above. It should be noted that the timing for detecting the power interruption, the timing for stopping the power supply to the gaming machine due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the timing for determining that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing in step 1269, and the timing for returning to the power supply However, the timing is not limited to the above timing, and the timing for detecting power-off and the power to the gaming machine when the power-off occurs during the period from when the second reel is stopped and displayed until the processing related to the game medal payout is executed. The timing corresponding to the third stop button when the power is cut off is sufficient as long as there is a timing for stopping the supply of power, a timing for determining that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing in step 1269, and a timing for returning to power. Can be applied to all cases where the vehicle could not stop at the planned stop position The way is). With this configuration, a power interruption occurred immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the third stop button was received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination could not be stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. In this case, the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be displayed at the timing at which the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. When the operation is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medals are paid out after the power is restored (the hopper drive is used for the game medals to be paid out). In addition to paying out from the discharge outlet by the player, it is possible to execute display of the credit number display device (including the increase in the number of credits). Can benefit constitutes such that less likely to occur. Note that the timing at which the supply of power to the gaming machine stops due to the occurrence of a power interruption may be referred to as the timing at which the power interruption occurs. In addition, in a game where a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, when the reel rotation failure or power interruption does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( In a case where a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect of blinking (sometimes referred to as a back lamp) (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect), the predetermined gaming state is set. The back lamp corresponding to the predetermined winning combination even when the power is cut off and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped in the game winning the predetermined winning combination. You may comprise so that a production may be performed. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is stopped due to the power interruption. This may be applied to the case where the reels corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position due to the power-off (other operations can be applied in the same manner). Is).

<Action 4>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped. → The second reel is operated as the second reel. → The second reel is stopped. → The third reel is operated as the third reel. → Reel driving state is updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position when viewed from the player → The reel is awarded a winning position when viewed from the player Although the corresponding symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process in step 1269 (the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normally performed). For example, in a game that is lost, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss is not displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but a game corresponding to the operation of the player's stop button (When stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the internal processing) → The game medal payout may not be executed. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels will receive a winning combination as seen from the player Even if the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed, it is lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the game medal The game machine can be configured so as not to be executed, and can be a fair game machine. It can be a machine. The above action 4 is not limited to losing only. For example, in a game that is not won by the bell (a game that is won by the re-playing player, a game that is won by the watermelon, etc.) It is supplemented that the present invention can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the symbol combination that is displayed in a stopped state as viewed from the player is a symbol combination that is not consistent with the internal lottery result due to a rotation failure. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 5>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The 1st reel is stopped → The 2nd stop button is operated as the 2nd reel stop operation → The 2nd reel is stopped → The power supply is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → 3rd reel The third stop button is operated as a stop operation (accepting the operation of the third stop button) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → power-off is detected → power-off processing is executed → the third reel is received from the player Cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position by watching → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269 Judgment (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a game that is lost, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. Although there was no normal stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the player's stop button) → power return → game medal payout You may comprise so that it may act as mentioned above which is not performed. By configuring in this way, in a game that is lost as a result of the role lottery, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and it corresponds to the winning combination on the reel as seen from the player Even if the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed, it is lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the game medal A game machine that can be configured so as not to perform the payout of the game machine, can be a fair game machine, and does not cause an unintended disadvantage in the game hall It can be. Note that the above action 5 is not limited only to lose, but for example, in a game that is not won by the bell (a game that is won by the re-playing role, a game that is won by the watermelon, etc.) It is supplemented that the present invention can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the symbol combination that is displayed in a stopped state as viewed from the player is a symbol combination that is not consistent with the internal lottery result due to a rotation failure. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Operation 6>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped. → The second reel is operated as the second reel. → The second reel is stopped. → The third reel is operated as the third reel. → Reel driving state is updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position when viewed from the player → Bonus combination to the reel when viewed from the player ( For example, the symbol combination corresponding to BB) is stopped and displayed, but it is determined in the determination process of step 1269 that the symbol combination is normal (reset based on the operation of the stop button). For example, a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination on the reel when viewed from the player in a game that has not been won for the bonus combination and has been lost. Is stopped, but when the stop control is normally executed to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → the bonus does not start, In addition, it may be configured to operate as described above in which the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the bonus combination as seen from the player. Even if the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed, it is lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. When the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, the bonus is not received even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to start, can be a fair game machine, and does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game hall It can be a machine. Note that the above action 6 is not limited to losing only, for example, a game in which a bonus combination is not won (not in the bonus) and a bonus combination is not won (a re-playing combination is won). It is supplemented that in a game, a game selected as a watermelon, etc., it can also be applied when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. Note that the action 6 is an example of an action in a game that was not won as a bonus combination. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (applicable when rotation failure and power interruption do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped on the reel as seen from the player. In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal. The operation is such that the bonus is not started and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, in the case where the reel rotation failure has not occurred in the game won in the bonus combination or inside the bonus, the following operation is performed.
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the planned stop position when viewed from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player. It can be exemplified that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the bonus is started to be executed and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus has been illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (the type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus where the freeze is executed and a bonus where the freeze is not executed. Depending on the gaming state in which the bonus combination is won, whether or not the freeze is performed may be varied.

<Operation 7>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The 1st reel is stopped → The 2nd stop button is operated as the 2nd reel stop operation → The 2nd reel is stopped → The power supply is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → 3rd reel The third stop button is operated as a stop operation (accepting the operation of the third stop button) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → power-off is detected → power-off processing is executed → the third reel is received from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but the symbol combination is not displayed in the determination process in step 1269. The match is determined to be normal (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been normally completed. For example, in a game where the bonus combination is not won and the game is lost. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the control is executed normally) → Power return → Bonus is not started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel plays a bonus role as seen from the player. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped, it is lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed, Can be configured not to start medal bonus, can be a fair gaming machine, and cause unintended disadvantages in the game hall It was not can be a game machine. Note that the above action 6 is not limited to losing only, for example, a game in which a bonus combination is not won (not in the bonus) and a bonus combination is not won (a re-playing combination is won). It is supplemented that in a game, a game selected as a watermelon, etc., it can also be applied when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. Note that the action 6 is an example of an action in a game that was not won as a bonus combination. That is, when the power interruption does not occur, the following operation is performed (applicable when the rotation failure and the power interruption do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped on the reel as seen from the player. In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal. The operation is such that the bonus is not started and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, when the reel power supply is not cut off in the game won in the bonus combination or inside the bonus, the following effects are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the planned stop position when viewed from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player. It can be exemplified that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the bonus is started to be executed and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus has been illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (the type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus where the freeze is executed and a bonus where the freeze is not executed. Depending on the gaming state in which the bonus combination is won, whether or not the freeze is performed may be varied.

<Action 8>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game won for the bonus combination → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel moves to the planned stop position (rotation) when viewed from the player Cannot → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. Align starts determination → bonus to be normal, and may be configured to act as described above to freeze Bonus start is executed. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus is won or a game won in a bonus role, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving a stop operation of the third stop button, Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reels as viewed from the player, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. Can also be configured to start a bonus and perform a freeze that is performed at the start of the bonus. It can be configured so as not to cause a significant disadvantage for the player that the bonus will not be started due to the reel rotation failure in the situation to be done, and the bonus is the same as when the reel rotation failure did not occur By performing the freeze at the start, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable.

<Action 9>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game won for the bonus combination → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → Operating the first stop button as the first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operating the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → The second reel stop display → Power failure occurs and the game Power supply to the machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power failure is detected → Power failure Execute time processing-> The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player-> The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) stops on the reel as viewed from the player Although not shown, in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, the power is restored, the bonus is started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is performed as described above. Good. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where the bonus is won or a game won in the bonus combination, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button. Each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped on the reel as viewed from the player When the stop button operation corresponding to the bonus combination is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. However, it can be configured to start a bonus and perform a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, and the bonus starts It can be configured so as not to cause a significant disadvantage for the player that the bonus will not be started due to power interruption in the situation that should be done, and at the start of the bonus as well as when the reel rotation failure does not occur By executing the freeze, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable.

<Operation 10>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped. → The second reel is operated as the second reel. → The second reel is stopped. → The third reel is operated as the third reel. (Receiving operation) → Reel reel drive state updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurred → 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Replay to the reel as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed, but it is determined in step 1269 that the symbol combination is normal (reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normal). For example, in a game that has been lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-playing role is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player, but the game corresponding to the operation of the player's stop button When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the internal processing) → The automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-gamer is not performed, and the re-play lamp D290 is newly added. You may comprise so that it may act as mentioned above which does not light. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes a re-playing role as viewed from the player. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped, it is lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. When the corresponding stop button operation is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed An automatic bet is not made and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer whose RT state is to be shifted when the stop display is performed in the current RT state is stopped and viewed from the player, the gaming machine The combination of symbols that correspond to a loss is received by the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed by internal processing. When the stop control for displaying the stop is executed normally, the RT state will not shift (the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination to which the RT state other than the re-game combination will be displayed is stopped. The same applies to the case). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game hall. Note that the above action 10 is not limited to losing only, and is applied to, for example, a case where a reel combination failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed in a game that is not won as a re-gamer. I will add that I can do it. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (applicable when rotation failure and power interruption do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player. It is determined that the combination is normal. The automatic bet is not performed and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit.
Note that the automatic bet is a bet button (max bet button) when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game medals bet in the game won for the re-playing role is stopped and displayed by the re-playing role. Even if there is no operation and no game medal is inserted from the medal slot, the bet is automatically made.
On the other hand, when the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game won as the re-gamer, the following effects are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the planned stop position as seen from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player. In this case, the symbol combination is determined to be normal. → An automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the replay player is elected in the previous game, the replay is replayed. Lamp D290 will continue to light up)
The following actions can be illustrated.

<Operation 11>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The 1st reel is stopped → The 2nd stop button is operated as the 2nd reel stop operation → The 2nd reel is stopped → The power supply is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → 3rd reel The third stop button is operated as a stop operation (accepting the operation of the third stop button) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → power-off is detected → power-off processing is executed → the third reel is received from the player It is impossible to move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen → The symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269 (If it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been normally completed, for example, in a game that has been lost, the reel has a symbol combination corresponding to the re-playing role as viewed from the player. Stopped display, but when the stop control is normally executed to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → power return → re-game An automatic bet corresponding to the stop display is not performed, and the replay lamp D290 may be configured to operate as described above so that it does not light up anew. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the player is replayed on the reel as viewed from the player. Even when the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be lost at the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game player is stopped and displayed. However, the automatic bet is not made and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer whose RT state is to be shifted when the stop display is performed in the current RT state is stopped and viewed from the player, the gaming machine The combination of symbols that correspond to a loss is received by the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed by internal processing. When the stop control for displaying the stop is executed normally, the RT state will not shift (the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination to which the RT state other than the re-game combination will be displayed is stopped. The same applies to the case). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game hall. Note that the above action 11 is not limited to losing only. For example, in a game that has not been won as a re-playing role, it is applied when a combination of symbols corresponding to the re-playing role is stopped and displayed. I will supplement what I can do. That is, when the power interruption does not occur, the following operation is performed (applicable when the rotation failure and the power interruption do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player. It is determined that the combination is normal. The automatic bet is not performed and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. On the other hand, in the case where the power is not cut off in the game won as the re-gamer, the following effects are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the planned stop position as seen from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player. In this case, the symbol combination is determined to be normal. → An automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the replay player is elected in the previous game, the replay is replayed. Lamp D290 will continue to light up)
The following actions can be illustrated.

<Action 12>
Reel rotation starts as a game selected for replay → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is valid → First stop as first reel stop operation Operate the button → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Operate the third stop button as the stop operation of the third reel (third stop button → Reel driving state updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurred → Third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Replayed to the reel as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped, but it is determined in the determination process of step 1269 that the symbol combination is normal. It is, and replay lamp D290 may be configured to act as described above to be newly turned. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is replaying, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the replaying role is played on the reel as viewed from the player. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped, each reel (the left reel) is selected at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed. , Middle reel, right reel) are accepted, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is executed normally, it corresponds to the re-game player Even if the symbol combination to be stopped is not displayed in a stopped state, an automatic bet is made and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player can be obtained, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer can be stopped and displayed, so that replaying can be performed even when the reel is viewed. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not a winning combination has been made, it is possible to make it difficult to misrecognize the game situation by visually confirming whether or not automatic betting has been performed and lighting of the re-playing lamp D290. In addition, in the action 12, when the re-game player whose RT state will shift when the stop display is performed in the current RT state is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game player is stopped and displayed. Even if not, the RT state shifts. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

<Operation 13>
Reel rotation starts as a game selected for replay → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is valid → First stop as first reel stop operation Operate the button → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button)-> update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state-> detect power-off-> execute power-off processing-> third reel is player Cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as viewed from the → the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269 There a decision → power supply recovery → automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the replay combination has been made, and replay lamp D290 may be configured to act as described above to light anew. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is replaying, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the game is replayed on the reel as viewed from the player. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped, each reel (left) is selected at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-playing winning combination can be stopped and displayed in the internal processing of the gaming machine. (Reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is executed normally, Even if the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped, an automatic bet is placed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player can be obtained, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer can be stopped and displayed, so that replaying can be performed even when the reel is viewed. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not a winning combination has been made, it is possible to make it difficult to misrecognize the game situation by visually confirming whether or not automatic betting has been performed and lighting of the re-playing lamp D290. Also, in the action 13, when the re-game player whose RT state is to be shifted when the stop display is performed in the current RT state, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game player is stopped and displayed. Even if not, the RT state shifts. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

<Operation 14>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game for a role that RT state transitions (sometimes referred to as RT transition combination) → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance Enabled → Operate the first stop button as the first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → The third reel Operate the third stop button as a stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure → The third reel moves to the planned stop position as seen from the player (Rotation) is not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is not stopped from the viewpoint of the player, but it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing in step 1269 → R State transitions may be configured to act as described above. With this configuration, in the game won for the RT transition combination, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination on the reel as viewed from the player. Even if the combination is not stopped, each reel (left reel, middle reel) is selected at the timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed in the internal processing of the gaming machine. If the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is received. Even if is not stopped and displayed, the RT state is shifted. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintentional disadvantages to the player, and it is possible to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has. Administrators can also operate gaming machines with peace of mind. The RT transition combination is a combination in which a combination of symbols is stopped and displayed in a predetermined RT state to shift to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state. It can be different whether or not. That is, in RT state A, the predetermined combination A is an RT transition combination, but in RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be an RT transition combination. In RT state A, the predetermined combination A is an RT transition combination. However, in the RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be won.

<Operation 15>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game for a role that RT state transitions (sometimes referred to as RT transition combination) → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance Enabled → Operate the first stop button as the first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Power failure occurs As a result, the power supply to the gaming machine stops. The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted). The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → Execute processing when power is cut off → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role as seen from the player is not stopped, but step 1 Symbol combination in determination processing 69 and the determination → RT state transitions is normal (to RT conditions may shift after power restoration, may shift the RT state before power restoration)
You may comprise so that it may act as mentioned above. With this configuration, in the game won for the RT transition combination, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination as viewed from the player. Even when the symbol combination is not stopped, each reel (left reel, middle) is selected at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed in the internal processing of the gaming machine. When the stop button corresponding to the RT transition combination is received and the stop control for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the RT transition combination is executed normally, the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination is received. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT state shifts. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintentional disadvantages to the player, and it is possible to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has. Administrators can also operate gaming machines with peace of mind.

<Operation 16>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has not been won for the role to which the RT state transitions (sometimes referred to as the RT transition combination) → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is performed → Stop button Acceptance becomes valid → The first stop button is operated as the first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped → The second reel is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is stopped → Third Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure → The third reel is scheduled to stop when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination as viewed from the player is stopped and displayed, but it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269. It may be configured to act as described above for RT state is not migrated. With this configuration, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button in a game that has not been won for the RT transition combination, and the RT transition combination is handled by the reel as viewed from the player. Even when the symbol combination to be displayed is stopped, the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, for example, when a push order navigation is executed in order to prevent the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous for the player in the AT state, the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation. Nevertheless, the RT state does not shift even if the symbol combination that is shifted (falls) due to a reel rotation failure is visually stopped, the RT state does not shift, which is not intended for the player. It is possible to make a gaming machine that does not generate profits, and to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state inherent to the gaming machine, so that the manager of the game hall can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Operation 17>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has not been won for the role to which the RT state transitions (sometimes referred to as the RT transition combination) → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is performed → Stop button Acceptance becomes valid → The first stop button is operated as the first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second reel is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is stopped → Power is cut off Occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. → The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted). → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → Execute the process when the power is turned off → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is stopped and displayed from the player, Step In the determination process in 1269 may be configured to act as the symbol combination is that no shift determination → RT state to be normal. With this configuration, in a game that is not won for the RT transition combination, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes the RT transition combination as viewed from the player. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, for example, when a push order navigation is executed in order to prevent the player from shifting to the RT state, which is disadvantageous for the player in the AT state, the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation. Nevertheless, the RT state does not shift even if the symbol combination that is shifted (falls) due to a reel rotation failure is visually stopped, the RT state does not shift, which is not intended for the player. It is possible to make a gaming machine that does not generate profits, and to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state inherent to the gaming machine, so that the manager of the game hall can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 18>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → Reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line in the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user.
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → Reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user (if the second reel has moved to the planned stop position, the first reel and the second reel The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line in a stopped manner) → Tempai sound may be output from the speaker. In addition, as an effect when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the effective line in the second reel is stopped and displayed.
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player Also, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line in the second reel. → Tempered sound is not output from the speaker.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first stop. When the bonus symbol is tempered, the bonus symbol is not output when the bonus symbol is scheduled not to be tempered even when the bonus symbol is tempered. Thus, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second symbol combination. If the bonus symbol did not stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if the bonus symbol was scheduled to temper if it stopped at the planned stop position in this example, a tempering sound will be output Thus, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker.

<Operation 19>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel stops display → Power supply stops and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operates the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → Detects power off → Processing when power is cut off Execution-> The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player-> The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line of the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player-> Power Return → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel stops display → Power supply stops and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operates the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → Detects power off → Processing when power is cut off Execution → The second reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position when viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active lines of the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the player. When the second reel moves to the planned stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the first reel and the second reel) → Power return → Speaker May be configured to act as described above to Luo Tenpai sound is output. In addition, as an action when the power cut does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the effective line in the second reel is stopped and displayed.
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player Also, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line in the second reel. → Tempered sound is not output from the speaker. It should be noted that the timing for outputting the tempering sound from the speaker may be before the completion of the power-off process, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first symbol combination. Stopped as stop and second stop, in other words, even when the bonus symbol is tempered, if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempered when it stops at the planned stop position in this example, a tempered sound is output Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second symbol combination. If the bonus symbol does not stop as a stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not temper, if the bonus symbol is scheduled to temper if it stops at the planned stop position in this example, a tempering sound is output. Thus, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop has not stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop has not stopped at the planned stop position (the first stop operation is executed). It may be the case that a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after.

<Operation 20>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is valid → First reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation. The first reel is stopped. The second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel. The reel rotation failure occurs. The second reel is viewed from the player until the stop position is reached. Cannot move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the active line on the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player is stopped. → The bonus confirmation tempo sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won the bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Enables the first reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation. The first reel is stopped. The second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel. The reel rotation failure occurs. The second reel is viewed from the player until the stop position is reached. Cannot move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop display on the active line on the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player (if the second reel moves to the planned stop position, The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line of the reel 1 and the reel 2). It may be configured to act as described above. In addition, as an effect when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won the bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Enables the first reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation. The first reel is stopped. The second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel. The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as viewed from the player. The combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the active line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user. A bonus confirmation tempo sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is valid → First reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation. The first reel is stopped. The second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel. The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as viewed from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active lines of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user. The bonus confirmation tempo sound may not be output from the speaker. Note that the bonus confirmation tempo sound is a tempo that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the active line (tempered) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It is a sound.
With this configuration, in a game where the result of the lottery is lost and the bonus is not inside, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol constituting the bonus symbol When the combination stops as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even when the bonus symbol is tempered, if the bonus symbol is not scheduled for tempering when it stops at the planned stop position in this example The bonus confirmation tempo sound is not output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation failure, the player quickly detects that the reel rotation failure has occurred due to the output from the speaker. can do.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is a bonus combination or a game executed inside the bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting a stop operation of the second stop button, and a bonus symbol is formed. The symbol combination to be stopped did not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, the bonus symbol will be tempered if it stops at the planned stop position in this example If this is the case, a bonus confirmation tempo sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player will cause reel rotation failure due to the output from the speaker. It can be detected quickly. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop has not stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop has not stopped at the planned stop position (the first stop operation is executed). It may be the case that a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after.

<Operation 21>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel stops display → Power supply stops and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operates the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → Detects power off → Processing when power is cut off Execution-> The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player-> The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line of the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player-> Power Return → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel stops display → Power supply stops and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operates the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → Detects power off → Processing when power is cut off Execution → The second reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position when viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active lines of the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the player. When the second reel moves to the planned stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the first reel and the second reel) → Power return → Speaker May be configured to act as described above to Luo Tenpai sound is output. In addition, as an action when the power cut does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the effective line in the second reel is stopped and displayed.
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player Also, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line in the second reel. → Tempered sound is not output from the speaker. It should be noted that the timing for outputting the tempering sound from the speaker may be before the completion of the power-off process, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first symbol combination. Stopped as stop and second stop, in other words, even when the bonus symbol is tempered, if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempered when it stops at the planned stop position in this example, a tempered sound is output Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a power interruption, the player can quickly detect that the abnormality has occurred on the reel due to the occurrence of the power interruption by the output from the speaker. Can do. Similarly, in the game in which the result of the lottery is lost, immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, the power interruption occurs, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol does not temper, if the bonus symbol is scheduled to temper if it stops at the planned stop position in this example, a temper sound is output. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of power interruption, the player can quickly detect that the abnormality has occurred on the reel due to the occurrence of power interruption by the output from the speaker. it can. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop has not stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop has not stopped at the planned stop position (the first stop operation is executed). It may be the case where the power-off process is executed immediately after.

<Operation 22>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is valid → First reel Operation of the first stop button as a stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Power supply is interrupted and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Power off Detection → Execute processing when power is cut off → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Corresponds to the bonus combination on the effective line on the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player Symbol combination is not displayed → Bonus confirmation template sound is not output from the speaker
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won the bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Enables the first reel Operation of the first stop button as a stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Power supply is interrupted and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Power off Detection → Execute processing when power is cut off → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Corresponds to the bonus combination on the effective line on the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player The symbol combination does not stop display (when the second reel moves to the planned stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination stops on the effective line of the first reel and the second reel. Shimesuru) → may be configured to act as described above bonus determined Tenpai sound is output from the speaker. In addition, as an action when the power cut does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won the bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Enables the first reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation. The first reel is stopped. The second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel. The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as viewed from the player. The combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the active line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user. A bonus confirmation tempo sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is valid → First reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation. The first reel is stopped. The second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel. The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as viewed from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active lines of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user. The bonus confirmation tempo sound may not be output from the speaker. Note that the bonus confirmation tempo sound is a tempo that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the active line (tempered) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It is a sound.
By configuring in this way, in a game where the result of the lottery is lost and the bonus is not in the inside, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbol is configured. When the symbol combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even when the bonus symbol is tempered, when the bonus symbol is not scheduled when it stops at the planned stop position in this example Will not output the bonus confirmation tempering sound, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of power interruption, the player will have an abnormality on the reel due to power interruption due to the output from the speaker Can be detected quickly.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is a bonus role or a game executed inside the bonus, the power-off process occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbol is displayed. The combination of symbols that were configured did not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even when the bonus symbol did not temper, the bonus symbol tempered when stopped at the scheduled stop position in this example. If it is scheduled, a bonus confirmation tempo sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a power interruption, the player will abnormally react to the reel due to the power interruption due to the output from the speaker Can be detected quickly. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop has not stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop has not stopped at the planned stop position (the first stop operation is executed). It may be the case where the power-off process is executed immediately after.

<Operation 23>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel starts as a game won by a predetermined re-playing player → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is performed → Stop button acceptance is valid → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel moves to the planned stop position (rotation) when viewed from the player Cannot → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-gamer does not stop display → Max bet lamp does not light
Reel rotation starts as a game that has 1 or more credits and is not elected as a re-gamer → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel moves to the planned stop position (rotation) when viewed from the player Not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-playing combination may be configured to operate as described above in which the stop display → the Max bet lamp is lit. In addition, as an effect when reel rotation failure does not occur,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel starts as a game won by a predetermined re-playing player → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is performed → Stop button acceptance is valid → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → move (rotate) the third reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → the predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped → Max bet lamp does not light
Reel rotation starts as a game that has 1 or more credits and is not elected as a re-gamer → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → move (rotate) the third reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → the predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped and displayed. The maximum bet lamp is lit up.
With this configuration, in a game won for replay, when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to replay is not stopped and displayed. However, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp is not turned on, so that the player can quickly detect that the operation of the max bet button is not effective. In addition, in a game that is not won for replay, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed. As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the game is not stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp is turned on, so that the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is effective.

<Operation 24>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel starts as a game won by a predetermined re-playing player → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is performed → Stop button acceptance is valid → Operating the first stop button as the first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operating the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → The second reel stop display → Power failure occurs and the game Power supply to the machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power failure is detected → Power failure Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-gamer does not stop display → Max bet lamp does not light It was,
Reel rotation starts as a game that has 1 or more credits and is not elected as a re-gamer → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Operating the first stop button as the first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operating the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → The second reel stop display → Power failure occurs and the game Power supply to the machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power failure is detected → Power failure Execute time processing → The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-gamer is stopped display → The Max bet lamp is lit above It may be configured to act on. In addition, as an action when the power cut does not occur,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel starts as a game won by a predetermined re-playing player → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is performed → Stop button acceptance is valid → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → move (rotate) the third reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → the predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped → Max bet lamp does not light
Reel rotation starts as a game that has 1 or more credits and is not elected as a re-gamer → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → move (rotate) the third reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → the predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped and displayed. The maximum bet lamp is lit up.
By configuring in this way, in a game won for re-game, when the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed In addition, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is not effective by not lighting the max bet lamp. Also, in a game that has not been won for replaying, if the power off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to replaying is stopped and displayed, As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed, the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is effective by turning on the max bet lamp.

<Operation 25>
As a game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is awarded to the player, the game will satisfy the bonus termination condition. Rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → First reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → First reel is stopped Display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel driving state → Reel decelerates → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped Do not show → bonus is completed, may be configured to act as described above that bonus at the end of the freeze is executed. In addition, as an effect when reel rotation failure does not occur,
As a game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is awarded to the player, the game will satisfy the bonus termination condition. Rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → First reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → First reel is stopped Display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel driving state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped display → The bonus ends, It may be configured to act as described above to scan end freeze is performed.
With this configuration, a winning combination is won in the final bonus game, and a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving a stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop display. In this case, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus ends and the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, so that the player can quickly confirm that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be sensed and does not give a sense of incongruity to the progress of the game.

<Operation 26>
As a game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is awarded to the player, the game will satisfy the bonus termination condition. Rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → First reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → First reel is stopped Display → Operation of the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Power supply is interrupted and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third reel stop operation as the third reel stop operation (Receiving the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power-off → Execute the power-off process → The 3rd reel moves to the planned stop position as seen from the player Rotation) can not → symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed → bonus is completed, may be configured to act as described above to the end of the bonus freezes is executed. In addition, as an action when the power cut does not occur,
As a game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is awarded to the player, the game will satisfy the bonus termination condition. Rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → First reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → First reel is stopped Display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel driving state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped display → The bonus ends, It may be configured to act as described above to scan end freeze is performed.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the bonus final game, and immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, the power-off process is executed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in a stopped manner. Even if there is no bonus, the bonus is completed and the freezing at the end of the bonus is executed, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, so that the player can be notified that the bonus has been completed normally. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be detected quickly and does not give a sense of incongruity to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the configuration relating to the reel acceleration processing in the above-described spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to this example,
Execution period of reel acceleration processing when no rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = A
Reel acceleration process execution period until a rotation failure occurs when a rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process = B
Reel acceleration process execution period after occurrence of rotation failure in the case where rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process = C
If
A = B + C
It is comprised so that.
Also,
Number of execution times of interrupt processing of reel acceleration processing when no rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = D
Number of executions of interrupt processing for reel acceleration processing until rotation failure occurs when rotation rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = E
Number of executions of interrupt processing of reel acceleration processing after occurrence of rotation failure of reel when rotation rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = F
If
D = E + F
It is comprised so that.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M stores the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off process completed flag (for example, updates the power-off process completed flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and information for error detection based on the calculated checksum (for example, the calculation) In the checksum area, the lower 1 byte in the checksum or the complement thereof) is set. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

  Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of the push order display of the swivel type gaming machine according to the present example. The table in the figure shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information relating to the push order. In this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S). It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility. For example, the instruction number when informing “middle → right → left” as the pressing order indicates “A5”. Next, on the left side of the figure, when the push order is “left → middle → right” (the corresponding instruction number is “A1”), the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display device YH, and the effect display device S40. An image displayed on the screen is illustrated. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example is a 7-segment display method and also serves as a payout number display device. When the medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, even when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, whether the display on the push order display device D270 indicates the number of medals to be paid out or not. It becomes difficult to determine whether the navigation display is displayed. For this reason, the push order display device D270 displays “=” in the left digit as “= 1” so that it can be distinguished whether the number of medals has been paid out or the push order navigation display. By configuring, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit numerical value, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out. As the display of the push order display device D270, the left side is “=” and the right side is a number. In such a case, it is configured so that it can be determined that the display is a push order navigation, and the player can be prevented from being mistaken. Further, in the advantageous section indicator YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is the “favorable section” is lit. At the same time, a display of “40 remaining games” indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section” (or “AT state”) is displayed on the effect display device S40. Also, the right side of the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “middle → left → right” (the corresponding instruction number is “A3”). Yes. In addition, since the current game section is an “advantageous section”, the advantageous section indicator YH is lit, and a display of “25 remaining games” indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section” is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that a combination with a push order (a condition device with a medal payout out of condition devices whose stop display is different depending on the reel stop order, for example, a bell) and a re-playing combination with a push order (depending on the reel stop order) The condition display of the instruction number of the condition device having a different combination of the stopped display may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. For example, an instruction may be made by turning on a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to an instruction number using an LED display. In addition, it is good also as a structure provided with the advantageous area display YH in the lower right part of the credit amount display apparatus D200. In this case, the timing for turning on the advantageous section indicator YH is preferably until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player quits the game, he / she checks the credit number display device D200 to check whether there are any medals remaining. If there are medals remaining, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, it is a user-friendly gaming machine that can be prevented from accidentally quitting a game even though it is an “advantageous section” from the next game by lighting until the settlement button D60 is activated. be able to.

  In addition, the notification mode of the game section in the advantageous section display YH is not limited to this example, and the same section display as the advantageous section display YH is provided on the lower right of both of the two seven segments (the section display is provided with the section display). It is also possible to have a configuration with two). In such a configuration, when the left section indicator lights up, the fact that the current game section is “normal section” is notified, while the right section When the section indicator lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Furthermore, “normal section” and “advantageous section” are distinguished by the color and lighting mode when the section indicator is lit (for example, “green” in “normal section” and “red” in “advantageous section”). Or “lighting in the“ normal section ”and“ flashing ”in the“ favorable section ””). Furthermore, the display mode of the section indicator is changed according to “in-AT BB internal game”, “AT-in-BB state”, “AT precursor state”, “AT-in-state”, etc. in the “advantageous section”. May be. Furthermore, it may be configured to recognize that the current game section is the “standby section” separately from the “normal section” and the “favorable section”. However, the distinction between “normal section” and “advantageous section” is made easy to distinguish, for example, by using different section indicators, and the player recognizes whether the current game section is “advantageous section” or not. It is preferable to make it easy to do.

  Further, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section”, for example, in the “AT precursor state” or “AT in preparation”, the remaining number of games in the “advantageous section” is not displayed. A configuration may be adopted (a disadvantage to the player that the remaining number of games in the “advantageous section” is subtracted in a relatively low profit state for the player is not notified). However, even in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the section indicator is lit to notify the player that the “advantageous section” is in progress. At the same time, it is preferable that the section indicator is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and that the section indicator is installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57, the control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described.

<Sub program start processing>
First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

  First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S prohibits interruption. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, and checksum calculation.

  Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off. In the case of Yes in step 2008, in other words, in the determination process of step 2008, if it is determined that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes one-command processing described later. It is determined whether or not it is a state that has returned from a state in which a power interruption has occurred, that is, whether or not it has completely recovered.

  In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, if it is determined that the recovery is complete, in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits an interrupt and is executed when a power interruption occurs. Return processing to one command processing.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the above-described determination processing in step 2008 that both checksum values do not match, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. Execute. It should be noted that after the processing of step 2014 is executed, or in the case of No in step 2010, the processing is shifted to the sub main loop processing.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

  First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S permits interruption. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes command reception processing. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

  Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes one command processing which will be described later. This one-command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms has elapsed. If it is determined that it has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be appropriately changed according to the processing.

<Sub-side power-off processing>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing sub-side power-off processing executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects a power-off.

  First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If YES in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates a checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

  Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power supply has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S updates the number of instantaneous interruption occurrences. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer, and returns to the processing that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one command processing called and executed in the processing of step 2250 in FIG.

  Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether it is the operation timing of the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the start lever operation effect related determination process described later. To do. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a start lever operation process described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the operation timing of the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the first reel stop acceptance timing. In the case of No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the first cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop reception timing, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the second reel stop reception timing. . In the case of No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the second cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop reception timing, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the third reel stop reception timing. . In the case of No in step 2262, in other words, in the case of the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls a subroutine for the third related to the cylinder-stop effect-related determination process described later. And execute. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a third cylinder stop acceptance process described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop reception timing, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. . In the case of Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a stop display symbol time process (not shown). Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub control board S immediately moves to step 7100.

  Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a menu screen display control process to be described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a standby screen display control process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation effect related determination process called and executed in the process of step 3000 in FIG. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the game is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the high-secure fault counter value command received from the main control board M side, How many games are guaranteed). Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of battle effect execution availability determination process described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is determined that a battle effect is executed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the current stay stage, the state relating to the AT of the game, the state relating to the AT of the next game, and the current number of highly secured games. Based on the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), a stay stage shift lottery (lottery of whether or not to change the stay stage) is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Even in the case of No in step 3006, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to AT of the game is the “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the stay stage determination table (FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. Referring to (see), the stay stage shift lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the game is “AT state”. In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a sub-routine of an effect determination process during AT which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the game is the “recovery / prohibiting effect state”. In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for determining whether or not to allow restoration, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the notice effect and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). The stay stage is an effect mainly based on the background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and any stay stage is always set. In addition, if stay stages differ, the tendency of various effects, such as a background effect and a notice effect, will differ.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a battle effect execution availability determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3050 of FIG. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of highly secured obstacle games is four or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to execute a battle effect execution lottery (battle effect (win)) to win with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). ). Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the battle effect execution availability lottery executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (win), and proceeds to the next process (process in step 3006). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3006). Here, the battle effect is a continuous effect executed over a plurality of games and wins the battle effect, that is, the battle effect (win) is executed, so that the BB role is won and the AT lottery is performed. It is structured so that winning is definitive. Note that the structure related to the battle effect is not limited to this, and when the BB role is won even if the AT lottery is not won (the state shifts to the “low probability state” or the “high probability state” after the BB ends). ) May be configured to execute a battle effect (win).

  Further, in the case of No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare role. Here, in this example, the rare roles are winning-C (cherry), winning-D (watermelon A) and winning-E (watermelon B). It has become. That is, if the player is expected to be simultaneously elected with the BB role by displaying the rare role stopped, the answer is YES in step 3064, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is in step 3066. A lottery for determining whether or not to execute a battle effect (defeat) with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3, which is lower than the predetermined probability in step 3056). ). Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the gasse battle effect execution availability lottery executed in step 3066 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (defeat), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). If NO in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and performs the next process (the process of step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured to be executed even in the “normal section”.

  As described above, when the number of highly secured obstacle games is a predetermined number or more, for example, when the number of highly secured obstacle games is 4 or more, a continuous effect such as a battle effect can be executed over a plurality of games, while the number of highly secured obstacle games is predetermined. When it is less than the number, for example, when it is less than 4, it is configured not to execute a continuous effect such as a battle effect. Can be prevented from being extinguished by the transition ("normal section" is set), and only when the advantageous section indicator YH can be kept on until the battle presentation ends, the battle effect is displayed. By executing the game machine, a user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained without impairing the player's expectation for winning the BB.

  Also, when the rare role is won, it is configured to be able to execute a continuous effect such as a battle effect (defeat), so the execution frequency of the battle effect can be secured and the game can always proceed with expectation. Can do.

  Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. Note that the stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is a partial excerpt. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is used when the game is in the “low probability state” and when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more. There are three types: a table and a table used when the game is in a “high probability state” and the number of highly secured obstacle games is 3 or less.

  In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the “low probability state”, the relationship between the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the current game, and the corresponding set number It is prescribed. In the case of “low probability state”, the current stay stage consists of two stage stages, a desert stage and a city stage, and the transition stage includes a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. It consists of four types of production stages. There are three states relating to the AT of the next game: a “low probability state”, a “normal BB inside game”, and a “high probability state”.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to a “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, 0-979 is assigned as a number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. In addition, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, the number of places is 980 to 980 when moving from the desert stage to the city stage. 999 is assigned.

  Furthermore, when the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “low probability state” or “ordinary BB inside game”, 0 to a number when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the desert stage. 19 is assigned. When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, 20 to 999 is assigned as a number when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  Further, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game is shifted to the “high probability state” in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 250 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the game shifts from the desert stage to the city stage. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and a transition is made to the “high probability state” in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as numbers for transition from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state”, 750 to 999 is assigned as a number when shifting from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

  When the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state”, 0 to 249 are assigned as the numbers when the game stage shifts to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state”, 250 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the city stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state”, 500 to 749 is assigned as a number when the game stage shifts to the conference room stage. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state”, 750 to 999 is assigned as a number when the game stage shifts to the cave stage in the game.

  The stay stage determination table used when the game is in a “high probability state” and the number of highly secured obstacles is 4 or more defines the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the game, and the number of places. Has been. As the current stay stage and the stage to move to, there are four stages of production: a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 are assigned. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 880 to 929 is assigned as a number when the game stage shifts from the desert stage to the city stage. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the numbers when the game moves from the desert stage to the conference room stage. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game moves from the desert stage to the cave stage, 960 to 999 is assigned.

  The current stay stage is a city stage, and 0 to 879 are assigned as numbers when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the desert stage. 880 to 929 are assigned as the numbers when the current stay stage is the city stage and the city stage is maintained in the game. The current stay stage is a city stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the numbers when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the conference room stage. The current stay stage is a city stage, and 960 to 999 is assigned as a number when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the cave stage.

  The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the numbers when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the numbers when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 is assigned. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 950 to 999 is assigned as a number when the conference room stage is shifted to the cave stage in the game.

  The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the numbers when the cave stage is shifted to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 50 to 99 is assigned as a number when the cave stage is changed to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 100 to 199 is assigned as a number when the cave stage is changed to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, 200 to 999 are assigned.

  In the stay stage determination table used when the game is “high probability state” and the number of highly secured obstacles is 3 or less, the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the current game, The relationship with the numeric value is specified. As the current stay stage and the stage to move to, there are four stages of production: a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: “high probability state”, “advantageous BB inside game”, and “low probability state”.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0-979 is assigned as a number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. When the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 980-999 is set as a number when moving from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. Assigned.

  When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0-19 are set as numbers when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the desert stage. Assigned. When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 20 to 999 is assigned as a number when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of places when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage is 0 to 0 29 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of places when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage is 30 to 30 59 is assigned. When the current stay stage is a conference room stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 60 to 999 are set as numbers when the conference room stage is maintained in the game. Assigned.

  When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0 to 29 is set as a number when moving from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. Assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 30 to 59 are set as numbers when the game moves from the cave stage to the city stage. Assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of places when the game moves from the cave stage to the conference room stage is 60 to 99. Is assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 100 to 999 is assigned as a number when the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game is shifted to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game is shifted to the “low probability state” in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the game is shifted from the desert stage to the city stage.

  When the current stay stage is a city stage and the game is shifted to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the game stage shifts to the desert stage. When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “low probability state”, 500 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the city stage is maintained in the game.

  When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state”, 0 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to a “low probability state”, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage.

  When the current stay stage is a cave stage and a transition is made to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the cave stage is shifted to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the cave stage and the next game shifts to a low probability state, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the game shifts from the cave stage to the city stage.

  Thus, when in the “low probability state”, two stages of the desert stage or the city stage can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when the state is the “high probability state”, four stages of a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, in the case of the “advantageous section”, four stay stages can be selected, while in the “normal section”, two stay stages can be selected and can be selected in the “normal section”. Two stay stages can also be selected in the “favorable section”. By configuring in this way, even in the “normal section” where the AT lottery can not be expected, by selecting a stay stage that can be a stay stage in the “advantageous section”, even in the “normal section” without getting bored The gaming machine can be advanced. In addition, when transitioning from the “high probability state” to the “low probability state”, that is, when changing from the “favorable section” to the “normal section”, the “normal section” is selected at the “advantage section” stage. By selecting the production stage, it is difficult for the player to discriminate from the “advantageous section” to the “normal section”, and the game can be continued with expectation.

  A part of the stage selected in the “normal section” overlaps the stage selected in the “favorable section” (the stage that can be selected in the “normal section” but not selected in the “advantage section”). It may be made to have.

  In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of highly secured obstacle games is 4 or more is different from the stay stage determination table used when the number of highly secured obstacle games is 3 or less, so that the number of highly secured obstacle games is When there is less (3 games or less), do not move to a stay stage with a higher expectation that is an “advantageous section” than the current stay stage (for example, desert stage → conference room stage) By configuring, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by becoming a “normal section” with a small number of games, despite the transition to the stay stage with higher expectation. The stay stages are in the order of “desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage” from those with low expectation of “advantageous sections” (which are difficult to select in “advantageous sections”).

  In addition, the composition of the stay stage is not limited to the one in this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is selected as an “advantageous section” expectation degree, an expectation degree winning in the AT lottery, and a BB. It may be configured to suggest a certain degree of expectation. As an example, it is configured so that the stay stage can shift in the game won for the BB role or rare role (when the AT lottery is won by the BB role and when the AT lottery is not executed by winning the single rare role) And the expected stage of winning the AT lottery is different depending on the stage of the stay, and the order is "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage" Or, it may be configured so that the expected degree of winning the BB role is different depending on the stay stage that has been moved, and in the order of "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in order of low expectation Good (for example, when moving to the conference room stage, it is definite that the BB internal winning or the AT lottery is won).

  Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing the AT effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is three games or less. If YES in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is an AT final game. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the effect relating to the game to the AT continuation effect (success) (the AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60. Then, it is definitive that the initial value is set in the AT counter M60 by continuing the AT (the effect of notifying that the state related to the AT of the next game becomes “AT state”) or the AT continuous turning effect (failure) Otherwise, the state relating to the AT of the next game is determined to be “in-AT state” or “restoration effect state”), and the process proceeds to step 3126. Here, when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous production effect (success) vs. the AT continuous production effect (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4: 1. In other words, in the present embodiment, even when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous production effect (failure) may be executed. In such a case, it corresponds to the first game of the next set. In the next game, the revival production (success) is executed, and the player feels as if the player has won the revival lottery (actually, the continuation lottery is won and the main control board M As for the control on the side, it is the same as the case where the AT continuous production effect (success) is executed). By configuring in this way, it is rare to win a revival lottery in “Restorability Produce State”, but {win a 2320/65536 lottery (in the case of setting 1) in one game} and win a continuation effect. If the revival effect (success) is executed, the rate at which the revival effect (success) is executed can be increased, and the player expects the revival effect. A feeling can be heightened.

  If NO in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the effect related to the game is an AT continuation effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. If NO in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as an AT end effect, and proceeds to step 3126. If NO in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the next game in which the AT continuous turn production effect (failure) has been executed. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the effect related to the game as a revival effect (success) (similar to the revival effect (success) executed in the “recovery / prohibition effect state”). In this process, it is determined that the “state during AT” has been continued), and the process proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3114, the process proceeds to step 3126.

  Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds an effect related to the game (the effect of notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, “+50 GET”) ) And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect during the AT (an effect executed during the AT such as “AT state”), and performs the following process ( The process proceeds to step 2300.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing a resurrection / prohibition effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3150 of FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a resurrection lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S creates an effect related to the game as a revival effect (success) (the same effect as the effect executed in step 3116 described above, This is an effect to notify that the revival lottery has been won in the “Restorability Prompt State”, and in the next game, the “AT state” is entered and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has not won the revival lottery in the revival effect (failure) (“state for revival effect”). It is an effect to notify the effect, and it is determined that the transition to the “low probability state” will be made in the next game), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  As described above, the “Restorability Produce State” is also an advantageous section, that is, the continuous lottery is won in the AT final game (the “in-AT state” final game) that is the “favorable section”. Even if there is not, since the “advantageous section” is extended in the “revival availability state” as the next game, the player checks whether the advantageous area indicator YH is lit. It is difficult to determine whether or not the resurrection effect is successful only by doing, and attention is paid to the result of the resurrection effect. Further, as described above, the lottery execution mode regarding the AT is different between the “AT state” and the “Restorability effect state”. In other words, the execution mode of the lottery regarding the AT is different between the next game won in the continuous lottery in which the revival effect (success) is executed and the game won in the revival lottery in which the revival effect (success) is executed. .

In the present embodiment, the game is shifted to the “restoration effect state” of one game in the next game after the AT state is finished, and the resurrection lottery is executed in the “resusability state state”. By doing so, both the execution game of the revival effect (success) and the execution game of the revival effect (failure) are set to be “advantageous sections”, that is, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on, Although it has been prevented that it can be determined whether or not the AT ends without confirming the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows.
(1) Even in one game for executing the resurrection lottery, the state relating to AT is set to the “AT state”. By turning off the flag, a different lottery aspect regarding AT is set.
(2) It is configured not to execute the resurrection lottery, and is configured to determine whether or not the “AT state” is ended depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won in the control on the main control board M side, and The execution timing of the continuous lottery is assumed to be a game before the AT final game (one game before the AT final game, the first game in the set being executed, etc.). With such a configuration, a revival effect (success) and a revival effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. As an example of the production, “the game before the AT final game: AT continuation production (success) → AT final game: production that the next set of ATs will start”, “game before the AT final game: AT continuation production” Production (continuation to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuation production (success) ”,“ Game before AT final game: AT continuation production production (failure) → AT final game: Resurrection production (success) ”,“ AT The game before the final game: AT continuous hitting production (failure) → AT final game: revival production (failure) ”may be executed. That is, on the main control board M side, it is determined whether or not the “AT state” continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won. Thus, it may be configured to execute the AT continuous hitting effect and the resurrection effect.
(3) In a game in which a rebirth effect (success) is executed, the rendition is performed in the same manner as the rebirth effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the rebirth effect (success) is obtained from the predetermined timing. May be configured to notify the player that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, as the predetermined timing,
(1) It is a bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to a game in which a rebirth effect (success) is executed, and can be executed when a continuous lottery is won.
(2) The start lever operation timing related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect that is the same effect mode as the revival effect (defeat) is not executed.
(3) The timing at which the stop button that is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing at which the first stop is turned on),
(4) The timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button that becomes the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing when the first stop is turned on → off),
(5) The timing at which the stop button to be the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing at which the second stop is turned on),
(6) The timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button that becomes the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing when the second stop is turned on and then off),
(7) The timing at which the stop button that is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing at which the third stop is turned on),
(8) The timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button that becomes the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing when the third stop is turned on → off),
And so on.
(9) Bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the next game of the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed,
(10) Start lever operation timing related to the next game of the game in which the revival presentation (success) is executed,
Etc. In addition, when it is configured to determine by lottery which timing among the various timings (1) to (10) above, after the timing when the stop button to be the first stop is pressed. Even if neither the continuous lottery nor the resurrection lottery is won, the advantageous section indicator YH is continuously lit, so the player presses the stop button that becomes the third stop and then stops the stop button. It is possible to play a game with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing at which the game is released or until the start lever operation timing related to the next game of the game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Processing at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation process that is called and executed in the process of step 2300 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is an in-AT state. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the state relating to the AT is the in-AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads and executes the in-AT processing at the time of start lever operation described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not the in-AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a specialized precursor state. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is a special sign state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads a special sign process at the time of start lever operation described later. And execute the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, if the state relating to AT is not the “specialization sign state”, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the state relating to AT is “additional special state”. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2306, in other words, when the state relating to the AT is “additional special state”, in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs an additional specialization process at the time of start lever operation described later. Read and execute, and shift to the next process (process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state relating to AT is not the “addition specialization state”, in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the state relating to AT is “inside advantageous BB. It is determined whether or not it is “game”. In the case of Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state relating to AT is “advantageous BB internal game”, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the advantageous BB internal internal processing subroutine when the start lever is operated. Is called and executed to shift to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  In the case of No in step 2307, in other words, when the state relating to AT is not “advantageous BB internal game”, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the RT state is “RT1”. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is “RT1”, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not have the push order navigation (the push order navigation is not in the state related to AT). It is a state relating to an AT that does not occur and is determined to be “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, or the like. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state relating to AT is no push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. As described above, when the sub-control board S side receives the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoid command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoid command, it is not a configuration that can execute an effect related to push order navigation. When the AT extra lottery is won, the main control board M side transmits a command related to the AT extra lottery and the number of AT extra games to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution timing and effect aspect regarding the production | presentation regarding push order navigation may be determined by the sub control board | substrate S side.

  In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image to avoid establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). As described above, in this embodiment, when the number of games has elapsed from the situation of “RT1” and “AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, the state has shifted to “RT1” and “low probability state”. In this case (before replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if the reverse-pressed white 7-match replay or the forward-pressed black 7-match replay is won, no extra number of AT games will be generated. It is configured so that the push order that is not in a straight line is navigated. In addition, when the number of games elapses from the situation of “RT1” and “AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, the state changes to “RT1” and “low probability state”. In the game won in the push order bell, the push order navigation can be generated, but in the game won in the push order replay, the push order navigation may not be generated.

  The CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the effect image and the background image in step 2316 based on the state related to AT in the case of No in step 2308, in the case of No in step 2310, or in the case of No in step 2312. (Step 2110).

<Processing during AT at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing a process during AT at the time of start lever operation which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information related to the condition device relating to the game in step 2352, confirms the winning / replaying winning information related to the game in step 2354, and in step 2356, indicates the instruction number. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display at the time of push order bell execution and the push order navigation display of push order replay are the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by numbers and the display colors related to the numbers are the same) It can be applied to the case where it is configured so as to be displayed in (). Moreover, when comprised in that way, it is comprised so that the display image (for example, character image) different from a push order navigation display may be displayed at the time of execution of a push order navigation in the production | presentation display apparatus S40, You may comprise so that the image for production | generation different at the time of the push order navigation which concerns may be displayed, and the push order navigation which concerns on a push order replay may be displayed.

  Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2358, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects six push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning win-A1 which is a push order bell, a number indicating a push order corresponding to “left → middle → right” which is a push order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number is enclosed in a circle. Display in display mode.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. It is determined whether or not. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-games -D1 to D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the push order is three choices, the first stop button is information corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the numeral 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

  In the case of No in step 2362, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, if an avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups.

  Next, if the result of step 2366, 2364, or 2368 is executed, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the AT background image on the effect display device S40 in step 2370 after executing the processing of step 2360, 2364, or 2368 described above.

  Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is three games or less. In the case of Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in display mode B (display mode described later). A display mode that is less conspicuous than A) is displayed on the effect display device S40.

  Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward press instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first image to avoid establishment as the push order navigation display. It displays on effect display apparatus S40 by a number display mode group.

  If No in step 2376 or if the processing in step 2378 has been executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first image to avoid establishment as a push order navigation display. It displays on effect display apparatus S40 by a number display mode group.

  The CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110) when the result of step 2380 is No or when the process of step 2382 is executed.

  In the case of No in step 2372, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the AT remaining game number in the display mode A (the display mode described above). (Display mode that is more conspicuous than B) is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, when it is 4 games or more, it is displayed in the display mode A, and when it is 3 games or less, it is displayed in the display mode B.

  Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward press instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be displayed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  If No in step 2386, or if the processing in step 2388 has been executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be displayed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  The CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110) when the result of step 2390 is No or when the process of step 2392 is executed. As described above, when the AT remaining game number is small, in other words, when the display of the AT remaining game number is displayed in the display mode B that is more conspicuous than the display mode A, the forward press instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, an effect that displays “Aim 7!” Together with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the middle reel in the push order in which the white seven and the black seven do not stop display on the invalid line is displayed as the first stop reel. It is configured to execute push order navigation. With this configuration, when the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode for informing the player that the number of AT remaining games is small in a situation where the number of AT remaining games is small. Can be configured so that the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B is not hindered by the image of the arrow or the display of “Aim at 7!”. Similarly, a continuous effect (for example, whether or not the “AT state” (a state related to an AT in which push order navigation can be performed) continues in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small (for example, Even if it is configured to execute (battle effect), it is configured so that the visibility of the battle effect is not hindered by configuring so that an arrow image or “Aim 7” is not displayed during the execution of the battle effect. be able to. In addition, with this configuration, even when the number of AT remaining games in the effect display device S40 is 0 and a message indicating that the “AT state” is ended after defeating the battle effect is displayed, When a forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command is received, the forward push instruction command or reverse push is performed at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the message indicating that the “AT state is completed” is displayed. Informs the number of AT extra games based on the instruction command (based on winning of forward black 7 replay or reverse white 7 replay). However, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a later timing, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

<Special indication processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing the start lever operation specialization precursor process that is called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information related to the condition device relating to the game in Step 2402, confirms the winning / replaying winning information related to the game in Step 2404, and in Step 2406 indicates the instruction number. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects six push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct pressing order in the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning win-A2 which is a push order bell, a number indicating the push order corresponding to “left → right → middle” which is a push order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. Display in display mode. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is the replay game in the push order in step 2412. It is determined whether or not. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-games -D1 to D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the three alternative pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. Here, since the push order is three choices, the first stop button is information corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. Is displayed, the number “1” is displayed at the center lower side of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the center of the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position near the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2416, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S has received the forward push instruction command. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, in the case where the forward press instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse press instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, in the case where a reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in Step 2424, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in Step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the second numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or in the case of No in step 2424, an effect display of the AT background image is performed in step 2428. In step S2430, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

<Specialization process for starting lever operation>
Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing the specialization process for adding the start lever when called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads information related to the condition device relating to the game, and in step 2454 confirms winning / replay winning information relating to the game. In step 2456, the instruction number Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

  In the case of Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning a prize-A4 which is a push order bell, a number indicating a push order corresponding to “right → left → middle” which is a push order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. The display mode is displayed. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, in a case where the game condition device is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the game condition. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-games -D1 to D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2462, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numeric display mode group. Here, since the selection order is three choices, the first stop button corresponds to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. Is displayed, the number “1” is displayed at the center lower side of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the center of the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, in the case where the game condition device is not a push order replay game, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a forward push instruction command. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, if a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the push order is the forward push, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 in order, from left to right. The order of pressing can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing to.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, in the case where the forward press instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S has received the reverse press instruction command. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, when a reverse pressing instruction command is received, in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the right stop button D43, the middle stop button D42, and the left stop button D41 in order, from right to left. The order of pressing can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing to.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, in the case where a reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups. Here, the avoidance command is a generic name for both the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether a forward press avoidance command is received or a reverse press avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward press avoidance command is received, in order to avoid forward press “left → middle → right”, the number “1” is displayed on the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of the above-described steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, 2476, or when No in 2474, an effect display of the AT background image is performed in step 2480. Displayed on the device S40, and in step 2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step 2110 processing).

<Advantageous processing inside the BB during start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing a process inside the BB advantageous during start lever operation which is called and executed in the process of step 2700 of FIG.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information related to the condition device relating to the game in Step 2702, confirms the winning / replaying winning information relating to the game in Step 2704, and in Step 2706, indicates the instruction number. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub control board S It is determined whether the condition device is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

  In the case of Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning a prize-A4 which is a push order bell, a number indicating a push order corresponding to “right → left → middle” which is a push order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. The display mode is displayed. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the game condition. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-games -D1 to D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numeric display mode group. Here, since the selection order is three choices, the first stop button corresponds to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. Is displayed, the number “1” is displayed at the center lower side of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the center of the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, in the case where the game condition device is not a push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a command relating to 7 replays. It is determined whether or not. Here, the forward press instruction command, the reverse press instruction command, the forward press avoid command, and the reverse press avoid command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display with the first number. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described steps 2712, 2716, and 2720, or if No in step 2718, in step 2722, the AT background image is displayed on the effect display device S40. In step S2724, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2110).

  In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when the predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the effect display device S40. In this case, it is notified that BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of first torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing the first cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2500 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S operates the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. It is determined whether or not.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, when there is an operation of a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the push order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the next process (the process of step 2110) is entered.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, in the case where there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the forward pressing navigation or the reverse. It is determined whether or not the push order navigation related to the push navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replays is a generic term for forward-pressed black 7 replays and reverse-pressed white 7 replays. In the case of Yes in step 2508, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkly displays the push order navigation (it continues to be darkly displayed in the game) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). Transition.

  In the case of No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays and fails in the push order. The effect is executed and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of 2nd torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing a second cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2550 of FIG.

  Next, in Step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, when there is an operation of a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first in the pressing order navigation display. 2 The display relating to the stop is erased, and the next process (the process of step 2110) is entered.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays all the pressing order navigation displays. Erasing, pushing order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is not being displayed, or in the case of No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Third torso stop effect related decision process>
Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing a third torso stop effect related determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3200 of FIG.

  Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won a prize. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role wins, in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is elected during non-AT (“low probability state” or “high probability state”). It is determined whether or not the role is BB. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in other words, in the case of a BB combination won during non-AT, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the non-AT BB start effect determination table, and Based on the state and the BB combination, the BB start effect (the effect executed when the BB combination is won) is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  Next, in the case of No in step 3204, in other words, with the BB role elected during the AT (“AT state”, “Addition specialization state”, “Specialization preparation state”, or “Restoration effect state”) If there is, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the during-AT BB start effect determination table, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the AT state and the BB role of the game, The process proceeds to the process (the process of step 2600).

  Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines and executes an effect based on the effect executed in the game, The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the BB start time in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combination: BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C). There are two types of AT-related states: “normal BB inside game” and “advantageous BB inside game”. There are three types of BB start effects: normal effects, high expectation effects, and premier effects. It should be noted that, in the BB elected during the non-AT, the degree of expectation to shift to the “AT state” after the end of the BB differs depending on the type of the BB start effect. → Highly expected production → Premier production.

  When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is a normal BB internal game, the probability that the BB start effect is a normal effect is 179/256. . When the BB role is a setting difference BB (1 type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a high expectation effect is 77 / 256. When the BB role is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a premier effect is 0/256 It is.

  When the BB role is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state relating to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a normal effect is 179/256 It is. When the BB role is a setting difference BB (1 type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a high expectation effect is 77 / 256. When the BB role is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a premier effect is 0/256 It is.

  When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state relating to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a normal effect. The probability is 179/256. When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state relating to AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a high expectation effect The probability of being 77/256. When the BB combination is a BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a premier effect. The probability is 0/256.

  When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a normal effect. The probability is 67/256. When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a high expectation effect Is 157/256. When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a premier effect. The probability is 32/256.

  When it is “normal section”, even if you won BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) or BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) Is not selected, and it is determined that the possibility of selecting the normal performance is higher than the high expectation performance.

  Even if it is an advantageous section, when winning with a setting difference BB (1 type BB-B), the premier effect is not selected, and the normal effect may be selected rather than the high expectation effect It is set to be high.

  If it is an “advantageous section” and BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) is won, there is a possibility that a premier effect will be selected. By having constituted in this way, it is decided that it will shift to "AT state" after BB without setting difference is completed by having won BB without setting difference by selecting the premier effect. Can be shown to the player. In addition, when it is an “advantageous section” and BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) is won, there is a higher possibility that a high-expectation effect will be selected than a normal effect. (The possibility that the normal performance is selected is reduced). By doing in this way, the player can estimate whether or not the AT is started after the end of the BB by confirming the BB start effect, and can have a sense of expectation in winning the AT. It should be noted that there is a setting difference between BB (1 type BB-B) with a setting difference won in “Normal BB inside game” and no setting difference BB (win in “Normal BB inside game”). The distribution of the BB start effects according to Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) is the same. In addition, it is not limited to this, there is a setting difference won in “Normal BB Inside Game” and there is a distribution of BB start effects related to BB (1 type BB-B) and “Normal BB Inside Game” The distribution of the BB start effect relating to the winning setting difference BB (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) may be different, and by configuring as such, the BB start regarding the setting difference BB The distribution can be different depending on whether it is an effect or a BB start effect related to a BB with no setting difference.

  54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of the BB during the AT. The AT BB start effect determination table is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB role, the state relating to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combination: BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C). The state relating to AT is one kind of “advantageous BB inside game”. There are two types of BB start effects: an effect that can be added and an effect that cannot be added. The addition possible effect is an effect that suggests that the AT extra lottery can be executed during execution of BB, and the non-addition effect is an effect that suggests that the AT extra lottery is not executed during execution of BB. The BB won during the AT does not have an element as to whether or not the AT lottery is won, and depending on the type of the BB, whether or not the AT lottery is executed may differ. Also, during AT, there is a setting difference that the AT extra lottery is not executed. Even in the BB, the BB to be executed becomes the AT extra lottery because the game medal can be obtained and the AT is advantageous to the player after the BB ends. Is configured to clearly notify whether or not is executed. Specific examples will be described in detail below.

  If the BB role is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state relating to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is an addable effect is 0 / 256, and an effect that can be added is not executed. If the BB role is a setting difference BB (1 type BB-B), and the state relating to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect will not be added is 256 / 256, and an effect that cannot be added is always executed. When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect can be added The probability that becomes is 256/256, and an effect that can be added is always executed. When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect cannot be added. The probability of becoming 0/256 is that no extra effect is executed.

<Process at the time of 3rd torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing a third cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2600 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, when there is a stop button operation based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces the pressing order success effect. “GET!” Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays “GET” "Is not displayed.

  In the case of No in step 2602 described above, in other words, when the push order navigation is not being displayed, in the case of No in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, or in steps 2608 or 2610 When the process is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT added games (command set in step 1517) is received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates a difference from the command indicating the number of remaining AT games received last time. It may be configured to determine whether or not the addition of the AT game number has been executed and the AT additional game number and display the AT additional game number.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses the AT display game in the effect display device S 40. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, if the command related to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds AT on the effect display device S40. Without displaying the number of games, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). In addition, as a method for reporting the number of added games at AT, (1) all of the added games are notified by the game, (2) a part of the added games is notified by the game, and the remaining number of games is recorded after the game. (3) In the game, the number of additional games is not notified, and the games after the game (for example, at the time of winning 7 replays, at the time of winning the common bell (at the time of winning a role that is not added), After executing the game (continuous production), the operation of the bet button D220 and the operation of the start lever D50 for the game in which the number of remaining games on the production display device S40 becomes “0”, or the game after the game that has become “0” ).

  In addition, when the common bell is won in the “specialized state of addition”, even if it is stopped according to the push order navigation, there is no display regarding the number of games added to the AT (the common bell does the AT addition lottery. Absent).

  By configuring as described above, according to the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the gaming machine configured such that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on in the “favorable section”, the period that is advantageous to the player Can be appropriately notified. In addition, by providing a “restoration effect state”, when the continuation effect is won and then the resurrection effect (success) is executed, the state regarding the AT of the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed is The advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is in “AT state”. On the other hand, even if the continuation effect is not won and the revival effect (failure) is subsequently executed, the revival effect (failure) is executed. When the state relating to the AT of the game to be played is set as the “restorability effect state” and the state relating to the AT is set as the “favorable zone”, the advantageous zone indicator YH is turned on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the player so that it is difficult to recognize whether the revival effect is successful or unsuccessful by visually recognizing the advantageous section indicator YH in the game that executes the revival effect. In the gaming machine configured to be able to appropriately notify the period that is advantageous to the gaming machine, it is possible to secure a highly interesting gaming machine.

  In this example, when the BB role is won in the “high probability state”, the AT lottery can be won, and after the end of the BB, the state can be changed to the “AT state”. The configuration related to this example is not limited to that of this example, for example, it is configured to be able to win an AT lottery with a rare role such as cherry (can win even if it is not a BB role), and when winning the AT lottery It may be configured to shift to the “AT precursor state” as the state related to the AT, and shift to the “AT state” by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the “AT precursor state”.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process according to the subroutine of Step 7100 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu screen is not displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG by pressing the sub input button SB or the like, and the player selects from a plurality of items and confirms various settings and information on the gaming machine. It is a screen that can. As an example of the item selection and determination method, the cross key SB2 (having four buttons, an upper button, a lower button, a left button, and a right button) is operated to move the cursor to a desired item, By operating the sub input button SB, the currently selected item (with the cursor) is determined, and a screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed by determining the selected item are menu screens. In addition, there may be a plurality of display modes of the menu screen. For example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may be different depending on the gaming state, or the design of the background image may be different. Even if there is a difference, the menu screen is referred to.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen>
Examples of items that can be selected on the menu screen are listed below.
(1) Volume adjustment: It may be configured such that the player can adjust the volume output from the gaming machine. For example, after the screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed, the right button of the cross key SB2 is operated to output. The volume may be increased and the output volume may be decreased when the left button of the cross key SB2 is operated.
(2) Light intensity adjustment: The player may be able to adjust the light intensity (luminance) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50). For example, when a screen corresponding to light amount adjustment is displayed and the upper button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (brightness) is increased (brighter), and when the lower button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (brightness) is decreased. You may comprise so that it may become (dark).
(3) Character customization: Characters appearing during the game (main character, voice in push order navigation, battle character, character that supports the progress of the game displayed on the production display device S40, etc.) can be selected / changed. The screen may be configured, and after the screen corresponding to the character customization is displayed, the cursor is moved to the character to be selected with the cross key SB2, and the sub input button SB is operated.
(4) Reel arrangement table: The reel arrangement may be displayed on a screen corresponding to the reel arrangement table.
(5) Payout table: A payout table (a list of symbol combinations constituting replays and winning combinations by being stopped) may be displayed on a screen corresponding to the payout table. When the payout table is divided into a plurality of screens and displayed, for example, the screen of the payout table may be switched between the left button and the right button of the cross key SB2.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, if Yes in step 7102, in step 7104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu screen can be displayed. Here, the menu screen displayable state means that the menu screen is displayed when an operation that can display the menu screen such as an operation of the sub input button SB (which may be configured to display over time) may be performed. As a specific example, it may be configured as follows.
(1) Game end timing (timing at which the third stop button was turned on → off, display determination timing, payout completion timing based on winning, and a command related to game end set or transmitted to the sub-control board S side as game end processing From the timing, the timing at which the command related to the end of the game is received by the sub control board S side, etc., the game does not proceed (no new bet operation, no new automatic bet operation based on re-game stop display, new start The menu screen can be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed with no lever operation, no new reel rotation, etc. (until the sub input button SB is operated until then) But the menu screen is not displayed). Note that the bet operation includes both a case where a bet is made by operating the bet button D220 and a case where a bet is placed by inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 (automatic bet based on a replay stop display). May also be included in the betting operation).
(2-1) It may be configured not to be able to display the menu screen while the game is being executed (the game medal is betted, the wait period until the reel rotation starts, and the reel is rotating).
(2-2) The menu screen may be displayed while the game is being executed (such as when a game medal is bet).
(3) An effect that informs whether a lottery is won by adding the number of AT games during execution of an effect that informs whether or not a bonus is won, during an effect that informs whether or not a bonus is won, , Etc.) may be configured not to be able to display the menu screen.
(4) It may be configured not to be able to display the menu screen during the stop display of the re-gamer.
In order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (LED provided inside the sub input button SB) is displayed when the menu screen can be displayed. You may comprise so that a blinking display may be carried out.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7104, in step 7106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. In this example, the operation for displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub input button SB. However, the operation for displaying the menu screen may be changed, or a plurality of operations for displaying the menu screen may be provided. . In the case of Yes in step 7106, in step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time taken to shift to a standby screen described later from the game end timing) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer is timing). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time taken to shift from the menu screen to a standby screen to be described later, and the initial value at the timing when the menu screen starts to be displayed. Is set to a predetermined time B (in this example, 300 seconds, which is longer than the predetermined time A described later), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the menu standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the menu standby timer is timing), and performs the next processing (processing in step 7200). Migrate to

In step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the menu screen end condition is satisfied. The menu screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the menu screen, in other words, switching the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image). As, you may comprise as follows.
(1) It may be configured to be satisfied when there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new start of reel rotation.
(2) In a situation where the menu screen continues to be displayed, it may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined time (in this example, 300 seconds, which is the predetermined time B) has elapsed since the start of display of the menu screen.
(3) A predetermined item on the menu screen may be selected and determined, and a predetermined operation may be performed on the screen corresponding to the predetermined item. For example, a cursor may be displayed on the volume adjustment item. By operating the sub input button SB, the screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed. After adjusting the volume by operating the cross key SB2, the sub input button SB is operated again. The volume is set to a medium size, the display of the menu screen is terminated, and a screen before the menu screen is displayed (sometimes referred to as a normal screen) is displayed.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7114, in step 7116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image displayed before the menu screen display on the effect display device S40. As an example, when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB in the situation where the screen where the main character is walking in the forest is displayed, when the display of the menu screen ends, The screen where the hero is walking in the forest will be displayed. Next, in step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 7200).

  If NO in step 7114, in step 7122, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 7122, in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets the predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example) to the menu standby timer, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 7200). To do. It should be noted that if the result of step 7104, step 7106, or step 7122 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 7200). As described above, in this embodiment, when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer is set to the predetermined time B (300 in this example). Second) is reset, in other words, the time until the standby screen is displayed is measured again from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers related to the standby screen display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one timer related to the standby screen display is used. It may be configured to be used. Specifically, only the standby timer is used as a timer for displaying the standby screen, and the predetermined time A (180 seconds) set in the standby timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer are waited. You may comprise so that it may set to a timer. As a specific example, the third stop button is turned from ON to OFF, a predetermined time A (180 seconds) is set in the standby timer, and then the sub input button SB is operated in a situation where the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds. When the display of the menu screen is started, a predetermined time B (300 seconds) may be set in the standby timer.

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of standby screen display control processing according to the subroutine of Step 7200 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby screen is not displayed. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined time (the game has not progressed), and the effect that is executed on the gaming machine. A moving image related to a story is repeatedly played, a message “Power Saving” is displayed, or a logo mark related to a gaming machine manufacturer is displayed. In this example, the player is required to operate as a condition for displaying the menu screen described above, while the player is not required to operate as a condition for displaying the standby screen.

  In the case of Yes in step 7202, in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a waiting timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when a later-described waiting timer is timing) is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 7204, in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the timing at which the third stop button is changed from on to off is used as the game end timing. In the case of Yes in step 7206, in step 7208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time to shift to the standby screen from the end of the game, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends. ) Is set to a predetermined time A (in this example, 180 seconds, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the standby timer timing flag, and the process proceeds to step 7212. In the present embodiment, the condition for executing the processing in step 7208 and step 7210 is that the game end timing has been reached. In addition, the sub input button SB is operated on the menu screen. Thus, the image displayed before the display of the menu screen may be displayed (the display of the menu screen is terminated).

  Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby timer has become zero. If YES in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S 40 in step 7214, and proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the waiting timer timing flag, and proceeds to step 7224. Note that if the result is No in Step 7206, the process proceeds to Step 7224.

  Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu standby timer timing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 7224, in step 7226, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the menu standby timer has become zero. In the case of Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the waiting timer timing flag, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2110 processing). In addition, also when it is No in step 7224 or step 7226, it transfers to the next process (process of step 2110).

  If NO in step 7204, in other words, if the standby timer timing flag is on, in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby timer timing termination condition is not satisfied. To do. Here, the waiting timer timing termination condition is a condition that terminates the timing of the waiting timer and clears the timer value of the waiting timer to zero. There is a new bet operation and a new start lever operation. In addition, the waiting timer timing end condition is that the reel starts to rotate anew. If Yes in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7212. If No in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7216.

  If NO in step 7202, in step 7240, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby screen end condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for terminating the display of the standby screen. In this example, a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, and a new reel rotation are performed. The start screen is a waiting screen end condition. In addition, it may be configured to be able to shift from the standby screen to the menu screen (display the menu screen). For example, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub input button SB in a situation where the standby screen is displayed. You may comprise. Next, in step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image displayed before the display of the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As an example, if a standby screen is displayed because the game is not progressing for a predetermined time in a situation where a screen where the main character is walking in the forest is displayed, the main character is again executed by executing a bet operation. A screen of walking in the forest will be displayed.

  Next, FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram according to the present embodiment. First, in the case of (a), the menu screen is displayed when the sub input button SB is operated while the menu screen can be displayed. Thereafter, under the situation where the menu screen is displayed, 5 minutes (predetermined time B, 300 seconds) elapses without operation of the sub input button SB or the bet button D220, and the standby screen is displayed. Next, in the case of (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, the stop operation of the third stop button is performed, all the reels stop, and the player presses the third stop button. Since 3 minutes (predetermined time A, 180 seconds) have elapsed from the release timing, and the sub input button SB and the bet button D220 have not been operated during that time, a standby screen is displayed. Thus, in this example, the case where the predetermined time B has elapsed since the menu screen was displayed, and the case where the predetermined time A has elapsed since the game was ended (after the third stop button was turned on → off) The standby screen can be displayed at a predetermined time B, and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<< Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example >>
Here, the configuration relating to the menu screen and the standby screen that can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example will be described in detail below, including the configuration of the present embodiment. Note that the configurations listed below are applicable to all the above-described embodiments, and it is supplemented that there is no problem by appropriately combining one or a plurality.

<Timing start timing of standby timer>
As the timing to set the initial value to the standby timer that measures the time until the standby screen is displayed and start timing, (1) the third stop button as the final stop operation (stop corresponding to the reel that has rotated to the end) (2) Start timing from the timing when the button was turned on, (2) Start timing from the display determination execution timing, (3) Start timing from the payout completion timing based on winning, (4) Game The timing is started from the timing at which a command related to the end of the game is set or transmitted to the sub-control board S as the end processing. May be. Alternatively, a predetermined time A (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as an initial value.

<Timing start timing of menu standby timer>
As a timing for setting the initial value to the menu standby timer that measures the time until the menu screen is displayed and starting timing, the timing is started from the timing when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB. May be. Further, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. The predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A set in the standby timer (the timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds).

<Configuration of sub input button>
It may be configured such that the initial value can be reset in the menu standby timer in a situation where the menu standby timer is timing, for example, operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 while the menu screen is displayed. Thus, a predetermined time B (which is a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set in the menu standby timer. As an example, when the menu screen starts to be displayed, the menu standby timer is set to 300 seconds to start timing, and after 100 seconds, the menu standby timer value is 200 seconds. Depending on the operation, 300 seconds may be reset in the menu standby timer. Further, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub input button SB, and the menu screen is displayed (the screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after the menu screen is displayed). It may be configured such that the initial value can be reset to the menu standby timer by operating the cross key SB2 in the transition destination screen where the transition is made may be a menu screen, or while the menu screen is being displayed (menu By operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 on the screen to which the screen has been changed by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after starting the screen display) The menu wait timer may be reset to an initial value.

<Configuration for stop button>
In the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet operation is not executed. Even if the stop button (the left stop button, the middle stop button, and the right stop button) is operated depending on the situation, the initial value may not be reset in the standby timer. As an example, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on after being turned off as the final stop operation, 180 seconds is set in the standby timer, and the timer starts counting, After that, in the situation where the betting operation is not executed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, the timer value of the standby timer is not reset again even if the stop button is operated, and the timer value is 100 seconds. You may comprise so that it may remain.

<Configuration for betting operation>
When the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet operation is executed ( When a bet is made by operating the bet button D220, or when a game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 and the bet is made), the timing of the standby timer is stopped and the timer value is cleared to zero. That is, in the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet operation is executed. When the other operation is not performed, the standby screen may not be displayed as time elapses. In such a configuration, the standby screen is not displayed due to the elapse of time from the bet operation, but the volume of the sound being output when a specific time (for example, 100 seconds) elapses from the bet operation. May be configured to be 0 or small. With this configuration, the remaining game medals become less than a prescribed number (for example, 3) (for example, 1), and the remaining 1 game medal is bet (for example, the bet button is operated). The bet button when the game shop clerk cleans the gaming machine when the game ends or when the player finishes the game with less than the specified number of game medals remaining in the credit (no bet is placed) Even if the user bets by operating the button, no sound is output at an unintended volume.

<Display condition of standby screen>
The standby screen may be displayed on the condition that the timer value of the decrement timer (in this example, the standby timer or the menu standby timer) regarding the display of the standby screen has changed from “1 → 0”. With this configuration, the timer value reaches “0” without going through “1” like “20 → 0” when a bet operation is performed or when an abnormality occurs in timer measurement. In this case (when cleared to zero), the standby screen is not displayed, and the display of the unintended standby screen can be prevented (the timer value is then reset to “1 → 0”). In this case, the standby screen may be displayed. A flag for displaying the standby screen may be provided, and the standby screen may be displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Structure related to checkout button>
In the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then one or more credits exist. In the situation, when the settlement of the credit is executed by operating the settlement button, the timing after the predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the operation timing of the settlement button or when the settlement of the credit is completed (the last game medal is The standby screen may be displayed at the timing of returning to the discharge port D240.

<Configuration of setting key switch>
As the final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off and then turned on while the power is on. A standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing. Also, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the front door is opened while the power is on. You may comprise so that a standby | waiting screen may be displayed when predetermined time A (for example, 180 second) passes from the timing which made the setting key switch OFF-> ON, and closed the front door after that.

<Configuration related to the occurrence of a predetermined error>
As the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off. Thereafter, a predetermined error related to the main control board M (for example, the game medal is selected by the medal selector DS). An error that occurs when the user stays inside) occurs, and the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing at which the predetermined error is released.

<Configuration related to the front door>
As the final stop operation, the standby timer starts timing by turning on the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) and then turning it off, and then the front door is opened and opened. It may be configured to continue the time measurement of the standby timer even when the above is maintained. Also, as a final stop operation, the standby timer starts timing by turning on the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) and then turning it off, and then opening the front door, Then, you may comprise so that time-measurement of a standby timer may be continued also when a front door is closed.

<Configuration during AT 1>
Turn off after turning on the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) as the final stop operation in a situation where non-AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is “normal game state”) When a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing at which the standby is performed, a standby screen may be displayed, while the final stop operation is performed in a state where the AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is “AT state”) The standby screen is not displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off. May be. Similarly, the standby screen may not be displayed even if the predetermined time A has elapsed from the end of the final stop operation even during execution of the continuous effect, bonus execution, or ART. In addition, a third stop button (corresponding to a reel that has been rotated to the end) is used as a final stop operation in a game in which the push order navigation is executed in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is “AT state”). When the predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of turning off after turning on the stop button), the standby screen is not displayed, while the AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is “AT state”) In a situation where the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off for a predetermined time as the final stop operation in the game in which push order navigation has not been executed. A standby screen may be displayed when A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed.

<Configuration 2 during AT>
When the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button or the like in a situation where the AT is in progress (for example, the state related to the AT is “AT state”), (1) a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) elapses. The standby screen can be displayed by (2), and after a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed, the normal screen during AT (the screen that was displayed before the menu screen is displayed) is restored. May be.

<Configuration 3 during AT>
Turn off after turning on the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) as the final stop operation in a situation where non-AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is “normal game state”) When a predetermined time A (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of the above, a standby screen can be displayed, and in a situation where the AT is not in progress (for example, the state related to the AT is “normal gaming state”), A menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time B (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of displaying the menu screen, a standby screen can be displayed. ), A menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display of the menu screen, a normal screen during AT (displayed before the menu screen is displayed). May be configured to return to that have been screen) it is. That is, when the time values are compared, the configuration may be such that “predetermined time A = predetermined time B <predetermined time C”. Note that the time values of the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B need not be the same, and the predetermined time C only needs to be the longest.

<Other configuration 1>
The menu screen may be displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed. The menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 during the display of the standby screen is (1) the same screen as the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (2 ) A screen displayed by executing a predetermined operation (selecting and determining a predetermined item) from a menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (3) By operating the sub input button You may comprise like the screen different from the menu screen displayed. In addition, the menu screen continues to be displayed even if a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 during the display of the menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed. When a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 during the display of the menu screen displayed by operating the input button, the screen may be returned to the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed. In addition, when a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and a bet is displayed while the standby screen is displayed, a menu screen is displayed. When a bet is operated while the standby screen is displayed, a menu screen is displayed. A screen may be displayed (a normal screen displayed during a game when a standby screen is displayed immediately after power-on). In addition, when a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and a bet is placed while the standby screen is displayed, a menu screen is displayed. The standby screen is displayed, and three game medals stored in the credit are a prescribed number. In the above situation, if you bet by operating the bet button (for example, the Max bet button that allows you to bet 3 cards in one operation), the screen that was displayed before the menu screen is displayed (the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) In the case where the game is performed, the normal screen) displayed during the game is displayed, the standby screen is displayed, and the bet button is displayed in a situation where the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the prescribed number. A menu screen may be displayed when a bet is made by operating (for example, a maximum bet button that allows three bets by one operation).

<Other configuration 2>
It has multiple display modes for the standby screen, and satisfies certain conditions (for example, entering a password on the menu screen to take over the previous game history as a predetermined condition) If not, a moving image for introducing a story is displayed as a standby screen, but if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a moving image for introducing a character may be displayed as a standby screen. . In addition, the story introduction and the character introduction can be displayed as standby screens in both cases where the predetermined condition is not satisfied and whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, but is the predetermined condition satisfied? Depending on whether or not, the frequency of displaying either the story introduction or the character introduction may be different.

<Other changes>
In this example, the first BB combination in which the first BB is executed by winning the prize and the second BB combination in which the second BB having lower profit than the first BB is executed by winning the prize are executed. Further, the first BB combination and the second BB combination may be won in duplicate (providing a combination of “first BB + second BB”). In such a configuration, when “first BB + second BB” is won, the symbol combination (first BB combination) corresponding to the execution of the highly profitable first BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the first BB is finished, The symbol combination corresponding to 2BB (second BB combination) may be displayed in a stopped state (the second BB is won even during execution of the first BB). In addition, when “1BB + 2BB” is won, by executing the highly profitable 1BB first, for example, when the closing time of the game hall is approaching, “1BB + 2BB” is won. In such a case, the second BB with low profit is executed first, the game hall is closed during the execution of the second BB, and the game must be terminated without executing the first BB with high profit. Can be prevented.

  After the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning configuration of the second BB may be notified immediately, or may be notified after being hidden (after a predetermined game has passed without notification). In such a case, it may be configured such that the winning probability of replay is increased in the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed. Moreover, you may comprise so that the production | presentation which suggests 2nd BB winning possibility may be performed when it is made to hide (for example, "BB consecutive resort chance time!" Is displayed on production display device S40). . In such a configuration, if there is no case where the second BB is not won after the end of the first BB, it will be definitive that the production occurrence = the second BB is won, so only the first BB is won. Even after the operation of the first BB is finished, it is preferable that the production suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is executed (the production mode after the completion of the first BB is the same as described above. For example, “BB Renso Chance Time !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40). In addition, even when only the first BB is won, and after the operation of the first BB is finished, the first BB is won again, and the execution of the performance suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is not stopped. May be. Further, once the winning of the second BB is notified, the winning of the first BB may be notified (for example, display of “BB consecutive resort chance time!” → display of “sorry” → “first” 1BB won !!!! ”). Furthermore, when the second BB is hidden after the first BB operation is completed after the first winning operation is completed during the AT, the effect display device S40 returns to the AT after the AT is being prepared, etc. However, the internal reduction in the number of remaining games may be continuously interrupted. When the first BB and the second BB are selected and won, the number of payouts from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example,
(1) When the first BB and the small combination A are won simultaneously, the first BB is given priority to stop control.
(2) When the first BB and the small combination B are won in duplicate, the small combination B is given priority to stop control.
That is, there may be provided a small combination for which stop control is given priority over the BB combination and a small combination for which stop control is given priority to the BB combination.
(3) When the first BB and the small role A are both won, when the small role A wins, or a part of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small role A (for example, at the first stop, When 2 stops), a notification corresponding to the small combination A (notification that the small combination A can win) is performed.
In other words, the result of the first stop or the second stop (the stop mode after the execution of the first stop or the second stop) is used to notify the first BB combination that is controlled to stop in preference to the small combination A. Thus, when the first BB combination cannot be won regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped (the small combination A can be won), a notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. Further, when the small combination A wins as a result of the game, a notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform notification that is most advantageous to the player in accordance with various game situations that change in the middle of the game, as well as the content notified by the effect display device S40 and the like. It is possible to prevent the winning combination from being inconsistent.
(4) When the first BB and the small combination B are won in duplicate, a notification corresponding to the small combination B is performed during rotation of all reels.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that it may have a display (7 segment etc.) which displays the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) by which it stopped and is controlled by the main control board M. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradiction effect that does not correspond to the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed. For example, when the replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on the active line, an effect that is highly likely to be output when the watermelon is won (for example, the lamp is lit in green) is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack that can output (cannot input) from the sub-control board S side may be provided, and a configuration having the following characteristics may be used.
(1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of stages by the sub input button of the gaming machine.
(2) Even when a game is played using an earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, output from a speaker provided in the gaming machine) ).
(3) When a game is played using the earphone jack, even when the maximum volume is selected, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume that is not the maximum volume.

  Further, during the AT state or during BB execution, even when a game is played using an earphone jack, it may be configured such that a production sound is output from the gaming machine. Further, a volume for when the earphone jack is not used and a volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be stored separately. Even when the earphone is removed, the sound volume for when the earphone jack is used may not be cleared immediately (to the initial value). For example, when no operation is performed for 10 minutes, any volume may be cleared (to an initial value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, the sound volume for using the earphone jack does not have to be cleared (to the initial value). The earphone jack is preferably provided in a place where it does not interfere with the game (for example, when the earphone is inserted into the earphone jack, the earphone cord does not get entangled with the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever) ).

In this example,
(1) The winning probability of the re-gamer can be varied between the end of the BB when the BB is acquired at a specific number or more and the end of the BB when the BB is acquired at a specific number or less. It may be configured.
(2) You may have two or more RT states which transfer when RT state (for example, RT1) with the relatively high winning probability of a re-game player is complete | finished. For example, it may be configured to shift to “RT0” after “RT1” ends, or may be configured to shift to “RT3” (a newly provided RT state).
(3) The RT state is shifted when a predetermined winning combination is won. That is, the transition of the RT state does not correspond to the winning one-on-one, and the transition is made with a constant probability regardless of the condition device or the winning (for example, the RT transition lottery is executed with a certain probability for each game).
(4) It is possible to mount 0th RT transition, duplicate winning combination of 0 sheets, and double winning combination of 0 sheets. That is, no matter which push order is stopped, no matter what position the stop operation is performed, no more than one winning combination is provided as a 0 winning combination, and the RT state shifts by winning the 0 winning combination. It may be configured to be able to obtain a double winning combination of 0 and 7 and a winning combination of 0 and A. It should be noted that, when the double winning combination of the 0 sheets is selected, it may be configured such that either the 0 sheet combination that shifts to RT or the 0 sheet combination that does not shift to RT is awarded according to the pressing order. It is also possible to make a winning combination by prioritizing the 0-sheet combination by winning the 0-sheet combination and the BB combination.

  In addition, as in this example, the push order of the push order bell is 6 choices ("Left → Middle → Right", "Left → Right → Middle", "Middle → Left → Right", "Middle → Right → Left", “Right → Left → Middle” and “Right → Middle → Left” (6 choices), and push order replay push order is 3 choices (1st stop is left, middle, right 3 choices) In this case, the push order display in the push order display device D270 is different from the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay. You may comprise so that a display and 3 choice push order navigation display may differ. As an example, the push order display relating to 6 choices is “= 1” in the case of “left → middle → right”, “= 2” in the case of “left → right → middle”, “middle → left → “= 3” for “right”, “= 4” for “middle → right → left”, “= 5” for “right → left → middle”, “right → middle → left” Is displayed as “= 6”, and the push order display for the three options is “= 7” when the first stop is on the left, and “= 8” when the first stop is in the middle. When the first stop is on the right, the display may be such as “= 9”.

In this example, the following configuration may be used.
(1) It is configured so that the number of AT digested games, which is the number of games continuously digested in the “AT in progress state”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, can be displayed on the effect display device. If the number of remaining games is 0 and the AT state is changed from the “AT state” to the “normal game state”, the AT lottery is won again within the specific game and the “AT state” is changed. While the number of digested games is taken over and added, the “advantageous section” continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), and then transitions from the “AT state” to the “normal game state” and then again within a specific game. When the AT lottery is won and the state is shifted to the “AT state”, the previous AT digest game number is not taken over, and the number of AT digest games is newly counted from 0 games.
(2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts to rotate, an indication prompting the reel to stop on the effect display device S40 (for example, “reel If you do not operate the stop button for a predetermined time after the reel has started rotating in a game where push order navigation has occurred, (2-1) Production The display areas of the push order navigation display on the display device S40 and the display prompting to stop the reel do not overlap, and (2-2) the display prompting to stop the reel is not displayed.
(3) When the power is turned “on → off → on” in a game where push order navigation occurs, the reel rotation speed becomes constant and before the stop button operation becomes valid. The push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and / or display on the effect display device S40) is redisplayed at the timing.
(4) A state related to a certain AT and a state related to another AT are states related to an AT in which the push order navigation is generated in a game in which the common bell is won or the push order navigation may occur. The frequency with which the push order navigation occurs in the game in which the common bell is won differs between the state with respect to a certain AT and the state with respect to another AT that is a state with respect to the AT where push order navigation can occur.
(5) In the RT state (“RT1” in this example) where the winning probability of replay is the highest, the proportion of games in which push order navigation occurs is higher than the proportion of games in which push order navigation does not occur high. For example, the combined winning rate of the bell role and the replaying role is ½ or more. With this configuration, the game can proceed without the player getting tired during the AT.
You may comprise as mentioned above.

  Here, the feature point about the above-mentioned game section is explained in full detail below.

≪Normal section≫
(1) Push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) Push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The lottery for shifting to the “advantageous section” can be executed except during the internal winning of BB and the execution of BB.

≪Standby section≫
(1) Push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) Push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The lottery for the “advantageous section” is not executed.
(5) After the BB wins in the “standby state”, it becomes an “advantageous section” from the next game.

≪Advantageous section≫
(1) Push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) Push order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) A lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” (for example, shifting from a “high probability state” to an “AT in-progress state” as an AT-related state), an AT game number addition lottery, or the like may be executed.
(5) During the “favorable section”, the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit.
(6) When the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, the “advantageous section” is basically used unless the BB or the push order navigation is executed at least once in the “advantageous section”. However, as an exception, when the “advantageous section” continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 in this example), the BB and the push order navigation are performed once in the “advantageous section”. The “advantageous section” can be completed even if it is not executed.
(7) The advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is measured in all the games in the "favorable section" (for example, every game counter value is added even during BB execution).

Here, the feature points related to the lottery for the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The presence / absence of the setting for the “advantageous section” is determined based on the result of the role lottery, and the presence / absence of the setting for the “advantageous section” is not determined in the course of the number of games.
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability depending on the set value is established, the set lottery for the “advantageous section” is not executed when the condition device is established.
(3) In the case where a certain condition device is established and the set lottery for the “advantageous section” is executed, even if the set values are different, the lottery probabilities are the same.
(4) The performance of the “advantageous section” does not differ depending on the set value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, the setting 1 shifts to the “high probability state”, and the setting 6 shifts to the “AT state”. Etc., there is no difference depending on the setting value).
(5) Setting to “advantageous section” When winning the lottery, the next game will be changed to “advantageous section” (setting to “advantageous section” in the BB role established in “normal section”. If the lottery is won, it can be set as a “standby section” in the next game).

Here, the characteristic points related to the performance change of the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” with reference to the set value is not executed (the condition common to all the set values may be that a predetermined number of games have elapsed and a predetermined condition device is established) .
(2) When a condition device having different lottery probabilities is established depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed when the condition device is established. A lottery or the like is not executed in addition to the number of AT games.
(3) When the BB is won internally, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed. A lottery or the like is not executed in addition to the number of AT games.
(4) During the execution of the BB, when the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed differs depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” during the execution of the BB Is not executed. A lottery or the like is not executed in addition to the number of AT games.
(5) A lottery that changes the performance of the “advantageous section” during the execution of the BB when the lottery probability of the BB combination that has triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value during the execution of the BB. Can be executed. A lottery or the like can be executed by adding the number of AT games.

  Moreover, you may apply the following structures to the rotary type game machine which concerns on this example. Moreover, the following structures may be applied independently and a some structure may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1) It is configured to have a “gase high probability state” as a state relating to an AT which is an “advantageous section” but is harder to win the AT lottery than the “high probability state”.
(2) The continuous performance is composed of at least a continuous number of games equal to or greater than a predetermined number of G.
(3) There is a normal role that is not won at 100% for the AT lottery and a special role that is won at 100% for the AT lottery. In such a case, if the special role is won during the continuous production, the production is performed to notify that the AT lottery is won even during the continuous production (replace the continuous production).
(4) The more remaining games with the number of highly secured obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with a higher expectation level (expectation level for bonus winning, expectation level for AT lottery), and the remaining games with the number of highly secured obstacle games. The smaller the number, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous performance with a low expectation.
(5) The smaller the remaining number of highly secured obstacles, the higher the probability of selecting an effect that completes one game with a higher expectation level (expectation level for bonus wins, expectation level for AT lottery wins).
(6) If the number of remaining high-impact games is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the continuous production that is lost is not executed, but the continuous production that is a win (bonus winning, AT lottery winning) Can be executed. In other words, when the remaining number of high secured obstacles is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the effect of completing one game can be executed both in the case of a loss and in the case of success, Can only be executed if.
(7) If the ceiling G number (1500 games) in the advantageous section is equal to or less than the predetermined value (4 games), the continuous effect is not executed.
(8) The selection tendency of effects differs between the case where the number of ceilings G in the advantageous section is equal to or less than a predetermined value and the case where the number is greater than the predetermined value (frequency of occurrence of continuous effects, expectation of big hits for predetermined effects, etc.).
(9) In the case of a new transition to an “advantageous section” in the middle of a continuous production (for example, an effect of defeat) in a “normal section”,
(9-1) Rewrite the continuous production (stage change production “Character turns when you turn around and Stechen suggestion” in the “advantageous zone” transition game). The rate at which the production is rewritten during the continuous production (defeat) is higher than the rate at which the production is rewritten during the continuous production (win).
(9-2) The stay stage is changed after the continuous performance is executed to the end. When the transition to the “advantageous section” is performed during the execution of the continuous performance, the proportion of notification that the transition is made on the sub-control board S side in the game, and the sub-game in the game when the continuous performance is not performed. The ratio of notifying that the control board S has shifted is different.

<< Point 2 >>
(1) The player can select a stay stage (stage A group) that can be set in the “normal section”. For example, the selection can be made by operating the sub input button.
(2) First stage of stay stage A group: A lottery result indicating whether or not it will be an “advantageous section” is notified in advance when the start lever is turned on in the game.
Stay stage A group 2: A lottery result indicating whether or not it becomes an “advantageous section” will be announced at the end of the game (or at the time of the next game bet (when the replay stop is displayed, the start lever is operated)).
(3) A stay stage is selected from the stay stage A group when it becomes a “normal section” from a state other than the “advantageous section” and stay stage A group. The stay stage is maintained when it becomes the “normal section” from the “advantageous section” and the stage other than the production A group.
(4) The AT expectation degree when the advantageous section indicator YH is off and the stay stage A group is different from the AT expectation degree when the advantageous section indicator YH is off and other than the stay stage A group. For example, from the low AT expectation level, “the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off and the stay stage A group → the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on and the stay stage A group → the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on and other than the stay stage A group”
(5) The stay stage transition (stay stage A group → stay stage B group) triggered by the effect (including the 1G completion effect and continuous effect) from the “normal section” to the “advantageous section” The rate of occurrence differs from the rate at which the transition of the stay stage is triggered by the effect in the game from “advantageous section” to “normal section”.

<< Point 3 >>
(1) The higher the number of games for “Advantageous Zones” (the remaining number of high secured obstacles), the higher the degree of expectation (expectation for winning an AT lottery, expectation for winning a bonus) The probability of selecting the stay stage is high, and the smaller the number of games guaranteed for the “favorable section” (the remaining number of games with high obstacles), the higher the expectation level (the expected level and the bonus won in the AT lottery) The probability of selecting a stay stage with a high expectation) is high.
(2) When the remaining security game in the “advantageous section” is less than or equal to a predetermined value (4 games or less), the smaller the number of remaining security games, the lower the probability of selecting an effect in which the stay stage shifts.
(3) If a stage with a high degree of expectation is selected in the situation where you are not staying at a high-expectation stage (expected degree for winning an AT lottery, expecting degree for winning a bonus) Expectation (winning for AT lottery) than when a stage with high expectation is selected while staying at a high stay stage (expectation for winning an AT lottery, expectation for winning a bonus) The expectation that is won and the expectation that the bonus is won) is high.

<< Point 4 >>
(1) If BB is won in the “Restorability Produce State”,
(1-1) During the BB, the AT addition may be executed or may not be executed.
(1-2) After the end of BB, the state may be shifted to the “AT state” or may not be shifted.
(1-3) AT lottery may be executed during BB, or may not be executed.
(1-4) When the state shifts to the “AT state” after the end of BB, the number of AT remaining games may be subtracted for one game in the “restorability effect state” or may not be subtracted.
(2) The AT addition lottery may be executed or not executed in the “restorability effect state”. If you run a lottery with AT,
(3) In the “Restorability Prompt State” state, if a reverse-pressed white 7-match replay or a forward-pressed black 7-match replay is won, an avoidance navigation occurs and the timing after executing the resurrection effect (success) Informs the number of additional games.
(4) When a winning combination that can be changed to “advantageous section” is selected in “revival / prohibition effect state”, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off at the start timing of the next game, If the winning combination that can move to the “advantageous section” is won in the next game when the resurrection lottery is not won, the advantageous section indicator YH can be lit at the start timing of the next game.
(5) In the case of a specification that is an advantageous section in the “Restorability Producing State” but is not on the AT lottery,
(5-1) 1G for executing a resurrection effect (success), although the number of AT games is not added even if a winning combination (for example, watermelon A) that can execute an AT addition lottery in “Restorability Prompt State” is won. When a winning combination (for example, watermelon A) is won in ("AT state"), the number of AT games can be added.
(6) Bonus in the case where “Battle Effect 3G + Restoration Effect (Failure) 1G” is scheduled to be executed as an effect at the end of the AT, and when the resurrection effect (success) is executed by winning the bonus in the revival effect execution game There is no extra number of AT games, but there is an extra number of AT games during the bonus when the bonus effect is won in the battle production execution game (any of 3G) Can do. Moreover, the production | presentation tendency in a bonus may differ.

<< Point 5 >>
(1) In the case of having a gaming state A and a gaming state B as states relating to an AT that is an “advantageous section”
(1-1) Expected winning degree of AT addition lottery is “gaming state A> advantageous state B” (the number of AT games is more likely to be added in gaming state A than in gaming state B, or an AT additional game) a lot).
(1-2) The extra number that can be added when winning combination X in gaming state A is different from the additional number that can be added when winning combination Y in gaming state A.
(1-3) The additional number that can be added when winning a combination X in the gaming state B is the same as the additional number that can be added when winning a combination Y in the gaming state B.

<< Point 6 >>
(1) When the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), after the second stop to before the third stop (C). Make a difference.
(1-1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is in the order of “A <B <C” from the one not conspicuous to the player.
(2) In the case of “Low Probability State” and “RT1” in which the AT has ended from the “AT in progress” state and the “RT1” state, the push order display device pushes when the winning combination is won. Although the forward navigation is displayed, the push navigation is not displayed on the effect display device (“???” is displayed).
(3) In a game in which a fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed, when winning 18 (falling combination) is won at the third stop, the display is maintained in the same display mode as the display mode after the second stop. .
(4) When the start lever is operated in a situation where the initial process related to the display of the effect display device is not completed when the power supply is restored from the power interruption, rather than the completion of the initial process related to the display of the effect display device Push order navigation is executed with the voice from the speaker (for example, “It is left!”) At the previous timing.
(5) Even if the player is in a state related to AT, which is highly profitable for the player, such as “specialized state of addition”, the fall avoidance suggestion effect is preferentially displayed when winning the fall combination.
(6) The “advantageous section” is maintained even if the faller wins a prize in the “advantageous section”.
(7) In a case where the falling combination is configured to be a push combination (determining whether or not to stop display depending on the push order), a winning combination (push order bell, etc.) that is not a falling combination is won and pushed. When navigation is performed and stopped in a pressing order different from the push order navigation, the display on the effect display device may be dimmed, but when the winning combination is a fallen combination, it is stopped in a pressing order different from the push order navigation. In such a case, the display of the effect display device does not darken (or does not darken the display of the fall avoidance suggestion effect).

<< Point 7 >>
(1) When configured to shift to “RT3” and “AT ready state” after BB related to a setting difference BB (similar to the first modification from the present embodiment).
(1-1) The winning combination is won by winning a winning combination at “RT3” (100% winning or winning with a predetermined probability).
(1-2) Depending on the type of the BB combination, the RT state to be shifted to after the end of the BB is made different, and the AT addition lottery execution mode (the combination for executing the addition lottery, addition) according to the combination that easily appears in any RT state The lottery winning probability and the number of AT extra games) are made different.
(1-3) Bonus A → RT1 → Promotion Replay A → RT3 (Replay probability is high), Bonus B → RT2 → Promotion Replay B → RT3. The winning rate or the average number of added games is different.
(1-4) When bonus A → RT1, bonus B → RT2, and promotion replay A and promotion replay B, the winning probabilities of promotion replay A and promotion replay B are RT1 and RT2. Is different.
(1-5) Bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2 are set so that promotion replay and fall replay can be won, respectively, and the winning probabilities of promotion replay and fall replay differ between RT1 and RT2.
(1-6) There is a setting difference. After the BB ends, the state shifts to a dedicated RT state (“RT3” and “AT ready state”), and then transitions to the “addition special state” triggered by the promotion replay.

<< Point 8 >>
(1) It has 1 type BB-B1 and 1 type BB-B2 and moves to “RT3” after the end of 1 type BB-B1 and shifts to “RT4” after the end of 1 type BB-B2 When configured as follows.
(1-1) “RT3” and “RT4” differ in the AT extra lottery execution mode (the role for executing the extra lottery, the extra lottery winning probability, and the number of AT extra games).
(1-2) The BB start effect related to the type 1 BB-B1 and the BB start effect related to the type 1 BB-B2 have different effect tendencies (the selection rate of the BB start effect with a high expectation is different).
(2) When the replay 04 is stopped and displayed before the replay 06 in the “AT ready state” and “RT3”, the process shifts to “RT4” and the treasure box loss effect is not executed. In “RT4”, a re-game player who is promoted to “RT3” is won. In addition, when “RT4” is changed to “RT3”, the treasure chest opening addition effect is not executed even if the re-games -E1 to E3 are won.
(3) It has a plurality of types of BB roles, and even if the BB role is won, it is difficult for the player to visually determine which BB role has won, and depending on the type of BB, The execution state of the AT addition lottery when the RT state is made different and the promoted regame player is won differs depending on the RT state. In such a case, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect executed during the BB is made different depending on the type of the BB (such as a gold treasure chest, a silver treasure chest, a copper treasure chest, etc.). Number distribution is different).

<< Point 9 >>
(1) BB start effect related to the BB with a setting difference won during the AT and the proportion of the start effect related to the BB start effect related to the BB with no setting difference won during the AT, and a setting difference won during the non-AT. The ratio which becomes the same effect aspect by the BB start effect which concerns on BB, and the start effect which concerns on the BB without setting difference elected during non-AT differs.

<< Point 10 >>
(1) The setting value is suggested when BB without setting difference is won in the “normal section” rather than the probability that the effect suggesting the setting value is selected when winning the BB with setting difference in the “favorable section” The probability that a production is selected is higher.
(2) In the BB won during the non-AT, a different BB start effect is selected according to the setting difference, but in the BB selected during the AT, the same BB start effect is selected regardless of the setting difference.
(3) The ratio at which the BB start effect is the same in the BB with a setting difference won during the AT and the BB without the setting difference won during the AT, and the BB with the setting difference won during the non-AT and the non-AT The ratio at which the BB start effect is the same effect mode is different from the BB without setting difference.

<< Point 11 >>
(1) When “Winning without setting difference (Winning rate with different winning rate depending on setting value) + BB” is selected, “Advantageous section indicator lighting + effect B” that can be executed when winning with “No setting difference” is selected The probability of selecting “Advantageous section indicator off + production A” that can be executed at the time of winning “the role with setting difference (the winning rate varies depending on the set value)” is higher than the probability of { "At the time of the combination + BB" is an effect (for example, a battle effect) that wins the winning of the BB rather than an effect (for example, an effect that shifts to a stay stage where the player can stay in a high probability state). Is easier to implement}.
(2) When a predetermined role (for example, cherry) is won, the game is configured to shift to a high probability state with 100%, and the allocation of the number of high secured obstacles is “50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10% → 50G ", if 3G is selected, the battle is defeated, otherwise the battle is won. In addition, the expectation of the length of the number of high-definition games (whether it is 20 games or 50 games) varies depending on the opponent who won the battle. Further, in the case of the above example, an effect of encouraging continuation with high accuracy 20G is performed (an effect of encouraging whether the game is 20 games or 50 games, and if successful, it is determinative that the game is 50 games). .

<< Point 12 >>
(1) It has a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the “normal section”, and the occurrence probability of the freeze effect differs depending on the set value.
(1-1) In the “advantageous section”, a predetermined freeze effect is not executed.
(1-2) The “freeze section” is more likely to execute the predetermined freeze effect than the “normal section”.
(1-3) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-4) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-5) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed at the time of a loss.

<<< Configuration applicable to this example >>>
The configuration applicable to the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. Any configuration described in detail below can be applied to all the embodiments described above, and one configuration described in detail below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations detailed below may be applied. I will supplement what you may do.

<< Memory map configuration >>
First, with reference to FIG. 59, the configuration of a part of the memory map in the RAM (may be referred to as a first RAM) of the main control board M applicable to the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present example will be described in detail. In the area shown in the figure, from the upper address, (1) “set value data”: an area for data related to the number for managing the setting stage, (2) “external signal system data”: external signal output Area for storing related information, (3) “RAM checksum data”: data used in checksum calculation processing executed when power is turned on, calculated from data stored in RAM when power is turned off An area for storing the data and storing information for calculating a specific value (for example, “0”) in the checksum calculation process executed at power-on, (4) “control command buffer”: sub An area for storing command information to be transmitted to the control board side. (5) “Stack pointer temporary storage buffer”: Information used at the time of power-off recovery. An area for storing data stored in the pointer and storing information stored in the stack pointer at the time of power-off recovery, (6) “Unused area”: an area for storing an area not used for gaming ( 7) “Saved data 1 to saved data 8”: The areas are used in the order of RAM in which the saved data may be written to the maximum by design due to the CALL instruction, the PUSH instruction, or the like. In such a configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer by design is “7FF8H”, but when an unexpected failure (such as an unexpected power failure) occurs, it is higher than “7FF8H”. There is a possibility that the stack pointer indicates the address of. In that case, there is a possibility that the saved data may be stored beyond the area of “saved data 1 to saved data 8” which has been secured as an area of data to be saved in advance. In consideration of such a situation, data that does not affect the progress of the game (address is less affected) at an address (an address close to “7FF8H”) that may be indicated by the stack pointer when the unexpected failure occurs. (Data) is preferably stored. Specifically, by providing an address for storing “setting value data” at an address at least one address away from “saved data 1 to saved data 8” reserved as an area of data to be saved in advance. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to not only a person but also a game hall. In the figure, (5) “stack pointer temporary storage buffer” is data that is not used in a situation where a game is in progress after power-off recovery, and (4) “control command buffer” Is unlikely to affect the progress of the game even if the command cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. (3) “RAM checksum data” is used in the situation where the game is progressing after the power is turned off. (2) “External signal system data” is data to be transmitted to the hall computer, and therefore has little influence on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) “setting value data” is data relating to a setting value that affects the game result. For example, if the setting value data is changed to a low setting value, a significant disadvantage is caused to the player. there is a possibility. Furthermore, for example, if the setting value is changed to a high setting value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will occur in the game hall. As described above, (1) “setting value data” is important data for normal progress of the game. For this reason, in (1) to (7) in the figure, (1) “set value data” is the highest order data (data stored in the high order address). In other words, (2) “external signal system data”, (3) “RAM checksum data” are included in addresses between (1) “setting value data” and (7) “save data 1 to save data 8”. ”, (4)“ control command buffer ”, (5)“ stack pointer temporary storage buffer ”, and (6)“ unused area ”. With such a configuration, even when a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine and the number of data saved from the stack pointer to the RAM exceeds the design, a RAM that is not used for gaming is provided. Thus, the gaming machine can be configured so that an abnormal state is unlikely to occur. (2) “External signal system data”, (3) “RAM checksum data”, (4) “Control command buffer”, (5) “Stack pointer temporary storage buffer”, (6) “Unused area” There is no problem even if the order of addresses for storing the five data is changed. For example, the order of “(3) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (6)” from the higher address may be stored Alternatively, it may be stored in the order of “(6) → (5) → (3) → (2) → (4)” from the higher address. Further, (6) “unused area” may not be provided. Note that the data stored in the RAM areas (2) to (5) above cannot be inserted into game medals even when the data stored in the RAM area is changed (game medals). Data that does not cause an error that cannot be input).

59 may be configured to store the following data in the area for storing “setting value data” shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG.
(A) Total score data: An area for storing data related to the number of game values that play the same role as the total number of game medals that can be thrown into an encased type of revolving game machine that does not use actual game medals (total When the score data is stored in the area (1) in FIG. 59, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may have 2 bytes)
(B) Minimum game time: Data for counting the minimum game time of one time (the counter value is subtracted for each interrupt process) (minimum game time of one time is 4.1 seconds)
(C) Acquired number counter at the time of BB operation: a counter for determining whether or not a condition (payout number) for BB to be completed is satisfied (corresponding to a value that gives a player a game value) Subtract the value)
(D) Acquired number counter at the time of MB operation: a counter for determining whether or not the condition (payout number) at which the MB ends is satisfied (corresponding to a value that gives a player a game value) Subtract the value)
It should be noted that a plurality of (A) to (D) and “set value data” may be stored (stored at different addresses), or only one of them may be stored. Good. In the case where a plurality of data can be stored, each of the plurality of data is stored at an address higher than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (an area for storing is provided). It is preferable to configure so as to. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to a player or a game arcade. Furthermore, if the address is higher than at least the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is “7FF8H” by design, but an unexpected failure (such as an unexpected power failure) has occurred. In some cases, there is a possibility that the stack pointer indicates an address higher than “7FF8H”, but it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player or the game hall.

<< Action related to replay stop display >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the action in the winning game of the re-game applicable to the rotating game machine according to this example will be described in detail. In addition, the structure illustrated below has illustrated the structure which can throw in a game medal even during the stop display of a re-game.

  First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 is turned on at the timing (3) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off substantially simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing of (5) in the figure, a 2-bet ramp is used as an automatic bet operation related to the replay that has been stopped (when the replay is stopped, a bet is placed even if no game medal is inserted or no bet button is operated). D212 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on as an automatic bet operation related to the stopped replay. At substantially the same time, the start lamp D180 and the throwable lamp D300 are turned on (the throwable lamp D300 may be configured to blink).

  Here, the characteristic points of the action in the figure will be described in detail below.

<Configuration 1>
The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed are configured to light up at substantially the same timing. When the throwable lamp D300 is turned on after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert a game medal, the player recognizes that the start medal cannot be inserted by visually confirming that the start lamp D180 is turned on first. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the throw-in lamp D300, it may be recognized that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by making the throwable lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 lit substantially simultaneously as described above, it is possible to facilitate the player's judgment regarding the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever D50. Input and operation of the start lever D50 can be prevented.

<Configuration 2>
The 1-bet lamp D211 is always lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which replay is stopped to the end of the game of the next game in which replay is stopped. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game win has been performed, and it is possible to quickly notify that the re-game has been won. It can be smooth.

<Configuration 3>
The lighting of the replay lamp D290 based on the fact that the replay has been stopped is at a timing before the lighting of the start lamp D180. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is notified that the replay has been won first, and then the start lamp D180 is turned on and the start lever D50 can be operated by the replay win. By notifying the player of this fact, the player can smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 4>
The lighting of the replay lamp D290 based on the fact that the replay has been stopped is at a timing before the lighting of the throwable lamp D300. In this way, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on first, so that the re-game is won first, and then the throw-in lamp D300 is turned on to notify that a game medal can be inserted. This makes it possible to grasp the game situation smoothly.

<Configuration 5>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the 3-bet lamp D213. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is easy to recognize that the regame has been won, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by the replay win. Since it is possible to notify early that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 6>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is the timing before the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is easy to recognize that the regame has been won, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by the replay win. Since it is possible to notify early that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 7>
The two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped are turned on after the two-bet lamp D212 is turned on and then the three-bet lamp D213 is turned on (the two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 are It does not light at the same time). By configuring in this way, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed, and the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 8>
The turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 after the replay is stopped and displayed is substantially the same. When a plurality of lamps (2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213) are lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state. By turning off 2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213 almost simultaneously, the player can It becomes possible to grasp the game state quickly.

<Configuration 9>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the fact that the re-game is stopped and displayed is before the turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the re-game is stopped and displayed. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is easy to recognize that the regame has been won, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by the replay win. Since it is possible to notify early that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 10>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the fact that the re-game is stopped is displayed before the timing when the 3-bet lamp D 213 is turned off after the re-game is stopped. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is easy to recognize that the regame has been won, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by the replay win. Since it is possible to notify early that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 11>
The lighting timing of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed is substantially the same. By configuring in this way, it is possible to quickly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective, so that the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<< Other functions 1 >>
Here, an operation different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the re-game winning game applicable to the spinning-reel game machine according to this example will be described in detail as the other operation 1.

<Configuration 12>
The two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 may always be lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which replay is stopped to the end of the game of the next game in which replay is stopped. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed, and it is possible to quickly notify that the re-game has been won. Can be made smooth.

<Configuration 13>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the fact that the replay is stopped and the turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the replay is stopped and displayed may be configured substantially simultaneously. I want to inform the player that the automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (2-bet lamp D212) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the gaming state, and the lighting timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 related to the next game in which the re-game lamp D290 is stopped and displayed (may be the lighting timing of the throwable lamp D300) It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal by turning on earlier.

<Configuration 14>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the fact that the re-game is stopped and the turn-off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the re-game is stopped may be configured substantially simultaneously. I want to inform the player that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (3 bet lamp D213) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the gaming state. By doing so, the game state can be grasped smoothly, and the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the re-game lamp is stopped and displayed on the re-gaming lamp D290 (the lighting timing of the throwable lamp D300 may be used). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal by turning on earlier.

<Configuration 15>
When a re-game is won in a certain game and a re-game is also won in the next game of the certain game, the re-play lamp D290 is turned on based on the stop display of the re-game related to the certain game. The replay lamp D290 may continue to be lit until the end of the game of the game after the certain game. In this way, by continuously lighting the re-game lamp D290, the player can be notified of the winning of the re-game quickly, and the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 16>
Various lamps such as a replay lamp D290, a 3-bet lamp D213, a 2-bet lamp D212, a 1-bet lamp D211, a start lamp D180, a throw-in enable lamp D300, etc., triggered by the third stop operation (or replay symbol stop display) This control may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute notification by a ramp according to the progress timing of the game, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the progress status of the game.

<Configuration 17>
You may comprise so that the lighting timing of the replay lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the throwable lamp D300 may be substantially the same. By comprising in this way, it can alert | report clearly that it is lighting of the lamp | ramp based on the stop display of replay.

<Configuration 18>
Based on the stop display of the replay, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost simultaneously, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 You may comprise so that it may light substantially simultaneously. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals automatically bet when winning a re-game is three.

<Configuration 19>
Based on the fact that the replay is stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off substantially simultaneously, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are restarted. The game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the throwable lamp D300 may be turned on substantially simultaneously. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically betted when winning a re-game is 3, and clearly that the lamp is lit based on the re-game stop display. Can be notified.

<< Other effects 2 >>
Here, the operation different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the re-game winning game applicable to the spinning-reel game machine according to this example will be described in detail below as other operation 2 using FIGS. Describe.

<Operation diagram 2 for replay stop display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the action applicable to the rotary type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail.

  First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. At substantially the same time, the replay lamp D290 is turned on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same timing. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit at the timing (2) in the figure. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit at the timing (3) in the figure. Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (4) in the figure, and then the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing (5) in the figure, and the start lamp D180 and the ON are turned on. The enabling lamp D300 lights up substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Operational diagram 3 regarding replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 is lit at the timing (3) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the throwable lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operational diagram 4 at the time of replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the start lamp D180 and the replay lamp D290 are turned on substantially at the same time. The throwable lamp D300 lights up. Thereafter, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing of (4) in the figure. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operational diagram 5 at the time of replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 Are turned off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the replay lamp D290 are turned on substantially simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing of (5) in the drawing, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the throw-in lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously.

<Operational diagram 6 at the time of replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 is turned on substantially at the same time, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit at the timing (4) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. After that, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the enabling lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Operational diagram 7 at the time of replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing (3) in the figure, and the replay lamp D290 and The start lamp D180 and the throwable lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operational diagram 8 at the time of replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 Are turned off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the throwable lamp D300. Lights up at the same time.

<Operational diagram 9 when re-game stop is displayed>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 is lit at the timing (3) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off substantially simultaneously. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit at the timing (5) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing of (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the throwable lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Operational diagram 10 at the time of replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 is lit at the timing (3) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the throw-in lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

  Of the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 61 to 63, the same effects as those of the above-described configurations 1 to 19 can be created for those having the same configurations as the above-described configurations 1 to 19.

  The replay symbol stop display timing, stop button operation timing, replay lamp D290 lighting / extinguishing timing, 3 betting lamp D213 lighting / extinguishing timing, 2 betting lamp D212 lighting / extinguishing timing, 1 It is supplemented that there is no problem in combining any of the configurations (timing) regarding the timings for turning on / off the bet lamp D211, the lighting timing of the start lamp D180, and the lighting timing of the throwable lamp D300.

  In the above description, a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even during a replay stop display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game medal cannot be inserted during a replay stop display. It may be configured (applicable to all the configurations described above). In such a configuration, the throwable lamp D300 remains off during the period when the replay is stopped.

  Moreover, the above-described “substantially simultaneous” is sufficient if it can be recognized as visually simultaneous when the player visually recognizes, and for example, it may be processing (lighting / extinguishing timing) executed within a period of executing interrupt processing 10 times. For example, there is no problem even if they are almost simultaneous.

<< Configuration related to bet button lamp >>
As a configuration related to the bet button lamp S50 in the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the present example, the following configuration may be used.

  A process for enabling the bet button D220 from invalid is executed by the process of the main control board M, and then the main control board M transmits a command for lighting the bet button lamp S50 to the sub control board S side (main control). The substrate M may be configured to transmit a command indicating that the bet button D220 is activated to the sub control substrate S side), and then the sub control substrate S transmits the bet button lamp S50 transmitted from the main control substrate M. A process for turning on the bet button lamp S50 may be executed when a command for turning on is received. With this configuration, the bet button lamp S50 manages lighting / extinguishing on the sub-control board S side, but the bet button D220 is effective according to the game situation on the main control board M side. The bet button lamp S50 can be reliably turned on, and even if the player visually recognizes the bet button lamp S50 and determines whether or not the bet (bet button D220) is valid, It can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation.

<< Configuration related to stop button lamp >>
As a configuration related to the stop button lamp S60 in the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the present example, the following configuration may be used.

  A process for enabling the stop button D40 (any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) from invalid is executed by the process of the main control board M, and then the main control board M is the sub control board. A command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 (stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button on which the enabling process has been executed) is transmitted to the S side {the main control board M is the stop button to the sub control board S side D40 (any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) may be configured to be transmitted}, and then the sub control board S is the main control board. When the command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 transmitted from M is received, the process for turning on the stop button lamp S60 is executed. It may be so that configuration. With this configuration, the stop button lamp S60 manages lighting / extinguishing on the sub-control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 is effective according to the game situation on the main control board M side. The stop button lamp S60 can be surely turned on, and the player visually recognizes that the stop button lamp S60 is turned on, and then the stop button D40 (one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43). Even if it is determined whether or not the game is effective, it is possible to prevent the game situation on the side of the main control board M from being inconsistent.

<< Configuration related to reel unit RU applicable to this example >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the spinning-reel game machine according to this example includes each of the reels M50 (M51, M52, and M53) rotatably via a reel unit RU. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the swivel type gaming machine according to this example is an integrated unit that rotatably stores all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape, and an opening RU10 is formed. The three reels M51, M52, and M53 are provided in the reel unit RU so that the symbols of the three reels M51, M52, and M53 can be visually recognized through the opening RU10. Although details will be described later, each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel band MO to a reel frame MW.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top portion RU20 and a bottom portion RU30 with the opening RU10 interposed therebetween. By placing the bottom part RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of a base part BU which will be described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the base part BU.

<Through hole RU40>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three through holes RU40 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end at the front end of the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU. Yes. The three through holes RU40 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

<< pedestal part BU >>
The pedestal portion BU is made of a metal plate or the like and has a substantially plate shape. The end of the pedestal unit BU is attached to the left side surface, the right side surface, the back surface, and the like of the back box with screws or the like (not shown), and the pedestal unit BU is fixed to the back box. The pedestal portion BU is attached to the back box so as to extend in the horizontal direction. As described above, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal unit BU.

<Screw hole BU10>
A plurality of, for example, three screw holes BU10 are formed in the front end portion of the base portion BU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end portion. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU are formed so as to correspond to each of the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the base portion BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

  Note that the numbers and positions of the through holes RU40 and the screw holes BU10 only have to correspond to each other and be arranged along the horizontal direction, and it is only necessary that the reel unit RU can be stably placed on the pedestal unit BU. Further, only the reel unit RU may be attached to the pedestal portion BU by the screw hole BU10 (and screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU, or the reel unit may be configured by the screw hole BU10 (and screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU. You may comprise so that both RU and one reel (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53) may be attached to the base part BU.

<< Reel unit RU fixing method >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU, and the reels are arranged such that each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU communicates with the screw hole BU10 of the corresponding pedestal portion BU. By positioning the unit RU and screwing the screw BS into the screw hole BU10 through the through-hole RU40 of the reel unit RU, the reel unit RU can be attached and held at a fixed position of the base portion BU. By doing in this way, the reel unit RU can be attached to the base part BU so that attachment or detachment is possible.

  The reel unit RU may be detachably attached using a detachable rivet, for example, a push rivet or the like, in addition to the screw BS and a screwed member such as a screw or a bolt. It is only necessary that the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by an engagement member, a locking member, or the like.

<< Hopper H40 and medal auxiliary tank HS >>
FIG. 66 (a) is a perspective view from the back right side of the hopper H40, and FIG. 66 (b) is a perspective view from the back left side of the hopper H40. In FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), an arrow indicating the movement of a screw BS described later is also shown. The arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are described in FIGS. 66A and 66B for both the positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

  The hopper H40 is a funnel-type tank molded from ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged so as to circulate, and an opening H30 is formed by the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48. The The opening H30 is formed so as to open upward. The medals inserted from the above-described medal insertion slot D170 are introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30.

  Further, the hopper H40 includes a hopper bottom H52, a right inclined portion H54, and a left inclined portion H56. The right inclined portion H54 is disposed on the right side of the hopper H40, and the game medal introduced to the right side of the hopper H40 is guided by its own weight toward the hopper bottom portion H52 described later. The left inclined portion H56 is disposed on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides medals introduced on the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom portion H52 with its own weight. Further, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is disposed so as to cover an upper portion of a substantially left half of a disk H50 described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game medals from being connected and dropped at the hopper bottom H52 and to smoothly guide the game medals toward the hopper bottom H52.

  By providing the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57, any game medal introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom portion H52. The medals guided by the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 are stored in the hopper bottom H52. As described above, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion that stores game medals inside the hopper H40.

  A disk H50 as a rotating body is disposed on the hopper bottom H52. The disk H50 is rotationally driven by the hopper motor H80 described above, and the game medal is discharged from the game medal outlet H60 by the rotational operation of the disk H50. In this way, medals stored in the hopper H40 can be discharged one by one from the game medal outlet H60.

<Discharge guide part H62>
Inside the front side wall H42, a discharge guide portion H62 is formed along the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has a long shape and has an inclined surface H64 formed to be inclined. When the hopper H40 is disposed in the back box, the right side of the inclined surface H64 is positioned below the left side of the inclined surface H64. The width of the inclined surface H64 is formed to be substantially constant, but is formed so as to expand slightly as it goes downward (from left to right).

  The discharge guide unit H62 guides the game medals on the top of the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS before the game medals are stored in the hopper H40, and the game medals overflow from the hopper H40, and is stored in the hopper H40. This is a member for reducing the number of medals. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the inclined surface H64, and game medals guided by the inclined surface H64 are discharged to the medal auxiliary tank HS through the discharge port H66. In this way, the discharge guide portion H62 functions as a discharge inclined portion that discharges game medals to the outside of the hopper H40. As described above, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion for storing game medals inside the hopper H40, while the discharge guide portion H62 is used for storing game medals. It functions as a discharge inclined portion that discharges to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to that of the right inclined portion H54 and the left inclined portion H56.

  Further, the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medal from the left side to the right side. That is, the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all have a downward slope. The final target of the left inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 is the hopper bottom portion H52, and the final target of the discharge guide portion H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS, but by making the inclination the same, the overall hopper H40 The movement of game medals can be aligned from left to right.

  In the vicinity of the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62, a protruding wall H58 is provided so as to protrude upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64. The medals placed on the inclined surface H64 can be prevented from falling to the hopper bottom H52 by the protruding wall H58.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS>
The medal auxiliary tank HS has a substantially quadrangular prism shape, and has a bottom surface and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 at the top, and medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<< Removal of screw BS of reel unit RU >>
A front door DU is attached to the rotating game machine so as to be openable and closable with respect to the back box (the front door DU and the back box may be collectively referred to as a housing). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box with the left side (left side as viewed from the player) of the front door DU as the rotation center. For this reason, the right side of the front door DU (the right side as viewed from the player) has the longest moving distance, and when the front door DU is closed, an impact due to contact or collision with the back box occurs and propagates to the back box. Since an impact is generated on the right side of the spinning-type gaming machine, the impact on the right side of the spinning-type gaming machine is the largest, and on the left side of the spinning-type gaming machine, the impact tends to gradually weaken.

  As described above, the reel unit RU is detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU with the screw BS. The screw BS is screwed into the screw hole BU10 of the pedestal portion BU at three locations on the left side, the center, and the right side, and the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is subjected to the greatest impact. For this reason, the right screw BS that is screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is most easily loosened by an impact, and when the screwing is released, the right screw BS drops and falls. Further, the central screw BS screwed into the central screw hole BU10 is also subjected to an impact, and may be loosened and fall off due to the impact. The left screw BS screwed into the left screw hole BU10 is assumed to have a small impact, but there is a possibility that the left screw BS will loosen and fall off depending on the degree of propagation of the shock and the usage time.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (1) >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal paying device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are disposed at the lower part of the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located at least below the right screw BS among the three screws BS described above.

  When the right screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The dropped right screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 due to its own weight, and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 1B). When the right screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  In this way, even when the right screw BS is dropped due to an impact, it can be discharged from the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS can be prevented from entering the hopper H40 in advance. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the disk H50 from being hindered or to damage the disk H50, and to operate the hopper H40 stably.

  In the above-described example, only the right screw BS is targeted. However, the hopper H40 is configured such that all of the three left screws BS, the center screw BS, and the right screw BS are located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. The reel unit RU may be positioned. Even if any screw BS is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. Further, in this example, the screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU on the pedestal unit BU is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front door DU that is easily affected by contact with or collision with the back box. Also, a member such as a screw attached to the right side (right side as viewed from the player) may be configured to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when dropped.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (2) >>
FIG. 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in FIG. 67, among the three screws BS described above, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is positioned below the central screw BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is positioned below the right screw BS. In FIG. 67, the same components as those in FIG. 64 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  When the right screw BS falls off due to impact, it falls freely downward (arrow 2A) as it is (without touching the inclined surface H64) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  When the central screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The dropped central screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and moves along the inclined surface H64 by rolling on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 by the weight of the central screw BS (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  The right screw BS and the central screw BS that have dropped off are prevented from entering the hopper H40, the rotation of the disk H50 is prevented from being disturbed by the dropped screw BS, and the disk H50 is prevented from being damaged. It can be operated stably.

  In the above-described example, the right screw BS and the center screw BS are targeted. However, the hopper H40 and the reel unit RU are positioned so that the left screw BS is also located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. Also good. Even if any screw BS is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  As described above, it is preferable to form the protruding wall H58 that protrudes upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS that has fallen and placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling to the hopper bottom H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is equal to or higher than the height at which the screw BS rebounds when it falls on the inclined surface H64. The screw BS can be prevented from falling to the hopper bottom H52, and the screw BS can be prevented from obstructing or causing the operation of the disk H50.

  As described above, even if the screw BS for attaching the reel unit RU is detached due to vibration caused by opening / closing of the front door DU, the detached screw BS does not enter the hopper H40, and the medal assistance is performed. By configuring so as to fall into the tank HS, the manager of the game hall can easily collect the detached screw BS.

<< Hopper H400 >>
In the example shown in FIG. 67, when the right screw BS falls, it passes through the outside of the hopper H40 (the right side of the right side wall H48 as viewed from the player) (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The falling right screw BS can be shared with the hopper H40 shown in FIG. 64 by adopting a configuration in which the dropped right screw BS is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing through the inside of the hopper H40.

  On the other hand, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 67, a hopper H400 having a structure in which the right side wall H48 is extended to the right side (right side wall H480) may be used. The hopper H400 is formed with a bottom opening H410 at the bottom near the right side wall H480. When the right screw BS falls, the hopper H400 passes through the hopper H400 and further passes through the bottom opening H410. Housed in HS. Thus, by passing through the bottom opening H410, the dropped right screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without entering the hopper H40.

<< Extension part RU50 >>
In the above-described example, when the screw BS falls off, the screw BS falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS as it is. On the other hand, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 65, an extension portion EN may be provided below the reel unit RU or the base portion BU. By providing the extension part EN, even if the screw BS falls off, the screw BS does not drop immediately, but after being guided by the extension part EN, it can be dropped into the medal auxiliary tank HS. Thus, the extension portion EN can match the position where the screw BS is attached and the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, and can increase the degree of freedom of the position where the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged.

<< Configuration of Medal Auxiliary Tank HS >>
<Full-detection electrode through hole HS20>
As shown in FIG. 68, in the medal auxiliary tank HS, at least two full detection electrode through holes HS20 are formed on the inner surface. In addition, two full detection electrodes DE and a continuity detection substrate CC (see FIG. 65) are provided at the lower part of the back of the back box. The two full detection electrodes DE have a long shape, extend parallel to each other and horizontally, and are arranged to protrude forward. The two full detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed corresponding to the two full detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is disposed at the bottom of the back box, the two full detection electrodes DB pass through the corresponding full detection electrode through holes HS20 and protrude toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  As medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the uppermost portion UL (see FIG. 69C) of the stored game medals gradually rises and approaches the two full detection electrodes DE. FIG. 69C is a cross-sectional view showing a state where game medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the uppermost part UL shown in FIG. 69 (c) is a line (for example, an envelope) connecting the outlines of the game medals located in the uppermost part UL among the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. (For the sake of simplicity, the uppermost portion UL is illustrated with a smooth curve). When the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come into contact with the two full detection electrodes DE and the two full detection electrodes DE are conducted through the plurality of medals, the two full detection electrodes DE are interposed between the two full detection electrodes DE. An electrical circuit is formed. Due to the formation of the electric circuit, the continuity detection substrate CC outputs a signal indicating that continuity is established between the two full detection electrodes DE. In this way, when game medals are stored up to the position of the two full detection electrodes DE, a medal full error can be detected.

  Note that the number of full detection electrodes DE is not limited to two but may be three or more. For example, in the case of providing three, in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, one full detection electrode is newly provided below the two full detection electrodes, and the newly provided one A medal full error can be detected when the full detection electrode and one of the two full detection electrodes described above are connected to each other. Even when game medals are not evenly stored in the tank HS (for example, when game medals are stored biased to the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS), a medal full error can be detected.

<< Bis BS material and medal material >>
The material of the screw BS can be magnetized and can be conducted. For example, it is formed of a steel material. In addition, the material of the medal cannot be magnetized and can be conducted. For example, it is formed of brass plated or stainless steel. With this configuration, even when the screw BS falls into the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS can be easily taken out from the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<< Relationship Between Total Length BL of Screw BS and Distance EL Between Two Full Detecting Electrodes DE >>
The left screw BS, the center screw BS, and the right screw BS described above are used to attach the reel unit RU to the base BU. FIG. 69B is a front view showing the entire screw BS. As this screw BS, one having a total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 69B) shorter than the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE (see FIG. 69A) is used (of the screw BS). Total length BL <Distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS (for example, the right screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it is shorter than between the full detection electrodes DE. Are not connected to the full detection electrode DE (the screw BS is not caught by the two full detection electrodes DE). The total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. FIG. 69A is a plan view of the back side portion of the medal auxiliary tank HS showing a state in which the full detection electrode DE protrudes into the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<< Relationship between the length HR of the bearing surface of the screw BS and the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE >>
The radial length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS (see FIG. 69B) is shorter than the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE (see FIG. 69A) (in the radial direction of the seat surface of the screw BS). Length HR <diameter ED of full detection electrode DE). By doing in this way, even if the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS is not caught by one full detection electrode DE, and the screw BS Even when the BS is in contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be removed immediately, and the bis BS alone will not conduct by accident.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 69C, one full detection electrode DE of the two full detection electrodes DE (for example, the right full detection electrode DE in FIG. 69C) has already been stored. When in contact with the medal (uppermost portion UL), the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the left side of FIG. 69C) and the screw BS are in temporary contact. Even if such a case occurs, the screw BS is not hooked on the full detection electrode DE, and the screw BS can be immediately detached from the full detection electrode DE (see arrow F in FIG. 69 (c)). The conduction circuit is not formed via the screw BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS is not erroneously determined.

  In this example, the case where the reel unit RU is an integrated unit that accommodates all three reels has been described. However, even when the reel unit RU is a separate unit that separately accommodates each of the three reels, the screw BS Therefore, the possibility that the screw BS is detached and the screw BS is detached similarly arises. For this reason, configurations such as the medal auxiliary tank HS and the screw BS can be similarly adopted.

<< Configuration of reel band >>
FIG. 70A is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. FIG. 70 (b) is a perspective view showing a state where the reel band MO is curved. FIG. 70 (c) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the cut M59 of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. FIG. 70 (d) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the “white seven” symbol in an enlarged manner. The “white seven” symbol is a bonus symbol, and “white seven, white seven, white seven” is stopped and displayed on the active line, and BB is started. The reel band MO has a thin plate-like long shape (band shape). As described above, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the reel band MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO has flexibility and can be curved. Moreover, it has translucency and a design can be illuminated from the back by the light emitted from the rotator backlight.

  The reel band MO has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction. The first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57 are curved so as to face each other and are attached to the reel frame MW to form an annular (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW is mainly composed of two annular frames of the same size, and the two frames are formed of a resin such as plastic to reduce the weight. The two frames are arranged in parallel with each other so that both centers are located on the same rotation axis. Further, the interval between the two frames is arranged to be substantially the same as the width of the reel band MO. The reel M50 can be formed by sticking the reel band MO between the two frames along the outer periphery of the two frames.

<Superimposed portion M58 and cut M59>
The reel band MO is formed such that the length in the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO is slightly longer than the entire length of the reel frame MW. For this reason, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion where the reel band MO partially overlaps near the first end M55 and the second end M57 (overlapping portion M58) is generated. In this way, the reel band MO can be attached over the entire circumference of the reel frame MW without causing a gap along the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). Further, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a part of the reel band MO overlaps, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (c), the reel band MO is attached to the upper side of the second end M57, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55. When the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW in this way, first, when the reel band MO is started to be pasted, it starts to be pasted from the second end M57 to the reel frame MW, and then the reel frame MW is reeled. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of M50, the reel band MO is pasted along the circumference of the reel frame MW from the second end M57 toward the first end M55. The reel band MO is pasted on the upper side of the second end M57, and the pasting up to the first end M55 is completed. When the reel band MO is pasted in this order, the first end M55 ends pasting in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the first end M55 is placed on the reel band MO. The part M55 is overlapped.

  On the other hand, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then the reel band MO is gradually rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, while the reel band MO is moved to the first end. Affixing along the circumference of the reel frame MW from the M55 toward the second end M57, and finally sticking the reel band MO on the upper side of the first end M55 to the second end M57. End. When the reel band MO is pasted in this order, the second end M57 is finished pasting in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the second end part is placed on the reel band MO. M57 is overlapped.

  Here, the reel band MO starts to be pasted from the first end M55 to the reel frame MW, and then the second end M57 is pasted in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the reel band MO is placed on the reel band MO. When the second end M57 is overlapped, when the game is executed and the reel M50 rotates, the air contacts the cross section of the second end M57 (the air resistance is large). Then, air easily enters between the second end M57 and the lower reel band MO, and the reel band MO in the vicinity of the second end M57 is gradually peeled off.

  On the other hand, the reel band MO starts to be pasted from the second end M57 to the reel frame MW, and then the first end M55 is pasted in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50. In the case where the first end M55 is overlaid, when the game is executed and the reel M50 is rotated, the second end M57 is overlaid on the reel band MO described above. In comparison with the first end M55, the air is less likely to contact the cross section of the first end M55 (air resistance is small), the air is less likely to enter between the first end M55 and the lower reel band MO, The reel band MO in the vicinity of the first end M55 is in a state where it is difficult to peel off.

  From the above, when the reel band MO is stuck to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO starts to be stuck to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50. It is preferable that the first end portion M55 is overlapped on the reel band MO after being pasted in the direction.

<Various errors>
Thus, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the overlapping portion M58 is formed between the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57, and the first end portion M55 or the second end portion M57. A cut M59 is formed by any one of the end portions M57. Since the reel frame MW described above is formed of a resin such as plastic, an error may occur during molding. Further, there are cases where errors occur due to deformation when assembling the reel frame MW. Furthermore, since the reel band MO is flexible, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO is attached in a state where the reel band MO is distorted or the size of the reel frame MW ( In some cases, the outer periphery is attached with a slightly different design value. When a large symbol (for example, “white seven”) is positioned on the reel band MO on the lower side of the overlapping portion M58, the mounting position of the reel band MO is desired because of these various errors. It is also assumed that the large symbol is covered by the upper reel band MO because the upper reel band MO of the overlapping portion M58 overlaps with the large symbol when the position deviates from the position.

  In addition, the player may aim at the bonus symbol depending on the gaming state. When the bonus symbol is arranged near the cut line M59, the player may aim at the bonus symbol. When the bonus symbol is stopped, the break M59 may be visually recognized when the bonus symbol is visually recognized. When various errors as described above have occurred, it is assumed that not only the symbol but also the shift of the cut M59 and the symbol position are caused to be visually recognized by the player. When the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol combination, since it is a symbol combination that is highly profitable for the player, the player will pay attention to the bonus symbol with joy. If the user sees a shift in the position of the symbol, there is a possibility that the pleasure that the symbol combination as a bonus symbol is stopped and displayed is reduced.

<Bonus design>
In order to prevent this, a symbol smaller than the largest symbol such as a bonus symbol is arranged at a position closest to the cut M59. Specifically, when the length in the longitudinal direction of a symbol (such as a bonus symbol) having the longest length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LL, the length in the longitudinal direction is greater than LL. A short symbol (length SL in the longitudinal direction) is arranged at a position closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

  Thus, even if various errors occur by arranging the symbols having a short length in the longitudinal direction at positions closest to the first end M55 and the second end M57, The symbol can be arranged at a position separated from the overlapping portion M58 (cut M59), and the symbol can be prevented from being covered by the reel band MO. Furthermore, even when the above-described various errors occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the shift of the cut line M59 and the shift of the symbol position. In the figure, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bell symbol (the symbol that can constitute the symbol combination corresponding to the bell) and the length in the longitudinal direction of the cherry symbol (the symbol that can constitute the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry) Although it is illustrated as the same SL, if the length of the bonus symbol (white seven) is shorter than the length LL, the length of the bell symbol is different from the length of the cherry symbol in the longitudinal direction. There is no problem. Also, the symbols arranged in the vicinity of the cut M59 are not limited to the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, and may not be a bonus symbol. For example, a replay symbol (a symbol combination that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to replay). Or a watermelon symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to a watermelon) may be arranged in the vicinity of the cut line M59. In this example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bonus symbol (white seven) is compared with the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (for example, the bell symbol) located in the vicinity of the cut M59. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The length in the short direction of the bonus symbol (white seven) may be longer than the length in the short direction of the symbol (for example, bell symbol) located near the cut line M59.

  In the example described above, the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol having the longest length in the longitudinal direction (such as a bonus symbol) is LL, and the length SL in the longitudinal direction of the symbol whose longitudinal length is shorter than LL. The arrangement of the symbols was determined by comparing the two, but the length in the short direction (direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LT and the short length of the symbols is shorter in the short direction than LT. The arrangement of symbols may be determined by comparison with the direction length ST.

  The lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction described above are the lengths of differences between the symbol portion that protrudes most upward and the symbol portion that protrudes most downward in the longitudinal direction. Similarly, the lengths LT and ST in the short-side direction are the lengths of the difference between the portion of the symbol that protrudes most upward and the portion of the symbol that protrudes most downward in the short-side direction.

<For small roles>
In addition to bonus symbols, watermelon symbols, cherry symbols, and other symbols that are not displayed on the active line depending on the operation timing of the stop button, in other words, they are placed more than the maximum number of sliding frames. A symbol that has at least one location (a symbol corresponding to a rare role, a symbol that may be missed, etc.) is also a symbol that is a target of the game, and a symbol that the player wants to visually recognize It is. Also, in a game where a rare role is won, there may be cases where the winning of the rare role is not notified before the stop button is operated. In such a case, the player wants to win the rare role, so the rarest In many cases, the stop button is operated at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button that is easy to acquire a combination (which is most profitable for the player). There are some gaming machines that have a lot of winning combinations, such as a single payout number when winning a prize. In such a case, the operation timing (operation of the stop button, which is the most profitable for the player) In many cases, the stop button is operated. Note that the operation of the stop button at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button, which is the most profitable for the player, may be referred to as an optimal gaming method.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when the game is executed by the optimal game method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the effective lines are the left reel upper stage, middle reel upper stage, right reel upper stage (upper straight line), left reel middle stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel middle stage (middle straight line), Left reel lower stage, middle reel lower stage, right reel lower stage (lower straight line), left reel upper stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel lower stage (lower right straight line), left reel lower stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel upper stage (upward straight line) ), And the prescribed number is three. In addition, as a rare role, there are a watermelon role and a cherry role, and when the watermelon role wins, “Watermelon / Watermelon / Watermelon” is displayed in a straight line on the active line, and the cherry role wins Is configured such that “cherry, any, any” (any indicates that any symbol may be displayed) is stopped and displayed in a straight line on the active line. Further, since both the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol are rare, the symbol has at least one location that is spaced apart by more than the maximum number of sliding frames.

  FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. In the figure, only the left reel is illustrated. In the example shown in FIG. 71, watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, cherry are arranged in this order on the reel band MO, and these symbols are located away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. Is arranged. When a player wins a rare role, the player often operates a stop button aiming at a position on the reel where it is easy to detect the winning of the rare role and easily win the rare role. When a certain watermelon role or cherry role is won, the rare role can be won by playing with the above-described optimal game method. Specifically, as the operation timing of the stop button that can win the rare role, it stops between 3 frames from the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the upper stage to the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the lower stage By operating the buttons, you can win if you win either the watermelon role or the cherry role. When the stop button is operated at such an operation timing (optimum game method), the range of nine frames from the upper part of the cherry symbol to the lower part of the watermelon symbol is the range that can be stopped and displayed. Thus, even when any range of the nine frames is stopped and displayed (any of the nine stop display modes), the position away from the first end M55 and the second end M57 (There are no cuts M59 near the symbols placed on the top of the two watermelons, and there are no cuts M59 near the symbols placed below the two frames of the cherry.) It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing a shift in the position of the symbol or the symbol.

  As shown in the figure, when the stop button is operated to aim at a position on the reel where it is easy to win the rare role, a symbol that can be stopped and displayed is in the vicinity of the first end M55 and the second end M57. It is possible to prevent the first end M55 and the second end M57 from being positioned at positions where frequent stop display is performed on the reel. Even in the case where there is a deviation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the deviation of the cut line M59 or the deviation of the position of the symbol.

  In this example, the number of steps for one revolution of the reel is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, since 336/20 = 16 remainder 16, there are 16 frames of 17 steps (symbols) and 4 frames of 16 steps (symbols) as 20 frames (symbols). The reel is structured. In addition, since it is better and better to configure the cut M59 so that it is not visible to the player as much as possible, the frame (symbol) adjacent to the cut M59 should be 16 steps with relatively few steps. Is preferred.

  In addition, it is not necessary to insert and pay out substantial game medals used in a general swing type gaming machine as a configuration of the spinning type gaming machine in this example, and use a pseudo-game media that is converted into data. It may be configured to allow the game to proceed. In addition, in such a configuration, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the revolving game machine is increased by the amount that does not require insertion / withdrawal of a substantial game medal (for example, a game medal insertion opening Or having no payout opening, and the front door and back box are integrated, etc., to close the gap where foreign objects are inserted), reducing the risk of unauthorized gaming medals being used, It can be configured to improve the security against such illegal acts (so-called goto acts) (sometimes referred to as an encapsulated revolving game machine). In addition, it is supplemented that the configuration of the encapsulated spinning cylinder game machine is applicable to any of the above-described embodiments (or configurations). The credit and the credit number display device D200 may not be provided. For example, the credit and the total score (total score) are collected as one total score, and the main control board M and the payout control are combined. The total score increase / decrease process and the display process may be executed on the board H (also referred to as game value control board or game value control means) or other board.

In addition, it corresponds to a substantial game medal used in a general swing type game machine, and has a “score” as a pseudo game medium used for playing a game with an encapsulated type game machine. It may be configured. The “score” may be referred to as “score information”, “score score”, “score information”, “game value”, and “game value information”. A physical game medal that physically exists can be handled and handled directly by the player. On the other hand, in the encased type of spinning machine, the player can advance the game without directly handling the actual game medal. The score is not a substantial game medal but a pseudo game medium that is converted into data so that a CPU such as a main control board can perform arithmetic processing. The “credit” is a score for temporarily storing a betable state or a payable state among the scores, and is data managed mainly by the main control board M. Further, the “total score” is all the scores that can be input to the encapsulated spinning machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The “total score” corresponds to the number of game medals placed on a medal tray of a general revolving game machine using substantial game medals. In addition, when applying the configuration of the encapsulated spinning cylinder game machine to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as “game medal” in this specification is referred to as “score”, “score information”, “ There is no problem handling it as “score”, “score information”, “game value”, “game value information”, etc., and “score”, “score information”, “score”, “score information” as appropriate There is no problem in naming them as “game value” and “game value information”. It is not necessary to have “credit”. It is also possible to replace the credit number display device as a total score display device.

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the state relating to AT that is advantageous to the player is configured to have the state during AT, etc., and in the state during AT (so-called AT), the push order navigation is executed, thereby the state advantageous to the player. Although the fun of the game is improved, the configuration of the gaming machine capable of executing AT is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, a configuration of a spinning machine that can execute AT different from the configuration of the present embodiment will be described as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment in the figure is step 4100 (second) and step 4200 (second), that is, after executing the above-described conditional device number management processing in step 1450, step 4100 (second). In 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a rotation start freeze execution determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

  In step 1750, after executing the above-described AT state start control process, in step 4200 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a stop-time freeze execution determination process described later. Transition. Although details will be described later, in the second embodiment, the freeze occurs when the reel starts rotating (when the start lever D50 is operated) and when the reel stops (when the final reel stops or when the third reel stops). (The reel does not start rotating for a predetermined time, and a bet operation relating to the next game for a predetermined time cannot be executed).

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the rotation start freeze execution determination process according to the subroutine of step 4100 (second) in FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT has newly changed from the game to the “AT state”. Here, “newly in the AT state” means that the state related to the AT becomes the “AT state” for the first time after winning the AT lottery (may also be referred to as the first AT hit), As an example, (1) BB wins in “high probability state” → Transition to “Interesting BB internal state” → BB symbol (bonus symbol) stops and transitions to “Advantageous BB state” → BB Ends and newly transitions to “AT state”, (2) If the cherry is won in “High probability state”, the AT lottery is won by 1/2, and after winning the AT lottery, the sign state { It is a state related to AT that gives players a sense of expectation regarding whether or not they have won the AT lottery, and even if they are not won the AT lottery related to the winning of Cherry, “Gase sign state” which is the production mode (background production, etc.) If it is configured to shift to “It may be configured to have a｝”, the cherry is won in the “high probability state”, and the AT lottery based on the winning of the cherry is won. A game state transition such as a new transition to the “AT state” occurs because the predetermined number of games that are the end condition of the “precursor state” has been executed, corresponds to “newly in the AT state”. . On the other hand, as an example of a case where it does not correspond to “newly in AT state”, (1) staying in “AT state” → AT counter value becomes 0, so “AT continued battle state” { Transition to “a state where there is a possibility of transitioning to“ AT state ”again” → transition to “AT state” again, (2) winning BB in “AT state” → “ The game state transition such as “Transition to advantageous BB internal state” → BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, “Advantageous BB state” is transitioned to → BB is terminated, and “AT state is reentered”. Will not fall under "AT state during."

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4102, in step 4104, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the AT start freeze execution flag (a flag that will be executed when reel rotation starts by turning on) ) Next, in step 4106, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the AT start freeze execution command (command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives the command, the sub control board S side receives the command. Then, the AT start effect will be executed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). Even in the case of No in step 4102, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). The freeze illustrated in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if it is configured to have various types of freezes (execution conditions and execution time).

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of reel rotation start preparation processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1568 (second) to step 1574 (second), that is, in step 1568 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M has the AT start freeze execution flag turned on. It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 1568 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the AT start freeze execution flag in step 1570 (second). Next, in step 1572 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a freeze execution timer (a decrement timer, which is a decrement timer, which is executed when the “AT state” is newly entered) and “AT A timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze that is executed when the “medium state” ends, and the freeze execution time at the start time (in this example, 5 seconds, newly “AT state”) The execution time of the freeze executed in this case is set to start the timer, and the process proceeds to step 1574 (second). Next, in step 1574 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer has become zero. In the case of Yes in step 1574 (second), the process proceeds to step 1552. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1574 (second), the process of step 1574 (second) is repeatedly executed until the execution time of the freeze at the start of the “AT state” starts. Note that if the answer is No in step 1568 (second), the process proceeds to step 1552.

  As described above, the second embodiment is configured such that a freeze (sometimes referred to as a freeze at the start of AT) is executed when the “AT state” is newly started, and details will be described later. However, during the freeze execution, the AT start effect is executed on the sub-control board S side. In this example, the execution time of the freeze at the start of AT is set to 5 seconds. In this example, the freeze execution time at the end of AT, which will be described later, is 3 seconds, and the freeze execution time at the start of AT is longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT. Has been. In this way, by setting the freeze execution time at the start of AT, which will be advantageous to the player in the future, to be relatively longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT, It can be a high gaming machine.

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the stop-time freeze execution determination process according to the subroutine of Step 4200 (second) in FIG. 75 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value is newly 0 in the game. “AT counter value is newly 0” is a case where the AT counter value is “1 → 0” in a situation where the AT counter value is subtracted, such as “AT in progress”. This does not include the case where the AT counter value is always 0, such as the situation where the state relating to AT is “normal gaming state”.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4202, the process proceeds to step 4206. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4202, in step 4204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the advantageous section remaining game number counter value has newly become 0 in the game. “Advantageous section remaining game number counter value is newly set to 0” means that the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is subtracted from the advantageous section remaining game number counter value such as “AT state”. This is a case of “1 → 0”, and does not include the case where the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is always 0, such as a situation where the state relating to AT is “normal game state”. If Yes in step 4204, the process proceeds to step 4206. Next, in step 4206, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the freeze execution timer (which is a decrement timer, which is executed when the “AT state” is newly set) and the “AT state”. Freeze execution time at the end (in this example, 3 seconds, the freeze that is executed when the “AT state” ends) Set the execution time) and start the timer. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the AT end freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command, so that the sub control board S side receives the command. Then, the AT end effect will be executed), and the process proceeds to step 4210. Next, in step 4210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer is zero. In the case of Yes in step 4210, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4210, the process of step 4210 is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the end of the “AT state” ends. In the case of No in step 4204, the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 76 is an AT start effect execution image diagram in the second embodiment. In the same figure, an example of a case where a power cut does not occur during execution of an AT start effect and a case where a power cut occurs will be described in detail.

  First, in (a) in the figure, a detailed description will be given of a case where a power interruption does not occur during execution of an AT start effect. First, when the start lever D50 relating to a game in which the state relating to the AT is newly set to the “AT state” is operated (the game start condition is satisfied), the AT start effect is started and the freeze is executed. Is done. Also, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, “warp execution!” Is displayed for 1 second on the effect display device S40 (while the AT start effect is being executed, a background effect exclusively for executing the AT start effect is always executed). . In this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and the freeze is 5 seconds. Thereafter, one second has elapsed from the start of the freeze, and the display of “Warp execution!” Is erased in the effect display device S40. Note that the state where only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. Thereafter, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the execution of the freeze, “AT50G START !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 1 second as the effect mode of the AT start effect. Thereafter, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the freeze execution, the execution of the freeze is terminated, the execution of the AT start effect is terminated, and the rotation of the reel is started. When the execution of the AT start effect is finished, the display of “AT50G START !!!!” on the effect display device S40 is deleted, and the AT effect is displayed from the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect. It will be switched to possible background effects. Also, when the above-described push order navigation is executed in the first game in the AT state, (1) Freeze starts execution → Freeze ends after 5 seconds have passed → Reel starts rotating and effects The display device S40 displays the push order navigation, (2) the freeze starts execution, the freeze ends when 5 seconds have passed, the reel starts rotating, the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, and the effect display device S40 It may be configured such that the push order navigation is displayed. With this configuration, even when the reel rotation start timing becomes later than the conventional timing due to the execution of freeze, the player erroneously operates the stop button corresponding to the pressing order different from the correct pressing order. Can be prevented.

  Next, the case where a power interruption occurs during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail in FIG. First, when the start lever D50 relating to a game in which the state relating to the AT is newly set to the “AT state” is operated (the game start condition is satisfied), the AT start effect is started and the freeze is executed. Is done. Also, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, “warp execution!” Is displayed for 1 second on the effect display device S40 (while the AT start effect is being executed, a background effect exclusively for executing the AT start effect is always executed). . In this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and the freeze is 5 seconds (excluding the time when the power is off). Thereafter, one second has elapsed from the start of the freeze, and the display of “Warp execution!” Is erased in the effect display device S40. Note that the state where only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. Thereafter, when 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the freeze, a power failure occurs (for example, a power failure occurs at a game arcade). Thereafter, when the power is restored, “AT50G START !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 3 seconds, and the freeze is still executed. After that, when the total time from the start of the freeze, except when the power is turned off, is 5 seconds, the freeze is finished and the AT start effect is finished, and the reel starts to rotate. It will be. As described above, in this example, when a power interruption occurs during execution of a freeze (during execution of an AT start effect) and then recovers from the power interruption, the execution time of the freeze is from the state before the occurrence of the power interruption. It will be executed continuously. As an example, if the freeze execution time is 5 seconds and the power is cut off 1 second after the start of the freeze execution, the freeze will be executed for 4 seconds after the power is restored. If the power is cut off after 3 seconds from the start, the freeze is executed for 2 seconds after the power is restored.

  Also, the execution time of the AT start effect is the same as the execution time of the freeze, and when the power interruption occurs during the execution of the AT start effect and then returns from the power interruption, the execution time of the AT start effect is It will be executed continuously from the state before the occurrence. On the other hand, the effect mode of the AT start effect is different between the case where the power interruption occurs during the execution of the AT start effect and the case where the power interruption does not occur. Specifically, during the execution of the AT start effect, When power is not cut off, “AT50G START !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40 at the timing when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of execution of the AT start effect, while the AT start effect is being executed. In the case where the power interruption occurs, “AT50G START !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40 after returning from the power interruption regardless of the occurrence timing of the power interruption. The display “AT50G START !!!!” may be referred to as an AT start game number display. Further, in the same figure, as the AT start game number display, it is illustrated that the AT remaining game number at the start of AT (at the start of the AT state) is 50 games, but the display mode is However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the “advantageous BB state” executed immediately before the transition to the AT state is performed and the lottery can be executed by adding the number of AT games, the AT in the “advantageous BB state” It is configured to display the number of AT remaining games obtained by adding the number of remaining games acquired in the lottery in addition to the number of games on the AT initial game number 50 games on the effect display device S40 as an AT start game number display. Also good. As an example, when the AT remaining game number of 30 games is acquired by adding the number of AT games in the “advantageous BB state” by lottery, “AT80G START !!” is displayed as the AT start game number display. May be. In the figure, only the AT start effect is illustrated, but the AT end effect is similarly produced in the case of the AT end effect when the power is cut off during the execution of the AT end effect and when the power is cut off. (For example, in the case where the power interruption does not occur during the execution of the AT end effect, “AT end GET OO” is 2 seconds after the start of the AT end effect.) On the other hand, if the power is cut off during execution of the AT end effect, “AT end GET OO” is displayed after the return from the power cut regardless of the timing of the power cut. Also, an effect that is displayed during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, and an effect that is displayed immediately after the power is turned off when the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect. If it is, the display is not limited to the number of games at the start of AT, and there is no problem as long as the game can be smoothly progressed by being visible to the player.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed when the state is newly shifted to the AT state and when the AT state ends. The AT start effect is executed during the freeze execution when the state is newly shifted to the AT state, and the AT end effect is executed during the freeze execution when the AT state ends. In such a configuration, if a power interruption occurs during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, the display is scheduled to be displayed at a predetermined timing in the AT start effect or the AT end effect after the power is restored. By configuring the display so that it is displayed immediately after the power is restored, even if an unintentional power interruption (for example, a power failure at a game arcade) occurs during the freeze, By configuring so that the player can immediately display information necessary for grasping the game situation, a situation in which the player cannot grasp the game situation can be prevented.

  In the second embodiment, it is configured that the freeze can be executed when the state is newly shifted to the AT state and when the AT state ends, but the execution mode of the freeze is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed at the start of BB, at the end of BB, or the like, or may be configured to be executed based on a winning condition device or a staying gaming state.

In addition, from the configuration relating to the freeze in the above-described spinning cylinder gaming machine according to this example,
Freeze execution period when power failure does not occur during freeze execution = A
If the power is cut off during the freeze, the freeze execution period until the power is cut off = B
Freeze execution period after a power failure occurs when a power failure occurs during freeze execution = C
If
A = B + C
It is comprised so that.

  When the freeze related to the AT start effect is finished, the reel acceleration process described above is executed.

<<<<< Configuration 2 applicable to this example >>>>
The configuration applicable to the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. Any configuration described in detail below can be applied to all the embodiments described above, and one configuration described in detail below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations detailed below may be applied. I will supplement what you may do.

<<< Configuration of lamp unit >>>
First, with reference to FIG. 77 and FIG. 78, a detailed description will be given of a configuration relating to lighting of a lamp unit (a general term for the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10) applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example.

  FIG. 77 is a lamp unit lighting configuration image. In the same figure, the structure regarding lighting of the lamp unit applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. It should be noted that each item shown in the figure is a partial excerpt, and for example, the items shown in the column of element 1 are not limited to only eight items of “red” to “no color”. First, as shown in FIG. 77, there are six types of elements 1 to 6 as elements relating to lighting of the lamp unit.

<Element 1>
Element 1 is a lighting color, and “red”, “blue”, “green”, “white”, “red + green”, “blue + green”, “blue + white”, “no color” 8 Various kinds of lighting colors are included as element 1. The lamp unit according to this example is composed of a plurality of LEDs. When the lighting color is “red”, it indicates that all LEDs are lit in red, and the lighting color is “red + blue”. ”Indicates that M LEDs are lit in red and L LEDs are lit in blue among N LEDs, which is the total number of LEDs (N = M + L). . Note that the combination of the order of the LEDs that are lit in red and the LEDs that are lit in blue may be only one or a plurality of combinations. A plurality of lighting colors such as “red + blue 1” and “red + blue 2” may be provided). Further, “no color” indicates light extinction (non-lighting), and is a lighting color selected when the light is always off. As described above, the number of items constituting the elements 1 to 6 in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and the element 1 has three or more colors such as “red + blue + green”. There is no problem even if it is configured to have a combined lighting color.

<Element 2>
Element 2 is the lighting time, which is “0.1 seconds”, “0.2 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “1 second”, “3 seconds”, “always”, “no light” Seven types of lighting times are included as element 2. Note that “always” is a lighting time selected when the lighting is always on, and “no lighting” is a lighting time selected when the lighting is always off.

<Element 3>
Element 3 is the light-off time, and is “0.1 second”, “0.2 second”, “0.3 second”, “1 second”, “3 seconds”, “always”, “no light off” Seven types of turn-off times are included as element 3. Note that “always” is a lighting time that is selected when the light is always off, and “no light is off” is a light-off time that is selected when the light is always lighted.

<Element 4>
The element 4 is a lighting time pattern, and the lighting time pattern is configured by combining the lighting time as the element 2 and the extinguishing time as the element 3, and “lights for 0.1 seconds → 0.1 seconds. "Lights off", "Lights for 0.1 second-> Lights off for 0.3 seconds", "Lights on for 0.2 seconds-> Lights off for 0.3 seconds", "Lights on for 1 second-> Lights off for 0.1 seconds", "Lights on for 3 seconds-> 0. 7 types of lighting time patterns of “3 seconds off”, “always on”, and “always off” are included as element 4. As an example of the lighting time pattern, in the case of “lighting for 0.1 seconds → lighting for 0.1 seconds”, the lighting time of “0.1 seconds” as the element 2 and the lighting time of “0.1 seconds” as the element 3 It is configured by combining time. Note that “always on” is a lighting time pattern that is selected in the case of always lighting, and is configured by combining the “always” lighting time that is element 2 and the unlighting time that is “no light extinction” that is element 3. Has been. “Always off” is a lighting time pattern that is selected when the light is always off, and is configured by combining the lighting time of “no lighting” that is element 2 and the lighting time of “always” that is element 3 Has been.

<Element 5>
The element 5 is a lighting element, and the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color as the element 1 and the lighting time pattern as the element 4. In other words, the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color as element 1, the lighting time as element 2, and the extinguishing time as element 3. In the figure, for convenience of explanation, the specific contents of the lighting elements are shown as the lighting element contents, and the identification elements distributed for each lighting element content are shown as the lighting element types. As a lighting element,
Lighting element type a: “0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds off”
Lighting element type b: “0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off”
Lighting element type c: “0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.3 seconds off”
Lighting element type d: “0.1 seconds red + blue lighting → 0.3 seconds off”
Lighting element type e: “0.2 seconds red + blue lighting → 0.3 seconds off”
Lighting element type f: “0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off”
Lighting element type g: “white lighting for 1 second → lighting for 0.1 second”
Lighting element type h: “1 second blue + white lighting → 0.1 second off”
Lighting element type i: “3-second green lighting → 0.3 second off”
Lighting element type j: “3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off”
Lighting element type k: “Always red”
Lighting element type l: “Always light blue”
Lighting element type m: “Always green”
Lighting element type n: “Always white lighting”
Lighting element type o: “always red + green lighting”
Lighting element type p: “always blue + green lighting”
Lighting element type q: “Always blue + white lighting”
Lighting element type r: “always off (no color)”
18 kinds of lighting elements are provided as element 5. As an example of the lighting element, in the case of “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off”, element 1 “red” and element 4 “0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second off” A lighting time pattern (as described above, the lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time and a light-off time) is combined. The “always red + green lighting” is configured by combining “red + green” that is element 1 and “always lighting” that is element 4. Further, “always off (no color)” is configured by combining “no color” as element 1 and “always off” as element 4.

<Element 6>
The element 6 has a lighting pattern, and is configured by combining one or a plurality of lighting elements as the element 5. In the figure, for the convenience of explanation, the specific content of the lighting pattern is shown as the lighting pattern content, and the identification elements distributed for each lighting pattern content are shown as the lighting pattern type. As lighting pattern,
Pattern 1: “a → a → a → a”
Pattern 2: “b → b → b → b”
Pattern 3: “a → b → a → b”
Pattern 4: “a → a → g → g”
Pattern 5: “g → f → j”
Pattern 6: “i → h → b”
Pattern 7: “g → f → b”
Pattern 8: “i → j → g”
Pattern 9: “g → g → g”
Pattern 10: “k”
Pattern 11: “l”
Pattern 12: “m”
Pattern 13: “n”
Pattern 14: “o”
Pattern 15: “p”
Pattern 16: “q”
Pattern 17: “r”
17 types of lighting patterns are provided as element 6. As an example of the lighting pattern, in the case of pattern 1: “a → a → a → a”, the element 5 “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” is repeated four times. In the case of pattern 8 “i → j → g”, the lighting element type i: “3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” is executed, and then the lighting element type j: “3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0 .3 seconds off ”and the lighting element type g:“ 1 second white lighting → 0.1 seconds off ”is executed. The lamp unit may be turned on by further combining lighting patterns, such as pattern 1 → pattern 4, or “pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 →... “Pattern 1 → Pattern 4” may be turned on repeatedly until the lighting end condition is satisfied. Note that the lighting end condition may be satisfied when a game situation such as a predetermined error cancellation is changed, or may be configured when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  As described above, the lamp unit in the gaming machine according to the present example is configured to be lit by a combination of lighting patterns, the lighting pattern of element 6 is configured by a combination of lighting elements of element 5, and element 5 The lighting element of is composed of a combination of the lighting color of element 1 and the lighting time pattern of element 4, and the lighting time pattern of element 4 is composed of a combination of the lighting time of element 2 and the lighting time of element 3 Has been.

  In addition, although it explained in full detail that it comprised from the element 1-the element 6 as a structure which concerns on lighting of a lamp unit, it is not limited to this, The number of elements may be increased / decreased, and the element 1-element 6 May be changed (for example, the element 1 is turned on).

  Next, FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode. In the figure, a lighting pattern of a lamp unit (sometimes referred to as a lamp unit lighting pattern) applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example, a lighting mode of a rotating backlight S30 (also referred to as a back lamp lighting mode). And an example of the configuration of each game situation regarding the sound output from the speaker S20 (also referred to as speaker sound). It should be noted that each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and for example, the lighting pattern executed during BB execution is not limited to one type of pattern 7, but the type of BB (conditions related to BB) Depending on the type of device) and the gaming state won for BB, the lighting pattern may be different, and in one BB, a lighting mode (lighting cycle) combining a plurality of lighting patterns is repeatedly executed until BB ends. It supplements that it may constitute so. Further, as an example of the error, a medal empty error is illustrated as an example, but the lighting pattern of the lamp unit may be different depending on the type of error. In all of the configurations 1 to 6, in the normal game (no error is occurring, not immediately after the power is turned on, the standby screen is not displayed, the setting check mode is not set, and the setting change mode is not set, The lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected in the situation where the bonus is not being executed) is any one of pattern 2, pattern 5, pattern 6, pattern 7, pattern 8, pattern 9, pattern 11, pattern 15, pattern 16, and pattern 17. Or a combination of one or more. In addition, since it has comprised so that it may have various game states, such as a low probability state and an AT state state, during a normal game, you may make the lighting pattern of the lamp unit which can be selected according to a game state differ. In other words, it may be configured to have a lighting pattern that is not selected in a specific gaming state or a lighting pattern that can be selected only in a specific gaming state. The power-on state is a state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses (immediately after the power is turned on).

<< Configuration 1 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with a relatively small light amount (smaller light amount than the normal light amount) Speaker sound: Loops a special sound during the occurrence of a medal sky error (repeated playback) until the error is cleared
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: A dedicated sound is output for a specified time when the power is turned on.
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <In setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 12 (always green)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound in setting confirmation mode <In setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 9 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off” is repeated three times)
Back lamp lighting mode: extinguished Speaker sound: dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("white lighting for 1 second → off for 0.1 seconds" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds Off ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loop dedicated sound during BB execution (repeated playback)
It is configured as described above. In addition, you may comprise so that the effect performed at the time of power activation may differ with the effect performed before the power-off occurred, and the game state before the power-off occurs.

  As in Configuration 1, it is configured so that only different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit during the occurrence of an error such as when a medal empty error occurs and during the normal game, and as the lighting color constituting the lighting pattern The red color is used when a medal empty error occurs, while the red color is not used during normal games (the predetermined lighting color is selected only when an error occurs), so that the player or manager can The case where an error has occurred and the case where no error has occurred can be easily discriminated, so that the business of the game hall and the progress of the game can be made smooth. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns immediately after power-on and during normal games, the player or manager can easily distinguish between power-on and normal games It is possible to smoothly operate the game hall and progress the game. In addition, there is no misunderstanding that an error has occurred in spite of a normal game, the player can proceed with the game without stress, and the administrator can clearly identify the gaming machine in which the error has occurred. It becomes. In addition, by configuring different lighting patterns for the lamp unit between the standby screen display and the normal game, the player and the administrator can easily display the standby screen and the normal game. It is possible to discriminate, and it is possible to smoothly operate the game hall and progress the game. In addition, while the standby screen is displayed, power consumption due to the use of a flashy lighting pattern can be suppressed even though the player is not playing a game. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns during the setting check mode and during normal games, it is easy for players and administrators to switch between the setting check mode and normal games. It is possible to discriminate, and it is possible to smoothly operate the game hall and progress the game. In addition, an unintended setting check mode can be immediately determined by the administrator, and an unintended setting check mode can be quickly determined, and even if the setting key switch is forgotten, it can be detected. can do. In addition, by configuring different lighting patterns for the lamp unit between the setting change mode and the normal game, it is easy for the player or administrator to change between the setting change mode and the normal game. It is possible to discriminate, and it is possible to smoothly operate the game hall and progress the game. In addition, a setting change mode that is not intended by the administrator can be immediately determined, and a setting change mode that is not intended can be quickly determined. In addition, by configuring different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit between the BB execution and the normal game (the state where the BB is not being executed), the player or the administrator can execute the BB execution and the normal game. Medium (a state where BB is not being executed) can be easily determined, and the player or manager can clearly determine the game situation.

  In addition, as described above, the difference between the occurrence of an error relating to the lamp unit and the normal game, the difference between immediately after turning on the power and the normal game, the difference between the display of the standby screen and the normal game, setting The difference between the confirmation mode and the normal game, the difference between the setting change mode and the normal game, and the difference between the BB execution and the normal game are as follows. 1), or may be configured to have a lighting time (element 2) that is not used during a normal game, or may be configured to have a light-off time (element 3) that is not used during a normal game. Alternatively, it may be configured to have a lighting time pattern (element 4) that is not used during a normal game, or may be configured to have a lighting element (element 5) that is not used during a normal game. And it may be configured to have unused lighting patterns (element 6) during normal game.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loops a special sound during medal empty error occurrence until error is canceled (repeated playback)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no color))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights in a dedicated pattern while the standby screen is displayed (flashes)
Speaker sound: No output <In setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <In setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 ("white lighting for 1 second → off for 0.1 seconds" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds Off ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loop dedicated sound during BB execution (repeated playback)
It is configured as described above.

<< Configuration 3 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (Repeat “red for 0.1 seconds → turn off for 0.1 seconds” four times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loops a special sound during medal empty error occurrence until error is canceled (repeated playback)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white light → 0.1 second light off” → “0.2 second blue + green light → 0.3 second light off” → “3 second green light → 0.3 second light off” )
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <In setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <In setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 (“green for 3 seconds → lights for 0.3 seconds” → “blue light for 1 second + lights for white → lights for 0.1 seconds” → “lights for blue for 0.1 seconds → lights for 0.1 seconds” )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loop dedicated sound during BB execution (repeated playback)
It is configured as described above.

<< Configuration 4 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 14 (always red + green lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loops a special sound during medal empty error occurrence until error is canceled (repeated playback)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 (“0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second blue lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second Off ”→“ 0.1 seconds blue light on → 0.1 seconds off ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 (“0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second blue lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second Off ”→“ 0.1 seconds blue light on → 0.1 seconds off ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 (“green for 3 seconds → lights for 0.3 seconds” → “blue light for 1 second + lights for white → lights for 0.1 seconds” → “lights for blue for 0.1 seconds → lights for 0.1 seconds” )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loop dedicated sound during BB execution (repeated playback)
It is configured as described above. The warning sound output from the speaker when a medal empty error occurs and the warning sound output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode and setting change mode are the same warning sound, and a medal empty error occurs separately from the warning sound. During the setting check mode, a voice message saying “A medals empty error is occurring” is output from the speaker, and during the setting check mode, it is output from the speaker. It may be configured to output from a speaker. Similarly, for an error different from the medal empty error, a warning sound and a voice “00 error in progress” may be output from the speaker.

<< Configuration 5 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loops a special sound during medal empty error occurrence until error is canceled (repeated playback)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: lighting → extinguishing (lights up when normal game is in progress)
Speaker sound: No output <Displaying standby screen>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Dedicated sound in setting change mode <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("white lighting for 1 second → off for 0.1 seconds" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds Off ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loop dedicated sound during BB execution (repeated playback)
It is configured as described above.

<< Configuration 6 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (Repeat “red for 0.1 seconds → turn off for 0.1 seconds” four times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loops a special sound during medal empty error occurrence until error is canceled (repeated playback)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 (“0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off” → “White lighting for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 (“0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off” → “White lighting for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Dedicated sound in setting change mode <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("white lighting for 1 second → off for 0.1 seconds" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds Off ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loop dedicated sound during BB execution (repeated playback)
It is configured as described above.

  In the figure, six types of configurations 1 to 6 are illustrated, but the configuration is only an example, and the lamp unit lighting pattern, the back lamp lighting mode, and the sound output from the speaker for each game situation May be combined from each configuration or may be changed in any way. In addition, regarding the lighting pattern of the lamp unit, the difference between the error occurrence and the normal game related to the lamp unit, the difference between immediately after turning on the power and the normal game, the display of the standby screen and the normal game Differences between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, differences between the setting change mode and the normal game, and differences between the BB execution and the normal game are as follows. It is preferable that any one of (see FIG. 77) is selected so that one that is not selected during the normal game is selected.

  Also, in the figure, only the medal empty error is illustrated as an error, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display determination error and the door opening error are also related to the lamp unit at the time of the error occurrence and during the normal game. Difference between power-on and normal game, difference between standby screen display and normal game, difference between setting confirmation mode and normal game, setting change mode and normal game As a difference from the inside, a difference between the BB execution and the normal game, any one of the above-described elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) is selected that is not selected during the normal game. Depending on the type of error that has occurred, such as making one of the elements 1 to 6 (refer to FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit different between the medal empty error and the display determination error, Lamp unit The elements described above 1 elements 6 according to the may be different from any of the (see FIG. 77).

  Further, when the re-gamer is stopped and displayed, the player may be informed that the combination of symbols related to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed by the lighting mode of the lamp unit. In the game executed in the gaming state of the game, the lamp unit is lit when the symbol combination relating to the re-gamer is stopped by winning the re-gamer, and any one of the elements 1 to 6 Is included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit, and is not included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit when a symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed without winning the re-gamer. You may comprise. With this configuration, the player can clearly recognize that he has won the re-gamer.

<<< Configuration for opening the front door and paying out >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a configuration related to payout of game medals applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. Note that “normal” shown in the same figure means that, for example, winning-B (common bell) is won in the “low probability state”, and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, winning 04) is stopped and displayed. In this case, 11 game medals are paid out. In addition, regarding “occurrence of payout before opening the door” and “occurrence of payout after opening the door”, winning-B (common bell) is won, and a symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, winning 04) is stopped and displayed. Is illustrated. In the figure, the case where the credit (the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200) is the upper limit (50 in this example) is described in detail.

<< Configuration 1 >>
<In case of normal payout>
A case where normal payout in configuration 1 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button is Winning 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button becomes non-pressed (the third stop button changes from being pressed to non-pressed when the player removes his / her finger from the third stop button, etc. Note that since the third stop button is being pressed) The non-pressing state may be referred to as the third stop button being turned from on to off), a game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (same as above) Sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payout is executed before the door opens>
Next, the case where payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button is turned from on to off, a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. Thereafter, in a situation where a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is opened from the speaker S20 (in the figure) Sound A) is output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output simultaneously. Thereafter, the output of the payout sound ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the output of the payout sound, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Note that the front door DU remains open, that is, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened, and then output even when the front door DU remains open. The configuration is such that the output ends when a specific time elapses from the opening. By configuring in this way, when the administrator opens the front door DU to perform setting confirmation or setting change, the front door opening notification sound is continuously output until the setting confirmation or setting change is completed. Without being prevented, setting confirmation and setting change can be performed without stress. In the figure, the output of the front door opening sound is terminated simultaneously with the end of the output of the dispensing sound, but the present invention is not limited to this. There is no problem if the end timing is different from the end timing.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where payout is executed after the door is opened in Configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) is output from the speaker S20 to notify that the front door DU is opened. The That is, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened regardless of whether the third stop button is on or off. Thereafter, in a situation where the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, a game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and from the speaker S20 The payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output simultaneously. Thereafter, the specific time has elapsed since the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Thereafter, the output of the payout sound ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the payout sound output.

  By configuring the game medal so that it can be executed regardless of the opening of the front door DU as in the configuration 1, the manager of the game hall forgets to close the front door DU when the game machine is replenished with a game medal. Even in the case where it has been (not closed firmly), etc., the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player can be configured not to be disadvantaged. In addition, by configuring the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound to be output simultaneously, the situation of the gaming machine can be grasped in real time. When configured as described above, it is preferable to use an output mode (tone, tone, tempo, etc.) that makes it easy to distinguish the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<In case of normal payout>
A case where normal payout in configuration 2 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button is Winning 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button becomes non-pressed (the third stop button changes from being pressed to non-pressed when the player removes his / her finger from the third stop button, etc. Note that since the third stop button is being pressed) The non-pressing state may be referred to as the third stop button being turned from on to off), a game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 (same as above) Sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payout is executed before the door opens>
Next, the case where payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button is turned from on to off, a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. Thereafter, in a situation where a payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is output, the front door DU is opened, and a front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is opened from the speaker S20 (in the figure) The sound A) is output and the output of the payout sound ends. Thereafter, a specific time elapses from the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Note that the predetermined time, which is the output period of the payout sound, ends during the output of the front door opening notification sound.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where payout is executed after the door is opened in Configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) is output from the speaker S20 to notify that the front door DU is opened. The That is, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened regardless of whether the third stop button is on or off. Thereafter, in a situation where the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, and the game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out. The corresponding payout sound is not output. Thereafter, under the situation where the payout of game medals is being executed, a specific time has elapsed since the opening of the front door DU, the output of the front door opening notification sound is terminated, and a payout sound corresponding to the winning 04 is output. Thereafter, a predetermined time elapses from the start of payout of the game medal corresponding to the winning 04, and the output of the payout sound is finished.

  By configuring the game medals to be able to be paid out regardless of the opening of the front door DU as in the configuration 2, the game venue administrator forgets to close the front door DU when the game machine is replenished with game medals. Even in the case where it has been (not closed firmly), etc., the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player can be configured not to be disadvantaged. In addition, by preventing the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound from being output at the same time, the situation where the situation of the gaming machine becomes difficult to judge due to the mixed tone of the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound is prevented. can do. In the configuration 2, even when the front door opening notification sound is being output, the payout sound is output, and the volume of the payout sound is relatively small compared with the volume of the front door opening notification sound (volume 0 is also set). May be included).

<< Other configuration >>
When the configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 is applied, even when the front door DU is opened, a game medal is inserted, a max bet button (in this example, a bet button D220) is operated, and a bet button lamp S50 (also called a max bet lamp). May be configured so that lighting of a lamp that can be inserted or a bet lamp (a 1-bet lamp, a 2-bet lamp, or a 3-bet lamp) is effective. That is, when a game medal is inserted while the front door DU is opened, it is possible to detect the insertion of the game medal (the blocker is on) and the insertion is valid (the credit is increased, or the game medal is Bet bet). In such a configuration, a bet sound (or medal insertion sound) corresponding to a game medal insertion or bet button (max bet button) operation may be output from the speaker S20 (front door DU). Even if the game is not open, game medals can be inserted or a bet sound corresponding to the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output), and game medals can be inserted or the bet button (max bet button) can be operated The bet sound may not be output.

<<< Configuration related to power interruption and withdrawal >>>
The following is an example of the action that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this example when the power is turned off while pressing the third stop when winning a small role. Note that any of the configurations exemplified below can be applied to all the embodiments according to this example. The configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is an upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a case where a game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small role. In addition, an effect caused by blinking of the spinning backlight S30 may be referred to as a back lamp effect.

<Configuration 1>
In a game won for a small role (for example, a common bell for winning 04), the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small role. → A power failure occurs while the third stop button is pressed. (A power failure occurs at the game hall, etc.) → Power is restored while the third stop button is pressed → Power is restored and the game medal payout corresponding to the small role is executed. May be.

  In addition, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off, and the game medal payout based on the small role winning is executed, the back lamp effect based on the small role winning can be executed, In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, the power supply is restored while the third stop button is pressed as in the above-described configuration 1, and the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small role. In such a case, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small role may not be output. With this configuration, the player can be configured not to be surprised by suddenly executing the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored.

  With this configuration, even when the player presses the third stop, a power interruption occurs, and even when the power is immediately restored, the game medal payout based on the winning of the small role is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Even if any of predetermined operation members (for example, a start lever, all stop buttons, a bet button (max bet button), a settlement button, etc.) controlled by the main control board M side is operated, If the operation member is not operated, a game medal payout based on winning may be executed. For example, when returning from a power interruption, if both the third stop button and the start lever are operated (turned on), the game medal payout based on winning is not executed. Also good. Further, in such a configuration, (1) after that, by releasing the third stop button or releasing the start lever, the operation member that is turned on among the operation members controlled by the main control board M side is 1 The game medal payout based on the winning may be executed. (2) After that, by releasing the third stop button and the start lever (the main control board M side is A game medal payout based on a winning may be executed when all the operation members to be controlled are turned off.

  As an example of the situation where the power interruption occurs, the power switch is turned from on to off, the power supply cable is disconnected, a power failure occurs in the game arcade, the power supply cable comes out of the insertion port, In any case, the above-described configuration can be applied.

<Configuration 2>
In a game won for a small role (for example, a common bell for winning 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win the small role → open the front door DU while pressing the third stop button (Opening the front door DU causes a door opening error), and power is cut off (turning off the power switch, etc.) → Power is restored with the third stop button pressed (turn on the power switch) → Close the front door DU while pressing the third stop button to release the door opening error (for example, insert the door key into the key hole D260 and twist in a predetermined direction) → The door opening error is released The game medal payout corresponding to the small combination may be configured as described above.

  In addition, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off, and the game medal payout based on the small role winning is executed, the back lamp effect based on the small role winning can be executed, In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be outputted, the door opening error is released while the third stop button is pressed as in the above-described configuration 2, and the gaming medal is paid out based on the winning of the small role. May be configured such that the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role is not executed and the payout sound based on the winning of the small role is not output. With this configuration, the player can be configured not to be surprised by suddenly executing the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the door opening error is canceled.

<Configuration 3>
In a game won for a small role (for example, a common bell for winning 04), the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win the small role. → A power failure occurs while the third stop button is pressed. (For example, a power failure occurs in the game hall) → Release your finger from the third stop button (turn the third stop button from on to off) → Return to power → Return to power and pay out game medals corresponding to the small role May be configured as described above.

  In addition, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off, and the game medal payout based on the small role winning is executed, the back lamp effect based on the small role winning can be executed, In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, as in the configuration 3 described above, the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed, and the power is restored after the third stop button is released. Thus, when a game medal payout based on the winning of the small role is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role is not executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small role is not output. Good. With this configuration, the player can be configured not to be surprised by suddenly executing the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored.

  In the case of the configuration 1, the configuration 2, or the configuration 3, it is determined whether or not the third stop button is pressed (whether or not it is turned on) as a process after the power is restored. Before executing the process (process executed in the game progress control process), a game medal payout process based on a winning (process executed in the game progress control process) may be executed. Further, as described above, in the situation where the symbol combination for which the small role is awarded is stopped and displayed, the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed, and then the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed. Then, the game medal payout based on the winning may be executed by releasing the third stop button after that, and in such a case, the output of the payout sound corresponding to the payout and the back lamp effect. May be configured not to be executed (when a game medal payout based on a prize is executed without turning off the power, a payout sound output and a back lamp effect are executed).

<<< Configuration for Confirmation Mode and Payment >>>
An example of an action that can be applied to the gaming machine according to the present example when the setting key switch is turned on while the third stop is pressed at the time of winning the small role is illustrated below. Note that any of the configurations exemplified below can be applied to all the embodiments according to this example. The configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is an upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a case where a game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small role. The configuration described in detail below is when the reel is stopped and the power is turned on, and the main control board side such as the start lever, all stop buttons, bet buttons (max bet buttons), checkout buttons, etc. In the situation where the various operation members controlled by are not operated (not turned on), when the front key DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned on, the setting confirmation mode can be entered. The case where it is done is illustrated. During the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to notify that it is in the setting confirmation mode, or may be configured not to notify.

<Configuration 1>
In a game won for a small role (for example, a common bell for winning 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win the small role → open the front door DU while pressing the third stop button (Opening the front door DU generates a door opening error) and turning on the setting key switch (does not shift to the setting confirmation mode) → The front door DU is closed with the third stop button pressed. The door opening error is canceled (for example, the door key is inserted into the keyhole D260 and twisted in a predetermined direction). Alternatively, the configuration may not be changed to the setting confirmation mode even if the third stop button is released.

  Further, in such a configuration, the setting key switch is kept on, and then betting is possible, and the reel can be started to rotate by operating the start lever in the betting state, and the stop button The reel may be stopped by operating (to allow the game to proceed). Further, if the setting key switch is kept turned on, betting may not be possible (game medals cannot be inserted), and betting is possible, but the reel does not start rotating even if the start lever is operated. May be. In other words, the game may not be executed if the setting key switch remains on. In the case of such a configuration, it is supplemented that the display indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being displayed is not displayed on the effect display device S40. Moreover, when the front door DU is opened in a situation where the re-playing symbols are not stopped and the setting key switch is turned on (after the operation as in the above configuration 1), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode. You may comprise so that it may obtain, and when the front door DU is open | released in the condition where the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed, you may comprise so that it may not transfer to setting confirmation mode. Further, when the front door DU is opened and the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may display that it is the setting confirmation mode.

<<< Configuration related to lighting of Max Bet Lamp >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80 to FIG. 83, an operation relating to lighting of a max bet lamp (also referred to as a bet button lamp S50) applicable to the rotating type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In addition, the structure illustrated below has illustrated the structure which can throw in a game medal even during the stop display of a re-game. The max bet lamp is controlled on the sub-control board S side or the main control board M side, which informs that the operation of the max bet button provided in or near the max bet button is effective. It is a lamp. In the figure, it is ON that the max bet lamp is lit (or flashing), OFF that the max bet lamp is not lit, 1 ON that the bet lamp D211 is lit, 1 bet OFF that the lamp D211 is off, ON that the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit ON, OFF that the 2 bet lamp D212 is off, and ON that the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit It is illustrated that the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off, that the start lamp D180 is turned on (or blinking), and that the start lamp D180 is turned off. Further, in the figure, when game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 (the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 such as the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, etc. are detected. In this example, the game sensor detects one game medal one by one), but as a bet button, one game medal can be bet by one operation (off → on) different from the max bet button. A 1-bet button or a 2-bet button that can bet two game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided. In such a configuration, one bet to the medal slot D170 is provided. Same as game medal insertion (detection of one game medal by insertion acceptance sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, or second insertion sensor D30s) The use, there is no problem even when applied to a single press of the 1 bet button.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is unlit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is unlit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the Max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the Max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the maximum bet lamp is lit and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the Max bet lamp is turned off, the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

  As in the configuration 1, the maximum bet lamp is configured to be “lights off → lights up” each time one game medal is inserted, so that the period during which the game medal is guided from the medal insertion slot D170 to the inside of the gaming machine is maximum. Since the operation of the bet button is invalid, the period during which the max bet button is valid can be accurately notified by turning off the max bet lamp during the guided period. In addition, by accurately informing the period during which the Max Bet button is valid, the player can grasp the period during which the Max Bet button is invalid, in other words, the period when the game medal is invalid, It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is inserted during the invalid period and the game medal is not normally inserted, and it is possible to realize a game progress with a good tempo.

  Further, when the third bet lamp D213 is turned on by configuring the third bet lamp D213 to be turned on after the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off as in the configuration 1, Since the max bet lamp is turned off, the player can clearly recognize that the prescribed number of three game medals has been bet.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, Configuration 2 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is unlit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is unlit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains on, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, and the start lamp D180 is lit. After that, the max bet lamp goes off.

  As in configuration 2, the third game medal is inserted and the 3rd bet lamp D213 is turned on, and then the maximum bet lamp is turned off. By configuring it to light up as soon as possible after the operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be lighted seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, the game progresses smoothly, and the player has extra Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is thrown into the game or a player is distrusted by the performance and behavior of the gaming machine due to slow operation.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is unlit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is unlit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains on, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the Max bet lamp is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on.

  As in the configuration 3, when the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp before the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on is turned off, the start lamp D180 is turned on almost at the same time. It is possible to quickly notify the player that it is possible to start the game, and the progress of the game can be made smooth, and the player can throw in extra game medals, It is possible to prevent situations in which the behavior is distrustful.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is unlit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is unlit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the Max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is lit and the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the Max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the maximum bet lamp is lit and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted and the Max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit and the start lamp D180 is lit.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, Configuration 5 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the Max bet lamp is flashing, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is on and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, and the start lamp D180 is lit. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is extinguished before (in the middle of lighting) the timing at which the max bet lamp blinks, which is turned on and off. In addition, in the figure, since the Max bet lamp is turned on and turned off repeatedly, the case where the third game medal is inserted in the lighting state is illustrated. The max bet lamp is turned on and off at the timing when the first game medal is inserted, but the third game medal is inserted in the blinking state of the max bet lamp. The max bet lamp remains off after the timing when the third game medal is inserted.

  Even when the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are all lit up in the situation where the player is not betting as in the configuration 5, the number of game medals inserted (first, By changing the combination of lighting / extinguishing of the start lamp D180, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 according to the second and third sheets, the player can change the current game situation (how many game medals). Can be grasped).

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, Configuration 6 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is unlit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is unlit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains on, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the start lamp D180 is turned on at the timing when the insertion of the game medal is detected (timing earlier than the start timing of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 in the configuration 2), The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit. After that, the max bet lamp goes off.

  As in configuration 6, the third game medal is inserted and the 3rd bet lamp D213 is turned on and then the maximum bet lamp is turned off. In other words, the player presses the 3rd bet lamp D213 with the max bet button. By configuring it to light up as soon as possible after the operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be lighted seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, the game progresses smoothly, and the player has extra Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is thrown into the game or a player is distrusted by the performance and behavior of the gaming machine due to slow operation.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is unlit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is unlit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains on, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights. Thereafter, the start lamp D180 is turned on (starts blinking). Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the Max bet lamp is turned off, and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on.

  As in configuration 6, after the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on substantially simultaneously. In other words, the player sets the 3 bet lamp D213 to the max. By constructing it so that it lights up as soon as possible after the bet button is operated, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be lit seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, and the game progress can be made smoother. It is possible to prevent a situation where a player puts in extra game medals or feels distrustful in the performance and behavior of the gaming machine due to slow operation.

  In the above-described configurations 1 to 4, configuration 6 and configuration 7, the max bet lamp is ON = the max bet lamp is lit. However, the lighting mode is such that the player can recognize that the max bet button is valid. As in the configuration 5, the maximum bet lamp may be turned on, and the maximum bet lamp may blink. Also in the configuration 5, the maximum bet lamp may be turned on and the maximum bet lamp may be turned on. Similarly, in the configurations 1 to 6, the start lamp D180 is ON = the start lamp D180 is lit, but any lighting mode may be used as long as the player can recognize that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective. Similarly to the configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on, and the start lamp D180 may blink. Further, in the configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on, and the start lamp D180 may be turned on. Further, the maximum bed lamp may be configured to be controlled on the sub-control board S side or may be configured to be controlled on the main control board M side.

<<< Configuration for Checkout Button Operation >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84 to FIG. 87, the action at the time of operating the settlement button D60 applicable to the rotating type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In the following configuration, three gaming medals are bet on the gaming machine, and the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is four. In the figure, it is ON that the Max bet lamp is lit (or flashing), OFF that the Max bet lamp is off, and ON that the operation of the settlement button is newly detected, and the settlement button. OFF that the operation of 1 is not detected, or that the operation of the settlement button is not newly detected is OFF, that the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit ON, and that the 1-bet lamp D211 is OFF is OFF, ON that the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on, OFF that the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off, ON that the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and that the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. OFF, when the start lamp D180 is lit (or flashing), ON, when the start lamp D180 is off, ON that the enabling lamp D300 is lit (or blinking), OFF that the enabling lamp D300 is OFF, and 1 that the credit number display device D200 is decremented by 1 by OFF → ON → OFF . Further, in the figure, a case where game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 is illustrated, but as a bet button, one operation is different from the maximum bet button by one operation (off → on). A 1-bet button for betting game medals and a 2-bet button for betting 2 game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided. There is no problem even if the same action as the insertion of one game medal into D170 is applied to one press of the 1-bet button. The configuration exemplified below may be configured so that the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled even during the replay stop display, or stored in the gaming machine during the replay stop display. You may comprise so that the game medal which can be settled cannot be settled. In addition, as the condition for operating the checkout button D60 and paying out the betted game medals from the outlet D240 (as a condition for determining that the checkout button has been operated), the checkout button has been changed from “on to off”. Or “on” or “on for 0.5 seconds or more”.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, Configuration 1 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the throw-in lamp D300 are turned off and betted. Three game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started), and thereafter, four game medals, which are credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200, are released. It is paid out from the exit D240. In addition, the throw-in enable lamp D300 is turned on at the timing when the game medal to be paid out at the end (game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 is 1 → 0) is paid out.

  By configuring the game medals being betted (payout) before the credit as in Configuration 1, it is confirmed that the credit has become 0 when the player finishes the game. Even if you leave immediately, you can avoid forgetting to settle the betting game medals. In particular, when a game is ended in a situation where the number of credits is a small amount, such as 1 or 2 cards, it is relatively likely that the player will end the game without obtaining sufficient game medals. The attention of the person may be distracted. Even in such a case, in order to prevent an unintended disadvantage to the player, the game medals that are bet are settled (paid out) before the credits. In the configuration 1, before the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is subtracted, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, and the start lamp D180 are included. And the throwable lamp D300 are turned off.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, Configuration 2 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), the Max bet lamp is turned on, and the three game medals bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started). Thereafter, the start lamp D180 is extinguished, and the throwable lamp D300 is extinguished. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the throw-in lamp D300 is turned on. In the configuration 2, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. A credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

  When it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once as in the configuration 2, the bet game medals are paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the settlement button D60 is operated, By configuring the 1st bet lamp D211, the 2nd bet lamp D212, the 3rd bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180 and the throw-in enable lamp D300 to be turned on before the extinction of the max bet lamp, Will be paid out only, and the player wants to bet credit by operating the max bet button again, so that the max bet button can be operated quickly. By configuring to notify, the progress of the game is smooth. It can be.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (from OFF to ON), and the start lamp D180 and the enabling lamp D300 are turned off. Three game medals betted are paid out from the outlet D240 (payout is started), and thereafter, four credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200. A game medal is paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, after the finger is released from the settlement button D60, the lights are turned off in the order of the 3 bet lamp D213 → 2 bet lamp D212 → 1 bet lamp D211. In addition, the throw-in enable lamp D300 is turned on at the timing when the game medal to be paid out at the end (game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 is 1 → 0) is paid out.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the checkout button D60 is operated once (off → on), the start lamp D180 and the throw-in enable lamp D300 are turned off, and the three betting game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout starts). ) Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the throw-in lamp D300 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In the configuration 4, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. A credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

  By configuring the bet game medals to be paid out as in the configuration 4, but not to pay out credits, and to configure the maximum bet lamp to be lit at a timing later than the turn-on lamp D300 is lit. If the player wishes to change to a single bet after betting three, the player adjusts the checkout button D60 once to settle the three game medals, and then sets one game medal. In such a case, it is possible to make the game progress smoothly by turning on the enabling lamp D300 before the maximum bet lamp.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, the configuration 5 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the throw-in lamp D300 are turned off and betted. Three game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started). Thereafter, the enabling lamp D300 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In the configuration 5, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. A credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed (the timing when it is turned from OFF to ON), the enabling lamp D300 is turned off. Thereafter, the start lamp D180 is turned off. Three game medals bet are paid out from the outlet 2D40 (payout is started), and thereafter, four credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200. A game medal is paid out from the discharge port D240. Further, after the timing when the settlement button D60 is operated, the lights are turned off in the order of the 3 bet lamp D213 → the 2 bet lamp D212 → the 1 bet lamp D211. Further, after the game medals to be paid out at the end (game medals whose display on the credit number display device D200 is changed from 1 to 0) are paid out, the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. Note that the Max bet lamp remains off.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 87 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. After that, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed (the timing when it is turned off → on), the blinking of the max bet lamp starts and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the throwable lamp D180 is turned off, and the three betting game medals are paid out from the discharge port D240 (payout is started). Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off. Thereafter, the enabling lamp D300 is turned on. Note that the Max bet lamp remains off. In the configuration 7, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. A credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

<<<<< Difference in operation due to power-off timing >>>>
FIG. 88 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the main control board M and the sub control board S according to the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing a first mode of timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off, and FIG. 88 (b) is a timing chart of timing of power-supply to the gaming machine and power-off. 6 is a timing chart showing the second aspect.

  The first mode is a mode in which a power interruption occurs after the execution of the main program of the main control board M and the sub program of the sub control board S is started. On the other hand, the second mode is a mode in which a power interruption occurs before the execution of the main program of the main control board and the sub program of the sub control board is started.

  In this example, the power interruption is the state where power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the power cable is disconnected, the power cable is disconnected, But you can. This includes cases where power supply is stopped unintentionally at the game hall. Note that the timing when the power interruption occurs is the timing when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing when the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the timing when the power cable is disconnected, and the power cable is disconnected. This is the timing when a power failure occurs.

  88 (a) and 88 (b), ΔT1 indicates that the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches a low level (sometimes referred to as an off level) after a power interruption occurs from the start of power feeding. ΔT2 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level, and ΔT3 is the supply voltage to the main control board M from the timing when the power interruption occurs. ΔT4 is the time until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level until the sub-program of the sub-control board S is started, and ΔT5 is the time until the low level. This is the time from when the supply voltage to M reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is started. Here, relationships of ΔT5 <ΔT1, ΔT2 <ΔT3, ΔT5> ΔT3, and ΔT4 <ΔT5 are established.

<<< First Aspect >>>
<< Changes in power supply status >>
Power supply to the gaming machine is started at time t1, power supply is cut off at time t3, and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
As described above, power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2. In the drawing, the case where the time from when the power supply to the main control board is started to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the time from when the power supply is started to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level can vary (is random). Further, the case where the time from when the power supply to the sub control board is started until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and power supply to the sub control board is started. It may be configured such that the time from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is varied (random). Even in such a configuration, the minimum value (minimum time) from when the power supply to the main control board is started until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is the same as when the power supply to the sub control board is started. It is preferable that the power supply voltage is configured to be longer than the maximum time (maximum time) until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level.

  Thereafter, the power is cut off at time t3. Due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4), and is substantially reduced from the time t4 to the maintenance level. It becomes constant. The power supply unit E has a backup power source composed of a capacitor, and the power supply unit E has a substantially constant power supply voltage over a certain period of time (time t4 to time t5) even when a power interruption occurs. (Maintenance level) can be output (the power-off process is executed in a situation where a voltage of the maintenance level is supplied). In this example, the time for maintaining the maintenance level from the start of execution of the power-off process (when power-off is detected) (the time from time t3 to time t5) is a time that allows timer interrupt processing to be executed at least 20 times. (Time when timer interruption processing (FIG. 32) can be called and executed 20 times) can be secured.

  Thereafter, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t5 and becomes off-level at time t6.

<Starting the main program>
The main program executed on the main control board is started from time ta after lapse of ΔT5 from time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing the main program, the above-described main control board START (power-on) process shown in FIG. 13 is executed.

  As described above, when the setting key switch is OFF in the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, the processes of steps 1016 to 1022, 1036 to 1046 and 1300 are executed, and the timer interrupt is performed by the process of step 1040. Is activated.

  If the setting key switch is ON in the determination process in step 1014 of FIG. 13, the processes in steps 1028 to 1034 and 1100 are executed.

<Activation of timer interrupt>
When the setting key switch is off, a timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13, and when the setting key switch is on, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1104 of FIG. . After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is called and executed every predetermined period T. The period T at which the timer interrupt is executed is 1.8 msec.

<Detection of power interruption>
When the power interruption occurs, a power interruption detection signal is output from the power supply unit E. The main control board M has an input port to which a power-off detection signal is input. The power-off detection signal is a high-level signal when no power-off occurs, and is a low-level signal when a power-off occurs. The main control board M can determine whether or not a power interruption has occurred depending on whether the data read from the input port is a high level signal or a low level signal.

  In this example, the main control board M detects the power-off in the determination process in step 1604 of FIG. Specifically, the main control board M determines that a power interruption has occurred when the data read from the input port is a low level signal both times in two successive timer interrupt processes.

  Thus, in this example, the occurrence of power interruption is detected by two successive timer interruption processes. Therefore, when the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the process at step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process at step 1104 in FIG. 14, the occurrence of the power interruption can be detected. On the other hand, if the power interruption occurs before the timer interrupt is activated, the occurrence of the power interruption cannot be detected.

  As described above, when the power interruption occurs after the execution of the main program is started and the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 in FIG. Thus, it is possible to detect that a power interruption has occurred due to the interrupt processing. When it is detected that a power interruption has occurred, the power interruption processing shown in FIG. 36 can be executed.

<< Sub-control board operation >>
<Invoking subprogram>
The subprogram executed on the sub-control board S starts from time tb when ΔT4 has elapsed from time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing this subprogram, the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 described above is executed. Note that ΔT4 is shorter than the above-described ΔT5, and the sub control board S does not miss the command transmitted from the main control board M by starting the sub control board S before the main control board M. Can be received. In the figure, the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after power supply to the main control board M is started, and the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after power supply to the sub-control board S is started. Is shown as the same time tb, but the time from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level and the power supply voltage after the power supply to the sub-control board S is started. The time until the supply level is reached may be different, and even in such a configuration, power supply to the main control board M is started until the main program of the main control board M is started. Is preferably set to be longer than the time from when the power supply to the sub control board S is started until the sub program of the sub control board S is started. Reached the supply level Is longer than the time from when the power supply voltage on the side of the sub control board S reaches the supply level until the sub program of the sub control board S is started. It is preferable to configure.

<<< Second Aspect >>>
FIG. 88 (b) is a timing chart showing a second mode of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off timing. The second mode is a mode in which a power interruption occurs before the execution of the main program executed on the main control board M is started. That is, this is a mode in which a power interruption occurs at a time point before the time t2 has elapsed from the time t2 when the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the sub control board S has reached the supply level.

  As described above, in the second mode, the power supply is interrupted by the main program because the power supply is interrupted before the execution of the main program is started (before the timer interrupt is activated). This cannot be detected, and the power-off process shown in FIG. 36 is not executed, and the gaming machine stops due to power-off (the supply voltage reaches a low level).

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
Power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2.

  Thereafter, the power is cut off at time t13. Due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14), and is substantially reduced from the time t14 to the maintenance level. It becomes constant. Thereafter, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t15 and becomes off level at time t16.

  As described above, in the second mode, the execution of the main program is started after the power interruption occurs. However, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 of FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 of FIG. Before the power supply unit, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is set to the off level.

In addition, in the same figure, although the 1st aspect and the 2nd aspect were illustrated, as a structure applicable to the gaming machine which concerns on this example,
(1) Immediately after the power supply to the main control board M is started (for example, after the time when the timer interrupt process is executed once after the start of the power supply to the main control board M) → the main program is executed Before starting, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes an off level (the execution of the main program is not started).
(2) Power supply to the main control board M is started → immediately after the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M reaches the supply level (for example, the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M is at the supply level) Power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt process has been executed once) until the power supply voltage is reached → The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is turned off before the execution of the main program is started Level (the main program execution will not start)
You may comprise as mentioned above.

<<< Relationship between Setting Key Switch State and Power Supply State >>>
FIG. 89 (a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89 (b) is the state of the setting key switch in the second mode. It is a table | surface which shows the relationship between an electric power feeding state and a condition.

<< Relationship between Setting Key Switch State and Power Supply State in First Mode >>
<State 1>
First, in state 1 of FIG. 89 (a), the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which a game is being executed or a state in which a game can be executed, and the setting key switch is set to “OFF”. “Power supply state” is “ON”.

<State 2>
In state 2, the power is cut off with the setting key switch being “off”, and “power supply state” is “off”. At this time, the power-off process of FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state is stored in the storage area as a return address.

<State 3>
In the state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to “on” while the “power supply state” remains “off”.

<State 4>
Next, in state 4, when the setting key switch is in the “on” state and the power is supplied, the “power supply state” is switched to “on”. When the “power supply state” is “on”, the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. As described above, the first mode is a mode in which the power supply is interrupted after the execution of the main program is started. Before the power supply is interrupted (next state 5), the main program in FIG. A control board START (power-on) process can be executed.

  In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13 described above, it is determined that the setting key switch is on, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 are executed, and the setting change device control process is called and executed in step 1100. Transition from normal state to setting change mode. In this setting change device control process, the storage area is initialized by the process of step 1102 shown in FIG. In this way, when the setting key switch is “on” and the “power supply state” is “on”, the mode changes to the setting change mode, and then the setting change switch and the start lever are operated. Thus, the set value can be changed. In addition, the setting change start command is transmitted to the sub control board S by the process of step 1622 in FIG. 32, so that the sub control board S can be notified that the setting change mode is being performed.

<State 5>
Next, in the setting change mode, when the power change occurs while the setting change device control process is being executed, the “power supply state” changes to “off”. When the power is cut off, the power-off process shown in FIG. 36 is called and executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the setting change device control process (setting change mode) is returned to the return address by the process of step 1902. Are stored in the storage area.

<State 6>
In the state 6, the setting key switch is operated while the “power supply state” remains “off”, and the setting key switch is switched to “off”.

<State 7>
In state 7, power is supplied in a state where the setting key switch is “off”, and “power supply state” is switched to “on”. When the “power supply state” is “on”, the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process in step 1014 in FIG. 13, the setting key switch is determined to be “off”, and the process in step 1022 is executed. By the processing of step 1022, the return address stored in the storage area in the state 5 is restored, and execution is started from the processing of the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the storage area in the state 5 is the address of the next process to be executed in the setting change device control process, and the setting change device control process is immediately executed by returning. Is done. As described above, in the first aspect, the power supply is turned off in the normal state, and the setting key switch is turned on and the power supply is turned on in a situation where the power supply is turned off, thereby shifting to the setting change mode. This is the basic action when shifting to the setting change mode, but even when the power supply is turned off during the setting change mode and the setting key switch is turned off and then the power supply is turned on, Since the setting change mode is stored as the return address, the setting change mode is set. By configuring in this way, even when a power failure occurs during the setting change mode (for example, when a game hall has a power failure), it is possible to return to the state prior to the occurrence of the power failure, and an abnormality of the gaming machine It is possible to make it difficult to generate an operation.

<< Relationship between Setting Key Switch State and Power Supply State in Second Mode >>
<State 1>
In state 1 of FIG. 89 (b), the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which a game is being executed or a state in which a game can be executed, as in the first mode. “Off”, and “Power supply state” is “On”.

<State 2>
Similarly to the first mode, in the state 2 as well, the power is cut off while the setting key switch remains “off”, and the “power supply state” is “off”. At this time, the power-off process of FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state is stored in the storage area as a return address.

<State 3>
In the state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to “on” while the “power supply state” remains “off”.

<State 4>
In state 4, power is supplied in a state where the setting key switch is “on”, and “power supply state” is switched to “on”.

<State 5>
In state 5, when the setting key switch is “on”, the power is cut off, and “power supply state” is switched to “off”. As described above, in the second mode, the power is cut off before the execution of the main program executed on the main control board M is started. Therefore, in the second mode, the “power supply state” is temporarily “on” (state 4), but immediately after the “power supply state” related to state 4 is “on” (for example, timer interrupt processing is performed). After the elapse of one execution time, the “power supply state” is switched to “off”. In other words, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is turned off before the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed (or before the timer interrupt is started). (State 5). For this reason, the setting change device control process is not executed, the return address stored in the storage area is not changed, and the return address stored in the state 2 is stored in the storage area as it is.

<State 6>
Next, in state 6, with the “power supply state” remaining “off”, the setting key switch is operated to switch the setting key switch to “off”.

<State 7>
In state 7, power is supplied in a state where the setting key switch is “off”, and “power supply state” is switched to “on”. When the “power supply state” is “on”, the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, it is determined that the setting key switch is OFF, and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the process of step 1022, the return address stored in the storage area in the state 2 is restored, and the execution is started from the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the storage area in state 2 is the address of the next process to be executed in the normal state, and the next process to be executed in the normal state is executed. Thus, in the second aspect, even when the setting key switch is “ON” and the “power supply state” is “ON”, the main program of the main control board M is not executed. When the power supply is turned off, the setting key switch is turned off and the power supply is turned on. . By configuring as in the second aspect, there is a possibility that an unintended malfunction may occur in the gaming machine if the power is turned off immediately after the gaming machine is turned on and the mode is changed to the setting change mode. Even if the setting key switch is on, it can be configured not to shift to the setting change mode, and a gaming machine that is less prone to malfunction can be configured.

<<< Medal grant control and payout sound output control >>>
As described above, when winning a small combination (when a symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed), a payout number of medals corresponding to the winning small combination is awarded to the player.

<< Medal grant process >>
The process of granting medals includes a process of adding and granting the number of credits, and a process of actually paying out and giving game medals out of the gaming machine.

<Credit number addition processing>
When the current number of credits is less than the maximum stored number (for example, less than 50), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the payout number until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number. This credit number addition process is executed by the calculation process of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M.

<Game medal payout process>
The CPUC 100 of the main control board M grants medals by driving the hopper H40 and paying out medals from the medal payout device H when the current number of credits exceeds the maximum storage number. The payout process from the medal payout device H is executed by outputting a drive signal from the main control board M to the hopper H40.

<< Mode of Medal Grant >>
In accordance with the current number of credits and the number of medals to be granted, the mode shifts from the credit number addition process only, the game medal payout process only, and the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process ( There are three types of modes: a mode in which both credit number addition processing and medal payout processing are executed.

<Only credit number addition process>
When the current credit number is equal to or less than the maximum storage number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the credit number according to the payout number until the credit number reaches the maximum storage number. If the maximum stored number is not reached even if the number of payouts is added, the medal granting process is completed only by the credit number adding process.

<Mode of transition from credit addition processing to game medal payout processing>
When the current credit number is equal to or less than the maximum storage number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the credit number according to the payout number until the credit number reaches the maximum storage number. When the number of credits reaches the maximum storage number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out the remaining number of game medals obtained by subtracting the credit addition amount from the payout number. The sum of the credit addition amount and the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is the payout number corresponding to the winning small combination.

  In this way, when shifting from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process.

<Aspects of game medal payout processing only>
When the current number of credits has already reached the maximum number of reserves, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 and pays out game medals for the number of payouts from the medal payout device H.

<< Specific example >>
For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when a medal with 5 payouts is given to a player when the current number of credits is 47, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M first sets the credit number to 1 Add one by one. Specifically, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits to 48, 49, and 50. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device is 47 → 48 (first sheet (time t1)) → 49 (second sheet (time t2)) → 50 (third sheet ( It changes with time t3)). When the number of credits is 50, the maximum storage number (50 sheets) is reached, and no more credits can be increased.

  Next, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40, and the remaining number obtained by subtracting three credits from the payout number is five. Are paid out from the medal payout device H.

  In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 at time t4 to start the payout process. The fourth game medal is paid out from time t4 to time t5, and the fifth game medal is paid out from time t6 to time t7. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M counts the number of medals paid out from the medal payout device H, detects that the fifth game medal has been paid out at time t7, and ends the payout process. .

<< Various times >>
<Unit processing time for credit addition processing and unit processing time for game medal payout processing>
In the credit addition process by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, a unit processing time a is required to increase from the credit number m to the credit number m + 1. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t2−time t1 = a to increase from the credit number 48 (first sheet) to the credit number 49 (second sheet), and the credit number 49 (second sheet). From time t3 to time t2 = a is required to increase the number of credits to 50 (third). In the credit addition process, the unit processing time a is substantially constant.

  In the process of paying out game medals from the medal payout device H, a unit processing time c is required from the payout of the nth game medal to the payout of the (n + 1) th game medal. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, time t6-time t4 = c is required from the payout of the fourth game medal to the payout of the fifth game medal. In the game medal payout process, the unit processing time c is substantially constant.

  One unit processing time a can be defined by the difference in timing between two successive addition processes. For example, the unit processing time a is the difference between the timing of addition processing from 47 to 48 (first sheet) (time t1) and the timing of addition processing from 48 to 49 (second sheet) (time t2). Also, the difference between the timing of the addition process from 48 to 49 (second sheet) (time t2) and the timing of the addition process from 49 to 50 (third sheet) (time t3).

  Further, one unit processing time c can be defined by the difference between the timings of starting two consecutive payout processes. For example, the unit processing time c is the difference between the start timing of the fifth sheet (time t6) and the start timing of the fourth sheet addition process (time t4). In this way, the unit processing times a and c may be defined so as to have a constant cycle.

<Switching time e from credit addition processing to game medal payout processing>
As described above, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the maximum storage number, and when not all of the payout numbers are given, the game medal payout process is switched. A switching time e is required for the CPUC 100 of the main control board M to switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process.

<< time comparison >>

<Unit processing time a and unit processing time c>
The unit processing time a described above is different from the unit processing time c. The unit processing time a is a time determined by the arithmetic processing of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, and the unit processing time c is the time required for the arithmetic processing of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M and the time required to drive the medal payout device H. And both. The unit processing time c can be made longer than the unit processing time a. In this way, the payout can be accurately controlled including the driving time of the medal payout device H.

  As described above, the unit processing time c can be made equal to the unit processing time a by adjusting the time required for driving the medal payout device H. In this way, the payout process can be speeded up.

<Switching time e>
The switching time e is different from the unit processing time a. The switching time e can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By lengthening the switching time e, it is possible to stably switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, and to smoothly switch from the calculation process of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M to the driving of the hopper H40. .

  Further, the switching time e can be made shorter than the unit processing time a. By shortening the switching time e, it is possible to quickly switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process. By ending the game medal payout process early, the next game can be started immediately. It is possible to increase the consumption of game medals, increase the profit of the game hall, and increase the operating efficiency of the gaming machine.

  In this way, by making the switching time e different from the unit processing time a, when switching to the game medal payout process, the payout is different from a certain period, and the exhilaration feeling that the payout of the game medal to the medal tray starts. A sense of expectation can be given to the game.

  It is also possible to make the switching time e coincide with the unit processing time a. When the switching time e is matched with the unit processing time a, medals can be given to the player at a fixed period, and the addition of the number of credits and the payout process of the game medals are equivalent medals. A sense of security can be given by showing this to the player.

<< Output of game medium added sound >>
The CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a payout start command to the sub-control board S when starting the credit addition process (time t1). The sub-control board S starts outputting the game medium imparting sound from the speaker S20 upon receiving this payout start command.

  Further, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a payout end command to the sub-control board S when the payout of the game medal is finished (time t7). The sub-control board S ends the output of the game medium giving sound from the speaker S20 upon receiving this payout end command. As described above, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and all the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning small combination are given to the player. It is determined whether or not it has been granted. When the CPU C 100 of the main control board M determines that all of the payout game medals corresponding to the winning small combination have been awarded, the CPU C 100 ends the output of the payout end command to the sub-control board S, and from the speaker S20. The output of the game medium giving sound is terminated. In the case where the game medium applied sound is reproduced (output) repeatedly with a certain period of sound, the game medium applied sound is immediately output at the timing when the sub-control board S receives the payout end command. You may comprise so that an output may be complete | finished, and the output of a game medium provision sound is complete | finished at the timing when the period of the game medium provision sound currently output at the timing which the sub control board S side received the payout completion command was completed You may comprise.

  The game medium imparted sound is a sound output from the speaker S20 by reproducing the unit imparted sound data at least once. The unit imparted sound data is stored in advance in the RAM of the sub control board S. As shown in FIG. 90, the reproduction time for one unit-giving sound data is d, and the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads out the unit-giving sound data from the RAM and receives a payout start command. The game medium imparted sound is output from the speaker S20 by repeatedly reproducing the unit imparted sound data a plurality of times during the period until it is received.

<First aspect>
The first mode of the game medium imparted sound shown in FIG. 90 is a mode in which the unit imparted sound data is repeatedly reproduced every reproduction time d from when the payout start command is received. By playing in this way, game medium imparted sound is output at a constant cycle. As described above, even when switching from the process of adding credits to the process of paying out game medals, the game medium imparted sound is output at a constant cycle, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable about the payout. A sense of security can be provided by showing the player that both the number addition process and the game medal payout process have the same value.

<Second aspect>
Also, in the second mode of the game medium imparted sound shown in FIG. 90, the unit imparted sound data is reproduced for each reproduction time d from the time when the payout start command is received, and only the time f after the credit number addition processing is completed. This is a mode in which the unit imparted sound data is reproduced, and thereafter, at the time t4, the reproduction of the unit imparted sound data is started again with the start of the game medal payout process. When switching to the game medal payout process, the game medium giving sound is output at a timing different from a certain period, so that it is possible to give the game a sense of excitement and expectation that payout of the game medal to the medal tray starts. .

  Note that when the game medals in the hopper H40 run out while the game medals are being paid out from the medal payout device H and a hopper error occurs (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1279), the sub The control board S stops the output of the game medium giving sound and outputs a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When the game medals are supplied to the hopper H40 and the payout state is enabled, the main control board M transmits a payout start command to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S starts outputting the game medium giving sound. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when a hopper error occurs, the game medium imparted sound is continuously output. However, the volume of the game medium imparted sound is not the same as the sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred. The sound is output at a lower volume compared with the volume (the volume may be set to 0), and when the hopper error is canceled, the output of the sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred is terminated, and the game medium added sound You may comprise so that a volume may be returned.

<<< Arrangement of integrated circuit on substrate >>>
FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on main control board M. FIG.

  The main control board M has a substantially board-like rectangular printed board MP. On the front side of the printed circuit board MP, a CPUC 100, an IC, a resistor, a connector, and the like are mainly mounted. On the back side of the printed circuit board MP, a circuit pattern mainly made of a conductor is formed. The main control board M (printed circuit board MP) includes two long end portions ML1 and ML2 parallel to each other along the longitudinal direction and two short end portions MS1 and MS2 parallel to each other along the short direction. It has a rectangular shape.

  In this example, the main control board M is attached so as to stand up in the casing of the gaming machine. When the main control board M is installed upright, the long end portions ML1 and ML2 are disposed along the horizontal direction, and the short end portions MS1 and MS2 are disposed along the vertical direction. The longitudinal end portion ML1 is located on the upper side, and the longitudinal end portion ML2 is located on the lower side. Further, when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP, the short end portion MS1 is located on the left side of the short end portion MS2, and the short end portion MS2 is located on the right side of the short end portion MS1.

  Hereinafter, the long end portion ML1 side is referred to as the upper side, the long end portion ML2 side is referred to as the lower side, the short end portion MS1 side is referred to as the left side, and the short end portion MS2 side is referred to as the right side.

<CPUC100>
The CPUC 100 has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is CLL, and the length in the short direction is CSL. The CPUC 100 has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, an electrical connection is formed by a plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. For this reason, in the operation of attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the CPUC 100 in an appropriate direction so that the CPUC 100 can perform a desired operation. The first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the CPUC100 is used as a reference pin for arranging the CPUC100. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed on the main body of the CPUC100, and a notch (not shown) for visually confirming the orientation of the CPUC100 is formed.

  In this example, the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 matches (in parallel with) the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. In this example, as shown in FIG. 91, by arranging the CPUC 100 so that the first pin of the CPUC 100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC 100 is arranged in alignment with the orientation of the IC described later. When attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, mistakes in attaching the CPUC 100 in the wrong direction can be reduced.

  Further, in general, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer name is printed on the main body of the CPUC 100. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100. It is preferable that the character information such as the model number and the manufacturer name can be easily visually recognized in a state where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the CPUC 100 so that the first pin of the CPUC 100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC 100 can be arranged in an orientation in which the printed model number, manufacturer name, and the like are easily visible.

  When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the CPUC 100 increase in order along the counterclockwise direction starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. .

<IC>
Various ICs (integrated circuits) are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is ILL, and the length in the short direction is ISL. Like the CPUC 100, the IC also has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, electrical connection is formed by the plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. For this reason, even in the operation of attaching the IC to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the IC in an appropriate direction so that the IC performs a desired operation. For this reason, the first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the IC is also used as a reference pin for placing the IC. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed on the main body of the IC, or a notch (not shown) for visually confirming the orientation of the IC is formed.

  In this example, the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the IC matches the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board M (so as to be parallel). Further, the IC is arranged on the printed circuit board MP so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side. In this way, by arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is always located on the lower left side, all the ICs are arranged in the same direction, and the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP. In this case, it is possible to reduce mistakes such as mounting the IC in the wrong direction.

  Further, in general, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer name is printed on the main body of the IC. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the IC. In a state where the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, it is preferable that character information such as the IC model number and manufacturer name can be easily visually recognized. As described above, by placing the IC so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side, the IC is placed so that the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. can be easily viewed. You can also.

  When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the IC pin numbers increase in order along the counterclockwise direction starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. .

<Resistance>
Various resistors are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connection with other electronic components is formed. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is RLL, and the length in the short direction is RSL.

<Connector>
A connector is also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connection with other electronic components is formed. The main control board M is connected to the sub control board S or the like via a connector, and can transmit and receive various signals.

<Interval between CPUC 100 and IC>
As indicated by a broken line in FIG. 91, only the resistor is arranged inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC 100, and no IC is arranged. The predetermined range CSR1 is a range in which the length of the CPUC 100 from the outer periphery COR is equal to or less than the predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length CSL of the CPUC 100 in the short direction. Various currents (currents that change with time, for example, high-frequency signals) flow through the IC, and the IC can be a source of noise, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. In this way, by not placing the IC inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the IC is placed at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length CSL), and noise generated from the IC is reduced. The operation of the CPUC 100 can be prevented from being affected.

  Further, the predetermined length from the outer periphery COR of the CPUC 100 may be at least the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor. Since current flows through the resistor, the resistor can be a heat source, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. For this reason, by not arranging the resistor inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the resistor is arranged at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length RLL), and is emitted from the resistor. The generated heat can be prevented from affecting the operation of the CPUC 100.

<Relationship between CPUC100 height, IC height and other parts height>
FIG. 92 is a side view showing the heights of various electronic components shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 92, the height CHT of the CPUC 100 is the highest, then the IC height IHT is the highest, and the resistance height RHT is the lowest. As shown in FIG. 91, only parts having a height less than CHT of CPUC 100 are arranged inside a predetermined range CSR2 around CPUC 100. The predetermined range CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer periphery COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than the predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction.

  In the operation of attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, an attachment tool (not shown) is used. The attachment tool is a tool that is attached close to the printed circuit board MP while holding the CPUC 100 at the tip of the attachment tool. Since the CPUC 100 is clamped by the tip of the mounting tool, the tip of the mounting tool is arranged around the CPUC 100 when the CPUC 100 is clamped. For this reason, when the CPUC 100 is attached, the tip of the attachment tool must also be brought close to the printed circuit board MP, and a space for the tip of the attachment tool is prevented so that the tip of the attachment tool does not interfere with other electronic components. It is necessary to secure.

  For this reason, in the area CSR2 around the position where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, only components having a height less than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 are arranged. By doing in this way, even if the tip of the attachment tool is closest to the printed circuit board MP, the tip of the attachment tool does not interfere with other parts. The area CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer periphery COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be at least the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor, for example.

  It should be noted that only parts having a height less than CHT of the CPUC 100 are arranged only in the area around the position where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed board MP, and the area around the position where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed board MP in the printed board MP. Outside, it may be configured such that components having a height CHT of the CPUC 100 or more are attached, or all components attached to the printed circuit board MP may be components having a height less than the CHC of the CPUC 100.

  In this way, by placing only electronic components lower than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC 100, it is possible to secure a space where the tip of the mounting tool can be approached, Even if the attachment tool is used, the CPUC 100 can be attached to the printed circuit board MP without damaging other electronic components.

  In the example described above, the main control board M has been described as an example. However, all the boards on which electronic components such as a CPU and an IC are mounted, such as the sub control board S, the door board D, the rotor board K, and the power board E. Can be applied to.

<<< Configuration related to AT lottery >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the configuration of the AT state transition control process applicable to the rotating type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. In addition, it supplements that the structure illustrated in the figure is applicable to all the structures mentioned above, when it has comprised AT.

  First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of Step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current AT state is a state in which AT lottery is possible. In the figure, there are not a plurality of gaming states with different probabilities of winning the AT lottery such as a low probability state and a high probability state, for example, one gaming state such as a high probability state in this embodiment. The AT lottery can be executed only at. Further, as a difference from the present embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed based on the BB winning.

  In the case of Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1401-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets “2” as the AT lottery type and temporarily stores it in a predetermined RAM area. Here, the AT lottery type is a type for reducing the data capacity required for executing the AT lottery and for identifying the winning probability when executing the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game has no setting difference (condition device with no setting difference in the lottery probability). In the modification example shown in the same figure, the condition devices that have no setting difference are watermelon B, cherry, watermelon A, replay (all replay players may be used, or some replay players may be used), In this process, it is determined whether or not a condition device that has no setting difference is selected. Although there is a setting difference between the lottery probability and the common bell (there is a setting difference), this process is configured not to determine whether or not a loss or common bell has been won. ing. It is preferable that the predetermined RAM area for storing the AT lottery type is different from the RAM area for storing the winning number and the effect group number described above. By configuring in this way, an area for storing a winning number, which is an area in which information related to a condition device having a setting difference in winning probability and information related to a condition device having no setting difference in winning probability are stored and an effect group An area for storing an AT lottery type, which is an area in which information relating to a condition device having a setting difference in winning probability and information relating to a condition device having no setting difference in winning probability are stored without distinction; Can be configured not to be confused.

  In the case of Yes in step 1401-3, in step 1401-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the AT lottery type table, sets the AT lottery type, and sets the predetermined RAM area (in step 1401-2). The data is temporarily stored (overwritten) in the same RAM area as the predetermined RAM area, and the process proceeds to step 1401-5. In addition, also when it is No at step 1401-3, it transfers to step 1401-5. Here, the AT lottery table in the middle right of FIG. In this modified example, when winning a condition device that has no setting difference in a situation where AT lottery can be executed, when winning watermelon B, “0” is selected as the AT lottery type, and cherry is won If the winning lottery type is “0”, if the watermelon A is won, the AT lottery type is “1”, if the replay is won, the AT lottery type is “2”, and if the winning order is won “2” is set as the AT lottery type.

  Next, in step 1401-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes AT lottery based on the set AT lottery type. Here, as shown in the lower right part of the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is 56/256 when the AT lottery type is “0” and 18 / when the AT lottery type is “1”. When the AT lottery type is “2”, it is 1/256, and “0 → 1 → 2” in order from the one that is easy to win the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1401-6, in step 1401-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (eg, 50) as the AT initial game number in the AT counter. In this modified example, unlike the present embodiment, the AT initial game number is set in the AT counter in the AT state transition control process, and the AT initial game number is set in the AT state start control process. (The number of AT games may be added if the number of AT games is won). Next, in step 1401-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “AT in-process state”, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1430). In addition, also when it is No at step 1401-1 or step 1401-6, it transfers to the following process (process of step 1430).

  In a conventional gaming machine, as an AT lottery, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination and a lottery process that is executed when a condition device that does not have a setting difference is won (a lottery process that refers to the winning combination). In the case of having the configuration, it was necessary to execute AT lottery at least twice, but by providing the AT lottery type as shown in the figure, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination (in the figure, Step 1401-2 corresponds) and lottery processing (step 1401-4 corresponds to the processing in the figure) that is executed when a condition device having no setting difference is won. Can be executed in a single lottery process (in the figure, the process of step 1401-6 corresponds).

<<< Processing for Determining Bonus Winning Information, Winning / Replay Winning Information, Production Group Number, and Outlet Group Number Applicable to this Example >>>
In the following, a process for generating bonus winning information and winning / replaying winning information from winning numbers applicable to this example, a process for determining a production group number from winning / replaying winning information, and a determination of the winning group number Processing to be performed will be described. By executing the processing described below, the program processing stored in the ROM of the main control board M can be simplified, and the program area and data area required for the program processing can be compressed. Note that the processing described in detail below is applicable to both the above-described embodiment and configuration and the later-described embodiment and configuration.

<<< Process for generating bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information from winning number >>>
Below, the process which produces | generates two types of winning information of bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information from a winning number is demonstrated. As described above, the condition device number can be referred to as a winning number, and hereinafter referred to as a winning number. The winning number is determined by the role lottery means. Two types of winning information, bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information, are generated from the determined winning number and stored in another storage area of the built-in RAMC 120. In this process, the winning number itself is not stored in the built-in RAMC 120.

  In the process of generating bonus winning information and winning / replay winning information, winning information relating to the bonus combination and winning / replay winning information are generated from the winning number using the winning information generation table shown in FIG. By using the winning information generation table, the control process can be simplified and the burden of the control process can be reduced. The winning information generation table is stored in the built-in ROMC 110.

<Specific method>
A numerical value of 0 to 27 is defined as the winning number. As shown in FIG. 10, winning numbers 0 to 18 are assigned as winning numbers that do not include a bonus combination, and winning numbers 19 to 27 are allocated as winning numbers that include a bonus combination. By assigning in this way, if the winning numbers are 0 to 18, it can be immediately determined that it is either winning or replay winning information. If the winning number is 19 or more, a process for generating winning information relating to the bonus combination and winning / replay winning information from the winning number is performed.

<Winning information generation table>
A specific example of the winning information generation table is shown in FIG. The winning information generation table shown in FIG. 94 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored at the address. In the example shown in FIG. 94, the address is shown in hexadecimal (H) and the data is shown in decimal (D).

  As shown in FIG. 94, data 19D is stored at address 1300H, data 38D is stored at address 1301H, data 52D is stored at address 1302H, and data 53D is stored at address 1303H. The data 54D is stored in the address 1304H, the data 57D is stored in the address 1305H, the data 71D is stored in the address 1306H, the data 72D is stored in the address 1307H, and the data 1308H is stored in the address 1308H. Data 73D is stored.

  The address 1300H corresponds to the winning number 19, the address 1301H corresponds to the winning number 20, the address 1302H corresponds to the winning number 21, the address 1303H corresponds to the winning number 22, and the address 1304H is Corresponding to winning number 23, address 1305H corresponds to winning number 24, address 1306H corresponds to winning number 25, address 1307H corresponds to winning number 26, and address 1308H corresponds to winning number 27. .

  The data of the winning information generation table is determined from (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information) shown in FIG. The data stored in the winning information generation table is determined by (data) = (bonus winning information corresponding to the winning number) × 19D + (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number).

  For example, address 1300H corresponds to winning number 19, and referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of winning number 19) = 1D, (winning / replay winning information corresponding to winning number 19) = 0D. Therefore, the data of the address 1300H becomes 19D by calculating 1D × 19D + 0D. The address 1303H corresponds to the winning number 22, and referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of the winning number 22) = 2D, (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number 22) = 15D. Therefore, the data of the address 1303H becomes 53D by calculating 2D × 19D + 15D. Furthermore, the address 1308H corresponds to the winning number 27, and referring to FIG. 10, (bonus winning information of the winning number 27) = 3D, (winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number 27) ) = 16D. Therefore, the data of the address 1308H becomes 73D by calculating 3D × 19D + 16D. The values calculated in advance in this way are stored in each of the addresses 1300H to 1308H of the built-in ROMC 110. In other words, (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information) are encoded by the above-described formula, and the values are stored in the addresses 1300H to 1308H of the built-in ROMC 110, respectively.

<Process for determining winning information>
The winning numbers determined by the role lottery means are stored in the A register and the L register. Next, a comparison operation between the data stored in the A register and the value 19D is executed. Specifically, a process of subtracting 19D from the data stored in the A register is executed. If the carry flag is not set to 1 by this calculation process, the winning information generation table shown in FIG. 94 is referred to. The comparison operation between the data stored in the A register and the value 19D is a process for determining whether or not to refer to the winning information generation table.

  When the data stored in the A register and the value 19D are compared with each other and the data stored in the A register is less than 19D (when the carry flag = 1), the data is stored in the L register. The stored data is stored in the built-in RAMC 120 as winning / replay winning information.

  When the data stored in the A register and the value 19D are compared, and the data stored in the A register is 19D or more (when the carry flag is not 1), the following processing is executed. To do.

  First, 12EDH is stored in the HL register. This 12EDH is an address value obtained by subtracting 13H (19D) from 1300H. In the following processing, a target address is determined using 12EDH as a reference address.

  The target address is obtained by adding the A register to the address value (12EDH) stored in the HL register. In other words, the address value (12EDH) stored in the HL register is the reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register is the offset value. In this manner, the target address is obtained by using the reference address and the offset value, and the data stored in the target address is read and stored in the A register.

  Next, the value stored in the A register is divided by 19D, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the L register. The value (quotient) in the A register is (bonus winning information), and the value (remainder) in the L register is (winning / replay winning information). By doing so, it is possible to decode into (bonus winning information) and (winning / replay winning information).

  Next, the information stored in the A register is stored in the built-in RAMC 120 as bonus winning information, and the information stored in the L register is stored in the built-in RAMC 120 as winning / replay winning information.

<Example 1 When the winning number determined by the role lottery means is 19D (13H) and 19D is stored in the A register>
The carry flag = 1 is obtained by executing a comparison operation between the data 19D stored in the A register and the value 19D. Based on this result, 12EDH (HL register) + 13H (A register) is calculated. As a result, the target address becomes 1300H, and the data 19D of 1300H is read out and stored in the A register, so that A register = 19D.

  Next, 19D stored in the A register is divided by the value 19D, and the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the L register. The quotient is 1D and the remainder is 0D. As described above, the address 1300H corresponds to the winning number 19. Therefore, it can be decoded that (bonus winning information) of the winning number 19 is 1 and (winning / replay winning information) of the winning number 19 is 0.

<Example 2 When the winning number determined by the role lottery means is 21D (15H) and 21D is stored in the A register>
The carry flag = 1 is obtained by executing a comparison operation between the data 21D stored in the A register and the value 19D. Based on this result, 12EDH (HL register) + 15H (A register) is calculated. As a result, the target address becomes 1302H, and the data 52D of 1302H is read and stored in the A register, so that A register = 52D.

  Next, 52D stored in the A register is divided by the value 19D, and the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the L register. The quotient is 2D and the remainder is 14D. As described above, the address 1302H corresponds to the winning number 21. Therefore, the winning number 21 (bonus winning information) is 2 and the winning number 21 (winning / replay winning information) is 14.

<<< Process to determine production group number from winning / replay winning information >>>
Processing for determining the production group number from the winning / replay winning information will be described.
In the processing on the main control board M side, the winning / replaying winning number is stored in the RAM, and when the bonus combination is won, the winning number of the bonus combination is stored in another storage area of the RAM. In the main control board M, an effect group number determination table is stored in the ROM. The effect group number determination table is used to determine the effect group number from the winning / replay winning number. For the winning / replay winning numbers, the production group number determination table is defined redundantly. By referring to the effect group number determination table, the effect group number can be determined from the winning / replay winning number. The effect group number determination table stores effect group numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of addresses. An effect group number can be determined by determining an address from the winning / replay winning number and reading the effect group number stored in the address.

<Direction group number>
The production group number is information corresponding to the winning / replaying winning information and information in which at least a part of information is grouped. This effect group number is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. For example, push order replays with fluctuations in RT can be grouped into the same effect group number, and push order bells with different payout numbers can be grouped into the same effect group number.

<< Example 1 of production group number determination table >>
The effect group number determination table is a table for specifying the effect group number by using the winning / replay winning information as an offset value. The effect group number determination table is stored in the built-in ROMC 110. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a first specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it is referred to as a production group number determination table 1. The effect group number determination table 1 shown in FIG. 95 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored at the address. In the example shown in FIG. 95, the address is shown in hexadecimal (H) and the data is shown in decimal (D).

  As shown in FIG. 95, data 0D is stored at address 1200H, data 1D is stored at address 1201H, data 2D is stored at address 1202H, and data 3D is stored at address 1203H. , Data 4D is stored at address 1204H, data 4D is stored at address 1205H, data 4D is stored at address 1206H, data 5D is stored at address 1207H, and address 1208H is stored at address 1208H. Data 5D is stored, data 5D is stored at address 1209H, data 5D is stored at address 120AH, data 5D is stored at address 120BH, data 5D is stored at address 120CH, Data 6D is stored at address 120DH, and The data 120D is stored in the address 120EH, the data 8D is stored in the address 120FH, the data 9D is stored in the address 1210H, the data 10D is stored in the address 1211H, and the data is stored in the address 1212H. 11D is stored.

  Address 1200H corresponds to winning number 0, address 1201H corresponds to winning number 1, address 1202H corresponds to winning number 2, address 1203H corresponds to winning number 3, and address 1204H is Corresponding to winning number 4, address 1205H corresponds to winning number 5, address 1206H corresponds to winning number 6, address 1207H corresponds to winning number 7, and address 1208H corresponds to winning number 8. Address 1209H corresponds to winning number 9, address 120AH corresponds to winning number 10, address 120BH corresponds to winning number 11, address 120CH corresponds to winning number 12, and address 120DH is winning Corresponding to number 13, address 120EH corresponds to winning number 14, and address 120FH is Corresponding to the winning number 15, the address 1210H corresponds to the winning number 16, the address 1211H corresponds to the winning number 17, the address 1212H corresponds to the winning number 18.

<Determination of production group number>
1200H is stored in the HL register, and winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning lottery means is stored in the C register. Next, the effect group number can be obtained by adding the value of the C register to the value of the HL register and reading the value stored at the address of the built-in ROMC 110 indicated by the added value. In other words, 1200H stored in the HL register is the reference address, and the winning / replaying winning information stored in the C register is the offset value. In this way, the target address can be obtained by using the reference address and the offset value, and the data stored in the target address can be read to obtain the effect group number.

  For example, when the winning number 7 is determined by the winning lottery means, 1207H is obtained by 1200H + 7D. The data corresponding to the address 1207H of the effect group number determination table 1 is 5, and the effect group number can be determined to be 5. When the winning number 12 is determined by the winning lottery means, 120CH is obtained by 1200H + 12D. The data corresponding to the address 120CH in the effect group number determination table 1 is 5, and the effect group number can be determined to be 5.

<< Example 2 of production group number determination table >>
In the example 1 of the effect group number determination table described above, an example is shown in which an effect group number determination table in which one effect group number is associated with one address of the built-in ROMC 110 is used. An effect group number determination table may be defined in association with two effect group numbers. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a second specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it is referred to as a production group number determination table 2. The effect group number determination table 2 shown in FIG. 96 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored at the address. In the example shown in FIG. 96, the address is indicated by a hexadecimal number (H) and the data is indicated by a binary number (D). In FIG. 96, the symbol “/” is inserted between the upper and lower order to clearly indicate the separation between the upper 4-bit data and the lower 4-bit data. In practice, the data consists only of 0 and 1.

  Of the data stored in the effect group number determination table 2, the lower 4 bits of data correspond to even-numbered winning numbers, and the upper 4 bits of data correspond to odd-numbered winning numbers. Specifically, the following measures are taken.

  As shown in FIG. 96, 0001 / 0000B is stored in the address 1200H. The lower 4 bits of 0000 correspond to the winning number 0, and the upper 4 bits of 0001 correspond to the winning number 1. The address 1201H stores 0011 / 0010B. The lower 4 bits 0010 correspond to the winning number 2, and the upper 4 bits 0011 correspond to the winning number 3. The address 1202H stores 0100 / 0100B. The lower 4 bits 0100 correspond to the winning number 4, and the upper 4 bits 0100 correspond to the winning number 4. The address 1203H stores 0101 / 0100B. The lower 4 bits 0100 correspond to the winning number 4, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5.

  Further, 0101 / 0101B is stored in the address 1204H. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5. At address 1205H, 0101 / 0101B is stored. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5. The address 1206H stores 0110 / 0101B. The lower 4 bits 0101 correspond to the winning number 5, and the upper 4 bits 0110 correspond to the winning number 6. The address 1207H stores 1000 / 0111B. The lower 4 bits 0111 correspond to the winning number 7, and the upper 4 bits 1000 correspond to the winning number 8. The address 1208H stores 1010 / 1001B. The lower 4 bits 1001 correspond to the winning number 9, and the upper 4 bits 1010 correspond to the winning number 10. The address 1209H stores 0000 / 1011B. The lower 4 bits 1011 correspond to the winning number 11.

<Determination of production group number >>
1200H is stored in the HL register, and winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning lottery means is stored in the A register. Next, a shift operation for shifting the data in the A register to the right is executed. By this shift operation, if the carry flag is 1, it can be determined that the winning / replaying winning information is an odd number, and if the carrying flag is 0, the winning / replaying winning information is determined to be an even number. can do. If the winning / replaying winning information is an odd number, the upper 4 bits of the data stored in the built-in ROMC 110 may be read. If the winning / replaying winning information is an even number, the data is stored in the built-in ROMC 110. It is only necessary to read out the lower 4 bits of the stored data.

  Further, as described above, since the data in the A register is shifted to the right, the value of the winning / replay winning information is divided by two. Since this value indicates a relative distance (offset value) from the address 1200H, the address from which the value is to be read can be calculated by adding the A register to the HL register.

  When the winning / replaying winning information is an odd number, the higher 4 bits and lower 4 bits of the data stored in the address are exchanged, and the logical grouping with 00001111B is performed to obtain the effect group number stored in the upper 4 bits. Can be obtained. When the winning / replay winning information is an even number, the effect group number stored in the lower 4 bits can be obtained by performing the logical product of the data stored in the address and 00001111B as it is.

  In this way, the production group number stored in the production group number determination table 2 can be determined by determining the address and the upper 4 bits or the lower 4 bits.

<< Example 3 of production group number determination table >>
As described above, the effect group number determination table is a table for specifying the effect group number using the winning / replay winning information as an offset value. The effect group number determination table is stored in the built-in ROMC 110. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a third specific example of the effect group number determination table. Hereinafter, it is referred to as a production group number determination table 3. The effect group number determination table 3 shown in FIG. 97 is a table showing the correspondence between the address of the built-in ROMC 110 and the data stored at the address. In the example shown in FIG. 97, the address is shown in hexadecimal (H) and the data is shown in binary (B).

  The effect group number determination table 3 shown in FIG. 97 is a table for specifying the effect group number by counting the value (1 (or 0)) defined corresponding to the winning / replay winning information. .

  As shown in FIG. 97, data 01111001B is stored at the address 1200H, data 00000111B is stored at the address 1201H, and data 11100000B is stored at the address 1202H.

  Address 1200H corresponds to winning numbers 0-7, address 1201H corresponds to winning numbers 8-15, and address 1202H corresponds to winning numbers 16-18. Specifically, the seventh bit of address 1200H corresponds to winning number 0, the sixth bit of address 1200H corresponds to winning number 1, the fifth bit of address 1200H corresponds to winning number 2, and the address 1200H The fourth bit corresponds to winning number 3, the third bit of address 1200H corresponds to winning number 4, the second bit of address 1200H corresponds to winning number 5, and the first bit of address 1200H corresponds to winning number 6 Correspondingly, the 0th bit of the address 1200H corresponds to the winning number 7.

  The seventh bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 8, the sixth bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 9, the fifth bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 10, and the fourth bit of the address 1201H. Corresponds to the winning number 11, the third bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 12, the second bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 13, the first bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 14, The 0th bit of the address 1201H corresponds to the winning number 15.

  Further, the seventh bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 16, the sixth bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 17, and the fifth bit of the address 1202H corresponds to the winning number 18.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the winning numbers 0 to 18, the effect group number of one winning number is the same effect group without changing the value as compared with the case where the effect group number of the immediately preceding winning number is increased by 1. It may be a number. For example, the effect group number of the winning number 3 is 3, the effect group number of the winning number 2 immediately before the winning number 3 is 2, and the effect group number of the winning number 3 corresponds to the effect group number of the winning number 2 It has increased by one. Further, the effect group number of the winning number 11 is 5, the effect group number of the winning number 10 immediately before the winning number 11 is 5, and the effect group number of the winning number 11 is the same as the effect group number of the winning number 10 Does not change.

  The effect group number determination table 3 is a table configured by paying attention to such a change in the effect group number. When the effect group number of one winning number is increased by 1 with respect to the effect group number of the immediately preceding winning number, the value corresponding to the one winning number is set to 1 and does not change with respect to the immediately preceding effect group number. In this case, the production group number determination table 3 is defined by setting the value corresponding to one winning number to 0.

  In the example described above, the effect group number of the winning number 3 is 3, the effect group number of the winning number 2 immediately before the winning number 3 is 2, and the effect group number of the winning number 3 is the effect group of the winning number 2 Since the number is incremented by 1, the value corresponding to the winning number 3 is set to 1 (see the fourth bit of the address 1200H). Further, the effect group number of the winning number 11 is 5, the effect group number of the winning number 10 immediately before the winning number 11 is 5, and the effect group number of the winning number 11 is the same as the effect group number of the winning number 10 Therefore, the value corresponding to the winning number 11 is set to 0 (see the fourth bit of the address 1201H). That is, the value of the change in the production group number is stored in the production group number determination table 3 in association with the winning number.

  As described above, in the example 3 of the effect group number determination table, it is sufficient to secure an area of 1 bit for one winning number, and the table data to be stored in the built-in ROMC 110 can be compressed.

<Determination of production group number>
First, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read and stored in the HL register, and the value obtained by adding 1H to the winning / replay winning information corresponding to the winning number determined by the winning lottery means is stored in the C register. Let Further, 8H is stored in the B register. Next, a shift operation is performed on the data stored in the HL register as the number of times the value stored in the C register is shifted. In this process, an operation for shifting to the left is performed, and the number of times the carry flag is set to 1H is counted during the shift operation, and the counted result is the effect group number.

  If the value stored in the C register is less than 8, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out, stored in the HL register, and shifted with respect to the data stored in the HL register. Perform the operation. The number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is counted by this shift operation, and the counted result is set as an effect group number.

  Further, when the value stored in the C register is 8 or more and less than 16, first, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out, stored in the HL register, and stored in the HL register. A shift operation is performed for the number of times the carry flag is set to 1H. Subsequently, the data stored in 1201H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is performed on the data stored in the HL register, the number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, In addition to the counting result, the added result is set as an effect group number. As described above, when the value stored in the C register is 8 or more and less than 16, the effect group number can be acquired using the data stored in 1200H and 1201H of the built-in ROMC 110.

  Furthermore, when the value stored in the C register is 16 or more and less than 19, first, the data stored in 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out, stored in the HL register, and stored in the HL register. A shift operation is performed on the data, and the number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is counted. Subsequently, the data stored in 1201H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is performed on the data stored in the HL register, the number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, Is added to the counting result. Further, the data stored in 1202H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out, stored in the HL register, a shift operation is performed on the data stored in the HL register, the number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is counted, In addition to the counting result, the added result is set as an effect group number. As described above, when the value stored in the C register is 16 or more and less than 19, the effect group number can be acquired using the data stored in 1200H, 1201H, and 1202H of the built-in ROMC110. .

  In this way, according to the value stored in the C register, the data stored in 1200H to 1202H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read, and the total number of times that the carry flag becomes 1H is calculated, thereby producing the effect. A group number can be acquired.

<Example 1 When the winning / replay winning information is 0D>
First, since the winning / replaying winning information is 0D, the number of times of shifting is 0D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 and storing it in the HL register, an operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left by one time is executed. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is 0D by the shift operation, and “0” is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 2 When the winning / replay winning information is 5D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 5D, the number of times of shifting is 6 times by 5D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 and storing it in the HL register, an operation for shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left by 6 times is executed. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is 4D by the shift operation, and “4” is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 3 When the winning / replay winning information is 10D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 5D, the number of times of shifting is 11 times by 10D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored in the address 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 and storing it in the HL register, an operation is first performed to shift the data stored in the HL register to the left by eight times. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H by the shift operation is 5D.

  Furthermore, since the number of times of shifting is 8 or more, next, 00000111B stored in the address 1201H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out and stored in the HL register, and then the data stored in the HL register is 2 Performs an operation that shifts to the left by the number of times. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H is 5D by the shift operation, and “5” is determined as the effect group number.

<Example 4 When the winning / replay winning information is 18D>
First, since the winning / replay winning information is 18D, the number of times of shifting is 19 by 18D + 1D. Therefore, after reading 01111001B stored at address 1200H of the built-in ROMC 110 and storing it in the HL register, an operation of shifting the data stored in the HL register to the left by 8 times is executed. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H by the shift operation is 5D.

  Further, since the number of times of shifting is 8 or more, next, 00000111B stored in the address 1201H of the built-in ROMC 110 is read out and stored in the HL register, and then the data stored in the HL register is set to 8 Performs an operation that shifts to the left by the number of times. The number of times the carry flag becomes 1H by the shift operation is 8D by adding 3D.

  Further, since the number of times of shifting is 16 or more, next, 11110000B stored in address 1202H of built-in ROMC 110 is read out and stored in the HL register, and then the data stored in the HL register is 3 Performs an operation that shifts to the left by the number of times. The number of times the carry flag is set to 1H by the shift operation is further 3D added to 11D, and “11” is determined as the effect group number.

  In the example described above, an example in which the effect group number is determined by counting the number of 1B included in the data stored in the effect group number determination table 3 is shown. The production group number may be determined by counting the number of 0B included in the recorded data.

  By determining the effect group number by the determination method exemplified above and defining the rare role and non-rare described later by the effect group number, it is possible to create a gaming machine with reduced complicated processing.

<<< Determining process for Idama group number >>>
When the winning number is determined by the role lottery means, the lottery table is referred to. The lottery table stores a winning number, a numerical value for comparison with a random number, and the like. Further, the lottery table number is determined together with the winning number with reference to the lottery table. For this reason, the so-called lottery table also stores data corresponding to the outgoing ball group number. This payout group number is a number used when performing a lottery (AT lottery, AT extra lottery, AT state lottery, etc.) related to the instruction function.

  This winning group number is assigned in correspondence with the winning number, but not necessarily in one-to-one correspondence. For some winning numbers, a duplicate outgoing group number may be assigned. is there. The lottery table can be configured by prescribing all the information for each of the winning numbers, but if the information regarding duplicated ball group numbers is also prescribed, the lottery table capacity increases and the lottery table It is necessary to process the information read from the main control board M, and the processing on the main control board M must be complicated. For this reason, when the lottery table is defined, the information regarding the duplicated payout group numbers can be reduced by including the information indicating that the lottery table number is duplicated, and the main control board M can be reduced. It is possible to improve the efficiency by simplifying the processing in.

  FIG. 98 is a table showing an example of a lottery table. In addition, in FIG. 98, the case where there are six winning numbers of 7 to 12 as the winning numbers having a payout group number of 2 is illustrated. The first row of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that the winning number is designated and that the winning number is 7D. The second row of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that the information regarding the appearance group number is duplicated and that the number of times of duplication is 6D. The third row of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that it is data indicating a payout group number and that the payout group number is 2D. The fourth line of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that the numerical value (determination value, probability data) is 2 bytes. The fifth row of the table shown in FIG. 98 is data indicating that the actual number (determination value, probability data) is 2034D.

  In the example shown in FIG. 98, the winning number is 7, and the condition device (name) is data of winning-A1 (see FIG. 10). As shown in FIG. 10, the condition device (name) with the winning number 8 is winning-A2, the condition device (name) with the winning number 9 is winning-A3, and the condition device (name) with the winning number 10 Is the winning-A4, the condition device (name) with the winning number 11 is the winning-A5, and the condition device (name) with the winning number 12 is the winning-A6. The winning group numbers of these winning numbers 7 to 12 are both 2 and are defined in duplicate. As described above, when the information regarding the winning group number is defined for each of the winning numbers 7 to 12 for each winning number, the capacity of the lottery table must be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 98, data indicating that the number of times of duplication is 6 is stored in the second row. For this reason, it is possible to omit the information regarding the winning ball group numbers for the winning numbers 8 to 12, and the capacity of the lottery table can be reduced. Furthermore, with respect to the winning numbers 8 to 12, it is possible to omit the process of reading out the information regarding the payout group number from the lottery table, and the process can be simplified and speeded up.

  By configuring as described above, a plurality of states relating to the AT are provided, the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 on the main control board M side, and the push order navigation on the effect display device on the sub control board S side, Is notified in an appropriate display mode based on the state relating to the AT, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained.

  Next, FIG. 99 is an AT execution effect image diagram 1 applicable to this example. First, the left side of the figure shows the daytime background on the effect display device S40 under the situation where the state relating to AT is “AT state”. The winning navigation display corresponding to “Left → Middle → Right” is displayed as a number (first number display mode group) in a circular figure. Further, in the center of the figure, the daytime background is displayed on the effect display device S40 under the situation where the state relating to the AT is “specialized sign state”, and “winning-A1” (push order bell) is displayed as the condition device. Is selected, and a push order navigation display corresponding to “left → middle → right” is displayed as a number (second number display mode group) in a star-shaped figure. Also, the right side of the figure shows the night background on the effect display device S40 under the situation where the state related to the AT is "addition specialization state", and "winning-A1" (push order bell) as the condition device. Is selected, and a push order navigation display corresponding to “left → middle → right” is displayed as a number (first number display mode group) in a circular figure. Thus, although the background effect is different between the case where the AT-related state is the “AT in-progress state” and the “addition-specific state”, the display mode group of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. Are the same. Further, the background effect is the same in the case where the state relating to the AT is the “AT state” and the “specialized sign state”, but the display mode group of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is different. ing. In the figure, the push order navigation of “left → middle → right” is illustrated as an example, but the same configuration is used when other push order navigations are displayed. Further, in this example, the AT remaining game number is not subtracted by the execution of the game in the “specialization sign state” and the “additional special state”.

  Next, FIG. 100 is an image execution execution image during AT that can be applied to this example. First, in the upper left of the figure, in a situation where the state related to AT is “AT state”, “Winning-A1” which is a push order bell is won, and in the effect display device S40, a circular figure is displayed. A push order navigation display indicating that the stop button D40 is operated in the order of “left → middle → right” is displayed by the drawn numbers (first number display mode group), and at the same time, “left → “= 1”, which is a display corresponding to the pressing order of the “middle → right” stop button D40, is displayed. When the player operates the left stop button D41, which is a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, a display prompting the operation of the middle stop button D42 is displayed as the second stop (of the effect display device S40). The display of “2” in the push order navigation display becomes larger). Next, when the middle stop button D42, which is a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, is operated, a display prompting the operation of the right stop button D43 is displayed as the third stop (the push of the effect display device S40). The display of “3” in the forward navigation display becomes larger). Next, when the right stop button D43 is operated, all the stop buttons D40 are operated in the push order navigation, and the 11 payout bells, which is the maximum payout number, win a prize, so that 11 The game medal is paid out and “GET !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40.

  On the other hand, when the player operates the middle stop button D42, which is a different stop button from the left stop button D41, which is the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, on the left in the upper part of the figure, the effect display device S40. All of the push order navigation displays at are deleted, and “Bad...” Is displayed as a push order failure effect. Next, the operation is performed in the order of the right stop button D43 and the left stop button D41, and the operation of all the stop buttons D40 is finished. However, the stop button D40 is in the order of “middle → right → left” which is the incorrect answer push order. As a result of the operation, any of the condition devices “winning 08” to “winning 10” wins and one game medal is paid out. The effect display device S40 does not display the characters “GET !!!!”. That is, when the stop button D40 is operated in the correct push order according to the instructions in the push order navigation, there is a payout that is the maximum payout number (the most advantageous payout number in the selected condition device) and the player Is displayed on the effect display device S40, but when the stop button D40 is operated in the incorrect order of pressing, the order of pressing when the stop button for incorrect answer is operated. Even when a message indicating that the navigation has failed is displayed and all the stop buttons D40 have been operated, the effect display device S40 is configured not to display an effect congratulating the player. It should be noted that “GET!” Is not displayed when the reels are stopped in the push order that is the maximum payout number of 11 payouts, but according to the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. “GET!” Is displayed depending on whether or not the reel is stopped. That is, the reels are stopped in the order of “middle → right → left” in the state where the push order “left → middle → right” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the push order navigation, and the maximum payout number is set. Will be displayed on the effect display device S40. In the state related to AT where the push order navigation is not displayed such as “normal game state”, if the player wins the push order bell and the player stops the reel in any push order, the correct answer will happen by chance. Even when 11 payouts are obtained, “GET!” Is not displayed on the effect display device S40. Similarly, with regard to the push order failure effect, similarly, the push order failure effect is displayed by stopping the reels in the push order in which the maximum payout number of 11 sheets is not paid out (being 1 payout). Instead, the push order failure effect is displayed depending on whether or not the reels are stopped without following the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. That is, the reels are stopped in the order of “middle → right → left” in the state where the push order “left → middle → right” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as the push order navigation, and the maximum payout number is set. Even when a bell is won, a push order failure effect is executed in the effect display device S40. When the stop button is operated in a pressing order different from the correct pressing order, the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 is displayed until (1) the reel related to the third stop is stopped. (4) Until the reel related to the stop button is stopped by operating a stop button different from the correct push order until the stop button different from the correct push order is operated. Until it is operated, (5) it may be configured to display until the start lever related to the next game is operated.

  Next, FIG. 101 is an image execution image during AT applicable to this example. First, in the left side of the figure, under the situation that the state relating to AT is “additional specialization state” and the state relating to RT is “RT1”, “replay-C”, which is a replay of 7 forward blacks, is won. In addition, the number of AT games is added and the lottery is won (winned by 1/2). In the effect display device S40, the left line is the push order in which black sevens can be aligned with the invalid line (lower line). A push order navigation display corresponding to is displayed as an arrow (display mode by an arrow image), and a message “Aim at 7!” Is displayed. The push order display device D270 is not displayed (push order navigation is not displayed). At this time, a light emitting mode in which the decorative lamp unit D150 of FIG. 1 is used to wave from left to right (for example, the left decorative lamp blinks so as to flow from the bottom to the top, and so on) The right decoration lamp blinks so that it flows from top to bottom, suggesting a left-to-right flow.) By suggesting "left-> middle-> right", etc. Push order navigation may be executed by the lamp unit D150. Thereby, for example, even when there is a situation where the push order navigation cannot be displayed due to the malfunction of the effect display device S40, it can be suggested that the game is a game aiming at 7 in the order of “left → middle → right”. Further, in this example, replay is adopted as a role for aligning 7 matches to invalid lines. However, when a push order bell whose number varies depending on the push order is substituted, the malfunction of the effect display device S40 is fatal. Since it may be a situation, the suggestion of the push order navigation using the decorative lamp unit D150 works more effectively. In the case of the push order bell, even if a problem occurs in the effect display device S40, the push order display device D270 continues to display the push order navigation, but in the case of a new player, the push order display device. Since it is not easy to understand the pressing order represented by the display mode of D270, an insurance role against an irregular situation can be expected by using the lighting mode of the decorative lamp unit D150 that is visually easy to understand. Thereafter, when the stop button D40 is operated in the order of “left → middle → right”, the effect display device S40 displays that “50 games” is added as the number of AT added games. On the other hand, the push order navigation display corresponding to “Left → Middle → Right” is displayed as an arrow (display mode by an arrow image) and the message “Aim at 7!” Is displayed. When the middle stop button (stop button other than the left stop button, which is the correct stop button) is operated in the first stop, the entire screen will be darkened, but the navigation order of the arrows corresponding to “left → middle → right” The display and the message “Aim for 7 !!” are not deleted. After that, when all the reels are stopped, a display indicating that “50 games” has been added as the AT added game number is displayed on the effect display device S40. The number of AT games is added regardless of whether or not the push order navigation is followed, because the AT game number is added and the lottery is won at the time of replay win with 7 forward push blacks. Also, on the right side of the figure, in the situation where the state relating to AT is “additional specialization state” and the state relating to RT is “RT1”, “replay-C” which is a replay with 7 forward blacks is won. In addition, when the number of AT games is added and the lottery is not won (1/2 is not won), in the effect display device S40, the push order in which the black seven is not aligned with the invalid line (lower line) (“left As a push order navigation display corresponding to “push order other than“ middle → right ”), a push order navigation indicating the middle stop button D42 is displayed as a stop button related to the first stop. The push order display device D270 is not displayed. Then, after that, the middle stop button D42 is operated as the first stop button, but the effect relating to the addition of the number of games does not occur. As described above, in this example, “re-game-C1” is a condition device in which the profit for the player is the same regardless of the pressing order, and the AT addition lottery is executed based on the operation of the start lever. That is, whether or not to win the AT extra lottery is determined based on the operation of the start lever, and it is configured so that whether or not the AT extra lottery wins is different depending on the pushing order, but it is shown to the player As an effect for the purpose, when “Re-Game-C” is won and AT is added, and the lottery is won, the push order (“Left → Middle → Right”) that allows Black Seven to align with the invalid line is indicated. As a result, the player can feel as if an extra number of AT games has occurred due to the player arranging black sevens, and the fun of the game is improved. On the other hand, if “Replay-C” is won and AT is added, and the lottery is not won, the order of pushes (except “Left → Middle → Right”) that cannot be aligned with the invalid line is indicated. By doing so, the player does not realize that Black Seven has won the replay that can be aligned to the invalid line, i.e., does not notice that the lottery was not won by adding the number of AT games, so extra stress The game can proceed without feeling. Note that when the reels are stopped in the push order in which the black seven cannot be aligned with the invalid line, the normal replay (for example, replay 01) in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable. In addition, if the number of AT games is not selected and the lottery is not selected, the black game will not be added to the invalid line. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player who has the black sevens in the invalid line feels uncomfortable. In addition, in a state relating to an AT in which normally push order navigation can occur such as “AT state” (sometimes referred to as “AT state”), a particularly high effect can be expected. The same may be performed for a state related to an AT in which forward navigation does not occur (sometimes referred to as non-AT). In this case, unlike AT, push order navigation does not normally occur. For example, when “Replay-C” is won, it is impossible for Black Seven to align with the invalid line. Sudden occurrence of pushing order (other than “left → middle → right”) will lead to a sense of incongruity for the player, but black 7 may accidentally align with the invalid line during non-AT This situation is not desirable because there is a concern that the player may be aware of some special benefit due to the 7 lines in the invalid line. In addition, in the figure, although an example of an effect related to the number of AT games added when winning the “replay-C” which is a forward-pressing black 7 replay and winning the AT extra lottery, The production mode for notifying the additional number of games is not limited to this, for example, when a game is won in the AT extra lottery in a certain game and the remaining AT game number is 50, the game won in the AT extra lottery In the game where the number of remaining AT games is not added, and the game that is won by “replay-C1”, which is a forward 7 black replay in the subsequent game, is placed on the invalid line (lower line). A push order navigation display corresponding to “Left → Middle → Right”, which is the push order in which the Black Seven can be aligned, is displayed with an arrow (display mode by an arrow image) and a message “Aim for 7 !!”. It is shown, wherein by black Seven align disable line (lower line) AT the number of remaining games may be configured to notify the subject that is plus 50 games. Similarly, for “replay-B”, which is a reverse white 7 replay, for example, when an AT extra lottery is won in a certain game and the remaining number of AT games is 50 extra, the AT extra lottery In the game won in the game, the player is not notified that the AT remaining game number has been added, and in the subsequent game, the reverse line is played in the replay white 7 replay “Replay-B”. A push order navigation display corresponding to “right → middle → left”, which is the push order in which white sevens can be aligned, is displayed with an arrow (display mode by an arrow image) and “Aim at 7! May be configured to notify that the number of AT remaining games has been increased by 50 games by aligning white sevens on the invalid line (lower line). In addition, “Replay-C” or “Replay-B” is won and the number of AT games is added to the lottery, and the previous game has already won the AT additional lottery and the number of AT added games related to the winning is determined. If the situation is not informed, the number of AT added games related to the game and the number of AT added games related to the previous game are added together, and at the timing when 7 replays in the game are aligned with the invalid line You may comprise so that the total number of games can be alert | reported.

  Next, FIG. 102 is an AT execution execution image diagram 4 applicable to this example. As shown in the upper left of the figure, when the winning device E- (watermelon B) is won and won as a condition device in the state of being in the AT state, “GET!” Is displayed on the effect display device S40 and added. Will be shown to have won. By winning the prize-E, the player wins the special state transfer lottery and shifts to the state shown in the upper center.

  As shown in the upper center figure, a battle effect is executed, and push order navigation is displayed in the second number display mode group. The state regarding the AT at this time is a “specialized sign state”. Further, the number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigations is 39 games. When the battle effect is performed 10 times and the battle effect is finished, the state shifts to the state shown in the upper right figure.

  As shown in the upper right figure, the image changes to a background image indicating that the battle effect has been won. As a result, the state related to the AT shifts to the “additional special state”. The number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigations is 29 games.

  On the other hand, at the stage shown in the upper left figure, if the winning device E- (watermelon B) is not won as the condition device, the special state transfer lottery is not won and the state shifts to the state shown in the lower center.

  As shown in the lower center figure, a battle effect is executed, and push order navigation is displayed in the first numeric display mode group. The state related to the AT at this time is “AT in-state”. Further, the number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigations is 39 games. When the battle effect is performed 10 times and the battle effect is finished, the state shifts to the state shown in the lower right diagram.

  As shown in the lower right figure, the battle effect is defeated and remains in the “AT state”. The number of times the push order navigation is executed is subtracted, and the effect display device S40 displays that the remaining number of push order navigations is 29 games. In this example, in the “specialized sign state”, the push order navigation is displayed in the second number display mode group at 1/2 of the push order navigation occurrence, and the “AT state” and the battle are being produced. Is configured so that the push order navigation is displayed in the second number display mode group at 1/5 of the occurrence of the push order navigation, and the player performs the push order navigation executed for the battle effect in the second order. By counting the number of times of the number display mode, the player can have a sense of expectation for the battle victory, that is, the transition to the “specialized state of addition”. In addition, it is comprised so that the push order navigation which is a 1st number display mode can also be displayed during execution of a battle production. In addition, you may comprise so that "GET!" Mentioned above may not be displayed on effect display apparatus S40 during execution of a battle effect. Specifically, if the player is in the “AT state” and the battle effect is not executed, the winning bell is won and the reels are stopped in the correct pushing order, and 11 payouts are made. At the same time, “GET!” Is displayed on the effect display device S40, while the “AT state” is displayed and the battle effect is being executed, the push order bell is won, and the reels are placed according to the correct push order. If stopped, there are 11 payouts, but “GET!” Is not displayed on the effect display device S40. By comprising in this way, a player will pay attention to the result of a battle effect, without disturbing the display of a battle effect. In addition, the above-described configuration in which the entire screen is darkened when the push order navigation is not followed (when the stop button is operated in a push order different from the push order navigation) may be applied to the push order bell. As an example, if you are in “AT state” and the battle effect is not being executed, if you win the push order bell and stop the reel in the push order different from the correct push order, the entire screen If it is dark and there is one payout, and it is in “AT state” and the battle effect is being executed, the push order bell is won and the reels are placed in the push order different from the correct push order. When stopped, one sheet is paid out, but the entire screen may not be darkened. By comprising in this way, a player will pay attention to the result of a battle effect, without disturbing the display of a battle effect.

  By configuring as described above, even when the watermelon B is won in the “AT state” and the special transition lottery is not won, the battle effect between 10 games is executed. Each time the player wins the watermelon B in the “AT state”, the player has a sense of expectation for the transition to the “additional special state”, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, during execution of the battle effect, even when the battle effect (defeat) in which the state related to the AT is “AT state” is executed, the battle effect (win) in which the state related to the AT is “specialized sign state” Even during execution, the display of the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 is subtracted every time the game is consumed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult to determine which state is related to the AT during execution of the battle effect, and pay attention to the result of the battle effect.

  Moreover, you may apply the following structures to the rotary type game machine which concerns on this example. Moreover, the following structures may be applied independently and a some structure may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1-1) After lottery of various roles by the main control means (main control board), AT lottery is performed based on one information (combination of condition devices) determined by the lottery result. In the case of), the AT lottery is not always performed.
(1-2) The AT lottery includes an AT lottery state promotion (low probability → high probability) lottery. In this case, the above (1-1) is applied, but the AT lottery state demotion ( When the lottery is performed (high probability → low probability), the above (1-1) is not applied (the lottery is possible even with complete loss).
(A) When the duration of the AT lottery state (high probability) is determined by the number of games, (1-1) is not applied to the game number lottery.
Example 1: The number of games varies randomly even with the same combination of condition devices.
Example 2: After winning the promotion lottery in the AT lottery state, the number of games lottery is separately performed based on the role lottery result (including loss) in the next game and thereafter.
(B) A combination of a method of determining the duration of the AT lottery state (high probability) by the number of games and a method of performing a demotion lottery in the AT lottery state (transition to a demoted lottery after a so-called guarantee period).
(1-3) The AT lottery includes an AT state promotion lottery (non-AT → AT). In this case, the above (1-1) is applied, but the AT state demotion (AT → non-) (AT) When the lottery is performed, the above (1-1) is not applied (the lottery is possible even with complete loss).
(1-4) In the AT lottery, there is a lottery (low probability → high probability) lottery of transition to the specialized AT, and in this case, (1-1) above is applied. (1-1) is not applicable when performing a lottery (high probability → low probability) lottery in the transition lottery state to the specialized AT (the lottery is possible even with complete loss).
(1-5) The AT lottery includes a promotion lottery (AT → specialized AT) to a specialized AT. In this case, (1-1) is applied, but the AT status is demoted (special (1-1), the above-mentioned (1-1) is not applied (the lottery is possible even with complete loss).
In addition, when an AT lottery (any one of (1-2) to (1-5)) is won and a grace period (so-called latent / predictor game) is provided until the state transition, 1-1) does not apply.

<< Point 2 >>
(2-1) After lottery of various roles by the main control means, AT lottery is performed based on one piece of information (combination of condition devices) determined by the lottery result. is there.
(2-2) Information on the AT can be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means at the lottery opportunity (when the start lever is ON) in (2-1).
(2-3) The information that can be transmitted in (2-2) includes at least the AT state type in the game and the AT state type in the next game.
(2-4) Based on the information of (2-3) transmitted in (2-2), the sub-control means determines and executes a series of effect contents corresponding to the game including the AT state transition notification. To do.
(2-5) The main control means does not output information on the AT at the lottery opportunity in (2-1) as the outer end signal / test signal.
After the game ends, only the AT state type determined by the main control means is output.

<< Point 3 >>
(3-1) When the main control means is in the AT state (AT, specialized AT), when it wins a small role in which the number of payouts and / or the RT state changes depending on the pushing order, the main control means The information that can identify the pushing order that is most advantageous to the player is displayed. However, if the small role is not won (reversal, unrestricted small role, 7-side reverse replay that does not change the RT state, Etc.) do not display anything.
(3-2) When the sub-control means is in the AT state (AT, specialized AT), the number of remaining games in the AT state (hereinafter, the number of remaining AT games) and the total number of games consumed in the AT state ( Hereinafter, it is possible to display the total number of AT games (the total net increase number may be displayed).
(3-3) The number of AT remaining games is updated on the basis of the number of remaining games in the AT state transmitted from the main control unit for each game. The AT total game number is updated for each game. Is updated based on the AT status type transmitted from.
Considering the story of the advantageous section, the total number of AT games (including the total net increase number) is cleared when AT → non-AT.
(3-4) The number of remaining AT games can be hidden (or not updated) when in the AT state, but the total number of AT games is not hidden (or not updated) when in the AT state. .
A battle effect state before the end of the AT state, a specialized AT state, etc. are assumed.
(3-5) The AT remaining game number does not display the number of remaining AT games in the AT state transmitted from the main control means, but can display less than that.

<< Point 4 >>
(4-1) There is a case of displaying in a specific display mode on a specific display controlled by the main control means (for example, “= 1” is used to perform 6-pick bell forward push monitor display).
(4-2) When displaying in a specific display mode (example: “= 1”), an operation instruction image (example: 1, 2, 3) is displayed on the image display.
(4-3) When an operation in accordance with the instruction is performed, the image display unit displays a series of effect images A (for example: 1, 2, 3 sequentially corresponding to the operation, and an effect image ( Example: An image that defeats an enemy)) is displayed.
(4-4) If the operation according to the instruction is not performed and it is determined that the operation according to the instruction is not performed, the effect image B (eg, all the operation instruction images are erased from the effect image A, and the incorrect push order is determined. The effect image shown (example: image attacked by the enemy)).
(4-5) In the case of (4-3), when a small combination (e.g., 9 small combination for 6-choice bell correct answer) wins, a winning notification image (e.g., GET) is displayed on the image display. However, in the case of (4-4), even if a small combination (for example, one small combination at the time of 6-option bell incorrect answer) wins, a winning notification image (for example, GET) is not displayed on the image display.
(4-6) Even in the case of (4-4), when the game ends, information on the AT (eg, the number of added games) can be displayed.
(4-7) When a specific error (door error, etc.) occurs when a specific display mode (example: “= 1”) and operation instruction image (example: 1, 2, 3) are displayed The specific display mode maintains the display, but the operation instruction image is not displayed.
It is assumed that the main control means displays an error on a separate display.
(4-8) An effect that prompts the user to operate the sub button when nothing is displayed on the specific display device (when the sub button operation is performed) than when displaying in a specific display mode (eg, “= 1”). It is easy to generate a necessary extra effect).

<< Point 5 >>
(5-1) There is a case of displaying in a specific display mode on a specific display controlled by the main control means (for example, “= 1” is used to perform 6-pick bell forward push monitor display).
(5-2) When displaying in a specific display mode (for example, “= 1”), the first effect image (for example, the push order of 1, 2, 3 + the image during AT) is displayed on the image display. And a case where a second effect image (e.g., a pressing order of 1, 2, 3 + an image during specialized AT and an additional confirmation effect occurs) is displayed.
(5-3) The expectation that the stay period in the AT state is extended is higher when the second effect image is displayed than when the first effect image is displayed.
(5-4) In the game before the game that displays the second effect image, it is possible to execute the sign effect that suggests the display of the second effect image.
(5-5) The second effect image (and the sign effect) is not displayed when the number of AT remaining games is less than a predetermined value (eg, in the battle effect state, when LAST? Game is displayed).

<< Point 6 >>
(6-1) There is a case where the display is performed in a specific display mode (for example, “= 1”) on a specific display controlled by the main control unit.
(6-2) When displaying in a specific display mode (e.g., "= 1"), displaying on the image display device in the first display mode (e.g., 1, 2, 3), and the second display mode (Example: → (arrow symbol)).
(6-3) The first display mode (example: 1, 2, 3) is a display mode in which the pressing order composed of numbers can be specified, and the second display mode (example: → (arrow symbol)) is It is a display mode in which the pressing order composed of other than numerals can be specified.
(6-4) The degree of expectation that the stay period in the AT state is extended is different between when the first display mode is displayed and when the second display mode is displayed.
Even when the second display mode is displayed, if the operation according to the pressing order is not performed, the basic operation of point 4 is followed.

<< Point 7 >>
(7-1) The first lottery result (for example, the correct push order is left → middle → right push order bell) and the second lottery result with the same payout number regardless of the push order (example) : Common bell).
(7-2) When the first lottery result is determined and when the second lottery result is determined, the profit related to the instruction function is different (for example, AT addition: first lottery result> second Lottery results).
(7-3) When the first lottery result is determined during the notification game, a specific display mode (eg, “= 1”) is displayed on a specific display controlled by the main control means, and an image is displayed. The display is also displayed on the instrument in a display mode in which the pressing order can be specified.
(7-4) When the second lottery result is determined during the notification game, the push order is displayed on the image display.
(7-5) When the second lottery result is determined during the notification game, the degree of expectation that the stay period of the notification game is extended differs depending on whether the push order is displayed on the image display or not. * When the second lottery result is determined during the notification game, when the push order is displayed on the image display, or when the operation according to the push order is not performed, the basic operation of point 4 is followed.

<< Point 8 >>
(8-1) The first lottery result is a lottery result in which the number of payouts varies depending on the pressing order.
(8-2) When the first lottery result is determined inside the bonus, the reels are controlled to stop so that the number of payouts becomes the same regardless of the pressing order.
(8-3) When the first lottery result is determined during the information game and inside the bonus, a specific display mode (eg, “= 1”) is displayed on a specific display controlled by the main control means. ) Is displayed, and the image display is also displayed in a display mode in which the pressing order can be specified.
(8-4) When the first lottery result is determined during the information game and when the bonus is not inside, and when the first lottery result is determined during the information game and inside the bonus Thus, the same specific display mode (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the specific display, but different display modes can be displayed on the image display (for example, in the former case, 1 · 2.3. In the latter case, → (arrow symbol)).
In the latter case, if the operation according to the pressing order is not performed, the basic operation of point 4 is followed.
(8-5) In the case of (8-3), if an effect to win a bonus is displayed in the previous game, the display is erased.
(8-6) Information related to AT (eg, number of added games) cannot be displayed during a notification game and inside a bonus.
If the additional amount is confirmed, but the additional amount has not been notified, the notification is postponed until after the inside of the bonus is removed (during bonus game, after the bonus is over).

<< Point 9 >>
(9-1) The first lottery result (for example, the push order replay in which the first stop is left and the high RT is maintained), and the second lottery result (the advantage degree does not change depending on the pushing order) E.g. Special Replay).
(9-2) When the second lottery result is determined, a game in which a specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed and the push order is notified (eg: AT addition is determined (done) or specialized zone) And a game in which a specific symbol combination is not notified of the pressing order that can be stopped and displayed.
(9-3) An image controlled by the sub-control means without notifying the specific display controlled by the main control means when notifying the push order in which the specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed. The display unit notifies the pressing order.
(9-4) When the second lottery result is determined and the notification of the pressing order in which the specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (hereinafter referred to as reverse pressing 7 notification) is performed, the specific symbol combination (eg, 7 replays) is prepared. Even if it is not (even if there is a miss in the line), information on the AT (eg, the number of additional games) can be displayed at the end of the game.
(9-5) When the second lottery result is determined and no reverse press 7 notification is made, even if a specific symbol combination (example: 777 replay) is prepared, information on AT (example: extra game) at the end of the game Number) is not displayed.
(9-6) When the first lottery result is determined, the reverse push 7 notification is not displayed, but when the third lottery result (normal replay without push order) is determined, the reverse press 7 notification is issued. Can be displayed.
(9-7) The reverse push 7 notification can be maintained even when the operation according to the reverse press 7 notification is not performed (when the reverse press is not performed or when 7 is not stopped at the first stop). .

<< Point 10 >>
(10-1) The first lottery result (for example, the push order replay in which the first stop is left and the high RT is maintained), and the second lottery result (the advantage degree does not change depending on the pushing order). E.g. Special Replay).
(10-2) The second lottery result has a higher probability of winning in the second RT (high RT that is more likely to stay during the notification game) than in the first RT.
(10-3) When the second lottery result is determined, a game in which a specific symbol combination is informed of the pressing order that can be stopped and displayed (for example, when an AT addition is determined (done), or a specialized zone And a game in which a specific symbol combination is not notified of the pressing order that can be stopped and displayed.
(10-4) When the second lottery result is determined after the notification game is finished and before the first RT falls to the first RT, the specific symbol combination cannot be stopped and displayed. Is notified.
After the notification game is finished and before the fall from the second RT to the first RT, it is determined that the AT lottery will not be performed (10-5) In the case of (10-4), a specific symbol combination ( (Example: 777 replays) Even if the game ends, information about AT (eg, number of added games) is not displayed.
(10-6) When the first lottery result is determined, the same effect as the case of (10-4) is not displayed, but when the third lottery result (normal replay without pushing order) is determined. The effect similar to the case of (10-4) can be displayed.

<< Point 11 >>
(11-1) The correct pressing order of the pressing order small combination (or replay) is 6 choices, and the operation order from the first stop to the third stop is notified to the image display during the notification game.
(11-2) The correct pressing order of the pressing order replay (or small role) is three choices, but the operation order from the first stop to the third stop is notified to the image display during the notification game.
(11-3) In the case of (11-1) and the case of (11-2), the display mode when the operation order is notified on the image display device is the same (color, shape, etc. Is not informed).
In the case of (11-2), since there are two choices of correct answer in 3 choices and incorrect answer or incorrect answer in 3 choices as a case where the operation in accordance with the push order is not performed, each has a different effect. Let it be an action.

(Third embodiment)
The execution mode of the effect that can be applied to the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example is not limited to the configuration described above. Therefore, a configuration of a rotating type gaming machine having a configuration related to a performance execution mode different from the configuration described above will be described in detail as a third embodiment.

  First, FIG. 103 is a list of symbol combinations in the third embodiment. In the figure, only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail. First, “replay 06” corresponding to 68 in FIG. 104 is a symbol combination that can be transferred (promoted) to RT1, and when the RT state is “RT0” or “RT4”, “replay 06”. When the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to (RT1) (promotion). “Replay 07” corresponding to No. 69 is a symbol combination that can shift to “RT4”, and when the RT state is “RT1”, the symbol combination that becomes “Replay 07” is stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to “RT4”.

  Next, FIG. 104 is a list of condition devices in the third embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may also be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the third embodiment, the replaying roles are replaying-A to replaying-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), replaying -E1 to E3 (winning numbers 28 to 30) and replaying -F1 to F3 (winning). No. 31 to 33) are provided, and the re-playing combination for stop display can be different depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Here, in the third embodiment, as shown in the item of “conditional device breakdown” in the rightmost column, according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. A plurality of types of condition devices can be displayed in a stopped state. Among the plurality of types of condition devices, the condition devices having the same winning number are grouped together, and the “condition device” in the third column from the right It is shown in the item. Specifically, for example, in the “re-game-A” that is a condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, “re-game” is selected according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three kinds of condition devices “01”, “replay 02”, and “replay 03” can be stopped and displayed. In addition, a condition device relating to replay such as “replay 01” may be referred to as a re-playing role, and a condition device in which a game medal is paid out by winning a prize such as “winning 01” may be referred to as a small role. A conditional device that starts a BB when a stop display such as “1 type BB-A” is displayed may be referred to as a BB role. In addition, when winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB role and the small role will be won, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the selected small role will stop. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the small role is not displayed without stopping, and the symbol corresponding to the small role is stopped and displayed. When the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42 and right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop display (cannot be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small role does not stop and is displayed. Is configured to stop display. Specifically, for example, in the case where “1 type BB-B + winning-C”, which is the condition device of the winning number 21, is won, cherry that is “winning 12” or “winning 13” and “1 type BB” Any of the black sevens that are “−B” can be stopped. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of the left reel M51 → the middle reel M52 → the right reel M53, (1) symbol numbers 0 to 4 on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop (FIG. 6). When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which the reel is positioned), the symbol number 4 corresponding to “winning 12” stops on the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52 Regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, “winning 12” is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are positioned on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, “winning 13” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to is stopped, and “winning 13” is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are positioned on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, “1” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to the “species BB-B” stops. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, “1” is placed in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to the “type BB-B” is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located in the lower stage of the right reel M53 in the third stop. In this case, symbol number 17 corresponding to “1 type BB-B” is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, “1” is placed in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to the “type BB-B” cannot be stopped, and neither of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

  Next, in the “role” item, the role of the “condition device” is illustrated. The “normal replay” corresponding to the winning number 1 is not related to the order of pressing the stop button. This is a conditional device related to replay in which a re-gamer whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and “reverse pressed white 7 replay” corresponding to the winning number 2 is shifted to the RT state regardless of the stop button pressing order. This is a condition device related to replay in which a re-playing role that is not to be stopped is displayed, but the symbol number of the right reel M53 is reversed by reverse pressing (stopping the reel in the order of right reel M53 → middle reel M52 → left reel M51). Operate the stop button at the operation timing when the range of No. 18-2, the range of symbol numbers 9-13 of the middle reel M52, the range of symbols No. 5-10 of the left reel M51 are located in the lower stage of each reel By doing , Right reel M53, "white Seven" is stopped and displayed in the lower part of the center reel M52 and left reel M51, white Seven has been configured to appear to be aligned in the lower part when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game that was won by Re-Game-B and won the AT extra lottery, the player was elected to the AT extra lottery by performing an effect (details will be described later) to instruct to aim at “White Seven” by pressing it in reverse. It is comprised so that it can alert | report to a player. “Forward-pressed black 7-match replay” corresponding to the winning number 3 is a conditional device related to a replay in which a re-gamer whose RT state does not shift is stopped regardless of the press order of the stop button. The reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, the right reel By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is positioned at the lower stage of each reel, “Black Seven” is displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Is displayed in a stopped state, and when viewed from the player, the black sevens appear to be aligned at the bottom. In addition, in the game that was won by Re-Game-C and won the AT extra lottery, the player was elected to the AT extra lottery by performing an effect (details will be described later) instructing to aim for “Black Seven” by pushing forward. It is comprised so that it can alert | report to a player.

  In addition, “RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 4 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated). ), The re-playing combination that can be stopped and displayed is different. When the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the “re-play 01” and “re-play 02” do not change the RT state. Alternatively, when “re-play 03” is stopped and the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the RT state shifts from “non-RT”, “RT1” or “RT3” to “RT0”. The possible “replay 04” is stopped and displayed. In addition, “RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 5 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated). If the first stop reel is the middle reel M52, “re-game 03” that does not transition to the RT state is stopped and displayed. When the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the “re-game 04” that can shift from “non-RT”, “RT1” or “RT3” to “RT0” is stopped and displayed. The In addition, “RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 6 determines which of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 the first stop reel (operates which stop button is operated). If the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the RT state does not shift to “re-game 01” or “re-game 03”. "" Is stopped and the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the RT state can change from "non-RT", "RT1" or "RT3" to "RT0" 04 "is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the “push order bell 123” to “push order bell 321” corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 and 35 to 40 may have different winning combinations depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected. For example, in the case of “123”, “left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53” is pushed. For example, in the case of “winning prize A-1” (winning number 7), the maximum is “123” = “left → middle → right”. The symbol combination “winning 01” that can be obtained 11 game medals, which is the acquired number, is stopped and displayed. Note that “123” in the “push order bell 123” indicates the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of sheets obtained for the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in the pressing order other than the pressing order in which the maximum number of acquired sheets can be acquired, that is, if the correct answer cannot be made in the pressing order, one sheet is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as “AT in progress state”, the push order of the re-game player and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states with different profit margins of the player not navigating the pushing order to the states relating to AT. The state related to AT will be described later.

  In addition, the “common bell” corresponding to the winning number 13 can acquire 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of winnings, even if any of winning prizes 04 to 07 stops, that is, the maximum profit is obtained regardless of the pushing order. It is a condition device that can be acquired, and is sometimes called a push order unquestioned bell. In addition, “Watermelon A” corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the parallel line. For example, the 60th prize in FIG. No. 14 has three watermelons A in the middle of each reel. In addition, “Watermelon B” corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily arranged in an oblique line. For example, the 66th prize in FIG. In the case of No. 16, three watermelons are aligned obliquely downward, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, “BB medium and weak rare role (diagonal bell alignment)” corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device that can align three bells on the active line, which will be described later, but won during BB. This is a condition device in which an AT addition lottery is executed. Also, “BB medium-rare small role (V-shaped bells)” corresponding to the winning number 18 is a conditional device that can stop and display the bell on the upper stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. As will be described in detail later, this is a condition device in which an AT addition lottery is executed by winning during BB.

  In addition, “RT promotion RP1 ** (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 28 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated). ) Is a condition device that can be displayed in different replays, and when the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the “replay 01” in which the RT state does not shift is stopped. If the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the “re-game 06” in which the RT state can shift from “RT0” or “RT4” to “RT1” is stopped and displayed. In addition, “RT promotion RP * 1 * (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 29 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated). If the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the RT state does not change to “replay 01” or When “re-game 02” is stopped and the first stop reel is the middle reel M52, “re-game 06” that can shift from “RT0” or “RT4” to “RT1” is stopped and displayed. Is done. In addition, “RT promotion RP ** 1 (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 30 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated). Depending on whether or not the re-gamer displayed in a stopped state may be different, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the “replay 01” in which the RT state does not shift, When “re-game 02” or “re-game 03” is stopped and the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the RT state can change from “RT0” or “RT4” to “RT1”. “Game 06” is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the “specialized transition RP1 ** (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 31 determines which of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is the first stop reel (which stop button is selected). Depending on the operation, the re-game player displayed in a stopped state may be different. When the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the RT state does not shift to “re-game 01” Is stopped and the first stop reel is set to the left reel M51, the “replay 07” in which the RT state can shift from “RT1” to “RT4” is stopped and displayed. In addition, the “specialized transition RP * 1 * (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 32 determines which of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 the first stop reel (which stop button Depending on whether or not the re-playing combination that is displayed in a stopped state may be different, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the RT state does not shift “replay 01 ”Or“ re-game 02 ”is stopped and displayed, and when the first stop reel is the middle reel M52,“ re-game 07 ”that can change the RT state from“ RT1 ”to“ RT4 ”is stopped and displayed. . In addition, “specialized transition RP ** 1 (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 33 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is selected). Depending on whether or not the re-playing combination that is displayed in a stopped state may be different, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the RT state does not shift “replay 01 ”,“ Re-play 02 ”or“ Re-play 03 ”is stopped and the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the RT state can be changed from“ RT1 ”to“ RT4 ”. "Is stopped.

  Next, in the item of “bonus winning information”, a numerical value from 0 to 3 is assigned to each winning number. In the third embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number that includes 1 type BB-A as the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role) (19 ) For bonus winning information 1, for winning numbers (20-23) including 1 type BB-B, 2 for winning numbers (24-27) including winning type 1 (BB-C) Three. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which BB is established and which BB combination is won. Details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item of “winning / replay winning information”, numerical values from 0 to 24 are assigned for each winning number. In the third embodiment, a winning number that does not include a re-playing role and a small role (a winning number 0 corresponding to a loser and a winning number 19, 20, 24 corresponding to a bonus) is 0 for winning / re-game winning information. 1 to 24 winning / replaying winning information is distributed for each condition device with respect to a winning number including a replaying role or small role. By storing the winning / replay winning information by the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which replaying combination or small combination has been won. Details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item “production group number”, numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned for each winning number. By transmitting the production group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the production executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. Details of the production group number will be described later.

  Next, a numerical value from 0 to 17 is assigned to each winning number in the item “departure group number”. The main control board M stores the outgoing ball group number, and the stored outgoing ball group number is used when executing a lottery related to the AT (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery), and the lottery processing related to the AT is executed. Program and data capacity can be reduced. Note that even if a condition device with a payout group number of 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT extra lottery are not executed. On the other hand, when a conditional device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, AT lottery or AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the outgoing ball group number will be described later. In addition, even when a condition device with a payout group number of 0 is won, an AT lottery or AT lottery may be executed. In such a case, the payout group number is It is preferable that the lottery result is always lost (non-winning) when the condition device that becomes 0 is won and the AT lottery or the AT lottery is executed.

  Next, FIG. 105 shows a lottery in which winning numbers (conditional device numbers, also called winning roles) and bonuses (also called BB, BB roles) related to the small role and replaying role in the third embodiment are determined by the role lottery means. It is a list showing probabilities (also called winning rates). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

  First, the lottery probability in “RT0”, “RT1”, “RT2”, “RT3”, “RT4” and “non-RT” when the BB is not operated will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, the lottery probability of the winning combination (especially the replaying combination) can be different depending on the RT state, and the “replaying combination” (the lottery probability totaling all the replaying combinations) is In the case of “RT1”, the lottery probability is higher than in other RT states. In addition, “re-game 04” (a so-called falling re-game player, “RT1” and a bonus corresponding to the re-game player in a situation where a bonus is not won can be displayed with winning numbers 4-6. If the combination is stopped and displayed, it will be easier to win (appear) in “RT1” and “RT0”, “RT2” and “RT3” than “RT1”. It is difficult to appear, and “RT4” is configured not to appear at all. In “RT0” and “RT2”, “replay 04” that can be stopped and displayed with the winning numbers 4 to 6 can appear, but even if “replay 04” is stopped and displayed, the RT state Does not migrate. If “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed in “RT1”, the transition to “RT0”, that is, the fall effect (eg, the effect display device S40) that informs that the RT state has fallen. If “replay 04” is stopped and displayed in “RT2”, the fall effect may not be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that BB has been won because the fall effect has not been executed even though “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed. Can increase the sex. In such a configuration, the sound effect output when “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed, and a re-game player other than “re-game 04” (for example, “re-game” in which the RT state does not shift) 01 ”) may be configured to differ from the sound effect that is output due to the stop display, and by doing so, the player recognizes that“ re-game 04 ”is stopped and displayed. It can be configured easily. In addition, a state related to AT in which push order navigation does not occur (for example, “normal gaming state”, sometimes referred to as non-AT gaming state) and a state related to AT in which push order navigation can occur (for example, “ “RT1” may be stayed in both cases of “AT state” and sometimes referred to as AT gaming state). At this time, when a winning number that may shift (fall) from “RT1” to “RT0” is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall in a non-AT gaming state is generated. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. As a result, in the non-AT gaming state, the RT state can be shifted without making the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to “RT0”. On the other hand, in the AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-game player who does not fall the RT state is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). Thus, the player can take care that the RT state does not fall, and can operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified. In addition, “re-game 05” that can be stopped and displayed with the winning number 2 or 3 (re-player who can be notified that the lottery has been won by adding the AT when stopped and displayed in the AT state) appears as “RT 1” It is supposed to be. In addition, the transition of the state regarding the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination serving as the re-gamer will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the third embodiment, the push order navigation device that informs the player of the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. Yes. It should be noted that there is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. Further, in the third embodiment, the bonus is configured to be able to overlap with the small role, and watermelon A (winning-D), watermelon B (winning-E), cherry (winning-C), replay (replaying) It overlaps with a part of game-A) and a push order bell (winning-A1-A6). Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23, the winning numbers 25 to 27, and the winning numbers 34 to 40 are condition devices in which the bonus and the small combination or re-playing combination overlap. It should be noted that “RT0” and “non-RT” may be configured such that the winning probability of the re-gamer and the type of re-gamer to be won are similar or overlapped. Is configured so that the performance tendency executed on the sub-control board S side is also similar, so that it becomes “non-RT” after executing the RAM clear, and thereafter, it becomes “RT0” which is the RT state with the highest stay ratio throughout all games. Even in the case of transition, it is easy for the player to always feel as if he / she is staying at “RT0”, and the game can proceed without any sense of incongruity.

  Also, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB is won and the BB is not activated, the BB role of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (a single role that does not overlap with the small role) In the case of winning a BB combination, which may be referred to as a single BB combination or a single BB), a new winning combination for the BB combination is invalid and only a small combination is effective. Specifically, for example, in the case of “RT2” and winning 1 type BB-A (carrying over), when winning “1 type BB-C” of winning number 24 1 type BB-C related to the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as in the case where the winning number 0 “losing” is won. Note that the one-type BB-A carried over continues to be in a winning state. In the situation of “RT2”, since BB has been won and BB has not been activated, the winning combination of winning numbers 21 to 23 and winning numbers 25 to 27 and the winning combination BB If the overlapping condition device is won, the new winning combination of BB is invalid and only winning of the small combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of “RT2” and winning 1 type BB-A (carrying over), winning number 21 “1 type BB-B + winning C” is won 1 type BB-B related to the winning number 21 is invalid, and only the winning prize C is valid. That is, the situation is the same as in the case where the winning number 14 “winning-C” is won. Note that the one-type BB-A carried over continues to be in a winning state. Note that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small combination, and may overlap with a part of the re-playing combination. For example, a part of the re-game players with the winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus. As described above, the bonus is won even when the conditional device including the RT transition replay is won by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device including the RT transition replay (replaying player who can transition to the RT state). There is a possibility, and even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so that the player can be expected. In such a configuration, control is performed so that the RT state does not shift even when the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have transitioned to the RT state (transition to a RT state with a relatively low replay probability), but the replay probability has not become low (frequently replayed), etc. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the fun related to the game, such that the possibility of winning the bonus is high.

  “RT3” is an RT state after the completion of the first type BB-A to the first type BB-C. If the AT lottery is not won, push order navigation does not occur, so that the re-games -D1 to D3 are won and "re-game 04" is stopped to display "RT0" ( In this example, it is configured to shift to the “low probability state” after the end of the BB in the situation where the AT lottery is not won). On the other hand, when the AT lottery is won, the state related to the AT after the end of the BB is the AT preparation state 1, and in the AT preparation state 1, push order navigation occurs. The state will shift to “State 2 → AT state”. In “RT3”, re-game-E1 to re-game-E3 (winning numbers 28 to 30) and re-game-F1 to replay-F3 (winning numbers 31 to 33) are configured not to win. On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to “re-game 04” included in re-game-D1 to re-game-D3 (winning numbers 4 to 6) is stopped and displayed, “RT0” (AT ready state 2) is entered. To do.

  Furthermore, “RT4” is a combination of symbols corresponding to “replay 07” included in replay-F1 to replay-F3 (winning numbers 31 to 33) when in a specialized sign state (RT1) described later. Is an RT state to which a transition is made when is displayed in a stopped state. Specifically, when the replay-F1 to the replay-F3 are won when in the specialized sign state (RT1), and the symbol combination corresponding to “replay 07” is stopped and displayed according to the push order navigation, Transition to the specialization state (RT4). Further, when the player is not in the special sign state (RT1), in other words, when the player does not have the right to shift to the specialization state (for example, in the AT state), the “replay” is performed without following the push order navigation. When the symbol combination corresponding to “Game 07” is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to the post-fall specialized state (RT4). In “RT4”, replay-E1 to replay-E3 (winning numbers 28 to 30) are configured to win. For this reason, even if it is in the specialization state added or in the specialization state after the fall, the symbol corresponding to “regame 06” included in the replay-E1 to the replay-E3 (winning numbers 31 to 33). When the combination is stopped and displayed, the process returns to RT1.

  Next, the lottery probability at the time of “type 1 BB-A, B, C operation” that is during BB operation will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, during the BB operation, the “common bell” of the winning number 13 and the “BB medium rare rare role (diagonal bell alignment)” of the winning number 17 and the “BB medium strong rare small” of the winning number 18 It is configured to be able to win three small roles, "Position (V-shaped bell alignment)", and during operation of the BB selected in "AT state", "BB medium weak rare small role (diagonal bell alignment)" ”Or“ BB medium and strong rare combination (V-shaped bell set) ”, the AT is added and a lottery is executed (details will be described later).

  The lower diagram of FIG. 105 exemplifies a small role lottery probability when the set value is 1, and in the common bell (winning number 13), the lottery probability is uniform regardless of the RT state. However, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the common bell lottery probability is configured to differ depending on the set value (in this example, 6 levels). Specifically, the number in the setting 1 is 3204, the number in the setting 2 is 3404, the number in the setting 3 is 3604, the number in the setting 4 is 3904, the number in the setting 5 is 4204, and the number in the setting 6 is 4504, and the lottery probability increases as the set value increases. By configuring in this way, for example, when a player progresses a game while measuring the number of appearances (winning number) of the common bell, it is related to the gaming machine that is being played by frequently winning the common bell. The game can proceed while expecting that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate. The lottery probability of the common bell is configured to be different depending on the set value. However, depending on the winning of the common bell, the AT lottery, the AT extra lottery, and the high probability state transition lottery described later are not executed. It is configured so as not to affect the state transition lottery (also referred to as AT lottery).

  Next, referring to the block diagram of FIG. 106, an electrical schematic configuration of a spinning cylinder type gaming machine P according to the third embodiment will be described. First, in the spinning machine according to the third embodiment, a sub-control board S, a door board D, a spinning board K, a power board E, a relay board IN, with a main control board M that controls the progress of the game as a center. The setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, and the like are connected so as to exchange data. The solid line portion in the figure shows the movement related to the exchange of data, and the broken line portion in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN and the door board D without going through the main control board.

  The main control board (may be referred to as main control means, main board, main control means, main board, and main game unit) M is a board that governs the progress of the entire game performed in the revolving game machine P. A main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and a CPU C 100, a built-in ROM C 110, a built-in RAM C 120, and the like are mounted on the main control chip C so as to be able to exchange data with each other via a bus. The main control board M receives a signal indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub-control board S, the door board D, and the rotating board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) toward K etc. {For example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information toward the sub-control board S) The sub-control board S can execute the push order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

  Also, the sub control chip SC is mounted on the sub control board (sometimes referred to as sub control means, sub board, sub control means, sub board, sub game unit) S, as with the above-described main control board M. The sub control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC 100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is connected to be exchanged with each other via a bus. The sub-control board S is connected with various LED lamps S10, a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a rotating backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Here, the spinning backlight S30 is a light that is provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control command received from the main control board M, and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the effect display device S40, the rotary backlight S30, etc. The production of.

  On the door substrate D, the above-described insertion acceptance sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, second insertion sensor D30s, stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. The lever D50, the stored game medals (credits) and the inserted game medals are paid out, the settlement button D60 for ending the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying the state of the game (not shown but described above) The inserted number display lamp D210, the operation state display lamp D180, the special game state display apparatus D250, the payout number display apparatus (push order display apparatus) D270, the credit number display apparatus D200, the advantageous section display apparatus YH, etc. , A door switch D80 for opening / closing judgment of front door, cancellation of error and change of set value, are turned on Game medals is determined to be incompatible (or other foreign) blocker D100 like to reimburse the outlet D240 and is connected after. The door substrate D is connected to the main control substrate M described above so as to exchange data. For this reason, when a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, a signal that the insertion acceptance sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M through the door board D.

  In addition, a rotating motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating substrate K. The spinning board K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the spinning motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 by the spinning sensor K20. Yes. Further, in the rotating type gaming machine of the third embodiment, a so-called step motor (stepping motor) is used as the rotating motor K10. In the step motor, 480 steps are set as the number of steps that the reel M50 rotates once. Each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) has a predetermined number of symbols (for example, 20 symbols) having a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set. 24 steps (= 480/20) are set. There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel are changed.

  The medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the action The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s for determining whether or not a medal has been paid out normally and measuring the number of game medals paid out, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

  These various control boards and the power consumed by the boards are supplied from a power supply board E (a board for controlling the presence or absence of power supply by the power switch E10). In FIG. 106, a state in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is indicated by a broken-line arrow. As shown in the figure, power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub-control board S, and various boards (door board D, rotor board K, relay board IN) Electric power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and this electric power is converted into a DC voltage of a specified voltage and then supplied to each control board and board.

  In addition, the main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting / reset that can execute setting value change, error cancellation, and the like. Button M30 is connected. In addition, the main control board M has a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stop of the reel M50 (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53), and an “AT state” which is a state relating to AT that is advantageous to the player. AT lottery means for executing AT transition lottery for shifting to AT, and AT extra lottery for increasing the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the “AT state” And AT addition lottery means to be executed.

  Next, FIGS. 107 to 131 are flowcharts showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the third embodiment.

  The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (illustrated by rectangles), judgments (illustrated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start / end / return, etc. (illustrated by rounded rectangles). ing. Moreover, when the details are illustrated in another flowchart among the processing steps, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are also developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraudulent actions is prevented from being executed.

  First, FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M after turning on the power of the spinning-reel game machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, after turning on the power of the revolving game machine P in step 1000, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a timer interrupt in step 1002 (here, the timer interrupt is not started but the timer interrupt is not started). Only the type of interrupt is set. In the subsequent processing, when a timer interrupt is started, a flowchart related to timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area, power-off / power-off recovery) To check whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held), and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

  In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completion flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). Whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1018. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer stored in the process at power-off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M reads the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off process completion flag and returns to the process at the time of power-off according to the returned stack pointer.

  If NO in step 1016, in step 1024, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If NO in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). To set). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If NO in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step The check result at 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines and sets the RAM initialization range to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM ( For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to Step 1034. The range not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area for storing the set value (set value data). The total number of games in the “advantageous section”, the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous area + Normal section + standby section) As a result of calculating the number of games, the stay ratio of the “advantageous section”, and the like are also not included in the initialization range of the RAM. By configuring in this way, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the “favorable section” in the game (advantageous section ratio). The advantageous section ratio calculation process is configured to calculate at the timing when the unit game ends. The advantageous section ratio is displayed when the gaming machine is turned on (for example, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at intervals of 5 seconds in the order of “advantageous section ratio → continuous character ratio per 6000 games → characteristic ratio per 6000 games → cumulative continuous character ratio → cumulative character ratio”. Is displayed. The continuous character ratio is “the number of payouts when the RB is in operation / the total number of payouts”. / Total number of payouts ”. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1028, in step 1032 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM as a specific range including a storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM. Set (for example, set in the register area), and go to Step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

  Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area or the like) mounted on the main control board M is not a value at which a special game is executed. (In order to prevent a special game from being erroneously executed when a process for determining whether or not to execute a special game is executed due to noise or fraud immediately after the program processing is started). Although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured, and the byte storing information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to configure to store only the information related to the random number (not to store other information such as various timer values) (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise etc. To prevent rewriting of information related to random numbers).

  Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 107, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initialized with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting value (setting value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed from 1 to 6, initialization of the RAM is executed, and when the set value becomes “0”, it is necessary to return to “1”. Therefore, in this example, the normal range of the setting value (setting value data) is managed as 0 to 5, thereby correcting the setting value (setting value data) after executing the initialization of the RAM (step 1106 and The processing in step 1108) can be eliminated, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = a value that is most disadvantageous for the player) in the setting value (setting value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the number-of-payout display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, “88” for lighting all the segments). Then, a setting value is displayed on a setting display LED (not shown) (the display relating to the setting value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) held in the RAM), and Step 1112 Migrate to As described above, the number-of-payout display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure occurs in a part of a 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be lit), an incorrect information can be notified when the push order is notified. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, it is possible to confirm whether or not 7 segments have failed by causing the payout number display device D270 to turn on all the “7” segments during operation of the setting change device. Providing profits can be prevented. Further, as a configuration relating to the display of the set value, storage of a set value display RAM for storing data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value (set value data). It may be configured to have an area and display the set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the processing of step 1110, processing for transmitting a command indicating that the mode is changed to the setting change mode is executed to the sub-control board S side.

  Next, in step 1112, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current setting value (setting value data) (when the added setting value (setting value data) exceeds 5) In this case, the set value (set value data) is 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. Note that if the result of Step 1112 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processing in steps 1112 to 1116 is looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process in step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, if Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and the setting display LED (not shown) Clear the display of set values (set value data). Next, in step 1122, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the RT state after the next game as “non-RT”. Note that “non-RT” is an RT state that is shifted to after RAM clear execution, and in the situation of “non-RT”, the overflow of the push order bell is stopped and displayed to “RT0”. (RT state transition will be described in detail). Next, in step 1124, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as a “low probability state”. Next, in step 1126, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a game section after the next game as a normal section. Next, in step 1128, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH (it is turned off at the time of power-off and is kept off without being newly turned on), and the game progress of step 1200 Transition to control processing. Thus, in the third embodiment, when the setting change device control process is executed, in other words, when the RAM clear is executed, the RT state is “non-RT”, and the state related to the AT is “low probability”. The “state” and the game section are configured as “normal section”.

  Here, the processing of step 1122, step 1124, step 1126, and step 1128 is configured to be executed by the processing of step 1034 of FIG. 107 described above (processing that executes initialization of the RAM within the determined initialization range). May be. Specifically, as the processing of step 1034, (1) “0” (data corresponding to “non-RT”) is stored in the address (storage area) for managing the RT state, and (2) the state related to the AT is managed. “0” (data corresponding to “low probability state”) is stored in the address (storage area) to be played, (3) “0” (data corresponding to “normal section” is stored in the address (storage area) for managing the game section ) Is stored, and (4) “0” (data corresponding to the turn-off of the advantageous section indicator YH) is stored in the address for managing the turning-on / off of the advantageous section indicator YH. May be. Note that the address (storage area) for managing the RT state is either the initialization range (predetermined range) when determined to be Yes in step 1028 or the initialization range (specific range) when determined to be No in step 1028. The initialization range (specific range) that is not included in the initialization range (predetermined range) when determined as Yes in step 1028 but is determined as No at step 1028 may be included. May be included. Further, the RAM initialization process in step 1034 may be executed in the process after step 1118. Specifically, in the case of Yes in step 1028, the processes in step 1102 to step 1118 are performed. After the execution, initialization of the RAM is executed for a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing the set value (set value data). If No in step 1028, the set value (set value data) is stored. The RAM is initialized for the area, and then the processes of step 1102 to step 1118 are executed, and then the RAM is initialized for a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing the setting value (setting value data). You may comprise.

  Next, FIG. 109 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing relating to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 107 (and called in other flowcharts). First, in step 1302, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits interruption (hereinafter, a flowchart relating to timer interruption processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (in this example, 0 to 6, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not output to each output port has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays a set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process Is repeated, and the reset signal is input when the power supply voltage decreases, and the process ends. (That is, since an infinite loop is entered, any operation that prompts a return is not accepted). In the case of No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processing from step 1306 to step 1310 is processing for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information about the error, game progress status at the time of the error, etc. are displayed on the hall computer side. It is possible to output to

  Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initialized with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the upper limit of bets, the effective line for winning, etc.). In step 1203, data for clearing the data used in the previous game {eg, condition device number (winning number), production group number, instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address). (Data) is also included in the RAM. In addition, you may make it comprise so that the number selected when the next game was performed may be overwritten, without clearing a condition apparatus number, production group number, instruction information, etc. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game. Note that the RT state in the first game after the setting change (after the RAM is cleared) is “non-RT”. Next, in step 1205, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the RT state set in step 1204 (command to the sub side). Note that the processing for setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. In step 1704, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub-side, it is not always necessary to transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub-side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a state relating to AT in the game (for example, “AT state”). The state relating to AT in the first game after the setting change (after the RAM is cleared) is a “low probability state”. Next, in step 1207, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the state set in step 1206 (command to the sub control board S side). Further, the process for setting the state related to the AT may be executed in each step described above. Further, it is not always necessary to transmit the state related to the AT to the sub-control board S side, and the state related to the AT is transmitted to the sub-control board S side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. May be. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, “advantageous section”, etc.) in the game. The game section in the first game after the setting change (after the RAM is cleared) is a “normal section”. Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, a subtank (not shown) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H is provided, and a determination is made based on current conduction / non-conduction by a plurality of full detection sensors provided in the subtank (via the medal). If the current is conducted, it is determined to be full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error with a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the current from the sub tank is non-conductive and the set / reset button M30 has been pressed). To do. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), The process proceeds to 1218. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M permits the medal insertion acceptance (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the re-gamer), and the next process (step 1220). The process proceeds to (1). Here, in Step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process formed by the medal flow path). Specifically, when a re-game player is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current storage number (credit) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Run. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the ON process of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, when the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on uniformly. With this configuration, even when a re-game player is established, if the number of stored credits does not reach a predetermined value, a game medal can be inserted, such as “RT1”. When you are staying in an RT state (for example, “RT1”) with a higher probability of winning a re-gamer than in the RT state, or re-playing role that is difficult to understand as a re-playing player Even if the bell-bell-bell on the invalid line or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped, the player can play the game with a good rhythm (without a sense of incongruity).

  Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a game medal is bet and no credit exists. In the case of Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M satisfies the setting display conditions (for example, the conditions are satisfied when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M is set to a setting display LED (not shown, but may be a payout number display device D 270, a credit number display device D 200, or an insertion number display light D 210). A value (set value data) is displayed (transition to the setting confirmation mode), and the process proceeds to step 1221 on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition condition for the setting change mode is satisfied, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode is started to the sub-control board S, and when the setting change mode end condition is satisfied, the setting change mode is set. A process for transmitting a command indicating that the process is to be terminated is executed. In the case of No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes management related to game medal insertion and settlement. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in the third embodiment, insertion of medals). 2), and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (the first input sensor D20s or the second input). When the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been accepted. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the credit is the upper limit number (50 in this example) and the bet number is the maximum number (3 in this example). If the determination is Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state where no medal flow path is formed). If No in step 1230, the process in step 1230 is repeated, and if no in step 1226 or step 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

  Next, in step 1232, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there are remaining credits or bet gaming medals. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and the game The payout of one medal is executed. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in order to detect the payout of medals in the third embodiment). And when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not explicitly shown in the flowchart, only the remaining number of credits is to be settled when the previous game was a re-game player.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing timing of step 1234). . Specifically, whether or not a situation in which it is determined that a medal has not been paid out has continued for a predetermined period of time despite transmission of a hopper drive signal to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). Determine whether or not. If YES in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF). The process proceeds to 1247. On the other hand, if No at step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

  Next, in step 1247, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal on which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If step 1241 or step 1247 is No, the process proceeds to step 1236.

  On the other hand, if No in Step 1232 or Step 1233, the CPU C100 of the main control board M has a valid start lever D50 in Step 1251 (for example, a specified number of game medals for starting a game have been inserted, etc.) ) And whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting value (setting value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). To do. In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M performs processing for acquiring random numbers and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. If the result is No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

  Next, FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a conditional device number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a state in which the AT can be added and lottery is possible. Here, the states related to the AT capable of executing the AT addition lottery according to the third embodiment are “AT in-progress state”, “Additional special state”, “Specialized precursor state”, and “Advantageous BB state”. In the “advantageous BB inside game”, the AT counter value can be greater than 0, but the AT is added and the lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from making it difficult for the player not to make the symbol combination of the BB intentional in the “advantageous BB inside game”. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a lottery by adding AT in “advantageous BB inside game”. In such a case, the AT addition lottery is won in “advantageous BB inside game”. Alternatively, it may be configured not to notify immediately but to notify that the BT is completed and that the AT is added and the lottery is won, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games is added. Further, the third embodiment is configured not to execute the AT addition lottery even in the “specialized state after falling”, the “state during AT after falling”, and the “state after bell overflow”. Since the AT counter value is not subtracted in the “specialized state after falling”, “AT state after falling” and “state after bell overflow”, the player ignores the push order navigation. If it is configured to be able to execute a lottery with AT addition when it shifts to “specialized state after falling”, “AT state after falling” or “state after bell overflow”, it does not follow the push order navigation. There is a risk that you will be more profitable than you follow. Therefore, in the third embodiment, in the “specialized state after the fall”, “the AT state after the fall”, and “the state after the bell overflow”, the AT addition lottery is not executed. In the third embodiment, the AT counter value is not subtracted in the “specialized state after falling”, the “AT state after falling”, and the “post-bell overflow state”. The AT counter value may be subtracted every time the game is executed. In addition, when comprised in that way, you may comprise so that AT addition addition can be performed. In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game number addition execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3100. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1259, the process proceeds to step 3100. In this game number addition execution process, it is possible to execute a lottery using a different lottery table depending on the state related to the AT, but the lottery probability does not vary depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). It is preferable to execute a lottery. Next, in step 3100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a freeze lottery execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

Here, states related to the AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 128).
(1) The “low probability state” is a state in which an AT has not been won (a right to shift to an “AT state” has not been acquired) and a bonus combination has not been won. Note that the “low probability state” is a so-called “normal state” and may be referred to as a “normal state”.
(2) “Normal BB inside game” means that the BB role is won in the “low probability state”, the BB role is not won, and the AT lottery is not won, or In the “waiting for fall” state, the BB combination is won and the BB combination is not won (the AT lottery is not won in the “falling waiting state”).
(3) “Normal BB state” means that when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the situation where the BB role is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery is not won, When the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “waiting for falling” state, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “normal BB inside game” It is a state to be executed.
(4) The “high probability state” is a state where the AT lottery is not won (the right to move to the “AT state” is not acquired) and the bonus combination is not won. In this state, it is easier to win the AT than the “low probability state” described above.
(5) The “AT state” is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted.
(6) The “specialized sign state” is a state in which the right to shift to the “specialized state of addition”, which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easy to add compared to the “AT state”, is acquired. .
(7) “Additional special state” is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily increased compared to the “AT state”.
(8) “Advantageous BB inside game” means winning in the BB role in the “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specializing sign state” or “additional special state”, and the BB role You have not won a prize.
(9) “Standby BB inside game” is a state in which the BB role is won in the “low probability state”, the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not won. .
(10) The “advantageous BB state” is a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role that is won by the BB role in the “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, or “addition special state”. When the display is stopped, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “advantageous BB inside game”, or the BB combination is won in the “low probability state”, and When the AT lottery is won by the BB role and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the “standby BB inside game” It is a state that is sometimes executed.
(11) The “falling waiting state” means that the “AT state” has ended (for example, when the AT counter value becomes 0, or the counter value for counting the number of games in the advantageous section is the upper limit value (1500 games) (When the time has reached), the RT state is a state in which “RT1” is maintained. If the RT state when the “AT state” ends is “RT0” (the RT having the highest stay ratio), the state may be shifted to the “low probability state” instead of the “falling waiting state”. good.

(12) The “AT ready state 1” is a state that shifts on condition that the advantageous BB state has ended, and the RT state is “RT3”. In other words, when the BB ends in the situation where the AT lottery is won, the state shifts to “AT preparation state 1”.
(13) “AT ready state 2” is a state in which the AT ready state 1 has been completed and the RT state is “RT0”.
(14) The “AT state after falling” is a state that can be entered when the stop operation is performed in a pressing order that is different (ignored) from the executed pressing order navigation in the “AT state”. . Specifically, in the “AT state”, any one of “re-game-D1” to “re-game-D3” is won, and the stop operation is performed in a push order different from the push-order navigation, so “re-play 04”. Is a gaming state that is shifted by displaying a stop, and the RT state is “RT0” in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is relatively lower than “RT1”. In the “AT state after falling” state, if any of “Re-play-E1” to “Re-play-E3” is won, push order navigation is executed, and stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation. In this case, the “AT game state” can be restored again by stopping and displaying “RE-GAME 06”.
(15) The “specialized state after falling” is a state that can be shifted to when the stop operation is performed in a pressing order that is different (ignored) from the executed pressing order navigation in the “AT state”. . Specifically, in the “AT state”, “Replay-F1” to “Replay-F3” are selected, and the stop operation is performed in a pushing order different from the push order navigation, so “Replay 07”. Is a gaming state that shifts by displaying a stop, and the RT state is “RT4”, which is the winning probability of a re-gamer of the same level as “RT1”. In the “specialized state after falling”, when any of “re-game-E1” to “re-game-E3” is won, push order navigation is executed, and stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation. This is done, and “re-game 06” is stopped and displayed, so that it can be returned to the “AT state” again.
(16) The “post-bell overflow state” is an “AT state”, “specialization precursor state” or “addition special state”, “after-falling AT state” or “post-fall special state” Sometimes, the state can be shifted to when the stop operation is performed in a push order different (ignored) from the executed push order navigation. Specifically, the “winning-A1” to “winning” in the “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, “additional special state”, “after-falling AT state” or “post-falling special state” -A6 ”is won and one of the“ Winning 08 ”to“ Winning 11 ”stops when the stop operation is performed in a different push order from the push order navigation. Is “non-RT”, which is the winning probability of the re-gamer of the same level as “RT0” and “RT3”. In the case of “after-bell overflow” and “non-RT”, if any one of “replay-D1” to “replay-D3” is won, push order navigation is executed, and the push order navigation is performed. Then, the stop operation is performed and “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed to shift to “RT0”. Further, when “re-game-E1” to “re-game-E3” are selected when “the state after the bell overflow” and “RT0”, the push order navigation is executed, and the push order By performing a stop operation in accordance with the navigation and displaying “re-game 06” in a stopped state, it is possible to shift (return) to the “AT state”.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a reel rotation start preparation process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1260, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts to rotate all reels. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is requested to create a pull-in point (required for determining the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the stop order). And the other reels are appropriately requested according to the stop position of the other reels). In the case of Yes in Step 1261-1, in Step 1261-2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not it is “BB inside game”. Here, “BB inside game” is a general term for “ordinary BB inside game” and “advantageous BB inside game”, and is a state in which BB is won and BB has not won a prize. . In the case of Yes in step 1261-2, the process proceeds to step 1262. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1261-2, in step 1261-3, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell (winning-A1 to winning-A6). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1261-3, in step 1261-4, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point that is the maximum payout number (11 in this example), and proceeds to step 1263. If the answer is No in step 1261-3, the process proceeds to step 1262. Next, in step 1262, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point, and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the “BB inside game”, in the game won in the push order bell, the stop button is not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1) Even when the stop buttons are not stopped in the order of “left → middle → right” (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing the wrong answer), there are 11 symbol combinations to be paid out by the reel stop control. It is configured to win. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance check. Next, in step 1264, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether any stop button (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). Then, the process proceeds to step 1266. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the displayed symbol combination is normal (if it does not coincide with the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal. Is determined). If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261.

  Next, in step 1274, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out game medals {the game medals earned by winning the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, game medals are paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and pays out one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing timing in step 1276). . In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display with a 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in Step 1282, in Step 1283, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF). Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

  Next, in step 1286, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal on which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning that becomes Yes in step 1275) is completed. If Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. If No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

  Next, in step 3400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes RT state transition control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game section transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, a game state transition process, etc.), and proceeds to the next process (step 1202 process).

  Next, FIG. 113 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of Step 3600 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery in which a winning number, a numerical value for comparison with the obtained random number, and the like are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires a winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. The winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if a bonus and a small role are both won, or a bonus and a re-playing role are won, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are determined from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. Specific generation processing will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same appearance group number and the same number for comparison with the obtained random number, and stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board M. It is remembered. For example, the winning group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the same number is set for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 that are push-order re-game players. Since the above-mentioned number is the same for the six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12 that are the push order bell combination, the number of repetitions related to the push order replay game combination is 3, and the push order bell The number of repetitions related to the combination is 6. In addition, the lottery table used when winning numbers 4-6, which are push order re-games, and the lottery table used when winning numbers 7-12, which are push order bells, are acquired as a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

  Next, in step 3610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery is won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the subsequent internal lottery table address is not determined (lottery) and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processing of step 3610 to step 3618 is repeatedly executed until there is no remaining number of repetitions or internal lottery is won. If NO in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address related to the next payout group number), proceeds to step 3604, and proceeds to step 3604. The subsequent processing is executed. The specific process of the internal lottery will be described later.

  Next, FIGS. 114 to 117 are flowcharts of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is a state relating to the AT capable of performing AT lottery. In the third embodiment, the states related to the AT that can execute the AT lottery are “low probability state” and “high probability state”. If the BB is won in the “high probability state”, the game shifts to “advantageous BB inside game”, and then the BB role wins to shift to the “advantageous BB state”, and the executed BB ends. As a result, the state shifts to the “AT state”, and the initial value of the number of AT games is set to 50 times in the AT counter. In addition, when the BB is won in the “low probability state”, the game shifts to “standby BB inside game”, and then the BB role wins, thereby shifting to the “advantageous BB state”. When the executed BB is completed, the state shifts to the “AT state” and the initial value of the number of AT games is set to 50 times in the AT counter. In the “normal game state”, when the BB is won and the AT lottery is also won and the BB is not aligned, the game zone may be “advantageous zone” or “standby zone” It is good also as. In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 3000, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT lottery execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1408. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1402, the process proceeds to step 1408. In the third embodiment, when the state related to the AT is different, the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery (whether it is easy to win or difficult to win the AT lottery) is different. If they are the same, the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same even if the set values are different (if the BB is won in the “high probability state”, the AT win rate is always set regardless of the set value. Win == “Transfer to AT state”)

  Next, in step 1408, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the current AT is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1408, in step 1410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a state promotion role (by winning, a small state that can shift from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state”. It is determined whether or not it is a hand and is a cherry) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is elected with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is ½ and there is no problem if it is changed if it is not different depending on the set value). Execute a high probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1802.

  In the case of No in step 1408, in step 1418, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a state falling role (a role that can be shifted from the “high probability state” to the “low probability state” by winning). In this example, it is determined whether or not the game is replay-A). In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is elected with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/5, and if it does not differ depending on the set value, there is no problem). A low probability state transition lottery is executed. Next, in step 1424, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed low probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the third embodiment, when the state related to the AT is “high probability state”, the game section is “advantageous section”, and when the game section is “advantageous section”, The forward navigation is executed once or more, or a predetermined number of games (1500 games in this example) is configured so that the “advantageous section” does not end unless the “advantageous section” is satisfied. Even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, the “high-probability state” is configured not to end if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation has not been executed once or more. ) If the BB role is elected during the “advantageous section” and the BB is executed, the “advantageous section” can be selected at any timing even if the push order navigation is not executed once in the “advantageous section”. You may be comprised so that it may complete | finish. In the case of Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 1802 also in the case of No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1420, step 1424 or step 1426. Note that such a lottery method is merely an example. For example, after shifting to the “high probability state”, the low probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games (staying in the “high probability state” is guaranteed). ), A lottery that shifts from a “high probability state” to a “low probability state” with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the 10 games have elapsed may be executed. It should be noted that the AT lottery (low-accuracy AT lottery, high-accuracy AT lottery) and the state promotion combination have the same winning probability in all set values.

  Next, in step 1802 shown in FIG. 115, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is the advantageous BB state.

  In the case of Yes in Step 1802, in Step 1804, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the BB end condition is satisfied in the game. In the case of Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as the AT preparation state 1, and ends this subroutine.

  In the case of No in step 1802 described above or in the case of No in step 1804, in step 1808, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the current AT is the AT preparation state 1. In the case of Yes in step 1808, in step 1810, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is re-games -D1 to D3. In the case of Yes in Step 1810, in Step 1812, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  The AT preparation state 2 is included in the state selection candidates related to the AT after the next game in step 1812. As shown in FIG. 118, when the AT state of the game is AT preparation state 1, there are two selection candidates, AT preparation state 1 and AT preparation state 2. When “replay 01”, “replay 02”, and “replay 03” are stopped and displayed, AT ready state 1 is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and “replay 04” is stopped. When displayed, the AT preparation state 2 is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game.

  In the case of No in step 1808 described above or in the case of No in step 1810, in step 1814, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is the AT preparation state 2. In the case of Yes in Step 1814, in Step 1816, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device relating to the game is re-games -E1 to E3. In the case of Yes in Step 1816, in Step 1818, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  The state selection candidates related to the AT after the next game in step 1818 include an in-AT state. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state relating to AT of the game is AT ready state 2, there are two selection candidates, AT ready state 2 and AT in-progress state. When “replay 01”, “replay 02”, and “replay 03” are stopped and displayed, AT ready state 2 is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and “replay 06” is stopped. If displayed, the in-AT state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game.

  In the case of No in step 1814 described above or in the case of No in step 1816, in step 1820, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is an in-AT state. If YES in step 1820, in step 1822, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (11 in this example). Here, in the third embodiment, when the AT-related state is “AT state”, the AT counter value is 11 or more, in other words, when the AT remaining game number is 11 games or more, the watermelon When the right to transition to the “specialized state of addition” can be acquired with a probability of 1/2 when winning B, and the state of AT can be shifted to the “specialized precursor state”, while the state related to the AT is “in-AT state” If the AT counter value is 10 or less, in other words, if the number of AT remaining games is 10 games or less, even if winning the watermelon B, a lottery (special (Which may also be referred to as “specialized state transition lottery”), and is not configured to shift to the “specialization sign state” and the “additional special state”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 10 or less, a lottery to win the watermelon B and acquire the right to shift to the “additional special state” (also referred to as a special state transfer lottery) May be configured so that the watermelon B is won in the situation where the AT counter value is 10 or less and the right to transition to the “additional specialization state” is granted. When winning the lottery to be won, it may be configured so that the next game winning the lottery can be (specialized sign state) or “additional special state” (can move to), or the AT counter value It may be configured to be able to enter (or move to) a “specialized sign state” or “additional special state” when the game becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or a game won in the lottery After the execution of a predetermined number of games, "Plus specialized state" and can become (may transition to) as may be configured. In addition, it is not always necessary to go through the “specialization sign state” when shifting to the “additional special state”. For example, the configuration is such that it can directly shift from the “AT special state” to the “additional special state” May be. In the case of Yes in Step 1822, in Step 1824, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a lottery to acquire the right to transfer to the special transition role ("addition special state") for the condition device related to the game. It is determined whether or not it is a watermelon B) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1824, in step 1826, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a special state transition lottery to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2). Next, in step 1828, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialized state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in Step 1828, in Step 1830, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “specialized sign state”.

  After step 1830, if step 1820, step 1822, step 1824 or step 1828 is No, the process proceeds to step 1832. In step 1832, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a specialized sign state. In the case of Yes in Step 1832, in Step 1834, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is re-games −F 1 to F 3. In the case of Yes in Step 1834, in Step 1836, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  The selection candidates for the state related to the AT after the next game in the process of step 1836 include an added special state. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state regarding the AT of the game is a special indication state, there are two selection candidates, a special indication state and an additional special state. When “re-play 01”, “re-play 02”, and “re-play 03” are stopped and displayed, the special sign state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and “re-play 07” is stopped. When displayed, the added special state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game.

  In the case of No in Step 1832 described above or No in Step 1834, in Step 1840, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is an in-AT state. In the case of Yes in step 1840, in step 1842, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device relating to the game is “re-game-F1” to “re-game-F3”. In the case of Yes in step 1842, in step 1844, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a state selection candidate related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  The state selection candidates related to the AT after the next game in the process of Step 1844 include a special state after the fall. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state related to the AT of the game is an in-AT state, there are two selection candidates: an in-AT state and a post-fall specialization state. When “re-game 01”, “re-game 02”, and “re-game 03” are stopped and displayed, the in-AT state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and “re-game 07” is stopped and displayed. If it is, the special state after the fall is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game.

  In the case of No in step 1842 described above, in step 1846, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is “re-game-D1” to “re-game-D3”. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1846, in step 1848, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  The state selection candidates related to the AT after the next game in the process of step 1848 include the post-falling AT state. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state relating to the AT of the game is an in-AT state, there are two selection candidates: an in-AT state and an after-falling AT state. When “replay 01”, “replay 02”, and “replay 03” are stopped and displayed, the state during AT is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and “replay 04” is stopped and displayed. If it is, the post-falling AT state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game.

  In the case of No in step 1840 described above, in step 1850, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is an added special state or a special precursor state. If Yes in step 1850, or No in step 1846, in step 1852, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the condition devices related to the game are “winning-A1” to “winning-A6”. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in Step 1852, in Step 1854, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  The state selection candidates related to the AT after the next game in step 1854 include a post-bell overflow state. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state relating to the AT of the game is an in-AT state, there are two selection candidates: an in-AT state and a post-bell overflow state. When “winning 01” to “winning 03” are stopped and displayed, a state during AT is selected as a state related to the AT after the next game, and “winning 08” to “winning 11” is stopped and displayed. The state after the bell overflow is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game. In addition, when the state related to the AT of the game is the specialization state, there are two selection candidates: the specialization state and the post-bell overflow state. When “Winner 01” to “Winner 03” is stopped and displayed, the specialization state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and “Winner 08” to “Win 11” is stopped and displayed. The state after the bell overflow is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game. Furthermore, when the state regarding the AT of the game is a special sign state, there are two selection candidates, a special sign state and a bell overflow state. When “Wind 01” to “Win 03” is displayed in a stopped state, a special sign state is selected as a state related to the AT after the next game, and “Wind 08” to “Win 11” is stopped and displayed. The state after the bell overflow is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game.

  In the case of No in Step 1850 and in the case of No in Step 1852, in Step 1856, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state related to the AT is a special state after a fall or an AT state after a fall. Determine. In the case of No in step 1856, in step 1862, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a state after the bell overflow. In the case of Yes in Step 1862, in Step 1864, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current RT state is RT0.

  In the case of Yes in step 1856, in the case of Yes in step 1864, in step 1858, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is re-games -E1 to E3. In the case of Yes in step 1858, in step 1860, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate for the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the winning condition device, This subroutine ends.

  The state selection candidates related to the AT after the next game in the process of Step 1860 include an in-AT state. As shown in FIG. 118, when the state relating to the AT of the game is the post-fall special state, there are two selection candidates: the post-fall special state and the AT in-progress state. When “re-play 01”, “re-play 02”, and “re-play 03” are stopped and displayed, the special state after the fall is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and “re-play 06” is selected. When the stop display is made, the in-AT state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game.

In addition, when the state related to the AT of the game is in the AT state after the fall, there are two selection candidates: the AT state after the fall and the AT state. When “re-play 01”, “re-play 02”, and “re-play 03” are stopped and displayed, the post-falling AT state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and “re-play 06” is selected. When the stop display is made, the in-AT state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game.

  Further, when the state relating to the AT of the game is a post-bell overflow state and the RT state is RT0 (hereinafter referred to as a post-bell overflow state (RT0)), the post-bell overflow state ( There are two states: RT0) and AT status. When “replay 01”, “replay 02”, and “replay 03” are stopped and displayed, the post-bell overflow state (RT0) is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game. When “06” is stopped and displayed, the in-AT state is selected as the state relating to the AT after the next game.

  In the case of No in step 1858 described above, in the case of No in step 1862, or in the case of No in step 1864, in step 1870, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M satisfies the condition for shifting to the fall waiting state in the game. Determine whether or not. Here, when the state related to the current AT is an in-AT state and the AT counter value is newly set to 0 in the game (the number of AT remaining games disappears), the condition for shifting to the fall waiting state is set. Satisfy. In the case of Yes in step 1870, in step 1872, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as a fall waiting state.

  After step 1872 or in the case of No in step 1870, in step 1440, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a state related to the AT after the next game has not been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1440, in step 1442, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state transition condition regarding the AT is satisfied (for example, the number of precursor games in the “specialized precursor state”). Satisfies when 10 games are consumed). In the case of Yes in step 1442, in step 1444, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game, and ends this subroutine. Further, if No in step 1440 or No in step 1442, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

  In the third embodiment, the AT winning rate is different depending on the lottery state. If the BB role is won in the “low probability state”, the AT lottery is won by 1/5 (winning) In the case of having won, the game moves to the “AT state”). On the other hand, if the BB role is won in the “high probability state”, the AT transfer lottery must be won (then the “AT state”). Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and the condition device A which is a predetermined condition device serves as an AT lottery role, and “high probability state A” and “high probability state B” as states related to the AT which is an “advantageous section” When the condition device A is won in the “high probability state A”, the AT transition lottery is won in 1/10, and the condition device A is won in the “high probability state B”. In that case, it is possible to win the AT transfer lottery by 1/2. It may be. If the AT transfer lottery is won, the state relating to AT shifts to “AT ready state” which is a preparation state until the state shifts to “AT in-progress state”, and then a predetermined end condition (for example, “AT ready state”). It may be configured to transition to the “AT state” when 10 games have passed since the transition to the “state”.

  Next, FIG. 119 is a flowchart of AT lottery execution processing according to the subroutine of Step 3000 in FIG. 114 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3002, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination (in this example, a BB combination). A condition device in which the small combination and the BB combination overlap is also included. In the case of Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3004, in step 3006, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game as the advantageous BB internal game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1408). Here, when the BB serving as a transition opportunity ends, an initial value (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter, and the state shifts to the in-AT state. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3004, in step 3008, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example). Next, in step 3010, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as a game inside the standby BB, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1408). Here, when the BB serving as a transition opportunity ends, an initial value (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter, and the state shifts to the in-AT state. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3010, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game as a normal BB internal game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1408). Even in the case of No in step 3002, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1408).

  The AT state is started after the AT preparation state 2 is completed and the initial value (50) is set in the AT counter. In addition, AT preparation state 1, AT preparation state 2, addition special state, special indication state, advantageous BB inside game, advantageous BB state, post-fall AT state, post-fall special state, and bell overflow state Then, the AT counter value is not subtracted (see FIG. 124).

  Next, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of conditional device number management processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replaying winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, winning / replaying winning related to the game) Set commands related to information. Next, in step 1454, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game has a pushing order (a condition device having a different winning combination depending on the pushing order, such as “winning-A1”). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a pressing order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, The number is stored in a RAM address (an address different from the RAM address for displaying push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the order of pressing, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. Note that the instruction number is determined (not shown, but the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number) even when the push order navigation is not executed. In addition, when a pushing order hitting game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the pushing order hitting game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game. Next, in step 1466, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. . In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels that is most profitable to the player in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as push order navigation, push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In the third embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order “left → middle → right” is displayed as “= 1” on the push order display device D270. It is configured to display “= 1” for both the push order bell and the push order replay. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the game related to the push order bell, the case where the push order navigation “left → middle → right” is displayed on the push order display device D270 and in the game related to the push order replay game, “ You may comprise so that it may become a display mode different from the case where the push order navigation of "left-> middle-> right" is displayed on the push order display apparatus D270. That is, the number of types of display of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

  Further, in the case of No in step 1451, in other words, in the case where the game section is “normal section” or “standby section”, or in the case of No in step 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M The mask process is executed on the winning / replay winning information of the game, and the masked information is stored at a predetermined address in the RAM. Here, when the winning / replaying winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replaying winning information is recognized by an illegal act, the high profit related to the game is increased. That is, the pushing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after executing the mask process {the process for concealing the winning / replay winning information (especially the information relating to the pressing order)) to the winning / replaying winning information related to the game. It is configured so that a highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. As a mask processing method in the third embodiment, a plurality of winning / replaying winning information (winning / replaying winning information having the same role is preferable. For example, the RT state shifts depending on the pressing order. A plurality of winning / replaying winning information that can be stopped and displayed as a combination of symbols to be replayed as a single effect group number (for example, winning / replaying winning information 4 to 6 as effect group 4), The production group number is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The mask processing method is not limited to this. For example, after the winning / replay winning information provided (0 to 18 in this example), a new winning / replaying after mask processing is performed. You may comprise so that winning information may be provided. Also in such a case, a plurality of winning / replaying winning information among the existing winning / replaying winning information like the production group number is used as a single winning / replaying winning information after winning / replaying after masking. It is desirable to provide game winning information (for example, winning / replaying winning information 4 to 6 is changed to winning / replaying winning information 19 which is winning / replaying winning information after mask processing)・ Replay winning information)). If it is determined that the game is a game for notifying operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to the AT on the main control board M, the winning / replaying winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, In a game in which the operation information is not notified, the production group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In such a configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side or may not be transmitted.

  Next, in step 1470, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub control board S side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, set in the register area). Then, the process proceeds to step 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub control board S side) related to bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus has been won can be recognized on the sub side). (For example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1259). In the third embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number. The derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, examples of the display of the push order navigation include: (1) When a fall re-playing role is included → Push where a fall re-playing role is not stopped and displayed In the case of navigation in order, (2) in the case of a bell (one-piece combination / 11-piece combination) → the navigation order in which the number of payouts becomes the largest is navigated. As described above, in the third embodiment, when the game section is an “advantageous section”, winning / re-game winning information (type of winning combination and pushing order most advantageous to the player is displayed on the sub-control board S side. ) And instruction numbers (numbers that can specify the most advantageous pushing order for the player), while the game section is a “normal section”, the sub control board The production group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the S side. That is, in the “advantageous section”, the winning / replaying winning information related to the game including the winning / replaying winning information in which the game result and the player's profit differ depending on the pushing order is directly used as the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an “advantageous section”, the winning / replaying information for the game is not transmitted, and the winning / replaying in which the result of the game and the player's profit differ depending on the pressing order. In the case of winning information, the production group number in which the information related to the order is concealed is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  When the game section is not an “advantageous section” (“normal section” or “standby section”), etc., when winning / re-game winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The production process group number is determined by executing the mask process, and the production group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The production group number refers to winning / replaying winning information, winning / replaying winning information related to a winning role having a similar role (for example, a replaying role including a falling replaying role, a push order bell, etc.). Are grouped and assigned numbers. A mask process {process for concealing winning / replay winning information (especially information relating to the pressing order)} is performed on the winning / replaying winning information related to the game, and then transmitted to the sub-control board S. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the information related to the winning / replaying winning information is recognized due to an illegal act and the pushing order (reel stop order) which is a high profit related to the game is recognized.

  Next, FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT is “AT in-progress state”, “specialization precursor state”, or “addition special state”. Note that the AT game number is not added in the post-falling AT state, the post-fall specialization state, and the bell overflow state. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the game group number related to the game is an additional role during AT (a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games in the “AT state”). In this example, whether or not it is a payout group number (1, 3 in this example) regarding “replay-B”, “replay-C”, and “winning-D”) Determine. If Yes in step 1504, the process proceeds to step 1514. Further, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, if the state relating to AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the outgoing group number relating to the game is the upper part of the BB (" In the “favorable BB state”, it is a winning number that can be added to the number of remaining AT games. In this example, the winning group number (5, 6 in this example) for “winning-H”, “winning-I”) It is determined whether or not there is. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. In the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is “additional special state”. In the case of Yes in Step 1506, in Step 1508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M can add the number of AT games remaining in the special role group number for the game (in the “Specialization state for addition”) and In the “AT state”, it is a winning number that does not increase the number of remaining AT games. In this example, “Replay-A”, “Replay-D1” to “Replay-D3”, “Winning-A1” — It is determined whether or not it is a payout group number (2, 13 in this example) regarding “winning-A6”. If Yes in step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1514. If the answer is No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1518.

  Next, in step 1514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the extra game number lottery table at the time of winning, and determines the AT extra game number based on the game group number related to the game (for example, in the margin) In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether or not the latched random value falls within the range). Note that determining the number of AT extra games is also referred to as performing AT extra lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the determined AT added game number to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the added AT counter value in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M receives a command related to the determined AT added game number (a command to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S receives the command, It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games have been added), and the process proceeds to step 1518. It should be noted that a lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT extra lottery) can also be executed in the case of a payout group number 7 to 11 which is a payout group number related to a win number (winning numbers 19 to 27) including a bonus. .

  Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of the extra game number lottery table at the time of winning, and in the third embodiment, a part of the state related to AT in which push order navigation is executed (in this example, ("AT state", "specialized sign state", "addition special state", "advantageous BB state"), when the winning combination is elected at the time of winning, based on the appearance group number related to the game The AT added game number is determined by lottery from “0” to “300”, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. When “0” is determined, the AT remaining game number does not increase (when “0” is determined, the AT addition lottery may be referred to as non-winning).

  Further, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT added games when winning the winning combination at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure. As a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In this case, {place number (600) × AT additional game number (0) + placement number (100) × AT additional game number (10) + placement number (300) × AT additional game number (30) + placement number ( 24) × AT addition number of games (100)} / total number of entries (1024) = 12.1 (game).

  Next, when the winning combination is re-game-B or re-game-C, {number (500) × AT additional game number (0) + number (200) × AT additional game number (50) + Number (300) × AT additional game number (100) + Number (24) × AT additional game number (300)} / total number of positions (1024) = 46.1 (game) be able to.

  Next, when the winning combination is “re-game-A” or “re-game-D1” to “re-game-D3”, “winning-A1” to “winning-A6”, {number (300) * AT additional game number (10) + placement number (600) * AT additional game number (30) + placement number (124) * AT additional game number (50)} / total number of placement numbers (1024) = 26.61 ( Game), and can be calculated as follows. In addition, when the winning combination is “re-game-A” or “re-game-D1” to “re-game-D3”, “winning-A1” to “winning-A6”, the number of AT games is added. Only when the state related to the AT is “additional specialization state”.

  Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium rare role, {number (800) × AT added game number (0) + place number (100) × AT added game number (10) + place number (100 ) × AT additional game number (30) + placement number (24) × AT additional game number (100)} / total number of placement numbers (1024) = 6.3 (game).

  Next, in the case where the winning combination is a BB medium rare role, {number (300) × AT added game number (0) + number (300) × AT added game number (30) + number (400) ) × AT additional game number (50) + placement number (24) × AT additional game number (300)} / total number of placement numbers (1024) = 35.4 (game).

  In the third embodiment, when an AT extra lottery is executed, the average value of the number of AT extra games can be different depending on the type of winning combination, but depending on the set value, the number of extra AT games The average value is not different. Here, in the case where the AT addition lottery is executed based on the winning number, for example, when the same processing is executed as the AT extra lottery with the winning number 7 and the winning number 8, the winning number is 7. However, as in the third embodiment, the winning number 7 and the winning number are configured by executing the AT lottery based on the appearance group number as in the third embodiment. When the same processing is executed as an AT addition lottery with 8, the AT-related lottery processing of either the winning number 7 or the winning number 8 is executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2 or not. Will be able to.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M may make a determination based on a winning number (or winning / replaying winning information, a winning group number, etc.) related to the game. ) Determines whether or not it is a winning number related to re-game-B (reverse-play white 7 replay, which is a re-game in which white seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by reverse-press). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an additional number of AT games due to replay-B, in other words, the number of additional AT games due to winning of replay-B is It is determined whether it was not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M makes an invalid line by reverse pressing instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and reverse pressing ("right → middle → left")). To perform the effect of instructing to align white seven), and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command other than the reverse push (“right → middle → left”) which is a reverse push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect that prevents white seven from being aligned on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to step 1526. In the case of No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the winning number related to the game (or may be determined by winning / replay winning information, a paying group number, etc.) re-game-C ( It is determined whether or not it is a forward-pressed black 7 replay, which is a re-game where the black seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by forward-pressing. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an additional number of AT games due to replay-C, in other words, the number of additional AT games due to winning of replay-C is It is determined whether it was not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M makes an invalid line by a forward press instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and forward press ("left → middle → right")). Will be executed to instruct the black seven to be aligned), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3100). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command other than the forward press avoidance command (command to the sub control board S side, forward press (“left → middle → right”)). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect that prevents the black seven from being aligned on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3100). Even in the case of No in step 1526, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3100). In the third embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoid command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoid command are transmitted to the sub control board S, and when the sub control board S receives these commands, Although it is configured to be able to execute effects related to push order navigation on the sub-control board S side, the present invention is not limited to this. When such a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT additional games related to the processing of step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side receives the command, the order of pressing on the sub-control board S side You may comprise so that the execution timing and effect aspect of the effect regarding a navigation may be determined. As an example, a game in which Re-Game-B has been won is selected, and an effect mode in which reverse pressing is instructed in a game that has received the command on the side of the sub-control board S (a game with an additional number of AT games) is selected. In the game that receives the command on the side of the sub-control board S, an effect that instructs reverse pressing is not executed, and a predetermined condition (for example, a specific re-game player (for example, replay) You may comprise so that the effect which instruct | indicates the pushing order in which 7 alignment can be performed in an invalid line in the game which satisfied game-B or C) was performed may be performed. Alternatively, in the game where the re-game-B is won and the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S (a game with an additional number of AT games), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and thereafter (For example, display on the effect display device S40) in a game satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, after a predetermined number of games (a continuous effect may be executed simultaneously, in this case, the final game of the continuous effect). (For example, “+ 30G” is displayed.) In this example, the number of AT remaining games is also displayed in the effect display device S40. Such a display can be displayed, and the display and the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different from each other. B won In a game where the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S (a game with an additional number of AT games), an effect of instructing reverse pressing is not executed, and a game satisfying a predetermined condition thereafter As an example of the case where an AT game number addition effect is executed, a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) that wins a bonus win on the sub-control board S side is being executed (replay game inside the bonus- Since the winning probability of B is low (including 0%), the sub-control board S side will be special, for example, if a player is notified of the push order in which 7 matches are possible, the bonus will not be won) Information that the sub-control board S side determines that the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery and the AT remaining game number is added, is as follows. (1) AT remaining game The information on the number is added to the AT and sent after the lottery from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and then the sub control board S side sends the information on the number of AT remaining games sent last time and the AT remaining game sent this time. The difference with the number information is calculated, and the number of AT added games won in the AT added lottery is grasped. (2) The command related to the number of AT added games obtained as a result of the AT added lottery on the main control board M side is added. In addition, when the AT extra lottery is not won, a command indicating that the AT extra lottery is not won is sent to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side When receiving the command, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation, for example, a game in which Re-Game-B is won. Then, in the game that received the command on the side of the sub-control board S (the game in which the number of AT games was not added), the middle press (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop, and the push order to avoid the seven matches) You may comprise so that the production | generation aspect which instruct | indicates may be selected and performed. In addition, although the AT addition lottery was executed on the main control board M side, as information for the sub control board S side to determine that the AT remaining game number was not added, (1) information on the AT remaining game number After the AT addition lottery, the data is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Thereafter, the sub-control board S calculates the difference between the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time and the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time, and grasps the number of AT additional games won in the AT addition lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information related to the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time from the information related to the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery was not won), (2) the main control board As a result of the M-side AT extra lottery, a command related to the fact that the number of AT extra games is 0 is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of freeze lottery execution processing according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. This flowchart shows the process for determining the execution of a specific freeze effect among the freeze effects, and the freeze effect is not only the effect shown in the figure, but is shown as an example of the freeze effect to the last. ing. First, in step 3102, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the game is a “high probability state”. As described above, in the third embodiment, the specific freeze effect is executed only in the “favorable section” and not in the “normal section” and the “standby section”. In addition, the freeze effect is a function that prevents the stop button from being operated until the predetermined time (60 seconds in this example) has elapsed after the start lever is operated (the processing after step 1554 is not executed). This effect is controlled on the control board M side, and the reels may remain stopped during execution of the freeze effect, or all reels may be configured to rotate at a low speed, rotate at a high speed, or rotate in a reverse direction. Good. In addition, in 3rd Embodiment, although the freeze effect performed only in an "advantageous section" is illustrated as a specific freeze effect, the execution aspect of a freeze effect is not limited to this, What is a specific freeze effect? Different freeze effects may be configured to be executed in a game section other than the “advantageous section”, or a specific freeze effect may be performed in a game section other than the “advantageous section”, and a specific freeze is performed. The performance may be configured such that the “advantage zone” is easier to execute (the probability of being executed is higher) than the game intervals (“normal interval” and “standby interval”) other than the “advantageous interval”. That is, a plurality of types of freeze effects may be executed as freeze effects, a predetermined freeze effect may be executed in a plurality of types of game sections, or a plurality of predetermined freeze effects may be performed. The execution probabilities (for a predetermined freeze effect) may be different for each game section when configured to be executed in a type of game section. Further, when the predetermined freeze effect is configured to be executed in a state related to a plurality of types of ATs, the execution probabilities (for the predetermined freeze effect) for each state related to the AT may be made different. When configured to be executed in a plurality of types of RT states, the execution probabilities (for predetermined freeze effects) for each RT state may be different. In addition, it is preferable that the freeze effect as exemplified in the third embodiment is executed in a game that is relatively profitable for the player, and the freeze effect is thus configured. It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the result of the game during the period until the stop button becomes operable (freeze effect execution period). The execution mode of the freeze effect is not limited to the mode of the third embodiment, and freezes at the end of the bonus (the bet and start lever related to the start of the next game are invalidated for a predetermined time), and the number of medals won in the bonus during the freeze (Or the total of the number of medals acquired by AT and the acquisition by bonus) may be displayed on the effect display device S40, or at the end of AT, in other words, when the AT counter value becomes zero. It is possible to freeze and display the number of medals acquired at AT (or the total of the number of medals acquired by AT and the acquisition by bonus) on the effect display device S40 during the freeze. In the case of Yes in Step 3102, in Step 3104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a conditional device that can acquire the right to shift to the AT lottery role (“AT state”) as the conditional device related to the game. Then, it is determined whether it is a BB combination. In Step 3102 and Step 3104, it is determined whether or not the right to shift to the “AT state” is acquired (in this example, when the AT lottery is won). In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a freeze execution lottery (lottery of whether or not to execute the freeze effect) to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/20). To do. Next, in step 3108, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the freeze execution lottery executed in the process of step 3106 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the freeze execution flag (the freeze effect is executed in the game when the flag is turned on). . Next, in step 3112, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a freeze execution command (a command to the side of the sub control board S and a command for executing the freeze effect in the game), and the next processing The process proceeds to (Step 1550). It should be noted that if the result of step 3102, step 3104, or step 3108 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of reel rotation start preparation processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1568, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the freeze execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1568, in step 1570, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the freeze execution flag. Next, in Step 1572, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the freeze execution time (60 seconds in this example) to the freeze execution timer FZt (a timer for measuring the execution period of the freeze effect and a decrement timer). Set to start the timer. Next, in step 1574, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer FZt is zero. If Yes in step 1574, the process proceeds to step 1552. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1574, the processing in step 1574 is repeatedly executed until the timer value of the freeze execution timer FZt becomes 0. If No in step 1568, the process proceeds to step 1552. Next, in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is zero. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer that measures. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M newly sets a minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 and starts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears information related to the reel stop order related to the finished game and information related to the press order. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M initializes symbol stop position data relating to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an output request at the start of reel rotation related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game. In other words, a command for indicating that the reel starts to rotate can be transmitted to the sub-control board S by the processing of Step 1562 and Step 1564. Next, in step 1566, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state stored in the RAM area from the reel stop state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1260). Transition.

  Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of remaining game number management processing according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the “advantageous section” is one of the game sections, and the situation of the game that is advantageous to the player, such as when the state related to the AT is “at-AT state” It is a game section that is easy to set at. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts with an advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc−1 (a decrement counter, 1500 which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the “favorable section” as the initial value. 1 is subtracted from the counter value which is set as a value and can be subtracted every game during the period of “advantageous section”.

  Next, in step 3408, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is the “AT in-progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M decrements the AT counter value by 1, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1700). Note that if the answer is No in step 3402 or step 3408, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1700). As described above, in the third embodiment, when the AT state that the push order navigation can display is the “AT in-progress state”, the AT value of each game is subtracted, but the AT state is “ “AT ready state 1”, “AT ready state 2”, “addition specialization state”, “specialization precursor state”, “advantageous BB internal game”, “advantageous BB state”, “AT state after falling”, “ In the case of “specialized state after falling” or “state after bell overflow”, the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. As an example, when the AT counter value remains (1 or more remain) and the state shifts from the “AT state” to the “specialized precursor state”, the AT counter value is maintained and “ It is configured to be able to make a transition (transition) from “AT state” → “specialization precursor state” → “addition special state”. Even if the state relating to AT is “AT state”, it is possible not to decrement the AT counter value by 1 when a winning number including a bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is subtracted. You may control. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “30” and the remaining AT remaining game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is “30”, the AT counter value is “30”. Or “30 + α”, which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT addition lottery relating to the game, is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. “29” may be displayed as the number of remaining AT games, or “29 + α”, which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT extra lottery (note that “α” obtained by the extra lottery is , In a specific game after the game (a game satisfying a predetermined condition at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the bonus game ends) without notifying the game. And “α” may be notified.) Then, the number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is also subtracted by 1 for each game even in the “advantageous BB inside game”, and an effect (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) suggesting the bonus confirmation is output. The number of remaining AT games can be subtracted for each game. With this configuration, when a bonus is won in a state in which push order navigation such as “AT state” can be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping the bonus winning. In other words, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games can be executed using the effect display device S40 or the like to inquire whether or not the bonus has been won, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Note that the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is ended is "30" or a value of "30" or more when notifying the result of adding and adding the result of the AT extra lottery. Can be controlled to display. If the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “1” and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1”, the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games is “0”, but while maintaining this state, a continuous effect over a plurality of games is performed to determine whether or not the bonus is won, and the AT counter value is “1”. The winning number (or winning / replay winning information, or the winning group number) where the game is executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1” and the AT addition lottery can be executed. Is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games is “0” and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “0”. Further, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the probability of executing a continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of AT remaining games is large.

  Next, FIG. 125 is a flowchart of RT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition enabling condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the third embodiment, when the RT state transition enabling condition satisfies a predetermined condition (specifically, the setting key switch is turned on under the condition that the power is off, and then the power is turned on. RAM clear execution (RAM initialization), stop display (in this example, re-game 04, re-game 06, and so on) before the start of the setting change device control process, or when the setting change device control process ends The replay 07 stop display and the winning indications 08 to 11 stop display) and the winning / starting / ending of the BB can be satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not to transition to the RT state and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT transition enabling condition (see the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1750). Note that if the answer is No in Step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 1750). In the third embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped. However, when transitioning to “RT1”, the transition timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for transitioning to the RT state (stores the RT number in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

  Next, FIG. 126 is an RT state transition diagram in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, there are seven RT states of “non-RT”, “RT0” to “RT4”, and “at the time of operation of one type BB-A, B, C”, which are indicated by arrows in the figure. The RT state shifts by satisfying the condition. As a specific example of the transition of the RT state, “non-RT” is set when RAM initialization is executed. Further, when the RT state is “non-RT”, when the replay 04 symbol is stopped and displayed, “RT0” is obtained (see the arrow (1) shown in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). The stop display of replay 04 is, for example, when the left stop button is operated as the first stop when the “replay-D1” is won in the situation where the RT state is “non-RT”. The replays 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and “non-RT” is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, when “re-game-D1” is won in the situation where the RT state is “non-RT”, if the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 04 is stopped and displayed. Then, the RT state shifts from “non-RT” to “RT0”.

  When the RT state is “RT0”, “RT1”, “RT3”, or “RT4”, when the push-over bell overflow is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to “non-RT” (RT state transition in FIG. 126). (See arrow (2) in the figure). For example, when the winning combination “Winning-A1” is configured such that the correct answer push order is “left → middle → right”, the push order other than the correct answer push order ( For example, it is an arrangement of symbols to be stopped and displayed when a stop operation is performed with “middle → left → right”). When a stop operation is performed in a pressing order other than the correct pressing order, one game medal is paid out (see FIG. 104). Specifically, the symbol combinations of the winning prizes 08 to 11 correspond to the pressing order overflowing eyes.

  When the RT state is “RT0” or “RT4” and the replay 06 is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to “RT1” (see the arrow (3) shown in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). For example, the stop display of replay 06 is a case where “replay-E1” is won in the situation where the RT state is “RT0”, and the left stop button is operated as the first stop. The replay 06 stops and the RT state shifts from “RT0” to “RT1”. On the other hand, when the “re-game-E1” is won in the situation where the RT state is “RT 0”, and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 01 is stopped and displayed. Then, “RT0” is maintained as the RT state. In the situation where the RT state is “RT4”, when “re-game-E1” is won and the left stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 06 is stopped and displayed in the RT state. Shifts from “RT4” to “RT1”. On the other hand, in the situation where the RT state is “RT4”, when “re-game-E1” is won and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 01 is stopped and displayed. Then, “RT4” is maintained as the RT state.

  In addition, when the RT state is “RT1” or “RT3”, when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to “RT0” (see the arrow (1) shown in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). ).

  Further, when the RT state is “RT1” and the replay 07 is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to “RT4” (see the arrow (7) shown in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). For example, the stop display of replay 07 is a case where “replay-F1” is won in the situation where the RT state is “RT1” and the left stop button is operated as the first stop. The replay 07 is stopped and the RT state shifts from “RT1” to “RT4”. On the other hand, in the situation where the RT state is “RT1”, when “re-game-E1” is won and the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-game 01 is stopped and displayed. Then, “RT1” is maintained as the RT state. When the RT state is “RT1” and the replay 07 is stopped and the RT state shifts from “RT1” to “RT4”, the state related to the AT when the RT state is “RT1” In the case of “in-AT state”, the state related to AT in “RT4” is “specialized state after falling”, and the state related to AT when the RT state is “RT1” is “specialized sign state” The state related to the AT in “RT4” is “addition specialization state”.

  In addition, when the RT state is “non-RT”, “RT0”, “RT1”, “RT3” or “RT4”, the BB role is won (the condition device relating to Type 1 BB-A, B, C is If the BB combination is not won in the winning game, the RT state shifts to “RT2” (see arrow (4) shown in the RT state transition diagram of FIG. 126). In addition, when the BB combination is won at “RT2” (one of the types BB-A, B, and C is activated), the process proceeds to “when the type 1 BB-A, B, and C is activated” (FIG. (See arrow (5) shown in RT state transition diagram). Further, when BB ends (when one type BB-A, B, or C is completed) at “when one type BB-A, B, or C is activated”, the process proceeds to “RT3”. Of the seven RT states in this example, the RT state with the highest stay ratio throughout all games is “RT0”, the “AT state” ends, and the game segment is changed from “advantage segment” to “normal segment”. When shifting to “section”, the user stays at “RT0” having the highest stay ratio. Note that the “standby section” is configured not to win the AT lottery (the lottery for acquiring the right to shift to the “AT state”) and not to win the lottery by adding the number of AT games.

  Next, FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of Step 1750 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT start enabling condition is satisfied in the game. This AT start possible condition can be satisfied based on, for example, the completion of the advantageous BB state after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. Specifically, the AT ready state 1 and the AT ready state 2 This is satisfied when the game is shifted to the “AT state” from the next game through (see FIG. 128). In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1760, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the number of AT initial games (in this example, 50, the number of games for which subtraction is started after shifting to the “AT state”). Is set in the AT counter M60, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3500). Even in the case of No in step 1752, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB role in the “high probability state” and shifting to “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB is awarded to shift to the “advantageous BB state”. When the number of games is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the state is shifted to the “AT state”. Specifically, when the number of AT games is increased by 30 games in the “advantageous BB state” and then the state is shifted to the “AT state” via the “AT preparation state 1” and the “AT preparation state 2”. , 80 (initial value 50 + addition 30) is set in the AT counter. At this time, if an effect is given to notify the player that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”, at the start of the “AT state”, the player is informed that the number of AT initial games is 80 games. It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, the “AT ready state 1”, “AT ready state” are performed without performing the effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”. 2 ”,“ AT state ”, etc., after the initial 50 games are presented to the player, the AT state (for example, the state immediately after the start or the state where the number of AT remaining games in the effect display device S40 is small) A notification method for performing an effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added to the player can also be considered. By doing so, the player cannot clearly know how many games have been added or how many games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”. It is possible to enhance the interest in the extra effect that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur). In this example, the AT initial game number is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1760, but the execution timing of the process for setting the AT initial game number is not limited to that in this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT lottery execution process in step 3000 described above. When the number of games (AT initial number of games) set in the AT counter M60 becomes “AT state” via “AT preparation state 1” and “AT preparation state 2” after the BB is ended. Configured to be subtracted from. The counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board M.

  Next, FIG. 128 is an AT state transition diagram in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, “low probability state”, “normal BB inside game”, “normal BB state”, “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialized precursor state”, “addition specialization” "Status", "Advantageous BB inside game", "Advantageous BB state", "Standby BB inside game", "Waiting for fall", "AT ready state 1", "AT ready state 2", "At AT after fall" There are 16 AT-related states of “state”, “specialized state after falling”, and “state after bell overflow”, and the state related to AT shifts by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure. Become. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the “AT state” and the special state transition lottery in which the player wins 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the “specialized sign state”. In addition, when 10 games have elapsed (digested) since the transition to the “specialization sign state”, the transition is made to the “specialized state of addition”. In addition, as the game section, the states related to four ATs of “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, and “falling waiting state” are set to “normal section”, and “standby BB” “Internal game” is set to “Standby section”, “High probability state”, “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, “addition special state”, “advantage BB internal medium game”, “advantage BB The states related to the 11 ATs of “state”, “AT ready state 1”, “AT ready state 2”, “AT state after fall”, “specialized state after fall” and “state after bell overflow” are “advantageous sections” "Is set. In other words, even if the state related to the 11 ATs that become the “advantageous section” has transitioned (transitioned) (even if the state changes from one advantageous section to another advantageous section), the “normal section” should be set. If a total of 1500 games have elapsed, the “advantageous section” is forcibly terminated and set to the “normal section”.

  The state related to the AT is not limited to that in the third embodiment. For example, the AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in the “low probability state” or the “high probability state”. It may be configured to shift to the “predictor state” by winning the lottery, and to shift to the “AT state” after the lapse of 16 to 32 games. In such a configuration, the predetermined condition device If the AT lottery is executed by winning, and if the AT lottery is not won, the state shifts to the “gase precursor state”, and after the lapse of 16 to 32 games, enters the “low probability state” or “high probability state”. You may comprise so that it may transfer. In the third embodiment, a “standby section” is provided as a game section. When a BB is won in a “low probability state” and an AT lottery based on the BB is won, It is comprised so that it may become. In addition, it may be configured to be able to win the AT lottery by a condition device other than the BB role. For example, in the case of a game where the AT lottery is executed by winning “Cherry”, the BB and the cherry overlap. When “BB + Cherry” is won and AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until “BB” of “BB + Cherry” wins may be set as “standby section”. In this way, by providing a “standby section”, when the BB is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery is not won, the BB is won in the “low probability state”, and the AT In both cases where the lottery is won, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off during the period until the symbol combination of BB is completed (until the advantageous section indicator YH is lit). It can be beaten by making the player expect whether or not the lottery is won. In the “standby section”, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned on, or the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned on or off. (You may comprise so that the production | presentation performed in the sub control board | substrate S may be determined based on lighting / extinction of the advantageous area display YH). Further, when the BB is elected in the “additional special state”, the “additional special state” may be resumed after the end of the BB. In such a case, during the BB, Execute the AT addition lottery that is different from the BB won in the “AT state” as the BB won in the “specialized state” (for example, win the AT extra lottery over the BB won in the “AT state”) The number of AT games may be increased and the number of games per game is relatively large). In addition, when the BB is elected in the “specialization sign state”, it may be configured to shift to the “additional special state” after the end of the BB. In such a configuration, during the BB, It may be configured such that the AT extra lottery is executed in the same manner as the BB won in the “extra specialization state”.

  Next, FIG. 129 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of Step 3500 of FIG. 112 in the third embodiment. First, in the third embodiment, there is a game section as a section related to the state of the game, and as the game section, a “normal section” that is relatively low profit for the player and a game section that is relatively low for the player. It has two game sections, an “advantageous section” which is a highly profitable section. As an explanation of the flowchart, first, in step 3502, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game based on the state related to the determined AT and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3534. To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3502, in step 3506, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “standby section”. In the case of Yes in step 3506, in step 3508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the BB is activated. In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3534. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the “standby section” in step 3506, and proceeds to step 3534. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3506, in step 3522, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 0, in other words, the “favorable section” continues. It is determined whether the maximum possible number of games has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3522, in step 3526, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears all the information related to the AT (therefore, the AT counter value becomes 0 and the number of staying games in the “specialized sign state”). Things are also 0). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3522, in step 3524, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an “advantageous section” end condition other than the case where the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc−1 becomes 0. For example, the AT counter value is 0. Or when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 3524, in step 3532, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3534. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3524, that is, in the case where an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3526. As described above, in the third embodiment, when the “advantageous section” ends and the “normal section” is set after the next game, information related to the AT (the number of AT continuing games, the number of AT remaining games, All the information related to the above is cleared, so that the conditions for becoming an “advantageous section” again in the subsequent “normal section” are not relaxed. Note that information related to the AT cleared by the processing in step 3526 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1, a flag indicating a gaming state, and the like. The information is also cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed. However, depending on the clearing of the RAM when the setting is changed, the “condition device related to the continuous accessory actuating device (BB)” or “RT state” , The information related to “the number of stored items” is also cleared, but depending on the processing in step 3526 (processing at the end of the advantageous section), “condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)” or “RT state” , Information related to “stored number” is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the setting is different from the clear range at the end of the “advantageous section” (for example, when the process of step 3526 is executed). In addition, you may comprise so that "condition apparatus which concerns on an accessory continuous action | operation apparatus (BB)" and "RT state" may be hold | maintained by RAM clear at the time of a setting change. The addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantageous section” are continuous. In this way, by making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantageous section” continuous, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the top address to be cleared in the clear process and the range of addresses to be cleared. When the “advantageous section” ends, a command indicating that the “advantageous section” has ended is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to erase the game history such as information indicating that the game was “advantageous section” and how many games “AT state” was executed. ing. However, when the RAM clear at the time of setting change is executed, game history such as information on the “advantageous section” on the side of the sub-control board S and information on how many games “AT state” is executed Will also be deleted.

  When the “favorable section” is ended because the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc−1 is 0, (1) when the current AT state is the “high probability state”. If the state related to the AT is “low probability state” in the next game, and (2) the state related to the current AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the state related to the AT in the next game is “ (3) If the current AT state is “Advantageous BB state”, the AT state will be “Normal BB state” in the next game. (4) Current The states related to the AT are “AT in progress state”, “specialization precursor state”, “addition specialization state”, “AT preparation state 1”, “AT preparation state 2”, “AT state after fall”, “after fall” In case of "specialized state" or "state after bell overflow" , (For information related to the AT is cleared) state on the AT in the next game is configured so as to be "low probability state" or "fall waiting state".

  Next, in step 3528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game to “normal section”, and proceeds to step 3530. Next, in step 3530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “favorable section” has ended, and proceeds to step 3534. The advantageous section indicator YH is turned off when the “favorable section” is finished and set to the “normal section”, but the detailed timing of turning off is limited to the timing of the third embodiment. Instead, for example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal related to a game in which the “favorable section” ends and becomes the “normal section” is inserted. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be configured to be turned off before the start lever D50 capable of starting the next game is operated.

  Next, in step 3534, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has decided to newly set an “advantageous section” in the next game (decided to set an “advantageous section” from the “normal section”). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3534, in step 3536, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. Note that the predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed numerical value (1500 in this example) that is common to all set values. Next, in step 3538, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1293). In the case of No in step 3534, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1293). In addition, in 3rd Embodiment, although the lighting process of the advantageous area indicator YH was performed at the timing of step 3538, the lighting timing of the advantageous area indicator YH is not limited to this, The advantageous area indicator YH The lighting timing is from the start lever operation timing in the game before the “advantageous section” (game in the “normal section”) to the timing at which a game medal can be inserted in the game that becomes the “advantageous section” (newly If the game before the “advantageous section” is a game related to replay, it is set as appropriate during the period of time until the start lever operation becomes effective in the game that becomes the “advantageous section”. May be.

  An example of the case where the BB is executed when the number of continued games in the “advantageous section” is close to 1500 games, and the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc−1 is 5 (the number of continued games in the advantageous section). BB starts to be executed in the case of 1495), and when the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0 (the number of continued games in the advantageous section is 1500) during the execution of BB, It becomes "section".

  Next, FIG. 130 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the third embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104. Thereafter, a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example) To be periodically executed.

  First, in step 1602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of interruption (for example, saving of data held in a register in the CPUC100, input port check of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt process). In the case of No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power-off detection signal, the input acceptance sensor D10s, and the first input sensor. D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, the presence / absence of the operation of these operation members and the sensor detection state are sampled at the interrupt interval T). )

  Next, in step 1610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. (For example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously ON over a plurality of samplings, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise by turning on the door switch flag. Can also be detected). Next, in step 1611, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the spinning drive control process (process related to the drive control of the reel M50) for all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53). . Next, in step 1612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If YES in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays the AT remaining game number (AT game number) on the AT counter value display device D 280, and proceeds to step 1614. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1612, the process proceeds to Step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing in step 1612 and step 1613 is not necessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (not shown, inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormality error flag, It is determined whether all flags relating to errors such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, a door switch flag, and the like are off. In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side and a command indicating that no error is detected) (for example, register Set in the area), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command that an error is detected) (for example, Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub-side. The error not detected command may be set only when the error is released from the state where the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off). The information setting process may not be executed (the step 1618 may not be provided). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or from the state where a first error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error has changed, such as a second error (for example, a payout medal retention error).

  Next, in step 1622, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set). Control command). Here, as a command to be transmitted to the sub control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop) A command related to the second reel stop reception timing (transmitted immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop reception timing (the stop button as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), transmitted immediately after all reels stop), commands related to the production group number (sent immediately after operation of the start lever D50), commands related to winning / replay winning information ( Sent immediately after the start lever operation (limited to the advantageous section)) Sent immediately after the lever operation), a command related to the RT state (sent between the time when all reels stop and the next game starts), a command related to the state related to AT (all reels stop) Sent until the next game is started), commands related to the number of AT remaining games (from the time all reels stop until the next game starts, or immediately after the start lever operation Forward press command (sent immediately after start lever operation), forward press avoid command (sent immediately after start lever operation), reverse press command (sent immediately after start lever operation) , Reverse press avoidance command (sent immediately after start lever operation), freeze execution command (comma on execution of freeze effect on main control board M side) A de, sent after the start lever operation force), the command regarding the game period (all the reels is sent between the stops until the next game starts), and the like. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the revolving game machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, information relating to an error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on. Is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LEDs (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among a plurality of 7-segment LED units). Output a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 may not be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a soft random number management process (such as a process for updating a random value managed by software). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains internal information register data (the internal information register has a region where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not an abnormal flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). More specifically, the abnormality flag bit is set when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not an abnormal flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt end process and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-described non-recoverable error processing.

  Next, FIG. 131 is a flowchart of a power-off process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M stores the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off process completed flag (for example, updates the power-off process completed flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and information for error detection based on the calculated checksum (for example, the calculation) In the checksum area, the lower 1 byte in the checksum or the complement thereof) is set. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 to 146, control processing executed on the sub-control board S side will be described.

<Sub program start processing>
First, FIG. 132 is a subroutine showing sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

  First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S prohibits interruption. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, and checksum calculation.

  Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off. In the case of Yes in step 2008, in other words, in the determination process of step 2008, if it is determined that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes one-command processing described later. It is determined whether or not it is a state that has returned from a state in which a power interruption has occurred, that is, whether or not it has completely recovered.

  In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, if it is determined that the recovery is complete, in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits an interrupt and is executed when a power interruption occurs. Return processing to one command processing.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the above-described determination processing in step 2008 that both checksum values do not match, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. Execute. It should be noted that after the processing of step 2014 is executed, or in the case of No in step 2010, the processing is shifted to the sub main loop processing.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 133 is a subroutine showing sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 132 is executed.

  First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S permits interruption. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes command reception processing. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

  Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes one command processing which will be described later. This one-command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms has elapsed. If it is determined that it has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2250. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be appropriately changed according to the processing.

<Sub-side power-off processing>
Next, FIG. 134 is a subroutine showing sub-side power-off processing executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects a power-off.

  First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If YES in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates a checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

  Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power supply has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S updates the number of instantaneous interruption occurrences. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer, and returns to the processing that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 135 is a subroutine showing one command processing called and executed in the processing of step 2250 in FIG.

  First, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether it is the operation timing of the bet button. In the case of No in step 2250, in step 2251, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the bet button operation process, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110 in FIG. 40). By the processing in step 2251, the presentation can be started or switched when the bet button is operated. The effect executed in the process of step 2251 is executed according to the content determined in the effect content determination process (the process of step 2800 described later) executed in the game or a game at a time point before the game. .

  In the case of Yes in step 2250, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether it is the operation timing of the start lever. If Yes in step 2252, the process proceeds to step 2253. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2252, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a start lever operation process. By the processing in step 2300, the presentation can be started or switched when the start lever is operated. Next, in step 2800, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine for effect content determination processing described later, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2110 in FIG. 133).

  Next, in step 2253, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the reel rotation start timing. If Yes in step 2253, the process proceeds to step 2255. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2253, in step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the reel rotation start process, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110 in FIG. 133). By the processing in step 2254, the production can be started or switched when the reel rotation is started. The effect executed in the process of step 2254 is executed according to the content determined in the effect content determination process (the process of step 2800 described later) executed in the game or a game at a time earlier than the game. . Also, the reel rotation start timing may be the rotation start timing of the reel that has started to rotate first among the three reels, or may be the rotation start timing of the reel that has started to rotate last among the three reels (three reels). When the rotation starts simultaneously, the rotation start timing).

  Next, in step 2255, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the first reel stop acceptance (first stop operation) timing. In the case of No in step 2255, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the first cylinder stop acceptance process, and shifts to the next process (the process in step 2110 in FIG. 133). In other words, in the process of step 2500, an effect is executed with the timing of turning on the first body stop. The ON timing will be described later. By the processing in step 2500, the production can be started or switched when the stop button is pushed to stop the first cylinder.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2254, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether it is the second reel stop acceptance (second stop operation) timing. In the case of No in step 2258, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the second cylinder stop acceptance process, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110 in FIG. 133). In other words, in the process of step 2550, the effect is executed in response to the timing when the second reel reel stop is turned on. By the processing in step 2550, the production can be started or switched when the stop button is pushed to stop the second cylinder.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the timing for accepting the third reel stop (third stop operation). In the case of No in step 2262, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the third cylinder stop acceptance process, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110 in FIG. 133). In other words, in the process of step 2600, an effect is executed with the timing of the third reel reel stop being turned on. By the processing in step 2600, the production can be started or switched when the stop button is pushed to stop the third cylinder.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the symbol stop display timing. In the case of Yes in step 2266, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a stop display symbol time process (not shown), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110 in FIG. 133). . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S immediately shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110 in FIG. 133). By the processing in step 2268, the production can be started or switched when the stop button pushed to stop the third cylinder is released. In other words, the processing in step 2268 is performed at the timing when the third drum reel stop is turned off. The OFF timing will be described later.

<Contents of production in the third embodiment>
As described above, in the third embodiment, the bet button operation timing, the start lever operation timing, the first reel stop reception timing, the second reel stop reception timing, the third reel stop reception timing, The content of the production is determined with the stop display timing of The types of effects in the third embodiment will be described below.

  The effects mainly include stage effects (sometimes referred to as background effects), notice effects, push order navigation effects, and the like.

<Stage production>
The stage effect is an effect mainly performed by displaying a background image or the like. An effect mode in which the stage effect is executed and the notice effect is not executed corresponds to no effect of the effect group 1 shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) (the push order navigation effect is not executed without the effect). It may be configured as such, and the push order navigation effect may be executed without the effect). In other words, in this example, there is no effect = no notice effect. Here, the background image includes not only a static image that does not change with time but also a dynamic image that changes with time. Moreover, only a part may change with time, or the whole may change. For example, an image from a certain viewpoint such as a landscape or a room is displayed on the entire screen (display area) of the effect display device S40.

  The stage effect can be determined mainly by the game state determined by the RT state, the state related to the AT, and the like, and can be executed so as to suggest the overall state of the game. Moreover, it is comprised so that the stage transfer lottery which changes the stage production to be performed can be performed for every game. It may be configured such that the number of stage production candidates that can be determined according to the RT state or the state related to AT and the number related to stage transition lottery are different. For stage effects, not only by displaying images, but also outputting sounds such as music, narration, and sound effects along with display of background images, and displaying character information with background images as necessary (For example, in a game in which the stage effect is changed, a sound for explaining the stage effect is output). Further, an effect by lighting or blinking of the lamp D26 can be included in the stage effect.

  The stage effect is basically started in response to an operation of the bet button D220 (including detection of medal insertion) or an operation of the start lever D50 of the game, and the bet button D220 (detection of medal insertion is detected after the next game). Or the operation of the start lever D50. The stage production start and end triggers are not limited to these, and may be triggered by the first stop, the second stop, the third stop, or the reel rotation start. Further, it is not necessary to start or end the bet button D220, detection of medal insertion, start lever D50 operation, first stop, second stop, third stop, or reel rotation start, and these timings. May start or end after a predetermined time delay. The start and end timings can be arbitrarily determined according to the contents of the performance and the information to be suggested.

<Notice production>
The notice effect can be executed mainly so as to suggest a detailed state desired by the player, such as the condition device won in the game, the RT state, the state related to the AT, and the set value. Note that the notice effect includes an effect of notifying information completely unrelated to these states. 148 (A) to 148 (C), the notice effect is “character effect” of effect group 2, “conversation effect” of effect group 3, “cut-in effect” of effect group 4, and “ It corresponds to “confrontation effect”, “additional battle” of effect group 6, effect group 7 “common navigation effect”, and “aiming effect” of effect group 8.

  As the aspect of the notice effect, an image showing the notice effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 so as to be superimposed on the background image (stage effect), or the image is displayed alone on the entire screen of the effect display device S40. There is. The notice effect may be composed of images that are more dynamic and change with time with respect to the stage effect. Like the stage effect, the notice effect is not only based on the display of the image, but also outputs audio such as music, narration, and sound effects along with the display of the background image, and displays text information with the background image as necessary. Also included is an embodiment. In addition, effects such as lighting or blinking of the lamp D26, operation of a movable body accessory (not shown), and the like are also included.

  The content of the notice effect generally changes or switches within one game. For example, the first effect is started when the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 is operated, and then the contents are changed by starting the intermediate effect when triggered by the first stop or the second stop. The content can be changed or switched by starting the final presentation in response to the third stop. Thus, various detailed information can be suggested by developing the production corresponding to the player's operation. As an example, in the case of executing a notice effect that tells the player whether or not a bonus has been won, the degree of expectation that the bonus has been won in the game is suggested by the operation of the start lever D50. An effect mode is shown in which an effect is executed, and then an effect of notifying the result of whether or not the bonus is won in the game is executed at the third stop button operation timing.

  The trigger for switching the notice effect is the operation of the bet button D220, the operation of the start lever D50, the first stop, the second stop, the third stop, etc., but it is not always necessary to use all of these triggers. The opportunity according to can be used arbitrarily. Moreover, it is not necessary to be simultaneously with these triggers, and the production can be started after being delayed by a predetermined time from the operation timing. Furthermore, an effect can be started simultaneously with these triggers, and an image can be displayed in a dynamic manner until a predetermined period elapses, and then the image can be displayed in a stationary manner.

  In addition, the player's various operations include a timing at which the player applies a force to displace the button or lever (timing to turn from off to on), and a timing at which the player releases the button or lever to return ( Both on and off timing). Any one of these timings may be used as a trigger, or both timings may be used as triggers, and any timing may not be used as a trigger. By using the on timing and the off timing, it is possible to increase the timing at which the effects can be switched, and it is possible to develop and advance the effects in various ways.

  For example, an image display as a stage effect is started at the timing when the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 is turned on, a sound effect is output, and an image display as a notice effect is started at the timing when the first stop is turned on. Then, the sound effect is output at the second stop, the lamp is turned on, the image as the notice effect is switched at the timing of turning on the third stop, and the further sound effect is output at the timing of turning off the third stop, It is possible to produce an effect such as continuing to display an image as a notice effect until the timing of turning on the bet button D220 of the next game or the operation of the start lever D50.

  As described above, the notice effect is mainly executed so as to be able to suggest a detailed state such as a set value in addition to the condition device won in the game, the state related to the RT state, and the AT. The content switching, development, etc. can be arbitrarily determined so as to suggest such information.

  For example, in the notice effect, the state of the selected condition device, the RT state, the state related to the AT, or the like may be suggested by the display mode such as the color, number, and degree of change of characters (characters), items, goods, etc. it can. As an example, the winning small role can be notified by the color of an item or goods (such as red indicates cherry, green indicates watermelon, etc.).

<Push order navigation production>
In the third embodiment, the push order navigation effects are the replay-B, replay-C, replay-D1 to replay-D3, win-A1 to win-A6, replay-E1 to replay-- E3, Re-Game-F1 to Re-Game-F3, etc. When a condition device (sometimes referred to as a push order) that can be displayed in a different manner depending on the push order is selected, the push order is displayed by image or text. Displayed on the effect display device S40 (for example, if the first stop is the left reel, “1” is displayed in the area above the left reel in the effect display device S40), and is output from the speaker S20 by voice. (For example, “It is left!”).

  The player can stop and display the symbol by operating the stop button D40 in accordance with information displayed on the effect display device S40 or output from the speaker S20. In the case of a push order in which game medals are paid out by displaying a stop, the push order in which the number of payouts is maximized is indicated by a stop display. While stage effects and notice effects are mainly indirect notification effects that suggest or imply game status, etc., push order navigation effects often have direct notification effects that display the push order. . In addition, in the push order navigation effect, indirect information that suggests or implies the push order may be displayed.

  Hereinafter, each effect group shown in FIGS. 148A to 148C will be described.

<Director Group 1 “No Director”>
In the third embodiment, “no effect” of group 1 does not mean that no effect is executed, but does not mean that the above-described notice effect is not executed, and the stage effect or the push order navigation effect may be executed. is there. That is, the “production” of the production group 1 means the above-mentioned notice production, and the “production” of the production group 1 does not include a stage production or a push order navigation production. Therefore, even when “no effect” in group 1 is selected, stage effects and push order navigation are executed, and as stage effects and push order navigation, image display, audio output, lamp lighting, etc. Executed.

<Director Group 2 “Character Production”>
The “character effect” of group 2 is an effect of displaying a character together with a background image on the effect display device S40 (see FIG. 155 (A)). Specifically, it is displayed on the effect display device S40 from the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 in the game to the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 in the next game. This is an effect in which the character performs a predetermined action (see FIG. 155 (A)).

  For example, a background image is displayed in response to an operation of the bet button D220 or an operation of the start lever D50 (start of stage effect), and then various movements such as movement of a character in response to the first stop or the second stop are performed. There is an action, and the final action of the character (for example, disappears) is triggered by the third stop.

  The character effect only needs to be displayed together with the background image (sometimes referred to as a stage effect) on the effect display device S40, and any character effect may be added to the normal background image. By additionally displaying the decoration, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. Whether or not to make a character appear and the type of character to appear may be determined based on the condition device won in the game, or may be determined independently of the condition device. Further, various display modes such as the position, number, and color of the character displayed may be made different based on the selected condition device. The display mode of a character should just be a mode which is visually recognizable to a player.

  Here, in addition to life forms such as humans and animals, characters are not only moving objects that can be visually recognized by the player when acting with some intention, such as artificial life forms such as robots or pseudo life forms, but also inorganic objects. For example, objects such as vehicles, battleships, and weapons can be included in the character.

<Direction group 3 “Conversation production”>
The effect display device S40 displays a display frame (sometimes referred to as a window) or the like along with the background image in a part of the lower part and the like, and displays character information related to the game state or story in the area inside the display frame. It is. For example, the character information to be displayed may be determined based on the condition device won in the game or regardless of the condition device. Note that the degree of expectation may be suggested by the color of display information, the color of characters, the timing of display, and the like.

  The conversation effect may be displayed on the effect display device S40 together with the background image, and may be anything that additionally decorates the normal background image. By additionally displaying the decoration, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. Further, not only the display but also the character information explaining the game etc. can be outputted by voice from the speaker S20, or the sound effect can be outputted from the speaker S20 together with the display (see FIG. 155 (B)).

  For example, when the rotation of the reel is triggered, the display frame is superimposed on the background image (start of the stage effect) and displayed on the effect display device S40, and then the character is triggered by the first stop or the second stop. Information is displayed one after another, and final character information is displayed in response to the third stop. As an example, the image of the character A, the display frame, and the character information (serif) are displayed when the reel starts to rotate, and then the image, the display frame, and the character information (serif) of the character B are displayed at the first stop. Is displayed, it is possible to exemplify an effect mode in which the character A and the character B are having a conversation.

  In addition, you may display character information on predetermined areas, such as the edge of the display area of production | presentation display apparatus S40, without displaying a display frame.

<Cut-in production of production group 4>
The “cut-in effect” is an effect of displaying a cut-in effect image by interrupting from the background image (stage effect described above) previously displayed on the effect display device S40 (see FIG. 155 (C)). ). For example, in response to an operation of the start lever D50, a cut-in effect image that is completely different from the background image that is normally displayed is displayed on the entire effect display device S40 for a predetermined time, and then the condition device that is won in the game. An effect that suggests is performed. In addition, you may comprise so that the effect of the effect aspect similar to effects other than the cut-in effect in the case of performing the cut-in effect mentioned above may be performed, without performing a cut-in effect. That is, it may be configured to execute an effect suggesting the condition device won in the game, triggered by the operation of the start lever D50. The cut-in effect is an example of an effect corresponding to the effect group 4, and the effect corresponding to the effect group 4 is not limited to the cut-in effect. In addition, the production corresponding to the production group 4 is executed in response to the operation of the start lever D50, suggesting the type of condition device won in the game, It is configured to indicate whether or not the winning condition device includes a bonus combination or whether or not the AT lottery is won.

  The “character effect” of group 2 and the “conversation effect” of group 3 described above were additionally decorated with respect to a normal background image. This “cut-in effect” is basically The image is composed of an image independent of the normal background image (the entire screen is switched from the background image).

  The cut-in effect image is displayed in advance on the effect display device S40 in addition to a mode in which the cut-in effect image is suddenly switched to be displayed on the entire effect display device S40 in response to the operation of the start lever D50. The cut-in effect image is inserted in such a way that it is split into a part of the displayed background image, and the originally displayed background screen and the cut-in effect image are temporarily displayed together. A mode (a mode in which the cut-in image is displayed only in a part of the display area of the effect display device S40) may be used.

  By displaying such a cut-in effect image, it is possible to suggest a condition device or the like won in the game according to the content of the cut-in effect image. For example, the condition device selected, the state such as the state related to the RT state or AT, depending on the person (character) appearing in the cut-in effect image, the display mode such as the color, number, degree of change, etc. of the item or goods Can be suggested.

<Direction Group 5 “Confrontation Production”>
The “confrontation effect” is an effect in which images of at least two types of characters compete on the effect display device S40, and an effect in which the result of the competition (win / loss, success / failure, etc.) is determined in one game (FIG. 155). (See (A)). For example, triggered by the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50, an image before the two kinds of characters start the confrontation is displayed on the effect display device S40, and then, triggered by the first stop, An image in which the two types of characters start a confrontation is displayed, the progress of the confrontation is displayed with the second stop as an opportunity, and an image showing final victory or defeat is displayed with the third stop as an opportunity.

  This confrontation is not limited to fighting or struggle, but is not limited to two or more characters (including groups and teams) that compete each other, such as sports and fast eating, but also the action of at least one character. As long as the winning / losing of the character is determined. For example, it is an effect that the winning and losing of the competition is completed in one game, and by winning one character, it is possible to suggest the expected degree of bonus winning or AT winning depending on the type of the winning character. Further, the selected condition device, RT state, set value, etc. may be suggested. At the end of one game, character information such as “WIN!” Is displayed. If the result of the confrontation is victory, success, etc., it will indicate that the result of the game is advantageous to the player, and that the player has won the bonus role in the game. Informing the player that the game will shift to the AT state from the next game onward. On the other hand, if the result of the confrontation is a defeat, failure, etc., it will indicate that the result of the game is not advantageous to the player, and it will be notified that the bonus combination was not won in the game. Or informing that it will not shift to the AT state after the next game. When performing a confrontation effect, the effect mode in which the result of the confrontation effect is victory / success and the effect mode in which the result of the confrontation effect is defeat / failure, etc. Until the 3 stop button is operated, the production mode is the same, and at the result notification timing (for example, the 3rd stop operation timing), the production is produced depending on whether the result of the confrontation production is victory / success or defeat / failure. You may comprise so that an aspect may differ.

<Director Group 6 "Additional Battle (for ART only)">
“Additional battle (only during ART)” is an effect in which images of at least two types of characters compete on the effect display device S40, as in the “confrontation effect”. Is determined (see FIG. 157B). Similar to confrontation production, it is not limited to fighting or struggle, but is not limited to two or more characters (including groups and teams) that compete each other, such as sports and fast eating, but also the movement of at least one character As long as the character wins or loses is determined.

  In particular, when the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 is operated, an image before the two types of characters start a confrontation is displayed on the effect display device S40, and then, when the first stop is performed, An AT game that displays an image where two characters start a confrontation, displays the progress of the confrontation when triggered by the second stop, and an image indicating the final victory or defeat when triggered by the third stop Information indicating the number is displayed. In addition, if the result of the extra battle (for exclusive use during ART) is victory, success, etc., it means that the result of the game is advantageous to the player. Inform you that you have won. On the other hand, if you lose or fail as a result of the extra battle (only during ART), you will be notified that you have not won the extra number of AT games in the game. Predetermined game where the number of games is won, but as a result of the extra battle (dedicated during ART), loss, failure, etc. are notified, and then a predetermined condition (next extra battle (dedicated during ART) is executed) (E.g., the operation of the bet button D220 for the next game, etc.) may be notified that the AT game number is won.

  In the “confrontation effect” and the “superior battle (only during ART)”, as in the “character effect”, the characters are not only life forms such as humans and animals, but also artificial life forms such as robots and pseudo-life forms. Characters can include not only moving objects that can be visually recognized by the player when acting with a certain intention such as a life form, but also inorganic objects such as vehicles, battleships, and weapons.

<Direction group 7 “Common navigation production”>
The “common navigation effect” is an effect of displaying a common navigation effect image while the background image (the stage effect described above) previously displayed on the effect display device S40 is displayed. For example, in response to the operation of the start lever D50, the common navigation effect image is displayed in a partial area of the effect display device S40 for a predetermined time, and then indicates that a rare role is won in the game. Perform the production. Although details will be described later, the common navigation effect is an effect that can be executed when a rare role is won in the AT preparation state 1, the AT preparation state 2, or the like. In the AT preparation state 1 and the AT preparation state 2, the player has a sense of expectation for the appearance after the transition to the AT state, so the player is excessively held in the AT preparation state 1 and the AT preparation state 2. There is a risk that the willingness to play will be cut off if the production is performed. Therefore, in the AT ready state 1 and the AT ready state 2, when a rare role is won, the fact that the rare role has been won is notified, but there is no additional number of AT games as in the AT state. Even in such a case, it is not an effect mode in which an additional battle is executed and whether or not the number of AT games is increased.

<Direction group 8 “Aiming”>
The “targeted effect” is displayed on the effect display device S40 when, for example, a reverse-press 7-match replay (replay-B) or a forward-press 7-match replay (replay-C) is won. This is the effect that is executed (see FIG. 158). For example, triggered by the operation of the start lever D50, an image prompting to align the symbols 7 is displayed on the effect display device S40. The player can perform a stop operation aiming at the symbol 7 in accordance with the image, and align the symbol 7 to a line that is not an active line (also referred to as an invalid line). In a gaming state where an AT game number can be added and the lottery can be executed, such as when the AT-related state is an AT state, if the player can align the symbols 7 in accordance with the “target effect”, the AT game number is added. It is configured to notify that it has been won. Note that the reverse push 7 replay (replay-B) and forward push 7 replay (replay-C) are replays in which the player's profit does not differ depending on the push order (not push forward replay). When a reverse push 7-match replay (replay-B) or forward-press 7-match replay (replay-C) is won, a target effect is generated, and the game is not executed in the push order suggested by the target effect. In such a case, the fact that the number of AT games has been won is not notified, but since the number of AT games has been won, the number of games added is notified at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, as another effect mode of the aiming effect, when the push order bell role or the push order re-playing role is won, an image such as “? Is displayed, and the player presses the correct pressing order (the pressing order with the highest profit) on his / her own. In such a case, for example, when the player executes the game in the order of the correct push in the low probability state, the player is configured to shift to the AT state that is highly profitable for the player, and high for the player. While notifying that it will be profitable, it is configured to maintain a low probability state that does not become profitable for the player when the player executes the game in the order of pushing the incorrect answer, and it does not become profitable for the player You may comprise so that it may alert | report.

<"Push order navigation production">
Further, as will be described later in detail, as described above, “push order navigation effect” includes re-game-B, re-game-C, re-game-D1 to re-game-D3, win-A1-win- A6, a player corresponding to the situation of the game when a condition device that can be displayed in a different order depending on the pressing order, such as replay-E1 to replay-E3, replay-F1 to replay-F3, is selected This is an effect of displaying the pressing order in which the most advantageous combination is stopped and displayed as an image or a character, or outputting it by voice. The player operates the stop button D40 according to the displayed or output information to stop and display the most advantageous symbols, and obtains a prescribed number of medals or shifts to an advantageous gaming state. Can be. In addition, even in the case where a re-game where the player's profit does not differ depending on the push order of the above-mentioned re-game-B, re-game-C, etc. It may be configured to be able to.

  As described above, the “production” of “no production” of production group 1 does not include stage production or push order navigation production, and even if “no production” of group 1 is selected, Stage effects and push order navigation effects are executed. The push order navigation effect can be executed together with the stage effect and the notice effect. For example, a push order navigation effect can be executed together with a stage effect, or a push order navigation effect can be executed together with a cut-in effect.

<< Relationship between production type and production operation (playback) start timing >>
FIG. 136 is a table showing the relationship between the type of effect and the operation (reproduction) start timing of the effect. As shown in FIG. 136, the operation (reproduction) start timing of the production includes the start lever operation timing, the spinning (reel) rotation start timing, the first reel stop reception timing, and the second reel stop reception timing. There is a third reel stop acceptance timing and a bet button operation timing. Note that the rotation start timing of the rotating drum (reel) can also be determined by the sub control board S by receiving a signal from the main control board M.

  In addition, the types of production include “no production” of production group 1, “character production” of production group 2, “conversation production” of production group 3, “cut-in production” of production group 4, and production. There are a “confrontation effect” for group 5, a “superior battle” for effect group 6, a “common navigation effect” for effect group 7, and a “target effect” for effect group 8.

<Director Group 1 “No Director”>
In the “no effect” effect group 1, the background image (stage effect) is continuously displayed from the operation timing of the start lever to the operation timing of the bet button of the next game. That is, the background image continues to be displayed throughout the game, but no other notice effect image or the like is displayed.

<Director Group 2 “Character Production”>
In the “character effect” of the effect group 2, the character image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the background image at the subsequent reel rotation start timing without performing the effect at the operation timing of the start lever. As described above, the character image may be displayed in addition to the background image, and at any timing from the reel rotation start timing to the next game bet button operation timing. The image of the character displayed or the image of the character displayed in advance may be executed. Note that the display may be performed so that the character's motion changes at any one of the first reel stop acceptance timing, the second reel stop acceptance timing, and the third reel stop acceptance timing. It is not necessary to change the character's motion at each of these timings, and the character's motion can be changed at any timing.

  In this case, at the operation timing of the bet button of the next game, it does not develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle). In addition, you may comprise so that it may develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle) at the operation timing of the bet button of the next game.

<Direction group 3 “Conversation production”>
In the “conversation effect” of the effect group 3, the effect is not executed at the operation timing of the start lever D50, but is started by displaying the image of the display frame so as to be superimposed on the background image at the subsequent reel rotation start timing. “Conversation production” is a timing from the reel rotation start timing of the game to the operation timing of the bet button of the next game, and character information regarding the game state and production story is displayed in the area inside the display frame. It only has to be done. Note that the display may be performed so that the content of the character information changes at the first reel stop acceptance timing, the second reel stop acceptance timing, or the third reel stop acceptance timing. It is not necessary to change the content of the character information at each timing, and the content of the character information can be changed at any timing. The display of the character information may be anything that additionally decorates the background image. As a specific example in which the content of the character information changes, a line frame image is displayed at the reel rotation start timing, and a line corresponding to the character A is displayed together with the character A image at the first stop timing. After that, at the third stop timing, a new line frame, an image of character B, and a line corresponding to character B may be displayed.

  In this case, at the operation timing of the bet button of the next game, it does not develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle). In addition, you may comprise so that it may develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle) at the operation timing of the bet button of the next game.

<Cut-in production of production group 4>
In the “cut-in effect” of the effect group 4, the effect is executed at the operation timing of the start lever D50 (for example, a cut-in notice sound or a cut-in image). Next, at the same time as the rotation of the rotating drum (reel) starts, the background image is switched to the effect image for small role notification. Furthermore, at the first reel stop acceptance timing to the third reel stop acceptance timing, the condition device won in the game is displayed using the effect image for small role notification. It should be noted that the effect image for the small role notification can be sequentially switched and displayed every time the first reel stop acceptance timing to the third reel stop acceptance timing.

  In this case, it may develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle) at the operation timing of the bet button of the next game. In this way, at the time of executing the cut-in effect, the effect is executed at the start lever operation timing, and the character effect or the conversation effect is configured not to execute the effect at the start lever operation timing, By configuring the game that performs the cut-in effect to be more profitable for the player than the game that performs the character effect and the conversation effect, the player can perform the effect at the operation timing of the start lever. When executed, it can be expected that a highly profitable event will occur. In the game where the character effect and the conversation effect are executed, a highly profitable event does not occur (not occurring in the bonus winning game, not occurring in the AT lottery winning game, not occurring in the rare role winning game, etc.). Also good.

<Direction Group 5 “Confrontation Production” and Group 6 “Additional Battle (for ART only)”>
In the “confrontation effect” of the effect group 5 and the “additional battle (only during ART)” of the group 6, at least two types of characters confront each other between the start lever operation timing and the next game bet button operation timing. The image to be displayed is displayed. When a rare role is won in the immediately preceding game and a cut-in effect is executed, the “confrontation effect” or “addition battle (ART) is performed by operating the bet button after the immediately preceding game ends. It may be informed that the start of “medium only” is started, and “confrontation effect” or “additional battle (only during ART)” is started from the operation timing of the start lever of the game. The “confrontation effect” of the effect group 5 is mainly used for bonus notification, and the extra battle (only during ART) is mainly used for extra notification of the number of AT games. Further, it is possible to display the confrontation state so as to gradually change at every first reel stop acceptance timing to third reel stop acceptance timing. For example, it is possible to display an image such that the turn of the confrontation changes every time the first reel stop acceptance timing to the third reel stop acceptance timing. Further, the “confrontation effect” can be executed in a plurality of consecutive games. It is possible to display an image in which a provisional win / loss is determined for each of a plurality of games and a final win / loss is determined for the last game. By doing in this way, a player's expectation can be maintained or improved over a plurality of consecutive games.

<Group 7 “Directive Navigation”>
In the “common navigation effect” of group 7, as described above, the common navigation effect image is displayed in response to the operation of the start lever D50.

  In this case, it may develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle) at the operation timing of the bet button of the next game.

<Group 8 “Targeting Direction”>
In the “targeted production” of group 8, as described above, information indicating that 7 is aligned when reverse-press 7-match replay (replay-B) or forward-press 7-match replay (replay-C) is won. Is displayed. Or, if you win the push order bell role or push order re-gamer, the correct answer is displayed to the player by displaying an image such as "????" It is also possible to execute a pushing order hitting game in which the pushing order (the pushing order with the highest profit) is applied by itself.

  In this case, the background image (stage effect) can be switched according to whether or not the predetermined combination can be stopped and displayed at the operation timing of the bet button of the next game.

<"Push order navigation production">
In the “push order navigation effect”, as described above, the push order is displayed as an image or a character, or is output by voice at each of the first reel stop acceptance timing to the third reel stop acceptance timing.

  In this case, it may develop into a confrontation effect (additional battle) at the operation timing of the bet button of the next game.

<Processing at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 137 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation process which is called and executed in the process of step 2300 of FIG.

  First, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is an in-AT state. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the state relating to the AT is the in-AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads and executes the in-AT processing at the time of start lever operation described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2800). Note that the determination processing in step 2302 is not only when the state related to the AT is “AT state”, but also “AT state after falling”, “specialized state after falling”, and “state after bell overflow”. Even in this case, the determination is YES.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not the in-AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a specialized precursor state. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is a special sign state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads a special sign process at the time of start lever operation described later. And execute the next process (the process of step 2800).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, if the state relating to AT is not the “specialization sign state”, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the state relating to AT is “additional special state”. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2306, in other words, when the state relating to the AT is “additional special state”, in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs an additional specialization process at the time of start lever operation described later. Read and execute, and shift to the next process (process of step 2800).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state relating to AT is not the “addition specialization state”, in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the state relating to AT is “inside advantageous BB. It is determined whether or not it is “game”. In the case of Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state relating to AT is “advantageous BB internal game”, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the advantageous BB internal internal processing subroutine when the start lever is operated. Is called and executed to shift to the next process (the process of step 2800).

  In the case of No in step 2307, in other words, when the state relating to AT is not “advantageous BB internal game”, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the RT state is “RT1”. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is “RT1”, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not have the push order navigation (the push order navigation is not in the state related to AT). It is a state relating to an AT that does not occur and is determined to be “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, or the like. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state relating to AT is no push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. As described above, when the sub-control board S side receives the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoid command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoid command, it is not a configuration that can execute an effect related to push order navigation. When the AT extra lottery is won, the main control board M side transmits a command related to the AT extra lottery and the number of AT extra games to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution timing and effect aspect regarding the production | presentation regarding push order navigation may be determined by the sub control board | substrate S side.

  In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image to avoid establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). Thus, in the third embodiment, when the number of games elapses from the situation of “RT1” and “AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, the state shifts to “RT1” and “low probability state”. In this case (before the replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if the reverse-pressed white 7-match replay or forward-pressed black 7-match replay is won, there will be no additional AT games, so the white seven or black seven It is configured so that the push order in which the is not in a straight line is navigated. In addition, when the number of games elapses from the situation of “RT1” and “AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, the state changes to “RT1” and “low probability state”. The push order navigation may occur for the push order bell, but the push order navigation may not occur for the push order replay game.

  If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in Step 2308, if No in Step 2310, if No in Step 2312, the CPUSC displays the effect image and the background image in Step 2316 based on the state related to AT. (Step 2800).

<Processing during AT at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 138 is a subroutine showing a process during AT at the time of start lever operation which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG.

  First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads out information related to the condition device relating to the game, and in step 2354, confirms winning / replay winning information relating to the game. In step 2356, the instruction number is displayed. Check the command. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display at the time of push order bell execution and the push order navigation display of push order replay are the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by numbers and the display colors related to the numbers are the same) It can be applied to the case where it is configured so as to be displayed in (). Moreover, when comprised in that way, it is comprised so that the display image (for example, character image) different from a push order navigation display may be displayed at the time of execution of a push order navigation in the production | presentation display apparatus S40, You may comprise so that the image for production | generation different at the time of the push order navigation which concerns may be displayed, and the push order navigation which concerns on a push order replay may be displayed.

  Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2358, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects six push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning win-A1 which is a push order bell, a number indicating a push order corresponding to “left → middle → right” which is a push order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number is enclosed in a circle. Display in display mode.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. It is determined whether or not. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1-D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the push order is three choices, the first stop button is information corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the numeral 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

  In the case of No in step 2362, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, if an avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups.

  Next, if the result of step 2366, 2364, or 2368 is executed, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the AT background image on the effect display device S40 in step 2370 after executing the processing of step 2360, 2364, or 2368 described above.

  Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 10 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 10 games or less, in step 2374, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in display mode B (display mode described later). A display mode that is less conspicuous than A) is displayed on the effect display device S40.

  Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward press instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first image to avoid establishment as the push order navigation display. It displays on effect display apparatus S40 by a number display mode group.

  If No in step 2376 or if the processing in step 2378 has been executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first image to avoid establishment as a push order navigation display. It displays on effect display apparatus S40 by a number display mode group.

  The CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts to the next process (the process of Step 2800) when the result of Step 2380 is No or when the process of Step 2382 is executed.

  In the case of No in step 2372, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 11 games or more, in step 2384, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the AT remaining game number in the display mode A (the display mode described above). (Display mode that is more conspicuous than B) is displayed on the effect display device S40.

  Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward press instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be displayed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  If No in step 2386, or if the processing in step 2388 has been executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be displayed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  The CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (the process of Step 2800) when No in Step 2390 or when the process of Step 2392 is executed. As described above, when the AT remaining game number is small, in other words, when the display of the AT remaining game number is displayed in the display mode B that is more conspicuous than the display mode A, the forward press instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, an effect that displays “Aim 7!” Together with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the middle reel in the push order in which the white seven and the black seven do not stop display on the invalid line is displayed as the first stop reel. It is configured to execute push order navigation. With this configuration, when the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode for informing the player that the number of AT remaining games is small in a situation where the number of AT remaining games is small. Can be configured so that the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B is not hindered by the image of the arrow or the display of “Aim at 7!”. Similarly, a continuous effect (for example, whether or not the “AT state” (a state related to an AT in which push order navigation can be performed) continues in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small (for example, Even if it is configured to execute (battle effect), it is configured so that the visibility of the battle effect is not hindered by configuring so that an arrow image or “Aim 7” is not displayed during the execution of the battle effect. be able to. In addition, with this configuration, even when the number of AT remaining games in the effect display device S40 is 0 and a message indicating that the “AT state” is ended after defeating the battle effect is displayed, When a forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command is received, the forward push instruction command or reverse push is performed at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the message indicating that the “AT state is completed” is displayed. Informs the number of AT extra games based on the instruction command (based on winning of forward black 7 replay or reverse white 7 replay). However, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a later timing, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

<Special indication processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 139 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation specialization precursor process that is called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG. 137.

  First, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information related to the condition device relating to the game in Step 2402, confirms the winning / replay winning information relating to the game in Step 2404, and sets the instruction number in Step 2406. Check the command. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects six push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct pressing order in the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning win-A2 which is a push order bell, a number indicating the push order corresponding to “left → right → middle” which is a push order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. Display in display mode. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is the replay game in the push order in step 2412. It is determined whether or not. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1-D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the push order is three choices, the first stop button is information corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. Is displayed, the number “1” is displayed at the center lower side of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the center of the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position near the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2416, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S has received the forward push instruction command. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, in the case where the forward press instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse press instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, in the case where a reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . In the case of Yes in Step 2424, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in Step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the second numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or in the case of No in step 2424, an effect display of the AT background image is performed in step 2428. In step 2430, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2800).

<Specialization process for starting lever operation>
Next, FIG. 140 is a subroutine showing the specialization process when adding a start lever, which is called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG.

  First, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads information related to the condition device related to the game, and in step 2454 confirms winning / replay winning information related to the game. In step 2456, the instruction number is displayed. Check the command. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning a prize-A4 which is a push order bell, a number indicating a push order corresponding to “right → left → middle” which is a push order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. The display mode is displayed. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, in a case where the game condition device is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the game condition. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1-D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2462, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the selection order is three choices, the first stop button corresponds to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. Is displayed, the number “1” is displayed at the center lower side of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the center of the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, in the case where the game condition device is not a push order replay game, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a forward push instruction command. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, if a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the push order is the forward push, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 in order, from left to right. The order of pressing can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing to.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, in the case where the forward press instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S has received the reverse press instruction command. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the reverse push navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the right stop button D43, the middle stop button D42, and the left stop button D41 in order, from right to left. The order of pressing can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing to.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, in the case where a reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups. Here, the avoidance command is a generic name for both the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether a forward press avoidance command is received or a reverse press avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward press avoidance command is received, in order to avoid forward press “left → middle → right”, the number “1” is displayed on the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2474 described above, in other words, if the avoidance command has not been received, in step 2478, the CPUSC of the sub control board S does not display the push order navigation.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the processing of the above-described steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, 2476, or 2478, in step 2480, the AT background image is displayed on the effect display device S40. In step 2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2800).

<Advantageous processing inside the BB during start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 141 is a subroutine showing the specialization process for adding the start lever when called and executed in the process of step 2700 of FIG.

  First, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information related to the condition device related to the game, and in step 2704 confirms winning / replay winning information related to the game. In step 2706, the instruction number is displayed. Check the command. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub control board S It is determined whether the condition device is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning a prize-A4 which is a push order bell, a number indicating a push order corresponding to “right → left → middle” which is a push order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. The display mode is displayed. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the game condition. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-game-A and re-game-D1-D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numeric display mode group. Here, since the selection order is three choices, the first stop button corresponds to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. Is displayed, the number “1” is displayed at the center lower side of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the center of the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, in the case where the game condition device is not a push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a command relating to 7 replays. It is determined whether or not. Here, the forward press instruction command, the reverse press instruction command, the forward press avoid command, and the reverse press avoid command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display with the first number. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described steps 2712, 2716, and 2720, or if No in step 2718, in step 2722, the AT background image is displayed on the effect display device S40. In step 2724, the AT remaining game number is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2800).

  In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when the predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the effect display device S40. In this case, it is notified that BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of first torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 142 is a subroutine showing the first cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2500 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S operates the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. It is determined whether or not.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, when there is an operation of a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the push order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the next process (the process of step 2110) is entered.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, in the case where there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the forward pressing navigation or the reverse. It is determined whether or not the push order navigation related to the push navigation (push order navigation instructing to align the forward push black replay or the reverse push white 7 replay to the invalid line) is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2508, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkly displays the push order navigation (it continues to be darkly displayed in the game) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). Transition.

  In the case of No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays and fails in the push order. The effect is executed and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  In the third embodiment, it is possible to display the push order navigation even in the AT state after the fall, the state after the bell overflow, and the specialized state after the fall. The display can be erased or darkened.

<Processing at the time of 2nd torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 143 is a subroutine showing a second cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2550 of FIG.

  Next, in Step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, when there is an operation of a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first in the pressing order navigation display. 2 The display relating to the stop is erased, and the next process (the process of step 2110) is entered.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays all the pressing order navigation displays. Erasing, pushing order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is not being displayed, or in the case of No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  In the third embodiment, the push order navigation can be displayed even in the AT state after the fall, the state after the bell overflow, and the specialized state after the fall. The display can be deleted.

<Process at the time of 3rd torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 144 is a subroutine showing the third cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2600 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, when there is a stop button operation based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces the pressing order success effect. “GET!” Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays “GET” "Is not displayed.

  In the case of No in step 2602 described above, in other words, when the push order navigation is not being displayed, in the case of No in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, or in steps 2608 or 2610 When the process is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT added games (command set in step 1517) is received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates a difference from the command indicating the number of remaining AT games received last time. It may be configured to determine whether or not the addition of the AT game number has been executed and the AT additional game number and display the AT additional game number.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses the AT display game in the effect display device S 40. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, if the command related to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds AT on the effect display device S40. Without displaying the number of games, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). In addition, as a method for reporting the number of added games at AT, (1) all of the added games are notified by the game, (2) a part of the added games is notified by the game, and the remaining number of games is recorded after the game. (3) In the game, the number of additional games is not notified, and the games after the game (for example, at the time of winning 7 replays, at the time of winning the common bell (at the time of winning a role that is not added), After executing the game (continuous production), the operation of the bet button D220 and the operation of the start lever D50 for the game in which the number of remaining games on the production display device S40 becomes “0”, or the game after the game that has become “0” ).

  In the third embodiment, it is possible to display the push order navigation even in the AT state after the fall, the state after the bell overflow, and the specialized state after the fall. The push order success effect can be executed.

  In addition, even if the common bell in the specialization state of addition is stopped in accordance with the push order navigation, the display regarding the number of AT additional games is not displayed (the common bell is not subjected to AT addition lottery).

<< Direction content determination process >>
<Overview of scenario decision and production decision>
The outline of scenario decision and production decision is as follows. In the third embodiment, six scenario lottery tables T1, T2, T3, T6, T7, and T8 are defined as the scenario lottery tables. Each scenario lottery table defines three scenarios (scenarios 1 to 3) that can be selected and their selection probabilities. First, one scenario lottery table is selected from the six scenario lottery tables based on the state relating to the AT and the RT state. This scenario lottery table is a table for selecting one scenario from the scenarios 1 to 3 by lottery processing.

  Next, using one selected scenario lottery table, one scenario is selected from the three scenarios based on the condition device won in the game. In each scenario, an effect lottery table to be used and its order are defined. The effect lottery table is a table for selecting one effect from among a plurality of effects by a lottery process. The order of the effect lottery table is determined according to the determined scenario, and the contents (effect group) of the effects of each game are determined by the lottery process using the effect lottery table according to the determined order. That is, the flow of effects in a plurality of consecutive games can be determined according to the scenario.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in scenario 1 of FIG. 147 (B), there is a scenario that defines only the effect lottery table used in the first game (the game). For the second and subsequent games of scenario 1, it is defined that “no scenario (none)”. For this reason, when scenario 1 is selected as the first game, the second game of scenario 1 is “no scenario”, so the scenario is executed in the determination process of step 4002 described later of the second game. If it is determined that the scenario has not been selected, a process of drawing a scenario in the process of step 4006 is executed, and a new scenario is selected. Thus, when scenario 1 is selected in the game, a new scenario is selected by lottery processing in the next game. With this configuration, when scenario 1 is selected, it is possible to execute an effect that is completed in one game.

  On the other hand, as shown in scenario 2 and scenario 3 in FIG. 147 (B), there is also a scenario that defines an effect lottery table used in each of a plurality of games (for example, the first game to the fourth game). When scenario 2 or 3 is selected, an effect lottery table assigned to each of a plurality of games defined in scenario 2 or 3 is selected for each game, and the contents of the effects of each game are It is determined. With this configuration, when scenario 2 or 3 is selected, it is possible to execute an effect that continues over a plurality of games. In the case of scenario 2 or 3, since the fifth game is “no scenario”, it is determined that the scenario is executed up to the fifth game in the determination process in step 4002 described later. The process of drawing lots is not executed.

  In the third embodiment, an example in which each of the six scenario lottery tables can select three scenarios is shown, but the number of scenario lottery tables and the number of scenarios that each scenario lottery table can select are limited to these. It is not a thing. By increasing the number of scenario lottery tables and scenarios, it is possible to diversify the contents of effects performed as the game progresses. On the other hand, by reducing the number of scenario lottery tables and scenarios, the processing can be lightened, the required storage capacity of the scenario lottery table can be reduced, and the processing can be simplified or speeded up. Hereinafter, specific processing will be described in detail.

<Details of scenario decision and production decision>
FIG. 145 is a subroutine showing an effect content determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 2800 of FIG. 135.

  First, in step 4002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a scenario is being executed in the game (whether or not a scenario is being executed and does not fall under a scenario). As described above, in the scenario, the order of the effect lottery tables used for determining the content of effects executed in each of one or a plurality of consecutive games is defined. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), three scenarios 1 to 3 are defined in the scenario lottery table. Each of the scenarios 1 to 3 has a prescribed number for each type of condition device, and the ease of being selected varies depending on the type of condition device won in the game. The table number shown in FIG. 147 (A) shows an example in which the denominator value is 256. However, the denominator value is not limited to this value, and other values such as 65536 may be used. In addition to the type of condition device and the type of effect, it can be determined as appropriate according to the processing.

  Note that the scenario lottery table shown in FIG. 147 (A) is an example of a scenario lottery table selected when the game section is a normal section and the RT state is RT0. Scenario lottery tables selected in other game states are also defined in the same manner in correspondence with game sections (such as normal sections or advantageous sections) and RT states (such as RT0 and RT1), but are omitted here. Hereinafter, a case where the game section is the normal section and the RT state is RT0 will be described as an example. In the following, rare roles are common bell (winning-B), cherry (winning-C), watermelon A (winning-D), and watermelon B (winning-E). Is the role of Note that the rare combination is merely an example, and the common bell (winning-B) may be a non-rare combination, or the replay-B or the replay-C may be a rare combination.

  In the example shown in FIG. 147 (A), scenario 1 is most likely to be selected when the condition device is lost or bonus non-overlapping (condition device that does not overlap with the bonus) and is a non-rare combination (number of numbers). The value is 250). Scenario 1 may also be selected when the condition device has a bonus overlap (the value of the number is 24 or 12), and the condition device is less than the rare role (the value of the number is 12). It is easy to select when it is a rare combination (the value of the number is 24). Scenario 1 is not selected when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a rare combination (the value of the number is 0).

  Also, scenario 2 of the example shown in FIG. 147 (A) is most easily selected when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a rare combination (the value of the number is 192). Scenario 2 is then more likely to be selected when the condition device has a bonus overlap (the value of the number is 116 or 122), and the condition device is rarer than the non-rare role (the value of the number is 116). Is slightly selected when the value of is 122). Furthermore, scenario 2 is the least likely to be selected when the condition device is a lost or bonus non-overlapping and non-rare combination (the value of the number is 4).

  Furthermore, scenario 3 in the example shown in FIG. 147A is most likely to be selected when the condition device is a bonus overlap (the value of the number is 116 or 122), and the condition device is a non-rare role (value of the number). Is slightly more likely to be selected when it is a rare combination (value of the number is 122) than 116). Scenario 3 is then easily selected when the condition device has a non-duplicate bonus and is a rare combination (the value of the number is 64). When the number value is 2), it is most difficult to select.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (B), in the scenario 1, the effect lottery table A is assigned in the first game (the game). In scenario 1, the effect lottery table is not assigned in the game after the second game (after the game after the game). That is, scenario 1 is a scenario for determining only the contents of the effect in the game, and is not for determining the contents of the effect in a plurality of consecutive games.

  In scenario 2, the production lottery table A is assigned in the first game (the game), the production lottery table B is assigned in the second game and the third game, and the production lottery table C is assigned in the fourth game. The assigned lottery table is not assigned in the fifth game. As described above, the scenario 2 is for determining the contents of the effects in four consecutive games including the game.

  Furthermore, in the scenario 3, the production lottery table A is assigned in the first game (the game concerned), the production lottery table D is assigned in the second game and the third game, and the production lottery table E is assigned in the fourth game. The assigned lottery table is not assigned in the fifth game. As described above, scenario 3 is for determining the contents of effects in four consecutive games including the game.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the scenarios 2 and 3 are for determining the contents of effects in four consecutive games including the game, but the number of consecutive games is limited to four. It is not a thing, and it may be more or less than this. When the number is increased, it is possible to execute an effect that makes the story feel, and when the number is decreased, the contents of the effect can be quickly switched in correspondence with the selected condition device or the like. As described above, the condition device referred to when determining the scenario is a rare role, and the condition device referred to when determining the scenario includes a bonus (a condition device overlapping with a single bonus or a bonus). ), The scenario 2 or the scenario 3 is easily determined. In other words, the condition device referred to when determining the scenario is a rare role, and the condition device referred to when determining the scenario includes a bonus (a condition device overlapping with a single bonus or bonus). In such a case, an effect based on the same scenario is easily executed over a plurality of games. By configuring in this way, scenario 2 or scenario 3 is determined when there is a possibility that it will be highly profitable for a player who has a relatively high expectation of winning a bonus or AT lottery, etc. It can be configured so that it is easy to beat whether or not the profit is high over a plurality of games.

  In the case of No in step 4002, in step 4004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a scenario lottery table determination process (FIG. 146) described later. As described above, in the third embodiment, six scenario lottery tables of T1, T2, T3, T6, T7, and T8 are defined as scenario lottery tables. One scenario lottery table is determined by the scenario lottery table determination process. A table is determined.

  Next, in step 4006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines one of the scenarios 1 to 3 using the scenario lottery table determined in step 4004.

  In the case of Yes in Step 4002 or when the processing of Step 4006 is executed, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect lottery table in Step 4008. In the process of step 4008, an effect lottery table defined in the scenario determined in the process of step 4006 is determined. The effect lottery table used in the game can be determined by the processing in step 4008.

  Next, in step 4010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses the effect lottery table determined in step 4008 to determine one specific effect content by lottery processing, and ends this subroutine. Through the processing in step 4010, the specific contents of the game can be determined. Specifically, in step 4008, one of the effect groups 1 to 8 shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) is determined in step 4008 by the process of step 4010. Determined by the production lottery table.

  In the third embodiment, the determination of the content of the effect and the determination of the effect group are synonymous, and each of effect group 1 to effect group 8 shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) is assigned to effect group 1. “No effect” belongs, “Character effect” belongs to effect group 2, “Conversation effect” belongs to effect group 3, “Cut-in effect” belongs to effect group 4, and “Confrontation effect” belongs, “additional battle” belongs to effect group 6, “common navigation effect” belongs to effect group 7, and “target effect” belongs to effect group 8. Therefore, in the third embodiment, by determining any one of the effect groups 1 to 8, one specific effect content belonging to the effect group is determined.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 147, the conditional devices may be illustrated as a group below. The group “losing” belongs to the “losing” of the condition device shown in FIGS. 104 and 105. The group “replay” includes “replay-A”, “replay-B”, “replay-C”, “replay-D1 to D3”, “replay” of the condition devices shown in FIGS. 104 and 105. "Games -E1 to E3" and "Replays -F1 to F3" belong. In the group “bell”, “winning-A1 to A6”, “winning-H”, and “winning-I” of the condition devices shown in FIGS. 104 and 105 belong. In the group “rare role”, “winning-B”, “winning-C”, “winning-D”, and “winning-E” of the condition devices shown in FIGS. 104 and 105 belong. The group “1 type BB” belongs to the condition devices “1 type BB-A”, “1 type BB-B”, and “1 type BB-C” shown in FIGS. 104 and 105.

  As shown in FIG. 147, each grouped condition device corresponds to an effect group number (see FIG. 104). The production group number 0 corresponds to the group “losing” with no bonus overlap. Production group numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 12, and 13 correspond to the group “replay” without bonus duplication. The production group number 5 corresponds to the group “bell” without bonus duplication. Production group numbers 6, 7, 8, and 9 correspond to the group “rare combination” without bonus duplication. Further, the group “1 type BB” with overlapping bonuses corresponds to the production group number 0, the group “replay” with overlapping bonuses corresponds to the production group number 2, and the group “bell” with overlapping bonuses. The production group number 5 corresponds to “,” and the group “rare combination” with overlapping bonuses corresponds to the production group numbers 7, 8, and 9.

  Furthermore, in the following, condition devices belonging to the group “rare role” may be simply referred to as rare roles, and condition devices belonging to the group “replay” and group “bell” may be simply referred to as non-rare roles. .

  As described above, when winning / replaying winning information related to the game is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S, if the winning / replaying winning information can be acquired by an illegal act, The possibility of recognizing the pushing order (reel stop order) related to the game is increased, and an unreasonably high profit can be obtained. Therefore, when it is an advantageous section and the condition device has a pushing order, the winning / replay winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side (see steps 1458 and 1466 in FIG. 120). When it is a section or a waiting section, or when it is an advantageous section and the condition device is not in a pushing order, the effect group number obtained by masking the winning / replay winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. (See steps 1468 and 1470 in FIG. 120). The bonus winning information is similarly transmitted to the sub control board S side in the advantageous section, the normal section, and the standby section (see step 1472 in FIG. 120). For this reason, the sub-control board S determines the contents of the effect by referring to either the winning / re-game winning information or the effect group number and the bonus winning information transmitted from the main control board M based on the game situation. be able to.

<Scenario lottery table decision processing>
FIG. 146 is a subroutine showing a scenario lottery table determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 4004 in FIG. 145.

  First, in step 4102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a specific freeze execution command transmitted from the main control board M has been received.

  If YES in step 4102, in step 4104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects a specific freeze time table and ends this subroutine. In the third embodiment, the freeze effect is executed on the sub control board S while the operation of the stop button is disabled on the main control board M until a predetermined time elapses after the start lever is operated. The specific freeze effect is configured to be executed only in the “advantageous section”. By this step 4104, a specific freeze effect to be executed in the game can be determined. Also, as shown in the figure, when a specific freeze occurs, regardless of which game state (state related to AT, RT state), refer to a specific table at the time of freezing, The content of the effect in the game is determined.

  In the case of No in step 4102, in step 4106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game section is an advantageous section.

  In the case of Yes in step 4106, in step 4108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is an in-AT state. If Yes in step 4108, that is, if the state relating to AT is an in-AT state, in step 4110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T3.

  Next, in step 4112, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not another scenario lottery table selection condition is satisfied. The determination process in step 4112 is a process for determining whether or not a condition for selecting another scenario lottery table is satisfied in accordance with a game section, an RT state, an AT state, or the like. In the third embodiment, other scenario lottery tables are omitted. In the case of Yes in step 4112, in step 4114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects another scenario lottery table and ends this subroutine.

  In the case of No in step 4108, in step 4116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is in the AT preparation state 1 or the AT preparation state 2. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4118, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T2.

  In the case of No in step 4116, in step 4120, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a fall state during AT or a special fall state. In the case of Yes in step 4120, in step 4122, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T8.

  In the case of No in step 4120, the CPUSC of the sub control board S moves the process to step 4112.

  In the case of No in step 4106, in step 4124, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game section is a normal section.

  In the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4126, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a fall waiting state.

  In the case of Yes in step 4126, in step 4128, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T6.

  In the case of No in step 4126, in step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a low probability state.

  In the case of Yes in step 4130, in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the RT state is RT1.

  If Yes in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T 7 in step 4134.

  In the case of No in step 4132, in step 4136, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T1.

  If NO in step 4124 or NO in step 4130, the process proceeds to step 4112.

  Through this scenario lottery table determination process, one scenario effect table out of six scenario effect tables T1, T2, T3, T6, T7, and T8 is determined according to the game section, the RT state, the state related to AT, and the like.

<< Example of production lottery table >>
148 (A) to 148 (C) are tables showing examples of the effect lottery table. Each of the above-described scenarios 1 to 3 is data that defines the time-series order of the effect lottery table used to determine the content of the effect executed in each of a plurality of consecutive games (FIG. 147 (B )reference). As shown in FIG. 148, the effect lottery table defines various effect contents and their selection probabilities. Each production content has a prescribed number for each type of condition device, and the ease of selection varies depending on the type of condition device won in the game. The table numbers shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) show an example in which the denominator value is 256, but the denominator value is not limited to this value. Other values may be used, and can be determined as appropriate according to the type of condition device, the type of effect, and the like.

  148 (A) shows the effect lottery table A, FIG. 148 (B) shows the effect lottery table B, and FIG. 148 (C) shows the effect lottery table C. As shown in FIG. 147 (B), in the scenarios 2 and 3, the effect lottery tables D and E are also defined, but in FIG. 148, only the effect lottery tables A to C are shown. These effect lottery tables A to E are tables that can be selected when the game section is the normal section and the game state in which the RT state is RT0, and the effect lottery tables selected in other game states. There are also omitted here. It should be noted that at least one of the effect lottery tables A to E may be configured so as to be selected even in other gaming states, or may not be configured.

  148 (A) to 148 (C) are effect lottery tables for selecting a plurality of specific effect contents including “no effect” of effect group 1 by lottery processing. As shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C), as specific contents of the production, “no production” of production group 1, “character production” of production group 2, “conversation production” of production group 3, Eight types of production group 4 “cut-in production”, production group 5 “confrontation production”, production group 6 “superior battle”, production group 7 “common navigation production” and production group 8 “targeted production” The contents of the production are specified. Here, a name such as “character production” indicates a representative name of production contents belonging to the production group. That is, the production contents corresponding to each of the production groups are not one by one, and as an example, the production contents corresponding to the production group 2 are not limited to the character production.

  In the third embodiment, each of the effect group 1 to the effect group 8 is configured so that only one specific effect content shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) belongs. However, a plurality of specific effects may belong to each effect group. In such a case, first, an effect group is determined by lottery processing in step 4010 of FIG. 145, and then one specific effect content belonging to the effect group may be determined by lottery processing (FIG. Not shown).

<Other productions>
Further, the content of the production (stage production, notice production, push order navigation production) is not limited to the production contents shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C). (Color) ”,“ ambiguous announcement ”,“ continuous production ”,“ sub-input button ”,“ stage change ”,“ episode production ”,“ movie production ”,“ BGM change ”,“ winning announcement ”,“ development announcement ” , “Advance notice”, “Notice sound / Lever sound”, etc.

<W announcement>
The “W announcement” is an effect mainly for suggesting a condition device won in the game, and is information indicating at least two condition devices: a condition device won in the game and other condition devices. Is displayed on the effect display device S40. “W notice” is a notice effect and belongs to “cut-in effect” of the effect group 4. For example, triggered by the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, information indicating at least two condition devices, that is, the condition device won in the game and the other condition devices, is displayed on the effect display device S40. . While imagining which condition device is the player, the player makes a first stop and a second stop, and with the third stop as an opportunity, information indicating the condition device won in the game is sent to the effect display device S40. indicate. As an example, when the start lever is operated, an image (moving image) in which the character A wearing red clothes and the character B wearing yellow clothes is displayed on the effect display device S40 is displayed. Indicates that the condition device won in the game is a cherry or a bell (push order bell or common bell). In the case of executing such an effect, the condition device corresponding to the clothes worn by the character B was won more than the case where the condition device corresponding to the clothes worn by the character A was won. The player may be configured to be more profitable for the player (the probability of winning the bonus or AT lottery is higher), and there are two pieces of information (colors) corresponding to the condition device displayed in the W announcement. The W notification may be executed in the same production mode, and when the W notification is executed in such a production mode, the relative notification is performed when all the W notifications are executed. The player may be configured to be highly profitable.

<Small role notification (color)>
The “small role announcement (color)” is an effect that suggests the condition device won in the game by color, and the “small role announcement (color)” is a notice effect, and the “cut-in effect” of the effect group 4 And so on. As described above, in the notice effect, it is possible to suggest a condition such as the selected condition device, the RT state, or the state related to the AT by the display mode of the color of items, goods, etc. displayed on the effect display device S40. For example, the character is displayed when the bet button D220 is operated or the start lever D50 is operated, and goods owned by the character are displayed when the first stop is performed. Depending on the color of the goods displayed at this time, the selected condition device is suggested, or the number of goods displayed at this time and the timing at which the goods are displayed (third stop, etc.) It can indicate whether or not the lottery is won.

<Vague notification>
The ambiguous notification is triggered by the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50, etc., to execute the above-described conversation effect on the effect display device S40, turn on the decoration lamp unit D150, or turn off the backlight S30. It is a directing effect. This ambiguous performance does not necessarily suggest the winning condition device or the current gaming state, and the rendering mode is independent of the winning condition device, the current RT state, the current AT state, etc. May be determined. Therefore, the player cannot always acquire information on the selected condition device and the current gaming state by vague notification. On the other hand, the aforementioned W notification, small role notification described later, and the like are effects for suggesting the player with a condition device won in the game, and are effects that can suggest information that the player wants to know. On the other hand, as described above, the ambiguous performance is different in that it does not necessarily suggest the condition device won in the game or the current gaming state.

<Continuous production>
The “continuous effect” is an effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of games, and an effect that the content of the effect evolves or changes as the game progresses is preferable. “Continuous production” is performed over a plurality of games such as “Confrontation production” of production group 5 and “Additional battle” of production group 6, and the result (bonus winning / not winning, AT lottery winning / not winning, etc.) ). Further, even when the above-described scenario 2 or scenario 3 is determined, it is configured so that a continuous effect can be executed. For example, in the first game (the game), the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 is performed. The first sound effect is output in response to the above operation. In the next game, when the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 is operated, a second sound effect having a pitch different from the first sound effect or a different length is output. Further, in the next game, when the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 is operated, a third sound effect having a different pitch or a different length from the first sound effect and the second sound effect is output. To do. In this way, by executing an effect that changes as a plurality of games progress gradually, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of discomfort different from the usual and recognize that a certain gaming state has occurred. Specifically, the degree of expectation for winning a bonus or winning an AT lottery can be suggested based on the number of consecutive games or the difference in sound effects.

<Sub input button>
The “sub input button” is an effect that prompts the player to operate the sub input button SB that is an effect button that can be operated by the player, and the player operates the sub input button SB (for example, single press, continuous hit, long press, etc.) ) To display image information, character information, etc. on the effect display device S40 (display the effect in a display mode different from the case where there is no predetermined operation on the sub input button SB), and in the middle of the effect It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of bonus winning or AT winning at the timing immediately before notifying the timing or final result. For example, after the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50, an image or character information that prompts the operation of the sub button is displayed on the effect display device S40 in response to the third stop. When the player operates the sub button, information suggesting the expected degree of bonus winning or AT winning is displayed on the effect display device S40.

  Further, the sub input button SB may be configured to include not only a detection device that detects a player's operation but also a driving device (such as a motor or a solenoid). For example, when the player operates the sub input button SB, the sub input button SB is vibrated by the driving device, and the degree of expectation of bonus winning or AT winning can be suggested based on the magnitude and length of the vibration ( It may be configured so that any high-impact event becomes deterministic when it vibrates). Further, the player can vibrate the sub input button SB in a manner that can be recognized by the player by visually recognizing the sub input button SB at a predetermined opportunity, for example, the end of the third stop operation. It is also possible to prompt the operation. That is, an image that prompts the user to operate the sub input button SB may be displayed on the effect display device S40, or the player may be prompted to operate the sub input button SB by vibrating the sub input button SB itself. Good. Note that the position and configuration of the sub input button SB are not limited to those in this example. For example, the lower panel D140 may be configured to be operable as the sub input button SB. To do).

  Further, a lamp or the like may be incorporated in the sub input button SB. The degree of expectation of winning a bonus or winning an AT lottery can also be suggested depending on the color, brightness, and blinking of the lamp.

<Stage change>
“Stage change” is an effect of changing the background image or the like of the stage effect described above. As described above, the stage effect is an effect mainly performed by displaying a background image or the like. A stage change can be performed by determining one background image from a plurality of predetermined background images based on information about the RT state and AT. For example, after the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50, the background image is determined based on the RT state or the state related to the AT, and the background image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40. Since the background image is determined based on the RT state and the state related to the AT, the background image may be changed according to the RT state and the state related to the AT. In addition, you may comprise so that it may determine based on the condition apparatus won by the said game.

  Also, during the period from the third stop of the game to the operation of the bet button D220 of the next game or the operation of the start lever D50, the “confrontation effect” described above is executed, and the result of the confrontation effect is lost. With the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, the stage can be changed by determining the background image based on the RT state or the state related to the AT. By producing in this way, the stage can be changed smoothly with a story.

<Episode production>
The “episode effect” is an effect of displaying character information indicating a story adopted as an effect on the screen of the effect display device S40. For example, after the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50, the background image is determined based on the RT state or the state related to the AT, and the episode is displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40 together with the background image. It should be noted that the “episode effect” may be executed over a plurality of consecutive games in addition to what ends within one game. The expectation of the player can be increased by increasing the expectation level of bonus winning or AT winning as the number of consecutive times increases. Moreover, you may display the character information which shows a story with an image on the screen of effect display apparatus S40 between bonuses.

<Movie production>
The “movie effect” is an effect executed for one game, and is an effect of displaying a movie showing an outline of a story or the like adopted as an effect or introduction of a character on the screen of the effect display device S40. For example, a predetermined movie is displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40 from the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 of the game to the operation of the bet button D220 or the start lever D50 of the next game. can do. For example, one movie can be determined from a plurality of predetermined movies based on information about the RT state or AT, and displayed on the screen of the effect display device S40.

<BGM change>
“BGM change” is an effect of changing the BGM output from the speaker S20. A BGM used in one game or a BGM used in a plurality of consecutive games may be used. In response to the operation of the bet button D220 or the operation of the start lever D50, the BGM is determined based on the condition device determined in the game, the RT state, or the state related to the AT, and the determined BGM is output from the speaker S20. . Since the BGM is determined based on the condition device, RT state, and AT-related state determined in the game, the BGM determined by the condition device, RT state, and AT-related state determined in the game may change. is there. Also, a BGM without a song and a BGM with a song are prepared, and when there are many remaining AT games (for example, 50 or more), a BGM with a song can be selected. With this configuration, when the player recognizes that a BGM with a song is output, it can be recognized that a large number of AT games remain.

<Announcement>
“Winning notification” is an effect of displaying an image suggesting the expected degree of bonus winning or AT winning or the like on the effect display device S40, or outputting a sound effect indicating the expected degree from the speaker S20. In particular, when a bonus winning or AT winning is confirmed, by using images (rainbow-colored items, goods, etc.) and sound effects (sound effects such as “Cuin”) different from other images and sound effects, The player can be satisfied.

<Development notice>
“Development announcement” is an effect that is executed after a continuous effect has been executed over a plurality of consecutive games. For example, when a rare role is won, the rare role is won. A continuous effect is executed from the played game, “development!” Is displayed on the effect display device S40 at the third stop operation timing after several games, and an effect mode in which a confrontation effect is executed from the next game can be exemplified.

  The “addition notice” is an effect that is executed based on the determination of the AT game number addition when the state relating to the AT is a gaming state in which an AT game number addition such as an in-AT state can occur. For example, after the third stop in the game won for adding the number of AT games, information indicating that the addition of the number of games is determined together with the number of games to be added is displayed on the effect display device S40. Further, it can be performed together with the “sub input button SB” described above. For example, when 10 games are added, the number of games is displayed as it is on the effect display device S40, and when 50 games are added, the operation of the “sub input button SB” is prompted after the third stop button is operated. When the information is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the player operates the “sub input button SB”, the number of games is displayed on the effect display device S40, etc. When the number of games added is relatively large), the sub input button SB may be prompted to operate.

  The “lever warning sound” is an effect of outputting sound when the reel is rotated triggered by the operation of the start lever D50. In response to the operation of the start lever D50, the type of the lever warning sound is determined based on the condition device determined in the game, the RT state, and the state related to the AT, and the lever warning sound is output when the reel rotates. Note that the output timing of the lever warning sound may be output at a timing later than the normal timing by a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds). When the lever warning sound is output, the expectation of relatively high profit may be higher than when the lever warning sound is output at normal timing.

  In particular, the player's expectation can be enhanced by determining the timbre to be output, the delay time until output, and the like according to the RT state and the state related to the AT.

  The selection of the production contents defined in the production lottery table A shown in FIG. 148 (A) is configured as follows.

  If the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a loser or a non-rare role, “No effect” is most easily selected (the value of the number is 128), and then “Character effect” (the number of the number) The value is 64) and “conversation effect” (value of the number is 62), and the other effects are not selected (value of the value is 0).

  When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and a rare role, “cut-in effect” is most easily selected (value of the number is 128), and then “character effect” and “conversation effect” (setting) The number value 64) is easily selected, and the other effects are not selected (the value of the numeric value is 0).

  When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a non-rare role, “conversation effect” is most easily selected (value of the number is 192), and then “cut-in effect” (value of the value of the number is 32), “Character effect” (number value is 16) and “No effect” are easily selected in this order, and other effects are not selected (value value is 0).

  When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a rare role, the “cut-in effect” is most easily selected (the value of the number is 192), and then “conversation effect” (the value of the number is 32). ), “Character effect” (the value of the number is 16) and “No effect” are easily selected in this order, and other effects are not selected (the value of the value is 0).

  As described above, when the effect lottery table A shown in FIG. 148 (A) is selected, if the bonus overlap, either “conversation effect” or “cut-in effect” is most likely (number of numbers). The value is 192). When “conversation effect” is selected, it is highly possible that the condition devices have overlapping bonuses and are non-rare roles. When “cut-in effect” is selected, it is highly possible that the condition device is a bonus duplicate and a rare role.

  Next, if there is no bonus overlap, either “no effect” or “cut-in effect” is most likely to be made (the value of the number is 128). When “no effect” is selected, it is highly possible that the condition devices are non-overlapping bonuses and non-rare roles. When “cut-in effect” is selected, it is highly possible that the condition devices are non-duplicate bonuses and play a rare role.

  In this way, when the effect lottery table A shown in FIG. 148 (A) is selected, and when “cut-in effect” is selected, the condition device is either a non-duplicate bonus or a bonus overlap rare. There is a high possibility of being a role.

  Further, the selection of effects defined in the effect lottery table B shown in FIG. 148 (B) is configured as follows.

  In all cases where the condition device is a bonus overlap and a bonus non-overlap, only “Character effect” (value of the number is 256) is selected, and other effects are not selected (number) Value is 0).

  Further, the selection of effects defined in the effect lottery table C shown in FIG. 148 (C) is configured as follows.

  In all cases where the condition device is a bonus overlap and a bonus non-overlap, only the “confrontation effect” (value of the number of 256) is selected, and other effects are not selected (the number of numbers). Value is 0).

<< Specific examples of production progress >>
FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect that progresses through the effect content determination process described above.

<First game>
As shown in FIG. 149, first, in the first game, the result of the lottery process is lost. In the first game, a scenario has not yet been selected (the scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), and it is determined that the scenario is not executed in step 4002 in FIG. 145. In step 4004 in FIG. The scenario lottery table corresponding to the state and the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 of FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage of FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. 145, the effect is drawn in the first game by lottery processing using the effect lottery table A. It is determined that there is none (stage of effect lottery in FIG. 149). Since scenario 1 is selected in the first game, the second game is determined to have no scenario (stage in the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<2nd game>
In the second game, the result of the lottery process is re-game-A. In the second game, a scenario has not yet been selected (the scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), and it is determined that the scenario is not executed in step 4002 in FIG. 145. In step 4004 in FIG. The scenario lottery table corresponding to the state and the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 of FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected again from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage of FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. 145, the effect is drawn in the second game by lottery processing using the effect lottery table A. It is determined that there is none (stage of effect lottery in FIG. 149). In addition, since scenario 1 is selected also in the second game, it is determined that there is no scenario in the third game (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<3rd game>
In the third game, the result of the lottery process is winning-A1. In the third game, a scenario has not yet been selected (the scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), and it is determined that the scenario is not executed in step 4002 in FIG. 145. In step 4004 in FIG. The scenario lottery table corresponding to the state and the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 of FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage of FIG. 149). Next, at step 4008 in FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149), and at step 4010 in FIG. Production is determined (stage of production lottery in FIG. 149). Since scenario 1 is also selected in the third game, the fourth game is determined to have no scenario (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<4th game>
In the fourth game, the result of the lottery process is winning-C. In the fourth game, a scenario has not yet been selected (the scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), and it is determined that the scenario is not executed in step 4002 in FIG. 145. In step 4004 in FIG. The scenario lottery table corresponding to the state and the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 in FIG. 145, scenario 2 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage in FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 in FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149), and in step 4010 in FIG. 145, the third game is cut by the lottery process using the effect lottery table A. In effect is determined (stage of effect lottery in FIG. 149). In the fourth game, the scenario 2 is selected, so that the fifth game is determined as the effect lottery table B, the sixth game is determined as the effect lottery table B, and the seventh game is determined as the effect lottery table C. It is determined that the eighth game has no scenario (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<5th game>
In the fifth game, the result of the lottery process is lost. In the fifth game, since scenario 2 has already been selected (the scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), it is determined in step 4002 in FIG. 145 that the scenario is being executed, and steps 4004 and 4006 in FIG. The process is not executed. In step 4008 in FIG. 145, the effect lottery table B is selected (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 145). In step 4010 in FIG. 145, the lottery process using the effect lottery table B is performed. In the game, the character effect is determined (stage of effect lottery in FIG. 149). In this fifth game, scenario 2 is selected in the fourth game, so the effect lottery table up to the seventh game is determined (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (FIG. 147 (B)). reference).

<6th game>
In the sixth game, the result of the lottery process is Re-Game-A. In the sixth game, since scenario 2 has already been selected (the scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), it is determined in step 4002 in FIG. 145 that the scenario is being executed, and steps 4004 and 4006 in FIG. The process is not executed. In step 4008 in FIG. 145, the effect lottery table B is selected (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149), and in step 4010 in FIG. 145, the lottery process using the effect lottery table B is performed. In the game, the character effect is determined (stage of effect lottery in FIG. 149). In addition, since scenario 2 is selected in the fourth game even in the sixth game, the effect lottery table up to the seventh game is determined (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (FIG. 147 (B)). reference).

<7th game>
In the seventh game, the result of the lottery process is winning-B. In the seventh game, since scenario 2 has already been selected (the scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), it is determined in step 4002 in FIG. 145 that the scenario is being executed, and steps 4004 and 4006 in FIG. The process is not executed. In step 4008 in FIG. 145, the effect lottery table C is selected (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149), and in step 4010 in FIG. 145, the lottery process using the effect lottery table C is performed. In the game, it is determined as a confrontation effect (stage of effect lottery in FIG. 149). In addition, since the scenario 2 is selected in the fourth game even in the seventh game, the effect lottery table up to the seventh game is determined (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (FIG. 147 (B)). reference).

<8th game>
In the eighth game, the result of the lottery process is lost. Further, in the eighth game, scenario 2 has already been selected, but the eighth game has no scenario (refer to the fifth game in scenario 2 in FIG. 147 (B)) (the scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149). 145 in FIG. 145, it is determined that the scenario is not executed. In step 4004 in FIG. 145, a scenario lottery table corresponding to the state related to the AT and the RT state is selected. In step 4006 in FIG. Scenario 1 is selected from (Scenario lottery stage in FIG. 149). In step 4008 of FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149), and in step 4010 of FIG. 145, there is no effect in the eighth game by lottery processing using the effect lottery table A. It is determined (stage of drawing lottery in FIG. 149). Since scenario 1 is selected in the eighth game, the ninth game is determined to have no scenario (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<9th game>
In the ninth game, the result of the lottery process is re-game-A. Further, in the ninth game, no scenario is selected (the scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), and it is determined that the scenario is not executed in step 4002 in FIG. 145. In step 4004 in FIG. The scenario lottery table corresponding to the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 of FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage of FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 in FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149), and in step 4010 in FIG. 145, the effect is generated in the ninth game by lottery processing using the effect lottery table A. It is determined that there is none (stage of effect lottery in FIG. 149). In addition, since scenario 1 is selected even in the ninth game, it is determined that there is no scenario in the tenth game (stage of the effect lottery table in FIG. 149) (see FIG. 147 (B)).

<10th game>
In the tenth game, the result of the lottery process is winning-A1. In the 10th game, no scenario is selected (the scenario presence / absence stage in FIG. 149), and it is determined that the scenario is not executed in step 4002 in FIG. 145. In step 4004 in FIG. The scenario lottery table corresponding to the RT state is selected, and in step 4006 of FIG. 145, scenario 1 is selected from the scenario lottery table (scenario lottery stage of FIG. 149). Next, in step 4008 in FIG. 145, the effect lottery table A is selected, and in step 4010 in FIG. 145, any effect content is determined by lottery processing using the effect lottery table A.

<<< Example of production selection result >>>
150 (A) to 155 (A) are the above-described eight types of “no effect”, “character effect”, “conversation effect”, “cut-in effect”, “confrontation effect”, “upper battle (during ART) Dedicated) ”,“ common navigation effect ”, and“ targeted effect ”effects are the effect selection probability tables indicating the probabilities of being selected corresponding to each of the condition devices.
FIGS. 150B to 155B are scenario selection probability tables showing the probability that the above-described three scenarios are selected corresponding to each of the condition devices. FIG. 150 (A) and FIG. 150 (B) to FIG. 155 (A) and FIG. 155 (B) show the game section, the RT state, and the state related to the AT, focusing on six typical types. It is a table. In the following, it is assumed that setting 1 is set.

  150A and 150B show effects when the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is a low probability state (hereinafter referred to as a first target game state). It is a selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table. 151 (A) and 151 (B), when the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state relating to the AT is the AT preparation state 2 (hereinafter referred to as the second target game state). An effect selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table. 152A and 152B show the effects when the game section is the advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to the AT is the AT state (hereinafter referred to as the third target game state). It is a selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table. FIGS. 153 (A) and (B) show the effects when the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state relating to AT is a fall waiting state (hereinafter referred to as a fourth target game state). It is a selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table. In FIGS. 154 (A) and (B), the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1 (the state in which the game is shifted to RT1 by itself), and the state related to AT is a low probability state (hereinafter referred to as the first) 5 is referred to as a target game state 5) and a scenario selection probability table. 155 (A) and (B), when the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state relating to AT is the state during AT after falling (hereinafter referred to as the sixth target gaming state). These are an effect selection probability table and a scenario selection probability table.

  The numerical values indicating the probabilities shown in FIGS. 150 (A) and 150 (B) to 155 (A) and 155 (B) are set to setting 1, and the above-described first target gaming state to sixth It is a value indicating the result of aggregation for each target gaming state.

<< First target gaming state >>
As described above, in the first target game state, the game section is the normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the low probability state. FIG. 150A is an effect selection probability table in the case of the first target gaming state. FIG. 150 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the first target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 150 (B), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a lost or non-rare combination, scenario 1 is most easily selected, and scenarios 2 and 3 may be selected. . If the condition device is a non-bonus bonus and is a rare role, scenario 2 is most easily selected, and then scenario 3 is easily selected, but scenario 1 is not selected. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and a non-rare combination, either scenario 2 or 3 is most likely to be selected, and then scenario 1 is likely to be selected. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a rare role, scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, then scenario 3 is most likely to be selected, and scenario 1 may be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 150 (A), when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a loser or non-rare role, “No effect” is most easily selected, followed by “Character effect”, “Conversation”. “Effect” is easy to select, and “Confrontation effect” may be selected, but other effects are not selected. If the condition device is a non-bonus bonus and a rare role, “Character production”, “Conversation production”, “Cut-in production”, or “Confrontation production” will be selected with the same probability. No production is selected. If the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loser or a non-rare role, the “confrontation effect” is most easily selected, then the “conversation effect” is most easily selected, and “no effect” or “character effect” May be selected, but other effects are not selected. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, “cut-in effect” or “confrontation effect” is most easily selected, and then “conversation effect” is most easily selected, “no effect” or “character” “Production” may be selected, but other productions are not selected.

<< Second target gaming state >>
As described above, in the second target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state relating to the AT is the AT preparation state 2. FIG. 151A is an effect selection probability table in the case of the second target gaming state. FIG. 151 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the second target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (B), when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus, and is a loser, non-rare combination, and rare combination, only scenario 1 is selected, and other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. There is no case. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and is a loss, a non-rare combination and a rare combination, scenario 1 is most likely to be selected, and then scenario 2 or 3 is likely to be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A), when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a loser or a non-rare combination, only “no effect” is selected, and no other effects are selected. . If the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a rare role, only the “common navigation effect” is selected, and no other effect is selected. If the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loser or a non-rare role, only “no effect” is selected, and no other effects are selected. If the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a rare role, only the “common navigation effect” is selected, and no other effect is selected.

<< Third Target Game State >>
As described above, in the third target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state relating to AT is the state during AT. FIG. 152 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the third target gaming state. FIG. 152 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the third target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (B), when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus and is a loser or non-rare role, scenario 1 is most easily selected, and then scenario 2 and scenario 3 are selected in this order. Easy to be. If the condition device is a non-bonus bonus and is a rare role, scenario 2 is most easily selected, and then scenario 3 is easily selected, but scenario 1 is not selected. If the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a lost or non-rare combination and a rare combination, scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, then scenario 3 is likely to be selected, and scenario 1 may be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (A), when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus and is a loser or non-rare role, “no effect” is most easily selected, and then “conversation effect” is selected. It is easy to select “confrontation effect” in some cases, but other effects are not selected. When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and a rare role, any one of “cut-in effect”, “confrontation effect”, and “add-on battle (only during ART)” is selected with the same probability. "" May be selected, but other effects are not selected. If the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loser or non-rare role, “No effect” is most easily selected, then “Conversation effect”, “Cut-in effect”, and “Confrontation effect” are selected in this order. Although it is easy to do, other productions are not selected. If the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, one of “cut-in effect”, “confrontation effect”, and “add-on battle (only during ART)” is selected with the same probability, Either “None” or “Conversation production” is easily selected with the same probability, but no other production is selected.

<< Fourth Target Game State >>
As described above, in the fourth target game state, the game section is the normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state relating to AT is the fall waiting state. FIG. 153 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the sixth target gaming state. FIG. 153 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the sixth target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (B), when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus, and is a loser, non-rare combination and rare combination, only scenario 1 is selected, and other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. There is no case. In the case where the condition device is a bonus duplication and is a loss, a non-rare combination, and a rare combination, scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, and then either scenario 1 or 3 is likely to be selected with the same probability.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (A), when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a loser or non-rare role, “no effect” is most easily selected, and then “character effect” or “conversation” One of the “productions” is easily selected with the same probability, but no other production is selected. If the condition device is a non-bonus bonus and a rare role, or if it is a bonus duplicate and a non-losing role or a rare role, the “cut-in effect” is most easily selected. Either “production” or “conversation production” is easily selected with the same probability, but no other production is selected.

<< 5th target gaming state >>
As described above, in the fifth target game state, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1 (a state in which the game section has been shifted to RT1 by itself), and the state related to AT is a low probability state. FIG. 154 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the fifth target gaming state. FIG. 154 (B) is a scenario selection probability table for the fifth target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (B), when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a lost or non-rare combination, only scenario 1 is selected, and scenarios 2 and 3 are not selected. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loser or non-rare combination, either scenario 2 or 3 is most likely to be selected, and then scenario 1 is likely to be selected. When the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a rare role, scenario 2 is most likely to be selected, then scenario 3 is most likely to be selected, and scenario 1 may be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (A), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and a loss, “no effect” is most easily selected, and then “character effect” and “conversation effect” are ordered. The “confrontation effect” may be selected in some cases, but other effects are not selected. When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a non-rare combination, only the “target effect” is selected, and no other effects are selected. If the condition device is a non-bonus bonus and a rare role, “Character production”, “Conversation production”, “Cut-in production”, or “Confrontation production” will be selected with the same probability. No production is selected. If the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loser or a non-rare role, the “confrontation effect” is most easily selected, then the “conversation effect” is most easily selected, and “no effect” or “character effect” May be selected, but other effects are not selected. When the condition device is a bonus duplication and a rare role, “cut-in effect” or “confrontation effect” is most easily selected, and then “conversation effect” is most easily selected, “no effect” or “character” “Production” may be selected, but other productions are not selected.

<< Sixth Target Game State >>
As described above, in the sixth target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the state during AT after falling. FIG. 155 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the sixth target gaming state. FIG. 155 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the sixth target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (B), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and bonus overlapping, and is a loss, a non-rare combination and a rare combination, only scenario 1 is selected, and the other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. Is not selected.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (A), when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a loser or a non-rare combination, only “no effect” is selected, and no other effect is selected. . If the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a rare role, “Additional Battle (for ART only)” is most easily selected, and then either “Cut-in Effect” or “Confrontation Effect” is the same. It is easy to select by probability, and then “conversation effect” is easily selected, but other effects are not selected. If the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loser or non-rare role, “No effect” is most easily selected, then “Conversation effect”, “Confrontation effect”, and Cut-in effect are selected in this order. Although it is easy to do, other productions are not selected. If the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a rare role, either “cut-in effect” or “confrontation effect” can be easily selected with the same probability, then “no effect” or “conversation effect” Either one is easily selected with the same probability, but other effects are not selected.

<<< Comparison of target gaming status >>>
Below,
(Comparison 1) First target gaming state and second target gaming state (Comparison 2) Second target gaming state and third target gaming state (Comparison 3) First target gaming state and fourth target game State (Comparison 4) The probability that the effect is executed is compared for the combinations of the five target game states of the third target game state and the sixth target game state. In the comparison here, it is assumed that setting is set to 1 while excluding BB. Further, as described above, the condition device belonging to the group “rare role” is simply referred to as “rare role”, and the condition device belonging to the group “replay” and group “bell” is simply referred to as “non-rare role”. The condition devices belonging to the group “1 type BB” may be simply referred to as “1 type BB” or “single 1 type BB”. The group “1 type BB” includes “1 type BB-A”, “1 type BB-B”, and “1 type BB-C”, and may be referred to as “single bonus”.

<< (Comparison 1) First Target Game State and Second Target Game State >>
<First target gaming state>
First, the probability that an effect is executed in the first target gaming state is
(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare combination” (b) When the condition device is a non-duplication bonus and is a “losing” and a “non-rare combination” (c) In the case of “rare combination” (d) The calculation is performed for each of the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination”. As described above, in the first target game state, the game section is the normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the low probability state.

<(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the first target gaming state, the winning ratio for the “rare combination” with the bonus non-overlapping is added to the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the non-overlapping group “rare combination”. It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (1-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105). In Formula (1-1), the number 3204 for “winning-B”, the number 1000 for “winning-C”, the number 700 for “winning-D”, and the number of “winning-E”. The number 300 is used (see the column number of RT0 in FIG. 105).

Also, in the first target gaming state, if the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (see FIG. 150 non-overlapping bonuses, see “Rare” column). As shown in FIG. 150, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, “character production” (25%), “conversation production” (25%), “cut-in production” (25%), “confrontation” Any production of “production” (25%) is selected. Therefore, when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare role” in the first target gaming state,
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (1-2)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (1-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the first target gaming state, the winning rate is “losing” and “non-rare role” with the bonus non-overlapping, and the winning rate is all of the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of the condition devices. In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (1-3)
It becomes. Here, the numerical value “367” in the expression (1-3) is the sum of the number that is won by the condition device that becomes a single bonus and the number that is won by the condition device that overlaps with the bonus.

  The sum of the winning numbers of the condition device that becomes the single bonus is the setting number 40 of “1 type BB-A”, the setting number 40 of “1 type BB-B”, and the setting number of “1 type BB-C”. This is the sum of Equation 40 and 120 (= 40 + 40 + 40) (see the column number of RT0 in FIG. 105).

  In addition, the number of places won by the condition device that overlaps with the bonus is the place number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-C”, the place number 40 of “1 kind BB-B + winning-D”, and “1 kind”. BB-B + winning-E ", 40," 1 type BB-C + winning-C ", 40," 1 type BB-C + winning-D ", 40," 1 type BB- " The sum 240 of the number 40 and the number 40 of the “C + winning-E” (refer to the number of columns in the column RT0 in FIG. 105), and the number 1 of the “1 type BB-B + replay-A” , “1 type BB-B + winning-A1”, 1 type, “1 type BB-B + winning-A2”, 1 type, “1 type BB-B + winning-A3”, 1 Sum 7 of the place number 1 of “1 type BB-B + winning-A4”, the place number 1 of “1 type BB-B + winning-A5” and the place number 1 of “1 type BB-B + winning-A6” 7 = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) and a (sum 247 (= 240 + 7 with reference numeral input columns of RT0 in Fig. 105)).

  Therefore, the numerical value “367” in Expression (1-3) can be calculated by the sum of the number 120 of winning the condition device that becomes a single bonus and the number 247 of winning the condition device that overlaps with the bonus. In addition, the numerical value “5204” in Expression (1-3) is the result of Expression (1-1). As shown in Expression (1-3), by calculating “65536-367-5204”, a number that is won by a condition device that becomes a single bonus, a number that is won by a condition device that overlaps with the bonus, It is possible to exclude the number of “rare combination”, and it is possible to calculate the number in the case where the condition device is “bonus” and “non-rare combination” with no bonus overlapping.

  Also, in the first target gaming state, when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”, both effects are executed with a probability of 50% (bonus non-indicated in FIG. 150). (Refer to “Lose” and “Non-rare” column). As shown in FIG. 150, the probability of “no effect” for each of the group “losing”, the group “replay”, and the group “bell” is 50%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100. −50 = 50. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150, the “character production” (25%), the “conversation production” (24%), and the “confrontation” are all included in the group “losing”, the group “replay”, and the group “bell”. Any production of “production” (1%) is selected.

Therefore, in the first target gaming state, when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “losing” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
59965/65536 × 50/100
≒ 29983/65536 Formula (1-4)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (1-3) (“59965/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effects will be executed when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus>
From the above, in the first target gaming state, when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus, the probability that some effect will be executed is from Equation (1-2) and Equation (1-4) 5204/65536 + 29983/65536
= 35187/65536 Formula (1-5)
It becomes.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the first target gaming state, the winning rate in which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes “rare combination” is added with the numbers of all condition devices belonging to the bonus overlapping group “rare combination”. Can be obtained. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (1-6)
It becomes. In Expression (1-6), the first “80” is the sum of the number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-C” and the number 40 of “1 type BB-C + winning-C”. Yes, the next “80” is the sum of the number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-D” and the number 40 of “1 type BB-C + winning-D”, and the last “80” is , The number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-E” and the number 40 of “1 type BB-C + winning-E” (see the number of columns in the column RT0 in FIG. 105).

  When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare combination” in the first target gaming state, the effect is executed with a probability of 93.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 150, the probability of “no effect” in the group “rare role” is 6.25%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100−6.25 = 93.75. . Specifically, as shown in the “rare role” column in FIG. 150, the “character effect” (6.25%), “conversation effect” (12.5%), “cut-in effect” ( 37.5%) or “Confrontation effect” (37.5%) is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the first target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the probability that some effect will be executed is calculated using equation (1-6):
240/65536 × 93.75 / 100
= 225/65536 Formula (1-7)
It becomes.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the first target gaming state, the winning rate for the “1 type BB” and the “non-rare role” overlapped with the bonus is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of all the conditional devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (1-8)
It becomes. In the formula (1-8), the first “120” is the number 40 of “1 type BB-A”, the number 40 of “1 type BB-B”, and the “1 type BB-C”. The next “1” is the number 1 of “1 type BB-B + replay-A”, and the last “6” is “1 type BB-B + winning A1”. Is the sum 6 of the numerical value 1 of “1 type BB−B + winning A6” (see the numerical value in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105).

  In the first target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination”, the effect is executed with a probability of 93.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 150, the probability of “no effect” of the group “1 type BB”, the probability of “no effect” of the group “replay”, and the probability of “no effect” of the group “Bell” Is 6.25%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100−6.25 = 93.75. Specifically, as shown in the “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” columns in FIG. 150, the group “1 type BB”, the group “replay”, and the group “Bell” are all “ One of the “character effect” (6.25%), “conversation effect” (12.5%), and “confrontation effect” (75%) is selected.

Therefore, in the first target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
127/65536 × 93.75 / 100
≒ 119/65536 Formula (1-9)
It becomes.

<Probability that an effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with a bonus>
From the above, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the first target gaming state, the probability that some effect is executed is from 225/65536 + 119/65536 from Equation (1-7) and Equation (1-9).
= 344/65536 Formula (1-10)
It becomes.

<Probability that the production will be executed in the first target gaming state>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed in the first target gaming state is from Expression (1-5) and Expression (1-10),
35187/65536 + 344/65536
= 35531/65536 Formula (1-11)
It becomes.

<Second target gaming state>
Next, similarly to the first target gaming state, the probability that the effect is executed in the second target gaming state is as follows:
(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare combination” (b) When the condition device is a non-duplication bonus and is a “losing” and a “non-rare combination” (c) In the case of “rare combination” (d) The calculation is performed for each of the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination”. As described above, in the second target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to the AT is the AT preparation state 2.

<(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the second target gaming state, the winning ratio for the condition device to be a “rare combination” with non-duplicate bonus is added to the number of all condition devices belonging to the group “rare combination” with no bonus overlap It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (2-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105). In Formula (2-1), as in Formula (1-1), the number 3204 of “winning-B”, the number 1000 of “winning-C”, and the number of “winning-D” 700 and the number 300 of “winning-E” are used (see the number of columns in the column RT0 in FIG. 105).

Also, in the second target gaming state, when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (see FIG. 151 bonus non-overlapping, see “Rare role” column). As shown in FIG. 151, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonus, “common navigation effect” is always selected. Therefore, in the second target gaming state, if the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare role”, the probability that some effect will be executed is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (2-2)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (2-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the second target gaming state, the bonuses for “losing” and “non-rare role” are non-duplicate bonuses, and all winning conditions for the group “losing” and group “non-rare role” It is obtained by adding the device numbers. In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (2-3)
It becomes. Here, the numerical value “367” in the expression (2-3) is the sum of the number that is won by the condition device that becomes a single bonus and the number that is won by the condition device that overlaps with the bonus. Note that the numerical value “367” can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (1-3) for the first target gaming state (see the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105).

  Further, in the second target gaming state, when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”, the probability of “no effect” is 100% for all (see FIG. 151). The bonus is not duplicated (see “Lose” and “Non-rare role” columns), and the production is not executed.

Therefore, in the second target gaming state, when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “losing” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
59965/65536 × 0/100
= 0/65536 Formula (2-4)
It becomes.

<Probability that some effects will be executed when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus>
From the above, when the condition device is non-overlapping in the second target gaming state, the probability that some effect will be executed is from Equation (2-2) and Equation (2-4): 5204/65536 + 0/65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (2-5)
It becomes.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the second target gaming state, the winning rate in which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes “rare combination” is added with the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the bonus overlapping group “rare combination”. Can be obtained. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (2-6)
It becomes. This equation (2-6) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (1-6) for the first target gaming state (see the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105).

Further, in the second target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “rare combination”, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (see FIG. (Refer to “Rare role” column with 151 bonus overlaps). Specifically, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus, only “common navigation effect” is selected. Therefore, in the second target gaming state, if the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
240/65536 × 100/100
= 240/65536 Formula (2-7)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (2-6) (“240/65536”) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the second target game state, the winning rate for the “1 type BB” and the “non-rare role” overlapped with the bonus is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of all the conditional devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (2-8)
It becomes. The equation (2-8) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (1-8) of the first target gaming state (see the number of columns in RT0 in FIG. 105).

  In the second target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination”, the production is executed with a probability of 0% (see FIG. 151). ).

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the second target gaming state and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
127/65536 × 0/100
= 0/65536 Formula (2-9)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (2-8) (“127/65536”) was used.

<Probability that an effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with a bonus>
From the above, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the second target gaming state, the probability that some effect will be executed is 240/65536 + 0/65536 from Equation (2-7) and Equation (2-9).
= 240/65536 Formula (2-10)
It becomes.

<Probability that an effect is executed in the second target gaming state>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed in the second target gaming state is from Equation (2-5) and Equation (2-10),
5204/65536 + 240/65536
= 5444/65536 Formula (2-11)
It becomes.

<Comparison result between the first target game state and the second target game state>
The probability of executing some effect in the first target gaming state is from the equation (1-11):
35531/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing some effect in the second target gaming state is as follows:
5444/65536
It is.

Therefore,
35531/65536> 5444/65536 Formula (2-12)
When the first target gaming state and the second target gaming state are compared, the probability of executing any effect in the first target gaming state is greater than the probability of executing any effect in the second target gaming state. Is also configured to be higher.
As described above, in the first target game state, the game section is the normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the low probability state. On the other hand, in the second target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state relating to the AT is the AT preparation state 2. Therefore, when the RT state of the target game state is both RT0, the effect is more easily executed in the normal section than in the advantageous section. If the player looks at the advantageous section indicator YH, it can be determined whether or not the gaming section is currently an advantageous section. For this reason, when the game section can be recognized as a normal section, the willingness to play is reduced. Therefore, in the normal section, by performing various effects frequently, it is possible to enter the advantageous section. Since the expectation for the transition can be increased, the probability of executing some effect in the first target gaming state is increased. In the first target gaming state, an effect that suggests the current set value may be more easily executed than in the second target gaming state. For example, in a game related to a loss that is not won in a bonus or AT lottery, an effect that can be executed only in a normal section may be provided, and the higher the set value, the higher the occurrence rate. With this configuration, the player's willingness to proceed with the game is improved even in the normal section.

<< (Comparison 2) Second Target Game State and Third Target Game State >>

<Second target gaming state>
As described above, in the second target gaming state, the probability of executing some effect is from the equation (2-11):
5444/65536
It is.

<Third target gaming state>
First, the probability that an effect is executed in the third target gaming state is
(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare combination” (b) When the condition device is a non-duplication bonus and is a “losing” and a “non-rare combination” (c) In the case of “rare combination” (d) The calculation is performed for each of the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination”. As described above, in the third target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the AT state.

<(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the third target gaming state, the winning rate for the “rare combination” with the bonus non-overlapping is added to the number of all condition devices belonging to the non-overlapping group “rare combination”. It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (3-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). In equation (3-1), the number 3204 for “winning-B”, the number 1000 for “winning-C”, the number 700 for “winning-D”, and the number for “winning-E”. The number 300 is used (see the column number of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Also, in the third target gaming state, if the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (see FIG. 152 bonus non-overlapping, see “Rare role” column). As shown in FIG. 152, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, “conversation effect” (12.5%), “cut-in effect” (25%), “confrontation effect” (25%), One of the effects of “add-on battle (only during ART)” (37.5%) is selected. Therefore, in the third target gaming state, if the condition device is a “non-overlapping bonus” and a “rare role”, the probability that some effect will be executed is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (3-2)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (3-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the third target gaming state, the winning rate for the condition device to be “losing” and “non-rare role” with non-duplicate bonuses is the same for all the members belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role” It is obtained by adding the numbers of the condition devices. In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (3-3)
It becomes. Here, the numerical value “367” in the expression (3-3) is the sum of the number of places won by the condition device that becomes a single bonus and the number of places won by the condition device that overlaps with the bonus.

  The sum of the winning numbers of the condition device that becomes the single bonus is the setting number 40 of “1 type BB-A”, the setting number 40 of “1 type BB-B”, and the setting number of “1 type BB-C”. This is the sum of Equation 40 and 120 (= 40 + 40 + 40) (see the column number of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In addition, the number of places won by the condition device that overlaps with the bonus is the place number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-C”, the place number 40 of “1 kind BB-B + winning-D”, and “1 kind”. BB-B + winning-E ", 40," 1 type BB-C + winning-C ", 40," 1 type BB-C + winning-D ", 40," 1 type BB- " C + winning-E ”with the number 40 and the sum of the numbers 240 (= 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40) (see the numbers in the column RT1 in FIG. 105), and the number 1 of“ 1 type BB-B + replay-A ” , “1 type BB-B + winning-A1”, 1 type, “1 type BB-B + winning-A2”, 1 type, “1 type BB-B + winning-A3”, 1 Sum 7 of the place number 1 of “1 type BB-B + winning-A4”, the place number 1 of “1 type BB-B + winning-A5” and the place number 1 of “1 type BB-B + winning-A6” 7 = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) and a (sum 247 (= 240 + 7 with reference numeral input columns of RT1 in FIG. 105)).

  Therefore, the numerical value “367” of Expression (3-3) can be calculated by the sum of the number 120 of winning the condition device that becomes a single bonus and the number 247 of winning the condition device that overlaps with the bonus. In addition, the numerical value “5204” in Expression (3-3) is the result of Expression (3-1). As shown in Expression (3-3), by calculating “65536-367-5204”, a number that is won by a condition device that becomes a single bonus, a number that is won by a condition device that overlaps with the bonus, It is possible to exclude the number of “rare combination”, and it is possible to calculate the number in the case where the condition device is “bonus” and “non-rare combination” with no bonus overlapping.

  Also, in the third target gaming state, when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”, the performance is executed with a probability of 13.5% (see FIG. 152). Non-duplicate bonuses (see “Lose” and “Non-rare role” columns). As shown in FIG. 152, the probability of “no effect” for each of the group “losing”, the group “replay”, and the group “bell” is 86.5%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100−86.5 = 13.5. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 152, all of the group “losing”, the group “replay”, and the group “bell” are “conversation effect” (12.5%), “confrontation effect” (1% ) Is selected.

Therefore, in the third target gaming state, when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”, the probability that some effect will be executed is:
59965/65536 × 13.5 / 100
≒ 8095/65536 Formula (3-4)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (3-3) (“59965/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effects will be executed when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus>
From the above, when the condition device is non-overlapping in the third target gaming state, the probability that some effect will be executed is from Equation (3-2) and Equation (3-4): 5204/65536 + 8095/65536
= 13299/65536 Formula (3-5)
It becomes.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the third target gaming state, the winning rate in which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes “rare combination” is added with the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the bonus overlapping group “rare combination”. Can be obtained. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (3-6)
It becomes. In Expression (3-6), the first “80” is the sum of the number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-C” and the number 40 of “1 type BB-C + winning-C”. Yes, the next “80” is the sum of the number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-D” and the number 40 of “1 type BB-C + winning-D”, and the last “80” is , The number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-E” and the number 40 of “1 type BB-C + winning-E” (see the number of columns in the column RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In the third target gaming state, if the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare combination”, the effect is executed with a probability of 87.5%. That is, as shown in FIG. 152, the probability of “no effect” in the group “rare role” is 12.5%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100-12.5 = 87.5. . Specifically, as shown in the “rare role” column, which overlaps with the bonus in FIG. 152, “conversation effect” (12.5%), “cut-in effect” (25%), “confrontation effect” (25 %) Or “Additional Battle (During ART)” (25%) is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the third target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the probability that some effect will be executed is calculated using equation (3-6):
240/65536 × 87.5 / 100
= 210/65536 Formula (3-7)
It becomes.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the third target gaming state, the winning rate for the “1 type BB” and the “non-rare role” overlapped with the bonus is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of all the conditional devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (3-8)
It becomes. In the formula (3-8), the first “120” is the number 40 of “1 type BB-A”, the number 40 of “1 type BB-B”, and the “1 type BB-C”. The next “1” is the number 1 of “1 type BB-B + replay-A”, and the last “6” is “1 type BB-B + winning A1”. Is the sum 6 of the numerical value 1 of “1 type BB−B + winning A6” (see the numerical value in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In the third target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination”, the effect is executed with a probability of 43.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 152, the probability of “no effect” of the group “1 type BB”, the probability of “no effect” of the group “replay”, and the probability of “no effect” of the group “Bell” Is 56.25%, and the probability that some effect will be executed is 100−56.25 = 43.75. Specifically, as shown in the “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” fields, which overlap with the bonus in FIG. 152, all of the group “1 type BB”, the group “replay”, and the group “Bell” One of the “conversation effects” (25%), “cut-in effects” (6.25%), and “confrontation effects” (12.5%) is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the third target gaming state and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
127/65536 × 43.75 / 100
≒ 56/65536 Formula (3-9)
It becomes.

<Probability that an effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with a bonus>
From the above, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the third target gaming state, the probability that some effect will be executed is 210/65536 + 56/65536 from Equation (3-7) and Equation (3-9).
= 266/65536 Formula (3-10)
It becomes.

<Probability that the production will be executed in the third target gaming state>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed in the third target gaming state is from Expression (3-5) and Expression (3-10),
13299/65536 + 266/65536
= 13565/65536 Formula (3-11)
It becomes.

<Comparison result between second target game state and third target game state>
The probability of executing some effect in the second target gaming state is from equation (2-11):
5444/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing some effect in the third target gaming state is from the equation (3-11):
13565/65536
It is.

Therefore,
5444/65536 <13565/65536 Formula (3-12)
When the second target gaming state is compared with the third target gaming state, the probability of executing any effect in the third target gaming state is more than the probability of executing any effect in the second target gaming state. Is also configured to be higher.

  As described above, in the second target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state relating to the AT is the AT preparation state 2. On the other hand, in the third target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state relating to AT is a state during AT. Therefore, when both of the game sections in the target game state are advantageous sections, the effect is more easily performed when the RT state is RT1 than when the RT state is RT0. Since the second target gaming state is the AT ready state 2 and it is definite to shift to the third target gaming state, the player is expected to shift to the third target gaming state. Because it is not necessary to feel the expectation by the production (there is no need to scold the player excessively by the production), it is preferable to end the second target gaming state with a simple production as much as possible. The probability of executing some effect in the target game state 2 is lowered.

<< (Comparison 3) First Target Game State and Fourth Target Game State >>

<First target gaming state>
As described above, in the first target gaming state, the probability of executing some effect is from the formula (1-11):
35531/65536
It is.

<Fourth target gaming state>
First, the probability that an effect is executed in the fourth target gaming state is
(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare role” (b) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “losing” and “non-rare” role (c) In the case of “rare combination” (d) The calculation is performed for each of the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination”. As described above, in the fourth target game state, the game section is the normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the fall waiting state.

<(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the fourth target gaming state, the winning rate for the condition device to be a “rare combination” with non-duplicate bonus is added to the numbers of all condition devices belonging to the group “rare combination” with no bonus overlap It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (4-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). In Formula (4-1), the number 3204 for “winning-B”, the number 1000 for “winning-C”, the number 700 for “winning-D”, and the number of “winning-E”. The number 300 is used (see the column number of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Also, in the fourth target gaming state, if the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (see FIG. (Refer to “Rare role” in 153 bonus non-overlapping). As shown in FIG. 153, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonus, any one of “character effect” (5%), “conversation effect” (5%), and “cut-in effect” (90%) The production is selected. Therefore, when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare role” in the fourth target gaming state,
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (4-2)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (4-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the fourth target gaming state, the winning rate for the condition device to be “losing” and “non-rare role” with non-duplicate bonuses is the same for all groups belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of the condition devices (see the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (4-3)
It becomes. Here, the RT state of the fourth target gaming state is RT1, and Expression (4-3) can be calculated in the same manner as Expression (3-3).

  Further, in the fourth target gaming state, when the condition device is “non-overlapping” bonus and “losing” and “non-rare role”, both effects are executed with a probability of 5% (bonus non-shown in FIG. 153). (Refer to “Lose” and “Non-rare” column). As shown in FIG. 153, the probability of “no effect” for each of the group “losing”, the group “replay”, and the group “bell” is 95%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100. -95 = 5. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 153, all of the group “losing”, the group “replay”, and the group “bell” are “character production” (2.5%), “conversation production” (2 .5%) is selected.

Therefore, in the fourth target gaming state, when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
59965/65536 × 5/100
≒ 2998/65536 Formula (4-4)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (4-3) (“59965/65536”) was used.

<Probability that some effects will be executed when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus>
From the above, when the condition device is non-overlapping in the fourth target gaming state, the probability that some effect will be executed is from Equation (4-2) and Equation (4-4): 5204/65536 + 2998/65536
= 8202/65536 Formula (4-5)
It becomes.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the fourth target gaming state, the winning rate in which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes “rare combination” is added with the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the bonus overlapping group “rare combination”. Can be obtained. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (4-6)
It becomes. The equation (4-6) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (3-6) (see the column number of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  Further, in the fourth target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “rare combination”, “no effect” is not selected, and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (see FIG. It overlaps with the bonus of 153 (see “Rare role” column). As shown in FIG. 153, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonus, any one of “character effect” (5%), “conversation effect” (5%), and “cut-in effect” (90%) The production is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the third target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
240/65536 × 100/100
= 240/65536 Formula (4-7)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (4-6) (“240/65536”) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the fourth target game state, the winning rate is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role” overlapping with the bonus, the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role” It is obtained by adding the numbers of all the conditional devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (4-8)
It becomes. The equation (4-8) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (3-8) (see the column number of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In the fourth target gaming state, if the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”, “no effect” is not selected and the effect is 100%. It is executed with probability (refer to the columns of “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination” in FIG. 153 for bonus duplication). As shown in FIG. 153, specifically, when overlapping with the bonus, any one of “character effect” (5%), “conversation effect” (5%), and “cut-in effect” (90%) The production is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fourth target gaming state and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
127/65536 × 100/100
= 127/65536 Formula (4-9)
It becomes.

<Probability that an effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with a bonus>
From the above, if the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fourth target gaming state, the probability that some effect will be executed is from Equation (4-7) and Equation (4-9): 240/65536 + 127/65536
= 367/65536 Formula (4-10)
It becomes.

<Probability that the production will be executed in the fourth target gaming state>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed in the fourth target gaming state is from Expression (4-5) and Expression (4-10),
8202/65536 + 367/65536
= 8569/65536 Formula (4-11)
It becomes.

<Comparison result between the first target gaming state and the fourth target gaming state>
The probability of executing some effect in the first target gaming state is from the equation (1-11):
35531/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing some effect in the fourth target gaming state is from the equation (4-11),
8569/65536
It is.

Therefore,
35531/65536> 8569/65536 Formula (4-12)
If the first target gaming state and the fourth target gaming state are compared, the probability of executing any effect in the first target gaming state is more than the probability of executing any effect in the fourth target gaming state. Is also configured to be higher.

  As described above, in the first target game state, the game section is the normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the low probability state. On the other hand, in the fourth target game state, the game section is a normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state relating to AT is a fall waiting state. Therefore, when both of the game sections in the target game state are normal sections, the effect is more easily executed when the RT state is RT0 than when the RT state is RT1. In this case, the fourth target gaming state is in the fall waiting state until the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section and the transition to the low probability state. It is preferable to move to the advantageous section again, and it is not necessary to give a sense of expectation by performing, and it is not necessary to feel as if it is still an advantageous section, so in the fourth target gaming state The probability of performing some kind of production is lowered. In other words, in the fall waiting state, the ART state has ended for the player = the high profit state has ended, and it is desired to prompt the player to proceed with the game for the next AT winning and there is information regarding the advantageous section. In order to clarify that all have been cleared, the frequency of production is relatively low.

<< (Comparison 4) Third target gaming state and sixth target gaming state >>

<Third target gaming state>
As described above, the probability of executing some effect in the third target gaming state is as follows from the equation (3-11):
13565/65536
It is.

<Sixth target gaming state>
First, the probability that an effect is executed in the sixth target gaming state is
(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare combination” (b) When the condition device is a non-duplication bonus and is a “losing” and a “non-rare combination” (c) In the case of “rare combination” (d) The calculation is performed for each of the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination”. As described above, in the sixth target game state, the game section is the advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the state during AT after falling.

<(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the sixth target gaming state, the winning ratio for the “role combination” with the bonus non-overlapping is added to the number of all the condition devices belonging to the non-overlapping group “rare combination”. It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (6-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105). The equation (2-1) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (1-1) (see the column number of RT0 in FIG. 105).

Also, in the sixth target gaming state, if the condition device is non-duplicate bonus and is “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (FIG. 155 bonus non-overlapping, see “Rare Role” column). As shown in FIG. 155, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, “conversation effect” (12.5%), “cut-in effect” (25%), “confrontation effect” (25%), One of the effects of “add-on battle (only during ART)” (37.5%) is always selected. Therefore, in the sixth target gaming state, when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (6-2)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (6-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the sixth target gaming state, the winning rate is “losing” and “non-rare role” with the bonus non-overlapping, and the winning ratio is all the groups belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of the condition devices. In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (6-3)
It becomes. Here, the numerical value “367” in Expression (6-3) is the sum of the number of single bonus winning numbers and the number of bonus overlapping winning numbers. The numerical value “367” can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (1-3) for the first target gaming state.

  Further, in the sixth target gaming state, when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”, the probability of “no effect” is 100% for all (see FIG. 151). The bonus is not duplicated (see “Lose” and “Non-rare role” columns), and the production is not executed.

Therefore, in the second target gaming state, when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “losing” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
59965/65536 × 0/100
= 0/65536 Formula (6-4)
It becomes.

<Probability that some effects will be executed when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus>
From the above, when the condition device is non-overlapping in the sixth target gaming state, the probability that some effect will be executed is from Equation (6-2) and Equation (6-4): 5204/65536 + 0/65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (6-5)
It becomes.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the sixth target gaming state, the winning rate in which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes a “rare combination” is added with the numbers of all condition devices belonging to the bonus overlapping group “rare combination”. Can be obtained. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (6-6)
It becomes. This equation (6-6) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (1-6) for the first target gaming state.

  Further, in the sixth target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “rare role”, the effects are all executed with a probability of 12.5% (in the bonus overlap of FIG. 155, “rare role” is executed). Refer to the “Composition” column). The probability that some effect is executed is 100-12.5 = 87.5. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155, one of “conversation effect” (12.5%), “cut-in effect” (37.5%), and “confrontation effect” (37.5%) The production is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the sixth target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is calculated using the equation (6-6):
240/65536 × 87.5 / 100
= 210/65536 Formula (6-7)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (6-6) (“240/65536”) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the sixth target game state, the winning rate for the “1 type BB” and the “non-rare role” overlapped with the bonus is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of all the conditional devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (6-8)
It becomes. This equation (6-8) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (1-8) for the first target gaming state.

  Further, in the sixth target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”, the effect is executed with a probability of 43.75% (see FIG. It overlaps with the bonus of 155 (see “Rare role” column). The probability that some effect is executed is 100−56.25 = 43.75. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155, any one of “conversation effect” (25%), “cut-in effect” (6.25%), and “confrontation effect” (12.5%) Is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the sixth target gaming state and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
127/65536 × 43.75 / 100
= 56/65536 Formula (6-9)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (6-8) (“127/65536”) was used.

<Probability that an effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with a bonus>
From the above, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the sixth target gaming state, the probability that some effect will be executed is 210/65536 + 56/65536 from Equation (6-7) and Equation (6-9).
= 266/65536 Formula (6-10)
It becomes.

<Probability that the production will be executed in the sixth target gaming state>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed in the second target gaming state is from Equation (6-5) and Equation (6-10),
5204/65536 + 266/65536
= 5470/65536 Formula (6-11)

<Comparison result between the third target gaming state and the sixth target gaming state>
The probability of executing some effect in the third target gaming state is from equation (3-11):
13565/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing some effect in the sixth target gaming state is from the equation (6-11)
5470/65536
It is.

Therefore,
5470/65536 <13565/65536 Formula (6-12)
When the third target gaming state and the sixth target gaming state are compared, the probability of executing any effect in the third target gaming state is higher than the probability of executing any effect in the sixth target gaming state. Is also configured to be higher.

  As described above, in the third target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state relating to AT is the state during AT. On the other hand, in the sixth target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state relating to AT is the state during AT after falling. Therefore, when both the game sections are advantageous sections, the effect is more easily executed when the RT state is RT1 than when the RT state is RT0. This tendency is the same as in comparison 2, and when the game section is an advantageous section, it is easy to produce effects when the RT state is RT1. In this case, the RT state has shifted from RT1 to RT0 in spite of being in the AT state, which is a little faster than enhancing the expectation by performing in the state where the RT state is RT0. Since it is preferable to return the RT state to RT1, the probability that some effect is executed in the sixth target gaming state is lowered. Further, by providing a dedicated effect in this state, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated and securing image data for the effect.

<<< Modification 1-1 >>>
In the third embodiment described above, the AT counter is subtracted when the state related to the AT is in the AT state, and the state related to the AT is shifted to the fall waiting state on condition that the value of the AT counter becomes 0. On the condition that the RT state has shifted from RT1 to RT0 when the state related to the AT is a fall waiting state, the state related to the AT is shifted to the low probability state.

  FIG. 159 is a block diagram illustrating an AT state transition diagram of Modification 1-1. In the modified example 1-1, as shown in FIG. 159, when the game section is an advantageous section, when the value of the AT counter becomes 0, the state shifts to the AT fall waiting state, and the navigation is not performed. When RT1 changes from RT1 to RT0, the state relating to AT is pulled back and shifted to the weak (weak) state. As described above, in the modified example 1-1, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state relating to AT is a pull back (weak) state (hereinafter referred to as a seventh target gaming state). ).

  And, in this pullback (weak) state (for 10 games), if a rare role (winning-C, winning-D, winning-E) is won, the state related to AT is pulled back (weak) To return to the sign of recovery. Further, when the replay 06 symbol can be stopped and displayed by the navigation while in the sign of return, it is possible to return to the AT state. If the rare combination (winning-C, winning-D, winning-E) is not won in the pull-back (weak) state, the advantageous section is terminated and the low-probability state is entered.

<< AT state transition control processing >>
160 and 161 are flowcharts showing a part of the AT state transition control process in Modification 1-1. In Modification 1-1, the process of FIG. 114 of the third embodiment is executed in the same manner. FIG. 160 is a process corresponding to FIG. 116 of the third embodiment, and the process shown in FIG. 160 is executed when No in step 1832 or 1834 of FIG. 115. In addition, FIG. 161 is processing corresponding to FIG. 117 of the third embodiment, and steps that perform the same processing as in FIG. 117 are denoted by the same reference numerals. As described above, in Modification 1-1, first, the processes of FIGS. 114 and 115 of the third embodiment are executed, and then the processes of FIGS. 160 and 161 are executed.

  First, in the case of No in step 1832 or 1834 in FIG. 115, in step 1952 in FIG. 160, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is an in-AT state. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value is 0 in the game. In the case of Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as the AT fall waiting state, and ends this subroutine. If No in step 1954, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

  In the case of No in step 1952, in step 1958, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is an AT fall waiting state. In the case of Yes in step 1958, in step 1960, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is re-games -D1 to D3. In the case of Yes in step 1960, in step 1962, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the selected condition device. This subroutine is finished. If No in step 1960, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

  The selection candidates for the state relating to the AT after the next game in the process of step 1962 include a pullback (weak) state. As shown in FIG. 162, when the state relating to the AT of the game is an AT fall waiting state, there are two selection candidates: an AT fall waiting state and a pullback (weak) state. When the replay 01, the replay 02, and the replay 03 are stopped and displayed, the AT fall waiting state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the next A pullback (weak) state is selected as the state related to the AT after the game.

  In the case of No in step 1958, in step 1964, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a pullback (weak) state. In the case of Yes in step 1964, in step 1966, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not 10 games have been executed in the retracted (weak) state. In the case of Yes in step 1966, in step 1968, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as a low probability state, and ends this subroutine.

  In the case of No in step 1966, in step 1970, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not winning-C, winning-D, winning-E is won. In the case of Yes in step 1970, in step 1972, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game as a return sign state, and ends this subroutine. If No in step 1970, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

  In the case of No in step 1964, in step 1974, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is a return sign state. In the case of Yes in step 1974, in step 1976, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is re-games -E1 to E3. In the case of Yes in step 1976, in step 1978, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the selected condition device. This subroutine is finished.

  The state selection candidates related to the AT after the next game in step 1978 include an in-AT state. As shown in FIG. 162, when the state related to the AT of the game is a sign of return, there are two selection candidates: a sign of return and a state during AT. When the replay 01, the replay 02, and the replay 03 are stopped and displayed, the return sign state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and when the replay 06 is stopped and displayed, the next game The state during AT is selected as a state related to the subsequent AT.

  If No in step 1974 or step 1976, the process proceeds to step 1440 in FIG. Steps 1440, 1442 and 1444 in FIG. 161 are the same as the processing shown in FIG.

<< Scenario lottery table decision process >>
FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the scenario lottery table determination process in Modification 1-1. As described above, in Modification 1-1, the state relating to the AT includes the pullback (weak) state, and the scenario effect table corresponding to the pullback (weak) state is selected. Note that, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 163, steps for performing the same processing as in the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  First, in the case of No in step 4120, in step 4152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to AT is a pullback (weak).

  In the case of Yes in step 4152, in step 4154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T4. In this way, the scenario effect table T4 is selected as the scenario effect table corresponding to the retracted (weak) state.

  Note that, in the case of No in step 4152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S moves the process to step 4112.

  Further, as shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 159, in Modification 1-1, there is no fall waiting state as a state relating to the AT. Therefore, in the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a low probability state. In the case of Yes in step 4130, in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the RT state is RT1.

  If Yes in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T 7 in step 4134.

  In the case of No in step 4132, in step 4136, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T1.

  In the case of No in step 4124 and in the case of No in step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub control board S moves the process to step 4112.

<< Seventh Target Game State >>
As described above, in the seventh target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is a pullback (weak) state. FIG. 164A is an effect selection probability table in the case of the seventh target gaming state. FIG. 164 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the seventh target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (B), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and bonus overlapping, and is a loss, a non-rare combination and a rare combination, only scenario 1 is selected, and the other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. Is not selected.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (A), when the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a loser or a non-rare role, only “no effect” is selected, and no other effects are selected. . If the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and a rare role, or a bonus duplicate and a non-rare role, or a rare role, only the “cut-in effect” is selected and another effect is selected. It will never be done.

Next, the probability that the effect is executed in the seventh target gaming state is
(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare combination” (b) When the condition device is a non-duplication bonus and is a “losing” and a “non-rare combination” (c) In the case of “rare combination” (d) The calculation is performed for each of the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination”. As described above, in the seventh target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is a pull back (weak) state.

<(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the seventh target gaming state, the winning rate for the “rare combination” in which the condition device is non-overlapping with the bonus is added to the number of all condition devices belonging to the non-overlapping group “rare combination” It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (7-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105). In Formula (7-1), as in Formula (2-1), the number 3204 of “Winning-B”, the number 1000 of “Winning-C”, and the number of “Winning-D” 700 and the number 300 of “winning-E” are used (see the number of columns in the column RT0 in FIG. 105).

Also, in the seventh target gaming state, if the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (see FIG. 164 Bonus non-overlapping, see “Rare role” column). As shown in FIG. 164, specifically, when bonuses are not overlapped, “cut-in effect” is always selected. Therefore, in the second target gaming state, if the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare role”, the probability that some effect will be executed is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (7-2)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (7-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the seventh target gaming state, the bonus is non-duplicate and the winning rate of “losing” and “non-rare role” is all the conditions belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role” It is obtained by adding the device numbers. In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (7-3)
It becomes. Here, the numerical value “367” in the equation (7-3) is the sum of the number of winning the condition device that is a single bonus and the number of winning the condition device that overlaps with the bonus. The numerical value “367” can be calculated in the same manner as the expression (2-3) for the second target gaming state (see the number of columns in RT0 in FIG. 105).

  Also, in the seventh target gaming state, when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”, the probability of “no effect” is 100% for all (see FIG. 164). The bonus is not duplicated (see “Lose” and “Non-rare role” columns), and the production is not executed.

Therefore, in the seventh target gaming state, when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “losing” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
59965/65536 × 0/100
= 0/65536 Formula (7-4)
It becomes.

<Probability that some effects will be executed when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus>
From the above, when the condition device is non-overlapping in the seventh target gaming state, the probability that some effect will be executed is from Equation (7-2) and Equation (7-4): 5204/65536 + 0/65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (7-5)
It becomes.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the seventh target gaming state, the winning rate in which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes “rare combination” is added with the numbers of all condition devices belonging to the bonus overlapping group “rare combination”. Can be obtained. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (7-6)
It becomes. Note that this equation (7-6) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (2-6) for the second target gaming state (see the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105).

If the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “rare combination” in the seventh target gaming state, “no effect” is not selected and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (see FIG. (Refer to “Rare role” column for bonus duplication of 164). Specifically, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus, only “cut-in effect” is selected. Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the seventh target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is:
240/65536 × 100/100
= 240/65536 Formula (7-7)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (7-6) (“240/65536”) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the second target game state, the winning rate for the “1 type BB” and the “non-rare role” overlapped with the bonus is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of all the conditional devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (7-8)
It becomes. Note that this equation (7-8) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (2-8) of the second target gaming state (see the numbers in the column of RT0 in FIG. 105).

  In the seventh target gaming state, if the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”, the effects are executed with a probability of 100% (FIG. 164). (See “Type 1 BB” and “Non-rare role” for bonus overlap). Specifically, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus, only “cut-in effect” is selected.

Therefore, in the seventh target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
127/65536 × 100/100
= 127/65536 Formula (7-9)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (7-8) (“127/65536”) was used.

<Probability that an effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with a bonus>
From the above, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the seventh target gaming state, the probability that some effect will be executed is 240/65536 + 127/65536 from Equation (7-7) and Equation (7-9).
= 367/65536 Formula (7-10)
It becomes.

<Probability that the production will be executed in the seventh target gaming state>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed in the seventh target gaming state is from Expression (7-5) and Expression (7-10),
5204/65536 + 367/65536
= 5571/65536 Formula (7-11)
It becomes.

<Comparison result between first target game state and seventh target game state>
The probability of executing some effect in the first target gaming state is from the equation (1-11):
35531/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing some effect in the seventh target gaming state is from the equation (7-11):
5571/65536
It is.

Therefore,
35531/65536> 5571/65536 Formula (7-12)
When the first target gaming state and the seventh target gaming state are compared, the probability of executing any effect in the first target gaming state is higher than the probability of executing any effect in the seventh target gaming state. Is also configured to be higher.

  As described above, in the first target game state, the game section is the normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the low probability state. On the other hand, in the seventh target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT0, and the state relating to AT is a pullback (weak) state. Therefore, when the RT state of the target game state is both RT0, the effect is more easily executed in the normal section than in the advantageous section. The seventh target gaming state is a state in which there is a possibility of returning to the AT state after returning to the normal state after the AT state has ended, but basically, the state in the process of returning the gaming section to the normal section It is. For this reason, it is preferable to suggest returning to the normal section with a simple effect rather than feeling the expectation of returning to the AT state. In addition, the seventh target gaming state ends when 10 games have elapsed, in other words, because the stay period is short, and when the production occurs, the production of the production increases so that the expectation level for returning to the AT state (retraction) increases. It is preferable to reduce the frequency in order to improve the fun of the game.

<<< Modification 1-2 >>>
As described above, in the third embodiment, the AT counter is subtracted when the AT state is the AT state, and the AT state is changed from the AT state on condition that the value of the AT counter becomes 0. The state related to AT is shifted to the low probability state on condition that the RT state has shifted from RT1 to RT0 when the state related to AT is the state of waiting for falling.

  FIG. 165 is a block diagram illustrating an AT state transition diagram of the modification 1-2. In the modified example 1-2, as shown in FIG. 165, even if the value of the AT counter becomes 0 when the state related to AT is in the AT state, the state related to AT is not shifted to the fall waiting state. Move to the pullback (strong) state. As described above, in the modified example 1-2, the gaming section is the advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state relating to the AT is the pulling back (strong) state (hereinafter referred to as an eighth target gaming state). ).

  In this pull-back (strong) state, the RT state is RT1, so the same state as the RT state in the AT state is maintained. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the expectation that the profit can be further increased by executing the navigation by returning to the AT state under the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the pulled back (strong) state.

<< AT state transition control processing >>
FIG. 166 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the AT state transition control process in Modification 1-2. Also in the modified example 1-2, the process of FIG. 114 of the third embodiment and the process of FIG. 161 of the modified example 1-1 are executed similarly. FIG. 166 is a process corresponding to FIG. 116 of the third embodiment, and the process shown in FIG. 166 is executed when No in step 1832 or 1834 of FIG. 116. In addition, after the process illustrated in FIG. 166 ends, the process proceeds to the process illustrated in FIG. As described above, in Modification 1-2, first, the processes of FIGS. 114 and 115 of the third embodiment are executed, and then the processes of FIGS. 166 and 161 are executed.

  First, in the case of No in step 1832 or 1834 in FIG. 115, in step 2952 in FIG. 166, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is an in-AT state. In the case of Yes in step 2952, in step 2954, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value is 0 and the RT state is RT1 in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2954, in step 2956, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the state related to the AT after the next game is the pull back (strong) state related to the AT after the next game, and ends this subroutine. To do. In the case of No at step 2954, this subroutine is immediately ended.

  In the case of No in step 2952, in step 2958, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a pullback (strong) state. In the case of Yes in step 2958, in step 2960, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is re-games -D1 to D3. In the case of Yes in step 2960, in step 2962, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a selection candidate of the state related to the AT after the next game based on the state related to the current AT and the selected condition device. This subroutine is finished. If No in step 2960, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

  The state selection candidates related to the AT after the next game in the process of step 2962 include an in-AT state. As shown in FIG. 167, when the state relating to the AT of the game is a pullback (strong) state, there are two selection candidates, an in-AT state and a low probability state. When the replay 01, the replay 02, and the replay 03 are stopped and displayed, the in-AT state is selected as the state related to the AT after the next game, and when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the next game The low probability state is selected as the state related to the subsequent AT.

<< Scenario lottery table decision process >>
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing scenario lottery table determination processing in Modification 1-2. As described above, in Modification 1-2, the state relating to AT includes the pullback (strong) state, and the scenario effect table corresponding to the pullback (strong) state is selected. Note that, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 168, the same reference numerals are given to the steps for performing the same processing as in the third embodiment.

  First, in the case of No in step 4108, in step 4162, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to AT is a pullback (strong). In the case of Yes in step 4162, in step 4164, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T5. In this way, the scenario effect table T5 is selected as the scenario effect table corresponding to the retracted (strong) state.

  If NO in step 4162, in step 4116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to the AT is the AT preparation state 2. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4118, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T2.

  In addition, as shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 166, in the modified example 1-2, there is no fall waiting state as a state relating to the AT. Therefore, in the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a low probability state. In the case of Yes in step 4130, in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the RT state is RT1.

  If Yes in step 4132, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T 7 in step 4134.

  In the case of No in step 4132, in step 4136, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the scenario effect table T1.

  In the case of No in step 4124 and in the case of No in step 4130, the CPUSC of the sub control board S moves the process to step 4112.

<< Eighth Target Game State >>
As described above, in the eighth target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state relating to AT is a pullback (strong) state. FIG. 169 (A) is an effect selection probability table in the case of the eighth target gaming state. FIG. 169 (B) is a scenario selection probability table in the case of the eighth target gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 169 (B), when the condition device is a bonus non-overlapping and is a loser, non-rare combination, or rare combination, only scenario 1 is selected, and other scenarios 2 and 3 are selected. There is no case. If the condition device is a bonus overlap and is a loser, non-rare combination, or rare combination, scenario 1 is most likely to be selected, and then either scenario 2 or 3 is likely to be selected with the same probability.

  As shown in FIG. 169 (A), when the condition device is non-overlapping bonus and is lost, only “no effect” is selected, and no other effects are selected. When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a non-rare combination, only the “target effect” is selected, and no other effects are selected. If the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and a rare role, or a bonus duplicate and a non-rare role, or a rare role, only the “cut-in effect” is selected and another effect is selected. It will never be done.

<Eighth target gaming state>
The probability that an effect is executed in the eighth target gaming state,
(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare combination” (b) When the condition device is a non-duplication bonus and is a “losing” and a “non-rare combination” (c) In the case of “rare combination” (d) The calculation is performed for each of the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination”. As described above, in the eighth target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is a pullback (strong) state.

<(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the eighth target gaming state, the winning ratio for the “rare combination” with the bonus non-overlapping is added to the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the non-overlapping group “rare combination”. It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (8-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). In equation (8-1), the number 3204 for “winning-B”, the number 1000 for “winning-C”, the number 700 for “winning-D”, and the number of “winning-E”. The number 300 is used (see the column number of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Also, in the eighth target gaming state, if the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (see FIG. 1690 bonus non-overlapping, see “Rare Role” column). As shown in FIG. 169, specifically, when bonuses are not overlapped, “cut-in effect” is selected. Therefore, when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare role” in the eighth target gaming state,
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (8-2)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (8-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the eighth target gaming state, the winning rate is “losing” and “non-rare role” with the bonus non-overlapping, and the winning rate is all the groups belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of the condition devices. In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (8-3)
It becomes. Here, the numerical value “367” in the equation (8-3) is the sum of the number of places won by the condition device that becomes a single bonus and the number of places won by the condition device that overlaps with the bonus.

  The sum of the winning numbers of the condition device that becomes the single bonus is the setting number 40 of “1 type BB-A”, the setting number 40 of “1 type BB-B”, and the setting number of “1 type BB-C”. This is the sum of Equation 40 and 120 (= 40 + 40 + 40) (see the column number of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In addition, the number of places won by the condition device that overlaps with the bonus is the place number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-C”, the place number 40 of “1 kind BB-B + winning-D”, and “1 kind”. BB-B + winning-E ", 40," 1 type BB-C + winning-C ", 40," 1 type BB-C + winning-D ", 40," 1 type BB- " C + winning-E ”with the number 40 and the sum of the numbers 240 (= 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40) (see the numbers in the column RT1 in FIG. 105), and the number 1 of“ 1 type BB-B + replay-A ” , “1 type BB-B + winning-A1”, 1 type, “1 type BB-B + winning-A2”, 1 type, “1 type BB-B + winning-A3”, 1 Sum 7 of the place number 1 of “1 type BB-B + winning-A4”, the place number 1 of “1 type BB-B + winning-A5” and the place number 1 of “1 type BB-B + winning-A6” 7 = 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) and a (sum 247 (= 240 + 7 with reference numeral input columns of RT1 in FIG. 105)).

  Therefore, the numerical value “367” in the equation (8-3) can be calculated by the sum of the number 120 that is won by the condition device that becomes a single bonus and the number 247 that is won by the condition device that overlaps with the bonus. In addition, the numerical value “5204” in Expression (8-3) is the result of Expression (8-1). As shown in Expression (8-3), by calculating “65536-367-5204”, a number that is won by a condition device that becomes a single bonus, a number that is won by a condition device that overlaps with the bonus, It is possible to exclude the number of “rare combination”, and it is possible to calculate the number in the case where the condition device is “bonus” and “non-rare combination” with no bonus overlapping.

In addition, when the game is executed in the eighth target gaming state, the winning rate in which the condition device becomes “losing” with no bonus overlapping is as follows:
19827/65536 Formula (8-3-1)
(Refer to the column number RT1 in FIG. 105). Furthermore, when the game is executed in the eighth target gaming state, the winning rate in which the condition device becomes a “non-rare role” with non-duplicate bonuses is as follows:
(5995-19827) / 65536
= 40138/65536 Formula (8-3-2)
It is.

  Also, in the eighth target gaming state, when the condition device is non-duplicate and “losing”, the probability of “no effect” is 100%, and no effect is executed (the group in FIG. 169). (See “Lose” column).

  Further, in the eighth target gaming state, when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect is executed is 100%. Specifically, as shown in the columns “re-game” and “bell” in FIG. 169, the “target effect” is always executed.

Therefore, in the eighth target gaming state, when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “losing” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
19827/65536 × 0/100
+ 40138/65536 × 100/100
= 0/65536 + 40138/65536
= 40138/65536 Formula (8-4)
It becomes. Here, the result of Formula (8-3-1) and Formula (8-3-2) was used.

<Probability that some effects will be executed when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus>
From the above, when the condition device is non-overlapping in the eighth target gaming state, the probability that a certain effect will be executed is from formula (8-2) and formula (8-4): 5204/65536 + 40138/65536
= 45342/65536 Formula (8-5)
It becomes.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the eighth target gaming state, the winning rate in which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes “rare combination” is added with the numbers of all the condition devices belonging to the bonus overlapping group “rare combination”. Can be obtained. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (8-6)
It becomes. In equation (8-6), the first “80” is the sum of the number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-C” and the number 40 of “1 type BB-C + winning-C”. Yes, the next “80” is the sum of the number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-D” and the number 40 of “1 type BB-C + winning-D”, and the last “80” is , The number 40 of “1 type BB-B + winning-E” and the number 40 of “1 type BB-C + winning-E” (see the number of columns in the column RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In the eighth target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare combination”, the probability that the effect is executed is 100%. Specifically, as shown in the column “Rare Technique” in FIG. 169, “cut-in effect” is always executed.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the eighth target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the probability that some effect will be executed is calculated using equation (8-6):
240/65536 × 100/100
= 240/65536 Formula (8-7)
It becomes.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the eighth target gaming state, the winning rate for the “1 type BB” and the “non-rare role” overlapped with the bonus is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of all the conditional devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (8-8)
It becomes. In the formula (3-8), the first “120” is the number 40 of “1 type BB-A”, the number 40 of “1 type BB-B”, and the “1 type BB-C”. The next “1” is the number 1 of “1 type BB-B + replay-A”, and the last “6” is “1 type BB-B + winning A1”. Is the sum 6 of the numerical value 1 of “1 type BB−B + winning A6” (see the numerical value in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  In the eighth target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination”, the probability that the effect is executed is 100%. Specifically, as shown in the columns of “Group 1 BB” and “Non-rare role” in FIG. 169, the “cut-in effect” is always executed.

Therefore, in the eighth target gaming state, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
127/65536 × 100/100
= 127/65536 Formula (8-9)
It becomes.

<Probability that an effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with a bonus>
From the above, if the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the eighth target gaming state, the probability that some effect will be executed is 240/65536 + 127/65536 from Equation (8-7) and Equation (3-9).
= 367/65536 Formula (8-10)
It becomes.

<Probability that the production will be executed in the eighth target gaming state>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed in the eighth target gaming state is from the formula (8-5) and the formula (8-10),
45342/65536 + 367/65536
= 45709/65536 Formula (8-11)
It becomes.

<Comparison result between the third target game state and the eighth target game state>
The probability of executing some effect in the third target gaming state is from equation (3-11):
13565/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing some effect in the eighth target gaming state is as follows from the equation (8-11):
45709/65536
It is.

Therefore,
13565/65536 <45709/65536 Formula (8-12)
When the third target gaming state and the eighth target gaming state are compared, the probability of executing any effect in the eighth target gaming state is higher than the probability of executing any effect in the third target gaming state. Is also configured to be higher.

  As described above, in the eighth target game state, the game section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state relating to AT is a pullback (strong) state. On the other hand, in the third target gaming state, the gaming section is an advantageous section, the RT state is RT1, and the state relating to AT is a state during AT. The eighth target game state is a pullback (strong) state that shifts when the RT state ends the AT state while maintaining RT1, and in the case of the pullback condition (in this example, re-game-D1 to D3 wins) (Sometimes other than replay 04 is stopped and displayed) is established, there is a possibility that the state may be sufficiently returned to the AT state. For this reason, it is preferable that the player have a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of returning to the AT state. In the eighth target game state, the probability of executing some effect is higher than that in the third target game state. ing.

  In the eighth target gaming state, when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus and “non-rare role”, if the condition device is a replay, a “targeting effect” is always executed, while the condition device is a bell. In this case, it may be configured such that the “targeting effect” is not executed. Further, in this example, the probability of executing some effect in the eighth target gaming state is configured to be higher than the probability of executing any effect in the third target gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. By adjusting the frequency of occurrence of “targeted effects” and the lottery probability of lost, bell, replay, etc., the probability of executing any effect in the eighth target gaming state executes any effect in the third target gaming state. You may comprise so that it may become lower than a probability.

<<< Modification 1-3 >>>
In the above-described typical state flow in the third embodiment, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and after the bonus in the advantageous section ends, the state related to AT shifts to the in-AT state. It was.

  FIG. 170A is a block diagram illustrating an RT state transition diagram of Modification 1-3. FIG. 170 (B) is a block diagram showing an AT state transition diagram. Note that the RT state transition shown in FIG. 170 (A) and the AT state transition shown in FIG. 170 (B) are representative descriptions of typical states, and have other RT states and states related to the AT. Can do.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (A), the modified example 1-3 has “RT0”, “RT1”, “RT2”, “Bonus internal winning”, and “Bonus” as the RT state. “RT0” is an RT state with the lowest probability that the condition device will win the replay, and “RT1” is an RT state with the highest probability that the condition device will win the replay.

  For example, when the RT state is “RT0”, if the replay 04 symbol is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to “RT1” (arrow (1)). When the RT state is “RT1” and the replay 06 symbol is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to “RT2” (arrow (2)). When the RT state is “RT1” or “RT2”, when the winning symbols 08 to 11 are stopped and displayed, the process shifts to “RT0” (arrow (3)).

  Furthermore, when the RT state is “RT0”, “RT1” or “RT2”, if the bonus is won, the process shifts to “internal winning”, and when it is “internally winning”, the bonus Is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to “1 type BB-A, B, C” and returns to the original RT state when “1 type BB-A, B, C” ends.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (B), when the game section is a normal section, the state related to the AT is a normal state. In this normal state, the RT state is either “RT0” or “RT1”. In addition, when the state related to the AT is the normal state, the state related to the AT becomes the in-AT state by the transition of the RT state to “RT2”. By satisfying a predetermined end condition, for example, a condition that the AT counter becomes zero, in the AT state, the state related to the AT returns to the normal state. Although not shown, in the modified example 1-3, in the state in which it is shifted to RT1 by itself, it is a push order replay game that can shift to RT2 (for example, a 3 option push order replay game, and the correct answer push If stopped in order, the replay that transitions from RT1 to RT2 is stopped and displayed, and if stopped in the order of the incorrect answer, the replay that transitions from RT1 to RT0 is stopped and displayed (the replay that maintains RT1 is stopped and displayed. (It may also be a thing)), and a push order game is generated ("????" is displayed on the effect display device S40), and the push order in which the replay that shifts to RT2 by itself stops is displayed. When hit, it is configured to shift to RT2 and shift to the AT state.

  In addition, even if the game section is either a normal section or an advantageous section, if the bonus is won, the game moves to “Internal Winning”, and when it is “Internal Winning”, the bonus symbol is displayed. By stopping the display, the process proceeds to “1 type BB-A, B, C”, and when “1 type BB-A, B, C” ends, the state related to the original AT is restored.

  In Modification 1-3, the game section is the normal section, the RT state is RT1 (the state in which the game is shifted to RT1 by itself), and the state related to the AT is the normal state (low probability state). This is called the target gaming state.

<Fifth target gaming state>
First, the probability that an effect is executed in the fifth target gaming state is
(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “rare combination” (b) When the condition device is a non-duplication bonus and is a “losing” and a “non-rare combination” (c) In the case of “rare combination” (d) The calculation is performed for each of the case where the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination”. As described above, in the fifth target game state, the game section is the normal section, the RT state is RT1, and the state related to AT is the low probability state.

<(A) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the fifth target gaming state, the winning ratio for the “rare combination” with the bonus non-overlapping is added to the number of all condition devices belonging to the non-overlapping group “rare combination”. It is obtained by doing. In particular,
(3204 + 1000 + 700 + 300) / 65536
= 5204/65536 Formula (5-1)
(Refer to the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). The equation (5-1) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (3-1) (see the column number of RT1 in FIG. 105).

Also, in the fifth target gaming state, if the condition device is a non-overlapping bonus and is a “rare role”, “no effect” is not selected and the effect is executed with a probability of 100% (see FIG. 154 Bonus non-overlapping, see “Rare role” column). As shown in FIG. 154, specifically, in the case of non-overlapping bonuses, “character production” (25%), “conversation production” (25%), “cut-in production” (25%), “confrontation” Any production of “production” (25%) is selected. Therefore, in the fifth target gaming state, if the condition device is a “non-overlapping bonus” and a “rare role”, the probability that some effect will be executed is
5204/65536 × 100/100
= 5204/65536 Formula (5-2)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (5-1) (“5204/65536”) was used.

<(B) When the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is “losing” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the fifth target game state, the winning rate is “losing” and “non-rare role” with the bonus non-overlapping, and the winning rate is all the groups belonging to the group “losing” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of the condition devices (see the numbers in the column of RT1 in FIG. 105). In particular,
(65536-367-5204) / 65536
= 59965/65536 Formula (5-3)
It becomes. Here, the RT state of the fifth target gaming state is RT1, and equation (5-3) can be calculated in the same manner as equation (3-3).

In addition, when the game is executed in the fifth target gaming state, the winning rate in which the condition device becomes “losing” with no bonus overlapping is as follows:
19827/65536 Formula (5-3-1)
(Refer to the column number RT1 in FIG. 105). Furthermore, when the game is executed in the fifth target gaming state, the winning rate in which the condition device becomes a “non-rare role” with non-duplicate bonuses is as follows:
(5995-19827) / 65536
= 40138/65536 Formula (5-3-2)
It is.

  In the fifth target gaming state, if the condition device is “losing” with no bonus overlapping, the effect is executed with a probability of 50%. The probability of “no effect” is 50%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100−50 = 50. Specifically, as shown in the group “losing” field of FIG. 154, any of the “character effect” (25%), “conversation effect” (24%), and “confrontation effect” (1%) Is selected.

  Further, in the fifth target gaming state, when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and “non-rare role”, the probability that the effect is executed is 100%. Specifically, as shown in the columns “re-game” and “bell” in FIG. 154, the “target effect” is always executed.

Therefore, in the fifth target gaming state, when the condition device is a non-duplicate bonus and is a “losing” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
19827/65536 × 50/100
+ 40138/65536 × 100/100
≒ 9914/65536 + 40138/65536
= 50052/65536 Formula (5-4)
It becomes. Here, the results of the formula (5-3-1) and the formula (5-3-2) were used.

<Probability that some effects will be executed when the condition device is non-duplicate bonus>
From the above, when the condition device is non-overlapping in the fifth target gaming state, the probability that some effect will be executed is from formula (5-2) and formula (5-4): 5204/65536 + 50052/65536
= 55256/65536 Formula (5-5)
It becomes.

<(C) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare role”>
When the game is executed in the fifth target gaming state, the winning rate in which the condition device overlaps with the bonus and becomes “rare combination” is added with the numbers of all condition devices belonging to the bonus overlapping group “rare combination”. Can be obtained. In particular,
(80 + 80 + 80) / 65536
= 240/65536 Formula (5-6)
It becomes. The equation (5-6) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (3-6) (see the column number of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  If the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is a “rare combination” in the fifth target gaming state, the effect is executed with a probability of 93.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 154, the probability of “no effect” in the group “rare role” is 6.25%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100−6.25 = 93.75. . Specifically, as shown in the “rare role” column, which overlaps with the bonus in FIG. 154, “character effect” (6.25%), “conversation effect” (12.5%), “cut-in effect” Either (37.5%) or “confrontation effect” (37.5%) is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fifth target gaming state and is a “rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is
240/65536 × 93.75 / 100
= 225/65536 Formula (5-7)
It becomes. Here, the result of formula (5-6) (“240/65536”) was used.

<(D) When the condition device overlaps with the bonus and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”>
When the game is executed in the fifth target game state, the winning rate for the “1 type BB” and the “non-rare role” overlapped with the bonus is the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role”. It is obtained by adding the numbers of all the conditional devices belonging to. In particular,
(120 + 1 + 6) / 65536
= 127/65536 Formula (5-8)
It becomes. The equation (5-8) can be calculated in the same manner as the equation (3-8) (see the column number of RT1 in FIG. 105).

  When the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fifth target gaming state and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare combination”, the performance is executed with a probability of 93.75%. That is, as shown in FIG. 61, the probability of “no effect” in the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role” is 6.25%, and the probability that some effect is executed is 100-6. .25 = 93.75. Specifically, as shown in the column of the group “1 type BB” and the group “non-rare role” in the bonus duplication in FIG. 154, “character effect” (6.25%), “conversation effect” (12 .5%) or “Confrontation effect” (75%) is selected.

Therefore, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fifth target gaming state and is “1 type BB” and “non-rare role”, the probability that an effect will be executed is:
127/65536 × 93.75 / 100
≒ 119/65536 Formula (5-9)
It becomes.

<Probability that an effect will be executed when the conditional device overlaps with a bonus>
From the above, when the condition device overlaps with the bonus in the fifth target gaming state, the probability that some effect is executed is from 225/65536 + 119/65536 from Equation (5-7) and Equation (5-9).
= 344/65536 Formula (5-10)
It becomes.

<Probability that an effect is executed in the fifth target gaming state>
From the above, the probability that some effect is executed in the fifth target gaming state is from Expression (5-5) and Expression (5-10),
55256/65536 + 344/65536
= 55600/65536 Formula (5-11)
It becomes.

<Comparison result between first target game state and fifth target game state>
The probability of executing some effect in the first target gaming state is from the equation (1-11):
35531/65536
It is. In addition, the probability of executing some effect in the fifth target gaming state is from the equation (5-11):
55600/65536
It is.

Therefore,
35531/65536 <55600/65536 Formula (5-12)
When the first target gaming state and the fifth target gaming state are compared, the probability of executing any effect in the fifth target gaming state is higher than the probability of executing any effect in the first target gaming state. Is also configured to be higher.

  As described above, in the first target game state, the game section is the normal section, the RT state is RT0, and the state related to AT is the normal state (low probability state). On the other hand, in the fifth target game state, the game section is the normal section, the RT state is RT1 (the state in which the game is shifted to RT1 by itself), and the state related to the AT is the normal state (low probability state). Therefore, the game sections in the target game state are common in the situation where both are normal sections, but the effect is more easily executed when the RT state is RT1 than when the RT state is RT0. .

  As described above, if the player looks at the advantageous section indicator YH, it can be determined whether or not the gaming section is currently an advantageous section. For this reason, when the game section can be recognized as a normal section, the willingness to play is reduced. Therefore, in the normal section, by performing various effects frequently, it is possible to enter the advantageous section. Can increase the expectation of the transition. Furthermore, when the RT state changes, it can be an opportunity to change the type of effect, not only increasing the frequency of the effect being executed, but also by executing the effect narrowed down to a certain one, Further, the expectation can be enhanced, and by changing the effect in the normal section, the player is less likely to get bored and the willingness to continue the game can be increased.

<<< Modification 1-4 >>>
In the above-described effect content determination process in FIG. 145, the scenario is first determined and then performed in the order in which specific effects are determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, the content of the effect may be determined by lottery processing, and then the scenario may be determined by lottery processing when the scenario has not been determined. Thereby, when a scenario is not determined, a specific effect can be immediately executed.

<<< Modification 1-5 >>>
Moreover, you may process so that a scenario and production content may be determined simultaneously. For example, the presence or absence of a scenario is associated with each production content, and if the production content determined by the lottery process is no scenario, the production is executed without the scenario, and if there is a scenario, Perform the production according to the scenario.

  For example, numbers 1 to 99 for the lottery process for the production contents are assigned to execute the confrontation production for one game, and numbers 100 to 199 for the lottery process for the production contents are executed to perform the character production for one game. The number of assigned lottery processes for assignment and production contents is assigned in a range of 200 to 299 so as to execute a confrontation production of four games. When the confrontation effect of four games is determined, the confrontation effect is executed from the game to the fourth game. By executing such a lottery process, it is possible to simultaneously determine the scenario and the content of the effect, and the process can be simplified.

<<< Modification 1-6 >>>
Furthermore, other elements (parameters) such as a production mode may be introduced. In the above-described example, the effect is determined based on the game section, the state related to the AT, and the RT state. Therefore, if these match, it is determined that the game state is the same and the content of the effect is determined. These game sections, AT-related states, and RT states are determined by the main control board M, and the sub-control board uses other elements such as the effect mode to determine the effect contents. You can expand your choice of content. For example, the direction of the state change can be included according to the current RT state and the original RT state, the state related to the current AT, the state related to the original AT, and the like. The lottery table for determining the contents can be made different, and the production can be further developed.

  For example, when the transition to RT1 is performed on its own in the low probability state in the normal section, and in the case of returning to the normal section from the advantageous section while maintaining RT1 and in the low probability state, the state related to the game section, AT, and RT state are The same, but the direction of change of state is different. By including such a direction of change, the production can be easily developed.

<<< Modification 1-7 >>>
Furthermore, when a freeze effect is determined on the main control board M side, a specific effect lottery table may be referred to on the sub control board S side.

<<< Fourth Embodiment >>
As described above, in the third embodiment, the advantageous section has a single advantageous BB state.

  FIG. 171 is a block diagram illustrating an AT state transition diagram according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 171, the advantageous section has four states, state A to state D, and is configured to be able to shift from the normal section to any of state A to state D. Moreover, it is comprised so that it can transfer to the state D only from a normal area.

  In addition, in 4th Embodiment, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Cherry 4 + 1 sort BB-C is included as a condition apparatus. In the second embodiment, the RT state that mainly stays in the state A to the state C in the normal section and the advantageous section is RT0, and the RT state that mainly stays in the state D in the advantageous section is more advantageous than RT0. RT1 (high win rate of replay), and the RT state inside the BB or inside the advantageous BB is RT2 different from RT0 and RT1.

<State A>
When the state related to the AT is a low probability state and the cherry 1 is won by the lottery process, the state shifts to the “advantage state A” of the state A of the advantageous section. If the BB is won in the “advantageous state A”, the game moves to the “advantageous BB inside game”, and then the symbol of the BB role is stopped and displayed, so that the “advantageous BB state” is entered and executed. When BB ends, the advantage state A is restored. The state A is a state composed of these “advantageous state A”, “advantageous BB inside game”, and “advantageous BB state”. On the condition that the number of games executed in the state A has reached the predetermined game number A, the state returns to the low probability state. For example, the game number A can be 500 games.

<State B>
When the state relating to AT is a low-probability state and the cherry 2 is won by lottery processing, the state shifts to the “advantage state B” of the state B of the advantageous section. If the BB is won in the “favorable state B”, the game shifts to the “advantageous BB inside game”, and after that, the symbol of the BB role is stopped and displayed, and then the “advantageous BB state” is transferred to and executed. When the BB is completed, the advantageous state B is restored. State B is a state composed of these “advantageous state B”, “advantageous BB inside game”, and “advantageous BB state”. On the condition that the number of games executed in the state B has reached a predetermined number B, the state returns to the low probability state. For example, the game number B can be 300 games.

<State C>
When the state related to the AT is a low probability state and the cherry 3 is won by the lottery process, the state shifts to the “advantage state C” of the state C of the advantageous section. If the BB is won in the “advantageous state C”, the game moves to “advantageous BB inside game”, and then the symbol of the BB role is stopped and displayed, and then the “advantageous BB state” is entered and executed. When BB ends, the advantageous state C is restored. The state C is a state composed of these “advantageous state C”, “advantageous BB inside game”, and “advantageous BB state”. On the condition that the number of games executed in the state B has reached a predetermined number C, the state returns to the low probability state. For example, the number of games C can be 100 games. Thus, in the second embodiment, “the number of games A> the number of games B> the number of games C”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 171, when the state transitions to state A, state B, and state C, the push order navigation can be executed when the push order bell is won for the first time, but the subsequent push order bells are won. The push order navigation is not executed in the played game (the same applies to the game won in the push order replay game). On the other hand, when transitioning to state D, which will be described later, all the games won for the push order bell and the games won for the push order replay are configured to perform push order navigation, and state D is states A to C. The game state is more advantageous for the player.

<State D>
When the state related to the AT is a low probability state, the state 4 is shifted to the “state D” by winning the cherry 4 + 1 type BB-C. The “state D” of the second embodiment has the same configuration as the advantageous section of the present embodiment.

  When the state relating to the AT is a low probability state, if the cherry 4 + 1 type BB-C is won by the lottery process, the state shifts to “advantageous BB inside game” in the advantageous state D. The “advantageous BB state” is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbol of the BB role in “advantageous BB inside game”. When the executed BB is completed, the state shifts to the AT preparation state 1, and the state shifts to the “AT state” via the AT preparation state 2. Transition to “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, “addition special state”, “post-fall special state”, “post-fall AT state” and “bell overflow state” is implemented It is the same as the form.

  If the state related to the AT is “AT in progress” and the AT counter value is 11 or more, the transition to the “additional specialization state” is performed with a probability of ½ when watermelon B is won. Acquire rights and move to a “specialized precursor” state. On the other hand, if the state related to the AT is “AT state” and the AT counter value is 10 or less, the right to transition to the “additional special state” is acquired even if the watermelon B is won. The lottery (which may also be referred to as a special state transition lottery) is not executed, and is not configured to shift to the “specialization sign state” and the “addition special state”.

  Furthermore, when the state related to the AT is the “specialization sign state”, the state related to the AT shifts to the “addition special state” on condition that the replay 07 symbol is stopped. In “additional special state”, the display returns to the “AT state” on condition that the replay 06 symbol is stopped.

  Further, as described above, as in the third embodiment, it has the “after-falling AT state”, “bell-overflowing state”, and “after-falling specialized state”. Can be migrated.

<< AT state transition control processing >>
172 and 173 are flowcharts showing a part of the AT state transition control process in the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 172 is a process corresponding to FIG. 114 of the third embodiment, and steps that perform the same processes as in FIG. 114 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the case of No in step 1402, when the processing of step 3000 is executed, in step 5002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a low probability state. In the case of Yes in Step 5002, in Step 5004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a state promotion combination (Cherry 1). In the case of Yes in step 5004, in step 5006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state relating to AT after the next game as the advantageous state A, and ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts to step 5020.

  In the case of No in step 5004, in step 5008, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a state promotion combination (cherry 2). In the case of Yes in step 5008, in step 5010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as the advantageous state B, and ends this subroutine.

  In the case of No in step 5008, in step 5012, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a state promotion combination (cherry 3). In the case of Yes in step 5012, in step 5014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the state relating to AT after the next game as the advantageous state C, and ends this subroutine.

  In the case of No in step 5012, in step 5016, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a state promotion combination (cherry 4 + 1 type BB-C). In the case of Yes in step 5016, in step 5018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as the advantageous state D (advantageous internal game), and ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5016, the CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts to step 5020.

  In the case of No in step 5002 or step 5016, in step 5020, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is the advantageous state A.

  In the case of Yes in step 5020, in step 5022, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of games has reached a predetermined game number A in the game.

  In the case of Yes in step 5022, in step 5024, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as a low probability state, and ends this subroutine.

  In the case of No in step 5020, in step 5026, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is the advantageous state B.

  In the case of Yes in step 5026, in step 5028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of games has reached a predetermined game number B in the game.

  In the case of Yes in step 5028, in step 5030, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as a low probability state, and ends this subroutine.

  In the case of No in step 5026, in step 5032, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is the advantageous state C.

  In the case of Yes in step 5032, in step 5034, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of games has reached a predetermined game number C in the game.

  In the case of Yes in step 5034, in step 5036, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as a low probability state, and ends this subroutine.

  Also in the case of No in step 5034, the CPUSC of the sub control board S ends this subroutine.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect executed when the gaming state changes. FIG. 174 (A) is an effect executed when the advantageous state A shifts to the normal section. When it is in the advantageous state A, a confrontation effect is executed, and an effect of winning (successful) is executed as a result of the confrontation, and the process shifts to a normal section. On the other hand, FIG. 174 (B) is an effect executed when the normal state is shifted to the advantageous state A. When it is a normal section, a confrontation effect is executed, an effect that is defeated (failed) is executed as a result of the confrontation, and the state shifts to an advantageous state A. Note that FIG. 174 (A) is also an effect executed when shifting from the advantageous state B or the advantageous state C to the normal section, and FIG. 174 (B) transitions from the normal section to the advantageous state B or the advantageous state C. It is also an effect performed when Note that when the transition from the advantageous state A, the advantageous state B, or the advantageous state C to the normal section is not made (when the number of games still remains), the effect shown in FIG. 174 (B) may be executed. Further, FIG. 174 (A) is an effect executed when the state D is shifted from the normal section. Incidentally, since there is no transition from the advantageous state A, the advantageous state B, or the advantageous state C to the state D, FIG. 174 (A) is not executed in the advantageous state A, the advantageous state B, or the advantageous state C.

<<< Modification 2-1 >>>
In the above-described example, the end condition of the state A to the state C of the advantageous section is based on the digestion of the predetermined number of games A to C, but the predetermined condition device, for example, winning -A1 to winning -A6 is won. You may make it return to a normal area in the opportunity that the symbol of winning 01, winning 02, or winning 03 was stopped and displayed by the game which was made. It is possible to return to the normal section before digesting the predetermined number of games A to C, and to cause a possibility of advancing the timing at which it is possible to shift to the advantageous section state D, and to expect the transition to the advantageous section state D. Can do. In addition, even if the predetermined number of games A to C is subtracted based on winning-C, winning-D, or winning-E, there is a possibility of advancing the timing at which it is possible to shift to the advantageous section state D. And can be expected to shift to the state D of the advantageous section.

<<< Modification 2-2 >>>
Further, in the above-described example, the transition from the state A to the state D of the advantageous section had to be performed once through the normal section. It can be made possible to enter the state. In particular, the state can be shifted from the state A to the state C of the advantageous section to the state D. For example, by winning a rare combination (“winning-B”, “winning-C”, “winning-D”, “winning-E”), etc., it is possible to shift to the state of another advantageous section. By doing in this way, even if it is the state A-state C of an advantageous area, it can be made to expect that it can transfer to the state D directly.

<<< Modification 2-3 >>>
Furthermore, in the above-described example, the end condition of the state A to the state C of the advantageous section is due to the digestion of a certain number of games A to C. These game numbers A to C are determined by lottery processing. You may do it. For example, the number of games A to C can be determined by referring to tables having different numbers in each of the advantageous section states A to C. Specifically, in the case of state A, the numbers are determined so that 10 games are 10%, 50 games are 10%, 100 games are 10%, 300 games are 30%, 500 games are 40%, The average number of games can be 306 games. In the case of state B, the number of games is set so that 10 games are 20%, 50 games are 20%, 100 games are 20%, 300 games are 20%, and 500 games are 20%. 192 games. Further, in the state C, the number of games is set so that 10 games are 50%, 50 games are 30%, 100 games are 20%, 300 games are 0%, and 500 games are 0%. Can be made into 40 games. By doing in this way, even if it is a case where it transfers to the state A-state C of an advantageous area, the possibility of returning to a normal area with few games can be produced, and a player's sense of expectation can be raised.

<<< Modification 2-4 >>>
In addition, as described above, the RT states that mainly stay in the normal section A and the advantageous section states A to C are both RT0. The RT state with a high stay rate in C may be RT5 (RT state that shifts when cherry 1 to 3 are stopped and displayed), and the RT state with a high stay rate in the normal section may be RT0. Diversify game development. Further, by configuring the RT0 to have a higher re-game win rate than the RT5, the re-game win rate is higher in the normal section than in the advantageous section states A to C. It can be configured as follows.

<<< Rare role suggestion production >>>
The execution mode of effects that can be applied to the swivel type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. The rare role suggestion effect is an effect executed in a game won for a rare role, and is a notice effect that suggests to the player that the rare role has been won in the game. A notice effect that is executed only in a game that is won as a rare role may be used as a rare role suggestion effect, or all notice effects that are executed in a game that is won as a rare role may be used as a rare role suggestion effect.

  The timing at which the player can recognize that the rare role has been won may be used as the start timing of the rare role suggestion effect, or the timing at which an image or the like from which the player can guess the winning role of the game being executed is started. May be the start timing of the rare role suggesting effect. As an example of the start timing of the rare role suggestion, (1) the image of the color of the pattern related to the rare role (red apple is related to cherry, green apple is related to watermelon, etc.) Display is started, (2) An image of a color with a relatively high expectation of a rare role (a color that does not have a design related to the color, for example, purple) is started, (3) Rare Symbol and character display (“CHANCE”, “!”, “!?”, Etc.) start timing related to the role, (4) Action start timing when the rare role expectation is relatively high (the character jumps) (5) Preliminary production start timing that may be won by rare roles (for example, the action of “crawl on stone” is started as an action where the character has a relatively low expectation of rare roles) When Also, only to have the possibility to which the action is to win the rare role).

  In addition, the rare role suggesting effect is not limited to the effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and a rare role may be suggested by the effect sound output from the speaker S20, or the lighting mode of the decorative lamp unit D150 may be changed. May suggest a rare role. That is, a rare role suggestion effect in a configuration in which the execution timing of a rare role suggestion effect is compared between execution and non-execution of a continuous effect, which will be described later, may be an effect sound output from the speaker S20, or a decorative lamp unit It is good also as a lighting mode of D150. Moreover, you may combine them, for example, you may comprise so that the execution timing of the rare role suggestion effect which is the display in effect display apparatus S40 and the rare role suggestion effect which is the lighting mode of the decoration lamp unit D150 may be compared. .

Moreover, you may define as a definition of a rare combination as follows.
<Definition 1>
A role with a relatively low lottery probability may be a rare role, for example, a condition device with a lottery probability (winning probability) of 1/50 or less in all RT states except during bonus, and a role excluded from a bonus role May be a rare role. When applied to this embodiment, Re-Game-B, Re-Game-C, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E are rare roles. In addition, winning numbers that are “BB role + rare role” (duplicate role of BB role and rare role) such as “1 type BB-B + winning-C” of winning number 21 are also included in the rare role. May be.

<Definition 2>
Other than the acquisition of game medals, a combination that may be highly profitable (or relatively high) may be used as a rare combination. For example, the state relating to AT shifts to an advantageous state (“low probability state → high probability state”, etc.). Become a rare role.

<Definition 3>
A role with a relatively high expectation that overlaps with a bonus role may be a rare role. For example, in a situation where the bonus is not inside, a role that overlaps with a bonus with a probability of 1/100 (1%) or more. May be used as a rare role. More specifically, for a winning combination including a winning-C cherry, the winning number 14 for the winning number 14 that does not overlap with the bonus winning combination is “1000”, and the winning number 21 that overlaps with the bonus winning combination is Winning number 25 Since the winning number is “40 + 40 = 80”, the winning degree when winning the winning combination including winning-C is “80 ÷ 1080 × 100≈7.4% The winning prize -C will be a rare role. When applied to the present embodiment, winning-C, winning-D, winning-E are rare roles.

<Definition 4>
Of the winning numbers excluding the winning number including the bonus combination and the loss, the combination having only one winning number corresponding to one production group number may be a rare combination (bonus execution). When applied to this embodiment, Re-Game-A, Re-Game-B, Re-Game-C, Win-B, Win-C, Win-D, Win-E are rare roles. In addition, a winning combination that has only one condition device (winning winning combination or replaying winning combination) corresponding to one production group number among winning numbers excluding winning winning numbers may be used as a rare combination. In this case, the winning number 14 is the winning number -C and the winning number 21 is one type BB-B + winning -C. Therefore, the condition difference except for the bonus is the same (duplicate), and it becomes a rare role. When applied to this embodiment, Re-Game-A, Re-Game-B, Re-Game-C, Win-B, Win-C, Win-D, Win-E are rare roles.

  Moreover, you may define the condition apparatus or winning number similar to 3rd Embodiment mentioned above as a rare combination.

  Next, FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating the occurrence timing of the rare role suggesting effect. In the same figure, in the case of “(a) normal production”, a rare role suggesting effect is executed by winning a winning-C cherry as an effect that is completed in one game (an effect that is not a continuous production). In the game in the middle of the execution of “(b) At the time of continuous production (night mode)”, the case where the winning combination-C cherry is won and the rare role suggesting production is executed is illustrated.

  First, “(a) normal production” will be described. Note that the normal performance is a game executed in a situation where the continuous performance is not executed.

  In “(a) Normal production”, the start lever is operated, and the reel starts to rotate. In this game, the cherry (winning-C) is won as a result of the internal lottery. In addition, after the start lever is operated (when the start lever is operated), the rare role suggesting effect is not generated. Thereafter, the rare role suggesting effect does not occur even after the first stop button operation and the second stop button operation. After that, after operating the third stop button, “red apple (multiple)”, which is a rare role suggestion effect, has occurred, suggesting that there is a possibility that a cherry is won in the game being executed. “Red apples (multiple)” is a production where a large amount of red apples fall from the tree, and the cherry design is based on red, suggesting that it is winning the cherry. ing. It should be noted that to indicate that the cherry is won is to win the winning number including the cherry. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the winning number 14 of “winning-C” ”, Indicating that the winning number 21 is“ 1 type BB-B + winning-C ”or the winning number 25 is“ 1 type BB-C + winning-C ”. When the reels are stopped in the order of “left reel → middle reel → right reel”, the first stop is the left reel, the second stop is the middle reel, and the third stop is the right reel. As described above, in (a) the normal performance in FIG. 8, the rare role suggesting performance is started to be triggered by the operation of the third stop button.

  Next, “(b) During continuous production (night mode)” will be described. In the figure, the case where the bonus is not won is illustrated. First, in the first game of continuous effects executed over 4 games, the start lever is operated in a situation where the background effect is in the night mode, and the reel starts to rotate. In the game, the result of the internal lottery is lost, and the rare role suggesting effect is not executed in the game. Next, the start lever is operated in the second game of the continuous effect executed over the four games, and the reel starts to rotate. In the game, “Cherry (Winning-C)” is won as a result of the internal lottery, and the start lever operation (in other words, before the operation of the first stop button) is a rare role suggestion effect “CHANCE”. ! ”Is displayed. Note that “CHANCE!” Is continuously displayed until the next game is started (the display may be deleted after the third stop button operation). In this way, when a rare role is won in a continuous performance, the timing at which a rare role suggesting effect occurs is relatively earlier than when a rare role is won in a non-continuous performance. . By configuring in this way, in a game won for a rare role in “continuous production”, which is relatively more likely to be won for a bonus or AT than in a non-continuous production, than in the case of a non-continuous production By suggesting the winning of the rare role at a relatively early timing, it is possible to clearly notify that the game needs to be pushed, and the player can concentrate on the result of the continuous performance. Also, players will not be discouraged by missing a rare role “during continuous production” (that is, the result of continuous production was not successful because the rare role was missed). It is possible to develop the production as follows. In this example, “red apples (multiple)” and “CHANCE!” Are illustrated as effects suggesting that the cherry has been won, but “red apples (multiple)” and “CHANCE!” It may be a configuration that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning any one (for example, cherry, watermelon, chance eyes, etc.). In addition, as a rare role suggesting effect corresponding to cherry, it may be configured to have red apples (many) and red apples (small), and in such a case, than red apples (small) By adjusting the appearance frequency of the production such as red apple (many) is more likely to overlap with the bonus, more likely to shift to a game state advantageous to the player, etc. It can be a highly-specific gaming machine. In addition, in the same figure, although the game performed in the condition which is not performing the continuous effect and the game performed in the middle of execution of the continuous effect were compared, it is not limited to this, and a continuous effect is performed. The situation in which the above-mentioned “no scenario (none)” is determined as the game that has not been performed, and the game executed in the middle of the execution of the continuous production is determined other than the above “no scenario (none)” It may be a game. The configuration related to the continuous performance described later may be similarly expressed. In addition, when executing the red apple (many), the red apple (many) is displayed with the third stop operation as compared with the case where the red apple (many) is displayed with the first stop operation. The case may be more likely to overlap with the bonus, more likely to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player, and so on. With such a configuration, the later the timing at which the rare role suggesting effect is executed, the higher the possibility that it will be beneficial to the player. “Start lever on → first stop operation → second stop operation → third stop operation” As it becomes, the expectation can be raised that the rare role suggesting production has not been executed yet.

  Next, FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating the occurrence timing of the rare role suggesting effect in the game in which the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. Since the operation is the same as that of FIG. 175, only the differences will be described. Both “(a) During normal performance” and “(b) During continuous performance” are normal sections, and the game is executed in a situation where the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off. Thereafter, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on by operating the third stop button to enter the advantageous section after the last reel stops. That is, in the game in which the advantageous section indicator YH controlled by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M described above is newly lit, the execution start timing of the rare role suggesting effect in the game won in the rare role during the non-continuous performance Instead, the execution start timing of the rare role suggestion effect in the game won in the rare role at the time of the continuous performance is configured to be relatively earlier. By configuring in this way, it is suggested at a relatively early timing that there is a possibility that an event advantageous to the player may have occurred (for example, a rare role was won) in the game that triggered the execution of the continuous performance It is possible to reduce the possibility of missing a rare role and to pay attention to continuous production. Also, “It is a normal section and the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off → elected for the first rare role → The regular section and the advantageous section indicator YH remains unlit and won the first rare section As a result, a continuous production of 4 games is executed. → The second rare role is won in the second game of the continuous production. → Because of winning the second rare role, it becomes an advantageous section after the third stop. When the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on, it is possible to recognize that the continuous performance is being executed with the first rare role winning, and confirm the advantageous section indicator YH. With this, it is possible to confirm that it became an advantageous section with the second rare role winning, and the rare role (first rare role) that triggered the continuous production and the rare won during the continuous production Role (the second rare role) It is possible to prevent a situation in which confuse or should be expected to either of the.

  Next, FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating the generation timing of a rare role suggesting effect at the time of a normal effect and at the time of bonus determination. “(A) Normal effect” is the same as that in FIG. “(B) At the time of bonus confirmation” illustrates an operation when displaying a bonus confirmation screen for notifying a player that a bonus has been won, and the bonus confirmation screen is displayed. For example, “Winning for a combination of rare role and bonus role → Continuous production performed → Notification of success of continuous production as a result of continuous production → Bonus confirmation screen is displayed from next game → The bonus symbol is stopped and displayed. The bonus confirmation screen is erased and the bonus screen is displayed. In addition, when the bonus combination is stopped and displayed before notifying the result of the continuous production after winning the duplicate combination of the rare combination and the bonus combination (or the game notifying the result of the continuous production), The bonus screen is displayed without displaying the bonus confirmation screen.

  The effect of “(b) Bonus confirmation” will be described in detail. “Bonus confirmation!” Indicating that the bonus has already been won and the bonus has been confirmed is displayed, and the bonus confirmation screen is displayed. In a game executed in a situation in which the bonus is inside (for example, the state related to AT is “normal BB inside game”), if the cherry is won, in other words, after the start lever is operated (in other words, the first stop button "CHANCE!" Is displayed as a rare role suggesting effect before the operation of (1) and after satisfying the game start conditions. The “CHANCE!” Is continuously displayed until the next game is started (or until the final reel is stopped). In other words, if a rare role is won while the bonus confirmation screen is displayed (inside the bonus), it is executed at the time of normal production (continuous production is not executed and the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed). The timing at which the rare role suggesting effect occurs is relatively earlier than in the case where the rare role is won in the game, which may be inside the bonus or inside the bonus) It is configured. With this configuration, when the bonus is confirmed, a bonus advantageous to the player has already been won, and the player concentrates on stopping the bonus combination, so the bonus combination is stopped. Since it is assumed that the game is not concentrated except for games that can be played, it is possible to prevent a rare role from being missed by suggesting that the possibility of a rare role is relatively high. In this example, “red apples (multiple)” and “CHANCE!” Are illustrated as effects suggesting that the cherry has been won, but “red apples (multiple)” and “CHANCE!” It may be a configuration that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning any one (for example, cherry, watermelon, chance eyes, etc.). As shown in the figure, the display mode of the rare role suggestion effect displayed by winning the rare role in the game executed while the bonus confirmation screen is displayed, and the display mode of the rare role suggestion effect are executed during the execution of the continuous effect. The display mode of the rare role suggestion effect displayed by winning the rare role in the game may be the same, or displayed by winning the rare role in the game executed while displaying the bonus confirmation screen The display mode of the rare role suggestion effect to be displayed may be different from the display mode of the rare role suggestion effect displayed by winning the rare role in the game executed during the execution of the continuous effect. .

  Next, FIG. 178 is an example of a rare role suggesting effect selection aspect applicable to this example. The table in the upper part of the figure illustrates, as an example of the case where a rare role is won, the selection ratio of effects executed in the game won for cherry according to the situation. In addition, the selection rate in the figure is a rate at which the effect is selected as a result.

  First, the selection mode of the rare role suggestion effect at the time of winning the cherry will be described in detail in the upper part of FIG. During a non-execution of a continuous production during AT (a state related to AT where push order navigation occurs, for example, during AT), a common production, a fruit production, and a cut-in production may be executed as rare role suggesting productions. It is configured. The common effect (for example, the same effect as the above-mentioned common navigation effect) is selected at 80/256 when the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during the AT, and 50/256 of them operate the start lever. The rare role suggesting effect starts to be triggered by the trigger, the rare role suggesting effect starts to be triggered by 5/256 when the first stop button is operated, and the rare role suggesting effect is triggered by 5/256 when the second stop button is operated. The execution of the rare role suggesting effect is started when 5/256 is triggered by the operation of the third stop button.

  Next, the fruit production (the apple red (multiple) etc. described above is the fruit production) is selected at 80/256 when the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous production during the AT, of which 0 / 256 starts the rare role suggestion when the start lever is operated (when the fruit production is executed, the rare role suggestion is not executed when the start lever is operated), and 35/256 is the operation of the first stop button. As a result, the execution of the rare role suggestion effect starts, 30/256 starts the rare role suggestion effect triggered by the operation of the second stop button, and 15/256 starts the execution of the third stop button as an opportunity. The production starts.

  Next, the cut-in effect is selected at 96/256 when the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous effect during the AT, and 36/256 starts the execution of the rare role suggesting effect when the start lever is operated. 15/256 starts the execution of the rare role suggestion effect when the first stop button is operated, 10/256 starts the execution of the rare role suggestion effect when the second stop button is operated, and 35/256 The rare role suggestion effect starts to be triggered by the operation of the third stop button.

  As described above, the rare role suggestion effect that is executed when the continuous effect is not executed during the AT has a case where the execution is not started with the start lever as a trigger or a case where the execution is started at a timing after the first stop button. . In addition, in the same figure, although the continuous production is not being executed, the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed. The production execution start timing is in the order of “start lever → first stop → second stop → third stop” from the early timing.

  Next, the CHANCE effect can be executed as the rare role suggesting effect during the execution of the continuous effect during the AT. The CHANCE effect is selected at 256/256 when the cherry is won during the execution of the continuous effect during the AT. In other words, if the cherry is won during the execution of the continuous effect during the AT, only the CHANCE effect is selected. The execution of the rare role suggestion effect is started when 256/256 (all) of them are operated by the start lever.

  Next, the CHANCE effect can be executed as a rare role suggesting effect during the display of the bonus confirmation screen during AT (when the bonus confirmation screen is displayed, for example, an advantageous BB internal game). It is configured as follows. The CHANCE effect is selected at 256/256 when the cherry is won while the bonus confirmation screen during AT is displayed. In other words, when the cherry is won while the bonus confirmation screen during AT is displayed, the CHANCE effect is selected. Only 256/256 (all) of them start executing the rare role suggesting effect when the start lever is operated.

  In this way, when a rare role (cherry in the figure) is won during AT, when a rare role is won during execution of a continuous performance rather than when a rare role is won during non-execution of a continuous performance This is configured so that the rare role suggesting effect is easily started at a relatively early timing. In addition, when a rare role (cherry in the figure) is won during AT, when a rare role is won while the bonus confirmation screen is displayed, rather than when a rare role is won while the bonus confirmation screen is hidden This is configured so that the rare role suggesting effect is easily started at a relatively early timing.

  Next, when a rare role is won during non-AT (a state related to AT in which push order navigation is not executed, for example, a low probability state) and a continuous role is not executed, A common effect, a jump effect, and a cut-in effect can be executed.

  The common effect is selected at 80/256 when the cherry is won during the non-execution of the non-AT continuous effect, and the execution of the rare role suggesting effect is started when 50/256 is operated by the start lever. / 256 starts the execution of the rare role suggestion when the first stop button is operated, and 5/256 starts the execution of the rare role suggestion when the second stop button is operated, and 5/256 stops the third The rare role suggestion effect starts to be triggered by the button operation.

  Next, the jump effect is selected at 80/256 when the cherry is won during the non-AT continuous effect non-execution, of which 0/256 starts executing the rare role suggesting effect when the start lever is operated (When the fruit effect is executed, the rare role suggesting effect is not executed when the start lever is operated), 35/256 starts the rare role suggesting effect when the first stop button is operated, and 30/256 The execution of the rare role suggesting effect is started when the second stop button is operated, and the execution of the rare role suggesting effect is started by 15/256 when the third stop button is operated.

  Next, the cut-in effect is selected at 96/256 when the cherry is won during the non-AT continuous effect non-execution, and 36/256 of the effect that the rare role suggestion is executed when the start lever is operated. 15/256 starts the execution of the rare role suggestion triggered by the operation of the first stop button, 10/256 starts the execution of the rare role suggested effect triggered by the operation of the second stop button, 35/256 However, the execution of the rare role suggesting effect is started when the third stop button is operated.

  As described above, the rare role suggestion effect that is executed when the continuous effect is not executed during non-AT has a case where the execution is not started with the start lever as a trigger or a case where the execution is started at a timing after the first stop button. Yes. In addition, in the same figure, although the continuous production is not being executed, the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed. The production execution start timing is in the order of “start lever → first stop → second stop → third stop” from the early timing.

  Next, the CHANCE effect can be executed as a rare role suggestion effect during the execution of the non-AT continuous effect. The CHANCE effect is selected at 256/256 when the cherry is won during execution of the non-AT continuous effect. In other words, when the cherry is selected during the non-AT continuous effect, the CHANCE effect is selected. Only 256/256 (all) of them start executing the rare role suggesting effect when the start lever is operated.

  Next, the CHANCE effect is executed as a rare role suggestion effect during the display of the bonus confirmation screen during non-AT (when the bonus confirmation screen is displayed, for example, a normal BB internal game). Configured to get. The CHANCE effect is selected at 256/256 when the cherry is won while the non-AT bonus confirmation screen is displayed. In other words, when the cherry is won while the non-AT bonus confirmation screen is displayed. Only the CHANCE effect is executed, and 256/256 (all) of them start executing the rare role suggesting effect when the start lever is operated.

  In this way, when a rare role (cherry in the figure) is won during non-AT, a rare role is won during execution of a continuous performance than when a rare role is won during non-execution of a continuous performance. In the case, the rare role suggesting effect is easily started at a relatively early timing. In addition, when a rare role (cherry in the figure) is won during non-AT, a rare role is won while the bonus confirmation screen is displayed than when a rare role is won while the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed. In the case, the rare role suggesting effect is easily started at a relatively early timing.

  First, in the lower part of the same drawing, the selection mode of effects at the time of pushing order win will be described in detail. During AT (a state related to AT in which push order navigation occurs, for example, during AT), the start lever is always displayed during execution of continuous production, non-execution of continuous production, and display of the bonus confirmation screen. Push order navigation effects are executed in response to the operation. In addition, during non-AT (a state related to AT in which push order navigation does not occur, for example, a low probability state), during the continuous production, all no production is selected (all triggered by the operation of the start lever). As shown, the production will not be executed, so the start lever operation will be used to trigger the advance announcement corresponding to the winning of the push order bell), and all the push order navigation effects will be selected while the bonus confirmation screen is displayed. During non-execution, a common effect, jump effect, conversation effect, cut-in effect, and no effect can be selected. In addition, the notice start execution start timing when the push order bell is won during non-AT continuous execution non-execution (when the bonus confirmation screen is not displayed) may be triggered by the start lever operation, In some cases, the operation of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is triggered. In addition, during the non-execution of the continuous effect, the same effect (for example, cut-in effect) may be executed when winning the push order bell and when winning the cherry (rare role). The CHANCE effect, which is a rare role suggestion effect that is executed while the effect is being executed or during the display of the bonus confirmation screen, cannot be executed when the push order bell is won. That is, when the player visually recognizes the CHANCE effect as the rare role suggestion effect, the player can recognize that the rare role has been won.

  In the figure, only the case where the cherry is won as the rare role is illustrated. However, when the cherry role and the watermelon A are included as the rare role, the cherry is won during the non-execution of the continuous performance during the AT. In the game, apple red (many) is configured to be executed as a fruit effect, and apple green (many) is executed as a fruit effect in a game that was selected for watermelon A during non-execution of the continuous effect during AT. In the non-execution of the continuous production during AT, it is configured so that the rare role suggestion can be executed in different production modes depending on which of Cherry or Watermelon A is won. In the game that won the cherry during the execution of the continuous production, “CHANCE!” Is displayed as the CHANCE production, and the watermelon A is won during the continuous production during the AT. In the game, “CHANCE!” Is displayed as the CHANCE effect, and during the continuous effect during the AT, even if both the cherry and the watermelon A are selected, the rare effect is played in the same effect mode. You may comprise so that a suggestion effect may be performed. In addition, even during execution of continuous production during AT, it may be configured that a rare role suggesting production can be executed in different production modes when winning for cherry and winning for watermelon A. In the case where it is configured, in the game won for the cherry during the non-execution of the continuous performance during AT, the rare role suggestion effect and the rare role suggestion effect in the game won for the watermelon A are more than the ratio of the production mode During the execution of the continuous production during AT, the ratio of the production mode of the rare role suggestion effect in the game won for Cherry and the rare role suggestion effect in the game won for Watermelon A is configured to be higher. Is preferred.

  Similarly, in the case where the player is configured to have cherry and watermelon A as the rare role, in the game where the cherry is won while the bonus confirmation screen during AT is not displayed, apple red (many) is used as the fruit effect. In a game that is configured to be executed and won by watermelon A while the bonus confirmation screen during AT is not displayed, apple green (multiple) can be executed as a fruit effect, and the bonus confirmation screen during AT During the non-display, it is configured so that the rare role suggestion effect can be executed in different effect modes depending on whether the cherry or the watermelon A is won, and the cherry is won while the bonus confirmation screen during AT is displayed In the game, “CHANCE!” Is displayed as the CHANCE effect, and the game that won the watermelon A while displaying the bonus confirmation screen during the AT is displayed. However, as “CHANCE!” Is displayed as the CHANCE effect, while the bonus confirmation screen is displayed during the AT, no matter if you win both Cherry and Watermelon A, the rare effect suggests in the same effect mode. You may comprise so that an effect can be performed. In addition, even during the display of the bonus confirmation screen during the AT, the rare role suggesting effect may be executed in different effect modes depending on whether winning for cherry or winning watermelon A. In the case where it is configured, the ratio in which the effect mode of the rare role suggestion effect in the game won for cherry in the non-display of the bonus confirmation screen during AT and the rare role suggestion effect in the game won for watermelon A are the same Relative role suggestion effect in the game won for Cherry and the rare role suggestion effect in the game won for Watermelon A during the display of the bonus confirmation screen during AT are higher than the ratio of the effect mode It is preferable to configure as described above. Although the above configuration has been described in detail while being limited to the AT, it is only an example, and the same configuration can be applied to the rendering mode of the rare role suggesting effect during the non-AT.

  By configuring in this way, there is a possibility that an event advantageous to the player may have occurred in the game that triggered the execution of the continuous production, so if you win the rare role while running the continuous production, Compared to the case where a rare role is won during non-execution of a performance, the possibility of a player missing a rare role is reduced by notifying the player of the rare role suggestion effect with a simple display and at an early timing. And the player can concentrate more on the result of the continuous performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which one of the rare role that triggered the execution of the continuous performance and the rare role that was won during the execution of the continuous performance should be expected.

  In this specification, the statement that B is easier to execute than A includes the case where A is not executed, and the rate at which B is executed is higher than the rate at which A is executed. It is supplemented that the description includes the case where A is not executed.

(Fifth embodiment)
In the third embodiment, it is possible to create a highly entertaining gaming machine by enabling execution of a freeze that delays the progress of the game. However, the execution condition of the freeze is the same as that of the third embodiment. Is not limited. Therefore, a configuration of a spinning-reel type gaming machine capable of executing freezing different from the configuration of the third embodiment will be described as a fifth embodiment, and only differences from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 179 is a flowchart of freeze lottery execution processing according to the subroutine of Step 3100 in FIG. 112 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is Step 3140, that is, in Step 3140, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a combination including a bonus. In the case of Yes in step 3140, in step 3106, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific freeze execution lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10). Next, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the specific freeze execution lottery executed in step 3106 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the freeze execution flag. Next, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a specific freeze execution command (command to the sub control board S side), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). Note that if the answer is No in step 3140 or step 3108, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1550).

  Here, the right side of the figure is a list of winning numbers for which specific freeze can be executed. In the figure, the numerical value when the set value is set to 1 is illustrated. Also, the total number of entries is 65536. For example, when the entry is 10, it indicates that 10/65536 is won. As shown in the figure, the winning combination including the bonus in the determination process in step 3140 is the winning numbers 19 to 40, and the independent bonus winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 (duplicate with winning combination and replaying combination) “Role combination + bonus combination”, which is a duplicate combination of a bonus combination with a rare combination of winning numbers 21 to 23 and winning numbers 25 to 27, and winning numbers 24 to 40 It is composed of “rare role + bonus role” which is a duplicate role of a non-rare role and a bonus role. Here, the rare roles in the figure are winning-C (cherry), winning-D (watermelon A) and winning E (watermelon B), and non-rare roles are replay-A, winning- A1, prize-A2, prize-A3, prize-A4, prize-A5, and prize-A6. In other words, as in “Definition 1” described above, in the fifth embodiment, a role with a relatively small lottery probability is used as a rare role, and the lottery probability (winning probability) is set in all RT states except for the bonus. A condition device that is 1/50 or less plays a rare role. By configuring in this way, the probability that the specific freeze execution lottery is won by winning the rare role is (40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40) / 65536 = 240/65536, and the specific freeze execution lottery is executed by winning the non-rare role. Probability is (1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) / 65536 = 7/65536, and it is easier to execute the specific freeze execution lottery when the rare role is won than the non-rare role, in other words, the specific freeze is more likely to be executed. Has been. In the game where the specific freeze is executed, the specific freeze effect is executed on the sub-control board S side.

  In addition, the definition of the rare role is not limited to this, and when defined in the same manner as “Definition 4” described above, winning-C (cherry), winning-D (watermelon A) and winning E (watermelon B) Re-Game-A, and the non-rare roles are Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, and Winning-A6. That is, among the winning numbers excluding the winning winning number, a role having only one condition device (winning combination or replaying combination) corresponding to one production group number can be a rare combination. .

  In such a configuration, the effect group number corresponding to the winning-C is “7” in all the winning numbers 14, 21, 25, and the effect group number corresponding to the winning-D is the winning number 15 , 22, 26 are all “8”, and the production group number corresponding to the winning-E is “9” in all the winning numbers 16, 23, 27, and corresponds to the replay-A. The production group number is “1” in all of the winning numbers 1 and 34, and there is only one condition device (winning combination or replaying combination) corresponding to one production group number. On the other hand, the prize-A1, the prize-A2, the prize-A3, the prize-A4, the prize-A5, and the prize-A6 are different condition devices, but the corresponding production group numbers are all “5”. . As described above, even when the rare role and the non-rare role are defined, the probability that the specific freeze execution lottery is won by winning the rare role is (40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 1) / 65536 = 241/65536, The probability that the specific freeze execution lottery is executed is (1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) / 65536 = 6/65536, and the specific freeze execution lottery is easier to execute when the rare role is won than the non-rare role. Then, the specific freeze is easily performed. With this configuration, a specific freeze is more likely to be executed when winning a rare role that is more likely to cause an advantageous event for the player (bonus winning in the figure) than when a non-rare role is won. Thus, a gaming machine that appropriately performs freeze can be configured.

In addition, the specific freeze may be executed only when the rare combination is won, or the execution mode (freeze time) of the freeze and the production mode on the sub-control board S side may be different for each rare combination. Good. By configuring in such a manner, it is possible to associate a condition device (winning combination or replaying combination) that is a rare combination and a production group number on a one-to-one basis, and grasp (limit) the winning combination from the production group number. It is possible to easily execute a freezing effect unique to the winning combination.

  Next, FIG. 180 is a button effect execution image in the fifth embodiment. In addition, it is supplemented that embodiment which can apply the button production illustrated to the same figure is not limited only to 5th Embodiment, It can apply to all embodiment illustrated in this example.

  First, (a) shown in the upper part of FIG. In the normal gaming state (non-AT, which is a gaming state in which push order navigation is not executed, for example, “low probability state”), the game is executed by operating the start lever (reel rotation starts). After that, the reel is rotating and the first stop operation is not executed (the first stop button is not operated and all the reels are rotating). An image prompting the player to perform an operation is displayed. Thereafter, the sub input button is operated, and the above-described red apple (many) is displayed. In addition, in the said game, the case where it wins a cherry is illustrated. Thus, in this example, the button effect is configured to be displayed as an execution opportunity of the rare role suggestion effect described above. When the button effect is executed in the normal gaming state and the rare input suggestion effect is executed by operating the sub input button, the start lever is operated in the “AT state” described above. As a result, the execution of the rare role suggesting effect is started at a later timing than when the rare role suggesting effect is executed. In such a configuration, when “reel rotation start → button production starts display → sub input button is operated → first stop button is operated”, the operation of the sub input button is performed. When the red apple (many) is displayed as an opportunity, and “reel rotation start → button production starts display → first stop button is operated → sub input button is operated”, the sub input button You may comprise so that a red apple (many) may not be displayed by an operation.

  Next, (b) shown in the lower part of FIG. During AT (a gaming state in which push order navigation can be executed, for example, “AT in progress”), the start lever is operated to execute the game (reel rotation starts), and the game is rare. Since the winning cherries are selected, “!!!!”, which is a rare role suggestion effect, is displayed when the start lever is operated. Thereafter, a third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed, and after all reels stop, an image prompting the player to operate the sub input button is displayed as a button effect. In addition, in the same figure, the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry is stopped is exemplified, but the player mistakenly performs the reel stop operation (the pressing operation), and the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry is stopped and displayed. Even when there is no button effect, the button effect may be executed. Thereafter, the sub input button is operated, and “+ 50G” is displayed as a display for notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added. As described above, in this example, the button effect is configured to be displayed even when the above-described AT game number addition is notified.

  The button effects illustrated in the figure can be configured to be executable in various situations. However, when a rare role is won, when an AT lottery is won, or when an AT game number is added (previous) It is easy to be executed when the expectation of generating a result advantageous to the player is relatively high (including the case where the AT game number is added before the game and the AT game number is not notified). You may comprise. As an example of such a configuration, it is possible to exemplify a configuration in which a button effect is more easily generated when a rare combination is won than when a combination other than a rare combination is won. In addition, when the rare role is defined as in “Definition 4” described above, the condition device (winning role or re-playing role) corresponding to one production group number among the winning numbers excluding the winning winning number is lost. It is possible to illustrate that the game in which the rare role that is a single role) is won is more easily executed than the game in which the role other than the rare role is won. By configuring in this way, the button effect can be made an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, and the button effect can be managed by the effect group number, thereby constituting a gaming machine that is less susceptible to unauthorized damage. be able to.

  In addition, the above-described ambiguous production (ambiguous announcement) can also be configured such that, when the rare role is won, the ambiguous production is less likely to occur than when the role other than the rare role is won. In addition, when the rare role is defined as in “Definition 4” described above, the condition device (winning role or re-playing role) corresponding to one production group number among the winning numbers excluding the winning winning number is lost. It is possible to illustrate that the game in which the rare role that is a single role is won is more difficult to execute than the game in which a role other than the rare role is won. By configuring in this way, the fuzzy effect can be made a relatively low-expected effect, a difference from other effects such as button effects can be provided, and the ambiguous effect is managed by the effect group number Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that is not easily damaged by fraud. Similarly, for various effects that differ in the performance occurrence probability between the rare role winning and the rare role ratio winning as described above, define the rare role using the production group number and compare the production occurrence probability. It is supplemented that is possible.

  In addition, the configuration in which the rare role is defined by the number of types of the winning number corresponding to the production group number and the production occurrence probability is compared is described above. When it is configured to be able to transmit only in the “section”, the effect occurrence probability in the “normal section” may be compared.

<<< Character selection screen >>>
Next, the configuration related to the character selection screen applicable to this example will be described in detail below. In addition, it supplements that the structure of the production illustrated below is applicable to all the embodiments illustrated in this example.

<< First Pattern >>
First, FIG. 181 is a transition diagram in the case of determining by operating the start lever of the first pattern. First, in the game that has shifted to the AT state, the indication of “moon stage entry” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an indication that the AT is started (sometimes referred to as an AT start screen) (AT Freeze at the start may be performed). Next, after the third stop of the game on which the AT start screen is displayed, a character selection screen is displayed. It should be noted that a “moon stage entry” or character selection screen may be displayed after the third stop one game before the transition to the “AT state”. As an effect mode of the character selection screen, one selection candidate character (here, elephant) is shining (highlighted), and the other selection candidate characters (here, lion and giraffe) are dark. (Not highlighted). In addition, it is comprised so that the selection candidate character which shines every predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) may be changed (the character which shines changes), and a character will be determined by the timing which a player performs determination operation. It is configured. In the same figure, as a decision operation, by operating the start lever (by starting the game) in a state where a specified number is bet, it is decided to be a shining character (here, an elephant), and AT The (moon stage) starts, and a screen during reel rotation in the AT state is displayed. In the figure, the case where the start lever, which is the operation member controlled on the main control board M side, is operated as the determination operation is illustrated. However, the max bet button is operated as the operation member controlled on the main control board M side. The bet can be determined by betting. It should be noted that it is preferable not to determine the settlement button operation (game medal settlement).

  In addition, when a game medal is settled by operating the settlement button in a situation where the character selection screen is not displayed, a standby screen may be displayed, while a game is performed by operating the settlement button while the character selection screen is displayed. When the medals are settled, the standby screen may not be displayed. Further, even when the game medals are settled by operating the settlement button while the character selection screen is displayed, the standby screen may be configured to be displayed. It is preferable that the character is not determined even if a game medal is inserted during the display. Furthermore, the character may not be determined even if the sub input button is operated while the standby screen is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where a character is determined even though the character selection screen is not displayed, so that a player can smoothly determine a desired character. Can be configured.

  Next, FIG. 182 is a transition diagram in the case of determining by operating the first pattern sub-input button. First, in the game that has shifted to the AT state, the indication of “moon stage entry” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an indication that the AT is started (sometimes referred to as an AT start screen) (AT Freeze at the start may be performed). Next, after the third stop of the game on which the AT start screen is displayed, a character selection screen is displayed. It should be noted that a “moon stage entry” or character selection screen may be displayed after the third stop one game before the transition to the “AT state”. As an effect mode of the character selection screen, one selection candidate character (here, elephant) is shining (highlighted), and the other selection candidate characters (here, lion and giraffe) are dark. (Not highlighted). In addition, it is comprised so that the selection candidate character which shines every predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) may be changed (the character which shines changes), and a character will be determined by the timing which a player performs determination operation. It is configured. Next, as a determination operation, the sub input button, which is an operation member controlled on the sub-control board S side, is operated to determine the shining character, and the display of “determined to be an elephant” is determined. The notification image is displayed on the effect display device S40. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the display of the decision notification image “determined to be an elephant” is erased, AT (moon stage) starts, and the reel is rotating in the AT state. A similar screen will be displayed. If the game is started by operating the start lever before the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the determination notification image is displayed at the game start time (start lever operation reception time). The screen is erased and the reel rotating screen in the AT state is displayed.

  As described above, when the player performs a selection operation (in this case, an operation for selecting a character), the player operates the start lever which is an operation member controlled on the main control board M side and the sub control board. The display mode of the effect differs depending on the operation of the sub input button that is an operation member controlled on the S side. In other words, the player operates the start lever that is the operation member controlled on the main control board M side. In such a case, the determination notification image is not displayed, while the determination notification image is displayed when the sub input button that is an operation member controlled on the sub-control board S side is operated. The player is confused as to which of the sub-input button, which is the sub-side operation member that does not affect the game, and the start lever, which is the main-side operation member that affects the game results. It is possible to prevent the Ukoto. In addition, by executing an effect that is displayed only when the sub input button is pressed, the player can be motivated to press the sub input button, and a player who wants to enjoy the effect can use the sub input button. The operation can be enjoyed and the player who wants to proceed with the game can proceed with the game quickly by operating the start lever.

  Even when the bet button, which is the main side operation member that affects the game result, is operated, the same configuration as when the start lever is operated, so that the main side that affects the game result is affected. When the operating member is operated and the sub-side operating member that does not affect the game result are clearly distinguished by the difference in the production transition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. . Also, the music at the start of AT is the same when the operation member on the main side (start lever, bet button) is operated and when the operation member on the sub side (sub input button) is operated. It may be configured differently.

<< Second pattern >>
Next, FIG. 183 is a transition diagram in the case of determining by operating the start lever of the second pattern. First, in the game that has shifted to the AT state, the indication of “moon stage entry” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an indication that the AT is started (sometimes referred to as an AT start screen) (AT Freeze at the start may be performed). Thereafter, when all reels are stopped and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the operation member controlled by the main control board M is not operated for 5 seconds after all reels are stopped), the sub input is performed. When the button is operated, a customization screen (sometimes referred to as a menu screen) is displayed on the effect display device S40. During the display of the customization screen, any customization (for example, music selection, volume adjustment, character selection, light intensity adjustment, etc.) is selected by operating the cross key and the sub input button. Here, move the cursor to "Select music" by operating the cross key, and move to the music selection screen to select which music to select by selecting "Select music" by operating the sub input button In addition, the cursor is set on the music piece A. After that, when the player has operated the start lever in a situation where the music has not been determined and the specified number is bet (when the game start condition is satisfied), the music on which the cursor is positioned (here, , The music A) is determined, and the rotation of the reel related to the next game is started, and a screen during reel rotation in the AT state is displayed.

  Next, FIG. 184 is a transition diagram when it is determined by operating the sub input button of the second pattern. First, in the game that has shifted to the AT state, the indication of “moon stage entry” is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an indication that the AT is started (sometimes referred to as an AT start screen) (AT Freeze at the start may be performed). Thereafter, when all reels are stopped and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the operation member controlled by the main control board M is not operated for 5 seconds after all reels are stopped), the sub input is performed. When the button is operated, a customization screen (sometimes referred to as a menu screen) is displayed on the effect display device S40. During the display of the customization screen, any customization (for example, music selection, volume adjustment, character selection, light intensity adjustment, etc.) is selected by operating the cross key and the sub input button. Here, move the cursor to "Select music" by operating the cross key, and move to the music selection screen to select which music to select by selecting "Select music" by operating the sub input button In addition, the cursor is set on the music piece A. Thereafter, when the sub input button is operated again in the situation where the cursor is set to the music A, the music set to the cursor (here, the music A) is determined and “the music A is determined”. Is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a determination notification image. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the display of the decision notification image “determined as music A” is deleted, AT (moon stage) starts, and the reel is rotating in the AT state. The same screen will be displayed. In addition, when the music is determined by operating the sub input button or when the music is determined by operating the start lever, the determined music is the music on which the cursor is set, and the determination mode of the music is the same It has become.

  In this way, in the customization screen, similarly to FIG. 181 and FIG. 182, it is configured so that the display mode of the effect is different between when the player operates the start lever and when the sub input button is operated. The player is confused as to which of the sub-input button, which is the sub-side operation member that does not affect the result of the game, and the start lever, which is the main-side operation member, which affects the game result. Can be prevented. In addition, by executing an effect that is displayed only when the sub input button is pressed, the player can be motivated to press the sub input button, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  As described above, when an operation member (for example, a sub input button) controlled on the sub-control board S side is operated during execution of a customization screen (menu screen), character selection screen, button effect, etc. An effect (for example, a determination notification image) is displayed, and when an operation member (for example, a start lever) controlled on the main control board M side is operated, a specific effect (for example, a determination notification image) is not displayed. By configuring, it becomes easy to determine whether the player has operated an operation member controlled on the sub-control board S side or an operation member controlled on the main control board M side, and confuses the player A gaming machine that is not allowed to be configured can be configured. In the above description, when the start lever is operated as the operation member controlled on the main control board M side and the game start condition is satisfied, it is determined that the determination operation is performed (for example, the character is determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to determine that a determination operation has been performed (for example, a character has been determined) by operating various bet buttons such as a max bet button. . In such a configuration, since various bet buttons such as the max bet button are operation members controlled on the main control board M side, even if a determination operation is performed by operating various bet buttons such as the max bet button. The specific effect is not executed.

<<< Configuration related to back lamp production >>>
Next, the configuration related to the character selection screen applicable to this example will be described in detail below. In addition, it supplements that the structure of the production illustrated below is applicable to all the embodiments illustrated in this example.

  Next, FIG. 185 and FIG. 186 are diagrams showing a lighting pattern of the reel by the rotating backlight S30. First, “(a) when replay is established” will be described with reference to FIG. In the drawing, the effective line is one of the middle horizontal lines, that is, the “left reel middle stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel middle stage” is the effective line. In the figure, the effective line is one line of the middle horizontal line. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is the same as the lower right line as in the present embodiment, “upper left reel, middle middle reel, right reel. There is no problem as a “lower” line, and there is no problem even if the effective line is not one line. First, a symbol combination corresponding to a re-playing combination is stopped and displayed on a line that is not an active line (a line that falls to the right and is a "left reel upper stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel lower stage" line).

  It should be noted that the symbol on the reel corresponding to the re-playing role is a replay A symbol (the name of the symbol on the reel is the same as that of the present embodiment), which is a symbol in which the letter “R” is drawn in a circle. 7-9), the player will recognize that the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer has stopped and displayed by visually recognizing that the Replay A symbol has been stopped and displayed in a straight line. . In the same figure, in the game won for the re-playing role, the Replay A symbol will stop and display in a straight line on the lower right line that is not the effective line, but the active line is a straight line in the middle, The symbol that is stopped and displayed on the active line is “Black Seven Replay A Bell”. Should the player see the “Black Seven / Replay A / Bell” symbol combination on the active line, or should they see the symbol combination “Replay A / Replay A / Replay A” descending to the right? There is a risk of confusion. Actually, you can see either ("Black Seven Replay A Bell" is replay (replay), which shows the same meaning as the replay A symbol set, which is the visual symbol set). Even in the unlikely event that it is confused, it is preferable that notification is made in a unified notification mode so that it can be grasped that the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer has been stopped. Therefore, in the drawing, a back lamp effect is performed in which the backlight of the reel is lit in the order of left reel → middle reel → right reel (left → middle → right lighting pattern). Although the details will be described later, the rotating backlight S30 is configured to be lit and extinguished for each area corresponding to each symbol stop position of each reel, and more specifically, in the upper stage of the left reel. Corresponding area, area corresponding to the left reel middle stage, area corresponding to the lower left reel stage, area corresponding to the middle reel upper stage, area corresponding to the middle reel middle stage, area corresponding to the middle reel lower stage, corresponding to the upper right reel stage The nine areas of the area, the area corresponding to the middle stage of the right reel, and the area corresponding to the lower stage of the right reel are divided at least so as to be lit and extinguished (lighting control is possible).

  Note that the left → middle → right lighting pattern shown in the figure is a lighting pattern corresponding to a re-gamer, so that a player who is not used to a gaming machine (has not played a lot) has played a game. Therefore, even if the active line and the stop display combination (the combination of symbols of the winning combination) are unknown, it is easy for the player to grasp that the game is replayed by the lighting pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, “(b) When the bell is established” will be described. In FIG. 186, as in “(a) Replay establishment” in FIG. 185, the effective line is one middle horizontal line. First, a symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is stopped and displayed on a line that is not an effective line (a line that goes up to the right, and is a “left reel lower stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel upper stage” line).

  The symbol on the reel corresponding to the bell role is a bell symbol (the names of the symbols on the reel are the same as those in the present embodiment, so refer to FIGS. 7 to 9). It is recognized that the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is stopped and displayed by visually recognizing that the display is stopped in a straight line. In the figure, in the game elected as the bell role, the bell symbol will stop and display in a straight line on the upward line that is not the effective line, but the active line is a straight line in the middle, so the effective line The symbol that is stopped and displayed is “Replay B, Bell, Replay A”. At this time, the player is confused whether to see the symbol combination of “Replay B, Bell, and Replay A” on the active line, or to see the symbol combination of “Bell, Bell, and Bell” that descends to the right. There is a fear. Actually, you can see either ("Replay B / Bell / Replay A" is a bell, meaning the same as the visual symbol alignment) However, it is preferable that the notification is performed in a unified notification mode so that it can be grasped that the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the same figure, it is configured to execute a back lamp effect in which the backlight of the reel is lit so as to swirl counterclockwise.

  In addition, the lighting pattern swirling counterclockwise shown in the figure is a lighting pattern corresponding to the role of the bell, so that a player who is not familiar with the gaming machine is playing a game, and the active line or stop display Even if the combination (the symbol combination of the winning combination) is unknown, it is easy for the player to recognize that the combination is a bell by the lighting pattern.

  By configuring in this way, the player will not mistakenly recognize a winning combination (stop display combination) even if the same design may not be displayed on the active line in a unavoidable manner due to the design of the gaming machine. Can be configured.

  Next, FIG. 187 is an execution image of a back lamp effect applicable to this example. As described above, in the rotating type gaming machine according to the present example, the area corresponding to the upper left reel, the area corresponding to the middle left reel, the area corresponding to the lower left reel, the area corresponding to the middle upper reel, the middle The area corresponding to the middle stage of the reel, the area corresponding to the lower stage of the middle reel, the area corresponding to the upper stage of the right reel, the area corresponding to the middle stage of the right reel, and the area corresponding to the lower stage of the right reel are divided and turned on. In the figure, the area corresponding to the upper stage of the left reel = 1, the area corresponding to the middle stage of the left reel = 2, the area corresponding to the lower stage of the left reel = 3, and the middle reel Area corresponding to upper stage = 4, area corresponding to middle stage of middle reel = 5, area corresponding to lower stage of middle reel = 6, area corresponding to upper stage of right reel = 7, area corresponding to middle stage of right reel = 8, right reel under And it is described as an area = 9 corresponding to. The effective lines are “2”, “5”, and “8”.

  First, the details of the back lamp effect when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is stopped and displayed in the “bell stop display” in the upper part of FIG. Note that, during the reel rotation (during any reel rotation), the back lamp is configured so that all areas from “1” to “9” are lit. Hereinafter, the description will be made using the table shown in the upper left of the figure. In this table, time elapses from left to right.

(1) First, a third stop operation (final stop operation) is executed in a situation where the reel is rotating and the back lamps of all the areas “1” to “9” are lit. The symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed.
(2) Back lamp lighting modes are “1: ON”, “2: ON”, “3: OFF”, “4: ON”, “5: ON”, “6: OFF”, “7: ON” ”,“ 8: ON ”, and“ 9: OFF ”.
(3) Back lamp lighting modes are “1: ON”, “2: ON”, “3: ON”, “4: ON”, “5: ON”, “6: ON”, “7: OFF” "," 8: OFF ", and" 9: OFF ".
(4) Back lamp lighting modes are “1: off”, “2: on”, “3: on”, “4: off”, “5: on”, “6: on”, “7: off” ”,“ 8: lit ”,“ 9: lit ”.
(5) Back lamp lighting modes are “1: OFF”, “2: OFF”, “3: ON”, “4: ON”, “5: ON”, “6: ON”, “7: ON” ”,“ 8: lit ”,“ 9: lit ”.
(6) Back lamp lighting modes are “1: ON”, “2: OFF”, “3: ON”, “4: ON”, “5: OFF”, “6: ON”, “7: ON” ”,“ 8: lit ”,“ 9: lit ”.
(7) Back lamp lighting modes are “1: ON”, “2: ON”, “3: ON”, “4: ON”, “5: OFF”, “6: ON”, “7: ON” ”,“ 8: lit ”,“ 9: lit ”.
(8) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: lighting”, “2: lighting”, “3: lighting”, “4: lighting”, “5: lighting”, “6: lighting”, “7: lighting” ”,“ 8: lit ”,“ 9: lit ”.

  As described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role (exemplifying the push order bell role) is stopped and displayed, the backlight of the reel is turned on so as to swirl counterclockwise as a back lamp effect. It is configured to perform a back lamp effect. The back lamp effect may be executed only when the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell combination is stopped and displayed, and the back lamp effect is also executed when the common bell is won. May be. In addition, even when the push order bell combination is selected, the above-mentioned back-ramp effect is executed only when the symbol combination with the maximum payout number is stopped, and when the symbol combination with the payout number less than the maximum payout number is stopped and displayed. The back lamp effect may not be executed, or the back lamp effect may be executed in an effect mode different from the above.

  Next, the upper right part of the figure is an example of a symbol combination corresponding to a bell combination (push order bell combination). As shown in (a), when “bell, bell, bell” stops on the effective line, and as shown in (b), it is a line different from the effective line, and the symbol stop position on the effective line When “Bell, Bell, Bell” stops on a line that rises to the right (part of the middle reel is the symbol stop position where the middle reel overlaps), as shown in (c), the effective line is A case where “bell, bell, bell” stops on a line in the lower straight line which is a different line and does not overlap with the symbol stop position on the effective line can be exemplified. In this way, by visually observing that the player has stopped and displayed in a straight line, the bell symbols that will be recognized that the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role has been stopped and displayed are stopped on the active line. Although it is configured to have only one (only a part) stop display and one stop display, the same back lamp effect corresponding to the bell role is executed in any stop display. As a result, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable. In addition, even when no bell symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line, the symbol stop position on the active line is set at the time of execution of the back lamp effect corresponding to the bell role so that the player is not mistaken. The corresponding area ("2", "5", and "8" areas in the figure) is always turned off once ("lighting-> lighting-> lighting"). It is configured to clearly notify the original symbol combination that is stopped and displayed above.

  Next, the details of the back lamp effect when the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed in the “replay stop display” in the lower part of FIG. Note that, during the reel rotation (during any reel rotation), the back lamp is configured so that all areas from “1” to “9” are lit. Hereinafter, description will be made using the table shown in the lower left of the figure. In this table, time elapses from left to right.

(1) First, a third stop operation (final stop operation) is executed in a situation where the reel is rotating and the back lamps of all the areas “1” to “9” are lit. The symbol combination corresponding to the game combination is stopped and displayed.
(2) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: lit”, “2: lit”, “3: lit”, “4: lit”, “5: lit”, “6: lit”, “7: lit” ”,“ 8: lit ”,“ 9: lit ”.
(3) Back lamp lighting modes are “1: off”, “2: off”, “3: off”, “4: on”, “5: on”, “6: on”, “7: on” ”,“ 8: lit ”,“ 9: lit ”.
(4) Back lamp lighting modes are “1: OFF”, “2: OFF”, “3: OFF”, “4: ON”, “5: ON”, “6: ON”, “7: ON” ”,“ 8: lit ”,“ 9: lit ”.
(5) Back lamp lighting modes are “1: ON”, “2: ON”, “3: ON”, “4: OFF”, “5: OFF”, “6: OFF”, “7: ON” ”,“ 8: lit ”,“ 9: lit ”.
(6) Back lamp lighting modes are “1: ON”, “2: ON”, “3: ON”, “4: OFF”, “5: OFF”, “6: OFF”, “7: ON” ”,“ 8: lit ”,“ 9: lit ”.
(7) Back lamp lighting modes are “1: ON”, “2: ON”, “3: ON”, “4: ON”, “5: ON”, “6: ON”, “7: OFF” "," 8: OFF ", and" 9: OFF ".
(8) The lighting mode of the back lamp is “1: ON”, “2: ON”, “3: ON”, “4: ON”, “5: ON”, “6: ON”, “7: OFF” "," 8: OFF ", and" 9: OFF ".

  As described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game player is stopped and displayed, the back lamp effect is performed in which the backlight of the reel is lit from the left to the right as the back lamp effect. The back lamp effect may be executed only when the symbol combinations corresponding to some of the re-game players are stopped, or the symbol combinations corresponding to all of the re-game players are stopped and displayed. The back lamp effect may be executed only in such a case.

  Next, the lower right of the figure is an example of a symbol combination corresponding to a re-game player. As shown in (a), when “Replay A, Replay A, Replay A” stops on the active line, and as shown in (b), the active line is a line different from the active line and on the active line. When “Replay A, Replay B, Replay A” stops on a line that rises to the right that partially overlaps the symbol stop position (the symbol stop position overlaps the middle reel middle stage), as shown in (c). In addition, the case where “Replay A, Replay B, Replay B” stops on a line in the lower straight line that is different from the active line and does not overlap with the symbol stop position on the active line can be exemplified. . In this way, the replay A or the replay B is stopped and displayed in a straight line as a symbol that recognizes that the symbol combination corresponding to the re-player is stopped and displayed by visually confirming that the player has stopped and displayed in a straight line. Just do it. However, this is not the case when the above-mentioned replay-B or the like is won. In this way, the replay A symbol and the replay B symbol that are recognized as having stopped and displayed the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-gamer by visually confirming that the player has stopped and displayed in a straight line are all three on the active line. It is configured to have a case of displaying a stop, a case of displaying only one part (only a part), and a case of not displaying one stop. By executing the back lamp effect, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable. In addition, when the replay A symbol and the replay B symbol are not stopped and displayed on the active line, the active line is used at the time of executing the back lamp effect corresponding to the re-gamer so that the player is not mistaken. The area corresponding to the upper symbol stop position (in the figure, areas “2”, “5”, and “8”) are always turned off once (“lighting → lighting → lighting”). By doing so, the original symbol combination stopped and displayed on the active line is clearly notified. Note that the Replay A design and the Replay B design are similar in shape and design, and even if the same design stops in a straight line, such as “Replay A / Replay A / Replay A”, the player can Even if similar symbols are stopped in a straight line, such as “Replay A / Replay A”, it is configured so that it can be recognized that the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed. The straight line may be an effective line or a straight line different from the effective line.

  Even if the combination of symbols that is different from the normal rotation is apparently stopped due to the above-mentioned reel rotation failure, the back lamp effect corresponding to the winning combination or re-playing combination that is stopped and displayed as internal processing is provided. By executing, the player can recognize which symbol combination corresponding to which combination has been stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the lighting mode of the back lamp is different between the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B. The order of the region corresponding to the symbol stop position where the back lamp flashes (turns off) between the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B, and the flashing time. (Lighting off time) or when the combination is different, the lighting mode may be different, and the lighting mode A and the lighting mode B are back even if the symbol stop position where the back lamp blinks (turns off) is the same. If the speed at which the lamp blinks is different, the lighting mode may be different.

  Moreover, in the above, the case where the back lamp effect is executed after the symbol combination stop display after the third stop is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the back lamp effect is executed after the first stop or the second stop. You may comprise. As a specific example, when the bell symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line (stop position of “2”, “5”, “8”) in FIG. 187, “1” is displayed when the left reel is stopped as the first stop. The back lamps corresponding to the areas "3" and "3" are turned off, and then the back lamps corresponding to the areas "4" and "6" are turned off when the middle reel is stopped as the second stop. When the right reel is stopped as the third stop, the back lamp effect after the bell stop display illustrated in FIG. 187 is executed immediately after the back lamp corresponding to the areas “7” and “9” is turned off. It may be configured. In such a configuration, the back lamp of the area corresponding to the active line is not turned off in the first stop operation and the second stop operation, but the area corresponding to the active line in the third stop operation (after all reels are stopped). The back lamp can be configured to be extinguished, and when one of the reels is rotating, in other words, when the player needs to perform a stop operation in the game being executed, the visibility of the active line is reduced. The back lamp in the area corresponding to the active line is turned on so that it does not interfere. After all reels are stopped, it is not necessary for the engineer to perform a stop operation in the game. By performing the back lamp effect using all the areas where the lamp can blink, the effect of the back lamp effect can be enhanced.

  Also, when winning the bell role, the bell symbols may be aligned on a straight line different from the active line, and when replaying the winning role, the replay symbols may be aligned on a straight line different from the active line. By configuring as such, the degree of freedom of the arrangement of symbols on the reel is increased, and a gaming machine with higher interest can be created.

  In addition, the decorative lamp unit described above may be configured to execute a frame lamp effect that lights (flashes) at the time of a bell winning or replay stop display. It is preferable that the frame lamp effect is executed in a corresponding effect mode. In other words, the effect mode of the frame lamp effect when the symbol combination corresponding to the push order bell is stopped and the effect mode of the frame lamp effect when the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying player is stopped and displayed are different. Is preferred.

<<< Action when the reels are stopped in the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation >>>
Next, the action when the reels are stopped in the pushing order different from the pushing order navigation applicable to this example will be described in detail below. In addition, it supplements that the effect | action illustrated below is applicable to all embodiment illustrated in this example.

  First, FIG. 188 and FIG. 189 are image diagrams when a push navigation occurs during AT. First, “(a) success in pushing order (during continuous production: warp production)” will be described. Here, it is the “AT state” that is a gaming state in which push order navigation can be performed, and the continuous effect (warp effect) that is executed over a plurality of games is being executed, and the push order As a result of winning the bell, a push order navigation of “left → right → middle” has occurred.

  First, the left stop button corresponding to the first stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the first stop of the push order navigation (display of “1”) is deleted. The left reel stops. Next, the right stop button corresponding to the second stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the second stop of the push order navigation (display of “2”) is deleted. The right reel stops. Next, the middle stop button corresponding to the third stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the third stop of the push order navigation (display of “3”) is deleted. The middle reel stops. Since the stop button was operated in the correct pressing order, eleven game medals with the largest payout number are awarded to the player when the pressing order is won.

  Next, “(b) Push order failure (during continuous production: warp production)” will be described. Here, it is the “AT state” that is a gaming state in which push order navigation can be performed, and the continuous effect (warp effect) that is executed over a plurality of games is being executed, and the push order As a result of winning the bell, a push order navigation of “left → right → middle” has occurred.

  First, the left stop button corresponding to the first stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the first stop of the push order navigation (display of “1”) is deleted. The left reel stops. Next, not the right stop button corresponding to the second stop in the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation but the middle stop button is operated, and the display corresponding to the third stop in the push order navigation (“3”). Is displayed and the middle reel stops. After that, since the stop operation was not performed in the correct pressing order, the display of the pressing order navigation is deleted. Thereafter, as the third stop, the right stop button is operated, and the right reel stops. Since the stop button was not operated in the correct pressing order, one game medal with a payout number smaller than 11 with the highest payout number is awarded to the player when the pressing order is won.

  As described above, when the push order navigation is executed during the continuous production, the background production changes even when the reels are stopped in the correct push order or when the reels are stopped in the incorrect push order. It is configured so that there is nothing. Although not shown in the figure, as a notification of the result of the continuous production, a notification (suggestion) that the continuous production has failed in the final game of the continuous production (for example, that the number of AT games has not been won). The background effect is darkened at any timing in the final game (for example, after the third stop operation). By configuring in this way, even if the push order navigation is executed during the execution of the continuous effect, and the player stops the reel by mistakenly pressing the stop button in the wrong order, the background effect By not darkening the player, the player can continue to pay attention to the continuous performance without misunderstanding that the result of the continuous performance fails even though the result of the continuous performance is not notified.

  Next, “(c) Push order success (during discontinuous production)” will be described. Here, it is an “AT state” that is a gaming state in which push order navigation can be performed, and the continuous effect (warp effect) that is executed over a plurality of games is not executed, and the push is performed. As a result of winning the order bell, push order navigation of “Left → Right → Middle” has occurred.

  First, the left stop button corresponding to the first stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the first stop of the push order navigation (display of “1”) is deleted. The left reel stops. Next, the right stop button corresponding to the second stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the second stop of the push order navigation (display of “2”) is deleted. The right reel stops. Next, the middle stop button corresponding to the third stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the third stop of the push order navigation (display of “3”) is deleted. The middle reel stops. Since the stop button was operated in the correct pressing order, eleven game medals with the largest payout number are awarded to the player when the pressing order is won. That is, when the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, there is a difference in the background effect between the continuous effect and the non-continuous effect during the AT, but other effect transitions (whether the background effect changes, etc.) ) Is the same.

  Next, “(d) Push order failure (during discontinuous production)” will be described. Here, it is an “AT state” that is a gaming state in which push order navigation can be performed, and the continuous effect (warp effect) that is executed over a plurality of games is not executed, and the push is performed. As a result of winning the order bell, a push order navigation of “left → right → middle” has occurred.

  First, the left stop button corresponding to the first stop of the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation is operated, and the display corresponding to the first stop of the push order navigation (display of “1”) is deleted. The left reel stops. Next, not the right stop button corresponding to the second stop in the correct push order displayed in the push order navigation but the middle stop button is operated, and the display corresponding to the third stop in the push order navigation (“3”). Is displayed and the middle reel stops. After that, since the stop operation was not performed in the correct pressing order, the display of the pressing order navigation is erased and the background effect is darkened. Thereafter, as the third stop, the right stop button is operated, and the right reel stops. Since the stop button was not operated in the correct pressing order, one game medal with a payout number smaller than 11 with the highest payout number is awarded to the player when the pressing order is won. It should be noted that even when reels different from the correct pressing order are stopped, the display of the pressing order navigation may be continuously displayed without being erased. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the navigation display in the push order is darkened together with the background effect.

  In this way, in a situation where the continuous effect is not executed, the player is not misidentified even if the background effect is dimmed when the reel is stopped in the pressing order different from the correct answer. By accurately informing that there has been a disadvantageous operation, the player plays the game with more care so as not to make a mistake in the pushing order in the game in which the next pushing order navigation is executed. As a result, the disadvantage of the player can be prevented.

In this example, when the reels are stopped in the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation during the continuous production (when the pressing order is incorrect), the screen does not darken (the screen brightness decreases). On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation during the non-execution of the continuous production (when the pressing order is incorrect), the screen is darkened (screen Brightness is reduced, visibility is reduced), but is not limited to this,
(1) When the reels are stopped in the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation during continuous performance (when the pressing order is incorrect), the reels are stopped in the correct pressing order (stop button) When the reels are stopped in the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation during the non-execution of the continuous effect (for example, the pressing order is not correct). When the answer is correct), an effect different from the case where the reels are stopped in the order of pressing the correct answer (when the stop button is operated) is executed (for example, an effect where the enemy character cuts off),
(2) When the reels are stopped in the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation during execution of the continuous effects (when the pressing order is incorrect), a specific effect sound is not output, but the continuous effects are not displayed. When the reels are stopped in the push order different from the push order navigation during execution (when the push order is incorrect), a specific effect sound (for example, “awawawa” is output) is output.
(3) When the reels are stopped in the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation during execution of the continuous effects (when the pressing order is incorrect), a specific effect (for example, an effect in which the screen is darkened) is given. When a specific performance sound (for example, “awawawa” is output) is not executed and the reels are stopped in a pressing order different from the pressing order navigation during execution of the continuous presentation (the pressing order is incorrect) In the case), a specific effect is executed and a specific effect sound is output.
You may comprise as mentioned above.

<<<< Volume and BGM Tempo >>>>
Next, an example of the configuration of the volume output from the speaker and the BGM tempo applicable to this example will be described in detail below. In addition, it supplements that the structure illustrated below is applicable to all embodiment illustrated in this example.

  First, FIG. 190 is a diagram showing the volume of the sound output from the speaker and the BGM tempo. During non-AT (a state related to AT that does not perform push order navigation, for example, “low probability state”), as stay stages, there are four types of stay stages: a grassy stage, a desert stage, a wilderness stage, and a volcanic stage. (A state related to an AT capable of performing push-order navigation, for example, “AT state”) includes two types of stay stages, a lunar stage and a Saturn stage, as stay stages. In addition, although the case where only one type of BGM is output in one stay stage is illustrated in the same figure, the present invention is not limited to this, and the contents of the effects that are executed even in one stay stage The BGM output based on the above may be determined from a plurality of types of selection candidates. In such a configuration, the average tempo of BGM in one stay stage may be calculated and compared for each gaming state. For example, (1) In the grassy stage, the first BGM that is tempo 100 and When the second BGM having the tempo 60 can be output, the average tempo is compared for each gaming state assuming that the average tempo is 80, that is, output, as (100 + 60) / 2 = 80. The average tempo is calculated by dividing the total tempo value by the number of BGM types, and the average tempo is compared for each gaming state. (2) In the grassland stage, the first BGM, which is tempo 100, and tempo 60 When a certain second BGM can be output and the ratio of the output period of the output BGM is “first BGM: second BGM = 2: 1”, (100 × 2 + 60) ) ÷ 3≈86.6, the average tempo is compared for each gaming state on the assumption that the average tempo is 86.6, that is, the average tempo in consideration of the ratio of the output period of the output BGM. And an average tempo may be compared for each gaming state. The ratio of the output period of BGM that is output may be the ratio of the average time that BGM is output in one stay stage, or the selection ratio of BGM that is output in one game in one stay stage It is good. Further, when there is a period (time) in which BGM is not output, an average tempo of a period in which BGM is output in one stay stage may be calculated and compared for each gaming state. The unit of tempo shown in the figure is not a problem as long as it is the same unit, for example, BPM.

  The volume switch is an operation member that can be operated by opening the front door and is controlled on the side of the sub-control board S that can be operated only by an administrator. The volume of the sound (sometimes referred to as a master volume) can be adjusted, and the volume level can be adjusted to three levels of “large”, “medium”, and “small”. Note that the three stages are merely examples, and the volume may be adjusted in more detail using a knob that can be rotated. Further, by operating a sub input button or a cross key that is an operation member controlled on the side of the sub control board S that can be operated by the player, the volume of the sound output from the speaker can be adjusted. The level can be adjusted to five levels of “level 1”, “level 2”, “level 3”, “level 4”, “level 5” (the volume may be referred to as a sub input button volume). ). Note that the three stages are merely examples, and the volume may be adjusted in more detail. Note that the spinning machine according to the present example is configured such that the volume output from the speaker is determined by the combination of the volume setting (stage) of the volume switch and the volume setting (stage) of the sub input button volume. ing.

  In FIG. 190, the BGM tempo (average tempo) at the four types of non-AT stay stages is grassland stage: tempo 100, desert stage: tempo 90, wilderness stage: tempo 95, volcano stage: tempo 100, respectively. It has become. In addition, the two types of stay stages in the AT are the moon stage: tempo 110 and the Saturn stage: tempo 120, respectively.

  Also, the four stay stages during non-AT have no difference in volume depending on the combination of the sub input button volume and the volume switch depending on the stay stage. When the volume switch is large, the level is 1:80 (unit: dB). , Level 2:82, Level 3:85, Level 4:90, Level 5:90, Level 1:75, Level 2:78, Level 3:80, Level 4:85, Level 5 when the volume switch is in the middle When the volume switch is small, the level is 1: 1, the level is 2:68, the level is 3:70, the level is 4:72, and the level is 5:75. In addition, the two types of stay stages in the AT have no difference in volume depending on the combination of the sub input button volume and the volume switch depending on the stay stage. When the volume switch is large, level 1:85, level 2:89, Level 3: 92, Level 4: 92, Level 5: 92, Volume switch is in the middle, Level 1: 80, Level 2: 85, Level 3: 90, Level 4: 90, Level 5: 90, Volume switch When small, they are level 1: 1, level 2:75, level 3:78, level 4:82, level 5:85.

  When an error occurs, an error sound of tempo 80 (for example, “the door is open”, “please call the store clerk”, etc.) is output. The volume level is level 1 to 5:95 when the volume switch is large, level 1 to 5:90 when the volume switch is medium, and level 1 to 5:78 when the volume switch is small. .

  Here, comparing the stay stage in non-AT and the stay stage in AT, the tempo of BGM in the stay stage in AT is (110 + 120) ÷ 2 = 115, and in the stay stage in non-AT The BGM tempo is (100 + 90 + 95 + 100) ÷ 4 = 96.25, and the BGM tempo in the stay stage during the AT is relatively faster than the BGM tempo during the stay stage during the non-AT. .

  Furthermore, at the same volume switch level (large, medium, small) and the same volume level (levels 1 to 5), the BGM volume in the stay stage during AT is relative to the BGM volume in the stay stage during non-AT. The volume of BGM in the entire AT is relatively larger than the volume of BGM in the whole non-AT. By configuring the volume so that the volume is relatively high and the tempo is relatively faster during non-AT than during AT, the feeling of exhilaration that increases the number of balls during AT, which is a favorable period for the player In addition, when an error occurs, an error sound is output at a slower tempo (tempo 80) than during AT and non-AT. However, the volume of the error sound is configured to be the same or larger during AT and non-AT when the same volume switch is set, so that the store clerk or player of the game store has an error. Will be clearly recognized.

  Although the BGM tempo and sound volume during AT, non-AT, and error are exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide a difference in LED lighting mode. For example, when comparing between AT and non-AT, it may be configured such that the switching interval of the LED lighting mode becomes shorter (the LED blinks flashingly) during AT, However, even if the number of emission colors at one timing is likely to increase, it is possible to easily feel the exhilaration feeling that the number of balls is increased during AT, which is a period advantageous to the player.

  In FIG. 190, only one type of error sound is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the form and volume of the error sound may be different depending on the type of error. In such a case, an error (such as a non-recoverable error, which has a great influence on the game result (a highly important error, for example, a display determination error) is less important (for example, a medal). It is preferable that the sound volume be relatively louder than (empty error).

(Sixth embodiment)
In the above-described embodiments up to the fifth embodiment, a configuration in which a game having a common game performance can be executed without depending on the prescribed number is exemplified. However, in the sixth embodiment, a game with two and three prescribed numbers The structure which can perform the game from which sex differs is shown. A configuration different from the fifth embodiment is referred to as a sixth embodiment, and differences from the embodiments up to the fifth embodiment are mainly described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 191 is a list of basic specifications of the swivel type gaming machine in the sixth embodiment. In the spinning type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, the prescribed number (the number of game medals at which one game can be executed) is 3 or 2, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is any. In addition, the effective line for which the winning determination is made is one line of “upper left reel M51, middle middle M52, lower right M53”. The maximum payout number is 11 and the minimum payout number is 1 (correspondence between the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). Further, the priority winning order (withdrawing priority order) is “re-playing role → small role (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus”. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and the number of frames of each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of the effective line is changed (for example, 5 lines of 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to a line and changed to one line of the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. In addition, as a pull-in control (sometimes referred to as stop control) when a push order small role that gives different profits to the player according to the push order is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, payout Controls to stop and display combinations of symbols with a relatively large number of symbols, and the number of payouts will be relatively small when the wrong answer is pressed in a different order from the correct answer and the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing. The combination is controlled so as to be able to stop display (which is realized by using the number priority control or the number priority control for each reel. Details of the number priority control and the number priority control will be described later).

  Next, FIG. 192 is a list of reel arrangements of the spinning-reel type gaming machine in the sixth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames (0 to 19), and the symbols are “Black Seven”, “White Seven”, “ There are 10 types: “Sheep”, “Blank”, “Bell”, “Replay A”, “Replay B”, “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B”, and “Cherry”. Here, “blank” is a symbol included in the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute the winning combination, but a symbol that constitutes the winning combination including “blank” As a combination, for example, “watermelon B / replay A / blank” is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type of design is increased / decreased / changed.

  Next, FIGS. 193 to 195 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device. As will be described later, according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, Any one of the symbol combinations is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the one line described above). In addition, even if the same type of symbols is not available on the active line, the same symbols are easily arranged in a line on the lines other than the active line when viewed from the player. It is configured so that three watermelon symbols are aligned on one line on the reel, such as aligned on a horizontal line). Further, in the sixth embodiment, a combination of symbols that becomes a first type BB combination (a so-called first type special combination item, which is sometimes referred to as a BB combination hereinafter). 1 type BB-A (continuous operation of RB-A, finished with payout exceeding 100 sheets) and 1 type BB-B (continuous operation of RB-B, 100 sheets) (Black Seven, Black Seven, Black Seven). In the sixth embodiment, when the first type BB combination wins and the BB is executed (the combination is activated), during the execution of the BB, in all the games in the BB, 1 Two lottery tables are referred to, and a winning combination (small role) other than an accessory is configured to be capable of lottery (this is a method in which the table to be referred to in the case of lottery during one BB is not switched, Hereinafter, it may be called an all-JACIN type). Note that the format of the first type BB combination is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the table referred to in the combination lottery can be switched during the execution of one BB. In addition, you may comprise so that it may have the symbol combination from which RB-A will act | operate, and the symbol combination from which RB-B will act | operate.

  In addition, when a push order bell, which is a condition device of “winning-A1” to “winning-A6”, which will be described later, is won, the reels are stopped in order of pushing most advantageous to the player, and the numbers 13-19 When the combination of symbols “Wind 01” to “Win 03” corresponding to is stopped and 11 game medals are paid out, the reels are stopped in a pressing order different from the pressing order most advantageous to the player. , Symbol combinations corresponding to “No. 08” to “No. 11” corresponding to No. 31 to No. 48 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In the figure, “-” indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, “bell-bell” corresponding to No. 15 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed, 11 game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line of the middle reel M52.

  Next, FIG. 196 is a list of condition devices in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, re-game-A (winning number 1) is provided as a re-gamer, and the stop display is performed according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. It is comprised so that a re-game player may differ. Here, in the sixth embodiment, as illustrated in the item of “conditional device breakdown” which is the rightmost column, according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Multiple types of symbol combinations (names) can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combinations (names) that have the same winning number among the multiple types of symbol combinations (names) are grouped together from the right. This is illustrated by the item “conditional device” in the column. Specifically, for example, in the “re-game-A” that is a condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, “re-game” is selected according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three symbol combinations (names) of “01”, “replay 02”, and “replay 03” can be stopped and displayed. “Replay 01” and the like are names of symbol combinations, and there are a plurality of symbol combinations that can be “replay 01”. In addition, a name such as “replay 01” or a condition device such as “replay-A” may be referred to as a re-game player, and a name such as “winning 01” or a condition device such as “winning-A1” may be reduced. A condition device such as “1 type BB-A” may be referred to as a BB combination.

  Next, in the “role” item, the role of the “condition device” (or the symbol combination that can be stopped) is illustrated, and “normal replay” corresponding to the winning number 1 is illustrated. Is a condition device related to a replay in which a symbol combination related to a regame player whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed regardless of the pressing order of the stop button.

  Further, “push order bell 123” to “push order bell 321” corresponding to the winning numbers 2 to 7 are condition devices that may have different winning combinations depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected. For example, “left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3”, and in the case of “123”, “left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53” is stopped in the pressing order. For example, in the case of “winning A-1” (winning number 2), “123” = “left → middle → right” is stopped in the order (correct answer in the pressing order), which is the maximum number obtained. The symbol combination of “winning 01” from which eleven game medals can be acquired is stopped and displayed. Note that “123” in the “push order bell 123” indicates the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of sheets obtained for the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in the pressing order other than the pressing order in which the maximum number of acquired sheets can be acquired, that is, if the correct answer cannot be made in the pressing order, one sheet is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as “AT in progress state”, the push order of the re-game player and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states with different profit margins of the player not navigating the pushing order to the states relating to AT. The state related to AT will be described later.

  In addition, the “common bell” corresponding to the winning number 8 is a condition device that can acquire 6 game medals even if any of the winning prizes 04 to 07 stops, that is, a maximum profit regardless of the pushing order. Yes, it may be called a push order unquestioned bell. “Watermelon A” corresponding to the winning number 10 is configured such that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be arranged in parallel lines, for example, winning number 52 in FIG. No. 14 has three watermelons A or B at the middle of each reel. In addition, “Watermelon B” corresponding to the winning number 11 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily arranged in an oblique line. For example, the 58th prize in FIG. In the case of No. 16, three watermelons are aligned obliquely downward, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53.

  Next, in the item of “bonus winning information”, numerical values from 0 to 2 are assigned for each winning number. In the sixth embodiment, a winning number that does not include a bonus (BB role) has a bonus winning information of 0, and a winning number that includes 1 type BB-A as a winning number that includes a bonus (BB role) (12 ) Bonus winning information of 1, and the bonus winning information of winning number (13) including 1 type BB-B is 2. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which BB is established and which BB combination is won. Details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item of “winning / replay winning information”, numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned for each winning number. In the sixth embodiment, a winning number that does not include a re-playing role and a small role (winning number 0 corresponding to lose and winning numbers 12 and 13 corresponding to bonus) is set to 0 for winning / replaying winning information, 1 to 11 winning / replay winning information is assigned to each condition device for winning numbers including a small role or a replaying role. By storing the winning / replay winning information by the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to which small role or replaying role has been won. Details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item “production group number”, numerical values from 0 to 6 are assigned for each winning number. By transmitting the production group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the production executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. Details of the production group number will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 197 shows a lottery probability (sometimes referred to as a winning rate) in which winning numbers and bonuses (also referred to as BB and BB roles) relating to the small role and replaying role in the sixth embodiment are determined by the role lottery means. It is a list showing. In the figure, the lottery probability of the winning number is illustrated. FIG. 197 shows a case where the set value is 1, the upper part of FIG. 197 shows the lottery probability when the specified number is three, and the lower part of FIG. 197 shows the lottery probability when the prescribed number is two.

  First, the lottery probability when the specified number is 3 shown in the upper part of FIG. 197 will be described in detail. In the sixth embodiment, the lottery probability in “RT1” excluding the condition device related to BB and the lottery probability in “RT2” are configured to be the same. Note that “RT1” is configured not to win the first type BB-A.

  Next, the lottery probability in the “1 type BB-A, B in operation” which is the RT state during BB operation (BB according to the sixth embodiment is an all JACIN type) will be described in detail. In the sixth embodiment, during the BB operation, the “common bell” with the winning number 8 is configured to win or lose.

  Next, the lottery probability at the time of the prescribed number 2 shown in the lower part of FIG. 197 will be described in detail. In the sixth embodiment, the lottery probability in “RT1” and the lottery probability in “RT2” excluding the conditional device related to BB are configured to be the same as in the case of the specified number of three. In “RT1”, only re-game-A, winning-B and 1 type BB-A are selected, and in “RT2”, only re-playing-A and winning-B are selected. It is configured.

  Next, FIGS. 198 to 219 are flowcharts showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the sixth embodiment.

  The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (illustrated by rectangles), judgments (illustrated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start / end / return, etc. (illustrated by rounded rectangles). ing. Moreover, when the details are illustrated in another flowchart among the processing steps, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are also developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraudulent actions is prevented from being executed.

  First, FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing that is executed for the first time by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M after turning on the power of the rotating game machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, after turning on the power of the revolving game machine P in step 1000, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of timer interrupt in step 1002 (here, timer interrupt is started). Instead, only the type of timer interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, a flowchart relating to processing at the time of timer interrupt described later is executed periodically). Next, in step 1004, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area, power-off / power-off recovery) To check whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held), and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

  In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completion flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). Whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer stored in the process at power-off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M reads the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off process completion flag and returns to the process at the time of power-off according to the returned stack pointer.

  If NO in step 1016, in step 1024, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If NO in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). To set). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If NO in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step The check result at 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a storage area for storing the RAM initialization value (setting value data) and a storage area for storing bonus carry-over information. The predetermined range to be excluded is determined and set (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to Step 1034. Here, the bonus carry-over information is information relating to the winning bonus, and is configured not to initialize the winning bonus information even if the setting is changed. Here, in the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, a player plays a game with three bets on “RT2” in the type 1 BB (the three-time betting may be referred to as three bets). (Same configuration in the seventh embodiment, details will be described later in the seventh embodiment). By configuring in this way, the manager of the game hall (or the manufacturer of the gaming machine before shipment from the factory) may bet two cards at “RT1” (the two-time bet when the prescribed number is two). ), The game can be shifted to “RT2” by not displaying and stopping the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB-A in the game won for Type 1 BB-A. In this example, by executing the processing of step 1030 (sixth), the setting change is executed after the game hall manager (or the manufacturer of the gaming machine before factory shipment) shifts to “RT2”. Even so, “RT2” remains, and the game can be operated at an arbitrary setting value. In order to make it easier for the game hall manager to shift to “RT2”, when “1st type BB-A” is won in “RT1”, the entire effect display device S40 is displayed in white, and the frame lamp is white. It is preferable to make it easy to recognize that one type BB-A has been won, such as lighting. In a game won for Type 1 BB-A, if the left reel Nos. 4 to 16 are stopped at the lower timing as the first stop, the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB-A is not stopped and displayed. “RT2” will be entered.

  Further, the range that is not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area that stores the set value (set value data), but the total cumulative number of “advantageous sections” and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous) (Section + Normal Section) As a result of calculating the number of games, the stay ratio of the “favorable section”, and the like are also not included in the initialization range of the RAM. By configuring in this way, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the “favorable section” in the game (advantageous section ratio). The advantageous section ratio calculation process is configured to calculate at the timing when the unit game ends. The advantageous section ratio is displayed when the gaming machine is turned on (for example, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at intervals of 5 seconds in the order of “advantageous section ratio → continuous character ratio per 6000 games → characteristic ratio per 6000 games → cumulative continuous character ratio → cumulative character ratio”. Is displayed. The continuous character ratio is “the number of payouts when the RB is in operation / the total number of payouts”. / Total number of payouts ”. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1028, in step 1032 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM as a specific range including a storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM. Set (for example, set in the register area), and go to Step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

  Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area or the like) mounted on the main control board M is not a value at which a special game is executed. (In order to prevent a special game from being erroneously executed when a process for determining whether or not to execute a special game is executed due to noise or fraud immediately after the program processing is started). Although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured, and the byte storing information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to configure to store only the information related to the random number (not to store other information such as various timer values) (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise etc. To prevent rewriting of information related to random numbers).

  Next, FIG. 199 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 198, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initialized with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting value (setting value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed from 1 to 6, initialization of the RAM is executed, and when the set value becomes “0”, it is necessary to return to “1”. Therefore, in this example, the normal range of the setting value (setting value data) is managed as 0 to 5, thereby correcting the setting value (setting value data) after executing the initialization of the RAM (step 1106 and The processing in step 1108) can be eliminated, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = a value that is most disadvantageous for the player) in the setting value (setting value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the number-of-payout display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, “88” for lighting all the segments). Then, a setting value is displayed on a setting display LED (not shown) (the display relating to the setting value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) held in the RAM), and Step 1112 Migrate to As described above, the number-of-payout display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure occurs in a part of a 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be lit), an incorrect information can be notified when the push order is notified. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, it is possible to confirm whether or not 7 segments have failed by causing the payout number display device D270 to turn on all the “7” segments during operation of the setting change device. Providing profits can be prevented. Further, as a configuration relating to the display of the set value (set value data), a RAM for setting value display that stores data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value is stored. It may be configured to have an area and display the set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the processing of step 1110, processing for transmitting a command indicating that the mode is changed to the setting change mode is executed to the sub-control board S side.

  Next, in step 1112, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current setting value (setting value data) (when the added setting value (setting value data) exceeds 5) In this case, the set value (set value data) is 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. Note that if the result of Step 1112 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processing in steps 1112 to 1116 is looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process in step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, if Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and the setting display LED (not shown) The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating the end of the setting change mode to the sub-control board S is executed.

  Next, FIG. 200 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing relating to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 198 (and called in other flowcharts). First, in step 1302, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits interruption (hereinafter, a flowchart relating to timer interruption processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (in this example, 0 to 6, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not output to each output port has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays a set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process Is repeated, and the reset signal is input when the power supply voltage decreases, and the process ends. (That is, since an infinite loop is entered, any operation that prompts a return is not accepted). In the case of No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processing from step 1306 to step 1310 is processing for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information about the error, game progress status at the time of the error, etc. are displayed on the hall computer side. It is possible to output to

  Next, FIG. 201 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 199. First, in step 1202, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initialized with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the upper limit of bets, the effective line for winning, etc.). In step 1203, data for clearing the data used in the previous game {eg, condition device number (winning number), production group number, instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address). (Data) is also included in the RAM. In addition, you may make it comprise so that the number selected when the next game was performed may be overwritten, without clearing a condition apparatus number, production group number, instruction information, etc. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT1” etc.) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 in FIG. 210). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the RT state set in step 1204 (command to the sub side). Note that the processing for setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 of FIG. In step 1704, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub-side, it is not always necessary to transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub-side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a state relating to AT in the game (for example, “AT state” etc.) (determined in steps 1440-3 and 14240-6 in FIG. 205). Set status for AT). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the state set in step 1206 (command to the sub side). In addition, when the state related to the AT is transmitted to the sub-side, it is not always necessary to transmit the state, and the state related to the AT may be transmitted to the sub-side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, “advantageous section”, etc.) in the game (in step 3510, step 3539, step 3542, and step 3520-1 in FIG. 214). Set the determined game section). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H, and two full detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can enter the medal auxiliary tank HS. Is determined based on current conduction / non-conduction (when the current is conducted through the medal, it is determined that the current is full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error with a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, the currents by the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS are non-conductive and the setting / It is determined whether or not the reset button M30 has been pressed. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), The process proceeds to 1218. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M permits the medal insertion acceptance (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the re-gamer), and the next process (step 1220). The process proceeds to (1). Here, in Step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process formed by the medal flow path). Specifically, when a re-game player is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current storage number (credit) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Run. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the ON process of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, when the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on uniformly. By configuring in this way, even when a re-gamer is established, it is configured so that a game medal can be inserted when the stored number (credit) does not reach a predetermined value. Even if the replaying role that is hard to understand (replaying as a small role: bell-bell-bell on the invalid line or symbol combination with cherry stopped on the left reel) is stopped, You can play games well (without feeling uncomfortable).

  Next, FIG. 202 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a game medal is not betted or stored (no credit is present). In the case of Yes in Step 1220, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display conditions in Step 1221 (for example, the conditions are satisfied when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M is set to a setting display LED (not shown, but may be a payout number display device D 270, a credit number display device D 200, or an insertion number display light D 210). The value is displayed (transition to the setting confirmation mode), and the process proceeds to step 1221 on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the transition condition for the setting change mode is satisfied, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode is started to the sub-control board S, and when the setting change mode end condition is satisfied, the setting change mode is set. A process for transmitting a command indicating that the process is to be terminated is executed. In the case of No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes management related to game medal insertion and settlement. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in the sixth embodiment, insertion of medals). 2), and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (the first input sensor D20s or the second input). When the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been accepted. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the credit is the upper limit number (50 in this example) and the bet number is the maximum number (3 in this example). If the determination is Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state where no medal flow path is formed). If No in step 1230, the process in step 1230 is repeated, and if no in step 1226 or step 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

  Next, in step 1232, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there are remaining credits or bet gaming medals. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and the game The payout of one medal is executed. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in order to detect the payout of medals in the sixth embodiment). And when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not explicitly shown in the flowchart, only the remaining number of credits is to be settled when the previous game was a re-game player.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing timing of step 1234). . Specifically, whether or not a situation in which it is determined that a medal has not been paid out has continued for a predetermined period of time despite transmission of a hopper drive signal to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). Determine whether or not. If YES in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF). The process proceeds to 1247. On the other hand, if No at step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

  Next, in step 1247, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal on which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If step 1241 or step 1247 is No, the process proceeds to step 1236.

  On the other hand, if No in Step 1232 or Step 1233, the CPU C100 of the main control board M has a valid start lever D50 in Step 1251 (for example, a specified number of game medals for starting a game have been inserted, etc.) ) And whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within a normal range (0 to 5 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M performs processing for acquiring random numbers and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. If the result is No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

  Next, FIG. 203 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later.

  Next, in step 1292-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M subtracts the specified number relating to the current game from the counter value of the difference counter. In step 1292-1, the counter value of the difference counter is subtracted even at the start of the game after automatic betting after the replay symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Here, the difference number counter is a counter for measuring the maximum increase number (acquired number) of game medals in the advantageous section where the advantageous section ends. The maximum increase in the number of game medals in the advantageous section is, from the player's point of view, a game medal from a state where the number of acquired game medals is the smallest in one consecutive advantageous section to a state where the number of acquired game medals is the largest. Is the increased number of sheets. For example, a maximum of 50 game medals have decreased as medal since the transition to the advantageous section (more game medals bet on the game machine than game medals paid out by the game machine), When 1000 is increased, the counter value of the difference counter is 1000, and the number of game medals increased from the time when the player has moved to the advantageous section is “1000−50 = 950”. Yes. In this case, “1000” (the counter value of the difference counter is also 1000) is the maximum increase in the number of game medals in the advantageous section. In this example, when the maximum increase in the number of game medals in the advantageous section (sometimes referred to as the number of game values acquired in the advantageous section, the maximum increase number, etc.) reaches 2400, the advantageous section It is configured to forcibly terminate. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent game medals from being paid out more than expected in a short period of time.

  Next, in step 1400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a conditional device number management process, which will be described later.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is requested to create a pull-in point (required for determining the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the stop order). And the other reels are appropriately requested according to the stop position of the other reels). In the case of Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1262, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point, and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the “BB inside game”, in the game won in the push order bell, the stop button is not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1) Even when the stop buttons are not stopped in the order of “left → middle → right” (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing the wrong answer), there are 11 symbol combinations to be paid out by the reel stop control. It is configured to win. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance check. Next, in step 1264, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether any stop button (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). . On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the displayed symbol combination is normal (if it does not coincide with the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal. Is determined). Whether or not the displayed symbol combination is normal in step 1269 is determined by determining whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been normally completed. When the stop button is operated in an operation mode in which the winning combination can be won in the game being played, the actually stopped reel position was not normal (the winning determined by the internal lottery becomes possible) Even if the winning combination is not displayed by the player, if the reel stop control is normally completed by processing inside the gaming machine, the game medal based on the winning combination of the winning combination The payout is configured to be executed. If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261-1.

  Next, in step 1274, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out game medals {the game medals earned by winning the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, game medals are paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and pays out one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing timing in step 1276). . In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display with a 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in Step 1282, in Step 1283, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF). Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

  Next, in step 1286, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal on which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning that becomes Yes in step 1275) is completed. If Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. If No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

  Next, in step 3400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes RT state transition control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game section transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, a game state transition process, etc.), and proceeds to the next process (step 1202 process).

  Next, FIG. 204 is a flowchart of internal lottery execution processing according to the subroutine of Step 3600 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery in which a winning number, a numerical value for comparison with the obtained random number, and the like are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires a winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. The winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if a bonus and a small role are both won, or a bonus and a re-playing role are won, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are determined from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. Specific generation processing will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same number for comparison with the acquired random number, and is stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board M.

  Next, in step 3610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery is won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the subsequent internal lottery table address is not determined (lottery) and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1259). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processing of step 3610 to step 3618 is repeatedly executed until there is no remaining number of repetitions or internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address in step 3620, proceeds to step 3604, and executes the processing from step 3604 onward. The specific process of the internal lottery will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 205 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of Step 1400 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1440-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section is a normal section.

  In the case of Yes in step 1440-1, in step 1440-2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a condition device capable of executing the advantageous section lottery. In the processing of step 1440-2, the determination is made by the condition devices listed in the condition device column of the game in the table on the left side of FIG.

  In the case of Yes in Step 1440-2, in Step 1440-3, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the low probability advantageous section lottery table (the table on the left side in FIG. 206), executes the advantageous section lottery, The state relating to the AT of the next game is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1440-7. Further, in the case of No in step 1440-2, the processing is immediately moved to step 1440-7.

  In the case of No in step 1440-1 described above, in step 1440-4, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a high probability state. Here, the high probability state includes both the high probability state A and the high probability state B.

  In the case of Yes in step 1440-4, in step 1440-5, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a condition device capable of executing the advantageous section lottery. In the processing of step 1440-4, the determination is made by the condition devices listed in the condition device column of the game in the table on the right side of FIG.

  In the case of Yes in Step 1440-5, in Step 1440-6, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the high-accuracy advantageous section lottery table (the table on the right side of FIG. 206), and executes the advantageous section lottery. The state relating to the AT of the next game is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1440-7. Further, in the case of No in step 1440-4 and step 1440-5, the processing is immediately moved to step 1440-7.

  In step 1440-7, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the next game has not been determined.

  In the case of Yes in Step 1440-7, in Step 1440-8, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the next game based on the state related to the AT of the game, the condition device related to the game, and the current game situation. A candidate for a state related to the AT is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process.

  FIG. 206 is a diagram showing a low-accuracy advantageous section table (left) and a high-probability advantageous section table (right). The low-accuracy advantageous section table is referred to in the process of step 1440-3 in FIG. 205 described above, and the high-probability advantageous section table is referred to in the process of step 1440-5 in FIG. The low-probability advantageous section table and the high-profit advantageous section table are tables for determining a state related to the AT after the next game by a lottery process according to the condition device won in the game. The allocation of the low-accuracy time advantageous section table (left) and the high-accuracy time advantageous section table (right) indicates a number when the denominator is 65536.

  The low-accuracy time advantageous section table is configured as follows. The low probability state is a normal interval, the high probability state and the AT state are advantageous intervals. When 1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-B is won in the game, the state related to the AT after the next game shifts to a high probability state at 40000/65536, and the state related to the AT after the next game is 25536 / 65536 is configured to be in a low probability state. When the type 1 BB-A or the type 1 BB-B is won, it is configured so that it is easier to shift to the high probability state than to the low probability state. In this example, in the normal section (low probability state) and not in the inside (the state where the bonus winning is not carried over, RT1), 1 type BB-A (or 1 type BB-B) ) Is selected, an advantageous section transition lottery (a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section in the normal section is referred to as an advantageous section transition lottery) is executed. On the other hand, the result of internal lottery is the same random number that is in the normal section (low probability state) and the type 1 BB-A (or type 1 BB-B) wins in the type 1 BB inside (RT2) In such a case, the same stop control as in the case of losing at RT2 is taken, and the BB is not newly won, so that the advantageous section shift lottery is not executed. Since it is configured in this way, it is in the normal section (low probability state) by the amount of random numbers that 1 type BB-A (or 1 type BB-B) wins, and is not in the inside (bonus winning) RT1) is a normal section (low probability state), and it is easier to win the advantageous section transition lottery than the inside of type 1 BB (RT2) (easy transition to the advantageous section) ) Is configured as follows.

  In addition, when the watermelon A (winning-D) is won in the game, the AT state after the next game shifts to a high probability state at 33000/65536, shifts to the AT state at 2536/65536, and 30000 / 65536 is configured to maintain a low probability state. In this way, when watermelon A is won, it is easier to transition to the high probability state or maintain the low probability state than to transition to the AT state, and maintain the transition probability to the high probability state and the low probability state. The probability of doing is almost the same probability.

  In addition, when watermelon B (winning-E) is won in the game, the state related to the AT after the next game shifts to a high probability state at 53000/65536, and shifts to the AT state at 12536/65536. Has been. Thus, when the watermelon B is won, it is configured so that it is easier to shift to the high probability state than the in-AT state.

  In addition, when a cherry (winning-C) is won in the game, the state related to AT after the next game shifts to a high probability state at 1536/65536, shifts to an AT state at 4000/65536, and 60000/65536. And is configured to maintain a low probability state. As described above, when the cherry is won, the probability of maintaining the low probability state is the highest, the transition to the in-AT state is easy next, and the transition to the high probability state is most difficult.

  In addition, when the normal replay (replay-A) is won in the game, the state relating to the AT after the next game shifts to a high probability state at 536/65536 and maintains a low probability state at 65000/65536. It is configured.

  The high-accuracy time advantageous section table is configured as follows. The high-accuracy advantageous section table is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a high probability state that is an advantageous section to an advantageous section and a state relating to another AT (for example, an AT lottery regarding whether or not to shift to an in-AT state). This table is referenced when executing When one type BB-A or one type BB-B is won in the high probability state, the state relating to the AT after the next game is configured to be in a high probability state at 65536/65536. That is, it is configured not to win the AT lottery when one type BB-A or one type BB-B is won.

  In addition, when watermelon A (winning-D) is won in the game, the state relating to the AT after the next game is maintained at a high probability state at 33000/65536, and is shifted to an in-AT state at 32536/65536. Has been.

  In addition, when watermelon B (winning-E) is won in the game, the state related to the AT after the next game is maintained at a high probability state at 23000/42536, and is shifted to an in-AT state at 32536/65536. Has been. Thus, when the watermelon B is won, it is configured to make it easier to shift to the AT state than to maintain the high probability state.

  When cherry (winning-C) is won in the game, the state related to the AT after the next game is configured to shift to the AT state at 65536/65536. That is, it is configured to always shift to the AT state when a cherry is won.

  When a normal replay (replay-A) is won in the game, the state relating to the AT after the next game is configured to maintain a high probability state at 65536/65536. That is, when a normal replay is won, a high probability state is maintained.

  Next, FIG. 207 is a flowchart of conditional device number management processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replaying winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, winning / replaying winning related to the game) Set commands related to information. Next, in step 1454, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game is a game for executing an instruction. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a pressing order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, The number is stored in a RAM address (an address different from the RAM address for displaying push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the order of pressing, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. Note that the instruction number is determined (not shown, but the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number) even when the push order navigation is not executed. In addition, when a pushing order hitting game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the pushing order hitting game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game. Next, in step 1466, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. . In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels that is most profitable to the player in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as push order navigation, push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In the sixth embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of “left → middle → right” is displayed as “= 1” on the push order display device D270. It is configured to display “= 1” for both the push order bell and the push order replay. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the game related to the push order bell, the case where the push order navigation “left → middle → right” is displayed on the push order display device D270 and in the game related to the push order replay game, “ You may comprise so that it may become a display mode different from the case where the push order navigation of "left-> middle-> right" is displayed on the push order display apparatus D270. That is, the number of types of display of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

  If NO in step 1451 or 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a mask process on the winning / replaying winning information of the game, and the masked information is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM. To remember. Here, when the winning / replaying winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replaying winning information is recognized by an illegal act, the high profit related to the game is increased. That is, the pushing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after executing the mask process {the process for concealing the winning / replay winning information (especially the information relating to the pressing order)) to the winning / replaying winning information related to the game. It is configured so that a highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. In the sixth embodiment, as a mask processing method, a plurality of winning / replaying winning information (winning / replaying winning information having a similar role is preferable. For example, the number of payouts varies depending on the pressing order. A plurality of winning / replaying winning information that can be stopped and displayed for a combination of symbols that can be pushed in the order bell is set as one effect group number, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. Note that the mask processing method is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that winning / replay winning information after mask processing is newly provided after the winning / replay winning information provided. Good. Also in such a case, a plurality of winning / replaying winning information among the existing winning / replaying winning information like the production group number is used as a single winning / replaying winning information after winning / replaying after masking. It is desirable to provide game winning information. If it is determined that the game is a game for notifying operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to the AT on the main control board M, the winning / replaying winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, In a game in which the operation information is not notified, the production group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In such a configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side or may not be transmitted.

  Next, in step 1470, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, sets in the register area). 1472 is entered. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus has been won can be recognized on the sub side) (for example, Set in the register area) and proceed to the next process (the process of step 1550). In the sixth embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number. The derivation method will be described later. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the game section is an “advantageous section”, winning / re-game winning information (type of winning combination and pushing order most advantageous to the player is displayed on the sub-control board S side. ) And instruction numbers (numbers that can specify the most advantageous pushing order for the player), while the game section is a “normal section”, the sub control board The production group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the S side. That is, in the “advantageous section”, the winning / replaying winning information related to the game including the winning / replaying winning information in which the game result and the player's profit differ depending on the pushing order is directly used as the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an “advantageous section”, the winning / replaying information for the game is not transmitted, and the winning / replaying in which the result of the game and the player's profit differ depending on the pressing order. In the case of winning information, the production group number in which the information related to the order is concealed is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  When the game section is not an “advantageous section”, the effect group number is determined by executing the mask process when the winning / replay winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S. The production group number is transmitted to the sub control board S. The production group number refers to winning / replaying winning information, winning / replaying winning information related to a winning role having a similar role (for example, a replaying role including a falling replaying role, a push order bell, etc.). Are grouped and assigned numbers. A mask process {process for concealing winning / replay winning information (especially information relating to the pressing order)} is performed on the winning / replaying winning information related to the game, and then transmitted to the sub-control board S. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the information related to the winning / replaying winning information is recognized due to an illegal act and the pushing order (reel stop order) which is a high profit related to the game is recognized.

  Next, FIG. 208 is a flowchart of reel rotation start preparation processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is zero. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer that measures. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M newly sets a minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 and starts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears information related to the reel stop order related to the finished game and information related to the press order. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M initializes symbol stop position data relating to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an output request at the start of reel rotation related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game. Next, in step 1566, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state from the reel stop state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to the next processing (step 1260 processing). In other words, a command for indicating that the reel starts to rotate can be transmitted to the sub-control board S by the processing of Step 1562 to Step 1566.

  Next, FIG. 209 is a flowchart of remaining game number management processing according to the subroutine of Step 3400 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the “advantageous section” is one of the game sections, and the situation of the game that is advantageous to the player, such as when the state related to the AT is “at-AT state” It is a game section that is easy to set at. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts with an advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc−1 (a decrement counter, 1500 which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the “favorable section” as the initial value. 1 is subtracted from the counter value which is set as a value and can be subtracted every game during the period of “advantageous section”.

  Next, in step 3408, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is the “AT in-progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M decrements the AT counter value by 1. Next, in step 3430, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3430, in step 3432, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the high securing fault counter KHc by 1, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3433). In addition, also when it is No at step 3402, step 3408, or step 3430, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 3433).

  Next, in step 3433, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the payout amount relating to the current game to the counter value of the difference counter. When there is no payout in the game (when neither the small role nor the replay is stopped and displayed), it is not added to the counter value of the difference counter. The counter value of the difference counter is also added when an automatic bet is executed after the replay symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the symbol combination related to replay is stopped and displayed, the timing of executing the addition process of the counter value of the difference counter is stopped before the symbol combination related to replay is stopped and displayed. After the display, it may be before the execution timing of the automatic bet related to the replay, etc.

  Next, in Step 3434, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the difference counter is less than zero.

  In the case of Yes in step 3434, in step 3435, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M corrects the counter value of the difference number counter to 0, and proceeds to the next processing. In the case of No in step 3434, the process immediately proceeds to the next process.

  As described above, when the counter value of the difference number counter is less than 0, it is corrected to 0 at the end of the game, so that an erroneous process is executed by the difference number counter, or the value of the difference number counter Can be prevented from being erroneously determined, and the difference counter can be kept in an appropriate state. Further, as described above, when the maximum increase in the number of game medals in the advantageous section reaches 2400, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. Since the number of medals held by the player may decrease, the game medal inserted into the gaming machine is subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter, and the game medal paid out from the gaming machine is counted as the counter value of the difference counter. If the counter value of the difference sheet counter is not corrected to 0 even when the counter value of the difference sheet counter is less than 0, the counter value of the difference sheet counter reaches 2400 where the advantageous section ends. Is configured to perform the above zero correction because the maximum increase in the number of game medals in the advantageous section may exceed 2400 (for example, 2500). Thus, reaching the counter value of the difference number counter to 2400 is synonymous with the fact that the maximum increase in the number of game medals in the advantageous section reaches 2400, and when the counter value of the difference number counter reaches 2400. What is necessary is just to complete | finish an advantageous area and the burden of the process which concerns on the measurement of the largest increase number of game medals in an advantageous area can be eased.

  Next, FIG. 210 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of Step 1700 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition enabling condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the sixth embodiment, the RT state transition enabling condition can be satisfied by executing RAM clear (RAM initialization) and winning / starting / ending BB. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not to transition to the RT state and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state transition enabling condition (RT state transition in FIG. 211). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1750). Note that if the answer is No in Step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 1750). In the sixth embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped. However, when transitioning to “RT2”, the transition timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for transitioning to the RT state (stores the RT number in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate. As a specific example, when “RT1” is selected, the type 1 BB-A (the condition device related to the type 1 BB-A) is won and the game is shifted to “RT2” (inside the type 1 BB-A) when the start lever is turned on You may comprise.

  Next, FIG. 211 is an RT state transition diagram in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, there are three RT states “RT1” to “RT2” and “1 type BB-A, B in operation”. The state will transition.

  As a specific transition example of the RT state, the transition is made to “RT1” when the RAM initialization is executed or when the operation of the one type BB-A, B is finished.

  When the RT state is “RT1”, the condition device related to Type 1 BB-A, B is activated, and when the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB-A, B is not stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to “RT2”. . Further, when the RT state is “RT1” and the type 1 BB-A or the type 1 BB-B is operated, the state shifts to “type 1 BB-A, B in operation”.

  When the RT state is “RT2”, when the condition device relating to the type 1 BB-A, B is activated and the symbol combination relating to the type 1 BB-A, B is stopped, the type 1 BB-A or the type 1 BB-B is activated and the RT state shifts to “1 type BB-A, B in operation”.

  When the RT state is “1 type BB-A, B in operation”, when the operation of 1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-B ends, the process shifts to “RT1”.

  Next, FIG. 212 is a flowchart of AT state start control processing according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transition enabling condition is satisfied in the game. The AT state transition enabling condition is satisfied, for example, when an AT lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the number of AT initial games (in this example, 100, the number of games for which subtraction is started after shifting to the “AT state”). Is set in the AT counter M60, and the flow shifts to step 1756. In the case of No in step 1752, the process proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the next game is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the number of high secure fault games (10 in this example) to the high secure fault counter and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3500). Transition. Note that if the answer is No in step 1756 or 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 213 is an AT state transition diagram in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, “low probability state A”, “high probability state A”, “AT state A”, “low probability state B”, “high probability state B”, “AT state B”, “ There are 7 states related to the AT in the “BB” state, and the state related to the AT shifts by satisfying the condition indicated by the arrow in the figure.

  When the inside of the BB is in progress, the state is any one of “low probability state A”, “high probability state A”, and “AT state A”. Further, when the vehicle is not inside, the state is any one of “low probability state B”, “high probability state B”, and “AT state B”. Further, the above-mentioned “low probability state A” and “low probability state B” are normal intervals, and are “high probability state A”, “AT state A”, “high probability state B”, “AT state B”. "And" in BB "are advantageous intervals. In addition, when BB is operating and the state related to the AT is “BB in progress”, when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, the difference number of games where the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is 0) When the counter value reaches 2400, or when an arbitrary condition is satisfied, the details of the optional condition will be described later). Keep it.

  When it is in the “low probability state A”, when it is elected to shift to the high probability state in the advantageous section lottery, it shifts to the “high probability state A”. If the AT lottery is won in the “low probability state A”, the process proceeds to the “AT state A”.

  When in the “high probability state A”, when the number of guaranteed games, for example, 10 games are consumed, the state returns to the “low probability state A”. Furthermore, when the “high probability state A” is selected, when the shift to the AT state is selected in the advantageous section transition lottery, the state shifts to the “AT state A”.

  When it is in “AT state A”, when the advantageous section is ended, the state returns to “low probability state A”.

  If it is in the “low probability state B”, if it is won to shift to the high probability state in the advantageous section lottery, it shifts to the “high probability state B”. If the AT lottery is won in the “low probability state B”, the state shifts to the “AT state B”.

  When the number of guaranteed games, for example, 10 games is consumed in the “high probability state B”, the state returns to the “low probability state B”. Furthermore, when the “high probability state B” is selected and the winning zone shift lottery is selected, the state shifts to the “AT state B”.

  When it is in the “AT state B”, when the advantageous section ends, the state returns to the “low probability state A”.

  Further, as described above, the “low probability state A”, “high probability state A”, and “AT in-progress state A” are the BB internal state, and when the BB is activated when the BB is in the internal state. , “BB in progress”. The “low probability state B”, “high probability state B”, and “AT in-progress state B” are non-internal medium states, and are BB (sometimes referred to as a bonus) when they are in a non-internal medium state. When the symbol combination related to BB is stopped and displayed in the winning game, the process shifts to “BB in progress”.

  In this example, the advantageous section shift lottery is executed by winning the condition device related to the bonus, and when the bonus is won in the non-inside, it is configured to be able to shift to the advantageous section. For example, when the bonus is won in the low probability state B and the symbol combination related to the bonus is not stopped and displayed, the state is configured to be able to shift to the high probability state A inside the BB.

  Next, FIG. 214 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of Step 3500 of FIG. 203 in the sixth embodiment. First, in the sixth embodiment, there is a game section as a section related to the state of the game. As the game section, a “normal section” that is relatively low profit for the player and a relatively relative section for the player. It has two game sections, an “advantageous section” which is a highly profitable section. As an explanation of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”.

  In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the game section corresponding to the current AT state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3540. To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is an “advantageous section”, in step 3514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has a counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc−1 being zero. In other words, it is determined whether or not the “favorable section” has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued.

  In the case of Yes in step 3514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the advantageous section remaining game number counter value to zero in step 3536, clears the difference number counter value to zero in step 3537, and in step 3538, the advantageous section indicator. The lighting flag (sometimes referred to as a lighting flag) is turned off, and in step 3539, the advantageous section flag is turned off and all information regarding the advantageous section is cleared, and the process proceeds to step 3540 described later. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the advantageous period ends (when shifting to the normal period), “the advantageous period remaining game number counter value is cleared (clearing process related to the advantageous period remaining game number counter)”. → Clear the difference counter value (clearing process related to the difference sheet counter) → Turn off the advantageous section indicator lighting flag (main process side extinguishing control process for the advantageous section indicator YH) → Turn off the advantageous section flag (favorable section) The process is executed in the order of “end process of the process”. With this configuration, the advantageous section indicator lighting flag is turned on even though the advantageous section flag is off, and the advantageous section indicator YH is lit even though the advantageous section has ended. Can be prevented according to the order of processing, and a fair game machine that can be operated at a game arcade can be obtained. When the advantageous section is ended, “the advantageous section indicator lighting flag is turned off (main process side extinction control processing related to the advantageous section indicator YH) → the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is cleared (the advantageous section remaining game is cleared). The processing may be executed in the order of “clearing process related to number counter) → clearing the difference sheet counter value (clearing process related to the difference sheet counter) → turning off the advantageous section flag (processing for ending the advantageous section)”. In addition, the order of “clear the advantageous section remaining game number counter value (clearing process related to the advantageous section remaining game number counter) → clear the difference number counter value (clearing process related to the difference number counter)” is changed to the “difference number counter value”. Clear (clearing process related to the difference counter) → clearing the advantageous section remaining game number counter value (clearing process related to the advantageous section remaining game number counter) ”.

  Note that the number of game medals acquired in the advantageous section (games inserted from the number of game medals paid out in the advantageous section) in the in-AT state, which is an advantageous section and is a state related to the AT capable of performing push order navigation. Sub-control board S controls the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals) or the number of game medals acquired in the AT state (the value obtained by subtracting the number of game medals paid out from the number of game medals paid out in the AT state). The effect display device S40 may be configured to display (sometimes referred to as acquired number display). In such a configuration, when the advantageous section flag is turned off in the AT state, a command indicating that the advantageous section flag is turned off is transmitted from the main control board side to the sub control board side. When the command is received, the acquired number display displayed on the effect display device S40 is erased and information on the acquired number stored for display on the acquired number display is cleared. May be.

  In addition, as a configuration capable of displaying the acquired number display, the acquired number display is displayed in the AT state, and when the AT state ends after the AT remaining game number becomes 0, another advantageous section ( For example, it may be configured to be able to shift to a high probability state), and in such a case, the AT state is shifted again within a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) after the AT state ends. In the case (the advantageous section continues), the information regarding the acquired number is not cleared, and at the start of the AT state in which the transition has been made again, It may be configured to be able to display (takeover display) an acquired number display that takes into account the number of acquired numbers that have increased or decreased from the initial stay at the end of the AT state to the transition to the AT state again. . Even in such a configuration, in the case where the advantageous section flag is turned off in the other advantageous section after the AT staying state where the first staying state is ended, the sub control is performed from the main control board side. When the command related to the advantageous section flag being turned off is transmitted to the board side and the sub control board receives the command, the sub-control board erases the acquired number display displayed on the effect display device S40 and acquires the command. You may comprise so that the information regarding the acquired number of sheets memorize | stored in order to display on a number display may be cleared. In other words, in the case of transitioning to the AT state again within 50 games after the end of the first AT state, if the transition is made to the AT state again while maintaining the advantageous section after the end of the first AT state. When the display of the acquired number is taken over, but after the end of the first AT state (or after a specific game such as 10 games), the advantageous section flag is turned off and the normal section is entered, and then the AT section is entered again In this case, the information regarding the acquired number is cleared, and the acquired number display may not be taken over.

  In this way, by configuring so as to clear the information regarding the acquired number display on the sub-control board S side at the end of the advantageous section, when the acquired number display is succeeded, the acquired number display is a large value (for example, 10000). Or more), and an appropriate gaming machine that does not give excessive gambling to the player can be obtained. 214 may be configured to execute clearing of information related to the advantageous section such as information related to the display of the number of acquired sheets on the sub-control board S side at any timing of executing the processing of step 3536 to step 3539 in FIG. .

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the difference counter value is an upper limit value, for example, 2400 or more. In the case of Yes in step 3518, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M advances the process to step 3536 described above.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3518, it is determined whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an “advantageous section” end condition other than the case where the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc−1 becomes 0. For example, the AT counter value is 0. Or when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the routine proceeds to step 3515. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the “advantageous section” ends and the “ordinary period” is set after the next game, the advantageous section remaining game number counter value, the difference counter value, and the advantageous section display are displayed. All the information related to AT (including information related to the number of AT continuing games, the number of AT remaining games, etc.) such as the device lighting flag and the advantageous section flag are cleared. It is configured so that an unfair gaming machine such as easy to shift to is not designed.

  Note that the AT-related information such as the advantageous segment remaining game number counter value, the difference number counter value, the advantageous segment indicator lighting flag, and the advantageous segment flag is also cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed. Such information is also cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed. On the other hand, in the processing in steps 3536 to 3539 described above, the information related to “stored number” is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the setting is different from the clear range at the end of the “advantageous section” (for example, when the processing of steps 3536 to 3539 is executed).

  As will be described later, the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantageous section” are continuous (see FIG. 204). In this way, by making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantageous section” continuous, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the top address to be cleared in the clear process and the range of addresses to be cleared. When the “advantageous section” ends, a command indicating that the “advantageous section” has ended is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to erase the game history such as information indicating that the game was “advantageous section” and how many games “AT state” was executed. ing. However, when the RAM clear at the time of setting change is executed, game history such as information on the “advantageous section” on the side of the sub-control board S and information on how many games “AT state” is executed Will also be deleted.

  When the “favorable section” is ended because the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc−1 is 0, (1) when the current AT state is the “high probability state”. In the next game, the state related to the AT becomes “low probability state”. (2) If the current state related to the AT is “in-AT state”, the state related to the AT in the next game is “low probability”. (3) When the state related to the current AT is “BB”, the state related to AT is maintained as “BB” in the next game, but the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc Since the counter value of −1 becomes 0, the advantageous interval ends and the normal interval starts.

  In the case of Yes in step 3518 described above, in step 3520, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3540.

  Next, in step 3540, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has decided to newly set an “advantageous section” in the next game (decided to set an “advantageous section” from “normal section”). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3540, in step 3541, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. Note that the predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed numerical value (1500 in this example) that is common to all set values.

  Next, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section flag in step 3542, turns on the advantageous section indicator lighting flag in step 3543, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1293). Also in the case of No in step 3540 described above, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1293).

  Next, FIG. 215 is a flowchart of timer interruption processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the sixth embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104. Thereafter, a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example) To be periodically executed.

  First, in step 1602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of interruption (for example, saving of data held in a register in the CPUC100, input port check of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt process). In the case of No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power-off detection signal, the input acceptance sensor D10s, and the first input sensor. D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, the presence / absence of the operation of these operation members and the sensor detection state are sampled at the interrupt interval T). )

  Next, in step 1610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. (For example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously ON over a plurality of samplings, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise by turning on the door switch flag. Can also be detected). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a process related to the rotation driving control process (control of driving of the reel M50) of all reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53). Is executed later). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If YES in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays the AT remaining game number (AT game number) on the AT counter value display device D 280, and proceeds to step 1614. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1612, the process proceeds to Step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing in step 1612 and step 1613 is not necessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (not shown, inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormality error flag, It is determined whether all flags relating to errors such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, a door switch flag, and the like are off. In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side and a command indicating that no error is detected) (for example, register Set in the area), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command that an error is detected) (for example, Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub-side. The error not detected command may be set only when the error is released from the state where the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off). The information setting process may not be executed (the step 1618 may not be provided). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or from the state where a first error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error has changed, such as a second error (for example, a payout medal retention error).

  Next, in step 1622, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set). Control command). Here, as a command to be transmitted to the sub control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop) A command related to the second reel stop reception timing (transmitted immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop reception timing (the stop button as the third stop) Sent immediately after operation), sent immediately after all reels stop), commands related to stop timing of stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button as a display symbol stop), winning / replaying Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after start lever operation (limited to advantageous sections)), bonus winning Commands related to information (sent immediately after the start lever operation), commands related to the RT state (transmitted after all reels stop until the next game starts), commands related to the state related to AT (Sent from the time all reels stop until the next game is started), high fault counter value command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), command related to the number of AT remaining games (all Commands from the time the reels stop until the next game starts, or immediately after the start lever is operated), commands related to the game section (from when all reels stop until the next game starts Sent in between), etc. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the revolving game machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, information relating to an error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on. Is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LEDs (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among a plurality of 7-segment LED units). Output a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 may not be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a soft random number management process (such as a process for updating a random value managed by software). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains internal information register data (the internal information register has a region where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not an abnormal flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). More specifically, the abnormality flag bit is set when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not an abnormal flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt end process and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-described non-recoverable error processing.

  Next, FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the rotating drum drive control process according to the subroutine of Step 6100 of FIG. 215 in the sixth embodiment. In addition, in this process, although the process about one reel is illustrated, it supplements performing the process corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after execution of the processing of step 1564 in FIG. 208) has been reached. If YES in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6102, the process proceeds to step 6106.

  Next, in step 6106, the CPU MC of the main control board M starts the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing at which the reel rotation start standby state ends and the reel acceleration process starts to be executed. For example, in step 1260 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the processing execution timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel acceleration processing, and proceeds to step 6112. When the reel is stopped, the reel starts to be rotated by this process. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6106, the process proceeds to step 6112.

  Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel acceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M has executed all the interrupt processing for the reel acceleration state end timing (for example, “interrupt execution count” in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 218 described later). It is determined whether or not (timing) is reached. In the case of Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel constant speed maintaining process, and proceeds to step 6120. Note that if the answer is No in step 6112 or step 6114, the process proceeds to step 6120.

  Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel constant speed state. In the case of Yes in step 6120, the CPU MC of the main control board M becomes the reel constant speed state in step 6122 (after executing the processing of step 6116), and the reel sensor corresponds to the reel (processing of this subroutine). It is determined whether or not an index provided on the reel is detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel, and is used when detecting whether the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one rotation, or the like. Each index is detected by a reel sensor. The reel sensor signal is electrically connected to the main control board M. When the reel sensor detects (cuts) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is detected that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPU MC of the main control board M has passed a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. Determine whether or not. In the case of No in step 6124, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. As described above, in this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state, thereby making it possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed is normally constant. It is configured. In this example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times (configured to be able to rotate 400 steps by the interrupt processing 400 times), and when the reel rotation speed is constant. The time is longer than the time for which the reel makes one revolution (one revolution) (for example, the time for one revolution of the reel is 336 steps and the interrupt processing is executed 336 times). With this configuration, the distance between the index and the reel sensor at the timing when the reel driving state becomes the constant speed state (the distance from when the reel rotates and the index is detected by the reel sensor) is far apart. However, if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. Configured to be able to.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 6124, in step 6126, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel reacceleration process, and proceeds to the process of step 6130. As described above, in this example, when the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. The reel driving state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. Note that if the answer is No in Step 6120, the process moves to Step 6130. Note that the reel re-acceleration process does not have to be the same process as the reel acceleration process described above. The reel re-acceleration process and the reel acceleration process are used to interrupt the combination of phases excited by the stepping motor and the interrupt process for each combination of phases to be excited. The number of executions may be different.

  Next, FIG. 217 is a flowchart of reel rotation stop processing according to the subroutine of Step 6200 of FIG. 215 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPU MC of the main control board M starts the reel deceleration standby state start timing (the timing when the reel constant speed state ends, for example, the reel deceleration standby state start timing when the stop button is operated. It is determined whether or not it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6130, in step 6132, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel deceleration standby state, and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6130, the process proceeds to step 6134.

  Next, in step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel deceleration standby state. In the case of Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing to start executing the reel deceleration processing) has been reached. If Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts reel deceleration (reel deceleration processing). Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel deceleration state, and proceeds to the processing of step 6142. In addition, also when it is No at step 6134 or step 6136, it transfers to the process of step 6142.

  Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel deceleration state. If Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing to end the reel deceleration process) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel stop state, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1612). In addition, also when it is No in step 6142 or step 6144, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1612).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, a detailed description will be given of the rotation operation of the reel M50 of the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present example. The rotating type gaming machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained (reel) When the driving state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed, but the rotational speed may not actually reach the constant speed). When any one of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a four-phase stepping motor having four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (no problem if it is not a four-phase stepping motor). Rotation control is performed by phase excitation. That is, the stepping motor can be rotated in the positive direction by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of phases to be excited). In the figure, among the Φ0 to Φ3, ones indicating which phase is to be excited are shown in the “Excited Phase” column (details will be described later).

  Also, as shown in the “reel rotation speed image” in the upper part of the figure, the driving state from the start of rotation of the stepping motor to the stop is divided into six, and the stepping motor is arranged according to the driving pattern corresponding to each driving state. Drive control. Here, the driving state includes “reel stop state”, “reel rotation start standby state”, “reel acceleration state”, “reel constant speed state”, “reel deceleration standby state”, and “reel deceleration state”. In the “reel rotation speed image”, the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed and the speed increases upward, the horizontal axis is the time and the time passes in the right direction. Yes. In addition, the example shown in the figure illustrates a case in which a rotation failure of the reel does not occur, and this is the case when a rotation failure of the reel occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or causing a step-out. (If a reel rotation failure occurs, it will be described later).

  “Reel stop state” indicates a state where the reel is stopped. When the reel is in the “reel stop state”, the reel is in a stationary state, and all phases of the stepping motor are in a stationary state. Is not excited.

  Next, in the situation of “reel stop state”, the reel drive state is updated to “reel rotation start standby state” based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing (1) in the figure. . Here, the “reel rotation start standby state” indicates a state of waiting until the acceleration process (reel acceleration process) of the stepping motor is started after the start lever D50 is operated. This standby period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the “reel stop state” to the “reel acceleration state”. For example, the time from the time when the reel driving state became “reel acceleration state” in the previous game is counted, and the start lever D50 related to the current game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses. If it is, the “reel rotation start standby state” is entered.

  Next, at the timing (2) in the figure, the reel driving state is updated from the “reel rotation start standby state” to the “reel acceleration state”. Here, the “reel acceleration state” is a state in which the reel is accelerated in order to reach a constant speed from a state where the reel is stationary. In this example, when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times (“100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220”, refer to the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state at the lower left in the figure), the acceleration state ends (reel driving state is “reel constant speed”). Update to "status"). Next, the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed at the timing of (3) in the drawing, in other words, at the timing when the “reel acceleration state” is completed by executing another timer interrupt process. At this timing, the reel drive state remains “reel acceleration state”. Next, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the reel driving state is updated from the “reel rotation start standby state” to the “reel acceleration state”, and then the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times. The state is updated to “reel constant speed state”. As described above, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed, the reel driving state remains in the “reel acceleration state” for one timer interruption process, in other words, in the final state in the “reel acceleration state”. “Φ3, φ0”, which is a combination of phases to be excited, is configured to execute interrupt processing only once, similar to “reel constant speed state” in which interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of phases to be excited. (When no reel rotation abnormality has occurred). With this configuration, it is possible to stably execute the acceleration process until the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed.

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a “step motor excitation image”. In the figure, a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is “reel acceleration state” and a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is “reel constant speed state” are illustrated. First, a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel acceleration state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of FIG. Note that “excited phase” is a combination of phases to be excited, and “interrupt execution count” indicates the number of times interrupt processing that is excited by the combination of phases to be excited is executed. In this example, when executing the reel acceleration process, the step motor (stepping motor) is configured to be excited for 220 times of the timer interrupt process, and (KA) "φ0" interrupt process 100 times → ( KB) Interrupt processing 60 times at “φ0, φ1” → 30 times interrupt processing at (KC) “φ1” → 15 times interrupt processing at (KD) “φ1, φ2” → (KE) “φ2 ”Interrupt processing 8 times → (KF)“ φ2, φ3 ”interrupt processing 4 times → (KG)“ φ3 ”interrupt processing 2 times → (KH)“ φ3, φ0 ”interrupt It is configured to excite the step motor (stepping motor) by executing the interrupt process once as in the process (the number of executions of the interrupt process is merely an example and there is no problem even if it is changed). Thus, in this example, at the time of executing the reel acceleration process, the number of times of executing the interrupt process is gradually reduced with a combination of one exciting phase.

  Next, a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel constant speed state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of FIG. In this example, when the reel is in the constant speed state (when the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed), interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) “φ0” → (TB) at “φ0, φ1”. Interrupt processing once → (TC) “φ1” interrupt processing once → (TD) “φ1, φ2” interrupt processing once → (TE) “φ2” interrupt processing once → (TF) Interrupt processing once at “φ2, φ3” → Interrupt processing once at (TG) “φ3” → Interrupt processing once at (TH) “φ3, φ0” → (TA) “ Interrupt processing once at “φ0” → (TB) Interrupt processing once at “φ0, φ1” →... (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed once every interrupt processing. The step motor (stepping motor) is excited. Thus, in this example, at the time of executing the reel constant speed maintaining process, the number of times of executing the interrupt process with one combination of exciting phases is configured to be one.

  Next, in the situation where the reel driving state is “reel constant speed state”, the stop button corresponding to any of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the figure, and the reel driving state is set to “reel deceleration standby state”. Is updated. Here, the “reel constant speed state” is a state in which the rotation speed of the reel is a constant speed (a state in which the combination of phases to be excited is switched for each interrupt process). "" Indicates a state from when the stop button is operated by the player to when the stop control is started (in the reel deceleration standby state, a slip of the reel corresponding to the number of slip frames has occurred). . The period of this driving state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

  Next, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the reel driving state is updated from the “reel deceleration standby state” to the “reel deceleration state”, and the reel deceleration is started. When the reel drive state is updated from the “reel deceleration standby state” to the “reel deceleration state”, a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel. Perform 4-phase excitation to excite all. When excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel drive state is updated from the “reel deceleration state” to the “reel stop state” at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel is stopped.

  As described above, in the spinning machine according to this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. When the reel driving state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed during the reel acceleration process. Whether the reel has been normally accelerated, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether a defective rotation of the reel has occurred) is determined in step 6124 (reel driving state is changed to the reel constant speed state). (It is determined after a predetermined time has elapsed since the update). However, in the process of step 6124, the reel sensor does not detect the index, so the reel is not at a constant speed (reel rotation failure is detected). If it is determined that the reel has occurred), the reel re-acceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. As described above, the reel acceleration process is performed so that it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally performed. Even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the reel acceleration process, If the reel rotation speed has reached the constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel rotation processing is completed and the reel rotation processing is completed, the reel drive state is the reel constant speed state. When the reel sensor detects the index until a predetermined time elapses after the update, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed without executing the reacceleration process. By executing the reel reacceleration process, the player However, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to proceed with the game (cannot operate the stop button). In addition, during the execution of the reel acceleration process, by configuring so as not to execute the process for determining whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed, the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reel can be reduced. In addition, since it is comprised in this way, when a reel rotation defect generate | occur | produces in the middle of the reel type game machine which concerns on this example performing the reel acceleration process, it acts as follows. It becomes.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel acceleration process is finished → Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → Reel constant A reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the speed maintaining process → reel rotation failure detection → reel reacceleration process is executed.
The reel rotation failure means that the reel rotation such as the reel window D160 is hindered by rotation of the reel (such as rubbing the reel against the reel window D160) or out of step. Refers to the case where was not successfully executed. As described above, even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the reel reacceleration process is executed, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of reel acceleration process → Reel acceleration process is continuously executed → Reel acceleration process is completed → Update the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state → Execute the reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect the reel rotation failure → Execute the reel reacceleration process. As described above, even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel re-acceleration process is executed when the reel rotation failure is detected thereafter, so that the game can proceed smoothly. Will be able to.

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel acceleration process is performed during power off → Return from power off → Reel acceleration process is continued (unprocessed) Reel acceleration process) → Reel rotation failure occurred during reel acceleration process → Reel acceleration process continued (unprocessed reel acceleration process executed) → Reel acceleration process completed → Reel drive state Is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed → the reel rotation failure is detected → the reel reacceleration process is executed. As described above, even if the power is cut off during the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state within a predetermined time. If the reel sensor does not detect the index, the reel reacceleration process is executed, so that the game can proceed smoothly. In addition, if the power interruption occurs during the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel sensor is updated within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state. Is configured not to execute the reel re-acceleration process when the index is detected, and this configuration prevents the player from proceeding with the reel re-acceleration process (the stop button cannot be operated). It can be made difficult to occur.

<< Action after final stop button operation >>
In the rotating type gaming machine according to the present example, after the operation of the final stop button (third stop button), the final reel (which is a reel that has been rotated to the end, also referred to as the third reel) is stopped, and the winning combination The game medal payout can be executed when the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed. However, the operation relating to the game medal payout may be configured as follows.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel Update drive state to reel deceleration state → Power failure occurs → 3rd reel moves to the stop display position (rotation) → Power failure detection → Power failure processing → Power recovery → Reel winning symbol corresponding to winning combination The combination may be configured to execute a process related to stop display → game medal payout as described above. By configuring in this way, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in a game won by a small role that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop button such as the common bell described above. Even if a power failure occurs due to a power failure at a game hall immediately after the start, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of sliding frames is maximum), The movement (rotation) to the planned stop position can be completed. In addition, when the symbol combination (for example, common bell) constituting the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the game medals can be normally paid out, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel Renewal of driving state to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the reel as seen from the player Although not displayed, it is determined in the determination process of step 1269 that the symbol combination is normal (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally). For example, in a game in which the role of the bell is elected, the symbol combination corresponding to the role of the winning bell is not displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but it corresponds to the operation of the stop button of the player. (When stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is normally executed by processing inside the gaming machine) → Processing related to payout of gaming medals may be performed as described above. With this configuration, even when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped on the reel as viewed from the player, In the internal processing of the gaming machine, winning the winning combination and accepting the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medal can be paid out and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. can do.

  Next, FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power-off processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M stores the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off process completed flag (for example, updates the power-off process completed flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and information for error detection based on the calculated checksum (for example, the calculation) In the checksum area, the lower 1 byte in the checksum or the complement thereof) is set. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

<<< Turn-off timing of advantageous section indicator YH >>>
One feature of the sixth embodiment is the turn-off timing of the advantageous section indicator YH. The conditions for ending the advantageous section are as follows: (1) When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 (the advantageous section remaining game number counter value becomes 0), (2) The maximum number of game medals in the advantageous section There are three cases: when the increase number of sheets (difference sheet counter value) reaches 2400 sheets, (3) when an arbitrary end condition is satisfied. When either of these conditions is satisfied, a process for ending the advantageous section is executed.

<< End of advantageous section >>
At the end of the advantageous section, the difference number counter is cleared or the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is cleared, the lighting flag for controlling the advantageous section indicator YH is cleared, and the advantageous section flag is cleared. Hereinafter, these processes will be described. In the following, for the sake of simplicity, the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is simply referred to as an advantageous section remaining game number counter.

  The advantageous section remaining game number counter is a counter for counting the number of games executed in the advantageous section. The number of games is counted from the first game in the advantageous section, and the count value is stored in the advantageous section remaining game number counter. In addition, when the advantageous section ends and the normal section is entered, the value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter is cleared. A specific example of the advantageous section remaining game number counter will be described later (see FIG. 229).

  The difference number counter is a counter for counting the maximum increase number of game medals in the advantageous section. A specific example of the difference counter and the starting game will be described later (see FIGS. 224, 225, 226, 227, and 228).

  The lighting flag is a flag for controlling the advantageous section indicator YH to be turned on or off, and the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the value of the lighting flag to control the turning on or off by timer interrupt processing. Execute. For example, when the value of the lighting flag is 1 (hereinafter referred to as ON), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH and the value of the lighting flag is 0 (hereinafter referred to as OFF). In some cases, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off.

  The advantageous section flag is a flag for determining whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section, and the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the value of the advantageous section flag to determine whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section. Judging. For example, when the value of the advantageous section flag is 1 (hereinafter referred to as ON), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the advantageous section flag is 0, and the value of the advantageous section flag is 0 (hereinafter referred to as OFF). When it is, it is determined that it is a normal section.

  The above-described clearing of the difference number counter, clearing of the advantageous section remaining game number counter, lighting flag, and advantageous section flag are stored in a fixed storage area of the built-in RAM C120 of the main control board M. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing an outline of an advantageous section remaining game number counter, a difference number counter, a lighting flag, and an advantageous section flag stored in a fixed storage area of the built-in RAMC 120. In the example shown in FIG. 220, an advantageous section remaining game number counter (2 bytes) is stored from 7FC0H of the built-in RAMC 120, a difference counter (2 bytes) is stored from 7FC2H, a lighting flag (1 byte) is stored from 7FC4H, and from 7FC5H An advantageous section flag (1 byte) is stored. In this way, the address values of the advantageous section remaining game number counter, the difference number counter, the lighting flag, and the advantageous section flag are continuously stored in the built-in RAMC 120. At the end of the advantageous section, the upper address 7FC0H is cleared to the lower address 7FC5H. That is, in the advantageous section end process, the values are cleared in the order of the advantageous section remaining game number counter, the difference counter, the lighting flag, and the advantageous section flag. With this configuration, in the sixth embodiment, (1) the difference counter value or the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is referred to and it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. (2) Set the number of bytes to be cleared when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, and (3) clear the advantageous section remaining game number counter, the difference counter, the lighting flag, and the advantageous section flag in this order. It will be. As the order of the addresses to be stored, the order of the advantageous section remaining game number counter and the difference number counter may be reversed, and the advantageous section indicator lighting flag is higher than the advantageous section remaining game number counter and the difference number counter. You may comprise so that it may memorize | store in an address.

  Also, as shown in the figure, the set value data is stored at the highest address, information relating to the advantageous segment remaining game number counter, information relating to the difference counter, information relating to the advantageous segment indicator lighting flag, and advantageous segment flag The information on is a lower address than the set value data and is stored at an upper address than the control command buffer. Similar to the configuration described above with reference to FIG. 59, when an unexpected failure (such as an unexpected power failure) occurs, the stack pointer indicates an address higher than “7FF8H”, and the saved data is stored in the upper address. Therefore, it is preferable to store the data having a larger influence on the progress of the game at the higher address. For this reason, information relating to the advantageous section remaining game counter, information relating to the difference number counter, information relating to the advantageous section indicator lighting flag, and information relating to the advantageous section flag should be stored at a lower address than the set value data. If it is higher than the control command buffer, it is configured to store in the address between (1) and (2) in the figure, the address between (2) and (3), etc. Also good.

  FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the order of the advantageous section end processing. At time t1, the value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter or the difference number counter is cleared. Next, the lighting flag is changed to off at time t2 later than time t1, and the advantageous section flag is changed to off at time t3 later than time t2. By performing the processing in this way, the lighting flag is turned off at a point before turning off the advantageous section flag. That is, in the execution of the program, first, the lighting flag is changed to off (extinguishment), and then the advantageous section flag is changed to off (normal section). At the previous time, the process of turning off (turning off) the lighting flag can be completed.

  The advantageous section indicator YH is turned on or off by the above-described interrupt process (FIG. 199 described above), and depending on the timing of the interrupt process call, at the time t4 after the start of the normal section. In some cases, a control for turning off the advantageous section indicator YH is executed. However, the interrupt processing is read and executed in a time of about 2 ms, for example, and is so small that it cannot be determined by the human eye.

  As described above, at a point before the process of turning off the advantageous section flag (normal section), the process of turning off (turning off) the lighting flag is completed, but the lighting flag is turned off (off). Immediately after executing the process of), the process of turning off the advantageous section flag (normal section) is performed. That is, no other process is performed between the process of turning off the lighting flag (extinguishing) and the process of turning off the advantageous section flag (normal section). As shown in FIG. 220, the internal RAMC 120 has an area for storing the advantageous section remaining game number counter, an area for storing the difference counter, an area for storing the lighting flag, and an area for storing the advantageous section flag. These areas are arranged in succession, and by executing the process of clearing the continuous storage areas of these built-in RAMCs 120, these areas can be cleared continuously without executing other processes. The player confirms whether or not it is an advantageous section by visually observing the point aspect of the advantageous section indicator YH. As described above, the advantageous section indicator lighting flag (also referred to as a lighting flag) may be used. ) Is turned off and then the process for turning off the advantageous section flag is executed, so that the advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is the advantageous section (since the advantageous section flag is on). Then, after the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off, the advantageous section is ended (the advantageous section flag is turned off), and the player whose advantageous section indicator YH is lit is confused even though it is not the advantageous section. A situation can be prevented and an appropriate gaming machine can be designed. Further, it may be configured to output an external terminal signal indicating that it is an advantageous section. In such a case, the external terminal signal is output after the advantageous section indicator lighting flag is turned on. Is preferred. By configuring in this way, the external terminal signal is output after the advantageous section indicator YH controlled by the main control board is informed (lit) that the advantageous section is in the advantageous section, and by the output of the external terminal signal, It is possible to solve the problem that the advantageous section indicator YH is not lit, but the advantageous section is found to be an advantageous section.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 220 described above, an example is shown in which the advantageous section remaining game number counter is stored at the upper address and the difference number counter is stored at the lower address, but the difference number counter is stored at the upper address. Even if the advantageous section remaining game number counter is stored in the lower address, it may be stored in consecutive addresses.

  Further, the example shown in FIG. 220 described above shows an example in which the advantageous section remaining game number counter, the difference number counter, the lighting flag, and the advantageous section flag are stored in an area between the RAM checksum data and the control command buffer. However, it may be stored in an area lower than the set value data and higher than the control command buffer.

<< Advantageous section start processing >>
The advantageous section end processing is executed in the above-described order, but the advantageous section start processing may be executed in the reverse order. That is, after the advantageous section flag is turned on, the lighting flag is turned on (lighted).

<<< Advantageous section indicator YH >>>
The advantageous section indicator YH is a dot-shaped LED among the eight LEDs constituting the seven-segment display (see FIG. 37). FIG. 222 is a diagram showing the relationship between the configuration of the 7-segment display and the storage area for turning on or off the eight LEDs.

  The 7-segment display is composed of seven linear LEDs and one circular LED DP. The seven straight LEDs are composed of segments a to g. An output port for turning on or off the eight LEDs is provided. By writing data on lighting or turning off to the output port, the eight LEDs can be turned on or off.

  The corresponding segment can be turned on by writing 1 in the area corresponding to the segment in the output port, and the corresponding segment can be turned off by writing 0 in the area corresponding to the segment in the output port. The advantageous section indicator YH is constituted by a circular LED DP, and by writing 1 in the area corresponding to the LED DP in the output port, the circular LED DP can be turned on, and the advantageous section indicator Can be notified. On the other hand, by writing 0 in the area corresponding to the LED DP in the output port, the circular LED DP can be turned off, and it can be notified that it is a normal section. In addition, the lighting mode of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to that of this example, and there is no problem even if it can be clearly notified that it is an advantageous section.

  As shown in FIG. 223, in the rotating game machine according to the present example, four 7-segment displays are juxtaposed, and the two are configured as one set. As an example, the first set is a push order display device D270, and the second set is a credit number display device D200. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH can use a DP of a one-segment 7-segment display constituting the credit number display device D200. The first set may be the credit number display device D200, and the second set may be the push order display device D270. Further, the advantageous section display YH may use a DP of a one-segment 7-segment display that constitutes the push order display device D270.

  In the sixth embodiment, lighting control is performed on four seven-segment displays by dynamic control. That is, lighting control is performed by sequentially switching each of the four 7-segment displays. For example, lighting control is performed by switching each of four 7-segment displays every execution of interrupt processing (for example, 2 ms).

  FIG. 223 shows a state in which lighting control is performed on four seven-segment displays A to D by dynamic control. FIG. 223 (a) shows a state where the lighting control is performed on the 7-segment display D, FIG. 223 (b) shows a state where the lighting control is performed on the 7-segment display A, and FIG. FIG. 223 (d) shows a state where the 7-segment display C is turned on, and FIG. 223 (e) shows a state where the 7-segment display D is turned on. Indicates the state. In FIG. 223, the state where lighting control is performed is indicated by a solid line, and the state where lighting control is not performed is indicated by a broken line.

  First, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), the 7-segment display D is controlled to be turned on, and the first digit of the credit number display device D200 is displayed (numerical values are omitted). Further, at this time point, there is an advantageous section, and by writing 1 in the area corresponding to LED DP in the output port of FIG. 222, the advantageous section indicator YH of the 7-segment display D is turned on.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (b), lighting of the 7-segment display A is controlled, and the tens digit of the push order display device D270 is displayed (numerical values are omitted). At this time, the 7-segment display D is not controlled to be turned on, and the advantageous section indicator YH of the 7-segment display D is turned off.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (c), the 7-segment display B is controlled to turn on, and the numerical value of the first digit of the push order display device D270 is displayed (the numerical value is omitted). Even at this time, the 7-segment display D is not controlled to be turned on, and the advantageous section indicator YH of the 7-segment display D is turned off.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 223 (d), lighting of the 7-segment display C is controlled, and the tenth digit value of the credit amount display device D200 is displayed (numerical value is omitted). Even at this time, the 7-segment display D is not controlled to be turned on, and the advantageous section indicator YH of the 7-segment display D is turned off.

  In this way, as shown in FIGS. 223 (b) to 223 (d), when the 7-segment display D is not controlled to be lit, the advantageous section of the 7-segment display D regardless of whether or not it is an advantageous section. The display YH is turned off. In this example, when the 7-segment displays A to C are controlled to be lit (FIGS. 223 (b) to 223 (d)), the advantageous section has ended and the normal section has been entered.

  Again, as shown in FIG. 223 (e), the 7-segment display D is controlled to be turned on, and the first digit of the credit amount display device D200 is displayed (numerical value is omitted). At this time, the advantageous section is finished and becomes a normal section, and the advantageous section indicator YH of the 7-segment display D is turned off by writing 0 in the area corresponding to the LED DP in the output port.

  As described above, when the 7-segment display D is not controlled to be lit (FIGS. 223 (b) to 223 (d)), the advantageous section indicator of the 7-segment display D regardless of whether or not it is the advantageous section. YH is turned off. Next, the 7-segment display D is turned on (FIG. 223 (e)). At this time, the advantageous section ends and becomes the normal section, and the area corresponding to the LED DP in the output port is reached. By writing 0, the advantageous section indicator YH of the 7-segment display D continues to be turned off.

<< Difference counter >>
As described above, the difference number counter is a counter for counting the difference number counted from the starting game. FIG. 224 (a) is a diagram illustrating processing of the difference number counter for each game (for each unit game). In the example shown in FIG. 224 (a), for each of the games 1 to 9, the winning condition device, insertion processing, payout processing, and difference counter processing are shown.

  In games 1 to 3, the game is executed in an advantageous section. First, in the game 1, the bet number is subtracted from the counter value of the difference counter by the insertion process. In the game 1, the winning combination of the bell is displayed, the symbol combination relating to the bell is stopped and displayed, and the payout process adds the payout number to the counter value of the difference counter. Similarly, in the game 2 and the game 3, the bet number is subtracted from the difference number counter by the insertion process, the bell is won, and the difference number counter is added by the payout process. In this game 3, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section ends. That is, (1) the number of games in the advantageous section has reached 1,500, (2) the difference number counted from the starting game has reached 2,400, (3) any end condition has been satisfied By satisfying the conditions, the end condition of the advantageous section is established.

  In this game 3, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the next game is changed to the normal section. Therefore, the value of the difference counter is cleared and becomes zero.

  In games 4 to 6, it is a normal section. First, in game 4, the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter by the insertion process. In game 4, the game is lost and the difference counter is not added. As described above, in game 3, the value of the difference counter is cleared to zero. In game 4, the bet number is subtracted by the insertion process. For this reason, since the value of the difference sheet counter is less than 0, zero correction is executed and becomes 0.

  Next, in the game 5, the difference counter is not added to the value of the difference number counter because the bet number is subtracted by the insertion process and is lost. For this reason, even in game 5, the value of the difference counter is less than 0, so zero correction is executed and it becomes 0 again.

  Further, in the game 6, the value of the difference number counter is subtracted by the bet number by the insertion process, the watermelon is won, and the difference number counter is added by the payout process. In this game 6, the advantageous section shift lottery is won and the advantageous section starts from the next game 7. Since the next game is an advantageous section, the value of the difference counter is cleared and becomes zero.

  In games 7 to 9, it is an advantageous section. First, in game 7, the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter by the insertion process. In the game 7, the winning of the bell is won, and the payout process adds the payout number to the difference counter. Similarly, in the game 8 and the game 9, the difference number counter is subtracted from the bet number by the insertion process, the bell is won, and the difference number counter is added by the payout process.

  The difference number counter is a counter for judging the end condition of the advantageous section, and it is sufficient to count only in the advantageous section, and it is not necessary to count in the normal section. However, in the above-described FIG. 224 (a), also in the normal section, similarly to the advantageous section, the difference sheet counter is subtracted by the insertion process, and the difference sheet counter is added by the payout process. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the program by counting the difference sheet counter without distinguishing between the normal section and the advantageous section and by sharing the processing in the normal section and the advantageous section. In addition, the processing can be simplified while simplifying the contents of the processing.

<< Advantageous section remaining game counter >>
The advantageous section remaining game number counter is a counter for counting the number of games executed in the advantageous section. FIG. 224 (b) is a diagram showing processing of the advantageous section remaining game number counter for each game (for each unit game). In the example shown in FIG. 224 (b), for each of game 1 to game 9, winning condition devices, insertion processing, and advantageous section remaining game number counter processing are shown.

  In games 1 to 3, it is an advantageous section. First, in game 1, the game is started by the insertion process, and the advantageous section remaining game number counter is decremented by one. Similarly, in the game 2 and the game 3, the advantageous section remaining game number counter is decremented by 1 by the insertion process. In this game 3, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section ends, and the next game becomes the normal section. For this reason, the value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter is cleared to zero.

  In games 4 to 6, it is a normal section. First, in game 4, the game is started by the insertion process, and the advantageous section remaining game number counter is decremented by one. As described above, in game 3, the value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter is 0, and in game 4, 1 is subtracted by the insertion process. For this reason, since the value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter is less than 0, zero correction is executed and 0 again.

  Next, also in games 5 and 6, the advantageous section remaining game number counter is decremented by 1 and becomes less than 0, so zero correction is executed and 0 again.

  Further, in the game 6, the advantageous section shift lottery is won, and the advantageous section starts from the next game 7. Since the next game is an advantageous section, the value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter is set to 1500 times.

  In games 7 to 9, it is an advantageous section. First, in the game 7, the game is started by the insertion process, and the advantageous section remaining game number counter is decremented by one. Similarly, in the game 8 and the game 9, the advantageous section remaining game number counter is decremented by 1 by the insertion process.

  The advantageous section remaining game number counter is a counter for determining the end condition of the advantageous section, similarly to the difference number counter, and only needs to be counted in the advantageous section, and originally it is not necessary to count in the normal section. However, in the above-described FIG. 224 (b), the advantageous section remaining game number counter is subtracted by the insertion process in the normal section as well as the advantageous section. By configuring in this way, without distinguishing between the normal section and the advantageous section, the advantageous section remaining game number counter is counted, and the processing in the normal section and the advantageous section is shared, thereby reducing the capacity of the program. While being able to reduce, the process can be simplified while simplifying the content of the process.

<< Change in difference sheet counter >>
FIG. 225 (a) is a diagram illustrating a change in the difference sheet counter when the lottery result is lost. FIG. 225 (b) is a diagram showing changes in the difference counter when the lottery result is a bell.

  In FIGS. 225 (a) and (b), the horizontal axis represents the number of games, and the vertical axis represents the counter value of the difference counter. In FIGS. 225 (a) and (b), a downward solid line arrow portion (a portion where the value of the difference number counter decreases downward) indicates a process in which the difference number counter is subtracted at the start of the game. Further, among the portions where the value of the difference number counter increases upward, the upward solid line arrow portion indicates processing for adding the difference number counter by winning.

  As shown in FIG. 225 (a), first, a game is started (for example, lever-on operation or the like), a difference counter is subtracted, and the three left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53 rotate. Next, the left reel M51 is stopped by operating the left stop button, the middle reel M52 is stopped by operating the middle stop button, and the right reel M53 is stopped by operating the right stop button. When the three left reels M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are stopped, the symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the example shown in FIG. 225 (a), the symbols are lost (displayed in black circles) Is stopped). In the case of loss, the difference sheet counter does not change (does not add to the counter value). When the next game is started, the difference counter is subtracted again. Note that the subtraction timing of the difference sheet counter value may be any timing from when the start lever is operated until when the stop button is activated. As an example outside the above period, for example, if the difference counter value is subtracted at the bet button (max bet button) operation timing, then the settlement button is operated before the start lever is operated. Since the difference sheet counter value needs to be added, the data capacity used for the addition / subtraction process of the difference sheet counter value is increased.

  As shown in FIG. 225 (b), first, a game is started (for example, a lever-on operation or the like), a difference counter is subtracted, and the three left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53 rotate. Next, the left reel M51 is stopped by operating the left stop button, the middle reel M52 is stopped by operating the middle stop button, and the right reel M53 is stopped by operating the right stop button. When the three left reels M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are stopped, the symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the example shown in FIG. A value corresponding to the stop display is added to the difference sheet counter. When the next game is started, the difference counter is subtracted again.

<< Example of change in difference sheet counter (zero correction) >>
FIG. 226 is a diagram illustrating how the difference counter changes in accordance with the progress of the game during the advantageous section. In FIG. 226, the stop operation is omitted, and the value of the difference number counter that changes as a plurality of games are played is shown.

  In FIG. 226, the horizontal axis indicates the number of games, and the vertical axis indicates a difference counter. In FIG. 226, a downward solid line arrow portion (a portion where the value of the difference number counter decreases downward) indicates a process in which the difference number counter is subtracted at the start of the game. Further, among the portions where the value of the difference number counter increases upward, the upward solid line arrow portion indicates processing for adding the difference number counter by winning. Furthermore, the upward broken arrow in the portion where the value of the difference counter increases upward indicates zero correction processing. Furthermore, a black dot portion indicates a loss. In the following, changes in the difference number counter will be described for the games M to V shown in FIG.

<Game M>
In the game M, the difference counter is subtracted to 0 by the insertion process. Game M is lost, and the difference counter value remains zero.

<Game N>
Next, in game N, the difference counter is subtracted to less than 0 by the insertion process. The game N is lost, and the difference counter value becomes 0 by zero correction.

<Game O>
Next, even in the game O, the difference counter is subtracted to less than 0 by the insertion process. The game O is lost, and the difference counter value becomes 0 by zero correction.

<Game P>
Next, in the game P, the difference counter is subtracted to less than 0 by the insertion process. In the game P, the small combination wins (the combination of symbols relating to the small combination is stopped) and the game medal is paid out, so the difference counter value is 0 or more.

<Game Q>
Next, in the game Q, the difference number counter value is subtracted by the insertion process to become 0 or more and less than 0. The game Q is lost, and the difference counter value becomes 0 by zero correction.

<Game R>
Next, in the game R, the difference number counter is subtracted to less than 0 by the insertion process. The game R is lost, and the difference counter value becomes 0 by zero correction.

<Game S>
Next, in game S, the difference counter is subtracted to less than 0 by the insertion process. The game S is a win and the difference counter value is 0 or more.

<Game T>
In the game T, the difference counter is subtracted by the insertion process to become 0 or more and less than 0. In the game T, since the small combination wins (the combination of symbols relating to the small combination is stopped) and the game medal is paid out, the difference counter value becomes 0 or more.
<Game U>
In the game U, the difference counter is subtracted by the insertion process, but becomes 0 or more. The game U is a winning, and the difference counter is further increased when it is 0 or more.
<Game V>
In game V, the difference counter is subtracted by the insertion process, but becomes 0 or more. Although not shown, since the small combination wins (the combination of symbols relating to the small combination is stopped) and the game medal is paid out, the difference counter is further increased to 0 or more.

<< Example of change of difference sheet counter (reaching 2400 sheets and clearing) >>
FIG. 227 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the difference counter changes as the game progresses. In FIG. 227, the horizontal axis indicates the number of games, and the vertical axis indicates a difference counter. In FIG. 227, a downward solid line arrow portion (a portion where the value of the difference number counter decreases downward) indicates a process in which the difference number counter is subtracted at the start of the game. Further, among the portions where the value of the difference number counter increases upward, the upward solid line arrow portion indicates processing for adding the difference number counter by winning. Furthermore, an upward broken arrow in a portion where the value of the difference counter increases upward indicates zero correction or clear processing. Furthermore, a black dot portion indicates a loss. Hereinafter, changes in the difference number counter will be described for the games A to I shown in FIG.

<Game A>
In game A, the difference counter is subtracted by the insertion process, but becomes 0 or more. In the game A, since the small combination wins (the combination of symbols relating to the small combination is stopped) and the game medal is paid out, the difference counter value further increases when it is 0 or more.

<Game B>
In game B, the difference counter is subtracted by the insertion process, but becomes 0 or more. Game B is lost and the difference counter value does not change.

<Games C, D, E>
In games C, D, and E, the difference counter is subtracted by the insertion process, but becomes 0 or more. In each of the games C, D, and E, since the small combination wins a prize (the combination of symbols relating to the small combination is stopped) and the game medal is paid out, the difference counter value gradually increases when it is 0 or more. In game E, the difference counter increases to reach 2400. As a result, the end condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference counter is cleared to zero.

<Game F>
Next, in the game F, it becomes a normal section, and the difference counter is subtracted by the insertion process to become less than 0. Game F is lost, and the difference counter value becomes zero by zero correction.

<Game G>
Next, in the game G, the difference number counter is subtracted by the insertion process to become less than 0. In the game G, the small combination wins (the combination of symbols related to the small combination is stopped) and the game medal is paid out, so the difference counter value is added to 0 or more.

<Game H>
Next, in game H, the difference number counter is subtracted to less than 0 by the insertion process. The game H is lost, and the difference counter value becomes 0 by zero correction.

<< Example of change in difference sheet counter (when moving to advantageous section by replay) >>
FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating a state where the difference number counter changes as the game progresses. In FIG. 228, the horizontal axis indicates the number of games, and the vertical axis indicates a difference counter. In FIG. 228, the downward solid line arrow portion (the portion where the value of the difference number counter decreases downward) indicates a process in which the difference number counter is subtracted at the start of the game. Further, among the portions where the value of the difference number counter increases upward, the upward solid line arrow portion indicates processing for adding the difference number counter by winning. Furthermore, a black dot portion indicates a loss. Hereinafter, changes in the difference number counter will be described for the games X to Z shown in FIG.

<Game X>
In the game X, the difference counter value is subtracted to 0 by the insertion process. Game X is lost, and the difference counter value remains zero.

<Game Y>
Next, in game Y, the difference counter value is subtracted by the insertion process to become less than zero. For the game Y, the lottery result is replay (replay), the symbol combination relating to the regame is stopped and displayed, and becomes 0 by automatic betting. In this game Y, an advantageous section shift lottery is won, and the next game Z shifts to an advantageous section.

<Game Z>
Next, in the game Z, the difference counter value is subtracted to less than 0 by the insertion process related to the automatic bet of the re-game. Game Z is a win and the difference counter is incremented to 0 or more. For the player, since the game won for replay is the final game in the normal section, the bet related to the first game in the advantageous section has already been executed in the automatic bet related to the replay, so the difference The counter value is subtracted by the number of automatic bets related to re-games, but the number of game medals newly inserted (betted) in the advantageous section is 0. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 228, after the shift to the advantageous section, the difference sheet counter value continues to increase without being zero-corrected, and when the end condition of 2400 sheets is satisfied, the difference sheet counter is In the situation of 2399, the game is executed with three new bets, the counter value becomes 2396, the combination of symbols for 15 payouts is stopped, the difference counter value becomes 2411 and the advantageous section ends. There is a case. Therefore, in the situation as shown in FIG. 228, since “−3” is changed to “2411” by the insertion process related to the automatic betting of the re-game in the first game, The maximum increase number is “2414”. Further, as a modification, in the case where the game can be executed with one bet, the difference counter value continues to increase without being zero-corrected after shifting to the advantageous section, and the end condition of 2400 is satisfied. In this case, in the situation where the difference counter is 2399, a game is newly executed with one bet, the counter value becomes 2398, the combination of symbols for 15 payouts is stopped, and the difference counter value is 2413. The advantageous section may end. For this reason, in the case where the game can be executed with one bet, it is changed from “−3” to “2413” by the insertion process related to the automatic bet of the re-game in the first game. The maximum increase in the difference sheet counter from “2416” is “2416”.

  In addition, as a configuration related to the difference sheet counter described above, the advantageous interval is terminated when the difference sheet counter value reaches 2400. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the difference sheet counter value exceeds 2400 (difference). The advantageous section may be terminated when the number counter value reaches 2401). In such a case, in the situation as shown in FIG. 228, after the shift to the advantageous section, the difference counter value continues to increase without being zero-corrected, and the end condition exceeding 2400 sheets is satisfied. In the situation where the difference number counter is 2400, the game is executed with three bets newly, the counter value becomes 2397, the combination of symbols for 15 payouts is stopped, and the difference number counter value is 2412. The advantageous section may end. Therefore, when the configuration in which the advantageous section is terminated when the difference counter value exceeds 2400 is applied to the situation as shown in FIG. 228, “−” by the insertion process related to the automatic bet of the re-game in the first game. Since “3” is changed to “2412”, the maximum increment of the difference counter after the shift to the advantageous section is “2415”. Further, as a modification, when the difference counter value exceeds 2400, the advantageous section ends, and when the game can be executed with one bet, the difference counter value after the transition to the advantageous section Continues to increase without being zero-corrected, and when the end condition exceeding 2400 is satisfied, the game is executed with a single bet in the situation where the difference counter is 2400, and the counter value is 2399. Thus, there is a case where the symbol combination for 15 payouts is stopped and displayed, the difference counter value is 2414, and the advantageous section ends. Therefore, when the advantage interval ends when the difference counter value exceeds 2400, and the game can be executed with one bet, the insertion process related to the automatic bet of the re-game in the first game From “−3” to “2414”, the maximum increment of the difference counter after the shift to the advantageous section is “2417”. It should be noted that the configuration in which the advantageous section is terminated when the difference counter value exceeds 2400 is applicable to all the embodiments.

  In this way, when the replay is entered into the advantageous section, the difference counter is counted from less than 0.

<<< Modification 1 of Sixth Embodiment >>>
As described above, the difference counter and the advantageous section remaining game number counter are counters for determining the ending condition of the advantageous section. In the above-described example, the example in which the same count as that in the advantageous section is executed in the normal section is shown. Below, the example which does not count in a normal area is shown.

<Difference counter>
In games 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 229 (a), processing similar to that in FIG. 224 (a) described above is executed. In game 3, the difference counter is cleared to zero.

  The games 4 to 6 are normal sections. First, in the games 4 to 6, the game is started by the insertion process, but the difference counter is not subtracted but the value is held and the zero is maintained.

  In games 7 to 9, the same processing as in FIG. 224 described above is executed.

<Advantageous section remaining game counter>
In games 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 229 (b), the same processing as in FIG. 224 (b) described above is executed. In game 3, the advantageous section remaining game number counter is cleared to zero.

  Game 4 to game 6 are normal sections. First, in games 4 to 6, the game is started by the insertion process, but the advantageous section remaining game number counter is not subtracted and the value is held and zero is maintained. Is done.

  In games 7 to 9, the same processing as in FIG. 224 (b) described above is executed, and the advantageous section remaining game number counter is decremented by 1 by the insertion processing.

<<< Modification 2 of Sixth Embodiment >>>
One of the features of the second modification of the sixth embodiment is that it is possible to draw an advantageous section transition lottery not only in the general game but also in a game state other than the general game including the inside of the BB. In other words, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, in general (a state in which the bonus is not being operated and the condition device related to the bonus is not elected is referred to as general), inside the BB, other than inside the general and BB The advantageous section shift lottery is possible even in the gaming state. In the following, this feature will be described using the table shown in FIG. FIG. 230 is a table showing the number of values for determining the winning probability of each condition device in each of a plurality of gaming states. Note that the table shown in FIG. 230 also shows the processing related to the advantageous section and the advantageous section transition probability. The processing related to the advantageous section and the advantageous section transition probability will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 230, the gaming state includes general (RT0 and RT1), BB inside, CB, 1 type BB1RB, 1 type BB2RB. The inside of the BB is a state where the BB combination is won and no prize is won, and here, it may be simply referred to as the inside. If the conditions described below are satisfied, an advantageous section transition lottery can be performed even inside the BB. Moreover, in general, it is a state which is not in BB inside and is not operating BB.

  In the example shown in FIG. 230, the condition devices are a re-playing combination, a winning combination and a bonus. There are replay 1, replay 2, and replay 3 in the replaying role. The winning roles include bells, watermelons and cherries. The bonus includes CB, 1 type BB1, and 1 type BB2.

  As described above, in the second modification of the sixth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed even in the game state other than the general, the inside of the BB, the inside of the general, and the inside of the BB. Is possible. This advantageous section shift lottery is a lottery for shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section. Below, the conditions for enabling the advantageous section shift lottery will be described.

<First condition for enabling lottery transfer to advantageous section>
First, in the gaming state where the number of lottery processing of the condition device is the same as the number of lottery processing of the condition device in general, it is possible to perform an advantageous section shift lottery. In other words, in the game state in which the number has changed with reference to the number of lottery processing of the condition device in general, the advantageous section shift lottery cannot be performed.

  For example, in the replay 1 shown in FIG. 230, the number of lottery processing of the condition device in the general (RT0, RT1) is 8978 (broken line portion), and the lottery processing of the condition device in the type 1 BB2RB is inside the BB. The number of places is also 8978 (broken line portion), and when the replay 1 is won in the general (RT0, RT1), inside the BB, and in the 1st type BB2RB, the advantageous section shift lottery can be executed. On the other hand, the number of places in CB is 16384, the place number in 1 type BB1RB is 0, and is different from the place number 8978 in general (RT0, RT1), so replay 1 in CB or 1 kind BB1RB. Even in the case of winning, the advantageous section shift lottery cannot be executed.

  Further, in the replay 2 shown in FIG. 230, the number of lottery processing of the condition device in the general RT0 is 500, the number of lottery processing of the condition device in the general RT1 is 18000, and the inside of the BB The number of lottery processing of the condition device is 500. The number of RT0s in general and the number in BB is 500, which is the same value, but the number of RT1 in general varies from the number of RT0 in general. Since the number of lottery processing of the condition device fluctuates in general, the number of lottery processing of the condition device in general cannot be used as a reference, so it is advantageous to win the replay 2 in any gaming state The transfer lottery cannot be executed.

  Further, in the watermelon shown in FIG. 230, the number of lottery processing of the condition device in the general (RT0, RT1) is 180 (broken line portion), and lottery of the condition device in the BB, in the CB, and in the type 1 BB2RB The number of processing is 180 (broken line part), and when a watermelon is won in general (RT0, RT1), in BB, in CB, or in 1 type BB2RB, an advantageous section shift lottery can be executed. . On the other hand, since the number of lottery processing of the condition device in 1 type BB1RB is 500, which is different from the number 180 in general (RT0, RT1), even if the watermelon is won in 1 type BB1RB, An advantageous section shift lottery cannot be executed.

<Examples of conditions that cannot be used to execute the lottery for lottery section>
When the lottery probability of the condition device in the general state is different from the lottery probability of the condition device in the BB internal state, the condition device is configured not to execute the advantageous section shift lottery.

  For example, in the replay 3 shown in FIG. 230, the number related to the replay 3 in the general (RT0 and RT1) is 200, and the number related to the replay 3 in the BB is 10, which is more common than in the BB. Medium (RT0 and RT1) is more advantageous. For this reason, even if it is a case where replay 3 is won in any gaming state, the advantageous section shift lottery cannot be executed.

<Second condition for enabling advantageous section shift lottery>
Even if it is a condition device whose number of lottery values does not change, a condition device that is determined not to perform an advantageous section transition lottery in general, should perform an advantageous section transition lottery even in other gaming states including the inside of the BB. I can't.

  For example, in the bell shown in FIG. 230, the number of condition devices in general (RT0, RT1) is 8192, and the number of condition devices in BB and in CB is 8192. The number does not change. Therefore, as a general rule, when a bell is won in the general (RT0 and RT1), inside the BB, and during the CB, it is possible to draw a lottery to shift to an advantageous section. However, when it is determined that the advantage section lottery will not be drawn even if the bell is won in general (RT0 and RT1) due to game play etc., it is a case where the bell is won in the BB or in the CB. However, it is not possible to draw a lottery for an advantageous section.

  In addition, whether or not the advantageous section shift lottery is performed in a game state other than the general game can be arbitrarily determined.

  For example, in the cherry shown in FIG. 230, the number of lottery processing of the condition device is 256 in all gaming states in general (RT0, RT1), inside BB, in CB, in 1 type BB1RB, and in 1 type BB2RB. However, when winning a cherry in 1 type BB2RB due to game play etc., even if it is determined not to make a lottery to move to an advantageous section, during the general (RT0, RT1), inside the BB, during the CB, When a cherry is won in the first type BB1RB (broken line portion), an advantageous section shift lottery can be performed.

<For bonus combination>
1 type BB1 or 1 type BB2, which is a bonus combination, is a condition device that can be selected by lottery processing in general, but is already in the state of winning 1 type BB1 or 1 type BB2 inside the BB. Therefore, it is not won by the lottery process. Accordingly, it can be said that the number of the bonus combination varies between the general and the inside of the BB. However, in the case of the bonus combination, it is possible to draw the advantageous section shift lottery as an exception. It should be noted that the advantage segment shift lottery may or may not be performed depending on the general bonus combination, but in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the advantage segment shift lottery is performed based on the general bonus combination.

  In the CB shown in FIG. 230, the number of condition devices in the general (RT0, RT1) and CB is 64, and the number of condition devices in the BB is zero. In this way, the number of condition devices inside the BB fluctuates with 0, but for the CB that is the bonus combination, when the CB is won during the general (RT0, RT1) and CB, the advantageous section transition lottery can do.

  Similarly, in Type BB1 shown in FIG. 230, the number of condition devices in the general (RT0, RT1) and CB is 100, and the number of condition devices in the BB is 0. As described above, the number of the condition device in the BB varies with 0, but the 1 type BB1 which is a bonus combination is advantageous when the 1 type BB1 is won in the general (RT0, RT1) and CB. You can draw a lottery.

  Further, in the type BB2 shown in FIG. 230, the number of condition devices in the general (RT0, RT1) and CB is 25, and the number of condition devices in the BB is zero. As described above, the number of the condition device in the BB varies with 0, but the 1 type BB2 which is a bonus combination is advantageous when the 1 type BB2 is won in the general (RT0, RT1) and CB. You can draw a lottery.

  The numbers shown in the column of “advantageous section shift lottery number” in the table shown in FIG. 230 are the numbers of lottery processes for shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section when each condition device is won. In addition, the value shown in the “advantageous section transition probability” column of the table shown in FIG. 230 is the probability of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section when each condition device is won.

  For example, the replay 1 shown in FIG. 230 is won with a probability of 8978/65536 in general (RT0, RT1). Furthermore, when replay 1 is won, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section with a probability of 64/65536. Therefore, the probability of winning the replay 1 and shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is 2.34 / 17500.

  The watermelon shown in FIG. 230 is won with a probability of 180/65536 in general (RT0, RT1). Furthermore, when a watermelon is won, the normal zone is shifted to the advantageous zone with a probability of 16384/65536. Therefore, the probability of winning the watermelon and shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is 12.02 / 17500.

  In addition, the cherry shown in FIG. 230 is won with a probability of 256/65536 in general (RT0, RT1). Furthermore, when winning a cherry, it shifts from a normal section to an advantageous section with a probability of 4096/65536. Therefore, the probability of winning the cherry and shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is 4.27 / 17500.

  In addition, the CB shown in FIG. 230 is won with a probability of 64/65536 in general (RT0, RT1). Furthermore, when CB is won, it shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section with a probability of 4096/65536. Therefore, the probability of winning the CB and shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is 1.07 / 17500.

  In addition, one type BB1 shown in FIG. 230 is won with a probability of 100/65536 in general (RT0, RT1). Furthermore, when 1 type BB1 is won, it shifts from a normal area to an advantageous area with a probability of 4096/65536. Therefore, the probability of winning the 1st class BB1 and shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is 1.67 / 17500.

  Further, the type 1 BB2 shown in FIG. 230 is won with a probability of 25/65536 in general (RT0, RT1). Furthermore, when winning 1 type BB2, it shifts from a normal area to an advantageous area with a probability of 32768/65536. Therefore, the probability of winning the type 1 BB2 and shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is 3.34 / 17500.

<Normal section and advantageous section>
In the normal section, the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section has to be linked to the lottery of the condition device, but in the advantageous section, the lottery process can be performed without linking to the lottery of the conditional device. I want to move to. Therefore, although it is desired to shift to the advantageous section by lottery of the condition device in the general and BB inside, the condition device that can perform the advantageous section shift lottery in the BB is limited to the condition device that can be advantageous lot shift lottery in general. Has been.

<In CB (Type 2 special feature)>
In CB, the game can be executed on the assumption that all the condition devices related to winning are unconditionally won (all the condition devices related to winning are operating). In this way, all condition devices related to winning are unconditionally selected. Further, during CB, an internal lottery may be executed (replay, bonus, etc.), or an internal lottery may not be executed. Further, when the internal lottery is not executed during the CB, it is preferable not to execute the advantageous section shift lottery during the CB, and when the internal lottery is executed during the CB, as a result of the internal lottery, In general, when a condition device capable of executing the advantageous section shift lottery is won, the advantageous section shift lottery may be executed.

<Relationship with specified number>
The table shown in FIG. 230 is for when the prescribed number is 3, but the game can be executed with two or three prescribed numbers as in the sixth embodiment. In the game machine having A, as an execution mode of the advantageous section shift lottery in the game won by Cherry A,
(1) In general, if the number of cherries to be won differs between the specified number of three and the specified number of two, the advantageous section shift lottery is not executed by the winning of Cherry A.
(2) In general, even if the number of winning cherries differs between the specified number of three and the specified number of two, the advantageous section transition lottery described above with reference to FIG. 230 can be executed for each specified number. In the state, it is possible to execute an advantageous section shift lottery by winning Cherry A.
(3) The number of payouts when the symbol combination related to the cherry A when the specified number is 3 is stopped and the payout number when the symbol combination related to the cherry A when the specified number is 2 is stopped and displayed is the same. In general, even if the number of winning cherries differs between the specified number of three and the specified number of two, in the state where the advantageous section shift lottery described in FIG. 230 can be executed for each specified number An advantageous section shift lottery can be executed by winning Cherry A.
(4) The number of payouts when the symbol combination related to cherry A when the specified number is three is stopped and the payout number when the symbol combination related to cherry A when the specified number is two is displayed differently. In general, even if the number of winning cherries differs between the specified number of three and the specified number of two, the advantageous section transition lottery described above with reference to FIG. 230 can be executed for each specified number. Can perform a lottery to move to the advantageous section by winning Cherry A.
You may comprise as mentioned above.

  FIG. 231 is an RT state transition diagram (upper stage) and an AT state transition diagram (lower stage) realized by the table shown in FIG. 230.

<RT state transition>
After the RAM is initialized, the RT state shifts to the general RT0 (replay winning probability: low), and the symbol of the replaying role (replay 1 etc.) is stopped and displayed in the general RT0. , Transition to RT1 in general (replay winning probability: high). In addition, in the general RT1 (replay winning probability: high), the symbols such as the replaying player (replay 2) are stopped and displayed, so that the general RT1 (replay winning probability: low) Transition.

  In addition, by winning 1 type BB during the general (RT0 or RT1), the inside of the 1 type BB is moved, and the symbol combination related to the 1 type BB is stopped and displayed in the 1 type BB. Transition during the operation of Type 1 BB. Returning to general medium (RT0) by satisfying the termination condition in Type 1 BB.

  Furthermore, when the type 1 BB is won during the general (RT0 or RT1) and the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB is stopped and displayed in the game, the process shifts to the type 1 BB operation.

  Furthermore, when the CB is won during the general game (RT0 or RT1) and the symbol combination related to the CB is stopped and displayed in the game, the process shifts to the CB operation. Returning to the general state (RT0 or RT1) that is the RT state at the time of CB winning (or may be RT0 or RT1 even during the CB operation) by satisfying the end condition during the CB operation.

<AT state transition>
The AT state is a normal section and an advantageous section, and a predetermined condition (for example, when an advantageous section transition lottery is won in the normal section, the advantageous section is entered, and the advantageous section end condition is satisfied in the advantageous section. In this case, the transition is made between the normal section and the advantageous section. When a condition device (replay 1, watermelon, cherry, CB, type 1 BB1, type 1 BB2, etc. shown in FIG. 231) is won in the normal interval, an advantageous interval shift lottery is executed and a predetermined probability (in FIG. 231) When a win is made with a probability determined by the number of lottery value for advantageous section transition shown), the transition to the advantageous section is made. The advantageous sections include a high probability state, an AT state, and a CZ, and the probabilities shown in the column of the “favorable section transition process” in FIG. 231 indicate that the normal section has a high probability state, an AT state, and CZ (chance zone). Move to one.

  For example, when winning the replay 1 and winning the advantageous section transition lottery process, the probability shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section of high probability state (20 games) with a probability of 58/64, and the probability of 6/64. Then, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section (20 games) of the CZ.

  Also, if you win the watermelon and win the advantageous section shift lottery process, you will move from the normal section to the high-probability section (20 games) with a probability of 31/64 and with a probability of 32/64. Then, the normal section shifts to the advantageous section of CZ (20 games), and the normal section shifts to the advantageous section in the AT state (20 games) with a probability of 1/64.

  In addition, when winning the cherry and winning the advantageous section shift lottery process, the probability shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section in the high probability state (20 games) with a probability of 42/64, with a probability of 21/64. From the normal section, it shifts to the advantageous section of CZ (10 games), and from the normal section to the advantageous section in the AT state (20 games) with a probability of 1/64.

  In addition, when winning the CB and winning the advantageous section transition lottery process, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section in the high probability state (20 games) is made with a probability of 32/64, and with the probability of 32/64. Then, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section (the number of games is 50) in the AT state.

  In addition, when winning the kind 1 BB1 and winning the advantageous section transition lottery process, it shifts from the normal section to the high-probable advantageous section (20 games) with a probability of 32/64. Probability shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section in the AT state (the number of games is 50).

  In addition, when winning the type 1 BB2 and winning the advantageous section shift lottery process, it shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section of high probability state (20 games) with a probability of 32/64, Probability shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section in the AT state (the number of games is 50).

  When the end condition is satisfied in each of the high probability state, AT state, and CZ of the advantageous section, the normal section is returned. As described above, the conditions for ending the advantageous section include (1) when the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds 1500, (2) when the difference number counted from the starting game exceeds 2400, (3 ) Arbitrary conditions (for example, the number of AT remaining games is 0, the continuous lottery related to the number of sets is not won, the predetermined game has passed since the CZ without winning the AT lottery in the CZ, Examples of arbitrary conditions include a stop operation performed in a push order different from the push order displayed on the push order display device D270, an RT state transition, an AT state transition, a bonus actuated, etc.) There are three.

  In the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the advantageous section is configured to have a high probability state, an in-AT state, and a CZ, but the in-AT state is a push order bell as in the above-described embodiment. This is a state related to AT that executes push order navigation in a game that is won for the push order of (highly likely to be executed), and the high probability state and CZ are more likely to shift to the AT state than the normal state. State related to AT. In addition, CZ is in a state related to an AT that is more easily shifted to an AT state than a high probability state. For example, in a game where a cherry is won in a normal state, the right to shift to an AT state is acquired at 1/1000. The game that won the cherry in the high probability state gets the right to shift to the AT state in 1/10, and the game that won the cherry in the CZ acquires the right to shift to the AT state in 1/1 You may comprise.

<<< Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment >>>
<In the general case where a lottery is selected to win an advantageous section by winning a bonus>
FIG. 232 (a-1) is a table showing an advantageous section transition lottery in general, and FIG. 232 (a-2) is a table showing an advantageous section transition lottery in BB. In FIG. 232 (a-1) and (a-2), for the sake of simplicity, the result of the lottery of the condition device is “normal replay”, “small role”, “bonus”, and “lost”. As described above, the condition device that can perform the advantageous section transition lottery inside the BB can be drawn even in the general public, and the number of lottery processing of the conditional device in the general and inside the BB is large. It does not fluctuate.

  As shown in the advantageous section shift lottery (a-1), the lottery results in general are “normal replay”, “small role”, and “bonus”. On the other hand, as shown in the advantageous section shift lottery (a-2), the lottery results in the BB are “normal replay”, “small role”, and “losing”. As described above, when a random number that is won in the general public is acquired in the bonus (for example, in the type 1 BB), the condition device related to the bonus has already been won. In the figure, the bonus is not newly won. In general, the case where a random number that will be won in the bonus is acquired in the inside of the bonus is “lost”. In addition, the winning rate and whether or not to execute the advantageous segment shift lottery between the normal replay and the small role is the same in the inside of the bonus and inside the bonus. In addition, depending on the winning of the bonus in the general (winning of the condition device related to the bonus), it is possible to win the advantageous section shift lottery, but in the case of a loss inside the bonus, the advantageous section shift lottery is not executed (not won), The inside and the inside of the bonus are configured so that the general inside is more likely to win the advantageous section transition lottery (easily transition to the advantageous section). It should be noted that although it is possible to win the advantageous section shift lottery by winning the bonus in general, it is configured not to win the AT lottery by winning the bonus.

  In this way, even in the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, which is a game in which a game progresses inside the bonus by configuring the advantageous section shift lottery even in general, the game hall manager Even if the player forgets to execute the game with two bets and shift to the inside bonus (RT2), the advantage section lottery can be executed during the general period, so the player is disadvantaged. It can be made difficult to wear. In addition, even when the player executes a game with two bets by the game hall manager and shifts to the inside of the bonus (RT2), even if the player executes the game, a lottery to shift to the advantageous section by winning the general bonus Since the player can start the game from the advantageous section on the first day of introduction in the game hall, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved. Similarly, it is possible to start the game from the advantageous section on the first day of introduction in the game hall by configuring the general one so that it is easier to win the advantageous section transition lottery than inside the bonus inside, In addition, since the player can start the game after the manager has executed the game in general, where it is easy to win the advantageous section transition lottery, the possibility that the player starts the game from the advantageous section can be increased.

<In the general case where the lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is not performed by winning a bonus>
FIG. 232 (b-1) is a table showing an advantageous section transition lottery in general, and FIG. 232 (b-2) is a table showing an advantageous section transition lottery in BB. Also in FIGS. 232 (b-1) and (b-2), the result of the lottery of the condition device is “normal replay” for the sake of simplicity, as in FIGS. 232 (a-1) and (a-2) described above. And “small role”, “bonus” and “losing”.

  As shown in the advantageous section shift lottery (b-1), the lottery results in general are “normal replay”, “small role”, and “bonus”. In the example shown in the advantageous section shift lottery (b-1), in general, the advantageous section shift lottery is not performed even when “bonus” is won. In addition, the winning rate and whether or not to execute the advantageous segment shift lottery between the normal replay and the small role is the same in the inside of the bonus and inside the bonus. On the other hand, as shown in the advantageous section shift lottery (b-2), the lottery results in the BB are “normal replay”, “small role”, and “losing”. During the inside of the BB, since the bonus is won and the bonus is not won, the “bonus” is not won. For this reason, in the inside of the BB, the “bonus” in the general is made to correspond to “losing” in the same way as the advantageous section shift lottery (a-2). For example, the area from the lower limit value to the upper limit value that determines the number of “bonus” in general is changed to correspond to “losing” in the BB.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 232 (b-1) and (b-2), neither the general “bonus” nor the “losing” inside the BB is selected. Therefore, an advantageous section shift lottery is performed only by “normal replay” and “small role” both in general and in the BB. When configured in this way, the ease of shifting to the advantageous section in general is the same as the ease of shifting to the advantageous section within the BB. That is, (ease of transition to an advantageous section in general) = (ease of transition to an advantageous section within the BB).

  In this way, by making the winning interval of the advantageous section transition lottery the same in the general and inside the bonus, it is different from the normal game method such that the player intentionally executes a game with two bets. Even when a game is executed by the game method and transferred to the general game, it is not advantageous for the player, so that an unintended capture can be prevented.

<Relationship between advantageous section winning and AT winning>
FIG. 232 (c-1) is a table showing the relationship between advantageous section transition lottery and AT winning in general, and FIG. 232 (c-2) shows the relationship between advantageous section transition lottery and AT winning in BB. It is a table to show. In FIG. 232 (c-1) and (c-2), for the sake of simplicity, the lottery results of the condition devices are represented by “normal replay”, “bell”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “bonus”, and “losing”. " As described above, the condition device that can perform the advantageous section transition lottery inside the BB can be drawn even in the general public, and the number of lottery processing of the conditional device in the general and inside the BB is large. It does not fluctuate.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (c-1), the lottery results in general are “normal replay”, “bell”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “bonus”. In general, advantageous lot shift lottery can be performed corresponding to all of “normal replay”, “bell”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “bonus”. In this way, the advantageous section transition lottery can be executed for all condition devices of “normal replay”, “bell”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “bonus”. "And" Cherry "are only compatible with two condition devices.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 232 (c-2), the lottery results within the BB are “normal replay”, “bell”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “losing”. During the inside of the BB, since the bonus is won and the bonus is not won, the “bonus” is not won. For this reason, in the inside of the BB, the “bonus” in general is made to correspond to “losing”. For example, the area from the lower limit value to the upper limit value that determines the number of “bonus” in general is changed to correspond to “losing” in the BB.

  Within the BB, an advantageous section shift lottery can be performed corresponding to “normal replay”, “bell”, “watermelon”, and “cherry”. As in general, winning of AT corresponds to only two condition devices of “watermelon” and “cherry”, so-called rare role.

  As a gaming store, we want to increase the operating rate of gaming machines by making it easier to shift to advantageous sections. However, if it is always executed up to the AT win in the advantageous section transition lottery, the disadvantage of the game shop becomes large, and it can be said that it is rather too much considering the balance between the profit of the game shop and the profit of the player.

  However, depending on the type of condition device, there is a possibility that a sufficient balance can be achieved even if the AT is selected in the advantageous section shift lottery. For example, when a rare role such as “Cherry” or “Watermelon” is used to shift to an advantageous section, it is possible to balance profits even if AT is elected immediately.

<Expectation of winning AT>
The degree of expectation of winning an AT can be higher for a rare role such as “Cherry” or “Watermelon” than the bonus. In other words, (AT expectation degree corresponding to “Watermelon”)> (AT expectation degree corresponding to “Bonus”) and (AT expectation degree corresponding to “Cherry”)> (“Bonus”) Corresponding AT winning expectation) is established.

<Winning expectation of advantageous section>
On the other hand, the expected degree of winning the advantageous section is the same for all condition devices. That is, (the expected degree of winning of the advantageous section corresponding to “watermelon”) = (expected degree of winning of the advantageous section corresponding to “bonus”), or (the expected degree of winning of the advantageous section corresponding to “cherry”) = (Expectation of winning of advantageous section corresponding to “bonus”) is established.

  In this way, since the expected degree of winning in the advantageous section is the same for all the conditional devices, it can increase the player's expectation, and the expected degree of winning the AT can be reduced to rare such as “Cherry” and “Watermelon”. By raising only the role, it is possible to balance the profit of the game shop and the profit of the player.

  As described above, in the configurations of (c-1) and (c-2), as the advantageous section shift lottery, as in the above-described configurations of (a-1) and (a-2), the general bonus It is structured so that it is possible to win the advantageous section transition lottery, and the general inside is easier to win the advantageous section transition lottery than the inside of the bonus. Even if the player forgets to shift to the inside of the bonus (RT2), it is possible to execute the advantageous section shifting lottery even in general, so that the player can hardly suffer the disadvantage. In addition, even when the player executes a game with two bets by the game hall manager and shifts to the inside of the bonus (RT2), even if the player executes the game, a lottery to shift to the advantageous section by winning the general bonus Since the player can start the game from the advantageous section on the first day of introduction in the game hall, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved. Similarly, it is possible to start the game from the advantageous section on the first day of introduction in the game hall by configuring the general one so that it is easier to win the advantageous section transition lottery than inside the bonus inside, In addition, since the player can start the game after the manager has executed the game in general, where it is easy to win the advantageous section transition lottery, the possibility that the player starts the game from the advantageous section can be increased. However, if it is configured to win up to the AT lottery by winning the bell, normal replay and bonus in general, the AT lottery has already been won when the player starts the game on the first day of introduction in the game hall. There is a possibility that a plurality of gaming machines may exist, and there is a possibility that the game hall may suffer a significant loss that is not intended. Therefore, in the configurations of (c-1) and (c-2), it is possible to win the advantageous zone shift lottery by winning the bell, normal replay and bonus in general, but not the AT lottery. ing. In addition, it may be configured to be able to win the AT lottery by the bell in the general, normal replay, if it is configured not to win the AT lottery by the general bonus winning that the game hall manager needs to win no problem.

  In addition, although the configuration that can win the advantageous section transition lottery by winning the bonus in the general is illustrated, it may be configured to win the advantageous section transition lottery with a probability of 100% when the bonus is won in general. . Such a configuration is applicable to all the embodiments described above, and is also applicable to all embodiments described later. In addition, even when a winning combination that can execute an advantageous section transition lottery other than the bonus is won, the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery may be 100%. For example, it may be configured to win 100% in the advantageous section transition lottery in both cases where a bonus is won in general and a case where a cherry is won. In addition, in such a configuration, when the bonus is won during the general period, the AT lottery will not be won even if the bonus period is shifted, while the advantageous period when the cherry is won during the general period You may be able to win the AT lottery, and you can win the AT lottery regardless of whether you win the cherry or the bonus during the public. It may be configured such that the AT lottery is easier to win if the cherry is won than the case.

(Seventh embodiment)
In the sixth embodiment, a configuration in which a game can be executed with two and three as the prescribed number is illustrated, but a gaming machine having such a configuration is not limited to the configuration of the sixth embodiment. Therefore, as a configuration of a gaming machine that can execute a game with two and three cards applicable to this example, a configuration different from the sixth embodiment is a seventh embodiment, and only differences from the sixth embodiment are provided. This will be described in detail below. In addition, it supplements that there is no problem even if the structure which is not explained in detail in 7th Embodiment applies the same structure as 6th Embodiment.

  First, FIG. 233 is a list of basic specifications of the swivel type gaming machine in the seventh embodiment. The swivel type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment has a prescribed number of three and two, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 are all 20 and the effective line for which a winning decision is made. Is one line of “middle stage of left reel M51, middle stage of middle reel M52, middle stage of right reel M53”. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, a game can be executed with three bets (a prescribed number of three) or two bets (a prescribed number of two). Although details will be described later, when the player progresses the game, the game is progressed with all three bets. The maximum payout number is 15 and the minimum payout number is 1 (correspondence between the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). In addition, the order of priority winning (in order of drawing-in priority) is “replaying role → small role (bell, etc.) → bonus role” from the highest priority. For example, replaying role and bonus role are established at the same time. If the player has won a re-combination role (such as a combination of a re-playing role and a bonus role or winning a re-playing role within the bonus carrying a bonus role) In a situation where there is still a possibility that the combination and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination will be stopped, the position corresponding to both the symbol corresponding to the re-playing combination and the symbol corresponding to the bonus combination (stopped on the active line) When the stop button is operated at a position where it can be displayed), the symbol corresponding to the re-playing role is drawn on the active line (replaying the re-playing role and the small role in the same manner). Useful Draw with priority response was symbols). Stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the re-playing combination may be referred to as stop-display of the re-playing combination, and stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination may be referred to as stop-displaying of the bonus combination. It is supplemented that the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination may be stopped and displayed, and the small combination may be referred to as winning.

  Further, the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and the number of frames of each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of the effective line is changed (for example, 5 lines of 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to a line and changed to one line of the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53). In addition, as a pull-in control (sometimes referred to as stop control) when a push order small role that gives different profits to the player according to the push order is won, if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, payout Controls to stop and display combinations of symbols with a relatively large number of symbols, and the number of payouts will be relatively small when the wrong answer is pressed in a different order from the correct answer and the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing. The combination is controlled so as to be able to stop display (which is realized by using the number priority control or the number priority control for each reel. Details of the number priority control and the number priority control will be described later).

  Next, FIG. 234 is a list of reel arrangements of the swivel type gaming machine in the seventh embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames (0 to 19), and the symbols are “red seven”, “white seven”, “ There are 10 types: “Sheep”, “Replay”, “Bell”, “Watermelon”, “Cherry A”, “Cherry B”, “Blank A”, and “Blank B”. Here, “Blank A” and “Blank B” are symbols included in the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination like the other symbols, and do not mean the symbol that does not constitute the winning combination, As the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination including “Blank B”, for example, “Bell Cherry A / Blank B” is replay 03, and “Blank A / Cherry A / sheep” is replay 06. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type of design is increased / decreased / changed.

  Next, FIGS. 235 to 239 are symbol combination lists 1 to 5 in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device. As will be described later, according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, Any one of the symbol combinations is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the one line described above). Even when the same type of symbols is not arranged on the effective line, the same symbols may be arranged in a line on a line other than the effective line when viewed from the player. Moreover, in 7th Embodiment, it is a 1st type BB combination (The combination continuous action | operation apparatus which concerns on a 1st type special combination act | operates when the symbol combination corresponding to 1st type BB combination stops display. In the following, the symbol combination corresponding to “BB combination and bonus combination” may be referred to as “White Seven Watermelon.” It has two symbol combinations of “Sheep” and 1 type BB-B (RB is continuously operated and finished with payout exceeding 23 sheets). In addition, in 1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-B which are BB roles, the conditions for winning are determined for each specified number. First, Type 1 BB-A is a BB role that may be won when the prescribed number is two, and Type 1 BB-A is not won when the prescribed number is three (has a random number to win) Not configured). Moreover, 1 type BB-B is a BB combination that may be won when the specified number is 3, and when the specified number is 2, 1 type BB-B is configured not to win. In the seventh embodiment, when the first type BB combination wins and the BB is executed, the RB is continuously operated until the BB is finished. In all the games during the BB (in the RB), A lottery table is configured to refer to a single lottery table (this is a method that does not switch the table that is referred to during a role lottery during the execution of a single BB, and hereinafter referred to as an all JACIN type) There). Note that the format of the first type BB combination is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the table referred to in the combination lottery can be switched during the execution of one BB. When the push order bell, which is a condition device of “winning-A1” to “winning-D6” described later, is won, the pushing order that is most advantageous to the player (when pushing order navigation is executed, the pushing order is performed). When the reels are stopped in the same pushing order as the navigation), the symbol combinations “Win 01” to “Win 06” corresponding to No. 85 to No. 93 are stopped and 15 game medals are paid out. When the reels are stopped in a pressing order different from the pressing order that is most advantageous to the player, the symbol combinations corresponding to No. 94 to No. 145 corresponding to “No. 07” to “No. 31” are stopped and displayed. The medals are paid out or the symbol combinations of “winning 07” to “winning 31” are not stopped and displayed.

  Next, FIG. 240 is a list of condition devices in the seventh embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may also be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the seventh embodiment, re-playing roles are provided from re-playing-A to re-playing-M (winning numbers 1 to 13), and the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53. Depending on the situation, the re-gamer to be stopped and displayed can be different. In the re-game, the condition devices that can be won differ depending on whether the prescribed number is three or two. For example, re-game-A to re-game-H (winning numbers 1 to 8) are condition devices that serve as re-games that can be won when the prescribed number is 3, and re-game-I to re-game M Is a condition device that becomes a re-playing combination that can be won when the prescribed number is two. Thus, in the seventh embodiment, there are condition devices that can be won for each specified number and condition devices that cannot be won. Winning-A1 to Winning-D6 (winning numbers 14 to 37) as pushing order bells is a pushing order that can be won when the prescribed number is 3, and the reels are stopped in the most advantageous pushing order. By performing the operation, it is possible to obtain the payout of the 15-sheet combination with the most payout, and the reel stop operation is not performed in the most advantageous pushing order, so that the single-sheet combination is acquired. Or there is no payout. Winning-E (winning number 38) is a conditional device that can obtain one payout when the prescribed number is 3, but when a player performs a reel stop operation, It is possible to obtain a single payout by performing a stop operation in the range (a range in which the symbol combination constituting the prize-E can be stopped), but when the stop operation is not performed in a specific range The symbol combination constituting the prize-E is not stopped and displayed (since it cannot be withdrawn), and no payout is made. Winning-F to winning-M (winning numbers 39 to 46) are condition devices that can win when the prescribed number is two. Winning-N (winning number 47) is a condition device that allows one payout to be obtained when the prescribed number is two, but in the same manner as winning-E (winning number 38), When a player performs a reel stop operation, it is possible to obtain one payout by performing the stop operation within a specific range (a range in which the symbol combination constituting the winning-E can be stopped). When the stop operation is not performed within the range, the symbol combination constituting the winning -N is not stopped and displayed (since it cannot be withdrawn), and no payout is made. In the winning-O and winning-P (winning numbers 48, 49), it is a condition device that can be won while the BB combination is operating. In 1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-B, it is what is called a BB role. In this example, the RB is configured to continuously operate during the operation of the one type BB-A and the one type BB-B, but the BB role is not limited to this, for example, the one type BB operation. A so-called shift RB for performing RB lottery may be mounted therein.

  Here, in the seventh embodiment, as illustrated in the item of “conditional device breakdown” in the rightmost column, according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Multiple types of symbol combinations (names) can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combinations (names) that have the same winning number among the multiple types of symbol combinations (names) are grouped together from the right. This is illustrated by the item “conditional device” in the column. Specifically, for example, in the “re-game-A” that is a condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, “re-game” is selected according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three symbol combinations (names) “01”, “replay 02”, and “replay 03” can be stopped and displayed. In “winning-A1” that is a condition device corresponding to the winning number 14 Are 5 types of “winning 01”, “winning 07”, “winning 08”, “winning 16” and “winning 20” according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53. The symbol combination (name) is configured to be stopped and displayed. “Replay 01” and the like are names of symbol combinations, and there are a plurality of symbol combinations that can be “replay 01”. In addition, a name such as “replay 01” or a condition device such as “replay-A” may be referred to as a re-game player, and a name such as “winning 01” or a condition device such as “winning-A1” may be reduced. A condition device such as “1 type BB-A” may be referred to as a BB combination.

  Next, in the “role” item, the role of the “condition device” is illustrated, and the “normal replay” corresponding to the winning numbers 1 to 4 depends on the pressing order of the stop buttons. In other words, this is a condition device related to a re-game in which a re-gamer (a combination of symbols related to a re-game) in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. The “watermelon” corresponding to the winning number 5 is a conditional device related to the re-playing role, but by performing a stop operation so that the watermelon is stopped and displayed on a predetermined reel, a game is performed when all reels are stopped. When viewed from the person, the watermelons appear to be aligned downward (the watermelon symbols stop and display on the upper stage of the left reel, the middle stage of the middle reel, and the lower stage of the right reel). The “watermelon” corresponding to the winning number 5 is configured such that the cherry B can be stopped as a substitute pattern of the watermelon even when the stop operation is performed so that the watermelon is not stopped and displayed on the predetermined reel. Even if the watermelon symbol is not stopped and displayed on the upper part of the left reel, the middle part of the middle reel, and the lower part of the right reel, one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning number 5 “replay 05” is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that a situation unfavorable to the player does not occur. “Cherry” corresponding to the winning number 6 is a condition device related to the re-playing role like the winning number 5, but when the stop operation of the left reel M51 is performed, the cherry A or the cherry B is the upper stage of the left reel. , And can be stopped at either the middle stage or the lower stage. When all reels are stopped, the cherry symbol may be stopped and displayed in various stop modes (for example, cherry A-cherry A-cherry A when descending to the right, and cherry only at the bottom of the left reel). A, cherry A on the bottom of the left reel, cherry A on the middle of the middle reel, and no cherry symbol on the right reel). Similarly to the “watermelon” corresponding to the winning number 5, this is a condition device related to the re-gamer, and even if the cherry tree symbol is stopped and displayed on the left reel, the winning number 6 The corresponding “replay 06” or “replay 07” is stopped and displayed, so that a disadvantageous situation for the player does not occur. These re-players related to “Watermelon” and “Cherry” mainly shift the gaming state to a gaming state advantageous for the player (advantageous section) (execute advantageous area transition lottery), or during AT It is a condition device that plays a role that is advantageous to the player by performing a lottery for adding the number of AT sets in the state or the like, or performing a lottery for adding the number of remaining games in the AT state. “Strong Cherry (AT Direct Hit Winner)” and “Reach Eye (AT Direct Win Winner)” corresponding to Winner No. 7 and Winner No. 8 are re-playing players as in Winner No. 5 and Winner No. 6. This is a conditional device that can execute an advantageous section shift lottery that shifts the gaming state to the AT state. “Replay-I” to “Replay-M” corresponding to the winning numbers 9 to 13 are replaying players like the winning numbers 1 to 8, but the winning numbers 1 to 8 are the prescribed numbers that can be won Are different. The re-game players corresponding to the winning numbers 9 to 13 are condition devices that can be won when the prescribed number is two, and are condition devices that cannot be won when the prescribed number is three. Note that the role of the re-playing role corresponding to the winning numbers 9 to 13 is the same as that of the condition device having the same role among the winning numbers 1 to 8, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, “push order bell A” to “push order bell D” corresponding to the winning numbers 14 to 37 are condition devices that may have different small winning combinations depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected. For example, “left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3”, and in the case of “123”, “left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53” is stopped in the pressing order. This means that the reel stop operation is performed in the order of “123” = “left → middle → right”. For example, in the case of “winning prize A-1” (winning number 14), “123” = “left → middle → right” is stopped in the order (correct answer in the push order), and 15 game medals that are the maximum number of winnings The symbol combination “winning 01” that can be acquired is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that when the reels are stopped in the pushing order other than the pushing order in which the maximum number of obtained sheets can be obtained, that is, if the correct answer cannot be made in the pushing order, one sheet is paid out or no payout is made. With this configuration, in the state relating to AT which is advantageous to the player such as “AT state”, the re-game player push order and the bell push order are navigated (the push order that provides the highest profit on the push order display device D270). Can be created, and a plurality of gaming states with different profit ratios of the player not navigating the push order to the state relating to the AT such as “normal gaming state” can be created. In the seventh embodiment, four types of push order bell groups of prizes -A1 to A6, prizes -B1 to B6, prizes -C1 to C6, prizes -D1 to D6 are provided as six choice push order bells. ing. By configuring in this way, when adjusting a design value such as a winning probability of the push order bell, it is possible to facilitate adjustment by adjusting the number of push order bell groups.

  In addition, the “technical intervention role when the specified number is 3” corresponding to the winning number 38 is configured to form a winning 07 when the player performs a stop operation at a specific pushing position of the middle reel M52 when the specified number is 3. If the combination of symbols to be stopped is stopped and one game medal can be obtained, that is, if the player does not perform the stop operation at a specific pushing position of the middle reel M52, the combination of symbols constituting the winning 07 is No stoppage and no payout. “Winning-F to K” corresponding to the winning numbers 39 to 44 is a condition device that can be won when the prescribed number is two, and it is possible to obtain six or one payout. The “common bell D” corresponding to the winning number 45 is a conditional device that can be won when the prescribed number is two and plays the role of a bell. The difference from “Winning-F to K” corresponding to the winning numbers 39 to 44 is that six payouts can be obtained regardless of the pressing order. “Winning-L” corresponding to the winning number 45 is a conditional device that can be won when the prescribed number is two and plays a bell role. The “winning-M” corresponding to the winning number 46 can be paid out regardless of the pressing order. The “winning-N” corresponding to the winning number 47 is a combination of symbols constituting the winning 07 when the player performs a stop operation at a specific pushing position of a predetermined reel when the prescribed number is two. If one game medal can be obtained, that is, if the player does not perform a stop operation at a specific pushing position of a predetermined reel, the combination of symbols constituting the winning 07 is not stopped and is lost. “Winning-O” and “Winning-P” corresponding to the winning numbers 48 and 49 are condition devices that can be won during continuous operation of the RB based on winning of the BB combination. In addition, during 1 type BB operation | movement, it shall explain in detail later.

  Next, in the item of “bonus winning information”, numerical values from 0 to 2 are assigned for each winning number. In the seventh embodiment, a winning number that does not include a bonus (BB role) has a bonus winning information of 0, and a winning number that includes one type BB-A as a winning number that includes a bonus (BB role) (50 ) Bonus winning information of 1, and the bonus winning information of winning number (51) including 1 type BB-B is 2. In the seventh embodiment, it is stipulated that the bonus (BB role) is not won in combination with the small role, but is won independently, but the bonus (BB role) is won in duplicate with the small role. It is also possible to configure. The bonus winning information related to the bonus carried over is stored in the inside of the bonus. For example, when a game is executed in the inside of one type BB-A and “re-game-A” is won. The bonus winning information related to the game is 1.

  Next, in the item of “winning / replay winning information”, numerical values from 0 to 49 are assigned for each winning number. In the seventh embodiment, a winning number that does not include a re-playing role and a small role (winning number 0 corresponding to lose and winning number 49/50 corresponding to bonus) is set to 0 for winning / replaying winning information, 1 to 49 winning / replay winning information is distributed for each condition device for winning numbers including re-playing roles or small roles.

  Next, in the item “production group number”, numerical values from 0 to 29 are assigned for each winning number. By transmitting the production group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the production executed by the sub control board S side can be determined.

  Next, FIG. 241 shows a winning number (condition device number, also referred to as a winning combination) and bonus (also referred to as a BB, a BB role) related to a small role and a replaying role in the seventh embodiment when the specified number is three. It is a list which shows the lottery probability (it is also called a win rate) determined by a lottery means. In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

  First, the lottery probability in “RT0” when the first type BB is not operated will be described in detail. In the seventh embodiment, the lottery probability of the winning combination may be different depending on the RT state. In addition, when 1 type BB is not operated, the 1 type BB combination that can be won is only 1 type BB-B, not 2 types of 1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-B. This is because the lottery table to be referred to is changed for each specified number, and the one-type BB combination that can be won differs between the specified number of three and the specified number of two. Although the lottery probability may be different depending on the RT state, in the seventh embodiment, “RT0” and “RT1 (inside one type BB)” to be described later are re-game players (“re-game” -A "to" Replay-M ") are assumed to have the same lottery probability. The “replays A to D” that can be stopped and displayed in the winning numbers 1 to 4 correspond to the above-described normal replay. In addition, “re-games -E to H” that can be stopped and displayed in the winning numbers 5 to 8 are re-players, and depending on the stop operation, a combination of symbols in which watermelons or cherries are aligned is stopped and displayed. A re-playing role that has a role as a rare role. Further, “re-games -I to M” that can be stopped by winning numbers 9 to 13 are re-games that are not won when the specified number is 3. “Winning-A1 to D6” that can be stopped and displayed by winning numbers 14 to 37 is a push-bell, and in the game winning “Winning-A1 to D6”, the reel stop that is most advantageous to the player The push order navigation for notifying the order is configured to be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, and details of the stop display mode of the bell combination based on the push order will be described later. “Winning-E”, which is the winning number 38, plays the bell as well as “Winning-A1 to D6”, but there is a possibility that the player may stop display by performing technical intervention when the player performs a stop operation. Conditional device. The technical intervention is to perform a stop operation in a specific range so that a symbol combination constituting “Winning-E” is stopped and displayed among symbols drawn on a predetermined reel. “Winning-F to N” with winning numbers 39 to 47 is the same as the “re-game player-I to M”, and is a bell combination that is not won when the specified number is 3. “Winning-O to P” having winning numbers 48 to 49 is a condition device that can stop and display during continuous RB operation by one-type BB combination operation. “Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-B” with winning numbers 50 to 51 are BB roles, and when the specified number is 3, only “Type 1 BB-B” with winning number 51 can win. BB role. In this example, as in the case of the sixth embodiment, when the 1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-B, which are BB roles, are won, the lottery to shift to the “favorable zone” (advantageous zone shift lottery) is executed It is configured to In “RT2” to be described later, the state where the BB combination is won (the state where the winning combination of the BB combination is carried over) and the BB is inactive, and as a result of the internal lottery, the 1 type BB whose winning number is 51 Even when a random number for winning -B is acquired, since the condition device related to BB is carried over, it becomes the same stop control as when winning the winning number 0 at "RT2". The advantageous section shift lottery is not executed. Since it is configured in this manner, in the seventh embodiment, “RT0” is more “advantageous section” than “RT2” by the number 19441 for the type BB-B that is the winning number 51. It is configured so that it can be easily transferred to. In addition, if you win 1 type BB-A (2 bets) or 1 type BB-B (3 bets) in “RT0”, you can win the advantage zone lottery, Even when the section shift lottery is won, the state related to the AT is not shifted to the in-AT state. That is, it is configured not to shift to the AT state depending on the winning of the BB role (acquisition of a random number corresponding to the BB role) regardless of whether it is “RT0” or “RT2”.

  Next, the lottery probability in “RB in operation” during BB operation will be described in detail. In the seventh embodiment, during the BB operation and during the RB operation, two small roles of “number 15 in RB” with winning number 48 and “one in RB” with winning number 49 can be won. It also has a “miss”. As will be described in detail later, “in RB operation” is configured to increase the probability that winning number 49 “one of the RB winning combinations” will be won. The expected increase or decrease in medals per game during “RB in operation” is negative, that is, the number of game medals to be paid out is relatively smaller than the number of game medals to be inserted. It is configured to go. The details of the winning rate (lottery probability) for each condition device “RB in operation” will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 242 shows winning numbers (conditional device number, also called winning combination) and bonuses (also called BB, BB role) and bonuses regarding the small role and re-playing role in the seventh embodiment when the prescribed number is two. It is a list which shows the lottery probability (it is also called a win rate) determined by a lottery means. In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown. In addition, the description of the content overlapping with the content described when the specified number is 3 is omitted.

  First, the lottery probability in “RT0” when the first type BB is not operated will be described in detail. In the seventh embodiment, it is configured such that the lottery probabilities of the combinations may differ depending on the RT state. In addition, in 1 type BB combination which can be elected at the time of 1 type BB non-operation, it is only 1 type BB-A instead of 2 types of 1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-B. “Replay-A1 to H” is not won when the prescribed number is two, unlike when the prescribed number is three. Also, “re-games -I to M” having winning numbers 9 to 13 are re-games corresponding to “re-games -A to H” that can be won when the prescribed number is 3. “Replay-I” having a winning number 9 is a replaying role corresponding to “replaying-A to D” that can be won when the prescribed number is 3. Further, “re-games -J to M” having winning numbers 10 to 13 are re-game players corresponding to “re-games -E to H” that can be won when the prescribed number is 3. “Winning-A1 to E” is not won when the prescribed number is two, unlike the prescribed number of three. "Winning-FK, M" which is the winning numbers 39 to 44 and 46 is a bell role called a common bell role. “Winning-L”, which can be stopped by winning number 45, is the same as “Winning-F to K, M” as a bell role called a common bell role. Condition equipment is different. Specifically, “winning-L” is composed of six condition devices “winning 01 to 06”. For example, when a reel stop operation is performed in the order of “123” = “left → middle → right”. , The symbol combination constituting “winning 01” is stopped and displayed. When a reel stop operation is performed in the order of “132” = “left → right → middle”, the symbol combination constituting “winning 02” is stopped and displayed. When a reel stop operation is performed in the order of “213” = “middle → left → right”, the symbol combination constituting “winning 03” is stopped and displayed. When a reel stop operation is performed in the order of “231” = “right → left → middle”, the symbol combination constituting “winning 04” is stopped and displayed. When a reel stop operation is performed in the order of “312” = “middle → right → left”, the symbol combination constituting “winning 05” is stopped and displayed. When a reel stop operation is performed in the order of “321” = “right → middle → left”, the symbol combination constituting “winning 06” is stopped and displayed. Thus, the symbol combinations constituting the condition devices corresponding to the pressing order are stopped and displayed. “Type 1 BB-A to Type 1 BB-B” that can be stopped and displayed at the winning numbers 50 to 51 is the BB role, and when the specified number is two, only “1 type BB-A” of the winning number 50 Is a BB role that can be won.

  Also, when the specified number is 2, the number related to the winning rate (lottery probability) of “1 type BB-A” is changed to “re-game-I” regardless of the RT state. It is adding. By configuring in this way, “RT1”, and in the situation where one kind of BB-A is won (carried over), the winning rate (lottery probability) of the re-gamer is increased, and “RT0” ”Is more advantageous to the player than the“ Moreover, the state which has been elected continues for 1 type BB-A carried over.

  Next, a bell combination stop display mode based on the pressing order in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail. As an example, the case of “winning-A1” (condition device number 14) will be described in detail. “123” = stop in the order of “left → middle → right”, that is, the most advantageous pushing order (push of correct answer) When the stop operation is executed, the number of cards is paid out, and “132” = “Left → Right → Middle” is stopped in order, that is, the first stop is the same as the most advantageous pushing order. The second stop and the third stop are 1 when the stop operation is performed in a push order different from the most advantageous push order (a push order other than the most advantageous push order may be referred to as an incorrect answer push order). The first stop operation is the most advantageous push, such as “* 1 *” = “middle → * → *” or “** 1” = “right → * → *”. If it is not the left reel which is in order, there is a 1/4 probability of paying out one piece, and 3/4 lose ( And is configured so as to be no) (symbol combination as a single payout by the operation timing of the stop button is configured to have a case where not stopped and displayed in the case of displaying stop).

  In the case of “winning-A1” (condition device number 14), the order of pushing by the reel stop operation (for example, “123” = “left → middle → right”, “132” = “left → right → middle”, “* 1 * ”=“ Medium → * → * ”or“ ** 1 ”=“ Right → * → * ”), the number of payouts varies as described above. This is because stop control is defined in the above, and the reel stop control based on the reel stop order and stop operation timing is provided. As an example, the case where “winning-A1” (condition device number 14) is won will be described in detail as an example.

  The “winning-A1” (condition device number 14) is composed of five condition devices of winning 01, winning 07, winning 08, winning 16, and winning 20. The number of payouts determined for each condition device is 15 when the combination of symbols constituting the winning 01 is stopped and displayed, and similarly for the symbols constituting the winning 07, winning 08, winning 16, and winning 20. When the combination is stopped and displayed, the number is one. Of these five condition devices, the combination of symbols constituting a winning of which condition device is displayed in a stop manner may be different depending on the stop order of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53. Has been. In this example, the reel stop order is “123” = “left → middle → right”, “132” = “left → right → middle”, “* 1 *” = “middle → * → *”, “**”. 1 ”=“ right → * → * ”, and the condition devices corresponding to each stop order are a winning 01, a winning 07, a winning 08, a winning 16, and a winning 20, respectively. Specifically, a condition device that treats winnings for each reel stop order will be described.

  First, the reel stop order is “123” = “left → middle → right”. (1) When the stop order of the reels is “123” = “left → middle → right”, it is determined to stop and display the symbol combination constituting the winning prize 01. This is because, when the reel stop order is “123” = “left → middle → right”, among the five condition devices constituting “winning-A1” (condition device number 14), the payout number is the largest. If the first stop operation is the left reel in order to preferentially stop and display many items, the above-mentioned number priority control is performed, and winning 01, winning 07, winning 08, winning 16, and winning 20 are set. Among the symbols constituting the corresponding symbol combination, the symbols constituting the symbol combination having the largest payout number are drawn from among the symbols that can be drawn. In this way, the control that preferentially draws the symbols that make up the symbol combination with the largest number of payable symbols out of the symbols that can be drawn into the effective line is referred to as number priority control, and can be determined for each stop operation order or stop operation timing. (For example, when the left reel is stopped as the first stop, when the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, and when the right reel is stopped as the first stop, it is possible to make the difference.) ing.

  The reel stop control for each reel stop operation will be described in more detail. When the left reel is stopped as the first stop operation, the defined first stop operation of “123” = “left → middle → right” is set. (The correct answer in the pressing order), the replay symbol of the left reel in the symbol combination constituting the winning 01 can be stopped on the effective line regardless of the operation timing (the symbol that can be stopped on the effective line regardless of the operation timing is PB Therefore, the replay symbol is controlled to stop at the active line. Next, when the middle reel is stopped as the second stop operation, it matches the predetermined second stop operation of “123” = “left → middle → right” (push order correct answer), so the number of sheets has priority. Control is performed so as to stop the cherry A of the middle reel in the symbol combination constituting the winning 01 (the cherry A has PB = 1). Next, when the right reel is stopped as the third stop operation, it matches the determined third stop operation of “123” = “left → middle → right” (push order correct answer), and therefore win 01 Control to stop the right reel sheep or watermelon in the symbol combination that constitutes (the sheep or watermelon can be stopped at the effective line regardless of the stop operation timing. May be referred to as PB = 1). In this way, when the reel stop order is “123” = “left → middle → right” (push order correct answer), the symbol combination constituting the winning 01 is preferentially stopped.

  Next, (2) when the reel stop order is “132” = “left → right → middle”, it is determined to stop and display the winning combination 07 or winning symbol 08. The reel stop control for each reel stop operation will be described in more detail. When the left reel is stopped as the first stop operation, it matches the first stop operation of “123” = “left → middle → right”. Thus, the number priority control is performed, and the replay of the left reel is controlled to be stopped as in the case where the reel stop order is “123” = “left → middle → right”. Next, when the right reel is stopped as the second stop operation, “123” = “left → middle → right” does not match the second stop operation (incorrect pressing order). Further, since the replay is stopped and displayed on the left reel, the condition that the left reel is determined to be replayed among the five symbol combinations of winning 01, winning 07, winning 08, winning 16, and winning 20 The devices are a winning 01, a winning 07, and a winning 08. Here, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the right reel No. 17 is positioned at the lower stage, the sheep constituting the winning 01, the replay constituting the winning 07 or 08, and the bell 3 constituting the winning 07 or 08 are displayed. Different types of symbols can be drawn into the active line. Here, when sheep are drawn into the active line, only the symbol combination No. 85 (see FIG. 221) constituting the winning prize 01 can be stopped and displayed in the future. On the other hand, when the bell is drawn into the active line, two types of symbol combination, No. 95, which will form the winning 07, and No. 97, which will form the winning 08, can be stopped and displayed in the future. Therefore, when the right reel No. 17 is stopped at the lower position, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed in the future is less when the bell is pulled than when the sheep is pulled. Will increase. In such a case, the control to pull in the bell instead of the sheep is called number priority control. In addition, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the No. 17 of the right reel is positioned at the lower stage, even if the replay is pulled in, two kinds of symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed thereafter, so the bell may be designed to be pulled in, or the replay May be designed to retract. In this example (which can also be applied to other embodiments), it is possible to determine whether to perform the number priority control or the number priority control for each stop operation order or stop operation timing (for example, as the first stop) (When the left reel is stopped, when the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, when the right reel is stopped as the first stop, etc., it is possible to make the difference.) As long as it is determined on a one-to-one basis. Here, the case where the bell is pulled into the effective line of the right reel will be described in detail. When the bell is pulled into the active line on the right reel, the symbol combination that can be stopped afterwards is the 95th “Replay Watermelon Bell” that constitutes the winning 07 or the 97th “Replay Cherry B” that constitutes the winning 08.・ Because it does not have a stop operation timing that allows both watermelon and cherry B to be pulled into the effective line of the middle reel, it can be pulled into the active line at the middle reel stop operation timing of watermelon and cherry B It is configured to stop and display symbols. It should be noted that the number of payouts is one when both winning 07 and stop winning 08 are displayed.

  Next, (3) when the reel stop order is “* 1 *” = “medium → * → *”, it is determined to stop and display the symbol combination constituting the winning prize 16. The reel stop control for each reel stop operation will be described in more detail. When the middle reel is stopped as the first stop operation, the stop order is different from the pressing order of “123” = “left → middle → right”. It is determined that the reel has been operated to stop (push order incorrect answer). Whether to stop the symbols is the same as the second stop operation in the pressing order “132” = “Left → Right → Middle”, the number priority control is performed, and the total number of symbol combination patterns that can be stopped and displayed in the future is compared. To be determined. In this case as well, both Cherry A constituting the winning 01 and Replay constituting the winning 16 are PB = 1, so that the stop display is possible regardless of the stop operation timing, but the cherry A is stopped and displayed on the active line. When the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed is larger (when cherry A is stopped and displayed on the active line, the second and second numbers 85 and 86). When the type and replay are stopped and displayed, there are three types: 114, 115, and 116), so the middle reel is configured to draw the replay. Thereafter, according to the stop operation timing, any of the symbol combinations No. 114, No. 115, and No. 116 is stopped and displayed (the number of payouts is one).

  Next, (4) when the reel stop order is “** 1” = “right → * → *”, it is determined to stop and display the symbol combination constituting the winning 20. The reel stop control for each reel stop operation will be described in more detail. When the right reel is stopped as the first stop operation, the stop order is different from “123” = “left → middle → right” pressing order. It is determined that the reel has been operated to stop (push order incorrect answer). Whether to stop the symbols is the same as the second stop operation in the pressing order “132” = “Left → Right → Middle”. To be determined. Also in this case, when the sheep constituting the winning 01 is stopped on the active line, only one type of No. 85, and when the watermelon constituting the winning 01 is stopped on the active line, only one type of No. 86 is provided. Can be stopped. In addition, since each of sheep and watermelon is not PB = 1, whether or not pull-in is possible is determined by the stop operation timing of the right reel. On the other hand, when the blank B constituting the winning 20 is PB = 1 and the blank B is drawn into the effective line of the right reel, thereafter, the three types of symbol combinations 126, 127 and 128 are stopped. It can be displayed. Therefore, also in this case, the right reel is configured to draw the blank B into the effective line. Thereafter, according to the stop operation timing, any one of symbols 126, 127, and 128 is stopped and displayed (the number of payouts is 1).

  Also, “winning-A2” to “winning-D6” as push order bell roles similar to “winning-A1” are configured to have the same reel stop control as “winning-A1”. In other words, when each reel is stopped in the correct pressing order, which is the most advantageous pressing order (push order correct answer), among the symbol combinations constituting the selected condition device, the one with the largest number of payouts The reel stop control (whether the number priority control or the number priority control) is defined so that the stop display of each reel is performed in priority order. Incorrect answer), reel stop control (whether the number priority control or the number priority control) is determined so that the one with the largest payout number is not stopped and displayed. With this configuration, even when the condition devices selected as the winning combination are the same (for example, “winning-A1”), the combination of symbols having the largest number of payouts (for example, winning 01) is selected in the correct pressing order. 15 symbols can be paid out by preferentially stopping and displaying the symbol combinations to be configured. When the answer is incorrect, the display ratio of the symbol combinations based on the stop symbols of reels that have not been stopped in the future will be displayed. One payout can be obtained by preferentially stopping high symbol combinations (for example, winning 07, winning 08, winning 16, winning 20), and the condition device for winning can be changed in accordance with the pressing order. In the reel stop control, not only in the pressing order but also, for example, the position where the reel stop operation is performed, in other words, “If the stop operation is performed in the range from symbol number 0 to symbol number Δ, the most Perform reel stop control to preferentially stop symbol combinations with a large number of payouts ”and“ If stop operation is performed in the range from symbol number □ to symbol number × number, stop operation will still be performed in the future. It is also possible to perform reel stop control such as “reel stop control is performed so as to preferentially stop symbol combinations having a high symbol combination display ratio in consideration of non-reel stop symbols”. In this example, when the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the incorrect answer, the control is made such that the one with the largest number of payouts is not stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in such a case, the combination of symbols having the largest number of payouts depending on the pressing order and the stop operation timing may be configured to be able to stop display. The symbol combination may also be configured so that there is no payout without displaying the stop.

  Next, the reel stop control based on the pushing position will be described in detail. For example, in the case of “winning-A1”, the bell symbol can be stopped at the upper stage. In the situation where no push order navigation occurs, the bell symbol stops when the correct answer is given in the 6-choice push order in which 15 winning combinations will win. Also, in the situation where push order navigation does not occur, the bell symbol does not stop if the answer is not correct in the 6-choice push order that will win the 15-piece combination, and “winnings 07-08, 16, 20”. The combination of one piece or the like, or losing (stopping display of a symbol combination without payout may be referred to as losing) is stopped. In a situation where push order navigation can occur, if the reels are stopped according to the push order navigation, 15 winning combinations will always win. Specifically, for example, in a situation in which the condition device number 14 corresponding to “winning-A1” is determined, (1) when the left reel is operated in the first stop operation, the 15 winning combinations of winning 01 Or, one winning combination from winning 07 to winning 08 wins. More specifically, (1-1) when the left reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the replay is stopped and displayed at the middle stage, and (1-2) the middle reel is stopped by the second stop operation. If the right reel is stopped by the 3rd stop operation, either a watermelon or a sheep is stopped and displayed at the middle stage according to the stop operation timing. When the symbol combination (upper bell alignment) corresponding to 01 is stopped and displayed, 15 winning combinations are paid out. (1-3) When the right reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the stop operation timing is used. In the middle row, either replay or bell is stopped, and if the middle reel is stopped by the third stop operation, either watermelon or cherry B is stopped and displayed according to the stop operation timing. Symbol combination corresponding to one of 08 officers one are paid out by being displayed stopped.

  (2) When the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, a winning combination of 16 singles of winning 16 is won or lost. More specifically, (2-1) when the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the replay is stopped and displayed at the middle stage, and (2-2) the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation. In the case where the red reel, replay, or cherry A is stopped and displayed in the middle depending on the stop operation timing, and the right reel is stopped in the third stop operation, the red seven ( When the stop symbol is displayed in the middle row of the seven symbols that make up the winning 16 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received, and when the red seven is stopped in the middle row, the stop operation timing (the symbol number 18 in the middle of the right reel) In the case of a stop operation from sheep to symbol number 2 other than the red seven), the symbols other than the red seven constituting the winning prize 16 are stopped and displayed in the middle, and the red symbol is displayed in the middle of the right reel. If the emissions were stopped and displayed is the payout is either a single role by winning the prize 16, Red Seven is a lost game if it is not stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel. (2-3) When the right reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the red seven (the seven symbols constituting the winning 16 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) is in the middle depending on the stop operation timing. In the case of stop display, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation timing at which the red seven cannot be stopped and displayed at the middle stage (operation timing other than the sheep of symbol number 18 to the red seven of symbol number 2 in the middle stage of the right reel) If the symbols other than the red seven that make up the winning prize 16 are stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and the left reel is stopped by the third stop operation, any of red seven, replay, or cherry A will be in the middle stage depending on the stop operation timing When the red seven is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel, one winning combination will be paid out by winning one of the prizes 16, and the red seven will be displayed in the middle of the right reel. A lost game if they are not stopped display. As described above, when the condition reel number 14 corresponding to “winning-A1” is determined and the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the winning probability of winning 16 is 5/20 (1 / 4). In addition, when the right reel is operated at a timing other than a specific operation timing (operation timing other than the sheep with symbol number 3 to red seven with symbol number 7 in the middle of the reel), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 16 is stopped and displayed. Loss is lost, and the stop display probability of the loss is 15/20 (3/4).

  (3) When the right reel is stopped by the first stop operation, one winning combination of winning 20 is won or lost. More specifically, (3-1) when the right reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the blank B is stopped and displayed at the middle stage, and (3-2) the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation. In the case of being stopped, either red seven, bell, or cherry A is stopped and displayed at the middle stage according to the stop operation timing, and when the middle reel is stopped by the third stop operation, the red seven is displayed at the stop operation timing. (Seven symbols composing the winning prize 20 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) are displayed in the middle stop, and the stop operation timing when the red seven cannot be stopped in the middle (design number 18 in the middle reel) In the case of a stop operation at the replay of No. 2 of red number 7), the symbols other than the red seven constituting the winning prize 20 are stopped and displayed, and the red line is displayed in the middle of the middle reel. There either winning 20 is more one combination is paid to the winning in the case where it is stopped and displayed, a lost game if the middle of the center reel red Seven does not appear stopped. (3-3) When the middle reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the red seven (the seven symbols constituting the winning prize 20 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) is placed in the middle according to the stop operation timing. In the case of stop display, and when the stop operation is performed at a stop operation timing at which the red seven cannot be stopped and displayed at the middle stage (replay of symbol number 18 on the middle stage of the middle reel to operation timing other than the red seven of symbol number 2), If the symbols other than the red seven that make up the winning 20 are stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and the left reel is stopped by the third stop operation, either red seven, bell, or cherry A will be in the middle stage depending on the stop operation timing When the red seven is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel, one winning combination is paid out by winning one of the winnings 20, and the red seven is displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel. A lost game if it is not stopped and displayed. As described above, when the right reel is stopped by the first stop operation in a situation where the condition device number 14 corresponding to “winning-A1” is determined, the winning probability of winning 20 is 5/20 (1 / 4). In addition, when the middle reel is operated at a timing other than a specific operation timing (operation timing other than symbol number 18 replay to symbol number 2 red seven in the middle of the reel), the symbol combination corresponding to winning 20 is stopped and displayed. Loss is lost, and the stop display probability of the loss is 15/20 (3/4). The reel stop control based on the pressing order when “winning-A1” is determined as the condition device number has been described. The reel stop control based on the pressing order is the same for “winning-A2” to “winning-A6”. It has become.

  For example, in a situation where the condition device number 15 corresponding to “winning-A2” is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, the timing at which the white seven is stopped and displayed on the right reel (1/4) When operated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 17 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the white seven is not stopped and lost. In the situation where the condition device number of “Winning-A2” is determined, when the first stop operation is the right reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) at which the white seven is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 21 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the white seven is not stopped and is lost.

  Under the condition that the condition device number 16 corresponding to “winning-A3” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the middle reel, and the third stop operation is the right reel, the reel is the right reel. When the red seven is operated at the stop display timing (1/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 24 is stopped and displayed, and at the other operation timing (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 24 is displayed. Is not displayed and the loss is displayed. In the situation where the condition device number 16 corresponding to “winning-A3” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the right reel, and the third stop operation is the middle reel, When an operation is performed at a timing (1/4) at which the red seven is stopped and displayed on the reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 28 is stopped and displayed at other timings (3/4). The symbol combination is not stopped and the loss is stopped. Also, in the situation where the condition device number 16 of “winning-A3” is determined, when the first stop operation is the right reel, the operation is performed at a timing (1/4) when the sheep is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 22 is stopped and displayed, and at the other operation timing (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 22 is not stopped and is lost.

  Under the condition that the condition device number 17 corresponding to “winning-A4” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the middle reel, and the third stop operation is the right reel, the reel is the right reel. When the white seven is operated at the stop display timing (1/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 25 is stopped and displayed at the other operation timing (3/4). Is not displayed and the loss is displayed. In the situation where the condition device number 17 corresponding to “winning-A4” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the right reel, and the third stop operation is the middle reel, When the operation is performed at the timing when the white seven is stopped and displayed on the reel (1/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 29 is stopped and displayed at other timings (3/4). The symbol combination is not stopped and the loss is stopped. Also, in a situation where the condition device number 17 of “winning-A4” is determined, when the first stop operation is the right reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) when the blank B is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 23 is stopped and displayed, and at the other operation timing (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 23 is not stopped and is lost.

  Under the condition that the condition device number 18 corresponding to “winning-A5” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the middle reel, and the third stop operation is the right reel, the reel is the right reel. When the cherry A is operated at the stop display timing (1/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 26 is stopped, and at the other operation timing (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 26 is displayed. Is not displayed and the loss is displayed. In the situation where the condition device number 18 corresponding to “winning-A5” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the right reel, and the third stop operation is the middle reel, When the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) at which the sheep is stopped and displayed on the reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 30 is stopped and displayed at other timings (3/4). The combination is not displayed in a stopped state, and the loss is displayed in a stopped state. Further, in the situation where the condition device number 18 of “winning-A5” is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) at which the cherry A is stopped and displayed on the right reel. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 18 is stopped and displayed, and at the other operation timing (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 18 is not stopped and lost.

  Under the condition that the condition device number 19 corresponding to “winning-A6” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the middle reel, and the third stop operation is the right reel, the reel is the right reel. When the cherry B is operated at the timing (1/4) at which the cherry B is stopped and displayed, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 27 is stopped and displayed at other timings (3/4). Is not displayed and the loss is displayed. In the situation where the condition device number 19 corresponding to “Winning-A6” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the second stop operation is the right reel, and the third stop operation is the middle reel, When the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) at which the blank B is stopped and displayed on the reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 31 is stopped and displayed at other timings (3/4). The symbol combination is not stopped and the loss is stopped. Also, in the situation where the condition device number 19 of “winning-A6” is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) when cherry B is stopped and displayed on the right reel. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 19 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 19 is not stopped and lost.

  Also, “winning-B1” to “winning-D6” as the push order bell roles similar to “winning-A1 to A6” are configured to have the same reel stop control as “winning-A1”. In other words, when the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop order (push order correct answer), the symbol combination that constitutes the winning condition device is given priority. The reel stop control is performed such that the reels are stopped and displayed, the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop order by the first stop operation, and the reels are stopped in the predetermined stop order by the second stop operation. When the stop operation is not performed, the reel stop control is performed so as to preferentially stop and display the symbol combination constituting one combination. In addition, when the reels are not stopped in the predetermined stop order in the first stop operation, the stop operation is performed within a range in which the combination of symbols constituting a single combination with a predetermined reel can be stopped ( For example, the reel control is performed to stop and display the symbol combination that constitutes a single winning combination, while the stop operation is performed within a range in which the symbol combination that constitutes the single winning combination can be stopped. If it is not present (for example, in the range of 3/4), the combination of symbols constituting a single combination is not stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss.

  Next, FIG. 243 is an RT state transition diagram in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, a game with a prescribed number of two and a game with a prescribed number of three, that is, a game with a plurality of prescribed numbers can be performed. The BB combination that can be won when the prescribed number is 2 is 1 type BB-A, and the BB combination that can be won when the specified number is 3 is 1 type BB-B. “RT0” is defined as the RT state in the inside of the BB, and the RT state is “RT1” as the inside of the one type BB-A by winning one type BB-A when the specified number is two. ”, And by winning the type 1 BB-B when the specified number is 3, the RT state transitions to“ RT2 ”as the inside of the type 1 BB-B. It should be noted that the RT state does not transition from “RT1” to “RT2”, and it is assumed that no state transition is made across games with a specified number of changes. A game with a specified number of two is considered to have virtually no opportunity for the player to actually perform, in other words, if the player actually plays a game, it is assumed that the specified number is only three It is said. In addition, in 7th Embodiment, it is comprised so that the game in the case of both the time of a regulation number 2 sheets and the regulation number 3 sheets is possible.

  FIG. 243 will be described in detail. In the seventh embodiment, there are three RT states “RT0”, “RT1”, and “RT2” as RT states that can be played with the prescribed number 2 or 3, and the prescribed number 3 There are two RT states of “1 type BB-A in operation” and “1 type BB-B in operation” as RT states that can be played only at the time of playing. As described above, “RT1” is the inside of the type 1 BB-A, that is, the state where the type 1 BB-A is elected and carries over the type 1 BB-A, and “RT2” is 1 The inside of the seed BB-B, that is, the state where the one kind BB-B is elected and carries over the one kind BB-B. In addition, if either BB combination is won and carried over, it does not happen that the other BB combination wins. For example, even if a game is played with a 1-type BB-A elected and a 1-type BB-A carried over when the specified number is 2, the game is changed from 2 to 3 Type 1 BB-B will not win. Furthermore, since Type 1 BB-A has a role that is not won at the time of betting three cards, it has a stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to Type BB-A at the time of three betting. However, when a game is executed with three bets at “RT1”, the combination of symbols related to the type 1 BB-A is not stopped and displayed regardless of the stop order or the stop operation timing. Is configured not to operate. Also, even if the game is played with the Specified Number of 3 cards changed from 3 to 2 in the state where the 1st BB-B is won and the 1st BB-B is carried over, Type 1 BB-A will not win.

  Next, the RT state transition condition will be described. When the condition indicated by the arrow in the figure is satisfied, the RT state shifts. First, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to “RT0”, the RT state is “RT1”, “RT2”, “1 type BB-A in operation”, “1 type BB-B in operation”. (All RT states except “RT0”), RAM initialization is executed, or transition to “RT0” when the operation of Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-B is completed To do. The completion of the operation of the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-B specifically means that the type 1 BB-A role and the type 1 BB-B role are elected, and the elected type 1 BB-A One type BB-A and one type BB-B operated by winning a combination and one type BB-B combination are digested by a plurality of games, and the payout of the prescribed number of medals is completed.

  Next, as a specific transition example in which the RT state transitions to “RT1”, when the RT state is “RT0”, the transition to “RT1” occurs when one type BB-A is won. The prescribed number at this time is two. It should be noted that the state of winning the type 1 BB-A and carrying it over is configured to be inherited even when the game is played with the specified number changed from two to three. Furthermore, even if the specified number is changed from 2 to 3 in the RT state of “RT1”, the RT state is not changed to “RT2”, and the game is kept in the state of “RT1”. It is configured to be able to proceed. Next, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to “1 type BB-A in operation”, the selected 1 type BB-A role is won in the RT state of “RT1”, or “ The RT state shifts to “1 type BB-A in operation” by winning the selected 1 type BB-A combination in the RT state of “RT0”. In the case of directly shifting from “RT0” to “1 type BB-A in operation”, it is 1 in the winning game of 1 type BB-A without going through “RT1”, that is, inside 1 type BB-A. This is a case where the seed BB-A role is won. Next, as a specific transition example in which the RT state transitions to “RT2”, when the RT state is “RT0”, the transition to “RT2” occurs when one type BB-B is won. The prescribed number at this time is three. It should be noted that the state of winning the type 1 BB-B and carrying it over is configured to be inherited even when the game is played with the specified number changed from 3 to 2. Furthermore, even if the specified number is changed from 3 to 2 in the RT state of “RT2”, the RT state is not changed to “RT1”, and the game remains in the “RT2” state. It is configured to be able to proceed. Next, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to “1 type BB-B in operation”, in the RT state of “RT2”, the winning 1 type BB-B role is won or “ In the RT state of “RT0”, the RT state shifts to “1 type BB-B in operation” by stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the selected 1 type BB-B combination. In addition, when moving directly from “RT0” to “1 type BB-B in operation”, in the winning game of 1 type BB-B role without going through “RT2”, that is, inside 1 type BB-B This is a case where the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB-B combination is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, the seventh embodiment is configured such that a transition to a different RT state is possible in a game with a prescribed number of two and a prescribed number of three. In addition, the RT state that has transitioned in each case of the specified number of two or three specified numbers is a game that maintains the RT state even when the specified number is changed in subsequent games. Is configured to be able to proceed. By configuring in this way, for example, when the section in which the player mainly plays is set to the RT state of “RT1”, a game with a prescribed number of two is performed in advance, and the type 1 BB-A role is won Or when the section where the player mainly plays is set to “RT2”, the player plays a game with a prescribed number of three in advance and keeps the one-type BB-B role elected. It becomes possible to appropriately change the RT state of the section where the game is mainly played.

  In the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, a game is executed with two bets before the game factory manager or the gaming machine is shipped from the factory, and the condition device related to the type 1 BB-A is elected. The symbol combination related to the seed BB-A is shifted to “RT1” without being stopped and displayed, and the player has a gameability of proceeding with the three-wager betting on the “RT1”. Note that, as in the sixth embodiment, the information on the bonus carried over is not cleared even if the setting is changed. With this configuration, as in the sixth embodiment, the AT lottery is executed at “RT1” inside the BB, and the game shifts to an in-AT state advantageous to the player to acquire a game medal. It is possible to create a gaming machine that can execute a highly specific game.

  Next, the lottery probability during RB operation will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, during the RB operation, two small roles of “winning-O” of winning number 49 and “winning-P” of winning number 50 can be won. The “winning-O” and “winning-P” will be described in detail. The “winning-O” is a conditional device having a plurality of conditional devices from winning 01 to winning 31 and “winning-P” is winning 07 to winning. This is a condition device having 33 condition devices. The numbers of “winning-O” and “winning-P” when the type 1 BB is operated are 6175 and 30942, respectively. Let's compare the winning probability of the condition device when the RB is not operating and when the RB is operating. Among the condition devices that can be selected when the RB is not activated, there are four condition devices having (including) winning 01, “winning-A1,” “winning-B2,” “winning-C1,” and “winning-D2.” Yes, the sum of the winning numbers of the four condition devices is 6174. On the other hand, among the condition devices that can be won during the RB operation, the condition device having (including) winning 01 is one of “winning-O”, and the number of winning winning “winning-O” is 6175. Therefore, when the RB is not operating, the number of winning units for the condition device including the winning 01, in other words, the number of winning units for the winning 01 is 6174, and when the RB is operating, the number of winning units for the winning 01 is The possibility of winning the winning prize 01 is 6175, and it is more advantageous when the RB is operating than when the RB is not operating. Similarly, in winning prizes 02 to 06 for paying out 15 cards, it is more advantageous when the RB is operating than when the RB is not operating. On the other hand, in the game won “Win-O”, the combination of symbols related to a plurality of condition devices, such as winning 1 and winning 02, is stopped and displayed in one game, and 30 payouts are not executed. 3 betting (as described above, the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment is a gaming machine that advances the game with 3 betting at RT1) and in the most advantageous operation mode (For example, in a game in which push order navigation is executed, the game is executed in accordance with the push order navigation), the condition device having a symbol combination of 15 payouts is winning -A1 to A6, winning a prize -B1 to B6, winnings -C1 to C6, and the total number is “2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 2187 + 9 0 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 + 900 = 37044 ", and the in RB unactuated during the total registered number it become to win the condition device having a symbol combination which is a fifteen payout is 37,044. On the other hand, when the game is executed in the most advantageous operation mode with three bets during RB operation, the condition device having a symbol combination of 15 payouts is a winning -O, The total number of placements is “6175”. During the RB operation, the total number of placements for winning the condition device having the symbol combination of 15 payouts is 6175. That is, when a game is executed in the most advantageous operation mode, it is more advantageous when the RB is not operated than when the RB is operated. In other words, the expected value (payout number / injection number) per game is higher when the game is executed in the most advantageous operation mode when the RB is not operated than when the RB is operated.

  By configuring as described above, according to the swivel type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, it is configured to advance the game in the inside of the type 1 BB, and the number of condition devices related to the push order As a possibility of winning the condition device having the largest number of payouts of the winning prizes 01 to 06, by configuring the RB operation to be more advantageous than the non-RB operation, the RB operation is more effective than the RB operation. When a game is executed with the most advantageous operation mode when it is not activated, the expected value per game (the number of payouts / the number of input) can be increased. It is possible to increase the expected value per game (the number of payouts / injections) in the AT state in which the push order navigation is executed in the game won (condition device-A1 etc. push order bell). More for players So that the can be a gaming state. Also, by setting the number priority control and the number priority control as the reel stop control based on the condition device, in the normal gaming state where the push order navigation is not executed, the symbol combination that results in 15 payouts with the largest payout number is obtained. By making it difficult to stop, it is advantageous for the player while suppressing the payout rate (average value of the number of payouts / the number of throws in) of the whole game (when considering the stay ratio in the normal game state or AT state). By adding a sharpness between the state and the state disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to create a more interesting gaming machine.

(Eighth embodiment)
In the seventh embodiment, a configuration has been illustrated in which a sharpness between a state advantageous to the player and a state disadvantageous to the player is given, and an expected value per game in the AT state can be increased. Such a configuration is not limited to the configuration of the seventh embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the seventh embodiment that makes it possible to give a clear state between a state advantageous to the player and a state unfavorable to the player and to increase the expected value per game in the AT state. Only the differences from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below. In addition, it supplements that there is no problem even if the structure which is not explained in full detail in 8th Embodiment applies the same structure as 7th Embodiment.

  Next, FIG. 245 is a list of basic specifications of the swivel type gaming machine in the eighth embodiment. The swivel-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment has a prescribed number of three, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames, and the effective line for which a winning determination is made is “left "Middle stage of reel M51, middle stage of middle reel M52, middle stage of right reel M53". The maximum payout number is 10 and the minimum payout number is 1 (correspondence between the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). Further, the priority winning order (withdrawing priority order) is “re-playing role → small role (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus”. In addition, as with the seventh embodiment described above, the pull-in control when the push order small role that gives different profits to the player depending on the push order is selected is operated in the predetermined correct push order. In such a case, control is performed using the number priority control so that a small part with a large number of payouts is preferentially drawn, and a stop display is displayed when an incorrect answer is pressed in a different order from the correct answer. Number-priority control that pulls in symbols that increase the chance of winning out of the possible symbols (positioned within 4 frames from the stop operation) (the most likely to win out of multiple symbol combinations that can be won) Control is performed.

  Next, FIG. 246 is a list of reel arrangements of the swivel type gaming machine in the eighth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames (0 to 19), and the symbols are “red seven”, “white seven”, “ There are 10 types: “Sheep”, “Blank”, “Bell A”, “Bell B”, “Replay”, “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B”, and “Cherry”. Here, “blank” is a symbol included in the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute the winning combination, but a symbol that constitutes the winning combination including “blank” As combinations, for example, “Watermelon A, Red Seven, Blank” is awarded 08, and “Watermelon A, White Seven, Blank” is awarded 10. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type of design is increased / decreased / changed.

  Next, FIGS. 247 to 250 are symbol combination lists 1 to 4 in the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device. As will be described later, according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, Any one of the symbol combinations is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the one line described above). Even when the same type of symbols is not arranged on the effective line, the same symbols are easily arranged in a line on a line other than the effective line when viewed from the player. Further, in the eighth embodiment, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the first type BB combination, “blank / watermelon B / red seven”, which becomes one type BB-A (finished with payout exceeding 70 sheets), one type BB-B (finished with payout exceeding 70 sheets) “Blank / Watermelon B / Blank” has two symbol combinations. Note that, in the 1st class BB-A and 1st class BB-B, unlike the all-JACIN type condition device that continuously activates the RB role, the RB role is drawn in the 1st BB operation and in the non-RB inside. A so-called shift RB type is adopted. In addition, as RB role, RB-A (RB during 1 type BB operation), RB-B (RB during 1 type BB operation), RB-C (RB during 1 type BB operation), RB-D ( RB during operation of type 1 BB), and the four RB combinations are selected with a predetermined probability during operation of type 1 BB and not inside the RB. If the push order bell, which is a condition device for “winning-A1” to “winning-B6” described later, is won, the reels are stopped in the pushing order that is most advantageous to the player. The symbol combinations of “winning 01” to “winning 06” are stopped and displayed, and 10 game medals are paid out. On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in a pushing order different from the pushing order most advantageous to the player, 38 The symbol combinations corresponding to “No. 07” to “No. 32” corresponding to No. 94 to No. 94 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out or lost. In the eighth embodiment, the RB combination is lottery while the 1 type BB is operating and the RB is not inside, and the RB combination is not randomly selected during the RB operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that RB-B can win during operation of -A, or RB-A can be selected during operation of RB-A. Also, if RB-B wins during the operation of RB-A, the winning combination of RB-B is carried over to the end of the operation of RB-A, and after RB-A has ended the operation, the symbol combination relating to RB-B RB-B may be configured to operate by displaying a stop (may be configured similarly when RB-A is elected during operation of RB-A). As such a configuration, for example, when the player is more advantageous during the RB-B operation than during the RB-A operation (for example, the expected expected value is higher), the player -A It will pay attention to which RB (RB-A or RB-B) is elected during operation, and a highly interesting gaming machine can be created.

  Next, FIG. 251 is a list of condition devices in the eighth embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may also be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the eighth embodiment, re-playing roles are provided for re-playing-A to re-playing-M (winning numbers 1 to 13). Depending on the situation, the re-gamer to be stopped and displayed can be different. Winning-A1 to Winning-B6 (winning numbers 14 to 25) as push order bell combinations are push order combinations, and the payout is the highest 10 by performing a reel stop operation according to a predetermined push order. It is possible to obtain a payout of a single combination, and a single-player combination is obtained or lost due to the fact that the reel stop operation is not performed in the predetermined pushing order (see above). The number priority control and the number priority control are used. In Winning-C and Winning-D (winning numbers 26, 27), it is a condition device that can be won during RB operation. Type 1 BB is a condition device according to Type 1 BB. In this example, the RB is not configured to operate continuously during the operation of the type 1 BB, and a shift RB type is employed in which the RB combination lottery is performed during the operation of the type 1 BB. RB-A to D (winning numbers 29 to 32) are RB roles, and a lottery is performed at a predetermined winning rate (lottery probability) in a situation where the type 1 BB is operating and the RB is not inside.

  Here, in the eighth embodiment, as shown in the item of “conditional device breakdown” which is the rightmost column, according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Multiple types of symbol combinations (names) can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combinations (names) that have the same winning number among the multiple types of symbol combinations (names) are grouped together from the right. This is illustrated by the item “conditional device” in the column. Specifically, for example, in the “winning-A1” which is a condition device corresponding to the winning number 14, “winning 01” is determined according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. , “Prize 15”, “Prize 20”, “Prize 23”, and “Prize 27” can be stopped and displayed. “Replay 01” and the like are names of symbol combinations, and there are a plurality of symbol combinations that can be “replay 01”. In addition, a name such as “replay 01” or a condition device such as “replay-A” may be referred to as a re-game player, and a name such as “winning 01” or a condition device such as “winning-A1” may be reduced. A condition device such as “1 type BB-A” may be referred to as a BB combination.

  Next, in the “role” item, the role of the “condition device” is illustrated. The “normal replay” corresponding to the winning number 1 is not related to the order of pressing the stop button. This is a condition device related to replay in which a re-gamer whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. “Watermelon A” and “Watermelon B” corresponding to the winning numbers 2 to 3 are condition devices related to the re-gamer, but when the player performs a stop operation of all reels, the watermelon (watermelon A, watermelon A, The watermelon B) appears to be aligned in the middle or lower right (the watermelon A or watermelon B stops and displays in a straight line in the middle or lower right). “Weak cherry” and “strong cherry” corresponding to the winning numbers 4 to 5 are condition devices related to the re-playing role as in the winning numbers 2 to 3, and when the stop operation of the left reel M51 is performed, It is configured to be able to stop at any one of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel. When all reels are stopped, the cherry symbol may be displayed in various stop modes (for example, cherry-cherry-cherry when descending to the right, cherry only at the bottom of the left reel, and left Cherry at the bottom of the reel, cherry at the middle of the middle reel, and no cherry symbol on the right reel). Further, even when a stop operation is performed so that the cherry symbol is not stopped and displayed on the left reel, the replay symbol on the left reel is a substitute symbol for the cherry symbol, and the winning numbers 4 to 5 in which the left reel is a replay are displayed. Since the symbol combination that constitutes can always be stopped and displayed, it is configured so that a disadvantageous situation for the player does not occur. The “chance eyes A to D” corresponding to the winning numbers 6 to 9 are condition devices related to the re-playing role as in the winning numbers 2 to 5, and the winning number 6 when any stop operation is performed by the player. The symbol combinations related to “re-games-F to I” corresponding to ˜9 are configured to stop display. “Watermelon A (Strong)” and “Watermelon B (Strong)” corresponding to the winning numbers 11 to 12 are condition devices relating to the re-gamer, but are viewed from the player when all reels are stopped. And watermelon (watermelon A, watermelon B) appear to be aligned in the middle or lower right (watermelon A or watermelon B stops and displays in a straight line in the middle or lower right). “Weak cherry (strong)” corresponding to the winning number 13 is a condition device related to the re-playing role as in the winning numbers 2 to 3, but when the left reel M51 is stopped, the cherry becomes the left reel. It is comprised so that it can stop in any of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage. When all reels are stopped, the cherry symbol may be displayed in various stop modes (for example, cherry-cherry-cherry when descending to the right, cherry only at the bottom of the left reel, and left Cherry at the bottom of the reel, cherry at the middle of the middle reel, and no cherry symbol on the right reel). Further, even when a stop operation is performed so that the cherry symbol is not stopped and displayed on the left reel, the symbol combination corresponding to “re-game-DE” corresponding to the winning number 13 is stopped and displayed, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is configured not to occur a situation. The re-players related to these “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “chance eyes” mainly shift the game state to a game state advantageous to the player, or in the AT state, etc. It is a condition device that plays a role that makes it advantageous for the player by performing an extra lottery or a lottery for adding the number of games in the AT state. In addition, “re-game-K-M” corresponding to the winning numbers 11 to 13 rather than “re-game-B-E” corresponding to the winning numbers 2 to 5 corresponding to the re-playing roles as “watermelon” and “cherry”. ”Is more advantageous for the player to enter a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and in the AT state, etc., the lottery that adds the number of AT sets or the number of games in the AT state is preferentially treated. ing.

  In addition, “push order bell 123 (6 choices)” to “push order bell 321 (6 choices)” corresponding to winning numbers 14 to 25 are prized according to which of the six reel stop orders is selected. For example, “left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3” and “123” means “left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel”. This means that the operation is stopped in the pressing order of “M53”, and it means that the operation of stopping the reels is performed in the order of “123” = “left → middle → right”. For example, in the case of “winning A-1” (winning number 14), 10 game medals that are the maximum number of winnings are obtained by stopping in the order of “123” = “left → middle → right” (correct answer in push order). The symbol combination “winning 01” that can be acquired is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the reels are stopped in the pressing order other than the pressing order in which the maximum number of acquired sheets can be acquired, that is, if the correct answer cannot be made in the pressing order, one sheet is paid out or lost. By configuring, in the state relating to AT such as “AT in progress”, the re-playing role push order and the bell push order are navigated (the push order with the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270). It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states with different profit ratios of the player not navigating the pushing order to states related to AT such as “normal gaming state”. The state related to AT will be described later.

  Further, “winning-C” and “winning-D” corresponding to the winning numbers 26 and 27 are condition devices that can be won during the RB operation. In the eighth embodiment, it is not a condition device in which the RB is continuously operated during the BB operation, and a lottery of the RB role is performed during the 1st type BB operation, and the RB is awarded to further win the RB operation. It is comprised so that it may become. In RB-A to D, it is a so-called RB role. The details of the type 1 BB operation and the RB operation will be described later.

  Next, in the item of “bonus winning information”, numerical values from 0 to 2 are assigned for each winning number. In the eighth embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number (28) that includes 1 type BB as the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role). Bonus winning information is 1, Bonus winning information with winning number (29) including RB-A is 2, Bonus winning information with winning number (30) including RB-B is 3, winning number including RB-C The bonus winning information of (31) is 4, and the bonus winning information of the winning number (32) including RB-D is 5. In the eighth embodiment, it is stipulated that the bonus (BB role) is not won in combination with the small role, but is won separately, but the bonus (BB role) is won in duplicate with the small role. It is also possible to configure. In addition, in the state where the type 1 BB is won, when the replay-E with the winning number 5 is won, the bonus winning information is not 0, and the bonus winning information corresponding to the winning bonus is not displayed. Assigned.

  Next, in the item of “winning / replay winning information”, numerical values from 0 to 27 are assigned for each winning number. In the eighth embodiment, a winning number that does not include a re-playing role and a small role (winning number 0 corresponding to lose and winning numbers 28 to 32 corresponding to bonus) is set to 0 for winning / replaying winning information, 1 to 27 winning / replaying winning information is distributed for each condition device for winning numbers including replaying roles or small roles.

  Next, in the item “production group number”, numerical values from 0 to 15 are assigned for each winning number. By transmitting the production group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the production executed by the sub control board S side can be determined.

  Next, FIG. 252 shows the lottery in which the winning numbers (conditional device number, also referred to as winning combination) and bonuses (also referred to as BB, BB winning) regarding the small role and replaying role in the eighth embodiment are determined by the role lottery means. It is a list showing probabilities (also called winning rates). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

  First, the lottery probability in “RT0” when the type 1 BB is not operated and the type 1 BB is not inside will be described in detail. In the eighth embodiment, the lottery probability of the winning combination may be different depending on the RT state. In the eighth embodiment, “RT0” and “inside 1 type BB”, which will be described later, have the same lottery probability for re-game players (“re-game-A” to “re-game-M”). . The “replay A” that is the winning number 1 corresponds to a general replay game combination. In addition, “re-games -B to M” that can be stopped and displayed in the winning numbers 2 to 13 are part of the re-gamer, but depending on the stop operation, the combination of symbols in which watermelons are aligned or cherry is left reel It has a role as a so-called rare role that stops and displays in the upper, middle, or lower stages. “Winning-A1 to B6”, which are winning numbers 14 to 25, serve as a push order bell, and push order navigation for notifying the player of the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player. The push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. The details of the stop display mode of the bell combination based on the pressing order will be described later. “Winning-C to D” having winning numbers 26 to 27 is a condition device that can stop and display during the RB operation by the one-type BB combination operation. “1 type BB” which is the winning number 28 is the BB combination. “RB-A to D” having winning numbers 29 to 32 are RB roles. In this example, as in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment described above, a winning lottery (advantageous zone shifting lottery) is performed by winning one type BB that is a BB role. And

  Next, the lottery probability in “1 type BB is operating and RB is not inside” during BB operation will be described in detail. “Type 1 BB is operating and RB is not inside” is a state where the BB is operating and the RB is not won (the condition device related to the RB is not carried over). In this state, the “winning-A1 to B6” lottery is performed at the same winning rate (lottery probability) as “RT0”. Unlike “RT0”, a lottery of “RB-A to D” is performed. “RB-A to D” is an RB role, but if the player does not perform a stop operation within a specific range of reels, the symbol combinations constituting RB-A to D are not stopped and the RB is activated. It is configured not to. In addition, the specific range in which the symbol combination related to RB can be stopped and displayed is configured to be different for each RB role. For example, when a stop operation in which the symbol combination related to RB-A can be stopped and displayed is executed, The symbol combinations related to RB-B to RB-D are configured not to be stop-displayed, and the symbol combination related to RB-B is related to RB-A to RB-D when a stop operation capable of stop-display is executed. The symbol combination is configured so that the symbol combination cannot be displayed in a stopped state, and the symbol combination related to RB-A, RB-B, and RB-D is stopped when the symbol combination related to RB-C is stopped. The symbol combination related to RB-A, RB-B, and RB-C is executed when a stop operation in which the symbol combination related to RB-D can be stopped is displayed. So it is configured so that it can not display stop.

  Next, the lottery probability in “1 type BB in operation and inside RB” during BB operation will be described in detail. “Type 1 BB is operating and inside RB” is a state where the BB is operating and the RB is won (carried over). In this state, lottery of “winning-A1 to B6” is performed at the same winning rate (lottery probability) as “RT0”. However, in “RB-A to D”, any RB role has already been played. Since it is a winning state, no lottery will be performed. When a random number for winning one of “RB-A to D” of winning numbers 29 to 32 is acquired, the same stop as in the case of losing in “1 type BB in operation and inside RB” It becomes control. In addition, it is configured to perform a lottery of “re-game-A” that was not lottery during “1 type BB is operating and RB is not inside”.

  Next, the lottery probability in “RB in operation” during RB operation will be described in detail. In the eighth embodiment, during the RB operation, two small roles of winning number 26 “all winning winnings” and winning number 27 “winning all one-piece winnings” can be won. It also has a “miss”. Although details will be described later, “RB in operation” is configured so that the probability of winning the winning number 27 “all winning singles winning” is particularly high. The expected medal increase / decrease value per game is negative, that is, the medal is decreased by the amount of game play.

<Stop control of “RT0”, “1 type BB inside” and “1 type BB in general and RB not inside”>
Next, the stop display mode of the bell combination based on the pressing order will be described in detail. First, the stop display mode of the bell combination in “RT0”, “inside the first type BB” and “in the first type BB in general and not in the RB” in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail.

  The case of “winning-A1” (condition device number 14) will be described in detail. “123” = “Left → Middle → Right”. ”=“ Left → Right → Middle ”stop, that is, if the correct answer cannot be made in the second and third pushing order, one sheet is paid out, and the other pushing order, ie“ 2 ** ”=“ If the first stop operation is not the left reel, such as “Middle → * → *” or “3 **” = “Right → * → *”. Each sheet is paid out, and 3/4 is lost.

  Next, the reel stop control based on the pushing position will be described in detail. For example, in the case of “winning-A1”, the bell symbol can be stopped in the upward direction, but the probability that the bell symbol actually stops is that it stops at the probability (4844/65536) shown. Instead, in the situation where the push order navigation does not occur, the bell symbol stops when the correct answer is selected in the 6-choice push order in which 10 winning combinations will win. Also, in the situation where the push order navigation does not occur, the bell symbol does not stop if the answer is not correct in the 6-choice push order that will win the 10-piece combination, and “winning 15, 20, 23, 27”. Etc., or loses. In a situation where push order navigation can occur, when the reels are stopped according to the push order navigation, 10 winning combinations will always win. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the condition device number 14 corresponding to “winning-A1” is determined, (1) when the left reel is operated in the first stop operation, the winning combination of 10 sheets of winning 01 Alternatively, one winning combination of winning 27 wins. More specifically, (1-1) when the left reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the watermelon A is stopped and displayed at the middle stage, and (1-2) the middle reel is stopped by the second stop operation. If the right reel is stopped by the third stop operation, the symbol combination corresponding to winning 01 (upward to the right) is displayed. (Sheet bell) is displayed in a stopped state, and (10) a combination of 10 sheets is paid out. (1-3) When the right reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the bell A is stopped and displayed by the third stop operation. When the middle reel is stopped, either a blank or a cherry is stopped and displayed at the stop operation timing, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 27 is stopped and displayed, whereby one winning combination is paid out.

  (2) When the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the winning combination of 15 winning prizes or 20 winning prizes or winning is lost. More specifically, (2-1) when the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the replay is stopped and displayed at the middle stage, and (2-2) the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation. In this case, depending on the stop operation timing, sheep, bell A (sheep and bell A constituting winning 15 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation), red seven, bell B (4 after receiving the stop operation) One of red seven and bell B) constituting the winning prize 20 within the frame is stopped and displayed in the middle stage. (2-2-1) The sheep on the left reel and the bell A by the second stop operation at the stop operation timing (Sheep and Bell A constituting the winning prize 15 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received and the bell A) are stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and when the sheep and the bell A cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle stage (the left reel Middle stage In the case of a stop operation at the watermelon A of symbol No. 2 to the operation timing other than the bell A of symbol No. 11), the sheep constituting the winning prize 15 and the symbols other than Bell A are stopped and displayed in the middle, and the left reel When the sheep and bell A are stopped and displayed in the middle, and when the right reel is stopped by the third stop operation, the red seven (within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) When the red seven constituting 15 is stopped and displayed at the middle stage, and the stop operation timing at which the red seven cannot be stopped and displayed at the middle stage (operations other than red water seven of symbol number 14 to symbol number 18 in the middle part of the right reel) Timing) When the stop operation is performed, symbols other than the red seven that make up the prize 15 are stopped and displayed in the middle, and sheep and bell A are stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel. When the red seven is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel, one of the winning prizes 15 is paid out by winning, and the sheep and bell A are not stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, or the right If the red seven is not stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the reel, it will be lost, and (2-2-2) the red seven on the left reel and the bell B (four frames after accepting the stop operation) by the second stop operation at the stop operation timing. Red Seven and Bell B) constituting the winning prize 20 within are stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and the stop operation timing at which Red Seven and Bell B cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle stage (design number 12 in the middle of the left reel) When the stop operation is performed at a timing other than the watermelon A to the bell B of the symbol number 1), the symbols other than the red seven and the bell B constituting the winning prize 20 are stopped and displayed in the middle. When the red seven and bell B are stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the left reel, and when the red seven is stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the right reel, one of the winning prizes 20 is paid out by winning. When the red seven and the bell B are not stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the left reel, or when the red seven is not stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the right reel, the game is lost. From the above, in the situation where the condition device number 14 corresponding to “winning-A1” is determined, when the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the combined winning probability of winning 15 and winning 20 is 1/4. The detailed calculation is as follows. First, the allowable stop range of the left reel component (sheep and bell A) in winning 15 is 1/2 of the total 20 frames, and the right reel component (red seven) is stopped. Since the allowable range is 1/4 of the total 20 frames, 1/8 can be derived by multiplication. Similarly, the stop allowable range of the left reel configuration symbol (red seven and bell B) in the winning 20 is ½ of the total 20 frames, and the right reel configuration symbol (red seven) stop allowable half-length. Since it is 1/4 of the total of 20 frames, it can be derived as 1/8 by multiplication, and becomes 1/4 by adding each. From the above, in the left reel, it can be said that any of sheep, bell A, red seven, and bell B constituting the winning 15 and winning 20 can be stopped at the middle stage regardless of the pushing position. When the right reel is operated at a timing other than a specific operation timing (operation timing other than the watermelon A of symbol number 14 to red seven of symbol number 18 in the middle stage of the right reel), it corresponds to winning 15 and winning 20 The symbol combination is lost without being stopped, and the stop display probability of the loss is 15/20 (3/4).

  (3) When the right reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the winning combination of the single winning 23 is lost. More specifically, (3-1) when the right reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the watermelon A is stopped and displayed at the middle stage, and (3-2) the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation. In the case of being stopped, either red seven, bell A, or bell B is stopped and displayed at the middle stage according to the stop operation timing, and when the middle reel is stopped by the third stop operation, red is displayed at the stop operation timing. Seven (seven symbols that make up the winning 20 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) is displayed in the middle row, and stop operation timing when red seven cannot be stopped in the middle row (design number in the middle row of the middle reel) 14 watermelon B to operation number other than red seven of symbol number 18), the symbols other than red seven constituting the winning prize 23 are stopped and displayed, and the red seven is displayed in the middle of the middle reel. If it is stopped and displayed is more one combination is paid out to winning one of the prize 23, the loss in the case of in the middle of the center reel red Seven is not stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the red seven (the seven symbols constituting the winning prize 23 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) is in the middle depending on the stop operation timing. In the case of stop display and when the stop operation is performed at a stop operation timing at which the red seven cannot be stopped and displayed at the middle stage (operation timing other than the design of the watermelon B of the symbol number 14 to the red number of the symbol number 18 on the middle stage of the middle reel). When a symbol other than the red seven constituting the winning prize 23 is stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and the left reel is stopped by the third stop operation, the red seven, bell A, or bell A is displayed in the middle stage depending on the stop operation timing. If any one of them is stopped and red seven is stopped and displayed in the middle of the middle reel, one winning combination will be paid out by winning one of the prizes 20, and the red seven will be displayed in the middle of the middle reel. A lost game if it is not stopped and displayed. As described above, when the right reel is stopped by the first stop operation under the condition that the condition device number 14 corresponding to “winning-A1” is determined, the winning probability of winning 23 is 5/20 (1 / 4). In addition, when the middle reel is operated at a timing other than a specific operation timing (operation timing other than the watermelon B with symbol number 15 to red seven with symbol number 19 in the middle stage of the reel), the symbol combination corresponding to winning 23 is stopped. Loss is not displayed and the loss display probability of loss is 15/20 (3/4). The reel stop control based on the pressing order when “winning-A1” is determined as the condition device number has been described. The reel stop control based on the pressing order is the same for “winning-A2” to “winning-A6”. It has become.

  In a situation where the condition device number 15 corresponding to “winning-A2” is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, the operation is performed at the timing when the white seven is stopped and displayed on the right reel (1/4). In the case of winning, the symbol combination corresponding to winning 15 and winning 20 is stopped and displayed, and at other operation timing (3/4), the white seven is not stopped and lost. In the situation where the condition device number of “Winning-A2” is determined, when the first stop operation is the right reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) at which the white seven is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 24 is stopped and displayed, and at the other operation timing (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 24 is not stopped and is lost.

  When the condition device number 16 corresponding to “winning-A3” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the timing at which the red seven and the white seven are stopped and displayed on the middle reel (1/2 ), And when the operation is performed at the timing (1/2 * 1/2 = 1/4) at which sheep and blanks are stopped and displayed on the right reel, the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 08 and winning 10 are stopped and displayed. At other operation timings (3/4), the symbols constituting the winning prize 08 and winning prize 10 are not displayed in a stopped state and are lost. In the situation where the condition device number of “Winning-A3” is determined, when the first stop operation is the right reel, the operation is performed at the timing (1/4) at which the sheep is stopped and displayed on the middle reel. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 25 is stopped and displayed, and at the other operation timing (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 25 is not stopped and is lost.

  When the condition device number 17 corresponding to “winning-A4” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the timing when the sheep and the blank are stopped and displayed on the middle reel (1/2), If the red reel and white seven are stopped and displayed on the right reel (1/2 * 1/2 = 1/4), the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 07 and winning 09 are stopped and displayed. At other operation timings (3/4), the symbols constituting the winning prize 07 and winning prize 09 are not displayed but stopped. Also, in the situation where the condition device number of “winning-A4” is determined, when the first stop operation is the right reel, the operation is performed at the timing when the blank is stopped and displayed on the middle reel (1/4). The symbol combination corresponding to the winning 26 is stopped and displayed, and at the other operation timing (3/4), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 26 is not stopped and lost.

  When the condition device number 18 corresponding to “winning-A5” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the timing when the sheep and the blank are displayed on the middle reel (1/2), When the operation is performed at the timing (1/2 * 1/2 = 1/4) at which sheep and blanks are stopped and displayed on the right reel, the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 12 and winning 14 are stopped and displayed. At other operation timings (3/4), the symbols constituting the winning prize 12 and winning prize 14 are not displayed in a stopped state and are lost. Also, in the situation where the condition device number of “winning-A5” is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, the timing when the sheep is stopped and displayed on the right reel (1/4), or the sheep on the left reel , And the timing at which one of the bells A is stopped and displayed (1/2 * 1/4 = 1/8), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 17 is stopped and displayed, and the blank is stopped and displayed on the right reel. At (1/4), or at the timing (1/2 * 1/4 = 1/8) at which one of red seven and bell B is stopped and displayed on the left reel, the symbol combination corresponding to winning 22 is stopped and displayed. At other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning prize 17 and winning prize 22 are not stopped and lost.

  Under the situation where the condition device number 18 corresponding to “winning-A6” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, the timing when the sheep and the blank are stopped and displayed on the middle reel (1/2), When the red seven and white seven are stopped and displayed on the right reel (1/2 * 1/2 = 1/4), the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning 11 and winning 13 are stopped and displayed. At other operation timings (3/4), the symbols constituting the winning prize 11 and the winning prize 13 are not displayed in a stopped state and are lost. Also, in the situation where the condition device number of “winning-A6” is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, the timing when the blank is stopped and displayed on the right reel (1/4), or the sheep on the left reel , And the timing at which one of the bells A is stopped and displayed (1/2 * 1/4 = 1/8), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 17 is stopped and displayed, and the sheep is stopped and displayed on the right reel. At (1/4), or at the timing (1/2 * 1/4 = 1/8) at which either the red seven or the bell B is stopped and displayed on the left reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 21 is stopped and displayed. In other operation timings (3/4), the symbol combinations constituting the winning 18 and winning 21 are not stopped and lost.

  Also, “winning-B1” to “winning-B6” as push order bell roles similar to “winning-A1 to A6” are configured to have the same reel stop control as “winning-A1”. In other words, when the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop order (push order correct answer), the symbol combination that constitutes the winning condition device is given priority. The reel stop control is performed such that the reels are stopped and displayed, the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop order by the first stop operation, and the reels are stopped in the predetermined stop order by the second stop operation. When the stop operation is not performed, the reel stop control is performed so as to preferentially stop and display the symbol combination constituting one combination. In addition, when the reels are not stopped in the predetermined stop order in the first stop operation, the stop operation is performed within a range in which the combination of symbols constituting a single combination with a predetermined reel can be stopped ( For example, the reel control is performed so as to stop and display the symbol combination that constitutes a single winning combination by setting 2 * 1/2 = 1/4 for two reels, while the predetermined reel constitutes a single winning combination. By not performing the stop operation within a range where the symbol combination can be stopped (for example, a range of 3/4), the symbol combination constituting one piece is not stopped and is lost.

<Stop control inside “RB inside”>
Next, the stop display mode of the bell combination in “inside the RB” in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail.

  The case of “winning-A1” (condition device number 14) will be described in detail. The payout is 10 regardless of the pressing order and the stop operation timing. That is, regardless of the pressing order and the stop operation timing, the first stop operation and the second stop operation are set to the number priority control, and the winning 01 is stopped and displayed. In addition, the winning combination of No. 30 is “Watermelon A / Bell A / Cherry”, and the left reel Watermelon A, the middle reel Bell A and the right reel Cherry all have PB = 1. Therefore, in the game won “Winning-A1” (condition device number 14), the symbol combination No. 30, which is winning 01, is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop operation timing.

  Similarly to “Winning-A1”, “Winning-A2” to “Winning-A6” are given the number-of-pieces priority control in the first stop operation and the second stop operation, regardless of the pressing order and the stop operation timing. Any one of 02 to winning prize 06 is stopped and displayed. Note that “winning-A1” to “winning-A6” may be collectively referred to as a push order bell group A.

  The case of “winning-B1” (conditional device number 20) will be described in detail. One payout or no payout is made regardless of the pushing order and stop operation timing (no 10 payouts are made). That is, regardless of the pressing order and the stop operation timing, the number priority control is performed in the first stop operation and the second stop operation. Note that the symbol combination (name) of “winning-B1” is winning 01, winning 15, winning 20, winning 24, and winning 27.

The case of “winning-B1” will be described in detail with a specific example.
(1) When the left reel is stopped as the first stop, “watermelon A” which is a symbol of PB = 1 is stopped and displayed in the number priority control. The symbol combination that the left reel is “Watermelon A” is No. 30 “Watermelon A / Bell A / Cherry”, No. 82 “Watermelon A / Blank / Bell A” and No. 83 “Watermelon A / Cherry / Bell A” The symbols on the left reel of the other symbol combinations are “Sheep”, “Bell A”, “Red Seven”, and “Bell B”. Since the number of combinations is two or less, “watermelon A” is stopped and displayed on the left reel (stop display on the effective line may be simply referred to as stop display, and so on).
(1-1) When the left reel is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel is stopped as the second stop, “cherry” which is a symbol of PB = 1 is stopped and displayed in the number priority control. The symbol combination with “Cherry” in the middle reel has one type of “Watermelon A / Cherry Bell A” of No. 83, and the symbols on the middle reel in other symbol combinations are “Bell A”, “ There is one type of symbol combination that is “blank” and can be stopped and displayed thereafter (the same number as “cherry”). In the eighth embodiment, “cherry” is determined to be stopped and displayed.
(1-1-1) When the right reel is stopped as the third stop after the middle reel is stopped as the second stop, the symbol “Bell A” of PB = 1 is stopped and displayed. "Watermelon A / Cherry Bell A" is stopped and displayed.

(1-2) When the left reel is stopped as the first stop and then the right reel is stopped as the second stop, “Bell A” which is a symbol of PB = 1 is stopped and displayed in the number priority control. There are two types of symbol combinations with the right reel “Bell A”: No. 82 “Watermelon A / Blank Bell A” and No. 83 “Watermelon A / Cherry Bell A”. Other symbol combinations Since the symbol of the right reel of “Cherry” is “Cherry” and there is one type of symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed thereafter, “Bell A” is stopped and displayed on the right reel.
(1-2-1) When the right reel is stopped as the second stop and the middle reel is stopped as the third stop, the symbol “PHERE” of PB = 1 is stopped and displayed (not “blank”). No. 83 “Watermelon A / Cherry Bell B” is stopped and displayed, and one payout is made.

(2) When the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, “Replay” which is a symbol of PB = 1 is stopped and displayed in the number priority control. The symbol combination that the middle reel becomes “Replay” is No. 54 “Sheep Replay Red Seven”, No. 55 “Bell A Replay Red Seven” and No. 64 “Red Seven Replay White Seven”. There are four types of “Bell B / Replay / White Seven” of No. 65, and the symbols of the middle reel of other symbol combinations are “Bell A”, “White Seven”, “Blank”, “Cherry”. Since there are not more than three types of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed thereafter, “replay” is stopped and displayed on the middle reel.
(2-1) If the left reel is stopped at the timing when the left reels No. 1 to No. 10 are positioned in the lower stage after the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, "Is stopped and displayed. The symbol combination for which the left reel is “Bell A” is No. 55 “Bell A, Replay, Red Seven”, and the symbols for the left reel of other symbol combinations are “Sheep”, “Bell B”, “ The symbol combination of “Red Seven”, which is arranged at a position where it cannot be retracted or can be stopped and displayed thereafter, is the same type as “Bell A”. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, “Bell A” is stopped and displayed. It is stipulated in.
(2-1-1) After the left reel stops as the second stop (“Bell A” is stopped on the left reel), the right reel is positioned at the timing when the No. 13-17 of the right reel is positioned at the lower stage as the third stop. When the reel is stopped, No. 55 “Bell A / Replay / Red Seven” is stopped and displayed, and one reel is paid out. In addition, when the right reel is stopped at the timing when the right reels 18 to 19 or 0 to 12 are positioned in the lower stage as the third stop, “red seven” cannot be stopped and displayed on the right reel (cannot be retracted). Therefore, No. 55 “Bell A / Replay / Red Seven” is not stopped and is not paid out.
(2-2) After the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, and the left reel is stopped at the timing when the left reel 0 or 11 to 19 is positioned in the lower stage as the second stop, the number priority control “Bell B” is stopped and displayed. The symbol combination for which the left reel is “Bell B” is “Bell B, Replay, White Seven” of No. 65, and the symbols for the left reel of other symbol combinations are “Sheep”, “Bell A”, “ The symbol combination of “Red Seven”, which is arranged at a position where it cannot be retracted or can be stopped and displayed thereafter, is the same type as “Bell B”, so that “Bell B” is stopped and displayed in the eighth embodiment. It is stipulated in.
(2-2-1) After the left reel stops as the second stop ("Bell B" is displayed on the left reel as a stop display), the third reel stops at the timing when the right reels Nos. 8 to 12 are positioned in the lower stage. When the reel is operated to stop, “No. 65“ Bell B, Replay, White Seven ”is stopped and displayed, and one reel is paid out. Also, when the right reel is stopped at the timing at which the right reels 0 to 7 or 13 to 19 are positioned in the lower stage as the third stop, “white seven” cannot be stopped and displayed on the right reel (cannot be retracted). Therefore, No. 65 “Bell B, Replay, White Seven” is not stopped and is not paid out.
(2-3) After the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, and when the right reel is stopped at the timing when the No. 13 to 17 of the right reel is positioned at the lower stage as the second stop, “Red Seven” that constitutes “Sheep / Replay / Red Seven” and No. 55 “Bell A / Replay / Red Seven” is stopped and displayed (“White Seven” cannot be stopped).
(2-3-1) After the right reel stops as the second stop (“Red Seven” is displayed on the right reel as a stop), the left reel No. 1-10 is positioned at the lower position as the third stop. When the reel is stopped, “Bell A” is stopped and displayed on the left reel (it is determined to stop and display “Bell A” instead of “Sheep”).・ "Red Seven" will be stopped and will be paid out. In addition, if the left reel is stopped at the timing when the left reel 0 or 11 to 19 is located in the lower stage as the third stop, neither “Bell A” nor “Sheep” can be stopped and displayed on the left reel (retraction) Therefore, No. 54 “Sheep / Replay / Red Seven” and No. 55 “Bell A / Replay / Red Seven” are not stopped and are not paid out.
(2-4) After stopping the middle reel as the first stop, when the right reel is stopped at the timing when the right reels Nos. 8 to 12 are positioned at the lower stage as the second stop, the right reel “Red Seven, Replay, White Seven” and “White Seven” constituting “Bell B, Replay, White Seven” of No. 65 are stopped and displayed (“Red Seven” cannot be stopped).
(2-4-1) After the right reel stops as the second stop (“White Seven” is displayed on the right reel as a stop display), the timing at which 0 or 11 to 19 of the left reel is located in the lower stage as the third stop When the left reel is stopped, “Bell B” is stopped and displayed on the left reel (it is determined that “Bell B” is stopped instead of “Red Seven”). “B, Replay, White Seven” is stopped and displayed, and one payout is made. Further, when the left reel is stopped at the timing when the left reels 1 to 10 are positioned in the lower stage as the third stop, neither “Bell B” nor “Red Seven” can be stopped and displayed on the left reel (cannot be retracted). Therefore, No. 64 “Red Seven / Replay / White Seven” and No. 65 “Bell B / Replay / White Seven” are not stopped and are not paid out.
(2-5) After the middle reel is stopped as the first stop, when the right reel is stopped at the timing when the right reels 0 to 7 or 18 to 19 are positioned in the lower stage as the second stop, Since neither “Red Seven” nor “White Seven” can be withdrawn, the symbol combination related to winning will not be stopped and there will be no payout.

(3) When the right reel is stopped as the first stop, “watermelon A” which is a symbol of PB = 1 is stopped and displayed in the number priority control. The symbol combination that the right reel becomes “Watermelon A” is No. 73 “Red Seven / White Seven / Watermelon A”, No. 74 / “Bell A / White Seven / Watermelon A” and No. 75 / “Bell B / White Seven”.・ There are three types of “Watermelon A”, and the symbols on the right reel of the other symbol combinations are “Cherry”, “Red Seven”, “White Seven”, and “Bell A”. Since there are two or less possible symbol combinations, “watermelon A” is stopped and displayed on the right reel.
(3-1) After the right reel is stopped as the first stop, and the left reel is stopped at the timing when the left reel 0 or 11 to 19 is positioned in the lower stage as the second stop, “Bell B” is stopped and displayed (one symbol combination with the left reel “Red Seven” is one type, and one symbol combination with the left reel “Bell B” is one type, both of which can be stopped and displayed. Even if the stop operation is performed at the timing, “Bell B” is displayed instead of “Red Seven”).
(3-1-1) After the left reel is stopped as the second stop ("Bell B" is stopped on the left reel), the middle reel is positioned at the timing when the 8th to 12th of the middle reel is positioned in the lower stage. When the reel is stopped, “White Seven” is stopped and displayed on the middle reel, and “Bell B / White Seven / Watermelon A” of No. 75 is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the middle reel is stopped at the timing when the middle reels 0 to 7 or 13 to 19 are positioned in the lower stage as the third stop, “White Seven” cannot be stopped and displayed on the middle reel. “Bell B, White Seven, Watermelon A” is not stopped and no payout is made.
(3-2) After the right reel is stopped as the first stop, and the left reel is stopped at the timing when the 1st to 10th of the left reel is positioned in the lower stage as the second stop, A ”is stopped and displayed.
(3-2-1) After the left reel stops as the second stop (“Bell A” is stopped on the left reel), the middle stops at the timing when the 8th to 12th of the middle reel is positioned at the lower stage. When the reel is stopped, “White Seven” is stopped and displayed on the middle reel, and “Bell A / White Seven / Watermelon A” of No. 74 is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the middle reel is stopped at the timing when the middle reels 0 to 7 or 13 to 19 are positioned in the lower stage as the third stop, “White Seven” cannot be stopped and displayed on the middle reel. “Bell A / White Seven / Watermelon A” is not stopped and no payout is made.
(3-3) After the right reel is stopped as the first stop, when the middle reel is stopped at the timing when the middle reels Nos. 8 to 12 are positioned in the lower stage as the second stop, Is stopped.
(3-3-1) After the middle reel has stopped as the second stop (“White Seven” is displayed as a stop on the middle reel), the left reel No. 1 to 10 is positioned at the lower position as the third stop. When the reel is operated to stop, “Bell A” is stopped on the left reel, and “Bell A / White Seven / Watermelon A” of No. 74 is stopped and displayed.
(3-3-2) Timing when the middle reel is stopped as the second stop ("White Seven" is stopped on the middle reel), and the left reel 0 or 11-19 is positioned at the lower stage as the third stop When the left reel is stopped, “Bell B” is stopped and displayed on the left reel (there is one type of symbol combination in which the left reel is “Red Seven” and the left reel is “Bell B”. There is only one type of symbol combination, and even if a stop operation is performed at the timing at which stop display is possible, it is determined that “Bell B” is stopped instead of “Red Seven”.・ "White Seven Watermelon A" will be stopped and will be paid out.
(3-4) When the right reel is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel is stopped at the timing when the middle reels 0 to 7 or 13 to 19 are positioned at the lower stage as the second stop, Since “White Seven” cannot be stopped, the symbol combination related to winning is not stopped and no payout is made.

  As for “winning-B2” to “winning-B6”, similarly to “winning-B1”, regardless of the pressing order and the stop operation timing, the first stop operation and the second stop operation are set to the number priority control. The symbol combination to be paid out is displayed in a stopped state or is not paid out (the symbol combination related to winning is not displayed in a stopped state). Note that “winning-B1” to “winning-B6” may be collectively referred to as a push order B group.

  As described above, in “inside RB”, when the push order bell group A is won, 10 payouts (relatively large payout number) regardless of the stop operation mode (pressing order or stop operation timing). If the symbol combination that becomes) is stopped and the winning order B group is selected, the symbol combination that becomes one payout (relatively small payout number) is stopped or no payout is given. It is configured to stop display (the symbol combination related to winning is not stopped display).

  Next, FIG. 253 is an RT state transition diagram in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 253 will be described in detail. In the eighth embodiment, there are five RT states: “RT0”, “inside 1 type BB”, “inside 1 type BB in general and inside RB”, “inside RB”, “RB in operation”. is doing. In the first type BB in the eighth embodiment, unlike the all-JACIN type condition device that continuously operates the RB combination, a so-called shift in which the RB combination is lottery during the operation of the one type BB and not inside the RB. RB type is adopted. “Inside 1 type BB” is a state in which 1 type BB is elected and carries over 1 type BB. “1 type BB in general and RB non-inside” is a state in which 1 type BB combination is in operation and RB combination is not elected (hereinafter also referred to as 1 type BB general) . “Inside RB” is a state in which the BB combination is operating and the RB combination is elected and carried over. “RB in operation” is a state in which the RB combination is operating.

  Next, the RT state transition condition will be described. When the condition indicated by the arrow in the figure is satisfied, the RT state shifts. First, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to “RT0”, the RT state is “1 type BB inside”, “1 type BB is working”, “RB inside”, “RB is working”. In the case of (all RT states except “RT0”), the RAM initialization is executed, or when the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, the process shifts to “RT0”.

  Next, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to “inside 1 type BB”, when the RT state is “RT0”, it shifts to “RT1” when the 1st type BB is won. Next, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to “1 type BB in operation”, in the RT state “inside 1 type BB”, the winning 1 type BB role is won or “ In the RT state of “RT0”, the RT state is changed to “1 type” by stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the selected 1 type BB role, or by terminating the operation of RB-A to D during the operation of 1 type BB. “BB in operation”. In addition, when moving directly from “RT0” to “1 type BB in operation”, the combination of symbols related to 1 type BB role in the winning game of 1 type BB role without going through “1 type BB inside” This is a case where a stop display is made. Next, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to “inside the RB”, when the RT state is “1 type BB is operating”, the combination of symbols related to the RB role is won. Shifts to “inside RB” when does not stop display. Next, as a specific transition example in which the RT state shifts to “RB in operation”, in the RT state “inside RB”, the symbol combination related to the selected RB role is stopped or displayed, or “1 The RT state shifts to “RB in operation” by stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the RB combination in the game in which the RB combination is won in the RT state of “type BB in operation”. Further, as described above, the RB combination may be selected by lottery during “RB operation”. When the RB role was drawn during “RB in operation” and the RB role was won, the winning information of the RB role was carried over, and when the RB operation was completed and the operation shifted to “1 type BB in operation”, it was carried over The RB winning information is referred to, and it is configured to shift to “inside the RB” again.

  Thus, in the eighth embodiment, unlike the all-JACIN type condition device in which the RB combination is continuously operated as the type 1 BB, the so-called shift in which the RB combination is lottery during the operation of the type 1 BB and not inside the RB. By adopting the RB type, it has a configuration having a section (referred to as a general type 1 BB) in which RBs are selected during the operation of the type 1 BB.

  Next, FIG. 254 is an AT state transition diagram in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 254 will be described. In the eighth embodiment, “low probability state A”, “low probability state B”, “high probability state A”, “high probability state B”, “AT state A”, “AT state B”, “ There are nine AT-related states: 1 type BB in general and RB not inside, RB inside, and RB in operation. The state will transition. As the game section, the states related to two ATs of “low probability state A” and “low probability state B” are set as “normal section”, and “high probability state A”, “high probability state B”, “ 7 AT states related to AT state A, AT state B, 1 type BB in general and RB not inside, RB inside, and RB in operation are set to “favorable zone” Is done. In other words, even if the states related to the seven ATs that are “advantageous sections” have been transitioned (transitioned), if 1500 games have passed without going through the “normal period” (the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter is 0) The “favorable section” is forcibly terminated and set to the “normal section”. In the setting of the states of “normal section” and “advantageous section”, for example, “low probability state A” and “low probability state B” are also set as “advantageous section”, and all nine ATs are related. A configuration in which the state is set as the “favorable section” is also possible. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the type 1 BB combination has a specification of winning with high probability, but it is not in an advantageous state for the player during the operation of the type 1 BB.

  “Low probability state A” and “low probability state B” are normal intervals. The “low probability state A” is a state where the 1st type BB combination is won and the 1st type BB combination is not won. The “low probability state B” is a state where the 1st type BB combination is not won. As the lottery for the “advantageous section”, the transition to the “advantageous section” is performed at a predetermined winning rate based on the winning of a predetermined small role mainly in “low probability state A” and “low probability state B”. A lottery will be held. In addition, as described in detail in the sixth embodiment, the small role for performing the lottery for the “advantageous section” is selected in the inside winning the 1st type BB role and the 1st type BB role. There is no non-inside, and it is preferable that the winning combination does not change the winning rate. Here, for example, the condition device related to the push order bell or the condition device related to the re-playing role as the rare role mainly performs the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section. In addition, a condition device related to a bonus such as a type 1 BB can also be configured to perform a lottery for shifting to an “advantageous section”. In “low probability state A” and “low probability state B”, the state related to AT is shifted based on the lottery result of the predetermined condition device that has been won. For example, in the “low probability state B”, a lottery for shifting to the “high probability state B” is won by lottery of a predetermined condition device, and the state related to AT shifts to the “high probability state B”. In the “low probability state A”, the lottery of the “AT state A” is won by lottery of a predetermined condition device, and the state related to the AT shifts to the “AT state A”.

  “High probability state A” and “high probability state B” are advantageous intervals. The “high probability state A” is a state where the 1st type BB combination is won and the 1st type BB combination is not won. The “high probability state B” is a state where the 1st type BB combination is not won. The “high probability state A” and the “high probability state B” are compared with the “low probability state A” and the “low probability state B”, and the transition lottery to the “AT state” which is advantageous to the player is performed. It can be said that it is a preferential treatment. “High Probability State A” and “High Probability State B” are, for example, an advantageous section that is an end condition of the “favorable section” won in the lottery for the transition to the “AT state” in which a 1-type BB role is won Since the start of the game, 1500G games have been played (the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter has become 0), or the largest increase in the number of game medals in the advantageous section (from the situation where the game medal has decreased most for the player) The number of game medals of the game exceeds 2400, or any end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, the high probability state A or the AT remaining game number is 0 in the AT state A or B) In B, the number of guaranteed games was 0, the 40G1 set loop lottery was not won (AT in progress), fixed 32G passed (gaseous precursor state), and push navigation was executed during AT Nevertheless Based on the fact that the player did not operate the stop button in the order of pushing the forward navigation, the game state (RT state or BB operation state) was changed, etc. And finish.

  The “AT state A” and “AT state B” are advantageous sections, in which a push order navigation that can obtain the push order bell combination with the most acquired 10 pieces occurs. Further, the “AT state A” and “AT state B” have, for example, an “additional special state” that is more advantageous for the player when a predetermined combination (rare combination) is won. May be. With this configuration, the number of remaining games in “AT state A” and “AT state B” can be increased, and a plurality of states that are advantageous to the player can be provided. Can be improved. The interval between “AT state A” and “AT state B” can be arbitrarily determined, but in the eighth embodiment, the initial number of games is determined to be 50 games. In addition, in the section of “AT state A” and “AT state B”, not only the number of games but also the difference number management defined by the number of game medals given (increased) by the player, Alternatively, the number of navigations specified by the number of executions of push order navigation (the number of instructions executed) in the game won in the push order bell, and the set of a predetermined number of games continues repeatedly by winning a continuous lottery with a predetermined number of games as one set. Alternatively, the predetermined number of games may be added as one set, and the number of AT remaining games may be increased in units of the predetermined number of games by winning the lottery (the set number is added), or a combination of these may be used.

  “1 type BB in general”, “inside RB”, and “in RB operation” are normal sections or advantageous sections, and are a state in which a person can stay when a 1 type BB combination is won. In the eighth embodiment, in the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-B that are the type 1 BB, unlike the all-JACIN type condition device that continuously operates the type RB, during the type 1 BB operation, In addition, a so-called shift RB type in which the RB combination is drawn in a non-RB interior is employed. In the eighth embodiment, in the above three states in which the type 1 BB is operating, it is defined that the lottery to newly shift to the advantageous section is not performed, but the lottery of the advantageous section may be performed. It is.

  In the eighth embodiment, similarly to the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, the player is configured to advance the game inside the one type BB. However, in the eighth embodiment, since the game can be executed with only three bets, the inside of the 1 type BB that can be won with 3 bets (the win of the condition device related to the 1 type BB is carried over) The symbol combination related to the 1st type BB combination (the condition device relating to the 1st type BB may be referred to as the 1st type BB combination) may be stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, in a game in which there is a possibility that the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB combination will be stopped and displayed, it is suggested that the player does not stop and display the symbol combination constituting the 1st type BB combination. It is configured. This is because, in the eighth embodiment, the medal increase / decrease expectation value is lowered when the type 1 BB is operated. As an execution mode of the suggestion, an image prompting a stop operation is displayed at a position where the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB role does not stop display (for example, an image like black smoke is displayed on the entire screen and the vicinity of the bar is stopped) Prompt to operate) Outputs a voice suggesting that there is a possibility that the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB role is stopped and displayed (for example, outputs a voice of “Bashun” or a voice of “Chance”) A lamp such as a side lamp may be turned on to suggest that there is a possibility that the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB combination is stopped and displayed, or a combination of these may be suggested.

  FIGS. 255A and 255B are diagrams showing changes in the RT state and the AT state. In FIG. 255 (a), the game is executed in the normal section and the RT state is RT0, and the condition device related to the result BB of the internal lottery is won. Further, in the eighth embodiment, an advantageous section shift lottery (a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a normal section to an advantageous section is made by winning a condition device related to BB in a normal section, and it may be configured to win 100%. Since it is configured to execute (good), it wins the advantageous section shift lottery (wins the advantageous section). In the game, the symbol combination related to the BB combination is not stopped and displayed. In this case, from the next game, the RT state shifts to the inside of the type 1 BB, and from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is started.

  In FIG. 255 (b), when it is a normal section and the RT state is RT0, the condition device related to the result BB of the internal lottery is won. Similarly to (a), the advantageous section shift lottery is executed to win the advantageous section. In this example, since the stop operation for stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the BB role is performed in the game, the symbol combination related to the BB role is stopped and displayed. In this case, from the next game, the RT state shifts to the type 1 BB general and RB non-inside (in BB operation), and also shifts from the normal interval to the advantageous interval to start the advantageous interval. In addition, even if it is a case where BB completion | finish conditions are satisfy | filled and BB is complete | finished, it does not return to a normal area, but an advantageous area is maintained. In the eighth embodiment, it is configured that the player is disadvantaged when the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB combination is stopped and displayed. However, by configuring in this way, the player mistakenly performs the stop operation. Even if the symbol combination related to the BB combination is stopped and displayed, maintaining the advantageous section when the BB ends can make it difficult for the player to be disadvantaged.

  By configuring as described above, according to the swivel type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to make the game progress inside the type 1 BB and stop the combination of symbols related to the type 1 BB role. By configuring so as to avoid the display, it gives a sharpness between a state advantageous to the player and a state disadvantageous to the player, and also increases the expected value (payout number / injection number) per game in the AT state. It is possible to create a more interesting gaming machine. Further, even if the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB combination is stopped and displayed, the player is configured not to be greatly damaged during the operation of the 1st type BB (particularly inside the RB). Therefore, even if the player is not good at pushing, a gaming machine that can advance the game without stress can be secured.

(Ninth embodiment)
In the seventh embodiment and the eighth embodiment, it is possible to give a clear distinction between a state advantageous to the player and a state disadvantageous to the player, and to increase the expected value per game in the AT state. Although the configuration is illustrated, such a configuration is not limited to the configuration of the seventh embodiment or the eighth embodiment. Therefore, with the seventh embodiment and the eighth embodiment, it is possible to give a sharpness between a state advantageous to the player and a state disadvantageous to the player, and to increase the expected value per game in the AT state. A different configuration is the ninth embodiment, and only differences from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below. In addition, it supplements that there is no problem even if the structure which is not explained in detail in 9th Embodiment applies the same structure as 7th Embodiment or other embodiment mentioned above.

  Next, FIG. 256 is a list of basic specifications of the swivel type gaming machine in the ninth embodiment. The spinning-reel game machine according to the ninth embodiment has a prescribed number of three, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames, and the effective line for which a winning determination is made is “left "Middle stage of reel M51, middle stage of middle reel M52, middle stage of right reel M53". The maximum payout number is 15 and the minimum payout number is 1 (the association between the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). Further, the priority winning order (withdrawing priority order) is “re-playing role → small role (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus”. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and the number of frames of each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of the effective line is changed (for example, 5 lines of 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to a line and changed to one line of the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. In addition, as with the seventh embodiment described above, the pull-in control when the push order small role that gives different profits to the player depending on the push order is selected is operated in the predetermined correct push order. In such a case, control is performed using the number priority control so that a small part with a large number of payouts is preferentially drawn, and a stop display is displayed when an incorrect answer is pressed in a different order from the correct answer. Number-priority control that pulls in symbols that increase the chance of winning out of the possible symbols (positioned within 4 frames from the stop operation) (the most likely to win out of multiple symbol combinations that can be won) Control is performed.

  Next, FIG. 257 is a list of reel arrangements of the rotary type gaming machine in the ninth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 all have 20 frames (0 to 19), and the symbols are “sheep”, “elephant”, “white seven”. ”,“ Red Seven ”,“ Bell A ”,“ Bell B ”,“ Replay ”,“ Watermelon ”,“ Blank A ”, and“ Blank B ”. Here, “Blank A” and “Blank B” are symbols included in the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination like the other symbols, and do not mean the symbol that does not constitute the winning combination, As a combination of symbols constituting a winning combination including “Blank B”, for example, “Blank A / Bell A / Sheep” is replay 03, and “Replay Blank B / Bell B” is winning 01. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type of design is increased / decreased / changed.

  Next, FIGS. 258 to 263 are symbol combination lists 1 to 6 in the ninth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device. As will be described later, according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, Any one of the symbol combinations is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the one line described above). In addition, even if the same type of symbols is not available on the active line, the same symbols are easily arranged in a line on the lines other than the active line when viewed from the player. It is configured so that three bell symbols are aligned on one side of the reel, such as aligned on a horizontal line). Further, in the ninth embodiment, it is a type 1 BB combination (a so-called first type special combination, which is hereinafter referred to as a type 1 BB combination or a BB combination). As a symbol combination, “Sheep / Sheep / Red Seven”, which is 1 type BB-A (continuous operation of RB, ends with payout exceeding 69 sheets) and 1 type BB-B (69 types of RB, is operated continuously) It has two symbol combinations “Elephant / Elephant / Red Seven”. In the ninth embodiment, when one kind of BB winning combination is won and the BB is executed (actual thing is activated), during the BB execution, one lottery table is used for all the games in the BB. Referring to the above, it is configured to draw a winning combination (small role) other than an accessory, or a lottery (this is a method that does not switch a table to be referred to in the case of lottery during one BB, Hereinafter, it may be called an all-JACIN type). Note that the format of the type 1 BB combination is not limited to this, and the table to be referred to in the case of lottery selection may be switched during the execution of one BB. When the push order bell, which is a condition device for “winning-A1” to “winning-B12” described later, is won, if the reels are stopped in the pushing order that is most advantageous to the player, it corresponds to 76th to 88th. The symbol combinations “Win 24” to “Win 36” are stopped and displayed, and 15 game medals are paid out. On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in a pressing order different from the pressing order most advantageous to the player, 22 The symbol combinations corresponding to “No. 01” to “No. 23” corresponding to No. 75 to No. 75 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out or lost.

  Next, FIG. 264 is a list of condition devices in the ninth embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may also be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the ninth embodiment, re-playing roles are provided from re-playing-A to re-playing-L (winning numbers 1 to 12), and the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53. Accordingly, the combination of symbols of the re-gamer to be stopped and displayed can be different. Winning-A1 to Winning-B12 (winning numbers 13 to 36) as pushing order bells are most paid out by performing a reel stop operation according to a predetermined pushing order (pushing order of correct answers) 15 It is possible to obtain a payout of a single combination, and if a stop operation different from the order in which the correct answers are pressed is performed, a single combination of payout is acquired or lost. Winners -C to E (winning numbers 37 to 39), which are the bells, are the bells that are able to obtain the payout of the 15 most-paid outs like the wins -A1 to -B12. However, this is a condition device that can obtain the payout of the 15 winning combination with the highest payout regardless of the stop operation by the pushing order of the reels. Winning-F to winning-Q (winning numbers 40 to 49) are condition devices that can be won while the BB (RB) is in operation. In 1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-B, it is what is called a BB role. In this example, the RB is configured to continuously operate during the operation of the one type BB-A and the one type BB-B, but the BB role is not limited to this, for example, the one type BB operation. A so-called shift RB for performing RB lottery may be mounted therein.

  Here, in the ninth embodiment, as illustrated in the item of “conditional device breakdown” in the rightmost column, according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Multiple types of symbol combinations (names) can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combinations (names) that have the same winning number among the multiple types of symbol combinations (names) are grouped together from the right. This is illustrated by the item “conditional device” in the column. Specifically, for example, in the “re-game-A” that is a condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, “re-game” is selected according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Four symbol combinations (names) of “01”, “Replay 02”, “Replay 03”, and “Replay 04” can be stopped and displayed. In “Winning-A1”, the left reel According to the stop order and stop position of M51, middle reel M52 and right reel M53, “winner 01”, “winner 08”, “winner 13”, “winner 18”, “winner 23”, “winner 24” 6 It is configured so that the symbol combination (name) of the type can be stopped and displayed. “Replay 01” and the like are names of symbol combinations, and there are a plurality of symbol combinations that can be “replay 01”. In addition, a name such as “replay 01” or a condition device such as “replay-A” may be referred to as a re-game player, and a name such as “winning 01” or a condition device such as “winning-A1” may be reduced. A condition device such as “1 type BB-A” may be referred to as a BB combination.

  Next, in the “Role” item, the role of the “Condition Device” is illustrated, and the “Replay” corresponding to the winning numbers 1 to 10 does not depend on the pressing order of the stop buttons. This is a condition device related to replay in which a re-gamer whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. The “watermelon” corresponding to the winning numbers 11 and 12 is a condition device related to the re-gamer. When the stop operation is performed so that the watermelon is stopped and displayed on a predetermined reel, the stop operation of all reels is performed. When viewed from the player, the watermelons appear to be aligned in the upper stage (the watermelons are stopped and displayed in a straight line in the middle stage).

  In addition, “pushing order bell 123 correct answer” to “pushing order bell 321 correct answer” corresponding to the winning numbers 13 to 36 are condition devices in which a small part to be won may be different depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected. For example, “left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3”, and in the case of “123”, the order is “left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53”. This means that the reels are stopped and “123” = “Left → Middle → Right”. For example, in the case of “winning A-1” (winning number 13), 15 game medals that are the maximum number of winnings are obtained by stopping in the order of “123” = “left → middle → right” (correct answer in push order). The symbol combination “winning 24” that can be acquired will be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the reels are stopped in the pressing order other than the pressing order in which the maximum number of acquired sheets can be acquired, that is, if the correct answer cannot be made in the pressing order, one sheet is paid out or lost. By configuring, in the state relating to AT such as “AT in progress”, the re-playing role push order and the bell push order are navigated (the push order with the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270). It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states having different profit margins of the player not navigating the pushing order to the state related to AT such as “normal state”. The state related to AT will be described later.

  The “small V-bell” corresponding to the winning numbers 37 to 39 is a condition that allows the maximum number of winnings to be acquired by the symbol combination constituting the winning prize 36 being stopped and displayed regardless of the pressing order. Device. “15 sheets” to “1 sheet” corresponding to the winning numbers 40 to 51 are condition devices that may be won only during the RB operation during the BB operation. “15 sheets” corresponding to the winning numbers 40 to 41 is a condition device that is won during the RB operation. The “winning-F” and “winning-G” condition devices corresponding to the winning numbers 40 and 41 are composed of a plurality of condition devices from winning 01 to winning 37 or winning 38, in the order of pressing. Regardless, it is configured to preferentially win any one of winnings 24 to 37 that can obtain the maximum number of winnings. “6 sheets” corresponding to the winning number 42 is a condition device that is won during the RB operation. The “winning-H”, which is a condition device corresponding to the winning number 42, is composed of a plurality of condition devices from winning 24 to winning 39, and winning 38 to 39 that can obtain 6 pieces regardless of the pressing order. It is configured to preferentially win any of the above. “1 sheet” to “1 sheet” corresponding to the winning numbers 43 to 51 are all configured by a plurality of condition devices, but are configured so that one can be acquired regardless of the pressing order. It is common. This is based on the above-mentioned number priority control, and when a reel stop operation is performed, among the multiple symbol combinations constituting the selected condition device, the number of symbol combinations that can be subsequently stopped is the largest. This is realized by using a control that preferentially pulls the symbol. “Type 1 BB-A” and “Type 1 BB-B” corresponding to the winning numbers 52 and 53 are BB roles.

  Next, in the item of “bonus winning information”, numerical values from 0 to 2 are assigned for each winning number. In the ninth embodiment, a winning number that does not include a bonus (BB role) has a bonus winning information of 0, and a winning number that includes one type BB-A as a winning number that includes a bonus (BB role) (52 ) Is 1, and the bonus winning information of the winning number (53) including 1 type BB-B is 2. In the ninth embodiment, it is stipulated that the bonus (BB role) is not won in combination with the small role, but is won independently, but the bonus (BB role) is won in duplicate with the small role. It is also possible to configure.

  Next, in the item of “winning / replay winning information”, a numerical value from 0 to 51 is assigned to each winning number. In the ninth embodiment, a winning number that does not include a re-playing role and a small role (a winning number 0 corresponding to a lose and a winning number 52/53 corresponding to a bonus) is set to 0 for winning / re-playing winning information, 1 to 51 winning / replay winning information is distributed for each condition device for winning numbers including re-playing roles or small roles.

  Next, in the item “production group number”, numerical values from 0 to 29 are assigned for each winning number. By transmitting the production group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the production executed by the sub control board S side can be determined.

  Next, FIG. 265 shows a lottery in which a winning number (condition device number, also referred to as a winning combination) and bonus (also referred to as a winning combination BB) are determined by a combination lottery means in the ninth embodiment. It is a list showing probabilities (also called winning rates). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

  First, the lottery probability in “RT0” when the first type BB is not operated will be described in detail. In the ninth embodiment, the lottery probability of the winning combination may be different depending on the RT state. In addition, in 1 type BB which can be elected at the time of 1 type BB non-operation, there are two types, 1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-B. The “replays A to J” that can be stopped and displayed with the winning numbers 1 to 10 correspond to general replays. In addition, “re-games -K to L” that can be stopped and displayed with winning numbers 11 to 12 are part of the re-gamer, but depending on the stop operation, the combination of symbols in which watermelons are aligned is stopped and displayed. It has a role as a so-called rare role. In addition, the winning numbers 9 to 13 can be stopped and displayed. “Winning-A1 to B12” that can be stopped and displayed in the winning numbers 13 to 36 is a push order bell role, and a push order navigation device that informs the player of the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player and push order display device D270 and It is comprised so that it can perform in production | presentation display apparatus S40, and the detail of the stop display aspect of the bell combination based on the pressing order is mentioned later. “Winning-C-E” that can be stopped and displayed in the winning numbers 37-39 is a bell as in “Winning-A1-B12”, but the maximum number of winnings can be acquired regardless of the pressing order. Is a conditional device. “Winning-F to Q” that can be stopped and displayed in the winning numbers 40 to 51 is a condition device that can stop and display during continuous RB operation by one-type BB combination operation. “1 type BB-A to 1 type BB-B” that can be stopped and displayed in the winning numbers 52 to 53 is a BB role.

  In the ninth embodiment, “1 type BB-A”, “1 type BB-B”, “1 type BB-B”, and “1 type BB-A” The number related to the lottery probability of “B” is added to “Replay-A”. By configuring in this way, compared to the state of “RT0” where “1 type BB-A” and “1 type BB-B” are not won, “inside 1 type BB” It is possible to increase the probability of winning, and it is possible to create an advantageous state for the player as compared with “RT0”. Moreover, the state which has been elected continues for 1 type BB-A carried over.

  Next, the lottery probability in “RB in operation” during BB operation will be described in detail. In the ninth embodiment, during the RB operation, a plurality of small roles of “winning-F” to “winning-Q” with winning numbers 40 to 51 can be won, and “losing” I don't have it. As will be described in detail later, “RB in operation” is configured to increase the probability that “1 sheet” of the winning number 44 is won. The winning number 44 is configured such that one winning combination is stopped and displayed. Accordingly, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game “RB in operation” is negative, that is, the medal is decreased by the amount of game play. The details of the winning rate (lottery probability) for each condition device “RB in operation” will be described later.

  Next, the stop display mode of the bell combination based on the pressing order will be described in detail. The case of “winning-A1” (condition device number 13) will be described in detail. “123” = “Left → Middle → Right” is stopped in this order, that is, 15 cards are paid out when the correct answer is given in the push order. ”=“ Left → Right → Middle ”stop, that is, if the correct answer cannot be made in the second and third pushing order, one sheet is paid out, and the other pushing order, ie“ 2 ** ”=“ If the first stop operation is not the left reel, such as “Middle → * → *” or “3 **” = “Right → * → *”, the answer is 1/8 with a probability of 1/8. It becomes a payout of the sheet, and it is configured to be lost at 7/8.

  Next, the reel stop control based on the pushing position will be described in detail. For example, in the case of “winning-A1”, the bell symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, but the probability that the bell symbol actually stops is that it stops at the probability (3782/65536) shown in the figure. In the situation where no push order navigation occurs, the bell symbol stops when the correct answer is given in the 6-choice push order in which 15 winning combinations will win. Also, in the situation where the push order navigation does not occur, the bell symbol does not stop if the answer is not correct in the 6-choice push order that will win the 15-card combination, and “winning 01, 08, 13, 18, 23 "etc., or lose. In a situation where push order navigation can occur, if the reels are stopped according to the push order navigation, 15 winning combinations will always win. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the condition device number 14 corresponding to “winning-A1” is determined, (1) when the left reel is operated in the first stop operation, 15 winning 24 winning combinations Or, one winning combination of winning 01 wins. More specifically, (1-1) when the left reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the replay is stopped and displayed at the middle stage, and (1-2) the middle reel is stopped by the second stop operation. In the case where the watermelon is stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and the right reel is stopped in the third stop operation, the replay is stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 24 (upper bell alignment) Is displayed, and when the right reel is stopped by the second stop operation, either the bell B or the watermelon is displayed in the middle depending on the stop operation timing. When the middle reel is stopped by the third stop operation, either the blank A or the blank B is stopped and displayed at the stop operation timing, so that the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winnings 01 is stopped and displayed. By Auditors one are paid out.

  (2) When the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, the winning combination of one of the winning combinations 08, 13, 18, 23 is won or lost. More specifically, (2-1) when the middle reel is stopped by the first stop operation, one of white seven, red seven, sheep, and elephant is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and (2-2) When the white seven is stopped and displayed by the first stop operation of the middle reel, and when the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the sheep on the left reel by the second stop operation according to the stop operation timing, and When the elephant (sheep and elephant making up the winning prize 08 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) is stopped and displayed in the middle, and when the sheep and elephant cannot be displayed in the middle In the middle stage, when the stop operation is performed at the blank No. A of symbol No. 4 to the operation other than the elephant of symbol No. 13), the sheep constituting the winning 08 and the symbols other than the elephant are stopped and displayed in the middle row and the left reel Sheep and elephant in the middle When the stop is displayed and the right reel is stopped by the third stop operation, the sheep (the sheep constituting the winning prize 08 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) is placed in the middle according to the stop operation timing. When the stop display is performed, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation timing at which the sheep cannot be displayed in the middle stage (operation timing other than the replay of symbol number 4 to the sheep of symbol number 8 in the middle stage of the right reel) If the symbols other than the sheep that make up the symbol are stopped and displayed in the middle, the sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, and the sheep is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel If the winning combination is paid out and the sheep and the elephant are not stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, or if the sheep is not stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel, it will be lost (2 3) When Red Seven is stopped and displayed by the first stop operation of the middle reel and when the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the sheep is put on the left reel by the second stop operation at the stop operation timing. , And elephants (the sheep and elephants that make up the winning prize 13 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) are stopped and displayed in the middle row, and the stop operation timing at which the sheep and elephants cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row (left When the stop operation is performed at the middle stage of the reel at the operation timing other than the elephant with the symbol number 4 (blank A to symbol number 13), the sheep constituting the winning prize 13 and the symbols other than the elephant are stopped and displayed at the middle stage, When the sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed in the middle of the reel, and the right reel is stopped by the third stop operation, the elephant (four frames after the stop operation is received) is stopped. The elephant constituting the winning prize 13 in the middle is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and the stop operation timing at which the elephant cannot be stopped and displayed in the middle row (replay of symbol number 9 on the middle of the right reel to operations other than the elephant of symbol number 13) When the stop operation is performed at (timing), symbols other than the elephant constituting the winning prize 13 are stopped and displayed in the middle, and sheep and elephants are stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, and the elephant is displayed in the middle of the right reel. Is displayed in a stopped state, one of the winning prizes 13 is paid out by winning, and sheep and elephants are not stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, or elephants are not stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel (2-4) If the sheep is stopped and displayed by the first stop operation of the reel in (2-4), and if the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the first stop operation is performed. In the stop operation, the white reel and the red seven (white seven and red seven constituting the winning 18 within 4 frames after receiving the stop operation) are stopped and displayed in the middle, the white seven, and When the stop operation is not performed at the red seven in the middle stage (stop operation other than the red seven of symbol number 14 in the middle of the left reel) When symbols other than Seven and Red Seven are stopped and displayed in the middle, and White Seven and Red Seven are stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, and when the right reel is stopped in the third stop operation, Depending on the stop operation timing, white seven (white seven that constitutes the winning prize 18 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) is stopped and displayed in the middle. When the stop operation is not performed at the middle stage, the stop operation is performed at a stop operation timing (operation timing other than symbol number 14 replay to symbol number 18 white seven in the middle of the right reel). Is displayed in the middle row, white seven and red seven are stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, and white seven is stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel. If a single winning combination is paid out and white seven and red seven are not stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, or if white seven is not stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel, it will be lost, and (2-5) middle reel When the elephant is stopped and displayed by the first stop operation and when the left reel is stopped by the second stop operation, the second stop operation is performed according to the stop operation timing. When the white seven and red seven (white seven and red seven composing the winning prize 23 within 4 frames after accepting the stop operation) are stopped on the left reel, the white seven and red seven When the stop operation cannot be stopped and displayed at the middle stage (in the middle of the left reel, operation timing other than the symbol A 14 blank A to the symbol 7 red seven), the white seven constituting the winning 23, and When the symbols other than red seven are stopped and displayed in the middle, white seven and red seven are stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, and the right reel is stopped in the third stop operation, the stop operation timing Causes the red seven (red seven that constitutes the winning prize 23 within 4 frames after the stop operation is received) to be stopped and displayed in the middle, and the red seven to the middle When the stop operation is not performed at a stop operation timing (operation timing other than symbol number 19 replay to symbol number 3 red seven in the middle of the right reel), symbols other than the red seven constituting the winning prize 23 are in the middle Is displayed in the middle of the left reel, and when the white seven and red seven are stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel, and one red 23 is displayed in the middle of the right reel. Will be lost if white seven and red seven are not stopped and displayed in the middle of the left reel, or if red seven is not stopped and displayed in the middle of the right reel. In the above description, the case where the reels are stopped in the order of “middle → left → right” has been described above. However, if the first stop operation is not the left reel, for example, “middle” The same reel stop control is performed even when “right → left →”, “right → middle → left”, or “right → left → middle”. As described above, in a situation where the condition device number 14 corresponding to “winning-A1” is determined, when the first stop operation is stopped other than the left reel, winning 08, winning 13, winning 18, winning The combined winning probability of 23 is 1/8. As a detailed calculation, first, the stop allowable range of the composition symbol (white seven) of the middle reel in the winning 08 is 1/4 of the total 20 frames, and the stop allowance of the configuration symbol of the left reel (sheep and elephant) The range is 1/2 of the total 20 frames, and the stop allowable range of the right reel component symbol (sheep) is 1/4 of the total 20 frames, so the winning probability can be derived as 1/32 by multiplication. Similarly, in the case of winning 13, winning 18, winning 23, the winning probability can be derived as 1/32 and becomes 1/8 by adding them up. As described above, in the middle reel, any one of sheep, elephant, red seven, and white seven constituting the winning 08, winning 13, winning 18, and winning 23 can be stopped at the middle stage regardless of the pushing position. Therefore, when the left reel is operated at a timing other than a specific operation timing (for example, an operation timing other than the elephant with symbol number 4 to symbol No. 4 in the middle stage of the reel) and the right reel is operated with a specific operation. If it is operated at a time other than the timing (for example, the operation timing other than symbol number 4 replay to symbol number 8 sheep in the middle of the reel), the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 08, winning 13, winning 18, and winning 23 are stopped. Loss is not displayed, and the stop display probability of the loss is 7/8. Although the reel stop control based on the pushing order when “winning-A1” is determined as the condition device number has been described, the reel stopping control based on the pushing order is the same for “winning-A2” to “winning-A12”. It has become.

  In a situation where the condition device number 14 corresponding to “winning-A2” is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, when the white seven is stopped and displayed on the middle reel, an elephant is stopped and displayed on the right reel. The combination of symbols corresponding to winning 09 is stopped and displayed when operated at the timing (1/2) when the sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed on the left reel. In the operation timing (7/8) where the operation is not performed at the timing (1/4) at which the elephant is stopped and displayed on the right reel, or the sheep and the elephant are displayed at the timing (1/2) when the elephant is stopped and displayed on the left reel. The symbol combination corresponding to winning 09 is lost and not displayed.

  In a situation where the condition device number 15 corresponding to “winning-A3” is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, when the white seven is stopped on the middle reel, the white seven is stopped on the right reel. When operated at the displayed timing (1/4), and when operated at the timing (1/2) when the sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed on the left reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 10 is stopped and displayed. The operation timing is not operated at the timing (1/4) when the white seven is stopped and displayed on the right reel, or is not operated at the timing (1/2) when the sheep and the elephant are stopped and displayed on the left reel (7/8). ), The symbol combination corresponding to the winning prize 10 is lost and not displayed.

  Under the situation where the condition device number 16 corresponding to “Winning-A4” is determined, when the first stop operation is the middle reel, when the white seven is stopped and displayed on the middle reel, the red seven is stopped on the right reel. When the operation is performed at the displayed timing (1/4), and when the operation is performed at the timing (1/2) when the sheep and the elephant are stopped and displayed on the left reel, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 11 is stopped and displayed. Is not operated at the timing (1/4) when the red seven is stopped and displayed on the right reel, or is not operated at the timing (1/2) when the sheep and the elephant are stopped and displayed on the left reel (7/8). ), The symbol combination corresponding to the winning 11 is not stopped and lost.

  Under the condition that the condition device number 17 corresponding to “Winning-A5” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, when the white seven is stopped and displayed on the left reel, the red seven is stopped on the right reel. Symbols corresponding to winning 18 and winning 23 when operated at the displayed timing (1/4) and when operated at the timing (1/2) when sheep and elephants are stopped and displayed on the middle reel Operation timing when the combination is stopped and the red reel is stopped and displayed on the right reel (1/4), or is not operated when the sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed on the middle reel (1/2) In (7/8), the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning 18 and the winning 23 are not displayed in a stopped state and are lost.

  Under the condition that the condition device number 18 corresponding to “winning-A6” is determined, when the first stop operation is the left reel, when the white seven is stopped and displayed on the left reel, the red seven is stopped on the right reel. Symbols corresponding to winning 19 and winning 20 when operated at the displayed timing (1/4) and when operated at the timing (1/2) when sheep and elephants are stopped and displayed on the middle reel Operation timing when the combination is stopped and the red reel is stopped and displayed on the right reel (1/4), or is not operated when the sheep and elephant are stopped and displayed on the middle reel (1/2) In (7/8), the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning prize 19 and the winning prize 20 are not displayed in a stopped state but are lost.

  In addition, “winning-A1” in “winning-A7” to “winning-A12” and “winning-B1” to “winning-B12” as push order bells similar to “winning-A1 to A6”. Is configured to have the same reel stop control. In other words, when the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop order (push order correct answer), the symbol combination that constitutes the winning condition device is given priority. The reel stop control is performed such that the reels are stopped and displayed, the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop order by the first stop operation, and the reels are stopped in the predetermined stop order by the second stop operation. When the stop operation is not performed, the reel stop control is performed so as to preferentially stop and display the symbol combination constituting one combination. In addition, when the reels are not stopped in the predetermined stop order in the first stop operation, the stop operation is performed within a range in which the combination of symbols constituting a single combination with a predetermined reel can be stopped ( For example, the reel control is performed so that the combination of symbols constituting one winning combination is stopped and displayed by two reels in a range of 1/2 * 1/4 = 1/8), while the predetermined reel forms one winning combination. By not performing the stop operation within a range where the symbol combination can be stopped (for example, a range of 7/8), the symbol combination constituting one piece is not stopped and displayed, and the game is lost.

  Next, FIG. 266 is an RT state transition diagram according to the ninth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, there is no “2 type BB” but only “1 type BB”. In FIG. 266, there are three RT states of “RT0”, “inside the 1st type BB” and “1st type BB in operation”, and the RT state is satisfied by satisfying the condition indicated by the arrow in the figure. Will be migrated. As a specific example of transition of the RT state, RAM initialization is executed when the RT state is “inside 1 type BB” or “1 type BB is operating” (all RT states except “RT0”). Or when the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, the process shifts to “RT0”. The operation of the type 1 BB is ended. Specifically, the type 1 BB combination is won, and the type 1 BB combination activated by winning the type 1 BB combination is digested by a plurality of games, and a medal is defined. The payout for the number of sheets is completed.

  Next, when the RT state is “RT0”, an instruction to stop the player who won the AT type and winning the 1st type BB role and not winning the 1st type BB role in the winning game is instructed. Navigation occurs. By performing a stop operation in accordance with the generated navigation, the RT state shifts to “inside the 1 type BB” without winning the 1 type BB combination. In addition, when the AT is not won and the 1st type BB role is won, a navigation for instructing a stop operation to win the 1st type BB role in the selected game is generated. By performing a stop operation in accordance with the generated navigation, the first type BB combination is won, and the RT state shifts to “1 type BB in operation”. In the ninth embodiment, the AT lottery determination is mainly performed during “1 type BB operation”. The AT winning / successful lottery for “1 type BB is in operation” is determined based on the winning of a predetermined small role (for example, a single role or re-playing role, etc.) until a specified number of medals are paid out. AT lottery with the probability of. Details of the AT winning / failing lottery will be described in detail later. The result of the AT winning / losing lottery performed in “1 type BB is operating” is held, and the game that has been won again in the 1 type BB role in “RT0” that has been transferred after “1 type BB is operating” Then, referring to the result of the AT winning / losing lottery held, if the AT lottery is won, a display indicating a stop operation that does not win the 1 type BB role is executed, and if the AT lottery is not won, 1 is displayed. A display suggesting a stop operation for winning the seed BB combination is executed.

  The RT state of “inside 1 type BB” in the state where the AT is won is a state where push order navigation is generated as a state relating to the AT, and thus may be a highly profitable state for the player. In the situation of winning the AT lottery, if “1 type BB inside” is selected, push order navigation will be executed if the push order bell is won until the AT end condition (AT end condition) is satisfied. Will be. The player can receive a medal payout by performing a reel stop operation in accordance with the pushed pushing order. As an end condition of the AT state, for example, when the AT counter value for managing the number of AT games becomes 0, the push order navigation does not occur in the subsequent games, and the correct answer is obtained in the bell generated after the game. If the reel stop operation can be performed in the order of pressing, the “inside of the 1st type BB” can be continued, but the reel stop operation is performed in the order of the incorrect answer in the push order bell generated after the game. In such a case, there is a possibility that the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB combination is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state shifts from “1st type BB inside” to “1st type BB in operation”.

  Next, the case where the RT state is “1 type BB in operation” will be described. The “1 type BB in operation” as the RT state in the ninth embodiment refers to a state in which the 1 type BB combination is won and the 1 type BB is operating. This game interval is set to end when a predetermined number of medals are paid out. The number of medals to be paid out can be freely defined. In the ninth embodiment, as an example, the operation of the BB is terminated when there are over 70 payouts. This means that when the total value of medals paid out based on the winning of a small role (for example, a bell role) won in “1 type BB is operating” exceeds 69, “1 type BB is operating”. Means to end. The definition of 69 sheets here is a subtraction based on a method of subtracting out number from the payout counter, and is simply an addition value of out number without considering the in number. That is, when one winning combination is won, 1 is simply subtracted from the initial value of the payout counter, assuming that the single winning combination has been paid out. As described above, the AT lottery is performed during the “1 type BB operation”, and in the result of the AT lottery, even in the RT state of “RT0” that shifts after the “1 type BB operation”, the RT state is set. It is configured so that it can be held across.

  Note that in the ninth embodiment, when the “type 1 BB is inside” and “AT state” state, the push order navigation occurs in the game that wins the push order bell, so the expectation per game is expected. The value is 1 or more. On the other hand, the RT state can be changed from “RT0” to “Inside 1st Class BB” even if the 1st Type BB role is won and the AT lottery is selected. No push order navigation will occur even in a game won for a small role related to the push order such as a push order bell role, and if a game is executed in the wrong answer push order in a game won for the push order bell Since one payout, a stop display of the symbol combination related to the bonus, or a loss occurs, the player is not in an advantageous state. In addition, when the AT lottery is not won “in the 1st type BB”, that is, in the state of “1st type BB inside” and not in the “AT state”, the AT lottery is not executed or the AT lottery is won. You may comprise so that a probability may be relatively low. By configuring in this way, it is not advantageous for the player even when a stop operation is performed so as not to align the bonus in a situation where the AT lottery is not won, and thus unintended capture can be prevented.

  Further, the AT lottery may be configured to be executable only when “1 type BB is operating”, or the AT lottery may be configured to be executable even during “RT0” or “inside the 1 type BB”. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a lottery with the number of AT games “within 1 type BB”, or the lottery with the number of AT sets added can be “in operation of 1 type BB”, “RT0” or “within 1 type BB”. It may be configured to be executable in “medium”. More specifically, in the situation where the AT lottery is won and the game is shifted to “inside 1 type BB”, 50 games are given as the number of AT remaining games. Will be completed, but in the state of the AT, the number of AT sets will be added and the lottery will be executed in the game that won the prize-L (watermelon), prize-M (watermelon), etc., and the number of AT sets will be added. In the case of winning, the additional information on the number of AT sets is stored, and then the RT state changes from “1 type BB in operation” to “RT0”, and the 1 type BB role is won at “RT0” In the same manner as in the case of winning the AT lottery, a display suggesting a stop operation that does not win the 1st type BB combination is executed, and the state is again shifted to the AT state (and “1st type BB inside”). Such a game may be used.

  Next, FIG. 267 is an image diagram of the effect display image displayed on the effect display device S40 in the game in which the type BB combination is won in the RT state of “RT0”. As described above, when the RT state is “RT0”, when the 1 type BB combination is won, the effect display images displayed on the effect display device S40 are different based on the result of the AT lottery. . First, the upper part of FIG. If it is “RT0” and the 1 type BB combination is won in the state where the AT lottery is not won, “Aim for sheep, sheep, 7” is displayed as the BB winning suggestion image 1 on the effect display device S40. Since “Sheep / Sheep / 7” is a combination of symbols related to Type 1 BB, the player stops the combination of symbols related to Type 1 BB by executing a stop operation aiming at “Sheep / Sheep / 7”. The RT state shifts from “RT0” to “1 type BB in operation”. As the display content of the BB winning suggestion image 1, for example, the display range of “sheep / sheep / seven” can be changed as appropriate, and the display range may be reduced so that the liquid crystal effect image can be easily seen, Moreover, you may expand and display. Further, instead of notifying the winning of the 1st type BB role in the effect display device S40, it may be notified using a voice such as “Aim the sheep on the left reel!”. Based on the BB winning suggestion image 1 and winning the 1st type BB role, and satisfying the 1st type BB end condition, as shown in the upper row on the right side of the same figure, the image of the game state of "RT0" again Is displayed.

  Next, the lower part of FIG. If it is “RT0” and the 1 type BB combination is won in the state of winning the AT lottery, “Aim 7 from the right!” Is displayed as the BB winning suggestion image 2 on the effect display device S40. The combination of symbols related to the 1st type BB role is “Sheep / Sheep / 7”, and the player who has viewed the BB winning suggestion image 2 performs stop operation aiming at 7 on all reels in order from the right reel. The combination of symbols related to the winning combination is not stopped and the RT state shifts from “RT0” to “1 type BB inside”. In addition, the state related to the AT also shifts to the state during the AT, and the push order navigation is executed in the game in which the push order bell is won thereafter. In addition, since it shifted to the state during AT, “AT start!” Is displayed on the effect display device SGS40. In addition, the display content of the BB winning suggestion image 2 is not a display mode in which the symbol combination related to BB is not directly stopped and displayed, such as “Remove 1 type BB role!”, And as a result, the symbol combination related to BB is stopped. It is preferable that the display suggests an operation mode that is not displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by being recognized by the player that BB is disadvantageous. Also, in the ninth embodiment, the BB winning suggestion image 2 is “Aim 7 from the right!” And the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB role is “Sheep / Sheep / 7”. Since the stop operation related to the reel suggests a “7” symbol, the symbol combination related to BB suggests an operation mode in which the symbol combination related to BB can be stopped and displayed.

  As another modified example, when displaying “Aim at 7 from the right!”, A range of 5 frames in which a symbol can be drawn on an active line at least after the left reel M51 is stopped is displayed. By configuring so that both “sheep” and “7 (red seven)” are not arranged, the player is not required to press the eye accurately (stop button operation timing with high difficulty), and the general operation timing May be able to avoid the stop display of the symbol combination (“Sheep / Sheep / Red Seven”) related to Type 1 BB, or use the 8th “Sheep” drawn on the left reel M51. It can also be placed at the number 13 “Elephant”. Specifically, when trying to operate around the third reel “7 (red seven)” of the left reel M51 at the operation timing, an unintended type 1 BB winning occurs when the operation timing is accidentally delayed. There is a possibility that it will. Therefore, by placing “sheep” on the 13th of the left reel M51, in order to pull the “sheep” placed on the 13th on the effective line, stop at the 9th to 13th positions of the left reel M51. It is necessary to operate the button, and since it is not arranged near the symbol (red seven) displayed in the BB winning suggestion image 2, it is possible to avoid an unintended winning. As a result, it is possible to provide user-friendly gameplay that reduces the fear of failure to push as much as possible.

  Here, as a configuration of the ninth embodiment, a configuration of a gaming machine having a type 1 BB and a type 2 BB will be described in detail below as a modification of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 268 is an RT state transition diagram according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. In this figure, there are five RT states: “RT0”, “Inside 1st BB” and “In 1st BB in operation”, “In 2nd BB inside” and “2nd BB in operation”. When the condition indicated by the arrow in the figure is satisfied, the RT state shifts. As a specific example of the transition of the RT state, the RT state is “inside 1 type BB”, “inside 1 type BB”, “inside 2 type BB”, “under 2 type BB” (“RT0” When all of the RT states are excluded), the RAM initialization is executed, or when the operation of the type 1 BB is completed or the operation of the type 2 BB is completed, the process shifts to “RT0”. The completion of the operation of the type 2 BB means that the specified number of medals is determined during the operation of the type 2 BB that is operated by winning the type 2 BB combination and winning the selected type 2 BB combination. Is to complete the payout. Since the transition of the RT state to “inside the 1st type BB” and “in the 1st type BB is in operation” is the same as in the ninth embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, when the RT state is “RT0”, by winning the type 2 BB combination, the state shifts to the RT state of “inside the type 2 BB” or “in operation of the type 2 BB”. In the latter case, when the two-type BB combination is won, a shift is made by winning a specific symbol 1 (a combination of symbols related to the two-type BB combination) that is stopped and displayed at a specific pressing position of a predetermined reel. In the former, when winning the 2nd type BB combination, a transition is made by winning a specific symbol 2 (a combination of symbols that can avoid winning the 2nd type BB combination) that is stopped and displayed at a specific pushing position of a predetermined reel. To do. It should be noted that, when the 2nd class BB is won, either the specific symbol 1 or the specific symbol 2 is surely awarded according to the pressing position. In other words, it is possible to shift to “inside the 2nd type BB” by winning the specific symbol 2 that can avoid the winning of the specific symbol 1.

  The RT state of “inside of type 2 BB” is different from “inside of type 1 BB” in the reel stop control related to the bell role that is managed by the pushing order, and the maximum number of acquisition is possible regardless of the pushing order and pushing position. It can be said that the player is highly profitable because it is configured to be able to acquire a certain 15 cards. Between these games, the push order navigation of the bell role managed by the push order is not generated. That is, instead of acquiring 15 bell roles according to push order navigation, it is configured to be able to acquire 15 bell roles regardless of the stop mode of the player. This “inside the two-type BB” does not have a predetermined number of games, and continues until winning the two-type BB combination won with a predetermined winning rate (lottery probability). By winning the type 2 BB combination, “inside of type 2 BB” ends, and the RT state shifts from “inside of type 2 BB” to “in operation of type 2 BB”.

  Next, the case where the RT state is “2 type BB in operation” will be described. The “2 type BB in operation” as the RT state of the ninth embodiment refers to a state in which the 2 type BB combination is won, the symbol combination related to the 2 type BB combination is stopped and the 2 type BB is operating. . This game interval is set to end when the payout of a predetermined medal is completed. The payout number of game media can be freely defined, but in the ninth embodiment, the payout number exceeding two is defined as an example. For example, in the “2 type BB in operation”, the end condition of the “2 type BB in operation” can be satisfied by executing a game in which 2 bets are paid out twice.

  Next, the medal increase / decrease expectation value and the state ratio in the ninth embodiment and the modified example of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the figure, the case where the game is advanced by the game method A (the batting method recommended to the player at the game store) is described in detail. First, the ninth embodiment shown in the upper part of FIG.

<Game method A>
An example of the gaming method A in the ninth embodiment will be described in detail. Game method A is a game method that is executed at the time of the first verification test in which a player executes a game so that the player does not lose the most. The game continues to be executed in an operation mode in which symbol combinations that may not be possible (design combinations including symbols other than PB = 1) can be stopped and displayed as much as possible.

<Game method A at RT0>
As a game method A in RT0, in a game that is not won by the type 1 BB combination, the stop operation is performed in the order of “left → middle → right”.
(1) As a first stop operation, the first bell A of the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing.
(1-1) When any one of Nos. 1 to 4 is stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the left reel (a game that has not been won by re-game-K and re-game-L), 1 of the middle reel is used as the second stop operation. No. Replay stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and then, as the third stopping operation, the first bell B of the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing.
(1-2) When the replay No. 5 is stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the left reel (replay game-K or regame-L winning game), the first replay of the middle reel is performed as the second stop operation. The middle stop button is stopped at the lower timing, and then the bell 0 of the right reel A stops the right stop button at the lower timing as the third stopping operation. The watermelon is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of each reel.

Further, in the game in which the 1 type BB combination is won at RT0 and the AT lottery is not won and the BB winning suggestion image 1 is executed, the stop operation is performed in the order of “right → middle → left”.
(1) As the first stop operation, the first reel B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the No. 6 replay on the middle reel stops at the lower timing. The button is stopped, and as the third stop operation, the 6th bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and “Sheep / Sheep, Red Seven” is stopped and displayed on the active line, 1 type BB will operate | move (it transfers to 1 type BB operation | movement).

Further, in the game in which the 1 type BB combination is won at RT0 and the AT lottery is won and the BB winning suggestion image 2 is executed, the stop operation is performed in the order of “right → middle → left”.
(1) As the first stop operation, the first reel B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the first replay on the middle reel stops at the lower timing. As the third stop operation, the first bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and “Sheep / Sheep, Red Seven” is not stopped on the active line. 1 type BB does not operate | move and will transfer in 1 type BB inside.

<Game method A inside 1 type BB>
Inside the type 1 BB, in a game in which push order navigation is generated, the stop operation is executed in the same push order as the push order navigation. In the middle reel, the No. 1 replay operates the middle stop button at the lower timing, and in the right reel, the No. 1 bell B operates the right stop button at the lower timing.

  In games where push-push navigation does not occur, stop operation is performed in the order of “right → middle → left”, and as the first stop operation, the first bell B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing. As a second stop operation, the 6th replay of the middle reel stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and as the third stop operation, the 6th bell A of the left reel stops to the left at the lower timing. Stop the button. In the game won for replay, the symbol combination related to replay is stopped and displayed, and the push order bells other than “winning-A11”, “winning-A12”, “winning-B11” and “winning-B12” ( In a game in which “Right → Middle → Left” is not the correct push order (push order bell), “Sheep / Sheep / Red Seven” is stopped on the active line and 1 type BB is activated. (Transition during type 1 BB operation). That is, if the AT termination condition is satisfied and the push order navigation does not occur and “Right → Middle → Left” wins the push order bell that is not the correct push order, the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB is stopped and displayed. 1 type BB will operate. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop operation may be performed in an operation order such as “left → middle → right”.

<Game method A during 1 type BB operation>
As the game method A during the type 1 BB operation, stop operation is performed in the order of “left → middle → right”.
(1) As the first stop operation, the first reel A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the first replay of the middle reel presses the middle stop button at the lower timing. The stop operation is performed, and as the third stop operation, the first bell B of the right reel performs the stop operation of the right stop button at the lower timing.

  Next, the medal increase / decrease expectation value of the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment, the gaming state has three gaming states of “RT0”, “1 type BB inside (AT state)”, and “1 type BB in operation”, If the state in which an instruction by navigation is generated is defined as “AT in progress”, and the state in which an instruction by push order navigation is not generated is defined as “normal”, “RT0” is normally “inside one type BB (in AT "Status)" can be defined as AT, and "Type 1 BB in operation" can be defined as normal. The reel stop control at the time of winning the small role when the game is executed by the game method A in each game state will be described. First, in “RT0”, in a game in which the push order bell is won, one winning combination is preferentially won regardless of the push order or push position. This is because the reel is stopped by the control based on the number priority control described above. In addition, since “1st type BB inside (AT state)” is a game state in which push order navigation occurs, push order navigation occurs in the game that wins the push order bell, and according to the push order navigation. When the reels are stopped, 15 winning combinations are always won. In “1 type BB in operation”, a combination of symbols that is one payout, six payouts, or 15 payouts is stopped and displayed. Next, the winning ratio of replay in each gaming state will be described. First, “RT0” is 1 / 7.3. Further, in the “1 type BB inside (AT state)”, the winning ratio of the replay is higher than “RT0”, which is 1/4. This is because the random number to be won for the 1 type BB combination in the gaming state of “RT0” is set as the random number to be selected for the re-game combination, and the winning rate of the replay is increased. In addition, during the “type 1 BB operation”, since the re-gamer lottery is not performed, replay does not appear. Next, an expected medal increase / decrease value in each gaming state will be described. The expected increase / decrease value per game can be calculated as “average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3)” as described above. The numerical value of the rough calculation result about the tendency of the increase / decrease expected value will be described. Based on this calculation, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in each gaming state is calculated to be about -2.0 for "RT0" and about -2.0 for "inside 1 type BB (AT state)". In +9.0, “1 type BB in operation”, it can be derived as about −2.0. In other words, in normal “RT0” and “1 type BB in operation”, for every 3 medals inserted, one winning combination wins every game with a high probability. There will be a reduction of 0. On the other hand, in “1 type BB inside (AT state)”, a push order navigation is generated in a game that wins the push order bell, so 15 winning combinations are won and the replay win rate is also compared with “RT0”. Therefore, each game will increase by about +9.0. Next, the winning rate (lottery probability) of the condition device according to Type 1 BB will be described. In the game state of “RT0”, 1 type BB is won at 1 / 8.9. On the other hand, in “inside 1 type BB (AT state)”, the number of condition devices related to the winning of 1 type BB in “RT0” is replaced with the winning number of replay. In “1 type BB in operation”, the number of the condition device related to the winning of 1 type BB in “RT0” is replaced with the number of the small role winning (for example, winning-J).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the state ratio of each gaming state in the ninth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the state ratio varies greatly depending on how the game is played (reel stop mode) and how the reel stop control is performed in response to the winning of a small role (reel stop control). It can be said that it is a thing. In the ninth embodiment, a gaming method A (a batting method recommended for a player at a game store), a gaming method B (a batting method for performing a stop operation with the highest profit for each game, details will be described later), a game The state ratio is calculated in the case of using the three game methods of method C (a striking method in which stop operations are randomly performed for all reels at the pushing position and stop order, details will be described later). .

<Game method B>
An example of the gaming method B in the ninth embodiment will be described in detail. Game method B is a game method for performing a stop operation with the highest profit for each game, and is a second method performed to provide an appropriate game machine that complies with laws relating to customs business regulations and business optimization. This is a game method executed at the time of the verification test. In addition, when a game progresses with the game method B, the game which a push order navigation generate | occur | produces is not performed.

<Game method B at RT0>
As a game method B in RT0, in a game that does not win the 1st type BB combination, stop operation is performed in the order of “left → middle → right”.
(1) In a game (winning number 0 to 12) that has been won for a lose or re-play, the first bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing as the first stop operation.
(1-1) If any one of No. 1 to No. 4 is stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the left reel (replay game with winning number 11-game that has not won the replay game with winning number 12 and K-winning game L) (2) As a stop operation, the middle reel button stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and then as the third stop operation, the first bell B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing. To do.
(1-2) When the replay of No. 5 is stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the left reel (replay game with winning number 11-game played with winning game number K-replay with winning number 12-L), as the second stop operation The first replay of the middle reel stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and then, as the third stop operation, the bell 0 of the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing. The watermelon is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of each reel.
(2) In the game won by the bell (winning numbers 13 to 39), 15 symbol combinations of winning 24 to winning 36 are stopped and displayed.

Further, in the game where the 1st type BB combination is won at RT0, the stop operation is performed in the order of “right → middle → left”.
(1) As the first stop operation, the first reel B on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the No. 6 replay on the middle reel stops at the lower timing. The button is stopped, and as the third stop operation, the 6th bell A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and “Sheep / Sheep, Red Seven” is stopped and displayed on the active line, 1 type BB will operate | move (it transfers to 1 type BB operation | movement).
In the game method B, regardless of whether or not the AT lottery is won, the combination of symbols in which the type 1 BB is activated in the game won for the type 1 BB combination is stopped and displayed.

<Game method B during 1 type BB operation>
As the game method B during the type 1 BB operation, the stop operation is performed in the order of “left → middle → right”.
(1) As the first stop operation, the first reel A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the first replay of the middle reel presses the middle stop button at the lower timing. The stop operation is performed, and as the third stop operation, the first bell B of the right reel performs the stop operation of the right stop button at the lower timing.

<Game method C>
Next, the game method C is a game method in which the game is played completely randomly, “left → middle → right”, “left → right → middle”, “middle → left → right”, “middle → right → left”, The pressing order is determined with an equal probability for each game from the six pressing orders of “Right → Left → Middle” and “Right → Middle → Left”, and the stop timing is also equal from 0 to 19 stop operation positions. This is a game method in which the stop operation timing is determined for each reel of each game with a certain probability. It should be noted that the opportunity for actual games to be performed in this game method C is, for example, a game method executed by a player who has little experience of playing a spinning game machine (cannot perform a push operation), or a customs business, etc. This is a gaming method that is executed at the time of the third verification test that is performed to provide an appropriate gaming machine that conforms to the laws on regulation and optimization of business.

<Game method C at RT0>
When a game is executed by the game method C in a game that is won for the type 1 BB role at RT0, the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB may be displayed in a stopped state or may not be displayed. Since there are one pattern combination (“Sheep / Sheep / Red Seven” or “Elephant / Elephant / Red Seven”) that 1 type BB will operate in the game won in 1st, it becomes 1 type BB role at RT0 When a game is executed by the game method C in the selected game, the ratio of the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB not displaying the stop is higher than the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB being stopped. In addition, even if the symbol combination related to 1 type BB is not stopped, the next game is inside 1 type BB, so the symbol combination related to 1 type BB can be stopped and displayed after the next game. There is sex.

<State ratio>
First, in the gaming method A, the state ratio of “1 type BB in operation” is the highest ratio of 72%. This means that in the gaming state of “RT0”, if the 1st type BB role is won with a high probability of 1 / 8.9, and if the AT lottery is not won, the game won for the 1st type BB role This is because the symbol combination relating to the first type BB is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, since the ratio of winning a single winning combination in “1 type BB is operating” is high, the number of games required until the operation of the 1 type BB is relatively increased.

  Next, in the gaming method B, the state ratio of “inside the type 1 BB” is 0%. As described above, in the game method B, a bonus (1 type BB in the ninth embodiment) is preferentially won in a game selected as a bonus combination (1 type BB combination). In a game that is won in the bonus role (1 type BB role) in “RT0” without staying in the period of “BB inside”, that is, carrying over 1 type BB, in any case, 1 type BB Win a prize. In addition, the state ratio (also referred to as state stay ratio) of “1 type BB in operation” is 87%, which is a higher ratio than in the game method A. This means that in the gaming state “RT0”, the gaming method B wins the 1 type BB winning in 1 / 8.9 in any case, while the gaming method A This is because when the 1 type BB combination is won in the state where the AT lottery is won, the 1 type BB combination is transferred to the inside of the 1 type BB without winning.

  Next, in the gaming method C, the state ratio of “inside the one type BB” is 65%, which is a higher state ratio than in the gaming method A and the gaming method B. As described above, when a game is executed in the game method C in a game that is won for the type 1 BB role at RT0, there are cases where the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB is stopped and not displayed. Since there are one pattern combination ("Sheep / Sheep / Red Seven" or "Elephant / Elephant / Red Seven") that will be activated in the game selected for the Type 1 BB role, at RT0 When a game is executed with the game method C in a game won for the type 1 BB role, the proportion of the symbols combination related to the type 1 BB that does not stop display than the type combination related to the type 1 BB stops display Becomes higher. In addition, even if the symbol combination related to 1 type BB is not stopped, the next game is inside 1 type BB, so the symbol combination related to 1 type BB can be stopped and displayed after the next game. However, since the ratio of the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB that is not stopped is higher than the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB is stopped, the rate of staying in the inside of the type 1 BB is relatively Get higher. In addition, the ratio which can draw in the symbol line which concerns on 1 type BB with respect to all the symbol combinations to an effective line is "(5x5x5) / (20x20x20) = 125/8000".

  Next, the state ratio of each gaming state in the modified example of the ninth embodiment shown in the lower part of FIG. In addition, the description about the same structure as 9th Embodiment is omitted. Note that “RT0”, “inside the 1st type BB” and “during 1st type BB operation” are omitted as the gaming state is duplicated with the ninth embodiment. As the gaming state, it has two additional gaming states of “inside 2 types BB” and “in operation of 2 types BB”, and “inside 2 types BB” “BB in operation” can be defined as normal. It should be noted that the “inside of type 2 BB” is not a gaming state in which push order navigation for the push order bell combination occurs. A case where a game is advanced by the game method A in each game state will be described.

<Game method A inside 2 types of BB>
As the game method A inside the two types BB, stop operation is performed in the order of “left → middle → right”.
(1) As the first stop operation, the first reel A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the first replay of the middle reel presses the middle stop button at the lower timing. The stop operation is performed, and as the third stop operation, the first bell B of the right reel performs the stop operation of the right stop button at the lower timing.

  Note that “inside the 2nd class BB” is a gaming state in which push order navigation does not occur, but there is a relatively high probability that a winning combination with 15 payouts will be won regardless of the push order or push position. It is comprised so that it may become.

<Game method A during 2 types of BB operation>
As the game method A during the type 2 BB operation, stop operation is performed in the order of “left → middle → right”.
(1) As the first stop operation, the first reel A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the first replay of the middle reel presses the middle stop button at the lower timing. The stop operation is performed, and as the third stop operation, the first bell B of the right reel performs the stop operation of the right stop button at the lower timing.

  In addition, in the case of “2 types BB in operation”, any lottery result is regarded as a state where at least all the small roles are won, and a predetermined small role appears. As described above, the lottery may be executed during the “type 2 BB operation”, or the combination lottery may not be executed.

  Next, the winning ratio of replay in each gaming state will be described. In “Inside Type 2 BB”, the winning rate of replay is higher than “RT0”, which is 1/4. This is because the random number to be won for the 1 type BB combination in the gaming state of “RT0” is set as the random number to be selected for the re-game combination, and the winning rate of the replay is increased. In addition, any lottery result is designed so that at least all of the small roles are regarded as being won, and predetermined small roles appear. Further, in the “2 type BB in operation”, only one condition device (for example, two-piece combination) wins, and the two-piece combination wins at almost 100%.

<Game method B at RT0>
In addition, in the game won in the Type 2 BB role at RT0, the stop operation is performed in the order of “left → middle → right”, and the game won in the Type 2 BB role regardless of whether or not the AT lottery is won. The symbol combination that the two types BB will operate is stopped and displayed.

<Game method B during 2 types of BB operation>
As the game method B during the two-type BB operation, the stop operation is performed in the order of “left → middle → right”.
(1) As the first stop operation, the first reel A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the first replay of the middle reel presses the middle stop button at the lower timing. The stop operation is performed, and as the third stop operation, the first bell B of the right reel performs the stop operation of the right stop button at the lower timing.

<Game method C at RT0>
When a game is executed by the game method C in a game where the two-type BB combination is won at RT0, there are cases where the symbol combination related to the two-type BB is stopped and not displayed. In addition, when a game is executed by the game method C in a game that has won the 2nd type BB role at RT0, the ratio of the 2nd type BB symbol combination to be stopped and the 2nd type BB symbol combination stopped. The ratio not to be displayed differs depending on the configuration of the reel arrangement (reel arrangement may be appropriately designed in consideration of the ratio at which the symbol combination related to the two types BB is stopped and displayed).

<State ratio>
Next, the state ratio of each gaming state in the modified example of the ninth embodiment will be described. Regardless of the game method, in the case of RT0, there is a possibility that a 1 type BB combination and a 2 type BB combination will be won. In the game where the two-type BB role is won at RT0, in the case of the game method A, the stop operation is performed so that the combination of symbols related to the two-type BB is not stopped, and in the case of the game method B, the design related to the two-type BB Since the stop operation is performed so that the combination is stopped and displayed, and in the case of the game method C, the stop combination is randomly performed.

  Further, it can be seen that there is a considerable state ratio in “inside the inside of type 2 BB” and “in operation of type 2 BB”. The state ratios of “inside of type 1 BB” and “inside of type 1 BB” are lowered by the amount of the state ratio of “inside of type 2 BB” and “in operation of type 2 BB”. In addition, when considering the instruction function such as push order navigation as an accessory, there is a certain degree of restriction in paying out with an accessory including the instruction function in the ball-out test, and a gaming machine having an advantageous section ratio of 70% or more. When configured, it is important that the number of payouts from the gaming machine is not too large. In the modified example from the ninth embodiment, it is configured to have two kinds of BBs, “(the number of payouts during RB operation + the number of payouts during CB operation + the number of payouts during SB operation + the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction is executed)” Designed so that the indicated payout number is less than 70% with the ratio of “all payouts × 100%” as the instructed bonus rate, and it is a fair gaming machine in which the payout number from the gaming machine does not become too large. . In the modified example from the ninth embodiment, having two types BB slightly increases the number of payouts during the CB operation that constitutes the numerator of the instructed payout ratio (the number of payouts during “2 type BB operation”). (For example, if a game with two payouts is executed twice in a two-card betting game, the payout exceeds two and the Type 2 BB ends its operation.) Therefore, the “number of payouts in the game in which the instruction has been executed” that constitutes the numerator of the instructed accessory ratio does not increase in the payout within the two types BB. On the other hand, since the “all payout number” constituting the denominator of the commanded accessory ratio is greatly increased compared to the numerator by the payout in the inside of the 2nd BB and during the operation of the 2nd BB, the commanded accessory ratio is suppressed. It is possible to design as follows. As in the modified example of the ninth embodiment, by configuring with two types BB, it is possible to reduce the rate of payout by the accessory including the instruction function. It can be a gaming machine that can easily pass the test.

  Next, FIG. 270 is an AT state transition diagram according to the ninth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, there are four states related to AT: “normal state”, “AT in state + 1 inside BB”, “non-AT in state + 1 inside BB”, and “1 type BB”. If the condition indicated by the arrow in the figure is satisfied, the state related to AT shifts. For example, if you win a specified small role in “1 type BB state” and then win an AT with a predetermined winning rate (for example, 1/5), you win 1 type BB again in “normal state”. In response to this, the state shifts to the “AT state”. Although not shown, the game section has a “normal section” and an “advantage section” that is more advantageous for the player than the “normal state” regarding the instruction. For example, when the state related to the AT is “normal state”, the state is set to “normal section”, and the state related to the AT is “in-AT state + 1 inside BB”, “non-AT in-state + 1 inside BB”, “ When it is “Type 1 BB state”, it is defined as “Advantageous section”. When the state related to AT is “Normal state”, “Non-AT state + Type 1 BB inside”, “Normal section” When the state related to the AT is “in-AT state + 1 inside BB state” or “1 type BB state”, it is defined as “advantageous section”, and the state related to the AT is “1 type BB state”. At this time, a part of the “type 1 BB state” may be defined as a “normal section”, and a part may be defined as an “advantageous section”. As a condition device for performing the lottery for the “advantageous section”, there is a re-game-E or a prize-A1. Moreover, you may comprise so that an advantageous area transfer lottery may be performed by winning of BB combination, such as 1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-B.

  The “normal state” is a normal section or an advantageous section. In the ninth embodiment, based on the information about the AT held in the “1 type BB state” described later and the winning of the 1 type BB role, the status related to the AT is changed to “in-AT state + 1 inside BB state”, Alternatively, it is a state in which it is determined which of the “non-AT state + 1 inside BB inside” is to be shifted. If the information related to the AT is information related to the winning, the state related to the AT is shifted to “in-AT state + 1 inside BB”, and if the information related to the AT is related to non-winning, the state related to the AT Is controlled to shift to “in-AT state + 1 inside BB”. Note that if the “normal state” is a normal section, push order navigation is not performed, but if the “normal state” is an advantageous section, push order navigation may be performed. Also, if you have won an AT and you have won the 1st BB role when you win the 1st BB role, your AT's winning right will not be lost and you will receive information about the winning AT. It is configured to be able to take over. When the operation of the first type BB is completed and the first type BB is elected again in the “normal state”, a stop operation is performed so as not to win the first type BB combination, thereby shifting to the AT state.

  “Non-AT state + 1 inside BB inside” is a normal section or an advantageous section, which is a state where the 1st type BB combination is won and the AT lottery is not won. Also in the “non-AT state + 1 inside BB”, the AT lottery may be executed or the AT lottery may not be executed.

  “At AT state + 1 inside BB inside” is an advantageous section, and is a state in which it is determined that the 1 type BB combination is won and the information on AT is won. A configuration in which the number of AT sets is added at a predetermined winning rate, or the number of AT games is added when winning a predetermined role (rare role) in “in-AT state + 1 inside BB” Is also feasible. In addition, although not shown in the figure, when the player is elected to a predetermined small role (rare role) in the “AT state +1 type inside BB”, it is further advantageous to the player “the added special state (AT set It may be configured to have a state in which an expected value such as an increase in the number or the number of games is high). By configuring in this way, the game period of “in-AT state + 1 inside BB” can be lengthened, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Since “AT state + 1 type BB inside” is an AT state, 100% of push order navigation for winning the bell role is generated. The section of “AT state +1 type inside BB” can be arbitrarily determined, but in the ninth embodiment, it is determined as 50 games. In addition, in the section of “AT state + 1 type BB inside”, not only management by the number of games, but also management of the difference number defined by the number of game media given by the player, or the number of times the bell push order navigation It may be the number of times of navigation specified in. In addition, in the AT state, if the one-type BB role that has been carried forward is won, the AT number of games is not subtracted and the operation of the one-type BB is completed, and again the “normal state” Then, when the 1st type BB is won, a stop operation is performed so as not to win the 1st type BB combination, thereby shifting to the AT state. At this time, if the AT is won during the 1st BB operation, the number of AT games for the newly won will be added to the number of AT games remaining at the timing of winning the 1st BB role. The There is no special penalty for winning the 1st class BB combination in the AT state, but the medal increase / decrease expected value is lower during the 1st class BB operation than in the AT state. There can be a situation where there is a significant decrease. “In-AT state + 1 inside BB” is, for example, the end condition of the “advantageous section” that satisfies the end condition of the in-AT state (for example, the number of games of 50G has been digested) that won the type 1 BB role It is determined that the end condition has been satisfied based on whether the 1500G game has been played since the advantageous section is started or the number of medals paid out exceeds 2,400.

  In addition, when the counter value of the AT counter becomes 0 in “AT state + 1 type BB inside”, it becomes “non-AT state + 1 type BB inside”. No push order navigation will occur. When the counter value of the AT counter becomes 0, the push order navigation for winning the push order bell role does not occur, so that the 1 type BB that has won the winning can easily win (in the ninth embodiment, the push When the order bell overflows, the 1 type BB combination can win a prize). In other words, as long as the reel stop operation is performed in the correct pushing order, the push order bell combination wins and it is possible to avoid the winning of the 1 type BB combination. Is configured so that there is a possibility that one kind of BB combination will win.

  The “1 type BB state” is a normal section or an advantageous section, and is a state in which a transition is made by winning the 1 type BB combination and winning the 1 type BB combination. In the ninth embodiment, an AT lottery is performed in the “1 type BB state”. The AT lottery is performed with a predetermined probability based on the winning of a predetermined small combination (for example, one piece combination), and information on the winning AT is temporarily held. The “1 type BB state” is a state in which the 1 type BB is operating, and is a state that ends when a predetermined number of game media are paid out. In the ninth embodiment, the payout number of game media exceeds 69. That's it.

  In the “normal state”, the “1 type BB state” won after the “AT state + 1 type BB inside” as the AT state, or the “non-AT state + 1 type BB” as the “normal section”. Regardless of the “1 type BB state” won after “inside” or the like, the game state always shifts after the “1 type BB state”.

  Next, FIG. 271 is an AT state transition diagram in a modification of the ninth embodiment. In the modification of the ninth embodiment, “normal state”, “AT state + 1 type BB inside”, “non-AT state +1 type BB inside”, “1 type BB state”, “2 type BB inside” There are four AT-related states, “medium” and “two-type BB state”, and the state related to AT shifts by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure. Note that “AT state + 1 inside BB inside”, “Non-AT state + 1 inside BB inside”, and “1 type BB inside” are the same as those in the ninth embodiment, and thus detailed description is omitted. Although not shown, the game section has a “normal section” and an “advantage section” that is more advantageous for the player than the “normal state” regarding the instruction. For example, when the state related to the AT is “normal state”, the state is set to “normal section”, and the state related to the AT is “in-AT state + 1 inside BB”, “non-AT in state + 1 inside BB”, “ In the case of “inside of type 2 BB”, “type 1 BB state”, and “type 2 BB state”, it is defined as “advantageous section”, and when the state related to AT is “type 1 BB state”, Part of the “type 1 BB state” may be defined as “normal section”, and part may be defined as “advantageous section”. In addition, the state regarding all ATs may be defined as an “advantageous section”. Regarding the transition to the “advantageous section”, “normal state”, “at AT state + 1 type BB inside”, “non-AT in state + 1 type BB inside”, “2 type BB inside” It is preferable to perform a lottery with small roles with equal winning rates. As a condition device for performing the lottery for the “advantageous section”, there is a re-game-E or a prize-A1. Moreover, you may comprise so that BB combination, such as 1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-B, may also carry out transfer lottery to an advantageous area.

  “Inside the 2nd BB” is an advantageous section, in which the 2nd BB combination is won and the 2nd BB is not won. In the modification of the ninth embodiment, the inside of the two types BB is defined as an advantageous section. Regarding the transition from the “normal state” to “inside the 2nd type BB”, when the 2nd type BB combination is won, the specific symbol 2 (2nd type BB combination) that is stopped and displayed at a specific pushing position of a predetermined reel is displayed. Shifts by winning the symbol combination) that can avoid the winning of. In addition, the “inside the two types BB” has a higher replay probability than the “normal state”, and in the push order bell role, a stop control different from the “normal state” is used. It is configured to acquire 15 combinations with the most payouts when the condition devices related to all the pressing sequence bell combinations are won regardless of the pressing order and the pressing position. Since “2nd type BB inside” is a period during which no push order navigation occurs, the payout of the 15-sheet combination due to the winning of the push order bell combination does not have to be regarded as a payout by the instruction function. “Inside the 2nd BB” wins when the 2nd BB combination wins, that is, a specific symbol 1 (a combination of symbols related to the 2nd BB combination) that is stopped and displayed at a specific pressing position of a predetermined reel. finish.

  The “2 type BB state” is a normal section or an advantageous section, and is a state in which a transition is made by winning the 2nd type BB combination and winning the 2nd type BB combination. In the ninth embodiment, it is assumed that the AT lottery is not performed in the “type 2 BB state”. In the “2 Type BB state”, there are 2 winning combinations that can be won regardless of the pressing order and the pressing position, for example, and in the “2 BB state”, 100% of 2 winning combinations can be acquired. The “two-type BB state” ends when the predetermined payout number is exceeded.

  With the above-described configuration, the swivel type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment gives a sharpness between a state advantageous to the player and a state disadvantageous to the player, and 1 in the AT state. The expected value per game (the number of payouts / the number of input) can be increased, and a more interesting gaming machine can be created. In addition, it is possible to create a novel gameability in which an AT lottery is executed during the operation of the one-type BB and an AT advantageous to the player is executed inside the one-type BB.

<Other configurations applicable to this example>
Here, the configuration applicable to all the embodiments having the above-described advantageous section will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 272 is an example of a push order navigation execution mode applicable to this example. It is a normal section, and the advantageous section indicator YH (favorable section lamp) is turned off, and the state related to the AT is a non-AT state (a state related to the AT other than the AT state, for example, a normal state). The game play rate is calculated for each game. Here, the payout rate is a numerical value calculated by “game medals paid out from gaming machines / game medals bet on gaming machines × 100%”. As a mode for calculating the payout rate, there is a payout number counter for measuring game medals paid out from a gaming machine and an insertion number counter for measuring game medals bet on the gaming machine. You may comprise so that the payout rate may be calculated (after completion | finish of payout) and the said payout rate may be memorize | stored. Further, the timing for calculating the payout rate is not limited after the game ends, and may be configured to be calculated at the game start timing, or may be configured to be calculated after the end of the internal lottery.

  Thereafter, the advantageous section shift lottery is won in the normal section, and the advantageous section indicator YH is lit because the first game in the advantageous section is executed at the timing 1 in the figure. The payout rate is less than 100% and 40% or more. Thereafter, the game progresses in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state, and push order navigation is not executed, so the payout rate decreases, and at the timing 2 in the figure, the payout rate is less than 100% and 40 % Of games are executed under the circumstances. In the game, the push order bell is won, but push order navigation (instructions in the figure) is not executed, and the stop operation is performed in the order of left stop button → middle stop button → right stop button, and the incorrect answer is Since it is in order, the symbol combination which becomes 3 payouts is stopped and displayed (the symbol combination relating to the bell in the correct pushing order is not stopped and displayed). In the game, since the game is executed with three bets and there are three payouts, the payout rate does not change. The correct push order of the push order bells won in the game is “middle → left → right”.

  Thereafter, the game progresses in the advantageous section and in the non-AT state, and push order navigation is not executed, so the payout rate decreases, and at the timing 3 in the figure, the payout rate is less than 40% and 33 The game is executed under the situation of more than%. In the game, “Left → Middle → Right” wins the push order bell, which is the correct push order, and the payout rate is below the threshold of 40%. Push order navigation for instructing stop operation in order is executed. The player performs the stop operation in the order of the left stop button → the middle stop button → the right stop button according to the push order navigation, and the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, so that the symbol combination related to 15 payout bells is stopped and displayed. (The combination of symbols related to the bell in the correct push order is stopped and displayed).

  As described above, in the configuration according to the figure, in the advantageous section, in the situation where the payout rate is less than a predetermined threshold value of 40%, a push forward role (a role in which push forward navigation can be executed) The game won in (1) is configured to perform push order navigation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged in a short time, and at the same time, a short-time test in the type test (test when the game is advanced by the above-described game method A) It is possible to prevent the yield rate from becoming less than 33%. The threshold value is not limited to 40% and may be an arbitrary numerical value of 33% or more. In addition, the role of executing the push order navigation when the payout rate becomes less than the threshold may be arbitrarily set. For example, the push order navigation is executed for the push order bell, but the push order replay is executed. You may comprise so that push order navigation may not be performed. In addition, in the same figure, the timing for starting the payout rate measurement is not shown, but (1) when the gaming machine is turned on, (2) when the setting is changed, (3) when the advantageous section starts, etc. . In addition, as a condition for executing push order navigation when the value is less than the threshold, (1) a predetermined game has elapsed since the power-on of the gaming machine, (2) a predetermined game has elapsed since the setting was changed, and (3) advantageous The predetermined game may have elapsed since the start of the section. For example, the predetermined game is 400 games.

  Moreover, the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited at the beginning of the advantageous section, and (1) When the advantage section becomes higher than a predetermined value based on the payout rate after the game ends (after the payout) in the advantageous section. The advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. (2) The advantageous section indicator YH is lit at an arbitrary timing after the start of the game (an arbitrary timing after the start lever is turned on) based on the betting rate after betting in the advantageous section. It may be the start timing, (3) the start timing of the push order navigation execution game based on the winning combination in the situation where the payout rate is less than the threshold value in the advantageous section, etc.

  Also, until the predetermined number of games after RAM initialization or setting change (may be after power-on) elapses, push forward navigation is not executed even if the payout rate is below the threshold. Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that the player does not notice that the setting has been changed.

  The above-described configuration is particularly effective when applied to a gaming machine having a relatively high stay ratio of the advantageous section (a ratio of staying in the advantageous section of the whole game and a ratio not staying in the normal section).

  When configuring a gaming machine having an advantageous section ratio of 70% or more, it is important that the number of payouts from the gaming machine is not too large. An example of such a gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, FIG. 273 shows a configuration relating to a state ratio applicable to this example. In the figure, an example of the state ratio in the gaming machine adopting the shift RB as in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. Note that the reel arrangement, the condition device, and the like have the same configuration as in the eighth embodiment.

<Game method A at RT0>
As the game method A in “RT0”, stop operation is performed in the order of “left → middle → right”.
(1) As the first stop operation, the 6th bell A of the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the 8th sheep of the middle reel stops at the lower timing. As the third stop operation, the No. 8 sheep on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing. The same stop operation is also executed in the game won for the 1st type BB, and the symbol combination related to the 1st type BB is not stopped and displayed, and the process shifts to “inside the 1st type BB”.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment has a gaming property such that the game hall manager executes the game at “RT0”, and moves to the inside of the type 1 BB and then operates at the gaming hall. When the game is executed by the game method A, the game is progressed “inside the type 1 BB” without winning the type 1 BB, so that the player does not stay at “RT0”. As shown in the drawing, the state ratio of “RT0” is 0%. It will be described later that it is advantageous for the player not to win the type 1 BB.

<Game method A inside 1 type BB>
As a game method A in RT0, stop operation is performed in the order of “left → middle → right”.
(1) As the first stop operation, the 6th bell A of the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the 8th sheep of the middle reel stops at the lower timing. As the third stop operation, the No. 8 sheep on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing. As described above, since the symbol combination related to the type 1 BB is not stopped and displayed, it does not shift to “1 type BB in general and RB not inside”, “RB inside” and “RB in operation”. It is configured.

<Game method B at RT0>
As the game method B in “RT0”, stop operation is performed in the order of “left → middle → right”.
(1) In a game that is not won for Type 1 BB, as the first stop operation, the 6th bell A of the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the middle reel The No. 8 sheep stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and as the third stop operation, the No. 8 sheep on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing.
(2) In the game won for Type 1 BB, as the first stop operation, the 17th watermelon A of the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, 17 of the middle reel The replay of No. stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and as the third stop operation, the 17th replay of the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB is The stop display is made, and a transition is made during the 1st type BB in general and the RB inactive.
As described above, in the game method B in “RT0”, when the 1 type BB combination is won, the symbol combination related to the 1 type BB combination won in the game is stopped and displayed. Since it is configured to shift to “in operation”, it does not stay in “inside the first type BB”.

<Game method B during 1 type BB in general and RB inactive>
(1) In a game that is not won by RB, as the first stop operation, the 6th bell A of the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, The No. sheep stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and as the third stop operation, the No. 8 sheep on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing.
(2) In the game won for RB-A, as the first stop operation, the 17th watermelon A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, 17 on the middle reel The replay of No. stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and as the third stop operation, the 17th replay of the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and the symbol combination related to RB-A is A stop display is made, and a transition is made during RB operation.
(3) In the game won for RB-B, as the first stop operation, the 17th watermelon A of the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, 11 of the middle reel No. Cherry stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and as the third stopping operation, the 17th replay of the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and the symbol combination related to RB-B is A stop display is made, and a transition is made during RB operation.
(4) In the game won for RB-C, as the first stop operation, the 17th watermelon A on the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the middle reel 6 The cherry of the number stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and as the third stopping operation, the 17th replay of the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and the symbol combination related to RB-C is A stop display is made, and a transition is made during RB operation.
(5) In the game won for RB-D, as the first stop operation, the 17th watermelon A of the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, 1 of the middle reel No. cherry stops the middle stop button at the lower timing, and as the third stopping operation, the 17th replay of the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing, and the symbol combination related to RB-D is A stop display is made, and a transition is made during RB operation.
In this way, in the game method B in “1 type BB in general and RB inactive”, no matter which RB combination is won, the combination of symbols related to the RB combination won in the game is stopped and displayed. Since it is configured to shift to “in RB operation”, it does not stay in “inside RB”.

<Game method B during RB operation>
(1) As the first stop operation, the 6th bell A of the left reel stops the left stop button at the lower timing, and as the second stop operation, the 8th sheep of the middle reel stops at the lower timing. As the third stop operation, the No. 8 sheep on the right reel stops the right stop button at the lower timing.

  In the gaming machine of this configuration, when the game method B is executed and the game progresses, the game machine is configured not to stay in “inside one type BB” and “inside RB”.

<Game method C at RT0>
(1) When a game is executed in the game method C in a game that is selected as “Type 0 BB” at “RT0”, there are cases where the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB is stopped and not displayed. Since there are two types of symbol combinations ("Blank / Watermelon B / Red Seven" or "Blank / Watermelon B / Blank") that the Type 1 BB will operate in the game selected for the Type 1 BB role, "RT0 When a game is executed in the game method C in a game that has won the 1 type BB role, the symbol combination related to the 1 type BB is not stopped and displayed rather than the symbol combination related to the 1 type BB is stopped and displayed. The percentage is higher. In addition, even if the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB is not stopped, the next game is “inside Type 1 BB”, so the symbol combination related to Type 1 BB is stopped and displayed after the next game. there's a possibility that. In addition, the ratio which can draw in the effective line the symbol combination which concerns on 1 type BB with respect to all the symbol combinations is "(5x5x10) / (20x20x20) = 250/8000".

<Game method C during 1 type BB in general and RB inactive>
(1) When a game is executed in the game method C in a game selected as an RB in “1 type BB in general and RB not in operation”, a combination of symbols related to RB is displayed as stopped There are cases where the RB is activated in the game elected for the RB role, and there is one pattern combination (“Blank / Red Seven / Blank”, “Blank / White Seven / Blank”, “Blank / Sheep / Blank”) Or “Blank / Blank / Blank”), when a game is executed in the game method C in a game won in the RB role in “RT0”, rather than the symbol combination related to RB is stopped and displayed. The ratio that the symbol combination related to RB does not stop display is higher. In addition, even when the symbol combination related to RB is not stopped and displayed, the next game is “inside RB”, so there is a possibility that the symbol combination related to each game RB will be stopped and displayed after the next game. It should be noted that the ratio of drawing the symbol combinations related to the RB to all the symbol combinations into the effective line is “(5 × 5 × 5) / (20 × 20 × 20) = 125/8000”. In addition, in “inside the RB”, the loss is determined to be about 1/5. Therefore, in “inside the RB”, the game is executed by the game method C, and the symbol combination related to the RB is stopped. The probability of display is about (125/8000) × (1/5) = 125/40000.

  Also in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 273, “(the number of payouts during the RB operation + the number of payouts during the CB operation + the number of payouts during the SB operation + the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction is executed) / all payout number × 100%” Is set so that the instruction payout number is less than 70%, it is possible to obtain a fair game machine in which the payout number from the gaming machine does not become too large. In the sixth embodiment, the seventh embodiment, the eighth embodiment, and the ninth embodiment described above, it is possible to configure the advantageous section stay ratio to be 70% or more. It is preferable that the instructed accessory ratio is less than 70%. In the case of the design as shown in FIG. 273, the numerator of the command-in-charge component ratio is “the number of payouts during the RB operation + the number of payouts during the CB operation + the number of payouts during the SB operation + the payout in the game in which the instruction is executed. The ratio of the “number of sheets” is “the number of payouts during RB operation = 0” when a game is played by the above-described game method A, so the number of payouts during RB operation is 0%, and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction is executed Is configured to have a ratio of 100% (because it is a game that always stays inside the bonus). Further, when the game is played by the above-described game method B, “the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction is executed = 0”, so that the payout number during the RB operation is 100% and the payout number in the game in which the instruction is executed is 0. % (In order to stop and display the symbol combination related to the bonus in the game won the bonus).

  Note that the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment employs the stop control at the time of the push order bell winning described above, so that “inside the RB” is “for the player” in situations where push order navigation is not performed. It is in the most advantageous (high payout rate) RT state (when the push order bell group A is won, all 10 tickets are paid out). In other words, in a situation where the push order navigation is not executed, “inside the one type BB” is more advantageous to the player than “inside the one type BB”, and the player wins the one type BB. There is a concern that it would be advantageous.

Therefore, the eighth embodiment is configured as follows.
(1) AT lottery can be executed in “1 type BB inside” (2) AT lottery is not executed in “RB inside” (3) Push order navigation does not occur in “RB inside” (4) The number of remaining AT games is also subtracted even in “inside RB” (5) The highest payout rate considering the execution of push order navigation (or winning the AT lottery) is “inside one type BB” In addition, all the above-described configurations may be applied to the eighth embodiment, or only a part of the configurations may be applied to the eighth embodiment. Further, the configuration applied to “inside the RB” may be applied to “in RB operation” and “in the 1st BB in general and not in the RB”. In addition, it may be configured to be able to win the AT lottery even in “inside the RB”, but it is preferable that “inside the RB” is more difficult to win the AT lottery than “inside the 1st type BB”. is there.

  By configuring in this way, including the AT lottery execution mode, “inside the RB” can be more advantageous for the player than “inside the RB inside”. The game progresses without winning the 1st type BB in the “1st type BB inside”. In addition, even if the type 1 BB is deliberately won, it is only a loss for the player, so that it is possible to prevent a situation where the game hall suffers a loss due to an unintended capture.

  As an example of the above configuration, in the eighth embodiment, AT lottery is executed by winning “replay-B”, “replay-C”, “replay-D”, and “replay-E”. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, in “1 type BB inside”, “replay-B”, “replay-C”, “replay-D”, “replay-E” can be won, In “inside RB”, “replay-B”, “replay-C”, “replay-D”, and “replay-E” are not won (refer to FIG. 252). It is possible to realize a configuration in which AT lottery can be executed in “medium” and AT lottery is not executed in “inside RB”.

  Further, in the above-described sixth to ninth embodiments, the configuration of the gaming machine that progresses the game inside the bonus is illustrated, but the sixth to ninth embodiments are configured to have the following configurations. May be.

  The stop control of the push forward (push order bell) may be different between the inside of the bonus and the inside of the bonus. The inside of the bonus and the inside of the bonus (in general, sometimes referred to as RT0) differ in whether or not the bonus is carried over, that is, since the winning condition device is different, There is no problem even if the stop control of (push order bell) is made different. For example, if the push order bell has a symbol combination of 15 payouts and a symbol combination of 1 payout, the number priority control is adopted by adopting the number priority control regardless of the push order when the bonus is not inside. Only a combination of symbols that will be paid out may be displayed in a stopped manner. With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the design so that “expected value per game with no bonus inside <expected value per game during RB operation”.

  During the BB operation, the expected value per game may be less than 1. That is, it may be designed so that the number of game medals possessed decreases during BB operation. Further, the counter value of the difference sheet counter may be updated even during the BB operation. You may comprise so that it may update only in an advantageous area, and you may comprise so that it may update also in a normal area. Further, the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter may be updated even during the BB operation. You may comprise so that it may update only in an advantageous area, and you may comprise so that it may update also in a normal area.

  When the bonus is not inside, the expected value per game may be less than 1. In other words, when the bonus is not inside, it may be designed so that the number of game medals possessed decreases. Further, the counter value of the difference number counter may be updated even when the bonus is not inside. You may comprise so that it may update only in an advantageous area, and you may comprise so that it may update also in a normal area. Further, the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter may be updated even when the bonus is not inside. You may comprise so that it may update only in an advantageous area, and you may comprise so that it may update also in a normal area.

  When the AT lottery is won, it may be configured to shift to the in-AT state after digesting a plurality of game signs (the number of games may be determined by lottery when the AT lottery is won). In such a configuration, the precursor state after winning the AT lottery is an advantageous section, but the advantageous section indicator YH is not turned on, the number of games is digested, and then the AT winning confirmation effect (to the player) This is an effect for definitive notification that the AT lottery has been won. For example, a confirmation screen is displayed, a continuous effect is successful, “WIN” is displayed, a rainbow image is displayed, etc.) You may comprise so that the advantageous area indicator YH may be lighted in a game, and you may comprise so that the advantageous area indicator YH may be lighted in the game which transfers during AT. In addition, although the AT lottery is not won, a gasse sign state that executes an effect similar to the sign state may be provided as an advantageous section as an effect mode. Even in such a case, the advantageous section indicator YH may not be turned on in the predicament state.

The configuration in which a plurality of types of push order bell groups are provided has been described above. However, when such a configuration is adopted and the shift RB is adopted as in the eighth embodiment, the configuration may be as follows. .
(1) In the type 1 BB non-inside (RT0), in a game won in the push order bell group A (sometimes referred to as push order bell group A), the push order in which 15 out of 6 choices are paid out. However, the remaining pressing order is one sheet, or all sheets are paid out by stop control regardless of the pressing order. In addition, in a game won in push order bell group B (sometimes referred to as push order bell group B), there is one push order for 15 out of 6 choices, and the remaining push order is one payout. Or, all sheets are paid out by stop control regardless of the pushing order. The payout rate is designed to be about 50%.
(2) In the BB general and RB non-inside, in the game won in the push order bell group A, there is one push order for 15 out of 6 choices, and the remaining push order is 1 The payout is made, or all the payouts are made by the stop control regardless of the pressing order. In addition, in the game won in the push order bell group B, there is one push order for paying out 15 cards out of 6 choices, and the remaining push order is paid out by 1 piece, or by stop control regardless of the push order All will be paid out. The payout rate is designed to be about 40%. In addition, in the general BB and non-inside of the RB, the winning probability of re-game is lower than that in the inside of the 1 type BB non-inside, and the payout rate that is difficult to win the re-game is designed low.
(3) In the inside of the RB, in a game won in the push order bell group A, one of the six choices has 15 push-outs, and the remaining push order is one pay-out, or Regardless of the pushing order, all the sheets are paid out by the stop control. Also, when the push order bell group B is won, 15 sheets are paid out regardless of the push order. The payout rate is designed to be about 100%.

  An elapsed game number counter that can measure the number of games since the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is provided, and when the counter value reaches a predetermined value, an AT lottery is performed or a transition to the in-AT state is performed. It may be configured. In the case of such a configuration, (1) the counter value is not updated during the bonus operation (particularly suitable for the gameability in which the game progresses inside the bonus), (2) two cards The counter value may not be updated in the execution of a game by betting (particularly, it is suitable for a game in which a game progresses by executing a game by betting three cards). On the other hand, it is preferable that the advantageous section remaining game counter value is updated both when two bets are placed and during the bonus operation. In addition, the number of medals held by the player since the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (the number obtained by subtracting the number of gaming medals paid out from the gaming machine from the number of gaming medals inserted into the gaming machine) is a predetermined number. It may be configured to execute the AT lottery when shifting to the state or shift to the AT state.

  The advantageous section indicator YH does not have to be turned on at the beginning of the advantageous section. However, when the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on once, the lighting is continued until the advantageous section ends, and is turned off when the advantageous section ends. It is preferable to configure. Further, the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is as follows: (1) Checking the on / off status of a specific flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, lighting up when on, turning off when off (2) It may be configured to check the on / off status of a specific flag when staying in the advantageous section and to light up when it is on, (3) to light up at the start of the game to execute the first push order navigation in the advantageous section . Further, if the AT is in an advantageous section even after the AT state is terminated, the advantageous section indicator YH may be kept on (turned off when the advantageous section ends). By configuring in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation that the advantageous state has not yet ended, or can have a sense of expectation to bring back the advantageous state again.

  When the difference counter value reaches 2400, the gaming machine is configured such that the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. (1) When the difference counter value approaches 2400 (for example, when it reaches 2380), the countdown is performed. (2) The difference number counter value is always displayed on the effect display device S40. (3) The difference sheet counter value is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Displayed on the device S40. (4) When the difference number has reached a predetermined number as an end condition in the AT state, and when it is scheduled to exceed 2400, the extra display is not executed. (5 ) When the number of difference sheets reaches a predetermined number as an end condition in the AT state, and when it is scheduled to exceed 2400 sheets, the extra display is changed to a display mode different from the normal time (for example, ("+20" is always displayed and "GET!" Is displayed for the excess)) (6) When the difference counter value approaches 2400 (for example, when 2380 is reached), The bonus winning may be notified after the difference counter value reaches 2400 without notifying the bonus winning. Further, the end condition in the AT state may be a case where the number of executions of the push order navigation reaches a predetermined number, and may be included in the number of executions of the push order navigation if the player makes a mistake in the push order. It does not have to be included.

  Further, it may be configured not to win a losing in a normal section (no losing is provided) and to win an advantageous section shift lottery with all the combinations. That is, when the game is executed in the normal section, the advantageous section shift lottery may be won at 1/1. Moreover, it has a losing, and it may be configured to win the advantageous section shifting lottery with all the combinations other than the losing in the normal section.

  In addition, when the shift RB is adopted, in the BB general (when the BB is operating and the RB is not inside), all the numbers other than the winning combination may be won for the RB combination, and the replay is not won. You may comprise.

In this example, the gaming machine has three reels and stop buttons. However, the reels and the stop buttons may each be provided with four reels and stop buttons. In a gaming machine configured as such, when executing push order navigation,
(1) Draw “○”, “△”, “□”, “×” on the stop button to make it visible to the player.
(2) As a sound to be output from the speaker, a stop button to be operated such as “1st”, “2st”, “3st”, “4st”, and the like is output so that the player can easily recognize the sound;
(3) For example, “Fuyu Volcano” is displayed in random order on the effect display device S40 (such as “Hayashi Volcano Wind”), and the push order of the four letter idiom is the correct push order (“Hayashi Volcano” “Wind” is “2341”).
You may comprise as mentioned above.

  As mentioned above, the configuration of the swivel type gaming machine is exemplified as the gaming machine. However, the above-described configuration is applied to various gaming models such as pachinko gaming machines, jade ball gaming machines, arrange balls, gaming machines, casino machines, and the like. it can.

  Of the configurations described above, the configuration related to the settings such as the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, the setting key switch, and the setting / reset button (for example, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 59) also applies to pachinko machines having setting values. Applicable.

(Summary)
Note that the following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (1)
A strip-shaped reel tape (for example, a reel strip MO) wound around the outer periphery of a reel base (for example, a reel frame MW);
In the reel tape, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the reel tape,
As a kind of the design, it has at least a first design (for example, white seven) and a second design (for example, a bell design),
The maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol,
The second design is arranged on at least one of both end portions in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the first design is not arranged on each end portion in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. ,
A length of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction is longer than an outer periphery of a surface of the reel base portion around which the reel tape is wound.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (2)
A gaming machine body,
A front door (for example, a front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be opened and closed;
In a rotating type gaming machine having a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A base (for example, base BU) on which the reel unit is installed;
A main tank member (for example, hopper H40) that is installed below the pedestal portion and stores game media;
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed in the vicinity of the main tank member for retracting surplus game media stored in the main tank member;
A part of the main tank member is provided with a slope portion (for example, an inclined surface H64) that descends from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member,
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by a locking part (for example, a screw BS),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the slope portion is positioned vertically below the locking component located closest to the side on which the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (3)
A gaming machine body,
A front door (for example, a front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be opened and closed;
In a rotating type gaming machine having a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A base (for example, base BU) on which the reel unit is installed;
A main tank member (for example, hopper H40) that is installed below the pedestal portion and stores game media;
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed in the vicinity of the main tank member for retracting surplus game media stored in the main tank member;
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by a locking part (for example, a screw BS),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the auxiliary tank member is positioned vertically below the locking part located closest to the side on which the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (4)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying the effect;
An operation member (for example, sub input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect,
After the plurality of reels are rotated by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is finally stopped among the plurality of reels. One game can be ended by performing a final stop switch operation that is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reels, and stopping all of the plurality of reels.
When the final stop switch operation is performed, when a first predetermined time elapses without a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, an effect display unit) , Standby screen) can be displayed,
When a predetermined operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) is operated after finishing one game, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image,
The gaming machine is configured such that the second predetermined time is longer than the first predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (5)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying the effect;
An operation member (for example, sub input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect,
After the plurality of reels are rotated by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is finally stopped among the plurality of reels. One game can be ended by performing a final stop switch operation that is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reels, and stopping all of the plurality of reels.
When the final stop switch operation is performed, when a first predetermined time elapses without a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, an effect display unit) , Standby screen) can be displayed,
When a predetermined operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) is operated after finishing one game, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image,
The second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the first predetermined time,
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined time is displayed with the predetermined image being displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. If a specific operation member (for example, the cross key SB2) is operated before the elapse of time, the predetermined image remains displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. 2 Even if the predetermined time has elapsed, the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, the stop switch is newly added before the first predetermined time elapses without a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. Even if the operation is performed, if the first predetermined time elapses without a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, the specific image can be displayed on the effect display unit Is composed of
When the final stop switch operation is performed, a bet is made before the first predetermined time elapses without a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. The game is configured such that the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit even if the first predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. Machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (6)
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A setting switch (for example, a setting) that is electrically connected to the main game unit and is operated to shift to a setting change mode (for example, a setting change mode) in which a setting value related to the advantage for the player can be changed. Key switch),
The main game unit is configured to be capable of executing an interrupt process that is a process executed every predetermined time,
In a situation where the power is cut off in a predetermined gaming state that is not in the setting change mode, and the power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the setting switch is turned on, power supply to the gaming machine is started, and the setting changing mode is entered. In the case where power is turned off after the setting switch is turned off and power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, it is configured to shift to the setting change mode,
In a situation where power is cut off in a predetermined gaming state that is not in the setting change mode, and the power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the setting switch is turned on, and the power supply to the gaming machine is started. It is configured not to shift to the setting change mode when a power interruption occurs before the predetermined time elapses and power supply to the gaming machine is started after the setting switch is turned off. It is a featured gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (7)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A stop switch (for example, a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, a right stop button D43) provided corresponding to each of the reels and operated by the player when stopping the rotation of the reels;
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game media within a predetermined number of ranges;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs a production sound;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that performs control related to the output of the performance,
The main game department
A role lottery means for performing a role lottery;
Reel control means for controlling stop of the reel so as to correspond to a result lottery result by the role lottery means when the stop switch is operated,
A storage number increase process for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means;
A payout process for paying out game media;
When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, it is configured so that a game medium can be given to the player,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed and a specific number of game media are given, the storage number increasing process is executed. And is configured to execute the withdrawal process,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In this case, the storage number increase process is executed and the payout process is not executed.
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed. When the game medium is granted, the payout process is executed after the storage number increasing process is executed,
The main game department
After the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium grant information is configured to be transmitted to the secondary game unit,
The subsidiary game department
Based on the reception of the game medium grant information, it is configured to be able to output a game medium grant sound, which is a production sound related to the grant of the game medium, from a speaker,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed and the specific number of game media is provided, the game medium provision information On the basis of the reception of a predetermined game medium giving sound (for example, a game medium giving sound output when a credit is increased by 1, a game medium giving sound output when paying out one game medal) Output is possible,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In this case, based on the reception of the game medium grant information, the predetermined game medium grant sound can be output,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed. If the game medium is given, the predetermined game medium grant sound can be output based on the fact that the game medium grant information has been received,
During the execution of the storage number increasing process, the time value from when the number of game media stored in the storage means becomes A (A is a natural number) until it becomes A + 1, and N (N is a natural number, 2 ≦ N ) M (M is a natural number, 1 + 1 M ≦ (N−1)) M + 1 from the start of the payout process for the game medium during the payout process that pays out game media The gaming machine is characterized in that the time value until the start of execution of the payout process for the eye game medium is different.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (8)
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the production;
A game lamp (for example, a lamp unit) that can be lit when performing the production,
A setting value display section (for example, a setting display LED) capable of displaying the setting value;
The game lamp has a plurality of lighting patterns (for example, element 6 in FIG. 77),
The lighting pattern is configured by combining a plurality of lighting modes (for example, element 5 in FIG. 77),
The lighting mode is a combination of a lighting color (for example, element 1 in FIG. 77) and a lighting time pattern (for example, element 4 in FIG. 77),
The lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time (for example, element 2 in FIG. 77) and a light-off time (for example, element 3 in FIG. 77).
It has a plurality of the lighting colors, has a plurality of lighting times, has a plurality of turn-off times,
As the lighting pattern, a first lighting pattern that can be performed when a predetermined abnormality is present, a second lighting pattern that can be performed when a setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit, and a setting value display that is not during a predetermined abnormality And at least a third lighting pattern that can be implemented when the set value is not displayed in the part,
The first lighting pattern is configured to include a predetermined lighting mode,
The second lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the predetermined lighting mode,
The second lighting pattern is configured to include a specific lighting mode,
The gaming machine is configured such that the first lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern do not include the specific lighting mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (9)
A storage means capable of electrically storing game media within a predetermined number of ranges (for example, in this example, game medals can be stored electrically as credits in gaming machines);
A switch operated when betting game media stored in the storage means, and a bet switch capable of betting a plurality of game media (for example, a max bet button);
A predetermined lamp (for example, a 3-bet lamp D213) capable of notifying that a specified number, which is the maximum number of bets per game in a predetermined gaming state, has been bet;
A specific lamp capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective (for example, a max bet lamp);
A role determining means capable of determining the winning role,
As the winning role determined by the role determining means, it is configured to be able to determine the re-playing role,
In the predetermined gaming state, the re-game player is not won in the game executed immediately before, and the sum of the game media stored in the storage means and the number of bets is not less than the specified number, And in the situation where the number of bets is less than the specified number, the specific lamp is configured to light up,
In a situation where the specific lamp is lit, when the number of bets reaches the specified number, the specific lamp is turned off after the predetermined lamp is lit.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (10)
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) for controlling the production,
The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the main game unit program seems to be longer than the time from when the power is cut off until the power supply to the gaming machine ends. Configured,
The time from the start of supplying power to the gaming machine to the start of the main game unit program is longer than the time from the start of supplying power to the gaming machine to the start of the secondary game unit program The gaming machine is configured as described above.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Then, even when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player thereafter. The gaming machine is configured not to give a player a gaming value corresponding to the combination.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A2)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, even though the stop operation is performed as the final stop operation at the predetermined timing, It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Then, even if the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation of the subsequent player and a power-off process based on detection of power-off being executed, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The gaming machine is configured not to give a player a gaming value corresponding to the combination.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
Freeze can be executed to delay the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop operation for the player after that is specified. After the specific symbol combination is displayed after being stopped at the timing, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus) can be executed.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop operation for the player after that is specified. Even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. Have

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the specific symbol combination is displayed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the game value is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured so that the next game can be executed regardless of whether or not

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the lottery state, at least the first lottery state and the first lottery state have at least a second lottery state having a different probability of determining a specific result,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. It is stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation after that, it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state,
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. The symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop is stopped and the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation thereafter. A gaming machine configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel, and a predetermined lamp that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result (for example, a replay lamp D290),
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the specific symbol combination is displayed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to be lit.
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. This is a gaming machine characterized in that the lamp is turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel, and a predetermined lamp that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result (for example, a replay lamp D290),
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, even though the stop operation is performed as the final stop operation at the predetermined timing, It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the specific symbol combination is displayed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to be lit.
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even when a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, although the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, The gaming machine is configured such that the predetermined lamp is turned on after returning.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8)
N reels (N is a natural number of 3 or more) provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53);
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs a production sound;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
In a game executed in a specific gaming state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the player's N-1st reel, and a symbol corresponding to a specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined performance sound (for example, tenp sound) from the speaker
In a game executed in the specific game state, a predetermined rotation for the (N-1) th reel is performed even though the player has stopped at the specific timing as a stop operation for the (N-1) th reel. The gaming machine is configured to be able to output a predetermined effect sound from a speaker even after a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel due to a defect. .

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game values within a predetermined number of ranges;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when a game value stored in the storage means is betted and can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective (for example, a max bet lamp);
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbols are stopped respectively, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that, the specific symbol combination is displayed, so that the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not given. Configured,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. Although the corresponding symbols are stopped respectively, and the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the player's final stop operation thereafter, the specification is caused by a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is configured such that even when a symbol combination other than the symbol combination is displayed, notification that the specific lamp is valid is not made.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game values within a predetermined number of ranges;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when a game value stored in the storage means is betted and can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective (for example, a max bet lamp);
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, even though the stop operation is performed as the final stop operation at the predetermined timing, It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbols are stopped respectively, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that, the specific symbol combination is displayed, so that the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not given. Configured,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbol is stopped, and the power-off process based on the detection of power-off is executed despite the fact that the player is stopped at the specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed, the gaming machine is configured not to notify that the specific lamp is valid after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game values within a predetermined number of ranges;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when a game value stored in the storage means is betted and can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective (for example, a max bet lamp);
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the predetermined symbol combination. Corresponding symbols are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a notification that the specific lamp is effective is given. In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped, respectively, and the player is stopped at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Regardless, it is configured to notify that the specific lamp is valid even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game values within a predetermined number of ranges;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when a game value stored in the storage means is betted and can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective (for example, a max bet lamp);
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, even though the stop operation is performed as the final stop operation at the predetermined timing, It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the predetermined symbol combination. Corresponding symbols are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a notification that the specific lamp is effective is given. In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped, respectively, and the player is stopped at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Regardless, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, the specific lamp is informed after the power is restored. A gaming machine characterized by being configured.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a gaming state, it has at least a special gaming state advantageous to the player,
Freeze can be executed to delay the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
It is configured to be able to execute a predetermined freeze (for example, freezing at the end of the bonus) when the special game state end condition is satisfied,
It is a special game state, a game that is newly executed in a situation that satisfies the end condition of the special game state by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are respectively stopped on the reels, and are stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze is configured to be executed.
It is a special game state, a game that is newly executed in a situation that satisfies the end condition of the special game state by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, and the player is stopped at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a gaming machine to play.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a gaming state, it has at least a special gaming state advantageous to the player,
Freeze can be executed to delay the progress of the game,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, even though the stop operation is performed as the final stop operation at the predetermined timing, It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
It is configured to be able to execute a predetermined freeze (for example, freezing at the end of the bonus) when the special game state end condition is satisfied,
It is a special game state, a game that is newly executed in a situation that satisfies the end condition of the special game state by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are respectively stopped on the reels, and are stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze is configured to be executed.
It is a special game state, a game that is newly executed in a situation that satisfies the end condition of the special game state by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, and the player is stopped at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power-off process based on the detection of the power-off, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. It is configured as
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Then, after the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The gaming machine is configured not to give a player a gaming value corresponding to the above.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. It is configured as
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Then, after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter and the execution of the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The gaming machine is configured not to give a player a gaming value corresponding to the combination.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation corresponds to the specific symbol combination. After the symbols have been stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the subsequent player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game is played regardless of the game value being input. Configured to be executed,
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel. Then, after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value is input This is a gaming machine configured so that the next game cannot be executed regardless of what has been done.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation corresponds to the specific symbol combination. After the symbols have been stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the subsequent player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game is played regardless of the game value being input. Configured to be executed,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even after the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the game value is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is configured such that the next game can be executed regardless of whether or not is inserted.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a gaming state, it has at least a special game transferable state advantageous for the player,
Freeze can be executed to delay the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
From when a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means until the specific symbol combination is stopped, it is configured to be able to enter the special game transition state,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. In addition, after the special symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that and the special symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed. ,
In a game that is not in a special game transferable state and the lottery result of the combination by the combination lottery means has a predetermined result different from the specific result, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After each stop, the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is configured not to execute the predetermined freeze.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
Freeze can be executed to delay the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. In addition, after the specific symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the subsequent player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus) can be executed. ,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop operation for the player after that is specified. Even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a gaming machine characterized by being.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the lottery state, at least the first lottery state and the first lottery state have at least a second lottery state having a different probability of determining a specific result,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
Each game that is executed in the first lottery state and that has been stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player in the game for which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are respectively stopped on the reels, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the second symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to be able to enter the lottery state,
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. The symbols corresponding to are stopped, and the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation, and the symbols other than the specific symbol combination due to the predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. After the combination is displayed, the gaming machine is configured not to shift to the second combination lottery state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
Freeze can be executed to delay the progress of the game,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, even though the stop operation is performed as the final stop operation at the predetermined timing, It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop operation for the player after that is specified. After the specific symbol combination is displayed after being stopped at the timing, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a special game) can be executed.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop operation for the player after that is specified. Even if the operation is stopped at the timing, even if the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored This is a gaming machine that is configured as described above.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B2)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, even though the stop operation is performed as the final stop operation at the predetermined timing, It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the specific symbol combination is displayed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even when a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, although the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, The gaming machine is configured such that the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input after returning.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the lottery state, at least the first lottery state and the first lottery state have at least a second lottery state having a different probability of determining a specific result,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, even though the stop operation is performed as the final stop operation at the predetermined timing, It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. It is stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation after that, it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state,
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. The symbols other than the specific symbol combination are executed because the power-off process based on the detection of power-off is executed even though the player is stopped and the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation. Even if a combination is displayed, the gaming machine is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state after power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4)
N reels (N is a natural number of 3 or more) provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53);
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs a production sound;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, even though the stop operation is performed as the final stop operation at the predetermined timing, It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
In a game executed in a specific gaming state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the player's N-1st reel, and a symbol corresponding to a specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined performance sound (for example, tenp sound) from the speaker
In the game executed in the specific game state, the power-off process based on the detection of power-off despite the stop operation at the specific timing as the stop operation for the N-1th reel of the player As a result of the operation, even when a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel, the predetermined effect sound can be output from the speaker after the power is restored. Is a gaming machine characterized by

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the lottery state, at least the first lottery state and the first lottery state have at least a second lottery state having a different probability of determining a specific result,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
Each game that is executed in the first lottery state and that has been stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player in the game for which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are respectively stopped on the reels, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the second symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to be able to enter the lottery state,
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. The symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop is stopped and the player is stopped at a specific timing as a final stop operation thereafter. A gaming machine configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C1)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button M40);
An effect notification section (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of notifying the effect;
An internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery,
Suggestion effect (for example, rare role suggestion effect) that can be executed in a game for which a specific result (for example, winning-C in FIG. 10) has been determined by the internal lottery means and that suggests that the specific result has been determined. Can be notified in the production notification section,
As the suggestion effect, the notification is started when the first suggestion effect (for example, “CHANCE!” In FIG. 175 is displayed) that is started when the game start condition is satisfied and when a predetermined stop operation is performed. And at least a second suggestion effect (for example, red apples (multiple) in FIG. 175),
In the game in which the first suggestion effect is executed, the second suggestion effect is not executed,
The effect notification unit can notify a continuous effect (for example, the night mode in FIG. 175) that is an effect notified over a plurality of games.
In the case where the suggestion effect is executed in the game in which the specific result executed in a situation where the predetermined game state is informed and the continuous effect is reported, the first suggestion effect is Is configured to be executed more easily than the second suggestion effect,
In a game in which the predetermined game state is determined and the specific result is determined, the game is executed when the game is executed in a situation where the continuous effect is notified. This is a swivel-type gaming machine configured so that the first suggestion effect is more easily executed than in the case of a game executed in a situation where no notification is made.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C2)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button M40);
An effect notification section (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of notifying the effect;
Main control means (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub-control means (for example, sub-control board S) for controlling the production,
The main control means includes
Internal lottery means for internal lottery;
Freeze execution means for executing a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
As a gaming state, it has a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player,
The winning number that can be determined by the internal lottery means has at least a first winning number (for example, winning number 14 in FIG. 10) and a second winning number (for example, winning number 7 in FIG. 10),
As a winning number that can be determined by the internal lottery means, a winning number (for example, winning number 21 in FIG. 10) including a special result (for example, type 1 BB-B) that triggers the transition to the special gaming state is provided. And
Production group information (for example, production group number) corresponding to the winning number determined by the internal lottery means can be derived,
Production group information corresponding to the first winning number is first information (eg, production group number 7 in FIG. 10),
The production group information corresponding to the second winning number is the second information (for example, the production group number 5 in FIG. 10).
Of the winning numbers corresponding to the first information, the winning number not including the special result is only the first winning number,
Among the winning numbers corresponding to the second information, the winning number not including the special result has other than the second winning number,
The main control means is configured to be able to transmit the derived performance group information to the sub-control means,
In the game in which a predetermined freeze (for example, a specific freeze) is executed, the sub-control unit can notify a predetermined freeze execution suggestion effect (for example, a specific freeze effect) in the effect notification unit,
The game in which the sub-control unit receives the first information from the main control unit is more effective than the game in which the sub-control unit has received the second information from the main control unit. It is a swivel type game machine characterized by being configured so as to be easily informed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C3)
Main control means (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub-control means (for example, sub-control board S) for controlling the production;
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game media within a predetermined number of ranges;
A bet switch (e.g., a max bet button) that is operated when betting game media stored in the storage means and is controlled by the main control means capable of betting a plurality of game media;
An effect notification section (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of notifying the effect;
A sub-operation member operable by the sub-control means (for example, sub-input button SB),
The main control means includes
Equipped with an internal lottery means for internal lottery,
The sub-control means is
In a situation where the plurality of reels are stopped, an operation effect (for example, a button effect) can be notified by the effect notification unit as an effect that prompts the player to operate the sub operation member,
When the sub operation member is operated in a situation where a predetermined gaming state and the operation effect are notified, the operation effect notification is ended and a specific effect (for example, a determination notification image) is displayed. Configured to inform,
In the predetermined game state, a re-game player has not been won in the game executed immediately before, one or more game media are stored in the storage means, and the number of bets in the game is When the bet switch is operated in a situation where the maximum bet number is less than the prescribed number and the operation effect is notified, the operation effect notification is terminated and the specific effect is not notified. It is configured as
When the bet switch is operated in a state where the predetermined game state is set and a re-game player is elected in the game executed immediately before and the operation effect is notified, The operation effect notification is continued, and the specific effect is not notified.
When the bet switch is operated in a situation where the predetermined gaming state is not stored in the storage means and the operation effect is notified, the operation effect is notified. Is configured not to notify the specific effect,
When the bet switch is operated in the predetermined gaming state, the bet number is the specified number, and the operation effect is notified, the operation effect notification is continued. A rotating type gaming machine is configured not to notify the specific effect.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C4)
A plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, reel M50);
A plurality of back lamps (for example, rotating backlight S30) provided inside the plurality of reels and capable of turning on and off;
An internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery,
As the symbols provided on the reel, at least symbols belonging to the first symbol group (for example, bell symbol) and symbols belonging to the second symbol group (for example, Replay A symbol, Replay B symbol) are included. ,
As a result that can be determined by the internal lottery means, at least a predetermined result (for example, winning-A1 in FIG. 10) and a specific result (for example, replay-A in FIG. 10) are included.
In the game for which the predetermined result has been determined, the combination of symbols belonging to the first symbol group is a predetermined straight line different from the effective line (for example, the left reel middle stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel middle stage in FIG. 187). There is a case where it stops at the symbol stop position of each reel on the line (for example, left reel lower stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel upper stage in FIG. 187),
In the game for which the specific result is determined, the symbol stop position of each reel on a specific straight line in which the combination of symbols belonging to the second symbol group is different from the effective line (for example, left in FIG. 187) (The lower reel, the middle reel, the upper right reel)
A back lamp effect for turning on or off a back lamp corresponding to each symbol stop position on the plurality of reels can be executed.
As a lighting mode of the back lamp effect, a first lighting mode (for example, a lighting mode corresponding to “bell stop display” shown in the upper part of FIG. 187) and a second lighting mode different from the first lighting mode are used. (For example, a lighting mode corresponding to the “replay stop display” shown in the lower part of FIG. 187),
When the back lamp effect is executed in the first lighting mode, the back lamp corresponding to each symbol stop position on the effective line is configured to be turned off at least once.
When the back lamp effect is executed in the second lighting mode, the back lamp corresponding to each symbol stop position on the effective line is configured to be turned off at least once.
In the game for which the predetermined result is determined, a back lamp effect can be executed in the first lighting mode, while a back lamp effect is not executed in the second lighting mode.
In the game for which the specific result is determined, a back lamp effect can be executed in the second lighting mode, while a back lamp effect is not executed in the first lighting mode. It is a spinning machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C5)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (for example, stop button M40), an effect display unit (for example, effect display device S40) capable of displaying effects;
An internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery,
By satisfying a predetermined condition, it can be controlled to a notification state (for example, an AT state),
Under the situation where the notification state is controlled, it is possible to specify the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined result in the game in which the predetermined result (for example, winning-A1 in FIG. 10) is determined by the internal lottery means. Information can be displayed on the production display section,
A privilege suggestion effect (for example, a continuous effect in FIG. 189), which is an effect that suggests whether or not a privilege is given to a player, which is executed over one or more games, can be executed.
As a result of the privilege suggestion effect, when it is suggested that a privilege is not given to the player, a background effect is configured to be displayed on the effect display unit in a specific manner.
In the game executed in the notification state, when the privilege suggesting effect is not executed and information capable of specifying the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed, the displayed stop switch When the stop switch is operated in an operation mode different from the above operation mode, the display brightness in the effect display unit can be reduced,
In the game executed in the notification state, when the privilege suggestion effect is executed and information capable of specifying the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed, the displayed stop switch When the stop switch is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode, the spinning-type game machine is configured so that the display brightness in the effect display unit does not decrease.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C6)
A speaker capable of outputting a production sound (for example, speaker D20);
An operation member A (for example, a sub input button) that can be operated by the player;
An operation member B (for example, a volume switch) that cannot be operated by the player,
The gaming state includes a normal state (for example, a low probability state), an advantageous state (for example, an AT state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state, and an error state that is a state in which an error is detected. Have at least
Based on the operation state of the operation member A, the volume level of the production sound output from the speaker is configured to be adjustable,
Based on the operation state of the operation member B, the volume level of the production sound output from the speaker is configured to be adjustable,
The volume level of the production sound output from the speaker is determined based on the operation state of the operation member A and the operation state of the operation member B.
As a production sound, it is possible to output a plurality of types of BGM repeatedly reproduced over one or more games.
The BGM output in the advantageous state is more easily selected than the BGM output in the normal state, and the BGM having a relatively fast tempo is easily selected.
In the situation where the volume level of the production sound is determined to be a predetermined volume, the volume of the advantageous state is configured to be relatively higher than the normal state.
In the situation where the volume level of the production sound is determined to be the predetermined volume, when an error occurs in the normal state and the error state occurs, an error occurs in the advantageous state and the error state In the case of becoming, the error sound that is the production sound at the time of error occurrence is output at the same volume,
The advantageous state is configured so that the output volume is relatively larger than the normal state,
The gaming machine is configured such that the output sound volume is relatively larger in the error state than in the advantageous state.

P Cylinder type game machine, DU front door (door)
D Door board, D10s Input acceptance sensor D20s First input sensor, D30s Second input sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Middle stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Checkout button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch D90 coin shooter, D100 blocker D130 upper panel, D140 lower panel D150 decoration lamp unit, D160 reel window D170 medal insertion slot, D180 start lamp D290 replay lamp, D300 insertable lamp D200 credit number display device, D210 insertion number display lamp D220 Bet button, D230 Medal tray D240 Release port, D250 Special game state display device D260 Key hole, D270 Discharge number display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device M main control board M20 setting key switch, M30 setting / reset button C main control chip, M50 reel M51 left reel, M52 middle reel M53 right reel, M60 AT counter M70 game interval minimum timer S sub control board S10 LED lamp S20 Speaker, S30 Revolving backlight S40 Production display device, SC Sub control chip E Power supply board, E10 Power switch H Medal payout device, H10s First payout sensor H20s Second payout sensor, H40 Hopper H50 Disc, H50a Disc rotation shaft H60 Game medal exit, H70 Discharge urging means H80 Hopper motor S50 Bet button lamp, S60 Stop button lamp K Spinner board, K10 Spinner motor K20 Spinner sensor IN Relay board, SB Sub input button K c High securing failure counter, YKc-1 Advantageous area remaining game counter FZt Freeze execution timer RU Reel unit, BU base, H62 discharge guide, H64 inclined surface HS medal auxiliary tank, BS screw, DE full detection electrode M55 1st End, M57 second end, M58 overlapped part, M59 cut MW reel frame, MO reel band

Claims (1)

Main processing to control the progress of the game,
Interrupt processing to be executed by interruption every predetermined time during the execution of the main processing,
Multiple reels,
Multiple stop switches,
Internal lottery means,
An information display section capable of displaying information;
With
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch, an instruction game for displaying information that can identify the advantageous operation mode on the information display unit,
Among the game sections, a normal section that does not execute the instruction game, and
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indicated game can be executed;
An advantageous section indicator that can take at least a notification mode that is an advantageous section and a notification mode that is a normal section;
An advantageous section flag that is turned on when the advantageous section is,
A differential counter that can measure the number of game values acquired in the advantageous section after a new transition to the advantageous section,
When the counter value of the difference sheet counter satisfies a predetermined end condition, it is configured to shift to a normal section,
As the main process,
Processing A for clearing the counter value of the difference sheet counter;
Process B for making the advantageous section indicator a notification mode that is the normal section;
And at least the process C for turning off the advantageous section flag from on to off can be executed,
When the transition is made from the advantageous section to the normal section, the spinning machine is configured to execute the process C after executing the process A and the process B.

Images